2011 Euclid Chemical Construction Products Catalog PDF

The ONE SOURCE for Concrete Repair SYSTEMS
Cathodic protection systems

perfecting your concrete... Epoxy based mortars
Fast setting mortars
inside and out Horizontal, vertical & underwater products
NSF approved repair mortars
Self-leveling toppings and underlayments
Bonding Agents & Adhesives
Urethane crack menders
Acrylic additives
All-weather polyester adhesive
Anti-corrosion coating Dry Shake Floor Hardeners
Light reflective flooring
Dowel bar adhesives
Metallic aggregate
Injection resins
Natural aggregate
Polyvinyl acetate primers
Non-oxidizing metallic aggregate
Segmental bridge adhesives
Structural concrete epoxy binders
Styrene butadiene copolymers High Performance Coatings
Chemical resistant amine & novolac epoxies

Elastomeric coatings
Curing and Curing & Sealing Compounds
Epoxy and polyurethane traffic deck systems
Brown tinted sealers for exposed aggregate
High build epoxy floor systems
Dissipating & removable curing compounds
Industrial tank liners
Exempt solvent cure and seals
Penetrating epoxy deck healers
Sealers for decorative concrete
UV resistant urethane topcoats
Solvent & water based cure and seals
Water-based acrylics

Grouting Products
Dry pack cementitious Masonry Admixtures
Cold weather accelerators
Epoxy grouts
Integral water repellents
High flow cementitious
Metallic aggregate grouts
Penetrating Sealers & Liquid Densifiers

Magnesium silicofluoride dustproofers
Joint Fillers & Sealants
2011 Construction Products

Migratory corrosion inhibitors
Epoxy control joint fillers
Penetrating epoxy sealers
Non-sag & self-leveling polyurethanes
Silane and siloxane water repellents
Pick-proof sealants
Silicate, sodium & lithium densifiers
Polysulfide sealants
Polyurea joint fillers and repair products

Miscellaneous Products
Concrete cleaners
Division 3, 7, 9, 31, & 32

Evaporation retarders
Form release agents
Rebar coatings
Waterproofing & Dampproofing The Euclid Chemical Company

19218 Redwood Rd. • Cleveland, OH 44110
Cementitious coatings
Phone: [216] 531-9222 • Toll-free: [800] 321-7628
Emulsified asphalt dampproofing
Fax: [216] 531-9596
Hydrophilic urethane grout
Hydrophobic urethane grouts
www.euclidchemical.com
Migratory crystalline systems
NSF approved coatings
Oxidizing metallic treatments
VANDEX waterproofing systems
The One Source Manufacturer for
the Concrete and Masonry Industry
For over 100 years, The Euclid Chemical Company has manufactured top quality products
formulated to meet the demands of the ever changing concrete and masonry construction
industry. Marketed under the Euco, Eucon, Dural®, Speed Crete®, Baracade®, Hey’Di, Increte, International Offices
Vandex, Aqua Dam, Sentinel, and Tamms brand names, The Euclid Chemical Company
serves the global building market as an ISO 9001:2000 supplier of specialty products and
CANADA CENTRAL AMERICA
support services.
Euclid Canada Euclid Costa Rica
Ontario, Canada San Jose, Costa Rica
The Euclid Chemical Company philosophy of “demonstratively better” is the foundation
Telephone: 416-747-7107 Telephone: 506-257-4373
upon which Euclid Chemical serves and supports its customers. Cutting edge research and
Facsimile: 416-747-9970 Facsimile: 506-257-4387
development, technical support and service, and an education-driven specification effort along www.euclidchemical.com www.toxement.com.co
with ongoing customer training provides Euclid Chemical customers with the best products and
support in the industry. Quebec, Canada MEXICO
Telephone: 450-465-2233 Euclid México
As part of our commitment to helping promote sustainable design, Euclid Chemical has Facsimile: 450-465-2140 México City, México
many products which contribute to Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED™) www.euclidchemical.com Telephone: 52-55-58649970
certification. Yet this commitment does not stop at the manufacturing level. Our employees Facsimile: 52-55-58649977
constantly strive to improve the social and environmental impact of company activities while SOUTH AMERICA www.eucomex.com.mx
achieving an economic balance. Euclid Toxement
Bogota, Colombia WEST INDIES/CARIBBEAN
Marketed through a network of over 1,200 distributors, ready-mix producers and masonry suppliers, Telephone: 57-1-368-3188 Ft. Pierce, Florida
Facsimile: 57-1-368-0887 Telephone: 305-986-2054
Euclid Chemical products are recognized as the industry standard throughout the world.
www.toxement.com.co Facsimile: 772-468-7415
For information regarding domestic and international availability, call 1-800-321-7628 or visit
Euclid CAVE
www.euclidchemical.com.
Santiago, Chile
Telephone: 56-2-270-9900
Facsimile: 56-2-270-9980
www.productoscave.com

Phone: [216] 531-9222 • Toll-free: [800] 321-7628
Fax: [216] 531-9596
The Euclid Chemical Company
ALPHABETICAL PRODUCT INDEX
Accelguard 80 449 Duralprep A.C. 17
Akkro-7T 25 Duraltex 57
Anchor Bolt Grouting Guide 3 Duraltex 1705 & 1707 75
Aqua-Cure VOX 157 Duraltex 1805 & 1807 77
Aquaseal Epoxy System 369 Duraltex Express 59
Aquastain HS 37 Duraltex UV 61
Aquastain T-96 39 Duraltop Flowable Mortar 295
Baracade M.E. 269 Duraltop Gel 347
Baracade Silane 40 271 Duraprime WB 107
Baracade Silane 40 IPA 273 E3-F 223
Baracade Silane 100 275 E3-G 225
Baracade WB 244 277 E3-HP 227
Blocktite Mortar Admixture 451 E3-X 229
BrownTone CS 129 Epoxy Grout Application Guide 221
BrownTone CS 350 131 Euco #452 Epoxy System 19
BrownTone VOX 159 Euco #452-P Epoxy 237
Cementitous Grout Application Guide 195 Euco #456S Mortar 333
Chemstop WB Regular, HD 279 Euco #512 VOX Epoxy Sealer 281
Concrete Blaster 431 Euco 700 239
Concrete Finisher 385 Euco 800 241
Concrete Surface Retarders 439 Euco AG 100 41
Concrete-Top Supreme 293 Euco Cable Grout 199
Decorative Floor Coatings Application Guide 55 Euco Cable Grout PTX 201
Dehydratine #75 383 Euco Clean & Strip 433
Diamond Clear 133 Euco Clean-Cut 255
Diamond Clear 350 135 Euco Concrete Floor Cleaner 435
Diamond Clear VOX 161 Euco Diamond Hard 259
Diamond-Plate 189 Euco Flat-Plate 175
Diamond-Plate Light Reflective 191 Euco Grip 461
Dry Pack Grout 197 Euco Iron Top 297
Dry Shake Application Guide 173 Euco Pre-Cast Grout 203
Dural 50 87 Euco QWIKjoint 200 245
Dural 50 LM 89 Euco QWIKjoint 300 247
Dural 100 7 Euco QWIKstitch 343
Dural 106 9 Euco Re-Cover 299
Dural 335 91 Euco Rock 205
Dural 340 NS & SL 235 Euco Solvent 437
Dural 365 33 Euco Tammoshield 65
Dural Aqua-Dam 401 Euco Tremie Grout 207
Dural Aqua-Dam 100 403 Euco Winter Admixture 453
Dural Aqua-Dam 200F 405 Euco Winter Mix Powder 455
Dural Aqua-Dam LV 407 Euco-Guard 100 283
Dural Aqua-Fil 409 Euco-Plate HD 177
Dural Epoxy Primer 105 Euco-Plate HD Light Reflective 179
Dural Fast Set Epoxy 11 Euco-Speed 301
Dural Mud Lock 411 Euco-Speed MP 303
Dural Pump Rinse 413 Eucobar 441
Duralbond 13 Eucocrete 305
Duralcrete Epoxy System 15 Eucocrete Supreme 307
Duraldeck System 99 Eucocure VOX 163
Duralflex Fastpatch 331 Eucolastic I 249
Duralkote 240 71 Eucolastic II 251
Duralkote 500 73 Eucolastic Primer 253
Duralprep 3020 289 Eucopatch 349
EucoPave 379 Super Diamond Clear VOX 169
Eucopoxy Injection Resin 21 Super Flo-Top 339
Eucopoxy Tufcoat 79 Super Floor Coat 153
Eucopoxy Tufcoat DBS 63 Super Rez-Seal 155
Eucopoxy Tufcoat VOX 81 Super Wall-Pro 43
Eucoshot 351 Surfhard 263
Eucosil 261 Surflex 181
Eucothane 83 Surflex E 183
EverClear 137 Surflex Light Reflective 185
EverClear 350 139 Surflex TR 187
EverClear VOX 165 Tammolastic 45
Express Repair 309 Tamms AG 400 47
Flex-Con 27 Tamms Cement Wash 357
Flexdeck System 97 Tamms Form and Pour 317
Flexocrete Epoxy System 23 Tamms H/P Primer 109
Flexolith 93 Tamms Masonry Primer 111
Flexolith Summer Grade 95 Tamms SBC 391
Flo-Top 335 Tamms SLU 341
Form and Pour CP 311 Tamms Structural Mortar 359
Form-Eze Natural 443 Tamms Stucco Finish 49
Formshield PURE 445 Tamms Thin Patch 319
Formshield WB 447 Tammsbar 459
Hey’Di K-11 397 Tammscoat 51
Hey’Di Powder X System 399 Tammscrete 361
Hi-Flow Grout 209 Tammsdeck System 101
Hi-Flow Metallic Grout 211 Tammsflex NS, SL 243
Industrial Coatings Application Guide 69 Tammsgrout Supreme 219
Integral Waterpeller 457 Tammspatch II 321
Iron Waterpeller 387 Tammsweld 31
Kurez DR VOX 115 Tamoseal 393
Kurez DR-100 117 Tamoseal Foundation Coating 395
Kurez RC 119 Thin-Top Supreme 323
Kurez RC-100 121 Ultra-Tex 325
Kurez RC-off 123 UltraGuard 265
Kurez VOX White Pigmented 125 UltraSil Li+ 267
Kurez W VOX 127 Vandex BB 75 415
Level Magic Lightweight 337 Vandex Cemelast 417
Linseed Oil Treatment 285 Vandex Construction Joint Tape 425
Lusterseal 350 141 Vandex Flextape 427
Manual Crack Injection Guide 5 Vandex Quickbinder 421
NC Grout 213 Vandex Super/Super White 423
NS Grout 215 Vandex Uni Mortar 1 ZSR 419
NS Metallic Grout 217 VersaSpeed 327
Polygrout 231 VersaSpeed LS 329
Rez-Seal 143 Verticoat 363
Rez-Seal AC-UV 145 Verticoat Supreme 365
SBR Latex 29 Weather-Guard 287
Sentinel Galvanic Anodes 375
Speed Crete 2028 313
Speed Crete Blue Line 371
Speed Crete Green Line 315
Speed Crete PM 353
Speed Crete Red Line 355
Speed Plug 389
Super Aqua-Cure VOX 167
Super Diamond Clear 147
Super Diamond Clear 350 149
Super Diamond Clear AC 151
CATEGORY INDEX
Bonding Agents & Adhesives Urethane Based

Epoxy Based Eucothane 83
Anchor Bolt Grouting Guide 3
Manual Crack Injection Guide 5 Coatings - Traffic Deck
Dural 100 7 Epoxy Based
Dural 106 9 Dural 50 87
Dural Fast Set Epoxy 11 Dural 50 LM 89
Duralbond 13 Dural 335 91
Duralcrete Epoxy System 15 Flexolith 93
Duralprep A.C. 17 Flexolith Summer Grade 95
Euco #452 Epoxy System 19
Eucopoxy Injection Resin 21 Epoxy-Urethane Based
Flexocrete Epoxy System 23 Flexdeck System 97
Latex Based Urethane Based

Akkro-7T 25 Duraldeck System 99
Flex-Con 27 Tammsdeck System 101
SBR Latex 29
Tammsweld 31 Coatings - Primers
Dural Epoxy Primer 105
Polyester Based Duraprime WB 107
Dural 365 33 Tamms H/P Primer 109
Tamms Masonry Primer 111
Coatings - Architectural Wall
Aquastain HS 37 Curing And Curing & Sealing Compounds
Aquastain T-96 39 Curing Compounds
Euco AG 100 41 Kurez DR VOX 115
Super Wall-Pro 43 Kurez DR-100 117
Tammolastic 45 Kurez RC 119
Tamms AG 400 47 Kurez RC-100 121
Tamms Stucco Finish 49 Kurez RC-off 123
Tammscoat 51 Kurez VOX White Pigmented 125
Kurez W VOX 127
Coatings - Decorative Floor
Epoxy Based Solvent Based Curing and Sealing
Application Guide 55 BrownTone CS 129
Duraltex 57 BrownTone CS 350 131
Duraltex Express 59 Diamond Clear 133
Duraltex UV 61 Diamond Clear 350 135
Eucopoxy Tufcoat DBS 63 EverClear 137
EverClear 350 139
Urethane Based Lusterseal 350 141
Euco Tammoshield 65 Rez-Seal 143
Rez-Seal AC-UV 145
Coatings - Industrial Super Diamond Clear 147
Epoxy Based Super Diamond Clear 350 149
Application Guide 69 Super Diamond Clear AC 151
Duralkote 240 71 Super Floor Coat 153
Duralkote 500 73 Super Rez-Seal 155
Duraltex 1705 & 1707 75
Duraltex 1805 & 1807 77 Water Based Curing and Sealing
Eucopoxy Tufcoat 79 Aqua-Cure VOX 157
Eucopoxy Tufcoat VOX 81 BrownTone VOX 159
Diamond Clear VOX 161
Eucocure VOX 163 Polyurethane Sealants
EverClear VOX 165 Eucolastic I 249
Super Aqua-Cure VOX 167 Eucolastic II 251
Super Diamond Clear VOX 169 Eucolastic Primer 253
Dry Shake Floor Hardeners Stain Prevention Film

Metallic Aggregate Euco Clean-Cut 255
Dry Shake Application Guide 173
Euco Flat-Plate 175 Penetrating Sealers/Liquid Densifiers
Euco-Plate HD 177 Liquid Densifiers
Euco-Plate HD Light Reflective 179 Euco Diamond Hard 259
Eucosil 261
Natural Aggregate Surfhard 263
Surflex 181 UltraGuard 265
Surflex E 183 UltraSil Li+ 267
Surflex Light Reflective 185
Surflex TR 187 Penetrating Sealers
Baracade M.E. 269
Non-Oxidizing Metallic Aggregate Baracade Silane 40 271
Diamond-Plate 189 Baracade Silane 40 IPA 273
Diamond-Plate Light Reflective 191 Baracade Silane 100 275
Baracade WB 244 277
Grouts Chemstop WB Regular, HD 279
Cementitious Euco #512 VOX Epoxy Sealer 281
Cementitous Grout Application Guide 195 Euco-Guard 100 283
Dry Pack Grout 197 Linseed Oil Treatment 285
Euco Cable Grout 199 Weather-Guard 287
Euco Cable Grout PTX 201
Euco Pre-Cast Grout 203 Specialty Sealers
Euco Rock 205 Duralprep 3020 289
Euco Tremie Grout 207
Hi-Flow Grout 209 Repair - Horizontal
Hi-Flow Metallic Grout 211 Cementitious Mortars
NC Grout 213 Concrete-Top Supreme 293
NS Grout 215 Duraltop Flowable Mortar 295
NS Metallic Grout 217 Euco Iron Top 297
Tammsgrout Supreme 219 Euco Re-Cover 299
Euco-Speed 301
Epoxy Euco-Speed MP 303
Epoxy Grout Application Guide 221 Eucocrete 305
E3-F 223 Eucocrete Supreme 307
E3-G 225 Express Repair 309
E3-HP 227 Form and Pour CP 311
E3-X 229 Speed Crete 2028 313
Polygrout 231 Speed Crete Green Line 315
Tamms Form and Pour 317
Joint Fillers & Sealants Tamms Thin Patch 319
Epoxy Joint Fillers and Sealants Tammspatch II 321
Dural 340 NS & SL 235 Thin-Top Supreme 323
Euco #452-P Epoxy 237 Ultra-Tex 325
Euco 700 239 VersaSpeed 327
Euco 800 241 VersaSpeed LS 329
Polysulfide Sealants Epoxy Mortars

Tammsflex NS, SL 243 Duralflex Fastpatch 331
Euco #456S Mortar 333
Polyurea Joint Fillers
Euco QWIKjoint 200 245
Self Leveling Underlayments VANDEX SYSTEMS
Flo-Top 335 Cementitious Coatings
Level Magic Lightweight 337 Vandex BB 75 415
Super Flo-Top 339 Vandex Cemelast 417
Tamms SLU 341
Cementitious Repair Mortar
Urethane Crack Mender Vandex Uni Mortar 1 ZSR 419
Euco QWIKstitch 343
Cementitious Waterproofing
Repair - Vertical/Overhead Vandex Quickbinder 421
Cementitious Mortars Vandex Super/Super White 423
Duraltop Gel 347
Eucopatch 349 Joint & Crack Tapes
Eucoshot 351 Vandex Construction Joint Tape 425
Speed Crete PM 353 Vandex Flextape 427
Tamms Cement Wash 357 Miscellaneous Products
Tamms Structural Mortar 359 Cleaners
Tammscrete 361 Concrete Blaster 431
Verticoat 363 Euco Clean & Strip 433
Verticoat Supreme 365 Euco Concrete Floor Cleaner 435
Euco Solvent 437
Repair - Underwater
Aquaseal Epoxy System 369 Evaporation Retarders
Speed Crete Blue Line 371 Concrete Surface Retarders 439
Eucobar 441
Cathodic Protection
Sentinel Galvanic Anodes 375 Form Release Agents
Form-Eze Natural 443
Semi-Flexible Pavement Formshield PURE 445
EucoPave 379 Formshield WB 447
Waterproofing & Dampproofing Mortar Admixtures

Asphaltic Dampproofing Accelguard 80 449
Dehydratine #75 383 Blocktite Mortar Admixture 451
Euco Winter Admixture 453
Cementitious Systems Euco Winter Mix Powder 455
Concrete Finisher 385 Integral Waterpeller 457
Iron Waterpeller 387
Speed Plug 389 Rebar Coating
Tamms SBC 391 Tammsbar 459
Tamoseal 393
Tamoseal Foundation Coating 395 Slip-Resistant Additive
Euco Grip 461
Crystalline Waterproofing
Hey’Di K-11 397
Hey’Di Powder X System 399
Urethane – Chemical Grouts

Dural Aqua-Dam 401
Dural Aqua-Dam 100 403
Dural Aqua-Dam 200F 405
Dural Aqua-Dam LV 407
Dural Aqua-Fil 409
Dural Mud Lock 411
Dural Pump Rinse 413
MASTER FORMAT INDEX
Division 03 00 00 - Concrete 03 05 00 Common Work for Concrete

03 01 00 Maintenance of Concrete Bonding Agents and Adhesives
Concrete Cleaners 03 05 00 Akkro-7T 25
03 01 30.51 Concrete Blaster 431 35 01 00 Aquaseal Epoxy System (Underwater) 369
03 01 30.51 Euco Clean and Strip 433 03 05 00 Dural 100 7
03 01 30.51 Euco Concrete Floor Cleaner 435 03 05 00 Dural 106 9
03 01 30.51 Euco Solvent 437 03 05 00 Dural 365 33
03 05 00 Dural Fast Set Epoxy 11
Concrete Repair: Horizontal 03 05 00 Duralbond 13
03 01 30.61 Concrete-Top Supreme 293 03 05 00 Duralcrete Epoxy System 15
03 01 30.71 Duralflex Fastpatch 331 03 05 00 Duralprep A.C. 17
03 01 30.71 Duraltop Flowable Mortar 295 03 05 00 Euco #452 Epoxy System 19
03 01 30.71 Euco #456S Mortar 333 03 64 23 Eucopoxy Injection Resin 21
03 53 16.00 Euco IronTop 297 03 05 00 Flex-Con 27
03 01 30.71 Euco QWIKstitch 343 03 05 00 Flexocrete Epoxy System 23
03 01 30.61 Euco Re-Cover 299 03 05 00 SBR Latex 29
03 01 30.71 Euco-Speed 301 03 05 00 Tammsweld 31
03 01 30.71 Euco-Speed MP 303
03 01 30.71 Eucocrete 305 03 10 00 Concrete Forming & Accessories
03 01 30.71 Eucocrete Supreme 307 Form Release Agents
03 01 30.71 Express Repair 309 03 11 00 Form-Eze Natural 443
03 01 30.71 Form and Pour CP 311 03 11 00 Formshield PURE 445
03 01 30.71 Speed Crete 2028 313 03 11 00 Formshield WB 447
03 01 30.71 Speed Crete Green Line 315
03 01 30.71 Tamms Form and Pour 317 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing
03 01 30.71 Tamms Thin Patch 319 Reinforcing Steel Treatments
03 01 30.71 Tammspatch II 321 03 21 00 Duralprep 3020 289
03 01 30.61 Thin-Top Supreme 323 03 21 00 Sentinel Galvanic Anodes 375
03 01 30.61 Ultra-Tex 325 03 21 16 Tammsbar 459
03 01 30.71 VersaSpeed 327
03 01 30.71 VersaSpeed LS 329 03 35 00 Concrete Finishing
Liquid Densifiers
Concrete Repair: Vertical and Overhead 03 35 00 Euco Diamond Hard 259
03 01 30.71 Duraltop Gel 347 03 35 00 Eucosil 261
03 01 30.71 Eucopatch 349 03 35 00 Surfhard 263
35 01 00.00 Speed Crete Blue Line (Underwater) 371 03 35 00 UltraGuard 265
03 01 30.71 Speed Crete PM 353 03 35 00 UltraSil Li+ 267
03 01 30.71 Speed Crete Red Line 355
03 01 30.71 Speed Plug 389 Dry Shake Floor Hardeners
03 01 30.61 Tamms Cement Wash 357 03 35 16 Diamond-Plate 189
03 01 30.61 Tammscrete 361 03 35 16 Diamond-Plate Light Reflective 191
03 01 30.71 Vandex Uni Mortar 1 ZSR 419 03 35 16 Euco Flat-Plate 175
03 01 30.71 Verticoat 363 03 35 16 Euco-Plate HD 177
03 01 30.71 Verticoat Supreme 365 03 35 16 Euco-Plate HD Light Reflective 179
03 35 16 Surflex 171
03 35 16 Surflex E 183 03 60 00 Grouting
03 35 16 Surflex Light Reflective 185 Cementitious, Chemical, and Epoxy Grouts
03 35 16 Surflex TR 187 03 61 13 Dry Pack Grout 197
03 64 00 Dural Aqua-Dam 401
Surface and Evaporation Retarders 03 64 00 Dural Aqua-Dam 100 403
03 35 23 Concrete Surface Retarders 439 03 64 00 Dural Aqua-Dam 200F 405
03 35 00 Eucobar 441 03 64 00 Dural Aqua-Dam LV 407
03 64 00 Dural Aqua-Fil 409
03 37 00 Specialty Placed Concrete 03 63 00 E3-F 223
Shotcrete & Pneumatically Placed Concrete 03 63 00 E -G
3
225
03 37 13 Eucoshot 351 03 63 00 E3-HP 227
03 37 19 Tamms Structural Mortar 359 03 63 00 E3-X 229
03 62 13 Euco Cable Grout 199
03 39 00 Concrete Curing 03 62 13 Euco Cable Grout PTX 201
Solvent and Water Based Compounds 03 62 13 Euco Pre-Cast Grout 203
03 39 23 Aqua-Cure VOX 157 03 62 13 Euco Rock 205
03 39 23 BrownTone CS 129 03 62 13 Euco Tremie Grout 207
03 39 23 BrownTone CS 350 131 03 62 13 Hi-Flow Grout 209
03 39 23 BrownTone VOX 159 03 62 16 Hi-Flow Metallic Grout 211
03 39 23 Diamond Clear 133 03 62 13 NC Grout 213
03 39 23 Diamond Clear 350 135 03 62 13 NS Grout 215
03 39 23 Diamond Clear VOX 161 03 62 16 NS Metallic Grout 217
03 39 23 Euco Grip 461 03 64 00 Polygrout 231
03 39 23 Eucocure VOX 163 03 62 13 Tammsgrout Supreme 219
03 39 23 EverClear 137
03 39 23 EverClear 350 139 Division 4 - Masonry
03 39 23 EverClear VOX 165 04 05 13 Masonry Mortaring
03 39 23 Kurez DR VOX 115 Mortar Admixtures
03 39 23 Kurez DR-100 117 04 05 13 Accelguard 80 449
03 39 23 Kurez RC 119 04 05 13 Blocktite Mortar Admixture 451
03 39 23 Kurez RC-100 121 04 05 13 Euco Winter Admixture 453
03 39 23 Kurez RC-off 123 04 05 13 Euco Winter Mix Powder 455
03 39 23 Kurez VOX White Pigmented 125 04 05 13 Integral Waterpeller 457
03 39 23 Kurez W VOX 127
03 39 23 LusterSeal 350 141 Division 7 - Thermal & Moisture Protection
03 39 23 Rez-Seal 143 07 10 00 Dampproofing and Waterproofing
03 39 23 Rez-Seal AC-UV 145 Cementitious and Fluid Applied
03 39 23 Super Aqua-Cure VOX 167 07 11 16 Concrete Finisher 385
03 39 23 Super Diamond Clear 147 07 11 13 Dehydratine #75 383
03 39 23 Super Diamond Clear 350 149 07 16 16 Hey’Di K-11 397
03 39 23 Super Diamond Clear AC 151 07 16 16 Hey’Di Powder X System 399
03 39 23 Super Diamond Clear VOX 169 07 16 19 Iron Waterpeller 387
03 39 23 Super Floor Coat 153 07 16 13 Tamms SBC 391
03 39 23 Super Rez-Seal 155 07 16 13 Tamoseal 393
07 16 13 Tamoseal Foundation Coating 395
03 54 00 Cast Underlayments 07 16 13 Vandex BB 75 415
Self-Leveling Underlayments 07 16 13 Vandex Cemelast 417
03 54 13 Flo-Top 335 07 16 16 Vandex Construction Joint Tape 425
03 54 13 Level Magic Lightweight 337 07 16 16 Vandex Flextape 427
03 54 16 Super Flo-Top 339 07 16 16 Vandex Quickbinder 421
03 54 16 Tamms SLU 341 07 16 16 Vandex Super/Super White 423
07 18 00 Traffic Coatings Graffiti-Resistant Coatings
Epoxy and Polyurethane Systems 09 96 23 Euco AG 100 41
03 64 23 Dural 50 87 09 96 23 Tamms AG 400 47
03 64 23 Dural 50 LM 89
03 64 23 Dural 335 91 Chemical-Resistant Coatings
07 18 16 Duraldeck System 99 09 96 35 Euco Tammoshield 65
07 18 16 Flexdeck System 97 09 96 35 Eucothane 83
07 18 16 Flexolith 93 09 96 35 Duraltex 1705, 1707 75
07 18 16 Flexolith Summer Grade 95 09 96 35 Duraltex 1805, 1807 77
07 18 13 Tammsdeck System 101
Elastomeric Coatings
07 19 00 Water Repellents 09 96 53 Super Wall-Pro 43
Silane and Siloxane Treatments 09 96 53 Tammolastic 45
07 19 23 Baracade M.E. 269 09 96 53 Tammscoat 51
07 19 16 Baracade Silane 40 271
07 19 16 Baracade Silane 40 IPA 273 Epoxy Coatings
07 19 16 Baracade Silane 100 275 09 96 56 Duralkote 240 71
07 19 00 Baracade WB 244 277 09 96 56 Duralkote 500 73
07 19 00 Chemstop WB Regular, HD 279 09 96 56 Duraltex 57
03 64 23 Euco #512 VOX Epoxy Sealer 281 09 96 56 Duraltex Express 59
07 19 23 Euco-Guard 100 283 09 96 56 Duraltex UV 61
07 19 00 Linseed Oil Treatment 285 09 96 56 Eucopoxy Tufcoat 79
07 19 23 Weather-Guard 287 09 96 56 Eucopoxy Tufcoat DBS 63
09 96 56 Eucopoxy Tufcoat VOX 81
07 92 00 Joint Sealants
Epoxy, Polyurea, and Polyurethane Sealants Cementitious Coatings
07 92 00 Euco Clean-Cut 255 09 97 26 Tamms Stucco Finish 49
07 92 13 Eucolastic I 249
07 92 13 Eucolastic II 251 Division 11 - EQUIPMENT
07 92 13 Eucolastic Primer 253 Maintenance of Commerical Equipment
07 92 13 Tammsflex NS, SL 243 11 01 20 Dural Pump Rinse 413
07 92 16 Dural 340 NS, SL 235
07 92 16 Euco #452-P Epoxy System 237 DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
07 92 16 Euco 700 239 Soil Stabilization
07 92 16 Euco 800 241 31 32 23 Dural Mud Lock 411
07 92 16 Euco QWIKjoint 200 245

DIVISION 32 - eXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
07 92 16 Euco QWIKjoint 300 247
Semi-Flexible Paving

Division 9 - Finishes 32 12 19 EucoPave 379
09 90 00 Painting and Coating

Staining and Transparent Finishing
09 93 00 Aquastain HS 37
09 93 00 Aquastain T-96 39
Primers
09 96 00 Dural Epoxy Primer 105
09 96 00 Duraprime WB 107
09 96 00 Tamms H/P Primer 109
09 96 00 Tamms Masonry Primer 111
Epoxy Based
Anchor Bolt Grouting Guide 3
Manual Crack Injection Guide 5
Dural 100 7
Dural 106 9
Dural Fast Set Epoxy 11
Duralbond 13
Duralcrete Epoxy System 15
Duralprep A.C. 17
Euco #452 Epoxy System 19
Eucopoxy Injection Resin 21
Flexocrete Epoxy System 23
Latex Based
Akkro-7T 25
Flex-Con 27
SBR Latex 29
Tammsweld 31
Polyester Based
Dural 365 33
Epoxy Products Usage Chart

DOWEL & CRACK REPAIR ASTM C-881
BONDING REPAIR
ANCHOR
ADHESIVE MORTAR
ADHESIVE Capping Injectable Gravity
Type(s) Grade Class(es)
Gel Feed
DURAL 100 VI 3 DEF
DURAL 106 VI 3 DE
DURAL FAST
H I, IV 1 ABC
SET LV
DURAL FAST
H HV I, IV 2 ABC
SET MV
DURAL FAST
HV V I, IV 3 ABC
SET GEL
DURALBOND H I, II 2 BC
DURALCRETE LV I, IV 1 BC
DURALCRETE MV H HV I, II, IV, V 2 BC
DURALCRETE GEL HV V I, II, IV, V 3 BC
EUCO #452 LV I, II, IV, V 1 BC
EUCO #452 MV H HV I, II, IV, V 2 BC
EUCO #452 GEL HV V I, II, IV, V 3 BC
EUCOPOXY
I 1 BC
INJECTION RESIN
FLEXOCRETE LV H III 1 BC
FLEXOCRETE MV HV III 2 BC
FLEXOCRETE GEL HV V III 3 BC
H = Horizontal V = Vertical/Overhead
ANCHOR BOLT GROUTING GUIDE
Bonding Agents and Adhesives

Introduction
This guide addresses proper procedures for the anchoring of embedments (bolts, threaded rod,
rebar) into concrete.
The Euclid Chemical Company manufactures a range of ASTM C881 epoxy resin construction
adhesives used to adhere embedments into hardened portland cement concrete in new
construction, rehabilitation, and maintenance applications. These anchor systems develop their
holding capacities by the bonding of the adhesive to both the anchor and the concrete at the wall
of a pre-drilled hole.
Typically, a structural engineer evaluates several factors before proceeding with an anchor bolt
grout project. Anchor strength and long term performance are dependent on a variety of factors.
Some factors to be considered include material strength, hole diameter and drilling system used,
embedment length, annular gap between the anchor and the drilled hole, concrete strength and
condition, type and direction of load application, spacing of anchors and edges, temperature,
hole cleaning, mode of failure of the anchor system, environmental conditions such as moisture
and/or subsequent chemical attack. In critical applications it is often recommended that a site
test take place to verify performance.
Since every project is unique such evaluation is beyond the scope of this document. This
document is meant to provide general guidelines for anchor bolt grouting.
Once these factors have been taken into consideration the procedures for installing the anchors
ANCHOR BOLT GROUTING GUIDE

is generally straightforward.
Procedure
The steps to properly install anchors using Euclid Chemical epoxy adhesives are as follows:
Step 1 Technical Information

Drill a hole the diameter size and depth of embedment required.
Typically the diameter of the hole should be no larger than ¼
inch (6 mm) wider than the diameter of the anchor. For good
quality concrete the hole depth is generally 10-15 times the
diameter of the embedded anchor.
Step 2
Scrub the hole with a stiff bristle brush to remove all dust, dirt,
debris or any other bond-inhibiting material from the drilling
procedure.

Phone: [216] 531-9222 • Toll-free: [800] 321-7628 • Fax: [216] 531-9596
3
Step 3
Blow the hole clean with oil-free compressed air, brush, and
blow it clean again. Holes should be clean and sound.
Step 4
Mix the epoxy in accordance with the technical data sheet of the product being used. If setting
anchors in horizontal slabs you may use a LV, MV, or GEL epoxy formulation. If setting anchors
into a wall you must use a GEL epoxy. Also, select your epoxy formulation based upon ambient
and surface temperatures, setting times, etc. Condition epoxies prior to use when working in
cold or hot environments.
Pre-packaged dual cartridge kits are available for the utmost convenience. If using dual cartridge
kits, place the kit in a dual plunger dispensing gun and remove end caps from both sides of the
cartridge. Attach a static mixer nozzle using the reusable threaded retaining nut. Keep cartridge
upright until use. Bleed off any air inside cartridge by slightly squeezing handle. Dispense the
resins by working the trigger of the gun. Dispense and discard into a waste container a small
amount to start the material mixing (2-4 trigger pulls or until uniform mixture is attained). Proceed
with application. Do not point mixer upward after material is flowing. To stop dispensing, release
pressure by pressing the lever on the gun and pulling back the plungers. When application is
complete, remove the used static mixer and dispose of properly. A new static mixer should be
used for each cartridge. Bleed off a few drops of material to clear away any mixed product. Clean
the threaded area and openings and replace the end caps on the cartridge. Loosely replace the
locking nut.
Step 5
Place the mixed resin adhesive in the rear of
the prepared drilled anchor bolt hole. Avoid
creating air pockets within the hole. If using
a static mixer put the nozzle of the mixer to
the back of the hole and slowly withdraw the
nozzle as the material is dispensed. Fill to
approximately ½ the hole depth.
Step 6
Insert the anchor slowly with a twisting motion into the hole
forcing it to the bottom until the resin adhesive flows to the top.
Twist the anchor to ensure intimate contact and establish bond.
Step 7
Allow the epoxy adhesive to cure undisturbed for the specified time prior to applying any load.
ESTIMATING MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS: If you would like help estimating the amount of
material needed for your project, please see the estimating charts located in the back of our
Construction Products catalog, or contact your local Euclid Chemical representative.
Rev. 6.11
WARRANTY: The Euclid Chemical Company (“Euclid”) solely and expressly warrants that its products shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship for one (1) year from the date of purchase. Unless authorized
in writing by an officer of Euclid, no other representations or statements made by Euclid or its representatives, in writing or orally, shall alter this warranty. EUCLID MAKES NO WARRANTIES, IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE,
AS TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ORDINARY OR PARTICULAR PURPOSES OF ITS PRODUCTS AND EXCLUDES THE SAME. If any Euclid product fails to conform with this warranty, Euclid will replace the
product at no cost to Buyer. Replacement of any product shall be the sole and exclusive remedy available and buyer shall have no claim for incidental or consequential damages. Any warranty claim must be made within
one (1) year from the date of the claimed breach. Euclid does not authorize anyone on its behalf to make any written or oral statements which in any way alter Euclid’s installation information or instructions in its product
literature or on its packaging labels. Any installation of Euclid products which fails to conform with such installation information or instructions shall void this warranty. Product demonstrations, if any, are done for illustrative
purposes only and do not constitute a warranty or warranty alteration of any kind. Buyer shall be solely responsible for determining the suitability of Euclid’s products for the Buyer’s intended purposes.
4
Suggested Procedure for Epoxy Crack Injection
Using Cartridges

Surface Preparation
Concrete to be injected with epoxy must be clean, dry and structurally sound. Use a wire brush
or a wire wheel on a grinder to mechanically clean and open the face of the crack to be injected.
Ensure that there is no dust or debris left behind. If the crack is narrow at the surface of the
concrete, it is common practice to drill a small pilot hole to create a “freeway” for the epoxy to travel
into the crack.
Surface Port Installation

Surface ports are an economical and quick way to introduce epoxy into a crack without having to
drill numerous ports or packers into the concrete. The surface ports are mounted to the face of
the crack using a fast setting paste epoxy (DURAL FAST SET GEL). The opening in the base of
these surface ports is centered over the crack, or the pilot holes that have been created. The rule
of thumb on spacing surface ports is based on the thickness of the concrete that is to be injected.
Typically, the ports are spaced apart as far as the concrete is thick (for example: 8” (20 cm) thick
wall, space the ports 8” (20 cm) apart).
SUGGESTED PROCEDURE FOR EPOXY CRACK

Cap Sealing
Once the surface ports have been set, “butter” the remaining face of the crack with the same fast
INJECTION USING CARTRIDGES

setting paste epoxy (DURAL FAST SET GEL). This can be done with a spatula or a margin trowel.
Once completed, the only way into and out of the crack is directly through the ports. Wait until the
paste epoxy has fully hardened before injecting. You don’t want to run the risk of blowing out your
seal, even if you are using hand tools to inject.
Crack Injection
Starting with the lowest point of the crack, place the tip of the static mixing nozzle of the low
viscosity epoxy cartridge (DURAL FAST SET LV) into the surface point and use constant, steady
Technical Information
pressure on the hand dispensing tool to inject the epoxy through the port, into the crack. Continue
to slowly inject material into the port until the low viscosity epoxy starts to emerge from the next
port directly above. Remove the mixing nozzle from the first port, place the cap on the port, and
insert the mixing nozzle into the second surface port, from which the epoxy has just emerged.
Continue moving up the crack until epoxy emerges from the surface port located at the top of the
crack. By this time, you should have a feel for how much epoxy the crack is taking. Inject a small
amount of epoxy into the top port to insure the crack is completely filled to the top. Cap the last
port and allow sufficient time for the epoxy to cure inside of the concrete.
Completion
After allowing the epoxy to cure inside of the crack, the surface ports can now be knocked off with
a hammer, or ground off with a grinder and abrasive disk. The paste epoxy that was used to seal
the crack can now be ground flush with the surface of the concrete. The repair is now made! It can
be left as is, or an aesthetically pleasing treatment can be applied over the repair area.

5
Rev. 6.11
6
DURAL 100
Precast Segmental Epoxy Adhesive

Description
DURAL 100 is a two component, 100% solids, moisture insensitive adhesive for use as a bonding agent for
precast segmental box girders, bridge and other segmental construction. DURAL 100 is a non-sag paste which
is available in 3 formulations that cover a wide range of temperature applications.
Class Temperature Application Range
F 80 - 115°F (27 - 46°C)
E 60 - 85°F (16 - 29°C)
D 40 - 65°F (4 - 18°C)
Property Class f class e class d

Temperature Range 80 - 115°F (27 - 46°C) 60 - 85°F (16 - 29°C) 40 - 65°F (4 - 18°C)
Sag Resistance at High
Non-Sag Non-Sag Non-Sag
Temperature
Gel Time at High Temperature 34 minutes 32 minutes 35 minutes
Compressive Yield 24 hours: 3,000 psi (21 MPa) 24 hours: 4,100 psi (28 MPa) 24 hours: 2,300 psi (16 MPa)
ASTM D 695 48 hours: 6,300 psi (43 MPa) 48 hours: 6,800 psi (47 MPa) 48 hours: 6,000 psi (41 MPa)
Heat Deflection
Temperature, Minimum 122°F (50°C) 122°F (50°C) 122°F (50°C)
ASTM D 648
Open Contact Time at High
Dural 100
60 minutes 60 minutes 60 minutes
Temperature
Compressive Shear Strength
at low temperature 1,170 psi (8 MPa) 1,270 psi (8.7 MPa) 1,120 psi (7.7 MPa)
at high temperature 1,450 psi (10 MPa) 1,620 psi (11 MPa) 1,300 psi (9 MPa)
Properties shown were determined at laboratory conditions.
Packaging
DURAL 100 (all formulations) is available in 3 gal (11.4 L) units. DURAL 100 Class E and F are also available in
cases of 4/1 gal (3.78 L) units.
Shelf Life
2 years in original, unopened container.
Master Format #:
Specifications/Compliances
03 05 00
Meets the requirements of ASTM C881-90 Type VI, Grade 3

Coverage Rates
12 - 13 ft²/gal (0.29 - 0.32 m2/L) at 1/8 inch (3 mm) thickness
Coverage rates are approximate and for estimating purposes only.
Surface temperature, texture and porosity will determine actual material requirements.

7
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: The surface must be dry and structurally sound. The substrate must also be free of all
dust, dirt, grease, oil, coatings, laitance and other contaminants that would interfere with proper adhesion. The
surface should be lightly sand blasted, shot blasted or water blasted with a minimum pressure of 5,000 psi
(34.5 MPa). Wet surfaces should be dried to a saturated surface dry condition. Remove all visible water with a
heater or oil-less air blast. Any dust that may have accumulated between cleaning and application of DURAL
100 should be removed by oil-less air blast.
Mixing: Do not begin mixing until the segment is prepared for installation. Add all of Part B to Part A and mix
thoroughly with a slow speed motor and “jiffy” mixer. Scrape the sides and the bottom while mixing. Do not
aerate the mix. Mix for a minimum of 3 minutes. Mix complete units only; do not thin.
Application: Use a trowel, brush, mop or gloved hand to apply DURAL 100 on both segments to be joined.
Apply at minimum and uniform thickness of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). A visible bead line must be observed on all
exposed contact areas. DURAL 100 should be applied completely around the pre-stressing ducts but not within
3/8 inch (9.5 mm) of the ducts. Use DURAL 100 Class D, E or F depending on the temperature range prevailing
at the time of installation. DURAL 100 should be applied within the first half of its gel time (approx. 15 minutes).
Erection, assembly and temporary post tensioning must be completed within the contact time of DURAL 100,
which is approximately 60 minutes from the time the epoxy is mixed. The segments should be joined with a
minimum provisional stress of 30 psi (0.21 MPa) across the entire cross section. If the segments have not been
joined within 70% of the contact (open) time, the operation should be discontinued, the DURAL 100 removed
and fresh DURAL 100 applied. After the segments have been joined, excess DURAL 100 should be removed
from the joints, where accessible. Tendon ducts should be swabbed immediately after stressing to remove or
smooth out any epoxy in the conduit and to seal any pockets or air bubble holes that may have formed at the
joint.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment immediately following use with EUCO SOLVENT, xylene or acetone. Clean drips
and spills while still wet with the same solvent. Dried DURAL 100 will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
Precautions/Limitations
• Do not thin DURAL 100.
• Apply to dry concrete surfaces.
• Do not store at temperatures below 50°F (10°C) or above 90°F (32°C).
• Do not apply to frozen or frost filled substrates or when the temperature is below 40°F (4°C) or expected to fall
below that temperature within 24 hours.
• Apply the correct formulation of DURAL 100 depending on the air temperature at the time of installation.
• Not intended for areas subjected to prolonged or strong chemical attack.
• Protect from moisture.
• In all cases, consult the Material Safety Data Sheet before use.
Rev. 6.11
8
DURAL 106
Slow Set Segmental Precast Adhesive

Description
DURAL 106 is a two component, 100% solids, moisture insensitive adhesive for use as a bonding agent for
precast segmental box girders, bridge and other segmental construction. DURAL 106 is a non-sag paste which
provides a 6 hour contact time before joining.
Class Temperature Application Range
D 40 - 65°F (4 - 18°C)
E 60 - 90°F (16 - 32°C)
F 85 - 115°F (29 - 46°C)
Property class d class e class F

Temperature Range 40 - 65°F (4 - 18°C) 60 - 90°F (16 - 32°C) 85 - 115°F (29 - 46°C)
Sag Resistance at High
Non-Sag Non-Sag Non-Sag
Temperature
Gel Time at High Temperature 4 hours 3 hours 40 minutes 5 hours
Compressive Yield 7 days: 11,390 psi (79 MPa) 7 days: 6,023 psi (42 MPa) 7 days: 3,220 psi (22 MPa)
ASTM D 695 14 days: 12,350 psi (85 MPa) 14 days: 8,510 psi (59 MPa) 14 days: 6,150 psi (42 MPa)
Heat Deflection
Temperature, 14 days >140°F (60°C) >140°F (60°C) >154°F (66°C)
ASTM D 648
Open Contact Time at
DURAL 106
6 hours 6 hours 6 hours
High Temperature
Bond Strength, 14 days
> 3,710 psi (26 MPa) > 5,065 psi (35 MPa) >3,810 psi (26 MPa)
ASTM C 882
Contact Strength 1,100 psi (8 MPa) 3,623 psi (25 MPa) 1,380 psi (6 MPa)
ASTM C 882 at 2 days at 14 days at 14 days
Packaging
DURAL 106 (Class D, E, and F) is available in 3 gal (11.4 L) pre-measured kits.
Shelf Life
Master Format #:
03 05 00
Meets the requirements of Florida DOT Section 453.
Coverage Rates
12 - 13 ft²/gal (0.29 - 0.32 m2/L) at 1/8 inch (3 mm) thickness
Coverage rates are approximate and for estimating purposes only.
Surface temperature, texture and porosity will determine actual material requirements.

9
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: The surface must be dry and structurally sound. The substrate must also be free of all
dust, dirt grease, oil, coatings, laitance and other contaminants that would interfere with proper adhesion. The
surface should be lightly sand blasted, shot blasted or water blasted with a minimum pressure of 5,000 psi
(34.5 MPa). Wet surfaces should be dried to a saturated surface dry condition. Remove all visible water with a
heater or oil-less air blast. Any dust that may have accumulated between cleaning and application of DURAL
106 should be removed by oil-less air blast.
Mixing: Do not begin mixing until the segment is prepared for installation. Add all of Part B to Part A and mix
thoroughly with a slow speed motor and “jiffy” mixer. Scrape the sides and the bottom while mixing. Do not
aerate the mix. Mix for a minimum of 3 minutes or until uniform color with no streaks. Mix complete units only
and do not thin the mix.
Application: Use a trowel, brush, mop or gloved hand to apply DURAL 106 on both segments to be joined.
Apply at minimum and uniform thickness of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). A visible bead line must be observed on all
exposed contact areas. DURAL 106 should be applied completely around the pre-stressing ducts but not
within 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) of the ducts. DURAL 106 should be applied within the first half of its gel time (approx.
1 hour 45 minutes). Erection, assembly and temporary post tensioning must be completed within the contact
time of DURAL 106, which is approximately 6 hours from the time the epoxy is mixed. The segments should be
joined with a minimum provisional stress of 30 psi (0.21 MPa) across the entire cross section. If the segments
have not been joined within 70% of the contact (open) time, the operation should be discontinued, the DURAL
106 removed and fresh DURAL 106 applied. After the segments have been joined, excess DURAL 106 should
be removed from the joints, where accessible. Tendon ducts should be swabbed immediately after stressing
to remove or smooth out any epoxy in the conduit and to seal any pockets or air bubble holes that may have
formed at the joint.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment immediately following use with EUCO SOLVENT, xylene or acetone. Clean drips
and spills while still wet with the same solvent. Dried DURAL 106 will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Do not thin DURAL 106.
• Apply to dry concrete surfaces.
• Do not store at temperatures below 50°F (10°C) or above 90°F (32°C).
• Do not apply to frozen or frost filled substrates or when the temperature is below 40°F (4°C) or expected to fall
below that temperature within 24 hours.
• Not intended for areas subjected to prolonged or strong chemical attack.
Rev. 6.11
10
DURAL FAST SET EPOXY

Rapid Setting, High Strength, Epoxy Adhesive Binder
Description
DURAL FAST SET EPOXY systems are two part, 100% solids, moisture insensitive adhesives and binders for
numerous applications. This high modulus material is available in a low viscosity (LV), medium viscosity (MV)
or GEL consistency. DURAL FAST SET EPOXY products are high strength, extremely fast setting (even in a thin
film) adhesives and can be used at temperatures as low as 35°F (2°C).
primary applications
• Fast turn-around epoxy injection • Concrete adhesive • Anchor bolt grouting • Sealing cracks
• Priming & sealing • Bonding toppings • Concrete repair • Coating
features/benefits
• Abrasion and chemical resistant coating • Extend with aggregate for epoxy mortar
• High early strengths at normal and low ambient temperatures • Can contribute to LEED points
• Excellent adhesive for bonding together concrete, steel, ceramic or wood materials
Technical information
Property Dural Fast Set LV Dural Fast Set MV Dural Fast Set Gel
Gel Time 6-8 minutes 6-8 minutes 6-8 minutes
Viscosity 500 cps 3,000 cps > 80,000 cps
Bond Strength 2267 psi (16 MPa) 2800 psi (19 MPa) 2998 psi (21 MPa)
Water Absorption 0.40% 0.40% 0.66%
Compressive Modulus 378,000 psi (2,606 MPa) >300,000 psi (2,069 MPa) 302,000 psi (2,082 MPa)
Compressive Strength 10,942 psi (75 MPa) 10,521 psi (72 MPa) 10,100 psi (70 MPa)
Dural Fast Set Epoxy

Appearance, Mixed Amber Concrete Gray Concrete Gray
Reinforcing Steel Threaded Rod

Rebar Embedment Embedment Pull-Out
Hole Diameter Pull-Out Strength Rod Diameter Hole Diameter
Diameter Depth Depth Strength
#4: 1/2”(12.7 mm) 5/8”(15.8 mm) 4.5”(11.8 cm) 14200 lb (6441 kg) 1/2” (12.7 mm) 3/4” (19.1 mm) 5” (12.7 cm) 9200 lb (8709 kg)
#4: 1/2”(12.7 mm) 5/8”(15.8 mm) 5.3”(13.5 cm) 21900 lb (9934 kg) 3/4” (19.1 mm) 1” (25.4 mm) 7.5” (19.1 cm) 46000 lb (20865 kg)
#6: 1/2”(12.7 mm) 7/8”(22.2 mm) 5.6”(14.2 cm) 31100 lb (14107 kg) 1” (25.4 mm) 1 1/8” (28.6 mm) 9.75” (24.8 cm) 76700 lb (34790 kg)
#6: 1/2”(12.7 mm) 7/8”(22.2 mm) 7.5”(19.1 cm) 46600 lb (21137 kg) 1” (25.4 mm) 1 1/4” (31.8 mm) 11” (27.9 cm) 77600 lb (35199 kg)
#8: 1/2”(12.7 mm) 1 1/8”(28.6 mm) 9”(22.9 cm) 55900 lb (25356 kg) -- -- -- --
#8: 1/2”(12.7 mm) 1 1/8”(28.6 mm) 10”(25.4 cm) 83,900 lb (78,057 kg) -- -- -- --
Packaging
LV is available in 22 oz (650 mL) dual component cartridges, 10 oz (300 mL) single cartridges, 4 gal (15.15 L) case
and 10 gal (37.85 L) units.
MV is available in 1 gal (3.8 L) units.
GEL is available in 22 oz (650 mL) dual component cartridges, 10 oz (300 mL) single cartridges, 1 gal (3.8 L) units, 4
gal (15.15 L) case and 10 gal (37.85 L) units.
Master Format #:
Shelf Life
03 05 00

Dural Fast Set LV: ASTM C 881 Type I, IV, Grade 1, Class A, B, C and Canadian MTQ
Dural Fast Set MV: ASTM C 881 Type I, IV, Grade 2, Class A, B, C
Dural Fast Set Gel: ASTM C 881 Type I, IV, Grade 3, Class A, B, C and Canadian MTQ

11
Coverage
Yield of 22 oz (650 mL) cartridges is 37 in³ (.61L). Yield of 10 oz (300 mL) cartridges is 17 in³ (.28 L)
Application ft²/gal (m²/L) LV MV GEL
Priming & Sealing 100 to 125 (2.5 to 3.1) ----- -----
Bonding Toppings ----- 50 to 100 (1.2 to 3.13) 55 to 70 (1.3 to 1.7)
Coating ----- 110 to 135 (2.7 to 3.3) -----
Repair Mortars 1/4 “ (6.4 mm) 20 to 24 (.49 to .54) 18 to 22 (.44 to .54) 12 to 16 (.29 to .39)

Directions for Use
SURFACE PREPARATION: Concrete surfaces must be structurally sound, free of loose or deteriorated concrete
and free of dust, dirt, paint, efflorescence, oil and all other contaminants. Mechanically abrade the surface.
Properly clean profiled area. Priming: Clean and prime exposed steel using a spray or brush coat of DURAPREP
AC. Mixing: Cartridge Units: Shake cartridge vigorously before using. Place cartridge in dispenser. Remove
shipping cap and plugs. Dispense small amount until an even flow out of both sides occurs. Attach static
mixing nozzle and dispense. Be sure not to tilt cartridge upwards, so that mixed epoxy flows back into tube.
After dispensing, remove and properly dispose of static mixer, clean off threaded end of cartridge and replace
shipping cap. Bulk Units: Using a low speed drill motor and a “jiffy” type paddle, premix parts A and B separately
for about a minute. Combine 1 part A with 1 part B and mix well for 3 minutes until there is no streaking in the
mix. If aggregate is to be added, do so immediately and blend until consistent. Apply immediately.
Application: Temperatures for DURAL FAST SET EPOXY products must be at least 35°F (2°C) and rising.
Anchor Bolt Grouting: Before grouting, the anchor bolt must be clean & free of all debris. Prime the hole with
neat DURAL FAST SET EPOXY and allow 5 minutes at 75° F (24° C) for the material to penetrate and seal the
walls of the hole. Fill the hole with enough material so that when the bolt is inserted excess material will come to
the surface. Push the bolt into the hole using a twisting motion to ensure there are no air voids in the hole. For
additional information, consult “Anchor Bolt Grouting Guidelines” from The Euclid Chemical Company.
Pressure Grouting: Vertical Cracks: Install injection ports at appropriate intervals using DURAL FAST SET
EPOXY GEL. Seal surface cracks with DURAL FAST SET EPOXY GEL. Pump DURAL FAST SET EPOXY LV
starting at the bottom and working up. Cracks should be clean and dry prior to injection of the DURAL FAST
SET EPOXY LV. Horizontal Cracks: “Vee” out cracks. Cracks must be free of all debris before filling. Pressure
injection method is the same as for vertical cracks. For gravity feed, pump DURAL FAST SET EPOXY LV until
cracks are filled.
Priming & Sealing: Use either LV or MV formulations in these applications. Apply material by roller or squeegee
in a uniform fashion. Do not allow the material to puddle. Extremely porous surfaces may require a second
coat for proper ultimate performance. Note: DURAL FAST SET EPOXY is a fast setting epoxy at normal room
temperatures. Arrange for quick placement of product.
Bonding: If using DURAL FAST SET EPOXY MV as a bonding agent for a cementitious topping, place the
topping on the DURAL FAST SET EPOXY while the epoxy is still wet. If the epoxy has become “tacky” to the
point where it is no longer a sticky liquid, a fresh coat of product must be applied before the topping is placed.
Coating: If a second coat of DURAL FAST SET EPOXY MV is to be placed on the concrete, the first coat should
be slightly tacky (1 to 2 hours old) when the second coat is applied. A slip resistant surface can be created by
broadcasting silica sand (20 to 50 mesh) into the coating and then backrolling to embed the sand.
Repair Mortars: The surface should be primed with DURAL FAST SET EPOXY LV prior to application of the
repair mortar. Mix Part A and Part B together prior to adding the aggregate. Trowel the mortar into place. If the
surface is to rough, a topcoat of DURAL FAST SET EPOXY MV can be applied.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment immediately following use with methyl ethyl ketone or acetone. Clean drips and over
spray while still wet with the same solvent. Dried epoxy materials require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Do not apply at temperatures below 35°F (2°C).
• Do not thin with any foreign material. Do not aerate materials during mixing.
• For critical grouting applications, the concrete should be cured a minimum of 28 days.
• Store between 50°F to 90°F (10°C to 32°C).
• In all cases, consult the Material Safety Data Sheet before use. Rev. 6.11
12
DURALBOND

Epoxy Bonding/Grouting Compound
Description
DURALBOND is a multi purpose, two part, 100% solids, moisture insensitive epoxy bonding/grouting adhesive
compound.
Primary Applications
• Bond fresh plastic concrete to hardened concrete, brick, heavy weight concrete block or steel
• Bond extensions to concrete, pavements, coat rebars and as a general purpose adhesive to bond concrete,
wood or metal
• Use neat or with aggregate to grout bolts, dowels or pins in concrete
• Use to grout horizontal cracks in concrete
Property Result
Mix Ratio, by volume 1:1
Mixed Viscosity, cp 4,000 to 8,000
Contact Time, Concrete, hours 2 to 3
Gel Time, 100g sample, minutes 35 to 50
Pot Life, 2 gal (7.6 L) unit, minutes 15 to 20
Tensile Strength, psi (MPa)
5,100 (35.3)
ASTM D 638
Tensile Elongation, %
1 to 5
ASTM D 638
Compressive Strength, psi (MPa)
Duralbond
10,300 (71)
ASTM D 695
Compressive Strength of epoxy
mixed with 1 part sand, psi (MPa) 9,000 (62)
ASTM C 109
Compressive Modulus, psi (MPa)
200,000 (1,379)
ASTM C 695
Flexural Strength @ 7 days, psi (MPa)
7,700 (53)
ASTM D 790
Shore D Hardness
90 to 95
ASTM D 2240
Bond Strength, psi (MPa) 2 days: 1,800 (12.4)
ASTM C 882 14 days: 2,400 (16.5)
Heat Deflection Temperature, °F (°C)
121 (49)
ASTM D 648
Master Format #:
Appearance/Color Light Gray

03 05 00
Packaging
DURALBOND is packaged in 10 and 4 gal (37.8 and 15.1 L) units.
Shelf Life
2 years in original, unopened package.

13
Coverage/Yield
As bonding compound for fresh to old concrete 80 to 90 ft.²/gal (1.96 to 2.21 m²/L). For anchoring, 1 neat gal (3.8 L)
yields 231 in³ (3.785 cm³) of grout. 1 gal (3.8 L) neat DURALBOND with 1 gal (3.8 L) dry 20 to 40 mesh silica sand will
yield approximately 410 in³ (6.719 cm³) of mortar. Note: Coverage will vary depending on surface texture, porosity and temperature.
• AASHTO M235-88, Type II • Federal Specification MMM-A-001993, Type I
• ASTM C881-90, Type I, II Grade 2, Class B & C
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: Concrete must be structurally sound, dry, free of grease, oils, coatings, dust, curing compounds
and other contaminants. Surface laitance must be removed. The preferred method of surface preparation is mechanical
abrasion. For oil contaminated surfaces, steam cleaning used in conjunction with a strong emulsifying detergent may
be considered. Rinse thoroughly with potable water. After cleaning, remove defective concrete, honeycombs, cavities,
joint cracks, voids and other defects by routing to sound material. Smooth precast and formed concrete surfaces
must be cleaned, roughened and made absorptive by mechanical abrasion. If it is not possible to mechanically
abrade, acid etch with a 15% hydrochloric acid solution followed by pressure washing or flushing the surface with
copious amounts of water to neutralize the surface. Care must be taken to ensure that all salts and residue from the
reaction have been removed. The pH of the surface should be checked, as per ASTM D 4262, following acid etching.
For grouting applications, ensure that the hole is free of any debris or standing water. Following surface preparation,
the cleaned surface should pull concrete when tested with a pull tester, or an elcometer (ASTM D 4541).
Steel: All oils, greases, dirt, old coatings or chemical contaminants must be removed. All surfaces should be blasted
to a near white metal finish using clean dry aggregate.
Mixing: Premix Part B with a slow speed motor and “Jiffy” mixer, to a uniform color and viscosity. Pour equal volumes
of Part A and Part B into a clean, dry container, and mechanically mix for 3 minutes. Make sure to scrape the sides
and bottom of mixing container while mixing. Do not whip or aerate DURALBOND while mixing. Application: Fresh
to hardened concrete: Apply mixed DURALBOND by brush, roller, or broom. Place fresh concrete while
DURALBOND is still tacky, the contact time is typically 2 to 3 hours at 75°F (24°C) and 1 to 1½ hours at 90°F (32°C).
If DURALBOND loses tackiness, remove surface contaminates and reapply DURALBOND before placing any fresh
concrete. Bonding anchor bolts/dowels: DURALBOND can be used neat or with an aggregate to anchor bolts
in vertical holes in horizontal slabs. Depth of embeddment is typically 10 to 15 times the bar diameters and the
hole should be no greater in diameter than 1/4” (6.4 mm) larger than the rod to be anchored. For more information
on anchor bolt grouting consult the Anchor Bolt Grouting Guide. Repair horizontal cracks: Apply the mixed neat
material to the vee-notched crack until the crack is filled completely.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and application equipment immediately after use with methyl ethyl ketone or acetone. Clean overspray
or drips while still wet with solvent. Dried DURALBOND will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• The temperature should not fall below 40°F (4°C) during DURALBOND application and cure.
• The materials should be conditioned at 75°F (24°C) when used for low temperature applications.
• Do not aerate DURALBOND during mixing.
• New concrete must be placed while DURALBOND is tacky.
• DURALBOND is not intended for sealing cracks under hydrostatic pressure.
• Store in temperatures between 50°F to 90°F (10°C to 32°C)
Rev. 6.11
14
DURALCRETE EPOXY SYSTEM

ASTM C 881 Compliant, High Modulus Epoxy Bonding Adhesive
Description
DURALCRETE SYSTEM is a two component, 100% solids, moisture insensitive epoxy resin adhesive and binder for
numerous applications. This high modulus material is available in a low viscosity (LV), medium viscosity (MV) and a
GEL consistency. The DURALCRETE SYSTEM provides normal working times when used above 40°F (4°C).
Viscosity Formulation
Application LV MV GEL
Bonding toppings X X
Epoxy adhesive X X X
Anchoring X X X
Crack repair X X
Pick-proof sealant X
Features/Benefits
• High strength • Outstanding adhesion to concrete
• Provides load transfer • Moisture insensitive
• Virtually no odor Can contribute to LEED points
Property Result
Duralcrete Epoxy System

Mixed Viscosity, cp LV: 400 MV: 4,500 GEL: 80,000 - 200,000
Gel Time, 100g sample, minutes LV: 40-45 MV & GEL: 30
Tensile Strength, 7 days, psi (MPa)
> 7,000 (48.3)
ASTM D 638
2.3 to 2.5
ASTM D 638
> 10,000 (69.4)
ASTM D 695
> 265,000 (1,827)
ASTM C 695
Bond Strength, psi (MPa)
2 days: > 2,015 (13.9)
ASTM C 882
Water Absorption, 7 days, 2 hr boil, %
< 0.4%
ASTM D 570
Appearance/Color LV: Amber/Clear MV & GEL: Light Gray
Packaging
Master Format #:
DURALCRETE LV is packaged in 3 gal (11.4 L) and 15 gal (56.8 L) units. The mix ratio is 2:1 by volume.
03 05 00
DURALCRETE MV is packaged in 2 gal (7.6 L), 4 gal (15 L) and 10 gal (38 L) units. The mix ratio is 1:1 by
volume.
DURALCRETE GEL is packaged in 4 gal (15 L) and 10 gal (38 L) units and cases of 12/22 oz. (600 mL) cartridges.
The mix ratio is 1:1 by volume.
Shelf Life
2 years in original, unopened containers.

15
All formulations meet requirements of ASTM C 881, AASHTO 235, and all are USDA compliant.
All are suitable for use under ACI Specifications 503.1, 503.2, 503.3, and 503.4.
DURALCRETE LV complies with ASTM C 881 Types I and IV, Grade 1, Class B and C.
DURALCRETE MV complies with ASTM C 881 Types I, II, IV, and V, Grade 2, Class B and C.
DURALCRETE GEL complies with ASTM C 881 Types I, II, IV, and V, Grade 3, Class B and C
Coverage/Yield
For anchoring, one neat gal (3.8 L) yields 231 in³ (.0038 m³) of grout. One gal (3.8 L) of neat DURALCRETE epoxy
mixed with 3 gal (11.4 L) of dry 20/40 mesh silica sand will yield approximately 650 in³ (.01 m³) of mortar. As a bonding
agent coverage is about 60 to 80 ft²/gal (1.47 to 1.96 m²/L). Coverage will vary depending on surface texture, porosity
and temperature.
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: Concrete: The surface must be structurally sound, dry, free of grease, oils, coatings, dust,
curing compounds and other contaminants. Surface laitance must be removed. The preferred method of surface
preparation is abrasive blasting or other mechanical means per ICRI Guideline 310.2. Oil contaminated surfaces
should be degreased. Remove defective concrete, honeycombs, cavities, joint cracks, voids and other defects by
routing to sound material. Following surface preparation, the cleaned surface should pull concrete when tested with a
pull tester, or an elcometer (ASTM D 4541). Steel: All oils, grease, dirt, old coatings and chemical contaminants must
be removed. The surface should be blasted to a near white metal finish (SSPC SP10) using clean dry aggregate.
Mixing: Premix Part A and B with a slow speed motor and “Jiffy” mixer. Pour one part by volume of Part A and one part
by volume of Part B into a clean, dry container and mechanically mix for 3 to 5 minutes. (DURALCRETE LV is mixed
at a ratio of two parts Part A to one part Part B by volume.) Scrape the sides and bottom of mixing container while
mixing. Do not whip or aerate while mixing. Mortar: Gradually add clean, dry 20/40 mesh silica sand to mixed binder.
Blend thoroughly. The mix ratio of aggregate to binder is approximately 3:1 by volume but may vary depending upon
the desired consistency of the mortar. Application: Application and surface temperatures should be at least 40°F
(4°C) and rising. Bonding fresh concrete to hardened concrete: Apply by brush or roller to hardened concrete
surface. Place fresh concrete to DURALCRETE while it is still tacky or within the open time. The open time is typically
3 to 4 hours at 75°F (24°C). The open time is reduced at warmer temperatures. If the DURALCRETE loses tackiness or
exceeds open time, abrade the surface of the epoxy and re-apply DURALCRETE and proceed. Bonding hardened
to hardened concrete: Apply mixed DURALCRETE by spatula, brush or trowel. Ensure the surfaces to be joined
have uniform coatings of DURALCRETE. For optimum results the bond line should not exceed 1/8" (3.2 mm). Join
surfaces and hold or clamp firmly until adhesive gels. Ideally a small amount of adhesive should exude from the joint.
Surfaces must be mated while the adhesive is still tacky. Anchoring bolts, dowels, pins: DURALCRETE GEL
can be used neat or with an aggregate to anchor horizontal bolts. The anchor bolt hole should be free of all
debris before grouting. The optimum hole size is 1/8” (3.2 mm) annular space or 1/4” (6.4 mm) larger diameter
than bar diameter. Depth of embedment is typically 10 to 15 times bolt diameter Vertical and overhead repairs:
Apply DURALCRETE neat as a scrub coat to the prepared concrete surface. Mix the DURALCRETE into an
epoxy mortar and apply to the area by trowel or spatula in lifts of 1” to 1 1/2” (25 to 38 mm). Allow each lift to
reach initial set set before applying subsequent lifts. Capseal & set ports for pressure injection: Place a small
amount of the mixed DURALCRETE GEL to the back of the port and carefully place over the crack. Be careful to
not fill the hole of the injection port. Place neat mixed DURALCRETE GEL to the cracks to be pressure injected
and around each injection port. Allow sufficient cure time before pressure injection. Pressure grouting: Vertical
cracks: Pump DURALCRETE LV into the crack with two component pressure injection equipment, starting at the
bottom of the crack and working up. Cracks should be clean and dry prior to injection. Horizontal cracks: “Vee-
cut” cracks and ensure that prepared crack is dry and free of all debris. Pressure injection technique is the same
as for vertical cracks. If gravity feeding, pump DURALCRETE LV until cracks are filled.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and application equipment immediately after use with EUCO SOLVENT or acetone while still wet.
• Store at tempatures between 50°F to 90°F (10°C to 32°C).
• Do not thin.
• Concrete should be cured for 28 days.
16
DURALPREP A.C.

Bonding Agent and Anti-Corrosion Coating for Reinforcement
Description
DURALPREP A.C. is a three component, pre-proportioned, water based epoxy modified portland cement bonding
agent and anti-corrosion coating. DURALPREP A.C. is used as a bonding agent for placing fresh concrete to existing
concrete and for repair and restoration of concrete surfaces. DURALPREP A.C. contains a corrosion inhibitor which
protects reinforcement when used as an anti-corrosion coating for steel. DURALPREP A.C. has a long open time, is
non flammable, VOC compliant, and does not form a water vapor barrier after cure.
• Bonding agent for fresh concrete to existing concrete • Exterior or interior
• Concrete repairs with cement or epoxy mortars • On grade or above grade applications
• Anti-corrosion coating for steel reinforcement
Features/Benefits
Can contribute to LEED points • Long open time • Contains corrosion inhibitor
Property Result
1 gal A:1 gal B:36 lbs C
Mix Ratio
(3.8 L:3.8 L:16 kg)
Contact Time Up to 24 hours depending on temperature
Pot Life, 2 gal (7.6 L) unit, minutes 35 to 40
Duralprep A.C.
3 days: > 5,100 (35.2)
7 days: > 7,300 (50.3)
ASTM C 109
28 days: > 10,000 (68.9)
Flexural Strength @28 days, psi (MPa)
> 1,280 (8.8)
ASTM C 348
Shore D Hardness
90 to 95
ASTM D 2240
Bond Strength, 7 days, psi (MPa) 1 hr open time: 2,480 (17.1)
ASTM C 882 24 hr open time: 2,700 (18.6)
Split Tensile Strength, 28 days, psi (MPa)
>600 (4.1)
ASTM C 496
Water Vapor Permeability
0.16 grains/ft2/hr
ASTM E 96
Appearance/Color Concrete Gray
Master Format #:
Properties determined at laboratory conditions.

03 05 00
Packaging
DURALPREP A.C. is packaged in 3.75 gal (14.2 L) kits and 2/1 gal (3.8 L) units/case.
Shelf Life
1 year in original, unopened package.

17
Canadian MTQ
Coverage
One 3.75 gal (14.2 L) kit of DURALPREP A.C. will cover approximately 250 ft² (23.2 m²).
One 1 gal (3.8L) unit will cover approximately 65 ft² (6 m²).

Note: Coverage rates are approximate and for estimating purposes only. Test the area prior to application to determine
effective coverage rates. Surface temperature, porosity, and texture will determine actual material requirements.
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: The surface must be structurally sound, dry, free of grease, oils, curing compounds,
efflorescence, laitance and any other contaminants that would interfere with adhesion. All previous coatings on the
substrate must be removed. Concrete: Smooth, precast and formed concrete surfaces must be cleaned, roughened
and made absorptive by mechanical abrasion. All coatings must be removed completely to provide an absorptive
surface. Remove excess moisture, drips and puddles from the surface. The surface should be saturated surface dry
(SSD) with no standing water prior to application. Steel: All oils, greases, dirt, old coatings or chemical contaminates
must be removed. All steel surfaces should be blasted to a “NEAR WHITE” metal finish using clean dry blasting
media.
Mixing: Mix one full kit at a time. DURALPREP A.C. must be mechanically mixed with a slow speed motor and mixing
blade to thoroughly disperse all ingredients. A 1/2" (13mm) drill motor and a “Jiffy” mixer may be used. Premix each
container (Parts A & B). Pour Part A and Part B into a clean container. Start mixer and mix at slow speed for 30 to 45
seconds. Do not aerate the mix. While mixing gradually, add all of the Part C powder into the mixed liquid to produce
a smooth lump free consistency. Mix thoroughly for approximately 3 minutes.
Application: Air and surface temperature must be above 45°F (7°C) and rising. Maximum temperature should not
exceed 90°F (32°C). The approximate working life is 30 to 45 minutes depending on the temperature. Bonding
Agent: Apply DURALPREP A.C. to the SSD surface using a stiff bristle brush or spray equipment. Allow to cure
30 minutes before placing concrete. DURALPREP A.C. has an open time of from 30 min to 24 hrs at 75°F (24°C).
Anti-Corrosion Coating: Coat the exposed reinforcing steel, making sure to coat the underside portion of the steel.
Apply two coats at 20 mils each by brush or spray, allowing 3 to 6 hours between applications. Place fresh mortar or
concrete within the open time of the second coat of DURALPREP A.C. 30 min to 24 hrs at 75°F (24°C).
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with water immediately following use. Clean drips with water while still wet.
Dried DURALPREP A.C. will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Mix only one full kit at a time.
• Do not mix for longer than 3 minutes.
• Do not allow components to freeze.
• Do not apply at temperatures below 45°F (7°C), or above 90°F (32°C).
• Do not add water to mix.
• Maximum open time: 12 hours @ 90°F (32°C), 24 hours @ 75°F (24°C), 30 hours @ 45°F (7°C).
• Store at temperatures between 65°F and 80°F (18°C to 27°C).
• Protect from freezing.
• Do not use Component A or B if it has frozen.
Rev. 6.11
18
EUCO #452 EPOXY SYSTEM

Astm C 881 Compliant, High Modulus Adhesive
Description
EUCO #452 EPOXY SYSTEM is a 100% reactive, 2 component material designed as a moisture insensitive
adhesive and binder for numerous application needs. This high modulus material is available in a low viscosity (LV),
medium viscosity (MV) or GEL consistency. EUCO #452 provides normal working times when bonding concrete at
temperatures above 40°F (4°C).
• Bonding concrete, steel, ceramic or wood • GEL formulations are used for vertical and overhead
• Anchoring bolts, dowels, and pins bonding, anchoring, and repair
• General adhesive needs • Filling cracks in concrete and masonry
• Bonding concrete toppings
Features/Benefits
• Moisture insensitive for bonding to dry or damp • May be extended with sand or aggregate for thick
surfaces applications and mortar repairs
• Bonds fresh concrete toppings to hardened concrete • Designed for use at temperatures of 40°F (4°C) and
slabs above
• Forms a tough, wear and chemical resistant coating Can contribute to LEED points
for industrial floor slabs
#452 #452
Property #452 LV #452 MV #452 Gel
Cartridge MV Cartridge Gel
Gel Time 30 minutes 30 minutes 30 minutes 6 to 8 minutes 30 minutes
Euco #452 Epoxy System

Working Time 90 minutes 90 minutes 90 minutes 10 to 20 minutes 90 minutes
3,200 psi 2,500 psi 2,000 psi 2,200 psi 2,230 psi
Bond Strength
(22 MPa) (17 MPa) (14 MPa) (15 MPa) (15 MPa)
Water Absorption 0.15% 0.081% 0.4% 0.36% 0.31%
Compressive Modulus
(2,741 MPa) (2,218 MPa) (1,827 MPa) (2,606 MPa) (1,965 MPa)
Compressive Strength
(78 MPa) (89 MPa) (69 MPa) (75 MPa) (70 MPa)
Appearance, Mixed Gray Gray Gray Amber-Clear Gray
Packaging
EUCO #452 epoxies are two part systems. Bulk packaged material is mixed at a 2 to 1 ratio by volume, Part A to Part
B. The units are pre-proportioned and packed in 3 gal (11.4 L) units and 1 gal (3.8 L) units. EUCO #452 MV & GEL is
also available in 12/22 fl. oz cartridges (0.7 L) mixed at a 1:1 ratio. Cartridges yield 37 in3 of epoxy.
Shelf Life
Master Format #:

03 05 00
EUCO #452 LV complies with ASTM C 881 Types I, II, IV, and V, Grade 1, Class B and C.
EUCO #452 MV complies with ASTM C 881 Types I, II, IV, and V, Grade 2, Class B and C.
EUCO #452 GEL complies with ASTM C 881 Types I, II, IV, and V, Grade 3, Class B and C.
EUCO #452 CARTRIDGE MV complies with ASTM C 881 Types I and IV, Grade 1, Class A, B, and C.
EUCO #452 CARTRIDGE GEL complies with ASTM C 881 Types I, II, IV, and V, Grade 3, Class B and C.

19
Coverage
EUCO #452 LV: 125 ft2/gal (3.1 m2/L) for priming/sealing
Note: Coverage will vary with concrete surface
25 ft2/gal (0.6 m2/L) for 1/4” (6 mm) mortars texture, temperature, and the gradation of sand
EUCO #452 MV: 100 ft2/gal (2.5 m2/L) for bonding toppings used for mortars. Coverage rates shown are
approximate.
20 ft2/gal (0.5 m2/L) for 1/4” (6 mm) mortars
EUCO #452 GEL: 60 ft2/gal (1.5 m2/L) for bonding toppings
15 ft2/gal (0.4 m2/L) for 1/4” (6 mm) mortars
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: New concrete must be a minimum of 28 days old and possess an open, porous and textured
surface with all curing compounds and sealers removed. Old concrete must be clean and well textured. All oil,
dirt, debris, paint and unsound concrete must be removed. The surface should be prepared mechanically using
equipment that will give a surface profile commensurate with the application. The final step in cleaning should be the
complete removal of all residue with a vacuum cleaner or pressure washer.
Bulk Mixing: All materials should be in the proper temperature range of 60°F (16°C) to 90°F (32°C). Mix parts A and B
(resin & hardener) using a drill and mixing prop. The epoxy must be well mixed to a uniform color with no streaking in
order to ensure proper chemical reaction. If aggregate is to be added, the aggregate is added to the epoxy after the
part A and part B have been premixed together. Place immediately.
Application: (Priming, Bonding Or Sealing): Use either Low Viscosity or Medium Viscosity formulations in these
applications. Apply material by roller, brush, or squeegee in a uniform fashion. Do not allow the material to puddle.
Extremely porous surfaces may require a second coat for proper ultimate performance.
Priming & Bonding: If using EUCO #452 as a bonding agent for a cementitious topping, place the topping on the
EUCO #452 while the epoxy is still wet. If the epoxy has become “tacky” to the point where it is no longer a sticky
liquid, a fresh coat of EUCO #452 must be applied before the topping is placed.
Sealing: If a second coat of EUCO #452 is to be placed on the concrete, the first coat should be slightly tacky (4 to
10 hours old) when the second coat is applied. A slip resistant surface can be created by broadcasting silica sand (20
to 50 mesh) into the coating and then backrolling to embed the sand.
Repair Mortars: Repair mortars can be made with these products by adding aggregate. Size, gradation and the
amount of aggregate will be determined by the application. The surface should be primed with EUCO #452 LV prior to
application of the repair mortar. Mix the epoxy unit (Part A with Part B) prior to adding the aggregate. Trowel the mortar
into place. If the surface is too rough, a topcoat of either EUCO #452 LV or MV can be applied.
Cartridge Epoxy Application Instructions: Remove cap and divider plugs. Attach mixer tip and dispense epoxy with
smooth, constant pressure. Discard epoxy until a uniform, streak-free color is achieved. Anchor installation: Insert
the static mixer tip and fill hole from the bottom, slowly withdrawing the tip as the epoxy is dispensed until the hole
is approximately half full. Insert the anchor with a slow, twisting motion to ensure complete epoxy contact with no air
voids. Stabilize anchor until epoxy is cured.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with solvent such as EUCO SOLVENT, xylene, or acetone before the epoxy hardens.
• This product may vary in color and may yellow and chalk in prolonged exposure to sunlight.
• Bring materials as close to 70°F (21°C) as possible. Store in room temperature environment 24 hours prior to use.
Do not heat with open flame.
• Store indoors at 45°F to 110°F (7°C to 43°C).
• Epoxy components may cause skin irritation.
• Do not apply over freestanding water.
• Do not apply over hardened primer or old epoxy without proper surface preparation.
• Not recommended for use as a surface sealer over new concrete less than 30 days old.
• Not recommended for use when base concrete is at a temperature under 40°F (4°C).
Rev. 6.11
20
EUCOPOXY INJECTION RESIN

Structural Bonding Adhesive
Description
EUCOPOXY INJECTION RESIN is a 100% reactive, two component material designed as a moisture insensitive
adhesive for numerous injection and sealing needs. This high modulus material is formulated as a super low
viscosity for ease of use in penetrating deep into thin cracks.
• Parking structures • Earthquake damage
• Bridges and marine structures • Vertical and overhead applications
• Retaining walls
Features/Benefits
• Excellent adhesive for pressure injection of fine cracks
• Moisture insensitive for bond to dry or damp surfaces
• Penetrates deep into cracks and fissures
• Formulated in a 2 to 1 mixing ratio for use with most injection equipment
• Provides a tough, weather resistant seal for porous concrete
Property Result
Eucopoxy Injection Resin

Mix Ratio, A:B 2:1 by volume
Gel Time, 1 gal (3.8 L) 26 minutes
Viscosity 220 cp at 75°F (24°C)
1 day: 14,000 (97)
Compressive Strength, psi (MPa) 3 days: 18,200 (126)
ASTM C 109 7 days: 20,000 (138)
28 days: 22,000 (152)
Flexural Strength, psi (MPa)
14,000 (97)
ASTM D 790
Shore D Hardness
85
ASTM D 2240
3,800 (26)
ASTM C 882
Ultimate Tensile Strength, psi (MPa)
9,000 (62)
ASTM D 638
Tensile Elongation at Break
3.5%
ASTM D 638
Master Format #:
Tensile Modulus of Elasticity, psi (MPa)

4.6 x 105 (3,172)
ASTM D 638
03 64 23
Packaging
EUCOPOXY INJECTION RESIN is packaged in 15 gal (56.8 L) and 1 gal (3.8 L) units.

21
Shelf Life
Directions for Use

Crack Injection: EUCOPOXY INJECTION RESIN can be gravity fed or pressure injected into horizontal cracks.
Vertical and overhead cracks must be pressure injected. Insert one way polyethylene valves or ports into drill
hole at the face of the crack. Areas around the entry port and the crack between ports should be sealed with a
gel epoxy. Inject the neat material with an epoxy injection machine or other mechanical means. Make sure that
injection equipment is properly set for a 2 to 1 mixing ratio (Part A to Part B) by volume.
Mixing: All materials should be in the proper temperature range of 60oF to 90oF (16oC to 32oC). Mix parts A and
B (resin & hardener) for 2 minutes using a drill and mixing prop. For ease of mixing, add the part B to the part
A (not the reverse). The epoxy must be well mixed to ensure proper chemical reaction.
Crack Healing: After mixing, pour or squeegee epoxy into cracks and allow to seep in. Continue to apply
material until crack is full.
Clean-up
Clean tools and equipment with solvent such as EUCO SOLVENT, acetone, tor xylene. Do not allow the epoxy
to harden before cleaning.
• Bring material as close to 70oF (21oC) as possible prior to usage. Store in room temperature environment 24
hours prior to use. Do not heat with an open flame.
• Epoxy components may cause irritation; avoid contact with skin and eyes.
• Always wear protective clothing (rubber gloves, eye protection, etc.) when using this product.
Rev. 6.11
22
FLEXOCRETE EPOXY SYSTEM

Astm C 881 Compliant Adhesive, Low Modulus Adhesive
Description
FLEXOCRETE is a 100% reactive, two component material designed as a moisture insensitive adhesive
and binder for numerous application needs. This material is available in a low viscosity (LV), medium
viscosity (MV) or GEL consistency. FLEXOCRETE provides normal working time when bonding
concrete at temperatures above 40°F (4°C).
APPLICATION LV(1) MV(2) GEL (1) At temperatures above 90°F (32°C) the medium
Priming X viscosity formulation may be more suitable for
Sealing X these applications. Gel time will be shortened.
General Adhesive X X X (2) At temperatures below 60°F (16°C) the low
Floor/Joint Repair Material X X viscosity formulation may be more suitable for
Non-Sag Material X these applications.
Vertical/Overhead Coatings X
Features/Benefits
• Excellent adhesive for bonding together concrete, steel, ceramic or wood materials
• May be extended with sand or aggregate for thick applications and mortar repairs
• Designed for use at temperatures of 40°F (4°C) and above
Can contribute to LEED points.
Flexocrete Epoxy System

Property Result
Mixed Viscosity, cp LV: 1,800 MV: 4,000 GEL: 80,000 - 200,000
Gel Time, 1 gal, minutes 25
Working Time, minutes 90
> 2,000 (13)
ASTM D 638
> 30%
ASTM D 638
> 5,000 (35)
ASTM D 695
300,000 (2,069)
ASTM C 638
Bond Strength, psi (MPa) 2 days: > 2,000 (13)
ASTM C 882 14 days: > 2,300 (15)
Water Absorption, 7 days
< 0.5%
ASTM D 570
Master Format #:
Shore D Hardness 65 to 70
03 05 00
Mixed Appearance Concrete Gray
Packaging
FLEXOCRETE epoxies are two part systems mixed at a 1 to 1 ratio mix by volume, Part A to Part B. The units
are pre-proportioned and packaged in 1 gal (3.8 L) units.
Shelf Life

23
• FLEXOCRETE LV fully complies with ASTM C 881, Types III, Grade 1, Class B and C.
• FLEXOCRETE MV fully complies with ASTM C 881, Types III, Grade 2, Class B and C.
• FLEXOCRETE GEL fully complies with ASTM C 881, Types III, Grade 3, Class B and C.
• FLEXOCRETE LV, MV and GEL fully comply with ASTM C 883 and ASTM C 884 requirements.
• FLEXOCRETE LV, MV and GEL are USDA compliant.
• All FLEXOCRETE formulations are suitable for use under ACI specifications 503.1, 503.2, 503.3 & 503.4.
Coverage
Coverage Rates ft2/gal (m2/L) *Note:The coverage rate of each product is highly
Application LV MV Gel dependent upon the concrete surface texture, the
Priming & 100 to 125 — — temperature of the material and the concrete. For
Sealing (2.5 to 3.1) applications involving repair mortars, the gradation
Bonding — 50 to 100 55 to 70 of the aggregate and the workability desired highly
Toppings (1.2 to 3.1) (1.3 to 1.7) affects the amount of epoxy required.
Repair Mortars 20 to 24 18 to 22 12 to 16
1/4" (6.4 mm) (.49 to .59) (.44 to .54) (.29 to .39)
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: New concrete must be a minimum of 28 days old and possess an open, porous and
textured surface with all curing compounds and sealers removed. Old concrete must be clean and well textured.
All oil, dirt, debris, paint and unsound concrete must be removed. The surface should be prepared mechanically.
Coating applications should have a surface profile of CSP 3 - 4 and topping applications should have a profile
of CSP 6 - 7 in accordaance with ICRI Guideline 310.2, at a minimum. The final step in cleaning should be the
complete removal of all residue with a vacuum cleaner or pressure washer.
Mixing: All materials should be in the proper temperature range of 60°F (16°C) to 90°F (32°C). Mix parts A and
B (resin & hardener) for 2 minutes using a drill and mixing prop. For ease of mixing, add the part B to the part A (not
the reverse). The epoxy must be well mixed to ensure proper chemical reaction. If aggregate is to be added, the
aggregate is mixed into the epoxy after the part A and part B have been premixed together. Place immediately.
Application: (Priming, Bonding or Sealing)-Use either Low Viscosity or Medium Viscosity formulations in these
applications. Apply material by roller, brush, or squeegee in a uniform fashion. Do not allow the material to
puddle. Extremely porous surfaces may require a second coat for proper ultimate performance.
Sealing & Coating: If a second coat of FLEXOCRETE is to be placed on the concrete, the first coat should be
slightly tacky (4 to 10 hours old) when the second coat is applied.
Repair Mortars: The surface should be primed with FLEXOCRETE LV prior to application of the repair mortar.
Mix the epoxy unit (part A with Part B) prior to adding the aggregate. Trowel the mortar into place. If the surface
is too rough, a topcoat of either FLEXOCRETE LV or MV can be applied.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with solvent such as EUCO SOLVENT, acetone, toluene or MEK. Do not allow the
epoxy to harden on equipment.
• This product may vary in color and may yellow and chalk with prolonged exposure to sunlight.
• Bring materials as close to 70°F (21°C) as possible. Store in room temperature environment 24 hours prior to use.
Do not heat with open flame.
• Epoxy components may cause irritation. Avoid contact with eyes and skin.
• Not recommended for use as a surface sealer over new concrete less than 30 days old.
Rev. 6.11
24
AKKRO-7T

Liquid Bonding Admixture
Description
AKKRO-7T is a non-redispersable, liquid bonding admixture used to produce polymer modified concrete and
mortar. AKKRO-7T is a milky white, water based emulsion of high solids acrylic polymers and modifiers. AKKRO-
7T is non-yellowing, and has excellent resistance to ultraviolet degradation, heat and most common chemicals.
AKKRO-7T does not alter the color of the mixture.
• Cement based coatings, toppings, patching mortars, leveling compounds, stucco, and terrazzo
• Mixing liquid for TAMOSEAL, CONCRETE FINISHER, TAMMS SBC AND TAMMS STUCCO FINISH
Features/Benefits
• Increases flexural and tensile strength • Resists water penetration
• Improves bond strength • Protects against freeze-thaw damage
• Reduces shrinkage • Non-yellowing
Sand-Cement with
Property Unmodified Sand-Cement
Akkro-7T
Compressive Strength, psi (MPa) 3 days: 1,640 (11.3) 3 days: 2,890 (19.9)
ASTM C 109 7 days: 2,345 (16.2) 7 days: 3,410 (23.5)
Flexural Strength @ 7 days, psi (MPa)
410 (2.8) 1,096 (7.6)
ASTM C 78
Bond Strength, 7 days, psi (MPa)
AKKRO-7T
56 (0.4) 486 (3.3)
ASTM C 321
246 (1.7) 510 (3.5)
ASTM C 190
Property of Akkro-7T Value

Unit Weight 8.65 lb/gal
VOC Content < 10 g/L
Specific Gravity 1.04
Packaging
Master Format #:
AKKRO-7T is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums, 5 gal (18.9 L) pails and cases of 6/1 gal (3.79 L) plastic bottles.
03 05 00
Shelf Life
1 year in original, unopened container.
Complies with ASTM C 1059, Type II
USDA compliant

25
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: Surface must be structurally sound, clean, free of dust, dirt, oil, curing or form release
compounds, paint, laitance, efflorescence and other contaminants. New concrete and masonry surfaces must
be cured 7 days. Provide an absorptive surface on smooth precast or formed concrete by abrading the surface.
Follow the surface preparation directions for the product in which AKKRO-7T is being used as an admixture.
Mixing: Stir AKKRO-7T slowly and thoroughly using slow speed mixing equipment and a clean container. Do
not aerate the AKKRO-7T.
Recommended Mixtures:
Bonding Slurry: Dry mix 1 part portland cement with 3 parts dry sand and add undiluted AKKRO-7T to produce
a pourable slurry coat. Brush mixture thoroughly into voids and pores of surface to eliminate air pockets. Before
slurry coat dries, follow immediately with patching materials that are compatible with portland cement.
Patches, Overlays And Toppings: For depths 1/2 in (12.7 mm) or greater, mix 1 part AKKRO-7T with 3
parts potable water. Proportion dry sand, cement, aggregate and add measured amount of mixing liquid.
Featheredging and repairs less than 1/2 in (12.7 mm) deep will require additional AKKRO-7T in the mix.
Terrazzo: Make up a mixing liquid of 1 part AKKRO-7T to 3 parts potable water.
Thin Coat Wall Applications: Manu factured wall coatings including TAMOSEAL, CONCRETE FINISHER,
TAMMS SBC, and TAMMS STUCCO FINISH; mix 1 part AKKRO-7T to 3 parts potable water for mixing liquid, or
as directed in instructions for mixing coating.
Field Mixed Stucco: Mix 1 part AKKRO-7T to 3 parts potable water.
Cement Plaster Coatings: Applications 3/8 in (9.5 mm) or less; use 1 part AKKRO-7T to 2 parts potable water.
Applications over 3/8 in (9.5 mm); use a 1:3 mixture.
Pointing Mortars: Manufactured tuckpointing mortars such as JOINT-DRI and other special mortars for thin
applications; mix 1 part AKKRO-7T to 3 parts potable water for mixing liquid.
Application: Use only light pressure on trowel and finish with as few strokes as possible. Keep trowel clean
and wet to prevent sticking. Do not over trowel. Mixes with AKKRO-7T do not normally require curing, but on
hot, dry or windy days, it is advisable to cover with moist burlap for 24 hours or as recommended. Air-cure the
surface for 2 to 4 days for normal use, and 4 to 7 days for heavy traffic areas. Refer to “PRECAUTIONS,” for
curing water containment structures.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with detergent and water immediately following use. Clean drips, spills and smears
while mix is still wet. Mixes containing AKKRO-7T are extremely difficult to remove if allowed to dry before
cleaning.
• Do not apply mixes modified with AKKRO-7T when the temperature is below, or expected to fall below 40°F
(4°C) within 48 hours.
• Do not use with air entrained cements.
• Excessive moisture and high humidity will slow curing time.
• Provide adequate ventilation when using AKKRO-7T in enclosed tanks, reservoirs or other areas where air
circulation is limited.
• Air-cure cisterns, tanks or pools for minimum 7 to 10 days before filling with water.
• Concrete mix designs using AKKRO-7T should be evaluated and tested for performance and application
properties prior to use.
• Store between 40°F to 90°F (4°C to 32°C). Protect from freezing.
• If frozen, place in a warm room to thaw. Do not use direct heat or force thawing.
Rev. 6.11
26
FLEX-CON

Acrylic Latex Bonding Admixture
Description
FLEX-CON is a water dispersion of an architectural grade acrylic latex specifically designed for modifying
portland cement compositions. Mortar modified with FLEX-CON has improved physical strength, and superior
adhesion to old concrete, masonry, brick, and many other surfaces.
• Admixture for toppings, patches and leveling courses
• Thin sets, terrazzo, stucco and bond coats
• Repairs utilizing spray or fill coats
• General reconstruction work
• Repairs to precast structural members
• Architectural panels, bridge decks and highway repairs
Features/Benefits
• Easy to use
• Improves bond strength
• Increases durability under freeze/thaw cycling
• Reduces cracking through increased mortar flexural strength
• Increases mortar wear resistance under rubber wheeled traffic
• Increases mortar tensile strength
• Repair mortar offers greater impact resistance
FLEX-CON
Property Result
Solids Content (by weight) 24%
Unit Weight 8.4 lb/gal
Compressive Strength of 3 days: 3,000 psi (21 MPa)
FLEX-CON Modified Repair Mortar 7 days: 4,000 psi (28 MPa)
ASTM C 109, 2 in (50 mm) cubes 28 days: 5,000 psi (34 MPa)
Flexural Strength
28 days: 1,300 psi (9 MPa)
ASTM C 348
Bond Strength
14 days: 1,300 psi (8.9 MPa)
ASTM C 1042
Appearance White Liquid

Master Format #:
Packaging
03 05 00
FLEX-CON is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums, 5 gal (19 L) pails and cases of 6/1 gal (3.8 L) units.
Shelf Life

27
Complies with ASTM C 1059, Type II.
FLEX-CON classified by The American Concrete Institute as a non-reemulsifiable bonding admixture.
Canadian MTQ
Coverage
Cement Bond Coat ft²/gal (m²/L) Repair Mortar Cement Sand Flex-Con
Coverage* Cement Sand Flex-Con 110 to 120 @½" 94 lb 300 lb 5 to 6 gal
600 to 800 94 lb — 7 to 8 gal (10 to 11 @ 13 mm) (43 kg) (136 kg) (19 to 23 L)
(56 to 74) (43 kg) — (26 to 30 L) * Projected coverage is an estimate only, and is highly
dependent upon concrete texture.
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: If using this product in a cement bond coat, the base concrete must be a minimum of
3 days old. The concrete must be clean and rough. All oil, dirt, debris, paint and unsound concrete must be
removed. The surface must be prepared mechanically using a scabbler, bushhammer, shotblast or scarifier
which will give a surface profile of a minimum 1/8" (3 mm) and expose the large aggregate of the concrete.
NOTE: Acid etching is not acceptable. The final step in cleaning should be the complete removal of all residue with
a vacuum cleaner or pressure washing. Allow the concrete surface to begin drying. Do not place cement bond coat
on standing water. All concrete must possess an open surface texture with all curing compounds and sealers removed. All
areas should be Saturated Surface Dry (SSD) to reduce moisture loss. Do not place bond coat on standing water.
Bonding: For bonding traffic bearing toppings with this product, The Euclid Chemical Company strongly
recommends using a bond coat rather than using this product as a primer by itself. After the surface has been
prepared, prime all areas with a bond coat (see above mix design) before the topping is applied. Follow mixing
and placing instructions listed below. Place the topping on the bond coat before it dries out.
Mixing: Small quantities may be mixed with a drill and "jiffy" mixer. Use a paddle type mortar mixer for large
jobs. All materials should be in the proper temperature range of 40°F (5°C) to 90°F (32°C). Add the appropriate
amount of FLEX-CON for the batch size and then add the dry material. Mix a minimum of 3 minutes. The mixed
product should be quickly transported to the repair area and placed immediately.
Bond Coat Application: Spread the bond coat with a stiff bristle broom until the suggested coverage rate
is achieved. Topping Application: For patching, spread with a trowel, come-a-long, or square tipped shovel to
a thickness that matches the surrounding concrete. Finish by hand trowelling. On large floor areas, use screed
guides in combination with a vibratory screeding to level. Compact and finish by hand or machine trowel.
Finishing: Finish the repair mortar to the desired texture. Typical texture is a broom or sponge float finish,
though mortars made with FLEX-CON can be steel trowelled. Do not add additional water to the surface during
the finishing operation. If additional liquid is required, use EUCOBAR finishing aid.
Curing: All cement products must be adequately cured. Proper curing procedures are important to ensure
the durability and quality of the repair or overlayment. To prevent surface cracking, a moist cure should be
maintained for 24 hours followed by use of a curing compound such as DIAMOND CLEAR VOX or AQUA-CURE
VOX. NOTE: Do not use a solvent-based curing compound on latex modified mortars.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with water before the material hardens.
• Do not use material at temperatures below 40°F (4°C).
• Do not use FLEX-CON by itself as a bonding agent. It must be mixed with cement.
• No heavy traffic until the repair has cured.
• Do not use in ready mix concrete.
• For thin topping mixes or large overlays, use SBR LATEX.
• For bonding floor toppings, a slurry bond coat is recommended.
• Use of this product in conjunction with air entrained cement/concrete or with other admixtures may significantly
increase total entrained air content. Testing is strongly advised.
• Do not use a solvent-based curing compound on latex modified mortars.
28
SBR LATEX

Bonding Admixture
Description
SBR LATEX is a carboxylated styrene butadiene copolymer latex admixture that is designed as an integral
adhesive for cement bond coats, mortars and concrete to improve bond strength and chemical resistance.
• Toppings, patches and leveling courses • General reconstruction work/latex modified overlays
• Thin sets, terrazzo, stucco and bonding coats • Bridge decks, highways and parking decks
Features/Benefits
• Improves bond strengths to hardened concrete
• Reduces cracking through increased mortar flexural • Increases durability under freeze/thaw cycling
strength
• Increases wear resistance under rubber wheeled • Resistant to deicing salts
traffic • Increases mortar tensile strength
SBR Latex-Modified
Property
Mortar SBR LATEX-Modified
Mortar Mix Design:
3 days: 3,200 (22)
Compressive Strength, psi (MPa) Type I Portland Cement
7 days: 4,000 (28)
ASTM C 109
28 days: 4,700 (32)
94 lb (43 kg)
Sand
Flexural Strength @ 7 days, psi (MPa) 3 days: 1,425 (9.8)
300 lb (136 kg)
ASTM C 78 7 days: 2,075 (14.3)
SBR Latex
SBR LATEX
Tensile Strength, 7 days, psi (MPa) 3 days: 330 (2.2) 2 gal (7.7 L)
ASTM C 190 7 days: 480 (3.3)
Water
Appearance White liquid 3 gal (11.4 L)
Property of SBR Latex Value

Unit Weight 8.4 lb/gal (1.0 kg/L)
Solids Content by Weight 48%
pH as Shipped 10 to 11
Packaging
SBR LATEX is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums, 5 gal (18.9 L) pails and cases of 6/1 gal (3.8 L) units.
Master Format #:
Shelf Life
03 05 00
Complies with ASTM C 1059-86, Type II
SBR LATEX is classified by The American Concrete Institute as a non-re-emulsifiable bonding admixture
Canadian MTQ

29
Coverage
Bond Cementitous Concrete
Coat Mortar Topping
Cement 94 lb (42.6 kg) 94 lb (42.6 kg) 658 lb (295.5 kg)
Sand ------ 300 lb (136.1 kg) 1520 lb (689.5 kg)
#8 Coarse Aggregate ------ ------ 1400 lb (635.0 kg)
SBR LATEX 3 gal (11.3 L) 2 to 4 gal ( 7.6 to 15.1 L) 10 to 12 gal (37.9 to 45.4 L)
Water 5 to 6 gal (8.9 to 22.7 L) 2 to 4 gal ( 7.6 to 15.1 L)) 22 to 26 gal (128.7 to 98.4 L)
Total Liquid 8 to 9 gal (30 to 34 L) 5 to 6 gal (19 to 23 L) 34 to 36 gal (129 to 136 L)
Yield 700 ft² (65 m²) 5 ft³ (0.14 m3) 25 ft³ (0.71 m3)
Coverage:
Bond Coat: 600 to 800 ft² (55.7 to 74.3 m²) Cementitious Mortar: 100 to 120 ft² (9.3 to 11.1m²) @ 1/2" (12.7 mm)
Concrete Topping: 150 to 160 ft² (13.9 to 14.9 m²) @ 2" (50 mm)
Coverage rates are estimates only and is highly dependent upon concrete texture and unit weight of aggregate used.
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: If using this product as a bond coat, the concrete must be a minimum of 3 days old. The
concrete must be clean and rough. All oil, dirt, debris, paint and unsound concrete must be removed. The
surface must be prepared mechanically using a scabbler, bushhammer, shotblaster or scarifier, which will give a
surface profile of a minimum 1/8" (3 mm) and expose the large aggregate of the concrete. Note: Acid etching is
not acceptable. The final step in cleaning should be the complete removal of all residue with a vacuum cleaner
or pressure washing. Allow the concrete surface to dry. Do not place bond coat on standing water. All concrete
must possess an open surface texture with all curing compounds and sealers removed. All areas should be pre-
dampened to reduce moisture loss. Do not place product on standing water.
Bonding: For bonding toppings with this product, The Euclid Chemical Company strongly recommends using a
cement bond coat rather than using this product as a primer by itself. After the surface has been prepared, prime
all areas with a bond coat before the topping is applied. Follow mixing and placing instructions listed below.
Place the topping on the bond coat before the bond coat dries out.
amount of SBR LATEX for the batch size and then add the dry material. If using SBR LATEX with a pre-
packaged product, reduce the amount of water added to compensate for the latex addition. Mix a minimum
of 3 minutes. The mixed product should be quickly transported to the repair area and placed immediately.
Placement: Discharge material onto the floor.
Bond Coat Application: Spread the bond coat with a stiff bristle broom until the suggested coverage rate is achieved.
Topping Application: For patching, spread with a trowel, come-a-long, or square tipped shovel to a thickness
that matches the surrounding concrete. Finish by hand troweling. On large floor areas, use screed strips as
guides in combination with vibratory screeding to level. Compact and finish by hand or machine trowel.
Finishing: Finish the repair material to the desired texture. Typical texture is a broom or sponge float finish. Do not
add additional water to the surface during the finishing operation. If additional liquid is required, use EUCOBAR
finishing aid.
Curing: Proper curing procedures are important to ensure the durability and quality of the repair or overlayment. To
prevent surface cracking, a moist cure should be maintained for 24 hours followed by use of a curing compound such as
DIAMOND CLEAR VOX or AQUA-CURE VOX. Do not use a solvent based curing compound on latex modified mortars.
Clean-Up
• Do not use material at temperatures below 45°F (7°C). Protect from freezing.
• No heavy traffic until the product has cured.
• Not designed for use on its own as a bonding agent, SBR LATEX must be used in a slurry with portland cement.
• Use of this product in conjunction with air entrained cement/concrete or with other admixtures may significantly
increase total entrained air content. Testing is strongly advised.
• Do not use a solvent based curing compound on latex modified mortars.
30
TAMMSWELD

Rewettable Latex Bonding Agent for Concrete
Description
TAMMSWELD is a rewettable liquid bonding agent and polymer modifier for concrete and cement mortars.
TAMMSWELD is a high film build, copolymer or polyvinyl acetate emulsion.
• Concrete • Concrete block • Plywood
• Brick • Plaster • Hardboard
• Tile • Gypsum board • Wood
• Stone • Lath • Interior and exterior surfaces
Features/Benefits
• High build bonding agent or polymer admixture • Improves durability
• Increases bond strength • Long open time
Physical Property Value

Unit Weight 8.9 lb/gal (4 kg/L)
VOC Content < 10 g/L
Viscosity 500 to 1,000 cp
Bond Strength, ASTM C 1042 4,600 psi
TAMMSWELD
Packaging
Tammsweld is packaged in cases of 6/1 gal (3.8 L) containers and in 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
2 years in original, unopened containers.
ASTM C 1059, Type I
Coverage
200 to 250 ft²/gal (4.91 to 6.14 m²/L) on dense surfaces. Porous surfaces may require more material. Do not
exceed 300 ft²/gal (7.3 m²/L).
Master Format #:
Directions for Use

03 05 00
Surface Preparation: Surface must be clean, dry and structurally sound. The substrate must also be free of all
curing compounds, form release agents and any other contaminants, which may prevent the proper penetration
of TAMMSWELD. The preferred method of surface preparation is mechanical abrasion. For oil-contaminated
surfaces, using steam cleaning in conjunction with a strong emulsifying detergent may be considered. Rinse
thoroughly with potable water. Lightly dampen the surface with potable water before applying TAMMSWELD.

31
Application: Bonding Agent: Stir TAMMSWELD thoroughly before use. Do not dilute. TAMMSWELD will dry in
approximately one hour depending on the temperature and humidity. Extremely porous surfaces may require
two coats of TAMMSWELD. For hand application, wet brushes or rollers before use and shake out excess water.
For larger areas or faster application, use airless spray equipment with 0.015" to 0.020" (0.38 to 0.51 mm) orifice
size spray tips. Hold spray gun 12" to 18" (30.5 to 45.7 cm) from the surface and apply TAMMSWELD using a
cross coat technique consisting of a horizontal pass followed by a vertical pass. TAMMSWELD is formulated
to provide exceptional bond when first activated by moisture. If more than 7 days pass following application,
check several areas to ensure adequate adhesion. Make test applications on questionable surfaces.
Polymer Modifier: When using TAMMSWELD to produce a polymer modified mortar, add approximately 3
gal (11.36 L) of TAMMSWELD per 100 lbs (45.4 kg) of cement content in the mortar material. The properties
achieved by using TAMMSWELD as a polymer modifier will vary depending on the composition of the mortar,
and a thorough evaluation of properties should be completed prior to using the polymer modified mix.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with detergent and water immediately following use. Clean drips and over-spray with
water while still wet. Dried TAMMSWELD may require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Do not use TAMMSWELD where constant moisture or hydrostatic pressure is present (swimming pools,
cisterns or other areas that will be immersed).
• Do not dilute TAMMSWELD.
• Keep from freezing.
• Do not apply to frozen or frost filled surfaces.
• Do not apply if temperature is below 50°F (10°C).
• Do not over-trowel, or overwork cement mortars modified with TAMMSWELD.
• Store at temperatures between 50°F to 90°F (10°C to 32°C). Protect from freezing.
Rev. 6.11
32
DURAL 365

Fast Setting, All-Weather Polyester Adhesive
Description
DURAL 365 is a fast setting, non-sag polyester doweling adhesive for concrete, masonry, brick, and stone
applications. DURAL 365 has a high compressive modulus and strength, can be used in damp conditions, and
can be installed at temperatures as low as 20°F (-7°C) and up to 120°F (49°C). In addition, DURAL 365 has a
short bolt-up time of just one hour at 75°F (24°C).
• Anchoring and doweling • General purpose concrete adhesive
• Capping gel for crack injection
Features/Benefits
• Fast cure time • Outstanding adhesion to concrete
• Can be used in damp environments • High strength
• Wide application temperature range Can contribute to LEED points
Property Result
Mix Ratio 10:1
Color Part A: Gray Part B: White Mixed: Gray
Working Time at 75°F (24°C) 7 minutes
Cure Time at 75°F (24°C) 60 minutes
Consistency Non-Sag Gel
Dural 365
7,300 (50)
ASTM D 638
1.4
ASTM D 638
10,220 (70)
ASTM D 695
> 197,100 (1,359)
ASTM C 695
Bond Strength, psi (MPa) 2 days: 1,175 (8.1)
ASTM C 882 14 days: 1,700 (11.7)
Water Absorption, %
0.25
ASTM D 570
Heat Deflection Temperature, 7 days
135°F (57°C)
Master Format #:
ASTM D 648
Linear Coefficient of Shrinkage
0.002
03 05 00
ASTM D 2566
Properties tested at laboratory conditions.
Packaging
DURAL 365 is packaged in cases of ten 28 oz. (828 mL) cartridges.

33
Shelf Life
1 year in original, unopened containers.
DURAL 365 meets the performance requirements of ASTM C 881 Type I, II, IV, and V, Grade 3, Class A, B, C
Coverage/Yield
One 28 oz. (828 mL) cartridge yields approximately 50 in3 (820 cm3).
Directions for Use

Anchoring and Doweling: Always prepare holes in advance before dispensing cartridge. DURAL 365 has
been successfully tested for damp hole pull-out (tension) and may be used in this type of application. However,
for optimum performance it is best to install into cleaned and prepared, dry holes. For best results, schedule
dispensing to consume an entire cartridge at one time with no interruption of adhesive flow.
Drill hole to proper diameter and depth. (Hole size and spacing is the responsibility of the project engineer.)
Use a brush to loosen any debris inside the hole, then blow out dust and debris from the bottom of the hole with
compressed air.
Insert cartridge into dispensing gun and ensure that it is properly seated with shoulder of cartridge flush with
top bracket of the dispenser. Remove plastic cap and shipping plug from the tip of the cartridge. Dispense a
small amount of adhesive into a disposable container until even flow of Part A (gray) and Part B (white) material
is observed.
NOTE: Warming of cartridges is recommended at temperatures below 65°F (18°C). If cartridges are not warmed,
the DURAL 365 will be very thick and dispensing will be difficult.
Thread nozzle onto the cartridge and secure with retaining nut. Dispense enough DURAL 365 into a disposable
container until the color becomes a consistent gray with no streaks. If a pneumatic dispenser is used, limit air
pressure to a maximum of 90 psi (0.62 MPa).
Place end of nozzle in the bottom of the hole. Begin dispensing the material, filling approximately 1/2 of the hole
with DURAL 365 while slowly withdrawing the nozzle. Fill completely full for holes that are totally submerged
in water. Insert the threaded rod or rebar to the bottom of the hole while turning clockwise. The threaded rod
or rebar should be free of dirt, grease, oil, or other foreign materials. Do not disturb or bolt-up until minimum
bolt-up time has passed.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to force adhesive out of a hardened mixer nozzle. Use a new mixer nozzle to avoid
rupturing the container. If a leak should develop, discontinue use immediately and use a new cartridge.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and application equipment immediately after use with acetone.
• Store in a dry environment at temperatures between 40°F to 95°F (4°C to 35°C).
• Warm cartridges when ambient or storage temperatures fall below 65°F (18°C).
• Concrete should be cured for 28 days.
Rev. 6.11
34
Aquastain HS 37
Aquastain T-96 39
Euco AG 100 41
Super Wall-Pro 43
Tammolastic 45
Tamms AG 400 47
Tamms Stucco Finish 49
Tammscoat 51
AQUASTAIN HS
Decorative and protective, water-based, acrylic stain

Description
AQUASTAIN HS is a water-based, acrylic stain used to protect and decorate sound masonry and concrete surfaces.
• Concrete masonry units
• Exterior and interior
• Stone and brick
• Concrete
• Stucco
Features/Benefits
• Repels water • Breathable
• Excellent adhesion • Freeze-thaw stable
• Protects from carbonation • Outstanding color retention
• Resists mildew and fungus growth Can contribute to LEED points
Material Properties @ 75°F (24°C)
Weight/gal.........................11.5 ± 0.5 lbs (1.4kg/L) Freeze thaw durability Astm C666
300 cycles..................................................100.9%
Viscosity............................................. 98 to 105 ku
Scaling resistance Astm 672
Solids by weight................................... 55 To 60%
Visual rating ......................................................... 0
Criterion Results 25 cycles, scaling mass.................................none
Water permeability Salt spray resistance astm b 117 5% solution
Astm E514-86 Dampness shows none 2,000 hrs..............no adhesion loss@ 90°f ± 2˚f
First water shows none Fungus growth fed test 141, method 6271
Back of wall in 4 hrs none 28 days...........................................................none
Wind driven rain resistance TT-C 555b excellent Impact resistance astm d 2794..........no chipping
Aquastain HS
Water Vapor Trans. ASTM E 96 Flexibility
20 mil film 12 to14 perms 1” (25 mm) mandrel........ no chipping or breaking
Weatherometer Astm G26 Abrasion resistance astm c 418 0 mils abraded
6,000 hrs......no crazing, cracking, chipping or flaking
Carbon dioxide diffusion Appearance: AQUASTAIN HS is available in standard
Diffusion coefficient............... .......1.1 X 10-6cm2 sec-1 colors and tint bases for universal colorant systems.
Diffusion resistance coefficient.................. 155,900 Custom colors are available with minimum quantity orders.
Klopfer criteria............................................ passes Contact your local representative for further details.
Packaging
AQUASTAIN HS is packaged in 5 gal (18.9 L) pails, 30 gal (113.6 L) drums.
Shelf Life
Coverage
ft²/gal (m²/L)
Master Format #:
Aquastain HS 1st Coat 2nd Coat

Porous Surfaces 100 to 150 (2.45 to 3.68) 100 to 150 (2.45 to 3.68)
09 93 00
Smooth Surfaces 120 to 170 (2.94 to 4.17) 130 to 180 (3.19 to 4.42)
0 to 80 (.98 to 1.96)
Note: Coverage rates are approximate and are for estimating purposes only. Surface temperature, porosity, and texture
will determine actual material requirements. Apply samples to all surfaces to be coated. Obtain approval of architect or
owner for the color, finish, water repellency, and coverage before proceeding with work.

37
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: Cure new concrete and masonry surfaces for 28 days. Concrete surfaces must be structurally
sound, free of loose or deteriorated concrete and clean of dust, dirt, paint, efflorescence, oil and all other contaminants.
Preparation should be done by mechanical means to achieve a surface profile equal to CSP 1 to 2 in accordance with
ICRI Guideline 310.2. Properly clean area that has been profiled.
Mixing: AQUASTAIN HS should be mechanically mixed using a low speed ¾ “ (19 mm) drill with a mixing paddle.
Mix thoroughly to a uniform, smooth consistency. Do not aerate the mix.
Application: To spray AQUASTAIN HS, use airless spray equipment with a 0.025 to 0.035 in. (.64 to .89 mm) orifice
size spray tip. Spray AQUASTAIN HS using a “cross coat” technique (horizontal pass followed by a vertical pass).
Avoid applying to excess, which can cause the product to run down the wall or puddle. Backrolling is recommended
during application of the first coat. The second coat can be sprayed after the first coat is dry, approximately 12 to 24
hours. Do not backroll during the second coat. For hand application use brushes or rollers designed for latex paint.
Dampen the brushes or rollers with clean water before use. When using rollers, uniform millage is achieved by rolling
AQUASTAIN HS in one direction only.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and application equipment immediately after use with soap and hot water. Clean overspray or drips while
still wet with soap and hot water. Dried material may require strong solvents or mechanical abrasion for removal.
• AQUASTAIN HS is a water based product and nonflammable.
• Provide adequate ventilation.
• Do not thin or dilute AQUASTAIN HS.
• Do not apply AQUASTAIN HS if rain is expected within 8 hours.
• Do not apply over frost filled surfaces.
• Do not apply if surface and ambient temperatures are below 45°F (7°C) or above 90° F (32°C).
• Store at temperatures between 50°F to 90°F (10°C to 32°C). Protect from freezing.
• Do not apply to non-absorbent materials such as glass, metal, glazed brick or glazed tile.
• Not for use on traffic bearing surfaces.
Rev. 6.11
38
AQUASTAIN T-96
Water-Based, Decorative, Penetrating Stain

Description
AQUASTAIN T-96 is a penetrating, non-flammable, decorative, water based, liquid polymer stain. AQUASTAIN
T-96 retains the the natural texture of the concrete or masonry surface without leaving a “painted look.” It resists
ultraviolet degradation, airborne dirt, smog, industrial fumes, acid rain and most other atmospheric chemicals.
AQUASTAIN T-96 is a water-based formulation based on acrylic resins, inorganic pigments, fillers and proprietary
additives.
• Architectural finishes for buildings • Median barrier • Retaining walls
• Sound walls • Interior/exterior surfaces • Decorative finish
• Highway bridge structures • Concrete block or brick • Stucco
Features/Benefits
• Resists untraviolet degradation • Fights atmospheric conditions
• Protects and provides a uniform color finish to Can contribute to LEED points
precast or cast-in-place concrete
Viscosity........................................ 400 to 900 cps Appearance
VOC content............................................< 50 g/L
Weight/gal..............................11.10 lbs (1.3 kg/L) AQUASTAIN T-96 is available in a wide range of
Solids by weight...................................35 to 45% colors. Custom colors are also available subject to
Dry time......................................15 to 45 minutes minimum order quantities. Contact your local Euclid
Chemical representative for details.
AQUASTAIN T-96
Cure time............................................3 to 6 hours
Weathering resistance...........................excellent
Abrasion resistance (Taber Abraser) ........ CS17,
1000 gm, 1000 cycles.................. 160 mg wt. loss
Packaging
AQUASTAIN T-96 is packaged in 5 gal (18.9 L) and 30 gal (113.4 L) containers.
Shelf Life
Coverage
ft²/gal (m²/L)
Substrate 1st Coat 2nd Coat
Concrete 150 to 225 (3.68 to 5.52) 250 to 350 (6.14 to 8.59)
Concrete block (std) 100 to 175 (2.45 to 4.29) 175 to 275 (4.29 to 6.75)
Light weight/split face 40 to 60 (0.98 to 1.47) 60 to 100 (1.47 to 2.45)
Master Format #:
Brick 60 to 100 (1.47 to 2.45) 80 to 150 (1.96 to 3.68)

Stucco 60 to 100 (1.47 to 2.45) 80 to 120 (1.96 to 2.94)
09 93 00
Note: AQUASTAIN T-96 coverage rates are approximate and are for estimating purposes only. Surface temperature, porosity and
texture will determine actual material requirements. Sample areas should be completed for all surfaces to be stained. Obtain architect
and/or owner approval for the color, finish, and coverage rates before proceeding with the job.

39
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: Cure new concrete or masonry surfaces for 28 days. Cracks, voids and holes in old
concrete should be repaired prior to application of AQUASTAIN T-96. The surface must be structurally sound,
clean, free of dirt, paint, laitance, efflorescence and other contaminants. Provide an absorptive surface on all
substrates including smooth precast or formed concrete by abrading the surface. Preparation should be done
by mechanical means to achieve a surface profile equal to CSP 1 to 2 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2.
Properly clean profiled area. On porous surfaces or where required, the surface should be waterproofed with
a compatible penetrating waterproofing sealer, such as CHEMSTOP WB, prior to applying AQUASTAIN T-96.
Mixing: AQUASTAIN T-96 comes ready to use and requires no additives. Mix AQUASTAIN T-96 with a slow speed
drill and mixing blade to thoroughly disperse all ingredients. Do not aerate the mix. Do not dilute AQUASTAIN
T-96 with any other material.
Application: AQUASTAIN T-96 should be applied when the temperature is warmer than 45°F (7°C) and rising.
AQUASTAIN T-96 is applied in two coats. The first coat primes the surface and equalizes the absorption of the
substrate. The second coat, which is applied 12 to 24 hours after the first coat, provides the finished appearance
and maximizes the durability. AQUASTAIN T-96 can be applied by airless spray, roller or brush. The preferred
application method is airless spray using equipment capable of 1000 to 3000 psi (6.89 to 20.68 MPa) with a self
cleaning reversible spray tip with a 0.021" (0.53 mm) orifice. When applying AQUASTAIN T-96, hold the spray
gun 12” to 18” (30 to 45 cm) from the wall. Use a cross coat technique which consists of a horizontal pass
followed by a vertical pass. For fluted surfaces, only make vertical passes and hold the sprayer at the proper
angle to coat both sides of the flutes. Apply AQUASTAIN T-96 to the point of saturation with no run down. Use
brushes or rollers to remove sags or streak marks. Other use of brushes or rollers should be avoided except to
coat edges or areas that cannot be sprayed. Apply the second coat 12 to 24 hours after the first using the same
technique. Complete cure and full color development will be realized 48 hours after the second coat.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and application equipment immediately after use with detergent and hot water. Dried material may
require solvents or abrasion for removal.
• AQUASTAIN T-96 is not intended for horizontal surfaces.
• Do not thin or dilute AQUASTAIN T-96.
• Do not apply to exterior surfaces if rain is expected within 12 hours.
• Do not apply if temperatures are below 45°F (7°C) or above 90°F (32°C). High humidity and cool temperatures
will slow the drying process.
• Do not apply to frost filled surfaces.
• Do not apply to non absorbent materials such as glass, metal, glazed brick or glazed tile.
• AQUASTAIN T-96 is not intended to seal leaks or withstand hydrostatic water pressure.
• Fresh concrete and mortar joints should be cured at least 28 days before applying AQUASTAIN T-96.
Rev. 6.11
40
EUCO AG 100

Sacrificial Wax Anti-Graffiti System
Description
EUCO AG 100 is a specially formulated water-based wax resin designed for use as a protective barrier against
graffiti. EUCO AG 100 is simply applied as a sacrificial system over new concrete and masonry substrates or
over surfaces that have been treated with coatings such as Euclid Chemical’s TAMMSCOAT acrylic coating.
EUCO AG 100 prevents aerosol paints, ink and other marking devices from penetrating and subsequently
staining the substrate.
• Sound barrier walls • Bridge abutments
• Masonry walls • Multi-tennant buildings
• Urban buildings
Features/Benefits
• Easily applied by spraying
• Applies milky white and dries to a low gloss clear finish
• Provides grafitti protection
• Low odor
• Easily removed by heated pressure washing
Form.........................White liquid (dries clear)
VOC Content..................................... 0.12 g/L
Euco AG 100
Solids Content..................................... 16.2%
Packaging
EUCO AG 100 is available in 5 gal (18.9L) pails, 55 gal (208L) drums and 250 gal (946L) totes.
Shelf Life
1 year in original, unopened, properly stored package.
Coverage
EUCO AG 100 coverage rates are approximate, and for estimating purposes only. Surface temperature,
porosity, and texture will determine actual material requirements. Apply samples to all surfaces to be covered
to measure actual coverage rate. Obtain approval from the architect and/or owner for the finish and coverage
before proceeding with the job. Typical coverage rates for EUCO AG 100 over smooth concrete substrates
Master Format #:
treated with Euclid Chemical’s TAMMSCOAT is 200 – 250 ft2/gal (4.9 - 6.1 m2/L). Typical coverage over
untreated substrates are as follows:
09 96 23
Brick 125 - 225 ft2/gal (3.1 - 5.5 m2/L)

CMU 70 - 120 ft2/gal (1.7 - 2.9 m2/L)
Concrete 100 - 200 ft2/gal (2.5 - 4.9 m2/L)

41
Directions for Use
SURFACE PREPARATION: All surfaces must be structurally sound, dry, free of grease, oils, coatings, dust, curing
compounds and other contaminants. Old painted surfaces should be properly adhered to the substrate. Surface
contaminants shall be thoroughly removed with the use of waterblasting, sandblasting, wire brushing, scraping, or
other approved methods.
MIXING INSTRUCTIONS: EUCO AG 100 comes ready to use and requires no additives. Slowly stir EUCO AG 100
with a slow speed drill and mixing blade to thoroughly mix all ingredients. Do not aerate.
APPLICATION TECHNIQUES: Masonry, concrete and cement plaster surfaces must be cured a minimum of 28
days prior to applying EUCO AG 100. If applying over a EUCLID CHEMICAL DECORATIVE COATING allow 24 hours
cure prior to the application of EUCO AG 100. Ambient and surface temperatures should be between 50 - 100 Fo (10
- 38oC) at the time of application. EUCO AG 100 may be applied by roller, brush or spray equipment. Apply EUCO
AG 100 to achieve a continuous pinhole free film. If runs or sags occur, immediately brush them out to even the film.
CAUTIONS: Do not thin or dilute EUCO AG 100. Do not aerate during mixing. Do not apply unless surface, air, and
material temperatures are 50°F (10°C) and rising. Cure new concrete 28 days before application. Do not apply if rain
is imminent within 12 hours, or surfaces are wet or frozen. Use on above grade, vertical surfaces only. Do not use
below grade or on horizontal surfaces exposed to ponding water.
REMOVAL OF GRAFFITI ON EUCO AG 100: 1) Hot waterblast the graffiti surface using 170 - 180°F (77 - 82°C)
water at pressure of 900 - 1200 psi (6 - 8 MPa). Keep pressure as low as possible to prevent damage of underlying
surface 2) Start at the top of the area to be removed and work down, allowing the water to heat the surface and carry
away the graffiti. Clean all graffiti in this fashion. 3) Note where graffiti has been removed as these will be the areas
to which new EUCO AG 100 needs to be applied. 4) Allow the area to dry, and then reapply a new coat of EUCO
AG 100 in a uniform, pinhole-free continuous film. Overlap on to the previously coated surface not removed by the
heated waterblasting.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and application equipment immediately after use with water. Clean spills or drips with water while the
material is still wet. Dried EUCO AG 100 will need to be removed with hot water as described above.
• Store at temperatures between 50 - 90°F (10 - 32°C).
• Protect from moisture and freezing temperatures during storage.
• When applied to dark colors of TAMMSCOAT, EUCO AG 100 may blush when moisture vapor transmission
(MVT) is present.
• A test area is highly recommended to evaluate coverage rates and appearance.
Rev. 6.11
42
SUPER WALL-PRO
High Build Elastomeric Wall Coating

Description
SUPER WALL-PRO is a fiber reinforced, water based acrylic coating that weatherproofs, protects and beautifies
a variety of wall surfaces and other building materials. SUPER WALL-PRO is a non-toxic, non-fading, tintable
coating which provides a tough, extremely flexible high build film. SUPER WALL-PRO contains no asbestos,
glass or ceramic fibers.
• Masonry • Metal
• Stone • Exterior wall surfaces
• Concrete • Above grade exterior insulating
• Plaster finishing systems
• Stucco
Features/Benefits
• Beautifies and protects walls of all types • Gives complete coverage in one coat
• Elastomeric for excellent resistance to movement • Excellent weathering resistance against heat, cold,
• UV stable under severe exterior exposure wind, snow and rain
• Internally reinforced with high strength fibers • VOC compliant water based system
• Provides a completely waterproof veneer • Tintable in over forty custom colors
SUPER WALL-PRO
Typical Engineering Data
The following results were developed under laboratory conditions:
% Solids by weight.............................................................. 63±1%

% Solids by volume............................................................. 52±1%
% Elongation @77°F (25°C) (ASTM D 2370)...................... 215±25%
Flexibility @ -15°F (-26°C) (ASTM D522) 1/2" (1.3 cm)..........passes
Tensile Strength @77°F (25°C) (ASTM D 2370).....375 psi (2.6 MPa)
Permeance Rating.......................................................................12
Dry to Touch ......................................................................... 1 hour
Flow of used film....................................... none up to 180°F (82°C)
Viscosity @ 77°F (25°C) (ASTM D 562)....................................12 KU
Weight per gallon (ASTM D 1475)..11.0 ±0.2 lb/gal (1.3 ±.02 kg/L)
Flashpoint............................................................................... none
Specific Gravity............................................................... 1.33±0.2
VOC Content..................................................................... < 50 g/L
Master Format #:
Appearance: SUPER WALL-PRO provides a lightly textured finish with a flat non-glossy appearance. SUPER
WALL-PRO is available in over 40 colors. Contact your local Euclid Chemical representative for a color selection
09 96 53
guide.
Canadian MTQ

43
Packaging
SUPER WALL-PRO is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
1 year in original unopened package.
Coverage
Porosity, texture of surface, and specified dry-film thickness will dictate exact coverage.
Suggested coverage rates are as follows:
Coverage Rate Film Thickness

67 ft2/gal (1.6m2/L) 24 wet mils, 15 dry mils
50 ft2/gal (1.2m2/L) 32 wet mils, 20 dry mils
33 ft2/gal (0.8m2/L)* 48 wet mils, 30 dry mils*

*2 coats required; each coat 24 wet mils
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: All surfaces are to be free of loose mortar, dirt, grease, oil, loose paint, rust and other
foreign matter which could prevent proper adhesion. Previously painted surfaces shall be water blasted to
remove loose paint or excessive chalking.
Surface repairs can be made as follows:
Hairline cracks: Less than the thickness of a credit card (30 mils/ 0.8mm): detail with SUPER WALL-PRO.
Large cracks: Spalled or deteriorated concrete; use VERTICOAT, EUCOPATCH or SPEED CRETE RED LINE
patching and resurfacing compounds available from The Euclid Chemical Company.
Mixing: SUPER WALL-PRO is a one component, pigmented product that should be pre-mixed prior to application.
Placement: SUPER WALL-PRO dries in one hour to a flat finish and produces a light texture. On extremely
hot days it may be necessary to dampen the surface before application. SUPER WALL-PRO can be applied
by brush, roller or spray gun to specified coverage rate. Mix well before using. Do not thin. Spray application
requires heavy-duty equipment such as Graco King 45:1 or Graco Bulldog 30:1.
Clean-Up
Use warm, soapy water to clean tools and equipment.
• Not suitable for below grade, exterior waterproofing.
• Keep product from freezing.
• Protect coating application from freezing for a minimum of 48 hours after placement.
• Not suitable for underwater applications
• Do not thin.
Rev. 6.11
44
TAMMOLASTIC
Elastomeric, Decorative Coating with Mold & Fungus Inhibitors

Description
TAMMOLASTIC is a protective, decorative, flexible coating formulated from high performance elastomeric
acrylic resins. TAMMOLASTIC contains mold and fungus inhibitors, freeze-thaw stabilizers, and mineral oxide
color pigments which provide long term protection from severe weather, dirt, airborne pollutants while providing
resistance to ultraviolet light degradation. TAMMOLASTIC is available in a smooth finish only.
• Vertical exterior or interior concrete • S tone
• Formed or precast concrete • Brick
• Masonry • Cement plaster, stucco
Features/Benefits
• Repels water • Excellent adhesion
• Enhances appearance • Bridges hairline cracks
• Resistant to weathering over a long time • Resists the growth of mold & fungus
• Breathable film Can contribute to LEED points
Material Properties @ 75°F (24°C) Carbon Dioxide Diffusion
Weight (gal/L)......................... 12.0 ± 2 lb (1.4kg) Diffusion coefficient...................1.2 x 10-6cm2 sec-1
VOC Content............................................< 50 g/l Diffusion resistance coefficient................. 145,000
Viscosity............................................. 116-120 KU Klopfer criteria............................................ passes
Solids by weight....................................65 to 70% Wind Driven Rain Resistance TT-C 555 B
Tensile Strength Water penetration...........................................none
ASTM D 412 psi (MPa)...... 190 to 210 (1.31 to 1.45) Blister density/size.........................................none
Tensile Elongation, %..........................290 to 315 Freeze Thaw Durability ASTM C 666
TAMMOLASTIC
Water Vapor Transmission ASTM E 96 300 cycles....................................................97.3%
20 mils film.....................................10 to 11 perms Scaling Resistance ASTM C 672 25 cycles
Mandrel Bend 1/8"(3.22 mm) Criterion Result Visual Rating........................................................ 0
ASTM D 522............................15°F (-26°C) passes Scaling Mass..................................................none
0°F (-18°C) passes Salt Spray Resistance Kentucky Method
75°F (24°C) passes 300 hrs , 5% solution.................. no adhesion loss
Weatherometer ASTM G 26 ....................6,000 hrs @90°F(32˚C)................................. ±2°F (±-17˚C)
No crazing, cracking, chipping or flaking. Light Fungus Growth Fed Test 141, Method 6271
chalk and color change. No other deterioration 28 Days..........................................................none
Values presented are typical and not necessarily referenced to create specifications.
Appearance: TAMMOLASTIC is available in many standard colors. Tint Bases are also available for universal
colorant systems. Other manufacturers’ colors are available upon request & subject to minimum order quantities.
Available in smooth finish only. Contact your local Euclid Chemical representative for additional information.
Packaging
TAMMOLASTIC is packaged in 5 gal (18.9 L) pails, 30 gal (113.7 L ) drums.
Master Format #:
Shelf Life
09 96 53
Canadian MTQ

45
Coverage
Surface ft²/gal (m²/L) TAMMS H/P PRIMER ft2/gal (m2/L)
1st coat 2nd coat Porous Concrete 100 to 50 (2.45 to 3.68)
Textured 0 to 70 (1.23 to 1.72) 6
5 0 to 80 (1.47 to 1.96) Smooth Concrete 200 to 300 (4.91 to 5.33)
Smooth 6
0 to 80 (1.47 to 1.96) 80 to 100 (1.96 to 2.45) TAMMS MASONRY PRIMER 40 to 80 (0.98 to 1.96)
Note: TAMMOLASTIC coverage rates are approximate and for estimating purposes only. Surface temperature, and texture will
determine actual material requirements. Apply samples to all surfaces to be coated. Obtain approval of Architect or Owner for the color,
finish, water repellency, and coverage before proceeding with work.
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: Cure new concrete and masonry surfaces for 28 days. Surface must be structurally sound, clean,
dry, and free of dust, dirt, oil, peeling paint, curing and form release compounds, and other contaminants. Provide an
absorptive surface on smooth precast, formed concrete, and other substrates by mechanical abrasion. Defective concrete,
honeycombs, cracks, cavities and other defects should be routed to sound concrete and patched using compatible
materials. Surface profile should be equal to CSP 1 to 2 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2. Priming: TAMMS H/P
Primer is used to prime new/old concrete. Use Tamms Masonry Primer on unpainted masonry block and similar
porous surfaces.
ixing: TAMMOLASTIC should be mixed mechanically using a low speed 3/4” (19mm) drill with a mixing paddle. Mix
M
thoroughly to a uniform, lump free consistency. Do not aerate the mix.
Application: Primer: Airless spray equipment or paint rollers may be used to apply TAMMS H/P PRIMER. Apply the
primer uniformly on the substrate. Product: TAMMOLASTIC may be applied 1 to 3 hours following primer application
using spray, roller or brush. Spray TAMMOLASTIC using the “cross coat’’ technique of a horizontal pass followed by a
vertical pass. Avoid applying excess causing the product to run down the wall or puddle. After application of the first coat,
back rolling is required. The second coat can be applied after the first coat is dry, typically in 12 to 24 hours depending upon
ambient conditions. Use rollers with a 1” to 1½” nap (25 to 38 mm), and dampen the brushes or rollers with clean water
and shake out excess water before use. When using rollers, uniform millage is achieved by rolling the TAMMOLASTIC in
one direction. Do not backroll. Apply the second coat of TAMMOLASTIC when the first coat is dry, usually in 12 to 24
hours.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and application equipment immediately after use with soap and hot water. Clean overspray or drips while still
wet with soap and hot water. Dried TAMMOLASTIC may require abrasion for removal.
• Store at temperatures between 50°F to 90°F (10°C to 32°C).
• Concrete must have cured at least 28 days prior to application.
• Do not thin or dilute TAMMOLASTIC.
• Do not apply if rain is forecast within 12 hours.
• Do not apply TAMMOLASTIC below 45°F (7°C) or above 90°F (32°C) or over frozen or frost-filled surfaces.
• Do not apply if weather conditions will not permit complete drying of TAMMOLASTIC before rain, dew or
freezing temperatures occur.
• Do not apply TAMMOLASTIC to non-absorbent materials such as glass, metal, glazed brick, or glazed tile.
• Not recommended for traffic surfaces.
• Not designed for use on traffic bearing surfaces.
Rev. 6.11
46
TAMMS AG 400
Permanent Anti-Graffiti Coating System

Description
TAMMS AG 400 Topcoat is a two-component, solvent-based aliphatic urethane coating for indoor and outdoor
use that has excellent anti-graffiti properties. It combines superior chemical and abrasion resistance with
excellent adhesion and weathering that make it effective for protecting surfaces that must be cleaned frequently
with cleaners and solvents to remove graffiti. TAMMS AG-400 Basecoat is a two-component water-based epoxy
that is used as a primer/base over previously uncoated concrete and masonry substrates. The TAMMS AG 400
system is used on concrete, concrete block, masonry and steel surfaces that are subject to defacing with graffiti.
TAMMS AG 400 Topcoat can also be used as a graffiti resistant topcoat over most Euclid Chemical brand epoxy
and acrylic coatings.
• Bridge abutments • Schools
• Tunnels • Washrooms
• Sound walls • Commercial properties
Features/Benefits
• Protects and provides a unifom color finish to concrete
• Excellent coating for graffiti prone areas
• Interior and exterior surfaces
Material Properties @ 75°F (24°C) AG-400 Basecoat AG-400 Topcoat
Pot Life (1gal) 1 to 1.5 hours 2 to 4 hours
TAMMS AG 400
Dry Time, Tack Free 5 to 8 hours 3 to 5 hours
Reapplication time 7 to 10 hours 5 to 9 hours
Final Cure, days 2 to 7 days 3 to 5 days
Mix Ratio by volume, Part A : Part B 4:1 2:1
Mixed Viscosity at 75°F (24°C) 400 to 900 cps 200 to 600 cps
Mixed Solids Content, by wt 43 to 47% 64% (clear), 73% (colors)
Flexibility, 1/8" (3.2 mm) Mandrel no cracks no cracks
VOC Content 118 g/L 330 g/L
Taber Abrasion Test (CS 17 wheel)
1,000 grams/500 cycles: 54 mg loss 22 mg loss
Adhesion, elcometer . 425 psi 350 psi
Appearance: TAMMS AG 400 Basecoat is available in clear. TAMMS AG-400 Topcoat is available in clear
gloss, black, tile red, concrete gray, white, light gray, medium gray, dark gray, light reflective, and tan. Custom
colors are available with minimum quantity orders and special pricing. Please contact your Euclid Chemical
Master Format #:
representative for additional details.

09 96 23
Packaging
TAMMS AG 400 Basecoat is available in 1 gallon (7.6 L) kits.
TAMMS AG 400 Topcoat is available in 3 gal (11.4 L) kits.

47
Shelf Life
Coverage
TAMMS AG 400 coverage rates are approximate
Basecoat 250 to 320 ft2/gal (6 to 8 m2/L)
and for estimating purposes only.
Topcoat 320 to 500 ft2/gal (8 to 12 m2/L)
Note: Surface porosity and texture will determine actual material requirements. Apply samples to all surfaces to
be covered. Obtain approval of the project architect or owner for the finish and coverage before proceeding with
the job.
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: Concrete: The surface must be structurally sound, clean, dry and free of laitance, dust,
dirt, oil, coatings, form release agents and other contaminants. Remove defective concrete, honeycombs,
cavities and other defects by routing to sound material. Repair areas with suitable repair mortars. Smooth, pre-
cast and formed concrete surfaces must be cleaned, roughened and made absorptive by mechanical means.
Steel: The surface should be abrasive blasted using clean & dry aggregate to a white metal finish and primed
immediately using a solvent based priming product.
Mixing: Premix Part A and Part B separately, then combine in a clean container. Mix thoroughly, using a “Jiffy”
or similar mixer, for 3 to 5 minutes. Scrape the sides of the container and the blades at least once during the
mixing. Do not aerate during mixing.
Application: The TAMMS AG 400 Basecoat can be applied by brush, short nap roller or airless spray equipment.
TAMMS AG 400 Topcoat can be applied after the Basecoat is dry but no longer than 24 hours. TAMMS AG
400 Topcoat can be applied by brush, short nap roller or airless spray equipment. When spraying TAMMS AG
400, use a cross coat technique of a horizontal spray coat followed by a uniform, overlapping vertical spray coat.
All runs and sags should be rolled before they dry. Proper safety precautions should be observed during spraying.
The TAMMS AG 400 system application should be done at surface and ambient temperatures between 50° F to 90°
F (10°C to 32°C) and with humidity below 90%.
Graffiti Removal: Graffiti removal should not be attempted until 48 hours after TAMMS AG 400 application.
Remove graffiti as soon as possible after the defacing by working on small areas at a time. Use commercially
available removers and apply in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment immediately following use with methyl ethyl ketone or acetone. Clean drips and over
spray while still wet with the same solvents. Dried TAMMS AG 400 will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Protect from moisture and freezing.
• Do not mix or apply TAMMS AG 400 at temperatures below 50°F (10°C) or when humidity is higher than 90%.
• An epoxy primer applied under Clear TAMMS AG 400 may develop a yellow cast.
• Provide adequate ventilation and use proper safety equipment during application.
• Direct application of matte finish to primed concrete may lead to a cloudy, uneven appearance.
• Concrete surfaces may darken to give a “wet” look after application of TAMMS AG 400.
• A test patch is highly recommended to evaluate coverage rates and appearance.
• TAMMS AG 400 is FLAMMABLE; keep away from flames and provide proper protection during application.
Rev. 6.11
48
TAMMS STUCCO FINISH
Weatherproof, Decorative Cementitious Coating

Description
TAMMS STUCCO FINISH is a textured, portland cement based stucco finish coat designed for interior or
exterior applications.
• F ormed or precast concrete • B rick
• Masonry • Commercial buildings
• Stone • Residential
Features/Benefits
• eatherproof and decorate concrete and masonry
W • C onsistent color finish
• Mixes easily with potable water • Excellent adhesion
• Trowel or spray apply • Highly durable
• Available in pre-blended colors
Appearance: TAMMS STUCCO FINISH is available in the standard colors Adobe, Oyster, Sand and White.
Special and custom colors are also available subject to minimum order quantities. Contact your local Euclid
Chemical representative for details.
Packaging
TAMMS STUCCO FINISH is packaged in 80 lb (36.3 kg) poly-lined bags.
TAMMS STUCCO FINISH
Shelf Life
• ASTM C 926
• ANSI A42.2
Coverage
One 80 lb (36.3 kg) bag of TAMMS STUCCO FINISH will coverage approximately 60 ft² (5.6 m² ) applied at approximately
1/8" (3.2 mm) thick.
Note: The following coverage rates are approximate and for estimating purposes only. The texture, thickness, and application techniques will
determine the quantity of TAMMS STUCCO FINISH required
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: Cure new concrete for 28 days. Cracks, voids and holes on old concrete should be repaired
prior to application of TAMMS STUCCO FINISH. The surface must be structurally sound, clean, free of dirt, paint,
laitance, efflorescence and other contaminants. For maximum bond, apply TAMMSWELD to smooth, dense or non-
porous substrates prior to applying TAMMS STUCCO FINISH. The substrate NOT coated with TAMMSWELD should
be Saturated Surface Dry (SSD) prior to applying TAMMS STUCCO FINISH. If the substrate has been treated with
Master Format #:
TAMMSWELD, no water is required. Consult ANSI A42.2, A42.3 and ASTM C926 for surface preparation on scratch
and brown coat applications requiring metal reinforcement.
09 97 26
Mixing: One 80 lb (36.3 kg) bag of TAMMS STUCCO FINISH will require approximately 8 qt (7.57L) of potable water
or mixing liquid to produce a trowel consistency. A spray consistency may require up to an additional 1 qt (0.95 L) of
liquid. In either mix, the quantity of liquid used must be uniform from batch to batch. Mix TAMMS STUCCO FINISH
in a slow speed rotary mixer equipped with rubber tipped blades. High speed or prolonged mixing will entrap excess
air. With the mixer running, add 1/2 of the required liquid and slowly add the bag of the TAMMS STUCCO FINISH. Add
additional liquid to produce a smooth, workable consistency.

49
Continue mixing for 3 to 5 minutes. Stop the mixer, and allow the material to “fatten” for approximately 5 to 10
minutes. Start the mixer and blend for an additional 1 to 2 minutes. Add liquid as needed to achieve desired
consistency. AKKRO-7T may be used in the mixing liquid to aid curing, reduce shrinkage, and improve bond
qualities and strength. Reduce the amount of water in each batch by 2 qt (1.89L), and replace it with 2 qt (1.89 L) of
AKKRO-7T. Work started with AKKRO-7T in the mix must contain AKKRO-7T in subsequent batches to help ensure
color uniformity throughout the job.
Application: To produce uniform texture and color, TAMMS STUCCO FINISH must be installed by experienced
workmen using the same application techniques and tools. Trowel Application: Apply TAMMS STUCCO FINISH
with sufficient pressure to ensure tight material contact and complete coverage of the substrate. Apply an even
coat of material to the surface, and immediately double back with a second trowel application. The total thickness
must be 1/8“ (3.2mm) minimum. Allow TAMMS STUCCO FINISH to lose surface moisture and stiffen slightly before
floating or texturing. Spray Application: Applicators must be experienced in the use of spray equipment designed
specifically for cement based materials. Apply TAMMS STUCCO FINISH with a professional type high production
plaster spray gun or hopper type gun. Spray a thin, even coat of TAMMS STUCCO FINISH onto the surface to obtain
uniform absorption. Hold the spray nozzle at a 90o angle a uniform distance from the surface. Immediately double
back with the finish coat before the first coat has lost its surface sheen. The finished coating should be 1/8” to 3/16”
(3.2 to 4.8 mm) thick. Spray to a natural break such as corners, control joints, expansion joints, roof lines, or wall and
ceiling openings. Mix variations, trowel or spray application techniques, texture, finish, weather conditions, and job
conditions, will affect the appearance of the final color and results obtained. Use proven, accepted stucco/plaster
application practices.
Curing: TAMMS STUCCO FINISH should be mist or fog spray cured with potable water to develop proper strengths.
Begin the curing process as soon as the stucco finish has set or hardened sufficiently to withstand the impact of the
water droplets. The frequency and duration of the moist cure depends upon the weather conditions. The minimum
cure period is usually 48 hours. Protect the wall with plastic, that is spaced away from the surface, to maintain a
moist atmosphere and to permit proper hydration of the cementitious materials. Do not allow the plastic to touch the
surface of the TAMMS STUCCO FINISH during the curing period. DO NOT MOIST CURE TAMMS STUCCO FINISH
WHEN AKKRO-7T HAS BEEN USED IN THE MIX.
Important: Field Samples: Before starting the work, construct a field sample or mock-up using all materials and systems
that will be employed in the actual construction process. TAMMS STUCCO FINISH must be mixed in full batch quantities,
using all job site procedures. Do not mix by hand. Obtain approval of the owner or architect for color, texture, and coverage
rates prior to beginning work.
Clean-Up
Clean mixing and application equipment with water immediately after use. Clean spills, overspray, splatters, or
excess form surfaces before material sets. Dried material may require mechanical means for removal.
• Do not apply TAMMS STUCCO FINISH to frozen or frost covered surfaces.
• Do not apply TAMMS STUCCO FINISH when temperatures below 40°F (4°C) or above 95°F (35°C) are expected
within 48 hours.
• Protect fresh TAMMS STUCCO FINISH from rain.
• Do not apply TAMMS STUCCO FINISH to horizontal traffic bearing surfaces.
• DO NOT MOIST CURE TAMMS STUCCO FINISH WHEN AKKRO-7T HAS BEEN USED IN THE MIX.
Rev. 6.11
50
TAMMSCOAT
Decorative and Protective, Water-Based, Acrylic Coating

Description
TAMMSCOAT is a high build, water-based, acrylic coating used to protect and decorate sound masonry and
concrete walls. TAMMSCOAT is available in a multitude of colors in either a smooth or fine (sanded) finish.
• Exterior and interior above grade walls • Brick
• Concrete • Stone
• Concrete masonry units • Stucco
Features/Benefits
• Repels water • Highly durable
• Excellent adhesion • Breathable
• Protects from carbonation • Freeze-thaw stable
• Resists mildew and fungus growth • Custom and standard colors & textures
• Outstanding color retention Can contribute to LEED points
Material Properties @ 75°F (24°C) Weatherometer ASTM G 26
FINE SMOOTH 6000 hrs No crazing, cracking, chipping or flaking
Weight/gal (kg/m2)............12.5 ± 0.5 lb 11.5 ± 0.5 lb Carbon Dioxide Diffusion
. (5.7 ±0.23) (5.2 ±0.23) Diffusion coefficient......................1.1 x 10-6cm2 sec-1
VOC Content....................< 50 g/L < 50 g/L Diffusion resistance coefficient....................155,900
Viscosity.........................118 to 125 ku 98 to 105 ku Klopfer criteria...............................................passes
Solids by weight................65 to 68% 55 to 60%
TAMMSCOAT
Freeze Thaw Durability ASTM C 666
Test Method Criterion Results 300 cycles.....................................................100.9%
Water Perm ASTM E 514 Scaling Resistance ASTM 672 25 cycles
Dampness shows................10 mins none Visual Rating...........................................................0
First water shows.................12 mins none Scaling Mass....................................................none
Back of wall @ 4 hours............75% none Salt Spray Resistance ASTM B117 2,000 hrs 5% solution
Wind Driven Rain Resistance TT-C 555B no adhesion loss............@ 90°F ± 2°F (24°C ± -17°C)
Rating......................................................E (excellent) Fed Test 141, Method 6271 Fungus Growth
Water Vapor Trans ASTM E 96 28 days...........................................................none
20 mils film..........................................12 to 14 perms Impact Resistance ASTM D 2794........ no chipping
Abrasion Resistance ASTM C 418..............0 mils abraded Flexibility Test
1" Mandrel (25mm)........ No chipping or breaking
Appearance: TAMMSCOAT is available in standard colors and tint bases for universal colorant systems. FINE or SMOOTH
texture finish is standard. Custom colors are available with minimum quantity orders. Contact your local Euclid Chemical
representative for further information.
Master Format #:
Packaging
09 96 53
TAMMSCOAT is packaged in 5 gal (18.9 L) pails, 30 gal (113.6 L) drums.
Shelf Life

51
Coverage
ft²/gal (m²/L)
TAMMSCOAT SMOOTH 1st Coat 2nd Coat
Porous surfaces 80 to 100 (1.96 to 2.45) 80 to 100 (1.96 to 2.45)
Smooth surfaces 80 to 120 (1.96 to 2.94) 100 to 130 (2.45 to 3.19)
TAMMSCOAT FINE
Porous surfaces 50 to 65 (1.23 to 1.60) 60 to 75 (1.47 to 1.84)
Smooth surfaces 75 to 100 (1.84 to 2.45) 85 to 110 (2.09 to 2.70)
TAMMS H/P PRIMER
Porous surfaces 100 to 150 (2.45 to 3.68)
Smooth surfaces 200 to 300 (if required) (4.91 to 5.33)
TAMMS MASONRY PRIMER 40 to 80 ( 0.98 to 1.96)
Note: TAMMSCOAT coverage rates are approximate and are for estimating purposes only. Surface temperature, porosity, and texture
will determine actual material requirements. Apply samples to all surfaces to be coated. Obtain approval of Architect or Owner for the
color, finish, water repellency, and coverage before proceeding with work.
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: Cure new concrete and masonry surfaces for 28 days. Surface must be structurally
sound, clean, dry, and free of dust, dirt, oil, peeling paint, curing and form release compounds, and other
contaminants. Provide an absorptive surface on smooth pre-cast, formed concrete and other substrates by
abrading the surface. Surface profile should be equal to CSP 1 to 2 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2.
Defective concrete and other defects should be routed to sound material and patched using compatible
restoration products. Priming: For concrete and masonry, especially in hot, windy conditions, priming with
TAMMS H/P Primer is recommended. For highly porous concrete block, priming with TAMMS MASONRY
PRIMER is recommended
Mixing: TAMMSCOAT should be mechanically mixed using a low speed 3/4" (19mm) drill with a mixing paddle.
Mix thoroughly to a uniform, smooth consistency. Do not aerate the mix.
Application: Spray TAMMSCOAT FINE using heavy duty spray equipment capable of spraying ceiling texture,
plaster or cementitious coatings. To spray TAMMSCOAT SMOOTH, use airless spray equipment with a 0.025”
to 0.035” (0.64 to 0.89 mm) orifice size spray tip. Spray TAMMSCOAT using a “cross coat” technique (horizontal
pass followed by a vertical pass). Avoid applying to excess, which can cause the product to run down the wall or
puddle. Backrolling is recommended during application of the first coat. The second coat can be sprayed after
the first coat is dry, approximately 12 to 24 hours. Do not backroll during the second coat. For hand application
use brushes and 1½” (38.1 mm) nap rollers designed for latex paint. Dampen the brushes or rollers with clean
water before use. When using rollers, uniform millage is achieved by rolling TAMMSCOAT in one direction only.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and application equipment immediately after use with soap and hot water. Clean overspray or drips
while still wet with soap and hot water. Dried material may require strong solvents or mechanical abrasion for
removal.
• Store at temperatures between 50°F (10°C) to 90°F (32°C).
• Do not thin or dilute TAMMSCOAT.
• Do not apply TAMMSCOAT if rain is expected within 8 hours.
• Do not apply over frost filled surfaces.
• Do not apply if surface and ambient temperatures are below 45°F (7°C) or above 90°F (32°C).
• Do not apply to non-absorbent materials such as glass, metal, glazed brick or glazed tile.
• Use HP PRIMER as a prime coat on very porous surfaces or in hot, windy conditions.
Rev. 6.11
52
Epoxy Based
Application Guide 55
Duraltex 57
Duraltex Express 59
Duraltex UV 61
Eucopoxy Tufcoat DBS 63
Urethane Based
Euco Tammoshield 65
APPLICATION GUIDE
For Euclid Chemical Decorative and Industrial Floor Coatings
Surface Preparation
A properly prepared surface is essential to a successful coating application. The surface must be structurally
sound, clean and free of grease, oil, curing compounds, soil, dust and other contaminants. New concrete
and masonry must be cured 28 days. Surface laitance must be removed. The Concrete Surface Profile (CSP)
should be equal to CSP 2-5 in accordance with Guideline 310.2 published by the International Concrete Repair
Institute (ICRI). Pre-cast and formed concrete surfaces should be cleaned, roughened, and made absorptive by
mechanical means. If it is not possible to achieve the appropriate surface texture with mechanical means, an
adequate surface can be prepared by acid etching with 15% hydrochloric acid. After etching, flush with copious
amounts of water to neutralize and clean the surface. All salts and residue from the reaction must be removed.
Allow concrete to dry before coating application. Following surface preparation, the strength of the surface
should be measured with an Elcometer or similar tensile pull tester (ASTM D 4541). The minimum tensile pull-off
strength should be 200 psi (1.4 MPa).
Do not apply epoxy or urethane coatings if there is excessive moisture in the concrete or if the vapor transmission
(MVT) rate is high. The concrete humidity and MVT rate should be determined before applying the coating. Two
test methods can be used to measure MVT; the “visqueen” or plastic sheet test (ASTM D 4263), or the “calcium
Chloride” test (ASTM F 1869). After surface preparation and moisture testing, a test section application of the
coating system is recommended to confirm good adhesion and compatibility of the coating with the surface.
When coating steel, all contamination should be removed and the steel surface prepared to a “near white” finish
(SSPC SP10) using clean dry blasting media.
APPLICATION GUIDE: DECORATIVE AND

Mixing Instructions
Mix coating using a low speed drill motor and a “Jiffy” type mixer. Pre-mix Part A and Part B separately for
INDUSTRIAL FLOOR COATINGS

approximately one minute. Combine the appropriate volumes of Part A and Part B, then mix thoroughly for 3 to
5 minutes. Scrape the bottom and sides of the containers at least once during mixing. Mix just enough material
that can be used within the working life. Do not aerate the mix.
Application Procedures
Select one for the following methods:
A) Floor Coatings - 10 to 20 mils; Apply properly mixed coating to the prepared surface by brush, short nap
roller or notched squeegee using the application rate provide on the product Technical Data Sheet to produce
a 10 mil thickness. A second coat is recommended for most industrial applications. The second coat can be
applied after the first coat becomes tack free (5 to 8 hours) but no later than 24 hours after application of the first
coat. The use of a primer will improve performance in marginal conditions.
B) Broadcast Floors - “Broom and Seed” (Optional) 1/16” to 1/8” (0.16 to 0.32 cm); The broadcast method
consists of spreading silica sand into the coating, typically used to construct solid colored, skid resistant floors.
This technique can also produce a wide variety of multi-colored floors using a clear coating and colored quartz
aggregate. The application procedure is similar for both systems. Use the application rate provided on the
specific product technial data to produce a 15 mil thickness. Apply the coating to the prepared substrate using
a brush, short nap roller or notched squeegee. While the material is still wet, broadcast clean dry aggregate
into the resin to excess – typically 20/40 mesh silica for solid color floors and colored quartz aggregate for
multi-colored floors. The aggregate should appear dry after application. If any area looks “wet”, immediately
broadcast additional aggregate over those areas. Aggregate application rates are 0.5 to 1.0 lbs/ft² (2.4 to 4.8
kg/m²). Allow the resin to cure. Sweep or vacuum excess. Repeat these steps until the desired thickness is
achieved. Aggregate size and shape will affect final surface texture. Apply a seal coat of clear coating for color
quartz aggregate floors or pigmented coating for solid color floors at the appropriate application coverage rate.
This “seal coat” is intended for areas subject to no or low moisture. In areas exposed to sunlight or high intensity
artificial light, color stability is improved if the seal coat is an aliphatic urethane such as EUCOTHANE, applied
at 150 to 200 ft²/gal (3.7 to 4.9 m²/L).
C) Broadcast Vinyl Chip Floors - (Optional) 1/32” to 1/16” (0.08 to 0.16 cm); Apply a prime coat of properly
mixed clear coating to the prepared substrate, using a brush, short nap roller or squeegee at the appropriate
coverage rate. Allow to cure for 6 to 8 hours, but no longer than 24 hours before proceeding.

55
Then apply properly mixed pigmented coating resin by brush, short nap roller or squeegee. While the material
is still wet, broadcast clean, dry Colored Vinyl Chips to the desired concentration (typically 1/4 to 1/2 lb/ft² (1.2
to 2.4 kg/m²). Allow to cure overnight. If desired, sand to smooth surface, vacuum thoroughly and apply a clear
topcoat. Allow to cure 24 hours before opening to traffic.
D) Slurry Applications (Alternative) - 1/16” to1/4” (0.16 to 0.63 cm); Apply a prime coat of the clear coating
to the prepared substrate using a brush or short nap roller. Do not allow the prime coat to become tack free. Mix
pigmented coating as described in the product technical data. Prepare a slurry by slowly adding 60/70 mesh
silica aggregate to the coating while mixing with a “Jiffy” mixer. The slurry proportions are 12 to 15 lbs (5.4 to
6.8 kg) of aggregate for each gal. of coating. Mix thoroughly yet do not aerate the mix. Pour the slurry on to
the primed surface and spread using a notched squeegee or gauge rake. Spiked shoes are recommended. A
slurry consisting of one gal (3.8 L) of mixed resin and 15 lbs (6.8 kg) of aggregate will cover approximately 20 ft² (1.8
m²) at 1/8” (0.32 cm) thickness. Backroll with a short nap roller. Broadcast clean dry 40 to 60 mesh silica into the
wet slurry coat to excess. Aggregate size and texture will affect final surface texture. Allow to cure and remove
excess aggregate by broom or vacuum. Apply a seal coat of coating with a flat squeegee or roller. Allow to cure
for 24 hours before opening to traffic.
E) Trowel Down Method (Alternative); 1/8” to1/4” (0.32 to 0.63 cm) The trowel down method can be used to
create solid color floors using pigmented coatings and silica aggregate, or a variety of multicolored floors using
clear coatings and colored quartz aggregate. The application methods are similar. Apply a prime coat of mixed
clear coating to the prepared surface at the appropriate coverage rate. Lightly broadcast 20/40 mesh silica
sand (1/4 lb/ft² (1.2 kg/m²) into the wet resin. Allow the prime coat to become tack free, typically 5 to 8 hours.
Prepare a mortar consisting of mixed coating and a trowel grade aggregate blend or color quartz aggregate.
Typical proportions are 4.5 parts of aggregate by volume to 1 part by volume mixed coating. Large quantities
of epoxy mortars are typically mixed in a mortar mixer; smaller quantities can be mixed in a pail using a mortar
blade mixer and slow speed drill. Gradually add the aggregate to the mixed resin. Mixing times are typically 3
to 5 minutes after all of the aggregate has been added. Ensure that the aggregate has been thoroughly mixed.
Place the mortar on to the tack free, primed surface no later than 24 hours after priming. Screed the mortar to
the desired thickness, trowel finish and allow to cure for 12 to 18 hours. A mortar consisting of one gal of resin
and 4.5 gals of aggregate will cover approximately 45 ft² (4.2 m²) at 1/8” (0.32 cm) thickness. Apply a seal coat.
In areas exposed to sunlight or high intensity artificial light, improved color stability is achieved if the coating
seal coat is an aliphatic urethane such as Eucothane, applied at a rate of 150 to 200 ft²/gal (3.7 to 4.9 m²/L).
Application Details
Cove base: To provide a seamless integral floor system at the floor/wall transition, a cove base of 2 to 6 inches (5 to
15 cm) in height may be required. The coating mixed with aggregate can be used as a cove base.
Static cracks and non-expansion joints: Before application of the coating, static cracks and other non-moving
joints should be routed, cleaned and filled with a semi-rigid epoxy joint filler or a detail coat of the intended epoxy.
Note: Depending on the specific project, correct implementation of other application details, such as floor terminations,
floor/drain detail, etc. may be required. For further information contact Euclid Chemical Technical Support at (800) 321-7628.
Clean-UP
Clean application tools and mixing equipment immediately after use with a solvent such as acetone or methyl
ethyl ketone (MEK). Clean drips or spills with the same solvent while still wet. Hardened epoxy and urethane
coatings will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
Ambient temperature during floor coating applications should be between 50°F and 90°F (10°C and 32°C).
Substrate temperature should be at least 50°F (10°C) and rising. Working time and cure time will decrease as
the temperature increases. Epoxy floor coatings will yellow upon prolonged exposure to ultraviolet light and
high intensity artificial lighting. An aliphatic urethane top coat can minimize the UV effects. Application of a test
area is recommended to confirm final appearance and texture of the floor with the facility owner. In all cases,
consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet before use.
Rev. 6.11
56
DURALTEX
Versatile, Chemically Resistant, Anti-Microbial Epoxy Floor Coating

Description
Duraltex is a two component epoxy coating designed to be used for a variety of flooring applications and methods.
• Warehouse and garage floors • Production rooms and loading docks
• Manufacturing plants, workshops • Kitchens, lavatories and showers
• Educational facilities and hospitals
Features/Benefits
• V
ersatile – coatings, broadcast floors, chipfloors, slurry, • Anti-microbial
broadcast and trowel-down • Chemical resistant
• User friendly • Low modulus
• Low odor – 100% solids Can contribute to LEED points
Material Properties @ 75°F (24°C) Water Absorption, ASTM D 570
Mix Ratio (by Volume)......................................2:1 24 hrs..........................................................<0.5%
VOC Content...........................................< 50 g/L Resistance to Mold Growth Rating:............... 10
Gel Time, 200 g, minutes.........................35 to 45 ASTM D 3273........................................... No Growth
Pot Life, 3 gal (11.4 L), minutes...............15 to 25 Resistance to Bacteria Growth
Tack Free, hrs...............................................4 to 5 ASTM G 22.............................................. No Growth
Hardness, Shore D ASTM D 2240............. 85 to 90 Monolithic Surfacing ASTM C 722..............Passes
DURALTEX
Tensile Strength, ASTM D 638 Abrasion Resistance, ASTM D 4060..... 32 mg loss
psi (MPa).................. 5,500 to 6,500 (37.9 to 44.8)
Tensile Elongation, ASTM D 638 %...........15 to 30 Available Colors: White, Light Reflective, Clear, Tan,
Compressive Strength, ASTM D 695 Light Gray, Concrete Gray, Medium Gray, Dark Gray,
Neat resin, psi (MPa) @ 24 hrs............7,500 (51.7) Black, and Tile Red. Custom colors are available,
@
7 days.............9,800 (67.6) subject to minimum quantity orders.
Bond Strength ASTM D 4541.... Greater than Concrete
Flammability ASTM D 635 Data presented are typical values obtained under laboratory
Self Extinguishing.................................. 0.75 Max. conditions.
Packaging
DURALTEX is packaged in 3 gal (11.4 L), 15 gal (56.8 L) and 150 gal (567.8 L) units.
Master Format #:
Shelf Life
09 96 56
USDA compliant

57
Coverage
Floor Coating (20 – 30 mils) Slurry Application 1/16” – 1/4” thick (1.6-6.4 mm)
Primer, DURALTEX Clear: 200-225 ft2/gal (4.9-5.5 m2/L) Primer, DURALTEX Clear: 200-225 ft2/gal (4.9-5.5 m2/L)
Basecoat: 100 ft /gal (2.4 m /L)
2 2
Basecoat (1 gal resin &12 # aggregate): 20 ft2/gal (0.5 m2/L)
Seal Coat (optional): 150 ft /gal (3.7 m /L)
2 2
Seal Coat
Broadcast Floor (Broom & Seed) 1/16”-1/8” thick (1.6-3.2 mm) DURALTEX: 150 ft2/gal (3.7 m2/L)
Basecoat, DURALTEX: 100 ft /gal (2.4 m /L) 2 2
or EUCOTHANE: 250 ft2/gal (6.1 m2/L)
Aggregate: 0.5-1.0 lbs/ft (2.4-4.8 kg/m )
2 2
Trowel Down 1/8” – ¼” thick (3.2-6.4 mm)
Sealcoat of DURALTEX: 100-150 ft2/gal (2.4-3.7 m2/L) Primer, DURALTEX Clear: 200-225 ft2/gal (4.9-5.5 m2/L)
or EUCOTHANE: 200-250 ft2/gal (4.9-6.1 m2/L) Basecoat @ 1/8”: 40-45 ft2/gal (0.98-1.1 m2/L)
Broadcast Vinyl Chip Floor 1/32” - 1/16” thick (0.8-1.6 mm) (approx.1 gal. (3.7 L) resin to 40 lb (18 kg) trowel grade aggregate)
Basecoat: 75 -120 ft2/gal (1.8-2.9 m2/L) Seal Coat
Vinyl Chip: 0.25 – 0.5 lbs/ft2 (1.2-2.4 kg/m2) DURALTEX Clear: 100-150 ft2/gal (2.4-3.7 m2/L)
Sealcoat or EUCOTHANE: 200- 250 ft2/gal (4.9-6.1 m2/L)
DURALTEX Clear: 150 ft /gal (3.7 m /L)
2 2
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: New concrete should be allowed to cure for a minimum of 28 days. The concrete must be structurally
sound, dry, free of grease, oils, coatings, dust, curing compounds and other contaminants. Surface laitance must be removed.
The preferred method of surface preparation is mechanical abrasion. Remove defective concrete, honeycombs, cavities and
other defects by routing to sound material. If patching is required, consult Euclid Chemical Technical Support for appropriate
patching materials. After patching, a light brush blast is recommended prior to coating. Surface profile should be equal to CSP 2 to
5 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2 at a minimum. The pH of the surface should be checked as per ASTM D 4262. Following
surface preparation, the cleaned surface should have a minimum surface tensile strength of 200 psi (1.4 MPa) when tested with
an Elcometer or similar pull tester (ASTM D 4541). Before application of the coating, use the “Visqueen test” (ASTM D 4263) or
“Calcium Chloride Test” (ASTM F 1869) to evaluate the moisture level in the concrete. Do not proceed if a moisture vapor drive
condition exists. Moisture vapor emission rate may vary over time depending upon environmental conditions. All steel surfaces
should be blasted in accordance with SSPC-SP10 or NACE #2 to a “NEAR WHITE” finish using clean dry blasting media.
ixing: Pre-mix Part A and Part B, then combine 2 parts by volume of Part A with one part by volume of Part B and thoroughly
M
mix using a low speed drill motor and a “Jiffy” type mixer. Mix only the amount of material that can be applied during the pot
life. Do not aerate the mix.
Application: See the “Application Guide for Euclid Chemical Decorative and Industrial Floor Coatings” for complete instructions.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and application equipment with methyl ethyl ketone or acetone immediately after use. Clean spills
or drips with solvent while still wet. Dried DURALTEX will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Do not aerate during mixing.
• Do not mix or apply unless surface, air and material temperatures are 50°F (10°C) and rising.
• Do not apply if surface temperature is within 5°F (-15°C) of the dew point in the work area.
• Do not store DURALTEX at temperatures below 50°F or above 90°F (10°C to 32°C).
• Cure new concrete 28 days before application.
• Do not apply to slabs on grade unless a heavy uninterrupted vapor barrier has been installed under the slab.
• Do not apply DURALTEX if the floor is subject to moisture vapor drive or hydrostatic pressure.
• For applications which require color stability, EUCOTHANE should be used as a topcoat.
• DURALTEX will yellow upon prolonged exposure to sunlight or high intensity artificial lights.
• Although epoxy coatings are chemically resistant, surface staining of the coating may occur after contact with
some chemicals. Consider the use of a polyurethane topcoat such as EUCOTHANE for improved stain resistance.
58
DURALTEX EXPRESS
Quick Turnaround Epoxy Flooring

Description
Duraltex Express is a versatile, fast setting, 100% solids, two component epoxy for flooring applications.
Ideally suited for fast turnaround projects.
Features/Benefits
• V
ersatile – coatings, broadcast floors, chipfloors, slurry, • Chemically resistant
broadcast and trowel-down • Low modulus
• Rapid turnaround product Can contribute to LEED points
• Low odor – 100% solids
Mix Ratio (by Volume)......................................2:1 Bond Strength ASTM D 4541.... Greater than Concrete
VOC Content..................................................0 g/l Flammability ASTM D 635
Gel Time, 200 gms, minutes....................20 to 25 Self Extinguishing.................................. 0.75 Max.
DURALTEX EXPRESS
Pot Life, 3 gals (11.4 L), minutes.............10 to 15 Water Absorption, ASTM D 570
Tack Free, hrs...............................................2 to 3 24 hrs..........................................................<0.5%
Hardness, Shore D ASTM D 2240..............75 to 85
Tensile Strength, ASTM D 638 Appearance: DURALTEX EXPRESS is available in
psi (MPa).............................................5,500 (37.9) Clear, Light Gray, Dark Gray and Tile Red. Custom
Tensile Elongation, ASTM D 638 ...........15 to 30% colors are available, subject to minimum quantity
Compressive Strength, ASTM D 695 orders.
neat resin, psi (MPa) @ 24 hrs.............7,500 (51.7)
@
7 days.............9,800 (67.6)
Traffic Ready Times (after final coat) @ 75°F Recoat Time @ 75°F (24°C) between primer/
(24°C): basecoat/sealcoat:
Foot Traffic - 6 to 8 hours 4 to 6 hours minimum; maximum 24 hours
Light Motorized Traffic: 10-12 hours
Heavy Traffic: 24 hours
Packaging
Master Format #:
DURALTEX EXPRESS is packaged in 3 gal (11.4 L), 15 gal (56.8 L) and 150 gal (567.8 L) units.
09 96 56
Shelf Life
• USDA compliant

59
Coverage
Floor Coating (20 – 30 mils) Slurry Application 1/16” – 1/4” thick (1.6-6.4 mm)
Primer, DURALTEX EXPRESS Clear: 200-225 ft /gal (4.9-5.5 m /L) 2 2
Primer, DURALTEX EXPRESS Clear: 200-225 ft2/gal (4.9-5.5 m2/L)
Basecoat: 100 ft /gal (2.4 m /L)
2 2
Basecoat (1 gal resin &12 # aggregate): 20 ft2/gal (0.5 m2/L)
Seal Coat (optional): 150 ft2/gal (3.7 m2/L) Seal Coat
Broadcast Floor (Broom & Seed) 1/16”-1/8” thick (1.6-3.2 mm) DURALTEX EXPRESS: 150 ft2/gal (3.7 m2/L)
Basecoat, DURALTEX EXPRESS: 100 ft /gal (2.4 m /L) 2 2
Aggregate: 0.5-1.0 lbs/ft (2.4-4.8 kg/m )
2 2
Trowel Down 1/8” – ¼” thick (3.2-6.4 mm)
Sealcoat of DURALTEX EXPRESS: 100-150 ft2/gal (2.4-3.7 m2/L) Primer, DURALTEX EXPRESS, Clear: 200-225 ft2/gal (4.9-5.5 m2/L)
or EUCOTHANE: 200-250 ft /gal (4.9-6.1 m /L)
2 2
Basecoat @ 1/8”: 40-45 ft2/gal (0.98-1.1 m2/L)
Broadcast Vinyl Chip Floor 1/32” - 1/16” thick (0.8-1.6 mm) (approx.1 gal. (3.7 L) resin to 40 lb (18 kg) trowel grade aggregate)
Basecoat: 75 -120 ft2/gal (1.8-2.9 m2/L) Seal Coat
Vinyl Chip: 0.25 – 0.5 lbs/ft (1.2-2.4 kg/m )
2 2
DURALTEX EXPRESS: 100-150 ft2/gal (2.4-3.7 m2/L)
Sealcoat or EUCOTHANE: 200- 250 ft2/gal (4.9-6.1 m2/L)
DURALTEX EXPRESS Clear: 150 ft2/gal (3.7 m2/L)
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: New concrete should be allowed to cure for a minimum of 28 days. The concrete must be
structurally sound, dry, free of grease, oils, coatings, dust, curing compounds and other contaminants. Surface laitance
must be removed. The preferred method of surface preparation is mechanical abrasion. Remove defective concrete,
honeycombs, cavities and other defects by routing to sound material. If patching is required, consult Euclid Chemical
Technical Support for appropriate patching materials. After patching, a light brush blast is recommended prior to coating.
Surface profile should be equal to CSP 2 to 5 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2 at a minimum. The pH of the surface
should be checked as per ASTM D 4262. Following surface preparation, the cleaned surface should have a minimum surface
tensile strength of 200 psi (1.4 MPa) when tested with an Elcometer or similar pull tester (ASTM D 4541). Before application of
the coating, use the “Visqueen test” (ASTM D 4263) or “Calcium Chloride Test” (ASTM F 1869) to evaluate the moisture level
in the concrete. Do not proceed if a moisture vapor drive condition exists. Moisture vapor emission rate may vary over time
depending upon environmental conditions. All steel surfaces should be blasted in accordance with SSPC-SP10 or NACE #2
to a “NEAR WHITE” finish using clean dry blasting media.
ixing: Pre-mix Part A and Part B, then combine 2 parts by volume of Part A with one part by volume of Part B and
M
thoroughly mix using a low speed drill motor and a “Jiffy” type mixer. Mix only the amount of material that can be applied
during the pot life. Do not aerate the mix.
Application: See the “Application Guide for Euclid Chemical Decorative and Industrial Floor Coatings” for instructions.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and application equipment immediately after use with methyl ethyl ketone or acetone. Clean spills
or drips while still wet with solvent. Dried DURALTEX EXPRESS will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Do not mix or apply unless surface, air and material temperatures are 50°F (10°C) and rising.
• Do not apply to slabs on grade unless a heavy uninterrupted vapor barrier has been installed under the slab.
• Do not apply DURALTEX EXPRESS if the floor is subject to moisture vapor drive or hydrostatic pressure.
• For applications which require stain resistance or color stability, EUCOTHANE, an aliphatic urethane, should be
used as a topcoat.
• DURALTEX EXPRESS will yellow upon prolonged exposure to sunlight or high intensity artificial lights.
60
DURALTEX UV
Aliphatic Epoxy Floor Binder

Description
DURALTEX UV is a high gloss, moisture insensitive, 100% solids, two component aliphatic epoxy floor binder.
DURALTEX UV exhibits reduced tendency to yellow compared to traditional aromatic epoxy systems.
Features/Benefits
• Reduced tendency to yellow • User friendly
• Aliphatic epoxy resin • Low odor - 100% solids
• Clear coat for decorative aggregate floors • USDA compliant
• Versatile – coating, broadcast floors, chip floors, • Chemical resistant
and slurry/broadcast
Material Properties @ 75°F (24°C).
Mix ratio (by Volume).................................................................................2:1
VOC content............................................................................................0 g/L
Gel time, minutes...............................................................................45 to 55
Tack free, hrs..........................................................................................4 to 5
Hardness, Shore D, ASTM D 2240........................................................85 to 90
Tensile strength, ASTM D 638, psi (MPa)........... 4,500 to 5,500 (31.0 to 37.9)
DURALTEX UV
Tensile elongation, ASTM D 638, %......................................................15 to 25
Compressive strength, neat resin, ASTM D 695, psi (MPa)
@ 24 hrs....................................................................................... 8,000 (55.2)
@ 7 days.................................................................................... 10,000 (68.9)
Bond strength..............................................................greater than concrete
Water absorption, ASTM D 570, 24 hrs, %.................................................<0.5
Appearance: Available in clear and light gray. Custom colors are available subject to minimum order.
Packaging
DURALTEX UV is available in 3 gal (11.4 L) units.
Shelf Life
Coverage
Master Format #:
Broom & Seed System ft²/gal (m²/L)

DURALTEX UV 75 to 100 (1.84 to 2.45)
09 96 56
Aggregate 1 to 1.5 lbs/ft²(0.45 to 0.68 kg/m²)

Sealcoat of DURALTEX UV 75 to 150 (1.84 to 2.45)
Sealcoat of Eucothane 150 to 200 (3.68 to 4.91)
Note: DURALTEX UV coverage rates are approximate, and for estimating purposes only. Surface temperature,
porosity, texture, and thickness will determine actual material requirements.

61
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: Concrete must be structurally sound, dry, free of grease, oils, coatings, dust, curing
compounds and other contaminants. Surface laitance must be removed. The preferred method of surface
preparation is mechanical abrasion. After cleaning, remove defective concrete, honeycombs, cavities, joint
crack voids and other defects by routing to sound material. Smooth, precast and formed concrete surfaces must
be cleaned, roughened and made absorptive by mechanical abrasion. Surface profile should be equal to CSP
2 - 5 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2 at a minimum. If it is not possible to mechanically abrade, acid etch
with a 15% Hydrochloric acid solution. After etching, pressure wash or flush the surface with copious amounts
of water to neutralize the surface. Care must be taken to ensure that all salts and residue from the reaction have
been removed. The pH of the surface should be checked, as per ASTM D 4262, following acid etching. New
concrete should be allowed to cure for a minimum of 28 days prior to applying DURALTEX UV. Remove any
surface hardener or curing compound, by mechanical abrasion. Following surface preparation, the cleaned
surface should have a minimum surface tensile strength of 250 psi when tested with an Elcometer or similar
pull tester (ASTM D 4541). Before application of the coating, use the “Visqueen test” (ASTM D 4263) to evaluate
the moisture level in the concrete. To repair small patches in old concrete, use a suitable epoxy mortar. For larger
areas, use cementitious patching materials which are compatible with the DURALTEX UV. Consult your local Euclid
Chemical representative for appropriate patching material recommendations. After patching, a light brush blast is
recommended prior to coating . When coating steel, all oils, greases, dirt, old coatings or chemical contaminants
must be removed prior to applying DURALTEX UV. All welds should be continuous and ground to remove all splatter,
sharp edges, laps and other surface irregularities. For Intermittent Contact/Atmospheric Service, all steel surfaces
should be blasted in accordance with SSPC‑SP10 or NACE #2 to a “NEAR WHITE” metal finish using clean dry
blasting media.
Mixing Instructions: Using a low speed drill motor and a “Jiffy” type mixer, mix the A & B components
separately for approximately 1 minute. Combine two parts by volume of “A” with one part by volume of “B” and
mix thoroughly. Scrape the bottom and sides of mixing container, at least once. Mix just enough material that
can be used within the working life. Do not aerate the mix.
Application: Broom & Seed System: Apply DURALTEX UV to the clean substrate, using a brush, shortnap
(1/8”) (3.22 mm) roller or spray equipment. While the material is still wet, broadcast clean, dry aggregate
(typically 20/40 silica sand or colored quartz at the rate of 1 to 1.5 lbs/ft² (0.45 to 0.68 kg/m²), and allow to cure
overnight. Sweep or vacuum excess aggregate. Repeat the above steps until desired thickness is achieved.
Apply a sealcoat of either DURALTEX UV or EUCOTHANE aliphatic urethane. Trowel‑On System: Apply a prime
coat of DURALTEX UV using a squeegee, brush or spray equipment. Lightly broadcast 20/40 silica sand (0.25
Ibs/ft² - 0.11 kg/m²). Allow the prime coat to tack, typically 2 to 4 hours. Screed the properly mixed DURALTEX
UV mortar to the desired thickness, trowel finish and allow to cure for 12 to 18 hours. Apply a seal coat following
the procedures outlined in the broom & seed methods.
Clean-Up
or drips while still wet with same solvent. If cured DURALTEX UV will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Do not mix or apply unless surface, air, and material temperatures are 50°F (10°C) and rising.
• Concrete may be damp but must be free of any standing water.
• Do not store DURALTEX UV at temperatures below 50°F or above 90°F (10°C to 32°C). Protect from moisture
and freezing.
• Do not use in outdoor applications.
• Certain types of floor mats may cause the Duraltex UV to discolor.
• Although epoxy coatings are chemically resistant, surface staining of the coating may occur after contact
with some chemicals. Consider the use of a polyurethane topcoat such as EUCOTHANE for improved stain
resistance.
Rev. 6.11
62
EUCOPOXY TUFCOAT DBS
Decorative Epoxy Coating And Broadcast System

Description
Eucopoxy Tufcoat DBS provides an attractive seamless floor that is chemical and abrasion resistant. Utilizing
a clear 100% solids epoxy with a colored quartz aggregate, Eucopoxy Tufcoat DBS can be applied to provide
positive footing or a smooth, high gloss appearance. The colored quartz aggregate may be blended to produce an
aesthetic tile like pattern.
• Manufacturing plants • Food processing • Locker rooms
• Kitchens • Schools • Rest rooms
• Chemical processing • Hospitals • Walkways
• Jails • Restaurants • Lobbies
Features/Benefits
• Decorative, aesthetic appearance • Seamless
• Alternative to trowel applied systems • Quartz aggregate is available in 21 colors
• Easy to maintain Can contribute to LEED points
Typical Engineering Data Chemical Resistance
The following results were developed under laboratory conditions. Acetic Acid, 5%..............................................................poor
Alkalies....................................................................excellent
Re-coat time......................................................... 5 to 7 hrs
Ammonia.................................................................excellent
Suitable for foot traffic.............................................. 24 hrs
Battery Acid...................................................................good
Suitable for wheel traffic.......................................... 48 hrs
Beer.........................................................................excellent
Pot life @ 73°F (23°C) .............................................. 16 min
Working time over concrete at 73°F (23°C).............. 70 min Bleach.....................................................................excellent
Thickness..........................1/16" to 1/8" (1.6 mm to 3.2 mm) Brake Fluid....................................................................good
Compressive strength ASTM C 109 Diesel Fuel..............................................................excellent
Ethanol...........................................................................poor
1 day.................................................>6,200 psi (42.8 MPa)
EUCOPOXY TUFCOAT DBS

Ethylene Glycol.......................................................excellent
28 days..............................................10,000 psi (69.4 MPa)
Tensile strength ASTM D 638............... 5,000 psi (34.7 MPa) Gasoline..................................................................excellent
Bond strength ASTM C 882...............2,100 psi (14.5 MPa) Hydraulic Oil ..........................................................excellent
Hydrochloric Acid, 10%................................................good
Full cure time ........................................................... 7 days
MEK................................................................................poor
VOC content............................................................ 72 g/L
Abrasion resistance: Taber Abrader with CS-17 Calibrese Methylene Chloride........................................................poor
wheel with 1,000 gm load 500 cycles ............... 48 mg loss MIBK...............................................................................poor
Nitric Acid, 5%................................................................poor
Appearance: EUCOPOXY TUFCOAT DBS is a 3 part
Oil............................................................................excellent
clear epoxy system consisting of a Part A (resin), a Part
Power Steering Fluid .............................................excellent
B (hardener), and a Part C (colored aggregate).
Phosphoric Acid, 30%...................................................poor
Salt Water................................................................excellent.
Standard aggregate colors include black, blue,
Skydrol®.......................................................................good
blue gray, buff, camel brown, light beige, light rose,
Transmission Fluid .................................................excellent
chocolate, green, gray, red, tan, teak, teal, white, yellow,
Toluene..........................................................................good
OSHA yellow, peach, plum, smoke, and walnut.
Urine........................................................................excellent
Xylene.....................................................................excellent
NOTE: Where chemical resistance is rated as poor, check the ratings on Eucothane as a possible topcoat for increased chemical
resistance. RATINGS: Poor-affected within 24 hours; Good-no effect for 24 hours; Excellent-no effect after 2 weeks.
Packaging
EUCOPOXY TUFCOAT DBS is packaged in 3 gal (11.4 L kits) consisting of Part A: 2.0 gal (7.6 L), Part B: 1.0 gal (3.8 L).
Colored aggregate is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) bags.
Shelf Life
Master Format #:

09 96 56
Coverage
Material Requirements/1000 ft2 (92.9 m2) Double Broadcast: 0.80 lb/ft2 (3.9 kg/m2) Single Broadcast: 0.45 lb/ft2 (2.2 kg/m2)

Slip-resistant Texture Standard Texture
1/16" (1.6 mm) 1/8" ( 3.2 mm) 1/16" (1.6 mm) 1/8" ( 3.2 mm)
Coating: 18 gal (68.1 L) 33 gal (124.9 L) 24 gal (90.8 L) 39 gal (147.6 L)
Aggregate: 450 lb (204 kg) 800 lb (363 kg) 450 lb (204 kg) 800 lb (363 kg)
* Broadcast rate will vary with surface texture of bare concrete as well as thickness of epoxy film on the surface.

63
Canadian Food Inspection Agency
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: New concrete must be a minimum of 28 days old and possess an open surface texture with
all curing compounds and sealers removed. The concrete must be clean and sound. All oil, dirt, debris, paint and
unsound concrete must be removed. The surface should be prepared mechanically, which will give an open surface
profile with the cement paste removed from the surface. Surface profile should be be equal to CSP 2 to 5 in accordance
with ICRI Guideline 310.2. Important: Acid etching is acceptable only when mechanical preparation is impractical.
Joints and Edges: If the floor is subjected to wheel traffic the edges of the floor area should be sawcut 1/4" (6 mm)
deep to provide a locked in edge. Moving joints as in the case of expansion joints should be brought up through the
coating. All cracks over 1/16" (1.6 mm) wide should be filled. Use a 100% solids epoxy such as DURAL FAST SET
EPOXY GEL to fill wide cracks, joints and keyed edges.
Mixing: All materials should be in the proper temperature range of 60oF (16oC) to 90oF (32oC). Mix the Part A and Part
B together for 2 to 3 minutes using a drill and mixing prop. The epoxy must be well mixed to ensure proper chemical
reaction. After mixing, place immediately.
Placement: Two coat application for nominal 20 mil total thickness: Apply the mixed EUCOPOXY TUFCOAT DBS to
the clean, prepared surface using a roller or squeegee at a coverage rate of 160 ft²/gal (4 m²/L) or to specifications.
Coverage rates will vary due to surface texture. Backrolling may be necessary to ensure complete wetting, uniform
thickness and removal of any roller or squeegee marks. No primer is needed. After the initial coat has dried tack ffree
(but no more than 24 hours), apply the second coat following the same procedures.
Application for nominal 1/16" (1.6 mm) broadcast coating: Apply the mixed EUCOPOXY TUFCOAT DBS to the
clean, prepared surface using a roller or squeegee at a coverage rate of 115 ft2/gal (2.8 m2/L). Coverage rates will vary
due to surface texture. Backrolling may be necessary to ensure complete wetting, uniform thickness and removal of any
roller or squeegee marks. A uniform basecoat application is the key to a successful, level seamless floor. Quartz broadcast:
Once 100 to 200 ft2 (9.3 to 18.6 m2) is covered with the EUCOPOXY TUFCOAT DBS base coat, begin broadcasting the
quartz. Spiked shoes should be worn to facilitate walking on the wet epoxy to broadcast the aggregate. Broadcast the
aggregate by allowing it to fall as vertically as possible from a chest high level. Broadcast uniformly onto the wet substrate
until the substrate is no longer visible and the quartz appears and remains dry in appearance. Do not broadcast to the edge
that will be adjoining the next section, leave a 12" to 14" (305 to 356 mm) unseeded strip to allow for overlapping of the base
coat. This prevents a line from appearing where the sections meet. Broadcast rate: 0.45 lb/ft2 (2.2 kg/m2). Sweeping and
sanding: Allow a minimum of 6 hours at 73oF (23oC) drying time prior to walking onto the surface and beginning this
step. Cover shoes with plastic to prevent heel marking. Sweep or vacuum excess quartz aggregate from the surface.
If areas appear to be uneven or unlevel, sanding may be required. The surface is now ready for the topcoat.
Application for nominal 1/8" (3.2 mm) broadcast coating: To achieve a more uniform color and increase thickness
to a nominal 1/8" (3.2 mm), a double broadcast is recommended. Follow the procedures above for a 1/16" (1.6 mm)
coating. After the initial broadcast, cure and sweeping, apply a tie coat by placing EUCOPOXY TUFCOAT DBS coating
at an application rate of 65 ft2/gal (1.6 m2/L). Perform the second broadcast at a rate of 0.35lb/ft2 (1.7 kg/m2). Sweep
and sand (if necessary) as indicated above.
Top Coat: Depending upon job requirements, several finishes are available as the final wear surface.
Slip-Resistant Finish: Topcoat the final aggregate broadcast with EUCOPOXY TUFCOAT DBS coating at an application
rate of 115 ft2/gal (2.8 m2/L). Standard Finish: Topcoat the final aggregate broadcast with EUCOPOXY TUFCOAT DBS
coating at an application rate of 65 ft2/gal (1.6 m2/L). UV Resistant Finish: To achieve a UV resistant finish, apply DBS
epoxy in pre-described manner. Increase aggregate amount to fully absorb epoxy. Must top coat with EUCOTHANE.
Note: If a smoother surface is desired additional EUCOPOXY TUFCOAT DBS coating may be applied to the surface.
Additional gloss, abrasion and chemical resistance may be achieved with a final finish coat of EUCOTHANE (high
performance, urethane coating).
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with acetone, toluene or MEK. Do not allow the epoxy to harden on equipment.
• Cool temperatures extend working times and cure schedules, while warmer temperatures reduce them.
• For large jobs in higher than usual temperatures, consult The Euclid Chemical Company for alternative epoxy base
coat.
• Avoid application at air and floor temperatures below 50°F (10°C).
• Store indoors at 45°F to 110°F (7°F to 43°C).
• For UV protection and additional abrasion resistance, topcoat with EUCOTHANE.
• Although epoxy coatings are chemically resistant, surface staining of the coating may occur after contact with some
chemicals. Consider the use of a polyurethane topcoat such as EUCOTHANE for improved stain resistance.
64
EUCO TAMMOSHIELD
Water Based Polyurethane Concrete Sealer

Description
EUCO TAMMOSHIELD is a non-yellowing, two-component water based aliphatic polyurethane sealer that
provides a glossy, durable surface to concrete and masonry surfaces. It cures by a true thermoset reaction,
providing toughness and chemical resistance to EUCO TAMMOSHIELD that far surpasses that of acrylic or one-
component water based urethane sealers.
• Clear protective topcoat for Eucopoxy and Dural epoxy coatings and vinyl chip flooring systems
• Seal coat for Euclid Chemical architectural coatings
Features/Benefits
• Excellent abrasion resistance
• Non-yellowing aliphatic formulation
• Provides a glossy, “wet” look
• No odor
• Can be used on horizontal or vertical surfaces
The following results were developed under laboratory conditions.
Viscosity cp..........................................500 to 800
Working time......................................1 to 2 hours
Drying time @ 730F (240C), 50% RH
Tack free...........................................4 to 6 hours
Light foot traffic...............................8 to10 hours
Complete cure.......................................24 hours
VOC content.............................................<25 g/L
EUCO TAMMOSHIELD
Solids by weight.............................................56%
Resistance to tire marking....................excellent
Taber abrasion CS-17 wheel
1000 gram load........................ 78 mg weight loss
Chemical resistance Spot Test on EUCO TAMMOSHIELD after 14 day cure (ASTM 1308)
Result after 4 hours Result after 24 hours
10% Acetic Acid no effect slight softening
10% Sulfuric Acid no effect no effect
MEK soft, blistered soft, blistered
IPA soft soft
14% Ammonium Hydroxide no effect stained
10% Bleach no effect no effect
Gasoline no effect slight softening
50% Sodium Hydroxide no effect no effect
Appearance: EUCO TAMMOSHIELD is available in a Clear Gloss or Clear Matte finish. Custom colors are
available upon request and subject to minimum order quantities.
Master Format #:
Packaging
EUCO TAMMOSHIELD is available in a 5 gal (18.9 L) unit and in a case of two 1 gal (3.8 L) units.
09 96 35
Shelf Life
• Complies with all U.S. EPA and local VOC regulations, including OTC, Maricopa County and California (CARB
and SCAQMD)

65
Coverage
The coverage rate is 300 to 400 ft2/gal (7.4 to 9.8 m2/L), and is highly dependent on substrate texture and
porosity.
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: The surface to be sealed with EUCO TAMMOSHIELD must be structurally sound, free of
dust, dirt, mortar residue, curing materials, form release compounds and all other contaminants. Application
to epoxy coatings should be done after the epoxy is tack free, but no longer than 24 hours after the epoxy is
applied.
EUCO TAMMOSHIELD is an impermeable coating, and moisture vapor transmission (MVT) through the concrete
surface could result in loss of adhesion from the concrete. The MVT rate must be consistently less than 3
lbs/1000 ft2/24 hours (1.4 kg/93 m2/24 hours) for proper adhesion and performance of EUCO TAMMOSHIELD.
Mixing: Using a power mixer with a “Jiffy” type blade, pre-mix Part A and Part B separately for one minute. Add
all of the Part B to the Part A and blend EUCO TAMMOSHIELD with slow agitation for 1 to 2 minutes. EUCO
TAMMOSHIELD will slightly thicken after mixing. Allow the mixed EUCO TAMMOSHIELD to stand for 5 to 10
minutes before use. Do not thin or dilute with water or any other solvent.
Application: Application of EUCO TAMMOSHIELD over Eucopoxy or Dural epoxy coatings should take place
as soon as the epoxy has dried tack-free. Application of EUCO TAMMOSHIELD to epoxy coatings that have
been in place for over 24 hours will require mechanical abrasion of the epoxy coat to provide a suitable surface
for bonding.
Apply EUCO TAMMOSHIELD in a uniform, continuous film by airless sprayer, short nap mohair roller, foam
applicator, lambswool applicator, paint brush, or soft bristled push broom. Redistribute or remove puddles
or excess material before it dries. Follow recommended coverage rates carefully to avoid uneven or heavy
applications. Application over new coats of TAMMSCOAT should be done after the TAMMSCOAT has cured
for 24 hours. Application over existing TAMMSCOAT or should be done after the surface has been thoroughly
cleaned and is dry.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with water immediately following use. Clean drips and overspray with solvent while
still wet. If not cleaned immediately, the sealer may leave a residue on painted surfaces, glass or wood.
• Do not apply to exterior surfaces if rain is expected within 6 hours after application or in direct sunlight at
ambient temperatures in excess of 90°F (32°C).
• Do not apply to exterior slab-on-grade concrete, wet surfaces, or concrete experiencing moisture vapor
transmission.
• EUCO TAMMOSHIELD may darken the surface and accentuate surface imperfections. A test application to
evaluate appearance and performance is strongly recommended.
• The coefficient of friction of the surface may decline with each sealer application.
• Do not apply to frozen or frost filled surfaces.
• Not recommended for asphalt surfaces.
• Always apply a test area to confirm adhesion and appearance.
• Store EUCO TAMMOSHIELD between 50°F to 80°F (10°C to 27°C). Do not allow EUCO TAMMOSHIELD to
freeze.
Rev. 6.11
66
Coatings - Industrial
Epoxy Based
Application Guide 69
Duralkote 240 71
Duralkote 500 73
Duraltex 1705 & 1707 75
Duraltex 1805 & 1807 77
Eucopoxy Tufcoat 79
Eucopoxy Tufcoat VOX 81
Urethane Based
Eucothane 83
APPLICATION GUIDE
For Euclid Chemical Decorative and Industrial Floor Coatings
Surface Preparation
A properly prepared surface is essential to a successful coating application. The surface must be structurally
sound, clean and free of grease, oil, curing compounds, soil, dust and other contaminants. New concrete
and masonry must be cured 28 days. Surface laitance must be removed. The Concrete Surface Profile (CSP)
should be equal to CSP 2-5 in accordance with Guideline 310.2 published by the International Concrete Repair
Institute (ICRI). Pre-cast and formed concrete surfaces should be cleaned, roughened, and made absorptive by
mechanical means. If it is not possible to achieve the appropriate surface texture with mechanical means, an
adequate surface can be prepared by acid etching with 15% hydrochloric acid. After etching, flush with copious
amounts of water to neutralize and clean the surface. All salts and residue from the reaction must be removed.
Allow concrete to dry before coating application. Following surface preparation, the strength of the surface
should be measured with an Elcometer or similar tensile pull tester (ASTM D 4541). The minimum tensile pull-off
strength should be 200 psi (1.4 MPa).
Do not apply epoxy or urethane coatings if there is excessive moisture in the concrete or if the vapor transmission
(MVT) rate is high. The concrete humidity and MVT rate should be determined before applying the coating. Two
test methods can be used to measure MVT; the “visqueen” or plastic sheet test (ASTM D 4263), or the “calcium
Chloride” test (ASTM F 1869). After surface preparation and moisture testing, a test section application of the
coating system is recommended to confirm good adhesion and compatibility of the coating with the surface.
When coating steel, all contamination should be removed and the steel surface prepared to a “near white” finish
(SSPC SP10) using clean dry blasting media.
APPLICATION GUIDE: DECORATIVE AND

Mixing Instructions
Mix coating using a low speed drill motor and a “Jiffy” type mixer. Pre-mix Part A and Part B separately for
INDUSTRIAL FLOOR COATINGS

approximately one minute. Combine the appropriate volumes of Part A and Part B, then mix thoroughly for 3 to
5 minutes. Scrape the bottom and sides of the containers at least once during mixing. Mix just enough material
that can be used within the working life. Do not aerate the mix.
Application Procedures
Select one for the following methods:
A) Floor Coatings - 10 to 20 mils; Apply properly mixed coating to the prepared surface by brush, short nap
roller or notched squeegee using the application rate provide on the product Technical Data Sheet to produce
a 10 mil thickness. A second coat is recommended for most industrial applications. The second coat can be
applied after the first coat becomes tack free (5 to 8 hours) but no later than 24 hours after application of the first
coat. The use of a primer will improve performance in marginal conditions.
B) Broadcast Floors - “Broom and Seed” (Optional) 1/16” to 1/8” (0.16 to 0.32 cm); The broadcast method
consists of spreading silica sand into the coating, typically used to construct solid colored, skid resistant floors.
This technique can also produce a wide variety of multi-colored floors using a clear coating and colored quartz
aggregate. The application procedure is similar for both systems. Use the application rate provided on the
specific product technial data to produce a 15 mil thickness. Apply the coating to the prepared substrate using
a brush, short nap roller or notched squeegee. While the material is still wet, broadcast clean dry aggregate
into the resin to excess – typically 20/40 mesh silica for solid color floors and colored quartz aggregate for
multi-colored floors. The aggregate should appear dry after application. If any area looks “wet”, immediately
broadcast additional aggregate over those areas. Aggregate application rates are 0.5 to 1.0 lbs/ft² (2.4 to 4.8
kg/m²). Allow the resin to cure. Sweep or vacuum excess. Repeat these steps until the desired thickness is
achieved. Aggregate size and shape will affect final surface texture. Apply a seal coat of clear coating for color
quartz aggregate floors or pigmented coating for solid color floors at the appropriate application coverage rate.
This “seal coat” is intended for areas subject to no or low moisture. In areas exposed to sunlight or high intensity
artificial light, color stability is improved if the seal coat is an aliphatic urethane such as EUCOTHANE, applied
at 150 to 200 ft²/gal (3.7 to 4.9 m²/L).
C) Broadcast Vinyl Chip Floors - (Optional) 1/32” to 1/16” (0.08 to 0.16 cm); Apply a prime coat of properly
mixed clear coating to the prepared substrate, using a brush, short nap roller or squeegee at the appropriate
coverage rate. Allow to cure for 6 to 8 hours, but no longer than 24 hours before proceeding.

69
Then apply properly mixed pigmented coating resin by brush, short nap roller or squeegee. While the material
is still wet, broadcast clean, dry Colored Vinyl Chips to the desired concentration (typically 1/4 to 1/2 lb/ft² (1.2
to 2.4 kg/m²). Allow to cure overnight. If desired, sand to smooth surface, vacuum thoroughly and apply a clear
topcoat. Allow to cure 24 hours before opening to traffic.
D) Slurry Applications (Alternative) - 1/16” to1/4” (0.16 to 0.63 cm); Apply a prime coat of the clear coating
to the prepared substrate using a brush or short nap roller. Do not allow the prime coat to become tack free. Mix
pigmented coating as described in the product technical data. Prepare a slurry by slowly adding 60/70 mesh
silica aggregate to the coating while mixing with a “Jiffy” mixer. The slurry proportions are 12 to 15 lbs (5.4 to
6.8 kg) of aggregate for each gal. of coating. Mix thoroughly yet do not aerate the mix. Pour the slurry on to
the primed surface and spread using a notched squeegee or gauge rake. Spiked shoes are recommended. A
slurry consisting of one gal (3.8 L) of mixed resin and 15 lbs (6.8 kg) of aggregate will cover approximately 20 ft² (1.8
m²) at 1/8” (0.32 cm) thickness. Backroll with a short nap roller. Broadcast clean dry 40 to 60 mesh silica into the
wet slurry coat to excess. Aggregate size and texture will affect final surface texture. Allow to cure and remove
excess aggregate by broom or vacuum. Apply a seal coat of coating with a flat squeegee or roller. Allow to cure
for 24 hours before opening to traffic.
E) Trowel Down Method (Alternative); 1/8” to1/4” (0.32 to 0.63 cm) The trowel down method can be used to
create solid color floors using pigmented coatings and silica aggregate, or a variety of multicolored floors using
clear coatings and colored quartz aggregate. The application methods are similar. Apply a prime coat of mixed
clear coating to the prepared surface at the appropriate coverage rate. Lightly broadcast 20/40 mesh silica
sand (1/4 lb/ft² (1.2 kg/m²) into the wet resin. Allow the prime coat to become tack free, typically 5 to 8 hours.
Prepare a mortar consisting of mixed coating and a trowel grade aggregate blend or color quartz aggregate.
Typical proportions are 4.5 parts of aggregate by volume to 1 part by volume mixed coating. Large quantities
of epoxy mortars are typically mixed in a mortar mixer; smaller quantities can be mixed in a pail using a mortar
blade mixer and slow speed drill. Gradually add the aggregate to the mixed resin. Mixing times are typically 3
to 5 minutes after all of the aggregate has been added. Ensure that the aggregate has been thoroughly mixed.
Place the mortar on to the tack free, primed surface no later than 24 hours after priming. Screed the mortar to
the desired thickness, trowel finish and allow to cure for 12 to 18 hours. A mortar consisting of one gal of resin
and 4.5 gals of aggregate will cover approximately 45 ft² (4.2 m²) at 1/8” (0.32 cm) thickness. Apply a seal coat.
In areas exposed to sunlight or high intensity artificial light, improved color stability is achieved if the coating
seal coat is an aliphatic urethane such as Eucothane, applied at a rate of 150 to 200 ft²/gal (3.7 to 4.9 m²/L).
Application Details
Cove base: To provide a seamless integral floor system at the floor/wall transition, a cove base of 2 to 6 inches (5 to
15 cm) in height may be required. The coating mixed with aggregate can be used as a cove base.
Static cracks and non-expansion joints: Before application of the coating, static cracks and other non-moving
joints should be routed, cleaned and filled with a semi-rigid epoxy joint filler or a detail coat of the intended epoxy.
Note: Depending on the specific project, correct implementation of other application details, such as floor terminations,
floor/drain detail, etc. may be required. For further information contact Euclid Chemical Technical Support at (800) 321-7628.
Clean-UP
Clean application tools and mixing equipment immediately after use with a solvent such as acetone or methyl
ethyl ketone (MEK). Clean drips or spills with the same solvent while still wet. Hardened epoxy and urethane
coatings will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
Ambient temperature during floor coating applications should be between 50°F and 90°F (10°C and 32°C).
Substrate temperature should be at least 50°F (10°C) and rising. Working time and cure time will decrease as
the temperature increases. Epoxy floor coatings will yellow upon prolonged exposure to ultraviolet light and
high intensity artificial lighting. An aliphatic urethane top coat can minimize the UV effects. Application of a test
area is recommended to confirm final appearance and texture of the floor with the facility owner. In all cases,
consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet before use.
Rev. 6.11
70
DURALKOTE 240
High Build Flexible Epoxy Coating
Description
DURALKOTE 240 is a two component, 100% solids, high performance epoxy coating system designed for use
on concrete walls and floors. DURALKOTE 240 is flexible, offers excellent chemical and abrasion resistance, and
provides excellent adhesion to properly prepared surfaces. DURALKOTE 240 produces a tile-like, easily maintained
surface.
• Showrooms • Warehouse floors • Water treatment facilities
• Mechanical rooms • Chemical processing and • Breweries
• Truck/auto bay areas manufacturing plants • Food service plants
Features/Benefits
• High build • Chemical resistance • Glossy, tile-like finish
Can contribute to LEED points
ACIDS ALKALIES/SALTS
Acetic 10% 3D Ammonia 29% 4
Mixing ratio (A:B, by volume) 1:1
Chromic 10% 2D Potassium Hydroxide 50% 4
VOC Content 0 g/L Citric 10% 3D Sodium Hydroxide 50% 4
Viscosity mixed, cps 3,000 to 5,000 Formic 25% 1 Detergent Solution 4
Hydrochloric 10% 2D Ammonium Sulfate 50% 4
Gel Time (100 g sample) 30 to 40 mins Sodium Chloride 50% 4
Lactic 85% 2D
Pot Life (2 gal (7.6 L) unit) 15 to 25 mins Nitric 10% 3D Ferric Chloride 50% 3D
Tack free time (15 mils) 4 to 6 hrs Phosphoric 10% 3 Sodium Hypochlorite 10% 3D
85% NR Hydrogen Peroxide 35% 3D
Tensile Strength, ASTM D 638
Sulfuric Acid 10% 3D MISCELLANEOUS
psi (MPa) 1,800 to 2,000 (12.4 to 13.8) 50% 3D Brake Fluid 3
DURALKOTE 240
Tensile Elongation, ASTM D 638 98% NR Skydrol 3
% at break 15 to 25 Hydrofluoric 10% 2D Formaldehyde 37% 3
SOLVENTS Ethylene Glycol 4
Compressive Strength, ASTM D 695 Propylene Glycol 3
Ethyl Alcohol 95% 1
psi (MPa) 4,500 to 5,500 (31.0 to 37.9) Vegetable Oil 4
Ethyl Acetate NR
Compressive Strength, ASTM C 109 Methanol 1 Gasoline 2
(3 parts sand), psi(MPa) 7,000 to 8,000 Methyl Ethyl Ketone NR Water 4
(48.3 to 55.2) Mineral Spirits 4 Anti Freeze 4
Hardness, Shore D, ASTM D 2240 75 to 85 Methylene Chloride NR Bleach Soln 4
Toluene 1 1 = Incidental (8 hrs)
Water Gain 7 days %, max 0.5 Xylene 1 2 = Splash & spill (72 hrs)
Appearance: Light Gray, Dark Gray and Tile Trichloroethane 2 3 = Extended exposure (7 days)
Red are standard colors. Special or custom 4 = Long term exposure (30 days)
colors are available subject to minimum order D= Discoloration
quantity requirements. NR =Not rated
Packaging
DURALKOTE 240 is packaged in a 4 gal (15.5 L) case containing two 2 gal (7.6 L) kits.
Shelf Life
Master Format #:
2 years in original, unopened, properly stored package.

09 96 56
Coverage
Primer (Optional) ft²/gal (m²/L)
Duraprime WB 125 to 250 (3.08 to 6.14)
Duraltex Clear 150 to 300 (3.68 to 7.36)
Top Coat
Duralkote 240 100 to 150/coat (2.45 to 3.68)
Rates are approximate and are offered for estimating purposes only.

71
Directions for Use
compounds and other contaminants. Surface laitance must be removed. The preferred method of surface preparation
is mechanical abrasion. For oil contaminated surfaces using steam cleaning in conjunction with strong emulsifying
detergent may be considered. Rinse thoroughly with potable water. After cleaning, remove defective concrete,
honeycombs, cavities, joint crack voids and other defects by routing to sound material. Smooth, precast and formed
concrete surfaces must be cleaned, roughened and made absorptive by mechanical abrasion. Surface profile should
be equal to CSP 2 - 5 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2 at a minimum. If it is not possible to mechanically
abrade, acid etch with a 15% hydrochloric acid solution. After etching, pressure wash or flush the surface with
copious amounts of water to neutralize the surface. Care must be taken to ensure that all salts and residue from the
reaction have been removed. The pH of the surface should be checked, as per ASTM D 4262, following acid etching.
Following surface preparation, the cleaned surface should pull concrete when tested with an Elcometer or similar
pull tester (ASTM D 4541). Before application of the coating, use the “Visqueen test’’ (ASTM D 4263) to evaluate
moisture level in concrete. New Concrete: Should be allowed to cure for a minimum of 28 days. Remove any surface
hardener or curing compounds, by using the recommended mechanical methods for surface preparation. Prepare
surfaces as recommended above. Old Concrete: For quick, small patching use suitable epoxy mortar; for larger
areas, use cementitious patching materials which are compatible with the system. After patching, a light brush blast is
recommended prior to coating. Steel: All oils, greases, dirt, old coatings or chemical contaminates must be removed.
All welds should be continuous and ground to remove all splatter, sharp edges, laps and other surface irregularities.
All steel surfaces should be blasted to a “NEAR WHITE’’ metal finish using clean dry blasting media.
Mixing: Premix DURALKOTE 240 Part A and Part B separately. Combine equal parts by volume of Part A (Base) and
Part B (Hardener) in a clean container. Mix thoroughly with a slow speed drill motor and “Jiffy’’ mixer for a minimum
3 minutes. Scrape the sides and bottom of the container (including the paddle of the mixer) during mixing. Mix only
enough material that can be used within the working life. Do not aerate mix.
Application: Surface and ambient temperatures should be between 50°F to 90°F (10°C to 32°C) . Apply properly
mixed DURALKOTE 240 by brush, short nap roller, notched squeegee or spray to the properly prepared surface.
Apply at a rate of 11 to 16 wet mils, 100 to 150 ft²/gal (2.45 to 3.68 m²/L). Air bubbles and voids can be minimized
by using a spiked roller immediately after application. Allow to cure a minimum of 5 to 6 hours at 75°F (24°C) and
no longer than 24 hours. Apply a second coat of DURALKOTE 240 at 11 to 16 wet mils, 100 to 150 ft²/gal (2.45 to
3.68 m²/L). In most cases, a penetrating low viscosity primer will minimize outgassing and help improve surface
appearance of DURALKOTE 240. Where an anti-skid surface is desired, broadcast approx. 1/4 to 1/2 lb/ft² (1.22 to
2.44 kg/m) of clean dry aggregate into the first coat. When first coat has cured, sweep off excess aggregate. Apply a
sealer coat at a coverage rate of 100 to 150 ft²/gal (2.45 to 3.68 m²/L).
Clean-Up
Clean tools and application equipment immediately after use with methyl ethyl ketone or acetone. Clean spills or
drips while still wet with solvent. Dried DURALKOTE 240 will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Do not apply to wet surfaces.
• Do not apply if humidity is greater than 90%.
• The surface temperature must be at least 5°F (2.7°C) above the dew point of the work area.
• Do not thin the material.
• Do not apply if ambient or substrate temperature is below 50°F (10°C).
• Be sure work area is well ventilated.
• When applied directly to concrete, pinholes or bubbles may result due to concrete outgassing.
• Coating is a vapor barrier after cure.
• Variations in color may occur after extended UV exposure.
resistance.
72
DURALKOTE 500
Ultra High Build Epoxy Liner
Description
DURALKOTE 500 is a 100% solids, solvent free, low odor, environmentally friendly, epoxy liner system. It is
impervious to a wide variety of acids, caustic solutions, oils, grease and many other chemicals. DURALKOTE
500 is particularly resistant to sulfuric acid up to a concentration of 75%. No special precautions are necessary to
contain odors or solvents often found in many other liner systems. Because of its low odor and environmentally
friendly nature, it is ideal for use as a protection system in the wastewater and chemical industries.
• DURALKOTE 500 is used as a lining system for
protection against chemical attack to: • Clarifiers
• Manholes • Wastewater and containment areas
• Lift stations • Walls
• Headwork • Sumps
• Sewer pipes • Trenches
• Grit chambers • Pits
Material Properties @ 75°F (24°C) and 50% RH Values presented are typical laboratory data
Mixing Ratio by volume...................................................................................... 1:1

Gel Time (150 g), minutes........................................................................... 30 to 40
Tensile Strength, ASTM D 638, psi (MPa) @ 7 days.................................. 4200 (28.9)
Elongation, ASTM D 638, % psi (MPa) @ 7 days................................................ 3 to 6
DURALKOTE 500
Compressive Strength, ASTM D 695, psi (MPa)................................... 8,780 (60.5)
Shore D Hardness, ASTM D 2240 @ 7 days ........................................................... 88
Bond to Damp Concrete ASTM D 4541 @ 7 days ............................Concrete Failure
Flexural Strength, ASTM D 790, @ 7 days psi (MPa)............................... 5,100 (35.1)
VOC, g/L ................................................................................................................ 0
Appearance: DURALKOTE 500 is available in Light Gray and White.
Packaging
DURALKOTE 500 is packaged in 4 gal cases (15.14 L) containing two 2 gal (7.6 L) kits.
Shelf Life
Coverage
Coverage rates are approximate and for estimating purposes only. Surface temperature, porosity, and texture
Master Format #:
will determine actual material requirements.

07 1816
Product ft²/gal
DURALKOTE 500 25 @ 1/16” (1.6 mm)
DURALKOTE 500 12.8 @ 1/8” (3.2 mm)
DURALKOTE 500 w/2.5 parts sand 32 @ 1/8” (3.2 mm)
Note: Coverage rates are approximate and for estimating purposes only. Surface temperature, texture and
porosity will determine actual material requirements.

73
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: Concrete must be structurally sound, dry or damp but no standing water, free of grease,
oils, coatings, dust, curing compounds and other contaminants. Surface laitance must be removed. The
preferred method of surface preparation is abrasive blasting, or shotblasting. For oil contaminated surfaces
steam cleaning in conjunction with strong emulsifying detergent is recommended. Rinse thoroughly with potable
water. After cleaning, remove defective concrete, honeycombs, cavities, joint crack voids and other defects by
routing to sound material. Smooth, pre-cast and formed concrete surfaces must be cleaned, roughened and
made absorptive by abrasive blasting or shotblasting. If it is not possible to abrasive blast or shotblast, acid etch
with a 15% hydrochloric acid solution. After etching pressure wash or flush the surface with copious amounts of
water to neutralize the surface. Care must be taken to ensure that all salts and residue from the reaction have
been removed. The pH of the surface should be checked as per ASTM D 4262 following acid etching. Following
surface preparation, the cleaned surface should pull concrete when tested with an Elcometer or similar pull
tester (ASTM D 4541). New Concrete: Should be allowed to cure for a minimum of 28 days. Remove any
surface hardener or curing compounds using the recommended mechanical methods for surface preparation.
Prepare surfaces as recommended above. Old Concrete: For quick, small patching use suitable epoxy mortar;
for larger areas, use cementitious patching materials that are compatible with the system. After patching, a light
brush blast is recommended prior to coating.
Mixing Instructions: Premix DURALKOTE 500 Part A and Part B separately. Combine equal parts by volume
of Part A (Base) and Part B (Hardener) in a clean container. Mix thoroughly with a low speed drill and a “Jiffy”
mixer paddle. Mix for a minimum of 3 minutes. Scrape the sides and bottom of the mixing container (including
the paddle of the mixer) during mixing. If the paddle is too small or equipment is not adequate it will not give a
uniform mix and an incomplete cure will result. Over mixing with a high speed drill will shorten the pot life as well
as introduce excess air into the mix. Mix only enough material that can be used within the working life.
Application Instructions: Surface and ambient temperatures should be between 50-90°F (10-32°C). Apply
properly mixed DURALKOTE 500 by brush, short nap roller, trowel or spray to the properly prepared surface.
Roller and Brush: Apply at a rate up to 100 mils (16 square feet per gallon) in one application. Spray:
DURALKOTE 500 can be applied by plural component spray equipment. A 1/8” (3.2 mm) thickness can be
applied in one application. Trowel: DURALKOTE 500 can be trowel applied. It can be troweled “neat” or the
properly mixed resin can be mixed with fine silica sand to make a mortar. Mix one part by volume of mixed
DURALKOTE 500 with 2 to 3 parts by volume of 60 mesh dry silica sand.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and application equipment with methly ethyl ketone or acetone immediately after use. Clean spills
or drips with solvent while still wet. Dried material will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Clean tools immediately after application - dried material will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
Rev. 6.11
74
DURALTEX 1705, 1707
Chemically Resistant, Protective Floor Topping and Coating Systems
Description
DURALTEX 1705 is a two component, 100% solids, epoxy-amine system that offers good chemical resistance to a
broad range of solvents, salts, caustics and acids. DURALTEX 1705 is used in trowel down or broadcast applications.
DURALTEX 1707 is a two component, flake filled, high build version of DURALTEX 1705 and is used for coating walls or floors.
All DURALTEX products offer good abrasion and impact resistance and have been formulated to be user friendly, with low
odor, long working life, and good application characteristics.
• Chemical process areas • Chemical drainage areas
• Loading docks • Waste water treatment facilities
• Aisles • Industrial floors
• Ramps • Food and beverage plants
Features/Benefits
• Long term service life • Use in trowel down or broadcast systems
• Good chemical resistance • Flake filled version ideal for coating walls/floors
Compressive Strength ASTM D 695
Material Properties @ 75°F (24°C) psi 9,000 to 10,000 9,000 to 10,000
DURALTEX 1705 1707 MPa (62.1 to 68.9) (62.1 to 68.9)
Mixing Ratio (A:B) volume 2:1 2:1 Hardness Shore D ASTM D 2240
Mixed Viscosity cps 1,500 to 3,500 4,000 to 6,000 1 day 90 to 95 90 to 95
Gel Time (100 grams) mins 25 to 35 25 to 35 Compressive Strength, psi (MPa)
Pot Life 3 gal (11.4 L) mins 12 to 18 12 to 18 Graded Aggregate 12,000 to 13,000 n/a
Tensile Strength ASTM D 638 8:1 by wt. (82.7 to 89.6)
psi 5,000 to 5,500 5,000 to 5,500 Silica Sand 20/40 mesh
MPa (34.5 to 37.9) (34.5 to 37.9) 3:1 by wt. 6,000 to 7,500 n/a
Elongation at Break % 2 to 8 2 to 6 (41.4 to 51.7)
Values presented are typical and are not necessarily referenced Compliance ASTM C 722 yes yes
DURALTEX 1705, 1707

to create specifications.
Appearance: Standard colors are Light Gray, Dark Gray, Tile Red, and Clear. Custom and special colors are available and
are subject to minimum quantity orders.
Packaging
DURALTEX 1705 and 1707 are packaged in 3 gal (11.4 L) units. DURALTEX 1705 is also available in 15 gal (56.8 L) units.
Shelf Life
Coverage
Floor/Wall Coating System ft²/gal (m²/L) Trowel Down System
Prime coat (clear) 1705 300 to 350 (7.36 to 8.59) Prime coat (clear)1705 300 to 350 (7.36 to 8.59)
1st coat (1707) 70 to 90 (1.72 to 2.21) Trowel coat at 1/4" (6.4 mm) thickness (mortar)
2nd coat (1707) 70 to 90 (1.72 to 2.21) 3 gals (11.4 L) silica sand 20/40 mesh &
Broadcast System 1 gal (3.8 L) mixed resin 18 to 20 (0.44 to 0.49)
1st coat (clear) 1705 70 to 90 (1.72 to 2.21) 4.5 gals (17.0 L) graded aggregate
Broadcast Aggregate 1 to 2 lbs/ ft² (4.88 to 9.76 kg/m²) & 1 gal (3.8 L) mixed resin 24 to 26 (0.59 to 0.64)
Each added coat (clear)1705 70 to 90 ea (1.72 to 2.21)
Broadcast Aggregate 1 to 2 lb./ ft² (4.88 to 9.76 kg/m²) Note: Coverage rates are approximate and depend on
Seal coat (1705) 140 to 160 (3.79 to 3.93) temperature, texture and on concrete porosity.
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: Concrete must be structurally sound, dry, free of grease, oils, coatings, dust, curing compounds
Master Format #:
and other contaminants. Surface laitance must be removed. The preferred method of surface preparation is mechanical
abrasion. For oil contaminated surfaces, using steam cleaning in conjunction with a strong emulsifying detergent may
09 96 35
be considered. Rinse thoroughly with potable water. After cleaning, remove defective concrete, honeycombs, cavities,
joint crack voids and other defects by routing to sound material. Smooth, precast and formed concrete surfaces must
be cleaned, roughened and made absorptive by mechanical abrasion. Surface profile should be equal to CSP 2 - 5 in
accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2 at a minimum. If it is not possible to mechanically abrade, acid etch with a 15%
hydrochloric acid solution. After etching, pressure wash or flush the surface with copious amounts of water to neutralize
the surface. Care must be taken to ensure that all salts and residue from the reaction have been removed. Following
acid etching, the pH of the surface should be checked per ASTM D 4262. New concrete should be allowed to cure for a
minimum of 28 days prior to applying DURALTEX 1705 or 1707.

75
Remove any surface hardener or curing compound, by mehcanical abrasion. Following surface preparation, the cleaned
surface should have a minimum surface tensile strength of 250 psi (1.7 MPa) when tested with an Elcometer or similar pull
tester (ASTM D 4541). Before application of the coating, use the “Visqueen test” (ASTM D 4263) to evaluate the moisture level
in the concrete. To repair small patches in old concrete, use a suitable epoxy mortar. For larger areas, use cementitious
patching materials which are compatible with the DURALTEX. After patching, a light brush blast is recommended prior to
coating. When coating steel, all oil, grease, dirt, old coatings or chemical contaminants must be removed prior to applying
DURALTEX. All welds should be continuous and ground to remove all splatter, sharp edges, laps and other surface
irregularities. For Intermittent Contact/Atmospheric Service, all steel surfaces should be blasted in accordance with SSPC-
SP10 or NACE #2 to a “NEAR WHITE” metal finish using clean dry blasting media.
Mixing: All DURALTEX products use a common set of mixing instructions. Using a low speed drill motor and a “Jiffy” type
mixer, mix the A & B components separately for approximately 1 minute. Combine two parts by volume of “A” with one
part by volume of “B” and mix thoroughly. Scrape the bottom and sides of mixing container, at least once. Mix just enough
material that can be used within the working life. Do not aerate the mix. DURALTEX mortar (1705 verison only) can be
prepared by gradually adding clean dry aggregate to mixed DURALTEX in a mortar mixer. Mixing times are typically 3
to 5 minutes after all the aggregate is added. Depending on aggregate, the mix proportion can vary. When using silica
sand (20/40 mesh) as the aggregate, mix 3 parts by volume of the sand to 1 part DURALTEX. If graded aggregate is the
extender, up to 4.5 parts of aggregate by volume can be mixed with 1 part DURALTEX. Ensure that the aggregate has been
thoroughly wet out. Do not blend any aggregate with the flake filled version DURALTEX 1707.
Application Guidelines
Floor/Wall Coating Application: Use DURALTEX 1705 CLEAR as the prime coat. While the prime coat is still tacky,
apply DURALTEX 1707 with a brush, short nap roller, squeegee or spray. Allow to cure for 5 to 8 hours at 75°F
(24°C). For most industrial applications, a second coat is required. Broadcast Application: Apply properly mixed
DURALTEX 1705 by brush, short nap roller, squeegee or spray. Immediately broadcast clean, dry aggregate (typically
silica sand 20/40 mesh) at approx. 1 to 2 lbs/ft² (0.45 to 0.91 kg/m²) or until no wet spots appear. Allow to cure for 5 to
8 hours at 75°F (24°C). After the cure, sweep up excess aggegate. Build the thickness by repeating this procedure with
a second application of DURALTEX 1705 and aggregate. After the second coat has cured, a seal coat of DURALTEX
1705 may be applied. Trowel Down Application: Apply DURALTEX 1705 CLEAR as the prime coat. A mortar made
from DURALTEX 1705 and an aggregate (see mixing instructions), is used in trowel down applications. While the prime
coat is still wet, broadcast 0.25 lbs (0.11 kg) of silica sand/ft². Allow to cure 3 to 5 hours. Place the DURALTEX mortar
and screed or trowel to desired floor thickness. Seal the edges and termination details. Allow to cure for 5 to 8 hours.
Chemical Resistance Data: Applicable for individual chemicals only for exposure at room temperature to coatings
applied at a minimum film thickness of 40 mils.
Acids Miscellaneous Alkalies / Salts
Acetic 50% 4 Brake Fluid 1 Ammonia 29% 1
10% 3 Ethylene Glycol 2 Ammonium Sulfate 50% 1
Chromic 10% 1 50% 2 Formaldehyde 37% 2 Calcium Chloride 1
Citric 10% 1 50% 2 Gasoline 2 Diethanolamine 2
Formic 25% 4 98% 4 Propylene Glycol 2 Ferric Chloride 50% 3D
Hydrochloric 10% 1 37% 2D Skydrol 1 Hydrogen Peroxide 35% 2D
Hydrofluoric 25% 4D Vegetable Oil 1 Potassium Hydroxide 50% 1
Lactic 85% 2 Solvents Sodium Hydroxide 50% 2
Nitric 10% 2 45% 4 Ethyl Alcohol 95% 3 Sodium Hypochlorite 10% 2D
Phosphoric 10% 1 85% 3 Ethyl Acetate 4
Sulfuric 10% 1 75% 1 Methanol 4 Rating Key
98% 4D Methyl Ethyl Ketone 4 1 = Long term Exposure (30 days)
Methylene Chloride NR 2 = Extended Exposure (7 days)
Mineral Spirits 1 3 = Splash / Spill (72 hours)
Toluene 2 4 = Incidental Contact (8 hours)
Tricholoroethane 2 D = Discoloration may occur
Xylene 2 NR = Not Recommended
Clean-Up
Clean tools and application equipment immediately with methyl ethyl ketone or acetone. Clean spills or drips with
solvent while still wet. Cured DURALTEX 1705/1707 will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Store units of material between 50°F and 90°F (10°F to 32°C).
• Application temperature should be 50°F to 90°F (10°C to 32°C). Do not apply to wet surfaces.
• Do not apply if humidity is greater than 90%, or if substrate temperature is not at least 5°F (-15°C) above the dew
point of the work area.
• Do not thin this material. Concrete should be cured for 28 days.
76
DURALTEX 1805, 1807
Epoxy Novolac Floor Topping and Coating Systems
Description
DURALTEX 1805 is a two component, 100% solids epoxy novolac that offers excellent chemical resistance to aggressive
chemicals such as 98% sulfuric acid, 37% hydrochloric acid and other industrial chemicals. DURALTEX 1805 is also used
in trowel down or broadcast systems. DURALTEX 1807 is the flake filled, high build version and is used for coating walls or
floors. All DURALTEX products offer good abrasion and impact resistance and have been formulated to be user friendly,
with low odor, long working life, and good application characteristics. By using specifically blended aggregates with
Duraltex 1805, very high early strength and excellent impact and abrasion resistance can be achieved for demanding
flooring applications.
• Chemical process areas • Chemical drainage areas
• Loading docks • Waste water treatment facilities
• Aisles • Industrial floors
• Ramps • Food and beverage plants
Features/Benefits
• Long term service life • Use in trowel down or broadcast systems
• Excellent chemical resistance • Very high early strengths
Material Properties @ 75°F (24° C) Compressive Strength ASTM D 695
DURALTEX 1805 1807 psi 9,000 to 10,000 9,000 to 10,000
Mixing Ratio (A:B) volume 2:1 2:1 (MPa) (62.1 to 68.9) (62.1 to 68.9)
Mixed Viscosity cps 1,000 to 1,800 3,000 to 5,000 Hardness Shore D ASTM D 2240
Gel Time (100 grams) mins 30 to 40 30 to 40 1 day 90 to 95 90 to 95
Pot Life 3 gal (11.4 L) mins 15 to 20 15 to 20 Compressive Strength psi (MPa)
Tensile Strength ASTM D 638 Graded Aggregate
psi 5,600 to 6,200 5,600 to 6,200 8:1 by wt. 12,000 to 13,000 n/a
(MPa) (34.5 to 37.9) (34.5 to 37.9) (82.7 to 89.6)
Elongation at Break % 2 to 8 2 to 6 Silica Sand 20/40 mesh
3:1 by wt. 6,000 to 7,500 n/a
DURALTEX® 1805, 1807

Appearance: Standard colors are light gray, dark gray, tile (41.4 to 51.7)
red, and clear. Custom and special colors are available and are Compliance ASTM C 722 yes yes
subject to minimum quantity orders. Values presented are typical and are not necessarily
referenced to create specifications.
Packaging
DURALTEX 1805 and 1807 are packaged in 3 gal (11.4 L) units.
Shelf Life
Coverage
Floor/Wall Coating System ft²/gal (m²/L) Trowel Down System
Prime coat (clear) 1805 300 to 350 (7.36 to 8.59) Prime coat (clear) 1805 300 to 350 (7.36 to 8.59)
1st coat (1807) 70 to 90 (1.72 to 2.21) Trowel coat at 1/4" (6.4 mm) thickness (mortar)
2nd coat (1807) 70 to 90 (1.72 to 2.21) 3 gals (11.4 L) silica sand 20/40 mesh &
Broadcast System 1 gal (3.8 L) mixed resin 1
8 to 20 (0.44 to 0.49)
1st coat 1805 70 to 90 (1.72 to 2.21) 4.5 gals (17.0 L) graded aggregate
Broadcast Aggregate 1 to 2 lb/ft²(.45 to .91 kg/m²) & 1 gal (3.8 L) mixed resin 2
4 to 26 (0.59 to 0.64)
Each added coat (1805) 70 to 90 ea (1.72 to 2.21 ea) Note: Coverage rates are approximate and depend on
Broadcast Aggregate 1 to 2 lb/ft² (.45 to .91 kg/m²) temperature, texture and on concrete porosity.
Seal coat (1805) 140 to 160 (3.79 to 3.93)
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: Concrete must be structurally sound, dry, free of grease, oils, coatings, dust, curing compounds and
Master Format #:
other contaminants. Surface laitance must be removed. The preferred method of surface preparation is mechanical abrasion. For
oil contaminated surfaces, using steam cleaning in conjunction with a strong emulsifying detergent may be considered. Rinse
09 96 35
thoroughly with potable water. After cleaning, remove defective concrete, honeycombs, cavities, joint crack voids and other
defects by routing to sound material. Smooth, precast and formed concrete surfaces must be cleaned, roughened and made
absorptive by mechanical abrasion. Surface profile should be equal to CSP 2 - 5 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2 at a
minimum. If it is not possible to mechanically abrade, acid etch with a 15% hydrochloric acid solution. After etching, pressure
wash or flush the surface with copious amounts of water to neutralize the surface. Care must be taken to ensure that all salts and
residue from the reaction have been removed. The pH of the surface should be checked as per ASTM D 4262 following acid
etching. New concrete should be allowed to cure for a minimum of 28 days prior to applying DURALTEX. Remove any surface
hardener or curing compound, by mechanical abrasion. After preparation, the cleaned surface should have a minimum surface
tensile strength of 250 psi (1.7 MPa) when tested with an Elcometer or similar pull tester (ASTM D 4541).

77
Before application of the coating, use the “Visqueen test” (ASTM D 4263) to evaluate the moisture level in the concrete.
To repair small patches in old concrete, use a suitable epoxy mortar. For larger areas, use cementitious patching materials
which are compatible with the DURALTEX. Consult Euclid Chemical Technical Support for appropriate patching materials.
After patching, a light brush blast is recommended prior to coating. When coating steel, all oils, greases, dirt, old coatings
or chemical contaminants must be removed prior to applying DURALTEX. All welds should be continuous and ground to
remove all splatter, sharp edges, laps and other surface irregularities. For Intermittent Contact/Atmospheric Service, all steel
surfaces should be blasted in accordance with SSPC-SP10 or NACE #2 to a “NEAR WHITE” metal finish using clean dry
blasting media.
Mixing: All DURALTEX products use a common set of mixing instructions. Using a low speed drill motor and a “Jiffy” type
mixer, mix the A & B components separately for approximately 1 minute. Combine two parts by volume of “A” with one
part by volume of “B” and mix thoroughly. Scrape the bottom and sides of mixing container, at least once. Mix just enough
material that can be used within the working life. Do not aerate the mix. A DURALTEX mortar can be prepared (1805 version
only) by gradually adding clean dry aggregate to mixed DURALTEX in a mortar mixer. Mixing times are typically 3 to 5
minutes after all the aggregate is added. Depending on aggregate, the mix proportion can vary. When using silica sand
(20/40 mesh) as the aggregate, mix 3 parts by volume of the sand to 1 part DURALTEX. If graded aggregate is the extender,
up to 4.5 parts of aggregate by volume can be mixed with 1 part DURALTEX. Ensure that the aggregate has been thoroughly
wet out. Do not blend any aggregate with the flake filled version of DURALTEX 1807).
Application Guidelines
Floor/Wall Coating Application: Use DURALTEX 1805 CLEAR as the prime coat. While the prime coat is still
tacky, apply DURALTEX 1807 with a brush, short nap roller, squeegee or spray. Allow to cure for 5 to 8 hours
at 75°F (24°C). For most industrial applications, a second coat is required. Broadcast Application: Apply
properly mixed DURALTEX 1805 by brush, short nap roller, squeegee or spray. Immediately broadcast clean,
dry aggregate (typically silica sand 20/40 mesh) at approx. 1 to 2 lb/ft² (0.45 to 0.91 kg/m²) or until no wet
spots appear. Allow to cure for 5 to 8 hours at 75°F (24°C). After the cure, sweep up excess aggregate. Build
the thickness by repeating this procedure with a second application of DURALTEX 1805 and aggregate. After
the second coat has cured, a seal coat of DURALTEX 1805 may be applied. Trowel Down Application: Apply
DURALTEX 1805 CLEAR as the prime coat. DURALTEX mortar made from DURALTEX 1805 and an aggregate
(see mixing instructions), is used in trowel down applications. While the prime coat is still wet, broadcast 0.25
lbs (0.11 kg) of silica sand/ft². Allow to cure 3 to 5 hours. Place the DURALTEX mortar and screed or trowel
to desired floor thickness. Seal the edges and termination details. Allow to cure for 5 to 8 hours. As in the
broadcast application, a seal coat may be applied.
Chemical Resistance Data: Applicable for individual chemicals only for exposure at room temperature to coatings
applied at a minimum film thickness of 40 mils.
Acids Miscellaneous Alkalies / Salts
Acetic 50% 4 10% 2 Brake Fluid 1 Ammonia 29% 1
Chromic 10% 1 50% 1 Ethylene Glycol 1 Ammonium Sulfate 50% 1
Citric 10% 1 50% 1 Formaldehyde 37% 2 Calcium Chloride 1
Formic 25% 4 98% 4 Gasoline 1 Diethanolamine 1
Hydrochloric 10% 1 37% 1 Propylene Glycol 1 Ferric Chloride 50% 2D
Hydrofluoric 25% 4 Skydrol 1 Hydrogen Peroxide 35% 1D
Lactic 85% 2 Vegetable Oil 1 Potassium Hydroxide 50% 1
Nitric 10% 2 45% 4 Solvents Sodium Hydroxide 50% 1
Phosphoric 10% 1 85% 2 Ethyl Alcohol 95% 2 Sodium Hypochlorite 10% 1D
Sulfuric 10% 1 75% 1 Ethyl Acetate 4
98% 2 Methanol 4 Rating Key
Methyl Ethyl Ketone 4 1 = Long Term Exposure (30 days)
Methylene Chloride NR 2 = Extended Exposure (7 days)
Mineral Spirits 1 3 = Splash / Spill (72 hours)
4 = Incidental Contact (8 hours)
Toluene 2 D = Discoloration may occur
Tricholoroethane 1 NR = Not Recommended
Xylene 2
Clean-Up
Clean tools and application equipment with methyl ethyl ketone or acetone immediately after use. Clean spills or drips
with solvent while still wet. Cured DURALTEX will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Protect from moisture and freezing. Store at tempatures between 50°F to 90°F (10°F to 32°C).
• Application temperature should be 50°F to 90°F (10°C to 32°C).
• Do not apply to wet surfaces.
• Do not apply if humidity is greater than 90%, or if substrate temperature is not at least 5°F (-15°C).
above the dew point of the work area.
• Do not thin this material. Concrete should be cured for 28 days.
78
EUCOPOXY TUFCOAT
Two-Part High Performance Epoxy Coating
Description
EUCOPOXY TUFCOAT is a high-performance floor-coating system designed to provide concrete surfaces with excellent
wear resistance in combination with protection against chemical attack. These outstanding properties are further enhanced by
the availability of a wide selection of semi-gloss colors for superior aesthetic benefits.
• Food processing plants • Warehouse floors • Manufacturing plants
• Auto/truck repair bays • Chemical plants • Mechanical rooms
Features/Benefits
• Provides excellent wear under traffic • Can be applied as a nonslip floor finish
• Excellent resistance to a variety of chemicals • Available in a variety of colors
• Hardens to a semi-gloss finish • No separate primer required
• Easy to apply with standard equipment
Typical Engineering Data CHEMICAL RESISTANCE
The following results were developed under laboratory conditions. Acetic Acid, 5%................................................... poor
Alkalies......................................................... excellent
Re-coat time........................................ 2 to 24 hours Ammonia...................................................... excellent
Foot traffic....................................................24 hours Battery Acid....................................................... good
Wheel traffic................................................48 hours Beer.............................................................. excellent
Dry to touch at 70oF (21oC)..............................2 hours Bleach.......................................................... excellent
Pot life at 70oF (21oC)............................... 6 to 8 hours Brake Fluid......................................................... good
Mixing ratio by volume A to B.............................1 to 1 Ethanol................................................................ poor
Total solids content............................................58% Ethylene Glycol............................................ excellent
Dry film thickness............................ 3 to 4 mils/coat Gasoline....................................................... excellent
EUCOPOXY TUFCOAT
Hydrochloric Acid, 10%..................................... good
Flexibility........................................................... good MEK..................................................................... poor
Weathering................................................ very good Methylene Chloride............................................. poor
VOC Content MIBK................................................................... poor
Clear................................................................418 g/L Nitric Acid, 5%.................................................... poor
Colors..............................................................430 g/L Oil................................................................. excellent
Abrasion Resistance: Taber Abrader CS-17 wheel with Phosphoric Acid, 30%........................................ poor
1,000 gm/500 cycles ................................ 30.2 mg loss Salt water..................................................... excellent
Skydrol®............................................................ good
Appearance: EUCOPOXY TUFCOAT is a 2-part Toluene.............................................................. good
Urine............................................................. excellent
epoxy system consisting of a Part A and a Part B. Xylene.......................................................... excellent
This product is available in Black, Clear (amber),
Concrete Gray, Tile Red, Tan, Light Reflective and RATINGS: Poor - affected within 24 hours; Good - no
affect for 24 hours; Excellent - no affect after 2 weeks.
White. After placement and curing, the product has NOTE: Where chemical resistance is rated as poor,
a smooth, semi-gloss appearance. check the ratings on Eucothane as a possible
topcoat for upgraded chemical resistance.
Packaging
EUCOPOXY TUFCOAT is available in 2 gal (7.6 L) and 10 gal (38 L) kits. Mixing ratio is 1 to 1 by volume.
Shelf Life
Master Format #:
2 years in orignal, unopened package.

09 96 56
USDA compliant
Coverage
Coverage rate is 250 ft2/gal (6.1 m2/L) at 6 to 7 mil (152-178 microns) wet film thickness. Use two coats for best
appearance and protection. The concrete surface texture greatly affects coverage rate and final appearance.

79
Additionally, introducing silica sand for slip resistance will reduce coverage rates.
Material Requirements: With a two coat application using a coverage rate of 250 ft2/gal (6.1 m2/L) per coat.
Approximately 8 gal (30.3 L) of material will be required per 1000 ft2 (92.9 m2) of area.
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: New concrete must be a minimum of 28 days old and possess an open surface texture
with all curing compounds and sealers removed. The concrete must be clean and sound. All oil, dirt, debris,
paint and unsound concrete must be removed. The surface should be prepared mechanically which will give
an open surface profile with the cement paste removed from the surface. Surface profile should be equal to CSP 2 - 5
in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2 at a minimum. Acid etching is acceptable only when mechanical
preparation is impractical. It is recommended that only contractors experienced in the acid etching process
use this means of surface preparation. The salts of the reaction must be thoroughly pressure washed away.
Allow the concrete to completely dry. NOTE: Even with proper procedures, an acid etched surface may not provide
as strong a bond as mechanical preparation procedures. Also, acid etching will not remove oil, grease, sealers and
other materials that will interfere with the bond on the surface of the concrete.
Joints and Edges: If the floor is subjected to wheel traffic the edges of the floor area should be sawcut 1/4"
(6 mm) deep to provide a locked in edge. Moving joints as in the case of expansion joints should be brought
up through the coating. All cracks over 1/16" (1.6 mm) wide should be filled. Use an epoxy mortar such as
DURALFLEX FASTPATCH to fill wide cracks, joints and keyed edges.
Mixing: All materials should be in the proper temperature range of 60oF (16oC) to 90oF (32oC). Mix parts A and
B (resin & hardener) separately for one minute using a drill and mixing prop. For ease of mixing, add the part B
to the part A (not the reverse). Mix the Part A and Part B together for 3 minutes. The epoxy must be well mixed
to ensure proper chemical reaction. After mixing, place immediately.
Placement: This product may be applied by squeegee, roller or industrial sprayer. After application, it is
suggested the coating be back rolled to reduce surface imperfections and improve bond.
Top Coat: If desired, additional coats of this product or a EUCOTHANE may be applied just after the initial
coating has become tack-free. This could be as early as 6 hours but must be within 24 hours of initial coating
placement. The choice of topcoat such as EUCOTHANE is selected based upon the chemical, wear, and stain
resistance desired. Contact your local Euclid Chemical distributor or The Euclid Chemical Company directly for
a recommendation for the particular circumstances.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with solvent such as methyl ethyl ketone or acetone. Do not allow the epoxy to
harden on equipment. Cured epoxy will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Avoid application at air and floor temperatures below 50oF (10oC).
• Store indoors at 45oF to 110oF (7oC to 43oC).
• Use in a well ventilated area.
• Keep away from sparks and open flames.
• Product may yellow in outdoor (strong sunlight) environments.
• Apply only over dry concrete surfaces.
• Not recommended over new concrete less than 28 days old.
• If HVAC intake ducts will distribute solvent odor into adjoining occupied areas of the building, care should be
taken to block these vents.
resistance.
Rev. 6.11
80
EUCOPOXY TUFCOAT VOX
Water Based Epoxy Floor Coating
Description
EUCOPOXY TUFCOAT VOX is a two-component, water-based, low-odor, epoxy-polyamide coating. It acts as a
tough, abrasion-resistant membrane that withstands wear and chemical attack in a variety of applications. EUCOPOXY
TUFCOAT VOX should be used in many areas where a solvent-based product is not permitted. EUCOPOXY TUFCOAT
VOX comes in a variety of colors and provides a semi-gloss finish.
• Food processing plants • Warehouse floors • Manufacturing plants • Aisleways and docks
• Occupied buildings • Chemical plants • Auto/truck repair bays
Features/Benefits
• Low odor • Easy to apply with standard equipment
• Provides excellent wear under traffic • Can be applied as a non-slip floor finish
• Excellent resistance to a variety of chemicals • Available in a variety of colors
• Hardens to a semi-gloss finish
The following results were developed under laboratory conditions. MIBK................................................................... poor
VOC Content .........................................<125 g/L Nitric Acid, 5%.................................................... poor
Mixing ratio clear by vol, Part A to Part B.....3.9 to 1 Oil................................................................. excellent
Mixing ratio color by vol, Part A to Part B.....4.5 to 1 Phosphoric Acid, 30%........................................ poor
Re-Coat time....................................4 to 24 hours Salt Water..................................................... excellent
Foot traffic.......................................... @ 24 hours Skydrol®............................................................. poor
Toluene............................................................... poor
Wheel traffic....................................... @ 48 hours
EUCOPOXY TUFCOAT VOX

Urine............................................................. excellent
Dry to touch at 70oF (21oC)................4 to 6 hours Xylene.......................................................... excellent
Pot life at 70oF (21oC).................... 1 to 1 ½ hours RATINGS: Poor - affected within 24 hours; Good - no
Total solids content.......................................56%
Dry film thickness................................ 3 to 4 mils effect for 24 hours; Excellent - no effect after 2 weeks.
Flexibility...................................................... good
Weathering............................................very good NOTE: Where chemical resistance is rated as poor, check
Abrasion resistance...............................excellent the ratings on Eucothane as a possible topcoat for
CHEMICAL RESISTANCE upgraded chemical resistance.
Acetic Acid, 5%................................................... poor
Alkalies......................................................... excellent
Ammonia...................................................... excellent Appearance: EUCOPOXY TUFCOAT VOX is a two-
Battery Acid....................................................... good component, epoxy-polyamide system consisting of a
Beer.............................................................. excellent Part A and Part B. This product is available in white,
Bleach.......................................................... excellent light reflective, tile red, tan, concrete gray, black, &
Brake Fluid.......................................................... poor clear (amber)
Ethanol................................................................ poor
Ethylene Glycol............................................ excellent Important: The clear has a slight amber appearance
Gasoline....................................................... excellent and may not be suitable for some applications.
Hydrochloric Acid, 10%...................................... poor EUCOPOXY TUFCOAT DBS or DURALTEX should be
MEK..................................................................... poor used if a water clear appearance is required.
Methylene Chloride............................................. poor
Packaging
EUCOPOXY TUFCOAT VOX is packaged in 1 gal (3.8 L) and 5 gal (18.9 L) kits.
Master Format #:
Shelf Life
09 96 56
USDA compliant

81
Coverage
Coverage rate is approximately 100 to 250 ft2/gal (2.4 to 6.1 m2/L) at 6 to 7 mil (152-178 microns) wet film
thickness. Use two coats for best appearance and protection. The method of surface preparation and
resulting concrete surface texture affects the coverage rate and final appearance. Introducing silica sand
for slip resistance will also reduce coverage rates. A test section on the prepared surface is recommended to
verify the coverage rate.
Material Requirements: With a two coat application using a coverage rate of 250 ft2/gal (6.1 m2/L) per coat, and
a finely textured surface, approximately 8 gal (30.3 L) of material will be required per 1000 ft2 (92.9 m2) of area.
Directions for Use
paint and unsound concrete must be removed. The surface should be prepared mechanically, which will give
an open surface profile with the cement paste removed from the surface. Surface profile should be equal to CSP
2 - 5 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2 at a minimum. Acid etching is acceptable only when mechanical
preparation is impractical. It is recommended that only contractors experienced in the acid etching process use
this means of surface preparation. The salts of the reaction must be thoroughly pressure washed away. Allow the
concrete to completely dry. NOTE: Even with proper procedures, an acid etched surface may not provide as strong
a bond as mechanical preparation procedures. Also, acid etching will not remove oil, grease, sealers and other
materials that will interfere with the bond on the surface of the concrete.
Joints and Edges: If the floor is subjected to wheel traffic, the edges of the floor area should be sawcut 1/4" (6
mm) deep to provide a locked in edge. Moving joints as in the case of expansion joints should be brought up
through the coating. All cracks over 1/16" (1.6 mm) wide should be filled. Use a 100% solids epoxy mortar such
as DURALFLEX FASTPATCH to fill wide cracks, joints and keyed edges.
Mixing: All materials should be in the proper temperature range of 60oF (16oC) to 90oF (32oC). Mix parts A and
B (resin & hardener) separately for one minute using a drill and mixing prop. For ease of mixing, add the Part
B to the Part A (not the reverse). Mix the Part A and Part B together for 2 to 3 minutes. The epoxy must be well
mixed to ensure proper chemical reaction. After mixing, place immediately.
Placement: This product may be applied by squeegee, roller or industrial sprayer. After application, it is
suggested the coating be back rolled to reduce surface imperfections and improve bond.
Top Coat: If desired, additional coats of this product or a topcoat of another Euclid Chemical product may be
applied just after the initial coating has become tack-free. This could be as early as 4 hours but must be within
24 hours of initial coating placement. The choice of topcoat such as EUCOTHANE is selected based upon
chemical and wear resistance desired. Contact your local Euclid Chemical distributor or The Euclid Chemical
Company directly for a recommendation for the particular circumstances.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with solvent such as acetone or methyl ethyl ketone. Do not allow the epoxy to
harden on equipment. Cured epoxy will require mechanical removal.
• Avoid application at air and floor temperatures below 50oF (10oC).
• Store indoors at 45oF to 110oF (7oC to 43oC). Keep material from freezing.
• Application of first coat in high humidity (>70% RH) environments may result in adhesion problems with second
(finish) coat. A test area should be tried to insure proper results. If recoat problems are apparent, the base coat
surface should be solvent wiped or lightly abraded to insure proper adhesion of the second/topcoat.
resistance.
Rev. 6.11
82
EUCOTHANE
Concrete and Metal Protective Polyurethane Coating
Description
EUCOTHANE is a two component, solvent based, polyester aliphatic polyurethane coating which offers outstanding
abrasion resistance, excellent flexibility, color stability and weather resistant characteristics. It offers very good
chemical resistance without compromising on aesthetics. Ideal as a topcoat for most Euclid Chemical epoxies,
urethane and some masonry coatings, EUCOTHANE provides excellent anti-graffiti properties.
• Airport hangar floors • Bridge structures • Clean rooms • Truck/auto repair bays
• Manufacturing plants • Laboratories • Warehouses • Walls/floors
Features/Benefits
• Excellent cleanability • Good chemical resistance • Anti-graffiti coating
Material Properties @75°F (24°C) - 50% RH
Mix ratio (A:B) by volume 2 to 1 Chemical Resistance
VOC Content (Clear Gloss, Colors) 330 g/L
ACIDS RATING MISCELLANEOUS RATING
VOC Content (Clear Satin) 330 g/L Acetic Acid 5% 2 Detergent Solution 3
Viscosity, mixed cp 200 to 600 Citric Acid 5% 3 Ethylene Glycol 3
Mixed solids % by wt 73% (colors), 64% (clear) Hydrochloric 10% 3 Propylene Glycol 3
Nitric Acid 5% 3 Vegetable Oil 3
Pot life (1.5 gal volume) 2 to 4 hours Phosphoric 20% 3 Gasoline 3
Hardness, Shore D 62 Sulfuric 10% 3
SOLVENTS
Tack Free Time 3 to 5 hours Ethyl Alcohol 95% 3
Light Foot Traffic 14 - 24 hours Ethyl Acetate NR
Methanol 1
Final Cure/Heavy Traffic 3 to 5 days Methyl Ethyl Ketone NR
Flexibility 1/8” (3.2 mm) Mandrel No cracks Mineral Spirits 3
EUCOTHANE
Taber Abrasion Methylene Chloride NR
Toluene 2
CS17 wheel, 1000 g load, 500 cycles 22 mg loss Xylene 3
Finish Characteristics High Gloss Tricholorethane 2
Isopropyl Alcohol 1
Impact Resistance
Gardner Impact, 160 in/lb Passes
1 = Incidental Contact (8 hrs)
2 = Splash & Spill (72 hrs)
3 = Extended Exposure (7 days)
Values presented are typical and not necessarily D = Discoloration may occur
referenced to create specifications. NR = Not Resistant
Appearance: Light Gray, Concrete Gray, Dark Gray,

Tile Red, White, Black, Tan, Clear Gloss and Clear
Satin are standard colors. Special or custom colors
are available subject to minimum quantity orders.
Packaging
Master Format #:
EUCOTHANE is packaged in 3 gal (11.3 L) cases.

09 9635
Shelf Life
Coverage
300 to 500 ft²/gal (7.4 to 12.3 m²/L) Note: Coverage rates are approximate and depend on temperature, porosity and texture of the surface.

83
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation Concrete: Surface must be structurally sound, dry, and free of laitance, dust, dirt, oil,
coatings, form release agents, and other contaminants. Remove curing compounds by mechanical abrasion.
Oil, grease and asphalt residue should be removed by using a combination of scrapers, wire brushes, abrasive
blasting and scrubbing with a strong industrial grade detergent. Flush thoroughly with clean water after scrubbing.
Honeycombs, cracks, cavities, and other defects should be routed to sound concrete and patched using
compatible materials. Smooth precast and formed concrete must be cleaned and made absorptive by abrasive
blasting.Surface profile should be equal to CSP 2 - 5 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2, at a minimum.
Steel: Should be abrasive-blasted using clean dry aggregate to near white metal finish and primed immediately
to prevent flash rusting.
New/Existing Coatings: Old or existing epoxy coatings should be cleaned and lightly sanded prior to application of
EUCOTHANE as a topcoat. Follow the recommended drying time between coats, when applying EUCOTHANE to
newly applied Dural epoxy coatings. Priming: EUCOTHANE should not be applied directly to concrete.
DURAPRIME WB (low odor, two part water-based epoxy) should be used to prime concrete in accordance with the
information provided in the technical data sheet for these products.
Mixing: Premix EUCOTHANE Part A and Part B separately, then combine one (1) part by volume of Part A with
three (3) parts by volume of Part B in a clean dry container, and mix using a “Jiffy” or similar type mixer. Mix
slowly without aerating for 3 to 5 minutes. Scrape the sides of the container and the blades at least once during
the mixing. Do not aerate during mixing.
Application: Primer for concrete: Apply the selected primer using brush, short nap roller or spray. Refer to
appropriate product data sheet. The primer must be tack free before application of EUCOTHANE. The surface
and ambient temperature at the time of application should be between 50°F to 90°F (10°C to 32°C) and the
relative humidity below 90%. EUCOTHANE can be applied as soon as the primer is tack-free, but no later than
18 hours after application of the primer. When spraying, proper safety precautions should be observed. Two
coats of EUCOTHANE are recommended for most applications. The second coat can be applied after the first
coat has tacked off, typically within 4 to 6 hours after application at 75°F (24°C) For a matte finish, apply a coat
of clear gloss to the primed surface, followed by a coat of clear matte. For an anti-skid surface, broadcast ½ to 1
lb/yd² (0.54 kg/m²) of clean, dry, fine aggregate into the first coat of EUCOTHANE. When the first coat has cured,
sweep off the excess aggregate. Apply the second coat of EUCOTHANE to seal the surface.
Cure Time: At 75°F (24°C), tack free time is 4 to 6 hours. EUCOTHANE requires 14 to 24 hours at 75°F (24°C) to
cure sufficiently for light to moderate traffic.
Graffiti Removal: Graffiti removal should not be attempted until 72 hours after EUCOTHANE application.
Remove graffiti as soon as possible after the graffiti attack by working on small areas at a time. Use commercially
available graffiti removers and apply in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
Clean-Up
or drips with solvent while still wet. Dried EUCOTHANE will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Keep away from heat and flame.
• Apply EUCOTHANE when surface and ambient temperatures are between 50°F to 90°F (10°C to 32°C)
and the humidity below 90%.
• Surfaces including primer must be dry prior to EUCOTHANE application.
• Excessively high film thicknesses and/or moisture may cause surface blistering.
• Concrete surfaces may darken to give a “wet look’’ effect on application.
• A test patch for application on concrete or existing coatings is highly recommended.
• Not intended for continuous immersion.
• Provide adequate ventilation and ensure proper protective and safety equipment during application.
• Keep away from sparks, open flame, pilot lights and other sources of ignition.
• Keep containers tightly closed.
84
Coatings - Traffic Deck
Epoxy Based
Dural 50 87
Dural 50 LM 89
Dural 335 91
Flexolith 93
Flexolith Summer Grade 95
Epoxy-Urethane Based
Flexdeck System 97
Urethane Based
Duraldeck System 99
Tammsdeck System 101
Polymer Overlay Termination Detail
The application of polymer overlays to concrete bridge decks and industrial floors often require termination
at openings. Open floor terminations are susceptible to leading edge delaminations caused by loads
from heavy equipment such as front end loaders and snow plows. The following termination detail
is recommended to protect the leading edge from damage due to blunt traffic exposure. The steps
to properly install an open floor termination of polymer concrete overlays such as FLEXOLITH® and
DURALTEX® are as follows:
STEP 1
Prepare a chalk line and make two saw cuts, one at the point of termination,
the other 4 to 6 inches (10-15 cm) back from the termination point. The
depth of the saw cuts should be 1/4 inch (6 mm) at termination point and
1/16-1/8 inch (1.6-3.2 mm) at the inset saw cut.
STEP 2
Remove concrete between saw cuts for a gradual slope to the original
floor or bridge deck. Abrasive blast the concrete channel.
STEP 3
Install polymer concrete overlay. Fill the channel to the original design
thickness of the overlay. A mortar consisting of the overlay resin and
aggregate may be required for broadcast overlays.
This detail should be used for all open floor terminations, including doorways and terminations at a drain.
This type of termination will protect the leading edge of polymer concrete overlays, reducing maintenance
and extending the service life of the overlay.
DURAL 50
Ultra Low Viscosity Acrylated Epoxy

Description
DURAL 50 is a 100% solids, two component acrylated epoxy resin formulation designed to penetrate concrete
and seal it from the ingress of chlorides and water. DURAL 50 heals hairline cracks through its penetration.
• Bridge decks • Reduces chloride penetration
• Parking decks • Pressure injection
• Consolidation of porous and dusting surfaces • Gravity feed hairline cracks
• Reduces water absorption
Features/Benefits
• High strength • Contractor friendly
• Penetrates cracks by gravity • Easy mixing
• Deep penetrating • Does not contain styrene or peroxides
• Strengthens concrete surfaces • Non-flammable
• Heal and seals concrete • Moisture tolerant
Material Properties @ 75°F (24°C) and 50% RH
Mixing Ratio (A:B) by volume............................................................................. 3:1
Mixed Viscosity, cps................................................................................... 25 to 75
Gel Time (100 gms), mins........................................................................... 25 to 35
Tack Free, hours.............................................................................................. 3 to 5
Tensile Strength, ASTM D 638, psi (MPa).....................4,000 to 5,000 (27.6 to 34.5)
Elongation, ASTM D 638, %............................................................................... 2 to 6
DURAL 50
Compressive Strength, ASTM D 695, psi (MPa)..........7,000 to 8,000 (48.3 to 55.2)
Compressive Strength (3 parts sand)
mortar, ASTM C 109, psi (MPa).......................................8,000 to 9,000 (55.2 to 62.1)
Slant Shear Bond Strength
ASTM C882, psi (MPa) (concrete failure).......................1,800 to 2,000 (12.4 to 13.8)
Flexural Strength, ASTM D 790, psi (MPa).................9,000 to 10,500 (62.1 to 72.4)
Values presented are typical laboratory data.
Packaging
DURAL 50 is packaged in 4 gal (15.5 L)/case contractor kits.
Shelf Life
Master Format #:
Coverage
03 64 23
Slab Sealing: 100 to 200 ft²/gal (2.45 to 4.91 m²/L) for the first coat (typical concrete surface). 150 to 300 ft²/gal
(3.68 to 7.36 m²/L) for a second coat in cases of extensive cracking or high porosity. Crack Grouting: Coverage
will be determined by depth and length of cracks.

87
Canadian MTQ
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: Concrete must be structurally sound, clean, dry and free of laitance, dust, dirt, oil, coatings,
form release agents and other contaminants. The preferred method of surface preparation is mechanical
abrasion. Remove defective concrete, honeycombs, cavities, joint crack voids and other defects by routing to
sound material. Rebuild areas with suitable patching materials. Smooth, pre-cast and formed concrete surfaces
must be cleaned, roughened and made absorptive by mechanical abrasion. Surface profile should be equal to
CSP 2-5 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2 at a minimum. Blow debris and residue out of cracks and from
the surface with a moisture-free and oil-free air jet. Mask expansion joint sealants to prevent adhesion of DURAL
50 to the joint surface. Surfaces and cracks must be completely dry before DURAL 50 application to obtain
penetration. For further information contact your local Euclid Chemical representative.
Mixing: Premix Part A and Part B. Combine 3 parts by volume of Part A with 1 part by volume of Part B. Mix
thoroughly with a slow speed motor and mixing blade. A ½“ (13 mm) drill and “Jiffy” mixer is acceptable. Do not
aerate mixture.
Application: Sealing Concrete Slabs: Pour or pump mixed DURAL 50 onto the prepared surface in a wave
form and spread uniformly with a short nap roller or squeegee to fill voids, cracks and porous areas. Allow resin
to penetrate into the surface and reapply to cracks and porous areas if necessary. Before the resin becomes
tacky, use a squeegee on a smooth surface and a broom on a textured or tined surface to remove any excess
resin that has not penetrated the surface. Broadcast clean, oven-dried silica sand into the still wet resin to
provide a skid resistant surface or where subsequent toppings or coating will be applied. Apply the silica sand
at an approximate rate of 0.2 to 0.8 lbs/yd2 (0.10 to 0.43 kg/m2) and/or until there are no wet spots, not earlier
than 20 minutes after application of DURAL 50 [at 75°F (24°C)], but before the DURAL 50 becomes tack free.
Ensure that subsequent coatings or toppings are applied within the recoat window of the DURAL 50 [a 24 hour
recoat window at 75°F (24°C)]. Before opening to traffic remove any loose aggregate and verify that the skid
resistant properties are adequate for the intended purpose of the deck.
Grouting Cracks: Gravity feed: Pour neat mixed DURAL 50 into vee-notched cracks until completely filled.
Pressure injection: Set appropriate injection ports depending on the system used. Seal around port and
surface crack using Duralcrete Gel or Dural Fast Set Epoxy Gel. Inject neat resin using automated or manual
injection equipment. Maintain slow steady pressure until the crack is filled with the injection resin.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment immediately following use with acetone or methyl ethyl ketone. Clean drips and
over spray while still wet with the same solvent. Cured DURAL 50 will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Do not store below 50°F (10°C).
• Do not mix or apply DURAL 50 at temperatures below 50°F (10°C) or when rain is expected within 12 hours
after application.
• Multiple applications of DURAL 50 must be within 24 hours of the preceding application.
• DURAL 50 is not intended for sealing cracks under hydrostatic pressure.
• Apply only to dry concrete and to concrete which has cured for at least 28 days.
Rev. 6.11
88
DURAL 50 LM
Ultra Low Viscosity Low Modulus Epoxy

Description
DURAL 50 LM is a 100% solids, two component acrylated epoxy resin formulation designed to penetrate
concrete and seal it from the ingress of chlorides and water. DURAL 50 LM heals and seals hairline cracks
through its penetration.
• Bridge decks • Reduces chloride penetration
• Parking decks • Pressure injection
• Consolidation of porous and dusting surfaces • Gravity feed hairline cracks
• Reduces water absorption
Features/Benefits
• Penetrates cracks by gravity • Contractor friendly
• Deep penetrating • Easy mixing
• Heals and seals concrete • Does not contain styrene or peroxides
• Strengthens concrete surfaces • Non-flammable
• Increases wear resistance • Moisture tolerant
• Significantly reduces chloride intrusion
• Low modulus
DURAL 50 LM
Mixing Ratio (A:B) by volume......................................................................................2:1
Mixed Viscosity, cps...........................................................................................80 to 120
Gel Time (200 gms), mins..............................................................................................45
Tack Free, hours........................................................................................................3 to 5
Tensile Strength, ASTM D 638, psi (MPa)..............................................................800 (5.6)
Tensile Elongation, ...................................................................................................65 %
Slant Shear, ASTM C 882, 14 days, psi (MPa)...................................................> 2000 (13.8)
Reduction in Chloride Ion Penetration, AASHTO T 260, 90 days
@ ½” depth, % improvement as compared to control......................................... 100%
@ 1” depth, % improvement as compared to control.......................................... 100%
Water Absorption, ASTM C 413, 7 days, % improvement............................................ 89.7%
Abrasion Resistance, ASTM C 779, 7 days
Abrasion depth @ 30 minutes, % improvement................................................... 100%
Abrasion depth @ 45 minutes, % improvement................................................... 92.4%
Abrasion depth @ 60 minutes, % improvement................................................... 90.0%
Master Format #:
Packaging
07 1816
DURAL 50 LM is packaged in 3 gal (11.3 L), 15 gal (56.8 L) and 150 gal (568 L) units.
Shelf Life

89
Coverage
Slab Sealing: 100 to 200 ft²/gal (2.45 to 4.91 m²/L) for the first coat (typical concrete surface). 150 to 300 ft²/gal
(3.68 to 7.36 m²/L) for a second coat in cases of extensive cracking or high porosity. Crack Grouting: Coverage
will be determined by depth and length of cracks.
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: Concrete must be structurally sound, clean, dry and free of laitance, dust, dirt, oil, coatings,
form release agents and other contaminants. The preferred method of surface preparation is mechanical
abrasion. Remove defective concrete, honeycombs, cavities, joint crack voids and other defects by routing to
sound material. Rebuild areas with suitable patching materials. Smooth, pre-cast and formed concrete surfaces
must be cleaned, roughened and made absorptive by mechanical abrasion. Surface profile should be equal to
CSP 2-5 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2 at a minimum. Blow debris and residue out of cracks and from
the surface with a moisture-free and oil-free air jet. Mask expansion joint sealants to prevent adhesion of DURAL
50 LM to the joint surface. Surfaces and cracks must be completely dry before DURAL 50 LM application to
obtain penetration. For further information contact your local Euclid Chemical representative.
Mixing: Premix Part A and Part B. Combine 2 parts by volume of Part A with 1 part by volume of Part B. Mix
thoroughly with a slow speed motor and mixing blade. A ½“ (13 mm) drill and “Jiffy” mixer is acceptable. Do not
aerate mixture.
Application: Sealing concrete slabs: Pour or pump mixed DURAL 50 LM onto the prepared surface in a wave
form and spread uniformly with a short nap roller or squeegee to fill voids, cracks and porous areas. Allow resin
to penetrate into the surface and reapply to cracks and porous areas if necessary. Before the resin becomes
tacky, use a squeegee on a smooth surface and a broom on a textured or tined surface to remove any excess
resin that has not penetrated the surface. Broadcast clean, oven-dried silica sand into the still wet resin to
provide a skid resistant surface or where subsequent toppings or coating will be applied. Apply the silica sand
at an approximate rate of 0.2 to 0.8 lbs/yd2 (0.10 to 0.43 kg/m2) and/or until there are no wet spots, not earlier
than 20 minutes after application of DURAL 50 LM [at 75°F (24°C)], but before the DURAL 50 LM becomes tack
free. Ensure that subsequent coatings or toppings are applied within the recoat window of the DURAL 50 LM
[a 24 hour recoat window at 75°F (24°C)]. Before opening to traffic remove any loose aggregate and verify that
the skid resistant properties are adequate for the intended purpose of the deck.
Grouting cracks: Gravity feed: Pour neat mixed DURAL 50 LM into vee-notched cracks until completely filled.
Pressure injection: Set appropriate injection ports depending on the system used. Seal around port and
surface crack using Duralcrete Gel or Dural Fast Set Epoxy Gel. Inject neat resin using automated or manual
injection equipment. Maintain slow steady pressure until the crack is filled with the injection resin.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment immediately following use with acetone or methyl ethyl ketone. Clean drips and over
spray while still wet with the same solvent. Cured DURAL 50 LM will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Do not mix or apply DURAL 50 LM at temperatures below 50°F (10°C) or when rain is expected within 12 hours
after application.
• Multiple applications of DURAL 50 LM must be within 24 hours of the preceding application.
• DURAL 50 LM is not intended for sealing cracks under hydrostatic pressure.
• Apply only to dry concrete and to concrete which has cured for at least 28 days.
Rev. 6.11
90
DURAL 335
Ultra Low Viscosity, Penetrating Epoxy Crack Healer-Sealer

Description
DURAL 335 is a solvent free, two component, moisture insensitive, ultra low viscosity epoxy penetrating sealer.
It is also a healer for damp and dry cracks.
Used interior and exterior to structurally seal slabs. Gravity feed and pressure inject cracks on:
• Bridge decks • Airport runways
• Roadways • Parking garage decks and ramps
Features/Benefits
• Penetrating epoxy crack healer-sealer
• Alternative to hazardous methylmethacrylates
• Solvent free, no odor
• Ultra low viscosity
• High strength
• Moisture insensitive
• Protects treated surface from salts, chemicals, and water absorption
Material Properties @ 75°F (24°C), 50% R.H.
Mixing Ratio (A : B) by volume 4:1
Mixed Viscosity, cps 80 to 100
Gel Time (100 gms), mins. 40 to 50
Pot life (1.25 gal unit), mins. 20 to 25
DURAL 335
Tensile Strength, ASTM D 638, psi (MPa) 7,000 to 8,000 (48.3 to 55.2)
Tensile Modulus, psi (MPa) 300,000 (2068 )
Tensile Elongation, %, ASTM D 638 1 to 5
Compressive Strength, psi (MPa), mortar
ASTM C 109 (3 parts sand) 8,000 to 9,000 (55.2 to 62.1)
Slant Shear Bond Strength, psi (MPa)
ASTM C 882 1,800 to 2,000 (12.4 to 13.8)
Flexural Strength, psi (MPa), ASTM D 790 9,000 to 10,500 (62.1 to 72.4 )
Values presented are typical laboratory data
Packaging
DURAL 335 is available in 1.25 gal 2 pack/case (4.73 L) and 5 gal (19.9 L) units.
Shelf Life
Master Format #:

03 64 23
Coverage
Slab sealing: 100 to 200 ft²/gal (2.45 to 4.91 m²/L) for typical concrete surfaces. Crack grouting: Coverage
depends on extent and depth of cracking.

91
Canadian MTQ
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: Surface must be structurally sound, clean, dry and free of laitance, dust, dirt, oil, coatings,
form release agents and other contaminants. Remove contamination by sandblasting or shotblasting.
Remove defective concrete, honeycomb, cavities, joint cracks and voids by routing to sound material. Rebuild
areas with suitable patching materials. Smooth, precast and formed concrete surfaces must be cleaned,
roughened and made absorptive by sandblasting or shotblasting. Blow debris and residue out of cracks and
from the surface with a moisture-free and oil-free air jet. Mask expansion joint sealants to prevent adhesion of
DURAL 335 to the joint surface. Surfaces and cracks must be completely dry before DURAL 335 application to
obtain maximum penetration. For further information contact your local Euclid Chemical representative.
Mixing: Premix Part A and Part B. Combine 4 parts by volume of Part A (Base) to 1 part by volume of Part B
(Hardener) in a clean container, and mix thoroughly with a slow speed motor and “Jiffy” mixer. Scrape the bottom
and side of the mixing container at least once. Do not aerate mixture.
Application: Sealing slabs: Pour the mixed DURAL 335 onto the prepared surface in a wave form and distribute
evenly with a short nap roller or squeegee to fill voids, cracks and porous areas. Before the resin becomes
tacky, use a squeegee on a smooth surface and a broom on textured surfaces to remove any excess resin
that has not penetrated the surface. To improve skid resistance of the surface or where subsequent topping or
coating application is desired, broadcast 0.2 to 0.8 lbs/yd² (.11 to .43 kg/m²) of silica sand not earlier than twenty
minutes (at 75°F [24°C]) after application of DURAL 335 but before the DURAL 335 begins to become tack free.
Ensure that the coating or toppings are applied within the recoat window of the application conditions. Grouting
cracks: Gravity feed: Pour neat mixed DURAL 335 into vee-notched cracks until completely filled. Pressure
injection: Set appropriate injection ports depending on the system used. Seal around port and surface of crack
using a Euclid Chemical Fast Set Epoxy Gel. Inject neat resin using automated (2 part injection unit) or manual
methods (caulking gun). Maintain slow steady pressure until the crack is filled with the injection resin.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment immediately following use with methyl ethyl ketone or acetone. Clean spills or drips
while still wet with the same solvent. Dried DURAL 335 will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Apply DURAL 335 when surface and ambient temperatures are between 50°F to 90°F (10°C to 32°C).
• In some cases, on highly porous surfaces, a second coat may be required.
• If a second coat is required contact your local Euclid Chemical representative for a recommendation.
• Multiple applications of DURAL 335 at 75°F (24°C) must be within 24 hours of the preceding application.
• Excess DURAL 335 left on the concrete surface will reduce skid resistance.
• Apply a test area to confirm suitability. DURAL 335 is not intended for sealing cracks under hydrostatic pressure.
• Allow new concrete to cure 28 days before DURAL 335 application.
Rev. 6.11
92
FLEXOLITH
Low Modulus Epoxy Coating and Broadcast Overlay System

Description
FLEXOLITH is a two component, 100% solids, low modulus, moisture insensitive epoxy binder with properties
which makes it suitable for use in applications where stress relief and resistance to mechanical and thermal
movements are required. FLEXOLITH is formulated for low temperature applications, or where rapid cure is
required.
• Parking decks • Factories • Loading docks
• Bridges • Warehouses • Nosing repair applications
Features/Benefits
• Rapid cure, minimizes down-time • Easy to use
• Can be used as a mortar or broadcast system
Compressive Strength psi (MPa)
Material Properties @ 75°F (24°C), 50% RH ASTM C 109 (3 parts sand) Mortar
Mixing Ratio by volume (Part A:B)................1:1 @
4 hours............................................. 1400 (9.6)
Mixed Viscosity cps....................................1700 @
24 hours ........................................ 7040 (48.5)
Brookfield Viscometer, Model RVT Flexural Strength ASTM C 790 psi (MPa)
Gel Time min ASTM C 881, Class B................>30 Final...................................................5123 (35.3)
Tensile Strength psi (MPa) Bond Strength ASTM C 882 psi (MPa)
ASTM D 638........................................ 2700 (18.6) 2 days................................................ 2100 (14.5)
Tensile Elongation, % ASTM D 638..........30 to 60 7 days................................................ 2400 (16.5)
Compressive Strength psi (MPa) Chloride Permeability
ASTM D 695 ......................................... 5000 (34.5) AASHTO T 77, ASTM C 1202, ......... <100 coulombs
Compressive Modulus psi (MPa).120,000 (827) Hardness Shore D, ASTM D 2240, min.............65
Water Absorption 24 hr. % ASTM D 570.......<0.5
FLEXOLITH
Appearance: clear, light gray, dark gray, and tile red
Thermal Compatibility ASTM C 884......... passes
Effective Shrinkage ASTM C 883.............. passes
Packaging
FLEXOLITH is available in 4 gal (15 L) cases, 10 gal (38 L) units and 100 gal (378.5 L) units.
Shelf Life
• ASTM C 881-99, Type III, Grade 1 Class B • AASHTO M 235, Type III, Grade 1
Coverage
Standard Broadcast Method: ft²/gal (m²/L) 1st Coat 2nd Coat Seal Coat
FLEXOLITH 40 to 50 (.98 to 1.23) 30 to 40 (.74 to .98) 100 to 120 (2.45 to 2.94)
Aggregate lbs/ft² (kg/m²) 1.2 to 1.5 (5.86 to 7.32) 1.5 to 2.0 (7.32 to 9.76) —--------
1/4” Bridge Deck Overlay (ft²/gal (m²/L) 1st Coat 2nd Coat 3rd Coat HD 3/8” (9.5 mm)
FLEXOLITH 40 to 45 (.98 to 1.10) 22 to 25 (.54 to 61) 22 to 25 (.54 to 61)
Master Format #:
Flint/Basalt Aggregate, lbs/ft² (kg/m²) 1.0 to 1.5 (4.88 to 7.32) 1.5 to 2.0 (7.32 to 9.76) 1.5 to 2.0 (7.32 to 9.76)
Troweldown (mortar):
07 18 16
FLEXOLITH (neat, prime coat) 200 ft²/gal (4.19 m²/L)

Coverage @ 1/4” (6.3 mm) thickness (Flexolith mortar):
2 to 3 gals (7.5 L - 11.4 L) 20/40 mesh sand
and 1 gal (3.8 L) resin ft² (m²) 16 to 20 (1.49 to 1.86)
Seal Coat ft²/gal (m²/L) 150 to 250 (3.68 to 6.14)
Note: Coverage rates are for estimating purposes only. Surface temperature, porosity, and texture will determine
actual material requirements.

93
Directions for Use
compounds and other contaminants. Remove oil, grease smear and asphalt residue with trisodium phosphate
or a strong detergent. For heavy oil contamination use steam cleaning in conjunction with a strong emulsifying
detergent. Surface laitance must be removed. The preferred method of surface preparation is mechanical
abrading. If it is not possible to mechanically abrade, acid etch with 15% hydrochloric acid solution.
Follow by pressure washing with copious amounts of water to neutralize the surface. The pH of the surface should
be checked according to ASTM D 4262 after washing. Rinse thoroughly with potable water. After cleaning, repair
defective concrete, honeycombs, cavities, joint cracks, voids and other defects by routing to sound material and
patching as needed. Smooth precast and formed concrete surfaces must be cleaned, roughened and made
absorptive by abrasive blasting or shotblasting. Following surface preparation, the cleaned surface should pull
concrete when tested with an Elcometer or similar pull tester (ASTM D 4541). Before application of the coating,
use the “Visqueen test” (ASTM D 4263) to evaluate moisture level in concrete. New Concrete: Allow to cure for
a minimum of 28 days. (If earlier times are required, contact your local Euclid Chemical representative). Prepare
surface as recommended above. Old Concrete: For rapid curing patching, use a mortar of FLEXOLITH and
clean aggregate. If portland cement patching materials are used, allow the patch to cure for 28 days before
coating. After patching, a light brush blast is recommended prior to coating.
Mixing: Using a low speed drill motor and a “Jiffy” type mixer, mix the Part A & B components separately for
approximately 1 minute. Binder: Combine one part by volume of “A” with one part by volume of “B” and mix
thoroughly. Scrape the bottom and sides of mixing container, at least once. Mix just enough material that can be
used within the working life. Do not aerate the mix.
Application: Broadcast Method: Apply mixed FLEXOLITH binder to the prepared surface using roller, notched
squeegee or spray equipment. Eliminate any puddles with a quick light roller pass. Immediately broadcast
clean, dry aggregate to full saturation until no wet spots appear. After the binder has cured, broom or vacuum
excess aggregate. Repeat the procedure to build overlay thickness. For easier cleaning, an optional seal
coat of FLEXOLITH may be applied. A more textured, and higher skid resistant sealed surface is obtained if
FLEXOLITH LV is used as the seal coat. Troweldown: FLEXOLITH mortar can be applied by trowel. Neat resin
should be used as a prime coat prior to application of the mortar. Aggregate for Skid Resistant Overlay: The
recommended aggregate for heavy duty applications (high traffic bridge decks, parking deck turn lanes, etc.)
is #8 or #9 basalt, #8 or #9 flint rock, or another similarly graded non-slip aggregate containing at least 10%
aluminum oxide. For other applications, or where specified, silica sand aggregate may be used.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and application equipment immediately after use with methyl ethyl ketone or acetone. Clean spills or
drips while still wet with same solvent. Dried FLEXOLITH will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Do not aerate FLEXOLITH during mixing.
• If FLEXOLITH is to be exposed to chemicals contact EUCLID Technical Service for a suitable top coat.
• Condition FLEXOLITH at 75°F ( 24°C) for 24 hours prior to use.
Rev. 6.11
94
FLEXOLITH Summer Grade
Low Modulus Epoxy Coating and Broadcast Overlay for Warmer Temperatures

Description
FLEXOLITH SG is a two component, 100% solids, low modulus, moisture insensitive, epoxy binder with properties
that make it suitable for use in applications where stress relief and resistance to mechanical and thermal movements
are required. FLEXOLITH SG is designed for use as a binder for overlays or non-skid surfaces and is formulated
for high temperature applications, or where a long working time is required.
• Parking decks • Warehouses
• Bridges • Loading docks
• Factories
Material Properties @ 75°F (24° C) & 50% RH Water absorption ASTM D 570 24 hr % ......... <0.5
Mixing ratio by volume (Part A:B)....................1:1 Compressive strength mortar ASTM C 109
Mixed viscosity, cps.................................... 1,700 (3 parts sand) psi (MPa)
Brookfield Viscometer, Model RVT 4 hours .................................................1,400 (9.7)
Gel time ASTM C 881.................................... 45 min 24 hours ............................................7,040 (48.5)
ASTM D 638 Bond strength ASTM C 882 psi (MPa)
Tensile strength psi (MPa).................3,200 (22.1) 2 days.................................................2,100 (14.5)
Tensile elongation ...............................30 to 60% 7 days.................................................2,400 (16.5)
ASTM D695 Chloride permeability................<100 coulombs
Compressive strength psi (MPa)........ 5,800 (40) Hardness, Shore D ASTM D 2240................. 65 min
Compressive modulus Thermal compatibility ASTM C 884............ Passes
FLEXOLITH Summer Grade

psi (MPa......................................... 120,000 ((827) Effective shrinkage ASTM C 883................ Passes
Packaging
FLEXOLITH SG is available in 4 gal (15.1 L) cases, 10 gal (37.9 L) units and 100 gal (378.5 L) units.
Shelf Life
FLEXOLITH SG complies with requirements of ASTM C 881-99, Type III, Grade 1, Class A & B and AASHTO M
235, Type III, Grade 1.
Coverage
Please consult Euclid Chemical Technical Support for recommendations on your particular project.
Standard Broadcast Method: ft²gal (m²/L) 1st Coat 2nd Coat Seal Coat
FLEXOLITH SG 40 - 50 (.98 -1.23) 30 - 40 (.74 - .98) 100 to 120 (2.45 to 2.94)
Aggregate lbs/ft²(kg/m²) 1.2 - 1.5 (5.86 - 7.32) 1.5 to 2.0 (7.32 - 9.76) —--------
1/4” Bridge Deck Overlay (ft²/gal (m²/L) 1st Coat 2nd Coat 3rd Coat HD 3/8” (9.5 mm)
FLEXOLITH SG 40 - 45 (.98 - 1.10) 22 - 25 (.54 - 61) 22 - 25 (.54 - 61)
Aggregate, lb/ft² (kg/m²) 1.0 - 1.5 (4.88 - 7.32) 1.5 to 2.0 (7.32 - 9.76) 1.5 to 2.0 (7.32 - 9.76)
Master Format #:
Troweldown (mortar):
FLEXOLITH SG (neat, prime coat) 200 ft²/gal (4.19 m²/L)
07 18 16
Coverage @ 1/4” thickness (Flexolith SG mortar):

2 to 3 gals (7.5 L - 11.4 L) 20/40 mesh sand
and 1 gal (3.8 L) resin ft² (m²) 16 - 20 (1.49 - 1.86)
Seal Coat ft2/gal (m²/L) 150 - 250 (3.68 - 6.14)
Note: FLEXOLITH SG coverage rates are for estimating purposes only. Surface temperature, porosity, and texture

95
Directions for Use
compounds and other contaminants. Remove oil, grease smear and asphalt residue with trisodium phosphate
or a strong detergent. For heavy oil contamination, use steam cleaning in conjunction with a strong emulsifying
detergent. Surface laitance must be removed. The preferred method of surface preparation is abrasive blasting.
If it is not possible to abrasive blast, acid etch with 15% hydrochloric acid solution. Follow by pressure washing
with copious amounts of water to neutralize the surface. The pH of the surface should be checked according
to ASTM D 4262 after washing. Rinse thoroughly with potable water. After cleaning, repair defective concrete,
honeycombs, cavities, joint cracks, voids and other defects by routing to sound material and patching as
needed. Smooth precast and formed concrete surfaces must be cleaned, roughened and made absorptive
by abrasive blasting or shotblasting. Following surface preparation, the cleaned surface should pull concrete
when tested with an Elcometer or similar pull tester (ASTM D 4541). Before application of the coating, use
the “Visqueen test” (ASTM D 4263) to evaluate moisture level in concrete. New Concrete: Allow to cure for a
minimum of 28 days. (Consult your local Euclid Chemical representative if earlier times are required). Prepare
surface as recommended above. Old Concrete: For rapid curing patching, use a mortar of FLEXOLITH SG and
clean aggregate. If portland cement patching materials are used, allow the patch to cure for 28 days before
coating. (If earlier application is required, consult your local Euclid Chemical representative for appropriate
patching material recommendation). After patching, a light brush blast is recommended prior to coating.
Mixing: Using a low speed drill motor and a “Jiffy” type mixer, mix the A & B FLEXOLITH SG components
separately for approximately 1 minute.
Binder: Combine one part by volume of “A” with one part by volume of “B” and mix thoroughly. Scrape the
bottom and sides of mixing container at least once. Mix just enough material that can be used within the working
life. Do not aerate the mix.
Broadcast method: Apply mixed FLEXOLITH SG binder to the prepared surface using roller, notched
squeegee or spray equipment. Eliminate any puddles with a quick light roller pass. Immediately broadcast
clean, dry aggregate to full saturation until no wet spots appear. After the binder has cured, broom or vacuum
excess aggregate. Repeat the procedure to build overlay thickness. For easier cleaning an optional seal coat
of FLEXOLITH SG may be applied. A more textured, and higher skid resistant sealed surface is obtained if
FLEXOLITH SG LV is used as the seal coat. Troweldown applications: FLEXOLITH SG mortar can be applied
by trowel. Neat resin should be used as a prime coat prior to application of the mortar. Consult your local
Euclid Chemical representative for application recommendations. Aggregate for skid resistant overlay: The
recommended aggregate for heavy duty applications (high traffic bridge decks, parking deck turn lanes, etc.) is
#8 or #9 flint rock, or another similarly graded non-slip aggregate containing at least 10% aluminum oxide. For
other applications, or where specified, silica sand aggregate may be used.
Clean-Up
or drips while still wet with same solvent. Dried FLEXOLITH SG will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Store at 40°F to 90°F (4°C to 32°C). Protect from moisture and freezing.
• Do not aerate FLEXOLITH SG during mixing.
• If FLEXOLITH SG is to be exposed to chemicals contact your local Euclid Chemial representative for a suitable
top coat recommendation.
Rev. 6.11
96
FLEXDECK SYSTEM
Waterproofing, Heavy Duty, Urethane/Epoxy Traffic Membrane System

Description
FLEXDECK System is a lightweight, multilayer, fluid applied, urethane/epoxy system for protecting surfaces
subjected to vehicle traffic wear. It is a flexible, waterproof, rugged system designed for concrete, steel, and wood
surfaces. It provides superior strength, high elasticity, high wear along with abrasion resistance and resistance
to thermal and mechanical movement. Aggregate is embedded into the FLEXDECK WEAR COAT during
application to produce a textured, non-skid, wearing surface. This system consists of DURAL EPOXY PRIMER
(a two component epoxy resin compound), FLEXDECK MEMBRANE (a two component, 100 percent solids,
elastomeric polyurethane compound), FLEXDECK WEAR COAT (a two component epoxy resin compound),
and FLEXDECK TIE COAT, a two component epoxy resin that provides the finished color of the system.
• Concrete parking decks and ramps • Marine decks
• Walkways • Steel or wood marine docks
• Above/below grade • Interior/exterior
Features/Benefits
Excellent resistance to most solvents, oils, gasoline, detergents, salts, and animal refuse. FLEXDECK SYSTEM
provides superior wear resistance and waterproofing capabilities.
Material Properties @ 75°F (24°C), 50% RH FLEXDECK WEAR COAT/TIE COAT
FLEXDECK MEMBRANE Pot Life................................................ 20 minutes
Pot Life.............................. .........20 to 30 minutes Initial Cure.................................................4 hours
Initial Cure...........................................2 1/2 hours VOC Content.................................................0 g/L
VOC Content.............................................128 g/L Tensile Strength ASTM D 638
Tensile Strength ASTM D 412 7 day, min, psi (MPa)..................................... 2,000 (13.8)
7 day min..................................1200 psi (8.3 MPa)
FLEXDECK SYSTEM
Tensile Elongation...............................30 percent
Tensile Elongation................. 400 to 500 percent Shrinkage..................................................... None
Tear Strength, ASTM D 1004, min...... 100 to 120 pli
Abrasion Resistance ASTM D 968
Falling sand method................................. 40 L/mil Appearance: FLEXDECK TIE COAT is a light gray
Shrinkage..................................................... None pigmented two component epoxy resin compound.
Packaging
DURAL EPOXY PRIMER: 4 gal (15.1 L) and 10 gal (37.8 L) units. FLEXDECK WEAR COAT: 10 gal (37.8 L) and
100 gal (378.5L) units. FLEXDECK TIE COAT and FLEXDECK MEMBRANE: 5 gal (18.9 L) unit.
Shelf Life
In original, unopened, properly stored containers: 2 years for DURAL EPOXY PRIMER, FLEXDECK WEAR COAT,
and FLEXDECK TIE COAT. 6 months for FLEXDECK MEMBRANE.
Coverage
Parking Stalls/Light Traffic Areas: ft²gal (m²/L) Very Heavy Duty Application: ft²/gal (m²/L)
DURAL EPOXY PRIMER 150 to 200 (3.68 to 4.91) DURAL EPOXY PRIMER 150 to 200 (3.68 to 4.91)
FLEXDECK MEMBRANE 40 to 50 (.98 to 1.23) FLEXDECK MEMBRANE 40 to 50 (.98 to 1.23)
Master Format #:
FLEXDECK TIE COAT* 100 to 150 (2.45 to 3.68) FLEXDECK WEAR COAT** 60 to 80 (1.47 to 1.96)
*Broadcast and backroll silica aggregate in Tie Coat for non- FLEXDECK WEAR COAT** 40 to 60 (.98 to 1.96)
07 18 16
slip finish. FLEXDECK TIE COAT 80 to100 (1.47 to 1.96)

Driving Lanes/Medium Traffic Areas: **Use #9 Flint Rock in FLEXDECK WEAR COAT
DURAL EPOXY PRIMER 150 to 200 (3.68 to 4.91) applications for the best wear resistance.
FLEXDECK MEMBRANE 40 to 50 (.98 to 1.23) overage rates are approximate and for estimating
C
FLEXDECK WEAR COAT** 60 to 80 (1.47 to 1.96) purposes only. Coverage rates can vary due to
FLEXDECK TIE COAT 80 to 100 (1.96 to 2.45) surface texture, porosity, aggregate selected for
anti-slip surface and temperature.

97
Directions for Use
preparation is mechanical abrasion. Remove oil, grease smear and asphalt residue with trisodium phosphate or
a strong detergent. For oil contaminated surfaces, use steam cleaning in conjunction with a strong emulsifying
detergent. Rinse thoroughly with potable water. After cleaning, remove defective concrete, honeycombs,
cavities, joint cracks, voids and other defects by routing to sound material. Smooth precast and formed concrete
surfaces must be cleaned, roughened and made absorptive by mechanical abrasion. Surface profile should be
equal to CSP 3-6 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2 at a minimum. If it is not possible to mechanically
copious amounts of water to neutralize the surface. Care must be taken to ensure that all salts and residue from
the reaction have been removed. The pH of the surface should be checked, as per ASTM D 4262, following
acid etching. Following surface preparation, the cleaned surface should pull concrete when tested with an
Elcometer or similar pull tester (ASTM D 4541). Before applying the coating, use the “Visqueen test’’ (ASTM D
4263) to evaluate moisture level in concrete. New Concrete: Allow to cure for a minimum of 28 days. (Contact
your local Euclid Chemical representative if earlier times are required). Remove any surface hardener or curing
compounds, by using the recommended mechanical methods for surface preparation. Prepare surface as
recommended above. Old Concrete: For quick, small patching use suitable epoxy mortar. For larger areas, use
cementitious patching materials compatible with the system. After patching, a light brush blast is recommended
prior to coating. Steel: All oils, greases, dirt, old coatings or chemical contaminants must be removed. All welds
should be continuous and ground to remove all splatter, sharp edges, laps and other surface irregularities.
All steel surfaces should be blasted to a “NEAR WHITE’’ metal finish using clean dry blasting media. Crack
Repair: Repair moving or working cracks 1/32 to 1/16” (.79 to 1.6 mm) by applying a 6” wide (150 mm) coating
of DURAL EPOXY PRIMER, and then overcoat with FLEXDECK MEMBRANE embedded with fiberglass cloth.
Apply repair materials in same manner shown below. For cracks wider than 1/16”(1.6 mm), contact your local
Euclid Chemical representative.
Mixing: Use clean containers and mixers for mixing. Mix each component separately at the appropriate
application time. Using a low speed “Jiffy” type mixer, mix the A & B components separately for approximately
1 minute. Then mix the components together thoroughly for 3 to 5 minutes. Scrape the bottom and sides
of the mixing container at least once. Do not aerate the mix. For DURAL EPOXY PRIMER, WEAR COAT, TIE
COAT: Combine one part by volume Part “A” with one part by volume Part “B.” The FLEXDECK MEMBRANE is
packaged in a pre-proportioned kit. Pour the entire contents of the Part “B” into the container of Part “A” and mix
thoroughly. Mix only enough material that can be used within the working life of each product.
Application: DURAL EPOXY PRIMER: The ambient and surface temperature should be between 50°F to 90°F
(10°C to 32°C). Prime prepared areas by brush, roller, or airless spray. Allow DURAL EPOXY PRIMER to cure
3 to 4 hours at 75°F (24°C) to become tack free to the touch. Cool temperatures will lengthen drying time, and
direct sunlight or high temperatures will shorten drying time. FLEXDECK MEMBRANE: Ambient and surface
conditions should ideally be between 60°F to 80°F (16°C to 27°C) with relative humidity below 75%. If more
than 24 hours has elapsed, or if the primer cures hard, apply a fresh coat of primer. FLEXDECK MEMBRANE
is applied using a short nap roller, serrated squeegee, or brush. Use of a spiked roller to remove entrapped
air before FLEXDECK MEMBRANE begins initial set is strongly recommended. FLEXDECK WEAR COAT: As
soon as the FLEXDECK MEMBRANE has set and is able to withstand foot traffic, but no longer than 24 hrs,
apply FLEXDECK WEAR COAT by brush, roller, or spray. Immediately after the FLEXDECK WEAR COAT is
applied, broadcast aggregate into the coating. When the FLEXDECK WEAR COAT has set, sweep off the excess
aggregate. If required, immediately apply another layer of FLEXDECK WEAR COAT and aggregate as above.
FLEXDECK TIE COAT: When the FLEXDECK WEAR COAT has properly cured, apply pigmented FLEXDECK
TIE COAT by brush, roller or spray.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and application equipment immediately after use with acetone. Clean spills or drips while still wet
with solvent. Dried FLEXDECK will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Do not aerate FLEXDECK System components during mixing.
• Do not mix or apply FLEXDECK System components unless air or surface temperatures are at least 50°F
(10°C) and rising.
• Each application of FLEXDECK System components must begin within 24 hours of the preceding
application.
98
DURALDECK SYSTEM
Waterproofing, Wear Resistant, Urethane Deck Coating System

Description
DURALDECK SYSTEM consists of a two-part epoxy primer (DURAL EPOXY PRIMER), an elastomeric 2 part
urethane membrane (DURALDECK BASECOAT), and a one-component, aggregate-filled aliphatic urethane
topcoat (DURALDECK TOPCOAT). These components produce a VOC compliant composite waterproofing
system with high wear and abrasion resistance. The DURALDECK SYSTEM waterproofs and protects concrete,
masonry, and steel, withstands pedestrian and rubber tire traffic, and offers good chemical resistance to mild
acids/bases, oils, and gasoline.
• Parking decks and ramps • Roof decks • Pedestrian walkways
• Residential balconies • Stadiums • Mechanical rooms
Material Properties Dural Duraldeck Duraldeck
@ 75°F (24°C), 50% RH Epoxy Primer Basecoat Topcoat
Mixing Ratio (A:B by vol.) 1:1 Pre-proportioned NA
Mixed Viscosity, cps 300 to 400 4,000 to 8,000 1,200 to 2,000
Gel Time (100 g), mins. 50 to 60 20 to 30 NA
Pot Life, 2 gal (7.6 L), mins. 30 to 40 15 to 25 3 to 4 hrs
Mixed Solids % by wt. 100 96 78
VOC Compliant g/L 0 128 240
Tack Free Time, hrs. 3 to 4 2 to 3 6 to 8
Cure Time, hrs. 12 10 18
Tensile Strength, psi (MPa) (ASTM D 412) NA 1,300 (9.0) 2,800 (19.3)
DURALDECK SYSTEM
Tensile Elongation, % (ASTM D 412) NA 400 to 500 100
Tear Strength, pli (ASTM D 1004) NA 100 to 120 150
Abrasion Resistance CS 17 wheel, 1000 g. 0.010 loss
Appearance: The topcoat (DURALDECK TOPCOAT) determines the color of the overlay system and is available
in Light Gray. It is also available in custom colors, subject to special pricing and minimum quantity orders.
DURALDECK BASECOAT is available only in Light Gray, while DURAL EPOXY PRIMER is clear.
Packaging
DURAL EPOXY PRIMER is available in 4 gal (15.5 L) cases and 10 gal (37.8 L) units. DURALDECK BASECOAT
is available in 5 gal (18.9 L) units. DURALDECK TOPCOAT is available in 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
In original, unopened, properly stored containers; DURAL EPOXY PRIMER, 2 years, DURALDECK BASECOAT
and DURALDECK TOPCOAT, 6 months.
Coverage
Master Format #:
For Typical Traffic Overlay dry film thickness (DFT) of 25 to 40 mils of DURAL
A
Product ft²/gal (m²/L) DECK BASECOAT is recommended depending on
07 18 16
Primer (Dural Epoxy Primer) 200 to 250 (4.91 to 6.14) specific application requirements. DURALDECK
Membrane (Duraldeck Basecoat) 40 to 60 (.98 to 1.47) BASECOAT at a coverage rate of 50 ft²/gal (1.25 m²/L)
Topcoat 130 to 150 (3.19 to 3.68) yields 30 mils DFT. Coverage rates can vary due
Aggregate 0.50 to 1.0 lbs/ft² (.23 to .45 kg/m²) to surface texture, porosity, aggregate selected for
2nd coat Topcoat(Seal Coat) 150 to 250 (3.68 to 6.14) anti-slip surface and temperature.

99
Directions for Use
compounds and other contaminants. For oil contaminated surfaces, use steam cleaning in combination with a
strong emulsifying detergent. Rinse thoroughly with potable water. After cleaning, remove defective concrete,
honeycombs, cavities, joint cracks, voids and other defects by routing to sound material. The preferred method
of surface preparation is mechanical abrasion. Smooth precast and formed concrete surfaces must be cleaned,
roughened and made absorptive by mechanical abrasion. Surface profile should be equal to CSP 3-6 in
accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2, at a minimum. If it is not possible to mechanically abrade, acid etch
with a 15% hydrochloric acid solution. After etching, pressure wash or flush the surface with copious amounts
of water to clean and neutralize the surface. To ensure all acid has been removed, the pH of the surface should
be checked, as per ASTM D 4262. Following surface preparation, the cleaned surface should pull concrete when
tested with an Elcometer or similar pull tester (ASTM D 4541). Before application of the primer, use the “Visqueen
test” (ASTM D 4263) to ensure the concrete’s moisture level is low. New Concrete: Allow to cure for a minimum
of 28 days. (If earlier times are required, consult your local Euclid Chemical representative). Prepare surface as
recommended above. Old Concrete: For quick repair of small areas, use a suitable epoxy mortar. For larger areas,
use cementitious patching materials which are compatible with the system. After patching and curing, a light brush
blast is recommended prior to coating.
Mixing: All individual components should be pre-mixed for approximately 2 to 3 minutes, using a low speed “Jiffy”
type mixer. For the two component products, after pre-mixing, mix the A & B components together thoroughly
for 3 to 5 minutes. Scrape the bottom and sides of mixing container at least once. Do not aerate the mix. Mix
only enough material that can be used within the working life.
Application: Procedures are provided here for the standard four coat system – primer, membrane, aggregate
filled topcoat, sealing topcoat. Variations on this system are possible depending on the specific requirements of
the application. Consult your Euclid representative for alternatives. Primer: The ambient and surface temperature
should be between 50°F to 90°F (10°C to 32°C) The primer can be applied using a short nap roller, brush, or
an airless spray. Membrane: Can be applied as soon as the primer has become tack free, typically within 3
to 4 hours at 75°F (24° C) but no later than 24 hours after primer application. Ambient and surface conditions
should ideally be between 60°F to 80°F (16°C to 27°C) with relative humidity below 85%. Apply using a short
nap roller, serrated squeegee, or brush. Use of a spiked roller to remove entrapped air before DURALDECK
BASECOAT begins initial set is strongly recommended. Topcoat: Apply using a short nap roller, squeegee,
brush or spray after the DURALDECK BASECOAT has become tack free (2 to 3 hrs), but within 24 hours after
basecoat application. Promptly after topcoat application and while the topcoat is still wet, broadcast aggregate
(20/40 or 30/60 mesh silica) to excess and allow the topcoat to harden. After the topcoat has hardened (12 to 18
hrs) sweep away the excess aggregate and apply a seal coat of the topcoat. Foot traffic can resume 24 hours
after seal coat application at 75°F (24°C).
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment immediately after use with acetone. Clean up spills or drips while still wet with the
same solvents. Dried product will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Store at temperatures between 50°F to 90°F (10°C to 32° C).
• DURALDECK SYSTEM should be applied to dry concrete and at ambient temperatures of at least 50°F (10° C) and
rising.
• High humidity may cause pinholing and surface tackiness of DURALDECK BASECOAT.
Rev. 6.11
100
TAMMSDECK SYSTEM
Elastomeric, Urethane, Waterproofing Pedestrian Coating

Description
TAMMSDECK System is an elastomeric deck coating for pedestrian and light vehicular traffic. The system
consists of a two part epoxy primer (DURAL EPOXY PRIMER), a single component aromatic urethane membrane
(TAMMSDECK MEMBRANE), and a single component, sand filled, aliphatic urethane topcoat (TAMMSDECK
TOPCOAT).
• Balconies and promenades • Stadiums
• Mechanical rooms • Floors
• Plazas • Stairs
• Parking garages • Landings
Features/Benefits
• L
ightweight, anti-skid surface – ideal for deck • Superior durability
resurfacing • Abrasion resistance
• Impervious to water • Strong bond to concrete
• One component membrane and topcoat • Flexible over wide temperature range
• Easy application • Outstanding weathering characteristics
Material Properties @ 75°F (24°C), 50% R.H.
Primer Membrane Topcoat
Mixed Viscosity, cps 300 to 400 1,000 to 3,000 1,500 to 3,000
Gel Time, (100 g), min. 30 to 40
TAMMSDECK SYSTEM
Pot Life, (2 gal/7.6 L), min. 20 to 30 60 to 120 60 to 120
Solids, % by wt. 100 86 78
VOC Content (g/L) 0 193 240
Tack Free Time, hrs. 3 to 4 10 to 12 18
(ASTM D 412) NA 800 (5.5) 2,800 (19.3)
(ASTM D412) NA 450 100
Tear Strength, psi
(ASTM D 412) NA 60 >250
Abrasion Resistance
CS 17 Wheel, 1000 g 0.010
Appearance: TAMMSDECK System color is determined by the color of TAMMSDECK TOPCOAT. The standard
color is a Light Gray. Special colors are available with minimum quantity orders and special pricing.
Packaging
DURAL EPOXY PRIMER is available in 4 gal (3.8 L) and 10 gal (37.8L) units. TAMMSDECK MEMBRANE and
TAMMSDECK TOPCOAT are available in 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
In original, unopened, properly stored containers, DURAL EPOXY PRIMER: 1 year. TAMMSDECK MEMBRANE:
Master Format #:
6 months. TAMMSDECK TOPCOAT: 6 months.

07 18 13
Coverage/Yield
A dry film thickness (DFT) of 20 mils of TAMMSDECK
Product ft²/gal (m²/L) MEMBRANE is recommended for most applications
DURAL EPOXY PRIMER 225 to 250 (5.52 to 6.14) TAMMSDECK MEMBRANE at a coverage rate of 65
TAMMSDECK MEMBRANE 60 to 70 (1.47 to 1.72) ft²/gal (1.60 m²/L) yields 20 mils DFT. Coverage rates
TAMMSDECK TOPCOAT 90 to 100 (2.21 to 2.45) can vary due to surface texture, porosity, aggregate
20 to 30 Silica Sand (lbs/ ft²) 0.25 to 0.75 (10.7 to 16.3 kg/m²) selected for anti-slip surface and temperature.

101
Directions for Use
preparation is mechanical abrasion. Surface profile should be equal to CSP 3-6 in accordance with ICRI
Guideline 310.2 at a minimum. If it is not possible to mechanically abrade, acid etch with a 15% hydrochloric
acid solution. After etching, pressure wash or flush the surface with copious amounts of water to neutralize the
surface. The pH of the surface should be checked as per ASTM D4262 following acid etching. Following surface
preparation, the cleaned surface should pull concrete when tested with an Elcometer or similar pull tester (ASTM
D 4541). Before application of the coating, use the “Visqueen test” (ASTM D 4263) to evaluate moisture level in
concrete. New Concrete: Allow to cure for a minimum of 28 days. (If earlier times are required, contact your
local Euclid representative). Remove any surface hardener or curing compounds using the recommended
mechanical methods for surface preparation. Prepare surface as recommended above. Old Concrete: For quick,
small patching use suitable epoxy mortar. For larger areas, use cementitious patching materials compatible with
the system such as VERSASPEED. After patching, a light brush blast is recommended prior to coating.
Application: DURAL EPOXY PRIMER: Using a low speed “Jiffy” type mixer, mix the A & B components separately
for approximately 2 to 3 minutes. Then mix the components together for 3 to 5 minutes, scraping the bottom
and sides of the mixing container at least once. Do not aerate the mix. Apply to the prepared surface using a
short nap roller, brush, or an airless spray. TAMMSDECK MEMBRANE: Mix the one component TAMMSDECK
MEMBRANE for 3 to 5 minutes and apply using a roller or notched squeegee. Application can take place as
soon as the primer becomes tack free (typically 3 to 4 hours) but no longer than 24 hours after application of the
primer. TAMMSDECK TOPCOAT: Mix the one component TAMMSDECK TOPCOAT for 3 to 5 minutes and apply
using a short nap roller, brush or spray. The TOPCOAT should be applied after the TAMMSDECK MEMBRANE
has become tack free, approximately 10 to 12 hours, and no longer than 36 hours after the membrane becomes
tack free. Immediately after applying the topcoat broadcast a 20 to 30 mesh silica sand into the wet topcoat and
backroll to evenly distribute and completely encapsulate the sand.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment immediately after use with acetone. Clean up spills or drips while still wet with the
same solvents. Dried product will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• TAMMSDECK SYSTEM should be applied to dry concrete and at ambient temperature of 50°F (10°C) and
rising.
• All of the material in a container should be used after opening.
• TAMMSDECK SYSTEM should not be used on helical ramps. Please use FLEXDECK for this type of application.
• Components of TAMMSDECK SYSTEM cannot be re-sealed and re-used after opening.
Rev. 6.11
102
Coatings - Primers
Coatings - Primers
Dural Epoxy Primer 105

Duraprime WB 107
Tamms H/P Primer 109
Coatings - Primers
TO PRIME OR NOT TO PRIME?
A properly selected and applied primer will never decrease performance, and usually improves
performance of a coating, but is the primer worth the additional cost in material and labor? This guide
is provided to describe those situations when a primer can markedly improve a coating performance
and long term durability.
Most Euclid Chemical systems do not require a primer, but there are certain
application and environmental conditions in which a primer can increase
the likelihood of a successful project. The primary purpose of a primer is
to provide a tenacious bond to the existing masonry or concrete surface
and provide a compatible surface for subsequent coats thereby ensuring
long-term adhesion of the coating to the substrate. Primers generally have
much lower viscosity than the subsequent coating and as a result, can
provide deeper penetration into the substrate. Deep penetration into the substrate and strong adhesion
to the topcoat allows the topcoat to behave as if it has “roots” into the substrate providing a strong
durable interface.
A second benefit of primers in industrial flooring applications is to reduce the effects of “outgassing”
which may cause pinhole defects in the flooring. Such defects are caused when entrapped air from the
substrate migrates through the uncured coating.
In addition to reducing concrete outgassing, a primer for industrial flooring is recommended when the
application is on a floor exposed to thermal cycles or when aggressive physical conditions (high traffic,
front-end loaders, moving drums, etc.) are encountered. A primer like DURALTEX (CLEAR), in this situation,
provides reduced defects, a deep “root” system for the coating, which leads to a durable bond to the
substrate resulting in a longer service life and reduced maintenance.
For architectural coatings, like TAMMSCOAT and TAMMOLASTIC, priming with TAMMS H/P PRIMER is
recommended when the surface is hot or porous. The primer retards moisture loss of the coating into
the substrate, buffers the coating from high alkalinity of mortar joints and aids in the proper curing of the
coating. Shrinkage cracks are reduced. TAMMS MASONRY PRIMER is recommended when architectural
coatings are placed over porous block to fill pores and cavities in the surface. This primer/ block filler
also remains breathable when used in combination with TAMMSCOAT and TAMMOLASTIC.
For anti-graffiti coatings like EUCOTHANE a primer is always required for two reasons. Firstly, the
polymer base of EUCOTHANE is urethane. Urethanes are sensitive to highly alkaline surfaces and will
“saponify”(break down) over time. A primer creates a barrier between the alkaline concrete substrate
and EUCOTHANE. A primer is also necessary because aggressive solvents and cleaners are frequently
used to remove graffiti. It is imperative to have a stable bond to the substrate to tolerate these exposures.
TAMMS HP PRIMER is recommended for applications of non-pigmented TAMMS AG-400 because this
primer does not yellow upon UV exposure. For pigmented TAMMS AG-400 applications, primers such
as DURALTEX (CLEAR) or DURAPRIME WB are recommended.
DURAL EPOXY PRIMER
100% Solids Epoxy Primer for Epoxy and Urethane Coating Systems
Coatings - Primers
Description
DURAL EPOXY PRIMER is a two component, 100% solids, epoxy penetrating primer. It is recommended for use as
a primer with various Euclid Chemical water-based epoxies, 100% solids epoxies, and urethane coatings. It can
be used to prime concrete block, walls, bridge abutments, parapets, and barriers in preparation for topcoating.
• Schools • Laboratories • Clean rooms
• Warehouses • Hospitals
Features/Benefits
• Fast drying • Non-flammable
• Low odor • Contains no VOC’s
Material Properties @75°F (24°C) and 50% RH
Mix ratio (A:B by vol) 1:1
Mixed viscosity, cps 300 to 400
Gel time (100 gms.), mins 30 to 40
Pot life, 2 gal. (7.6L) mins 10 to 20
Mixed solids % by wt 100
Tack free time, hrs 3 to 4
DURAL EPOXY PRIMER

Packaging
DURAL EPOXY PRIMER is available in 4 gal (15.1 L) cases that contain two 2 gal (7.6 L) kits. It is also available
in 10 gal (37.9 L) units.
Shelf Life
2 years in unopened package.
Coverage
200 to 250 ft²/gal (4.91 to 6.14 m²/L)
Note: Product coverage rates are approximate and for estimating purposes only. Surface temperature, porosity,
and texture will determine actual material quantities.
Directions for Use
preparation is mechanical abrasion. Remove oil, grease, and asphalt residue with trisodium phosphate or a
strong detergent. For oil contaminated surfaces, use steam cleaning in conjunction with a strong emulsifying
detergent. Rinse thoroughly with potable water. After cleaning, remove defective concrete, honeycombs,
Master Format #:
cavities, joint cracks, voids and other defects by routing to sound material. Smooth precast and formed concrete
surfaces must be cleaned, roughened and made absorptive by mechanical abrasion. Surface profile should be
09 96 00
equal to CSP 3-6 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2 at a minimum. If it is not possible to mechanically
copious amounts of water to neutralize the surface. Care must be taken to ensure that all salts and residue from
the reaction have been removed. The pH of the surface should be checked, as per ASTM D 4262, following acid
etching. Following surface preparation, the cleaned surface should pull concrete when tested with an Elcometer
or similar pull tester (ASTM D 4541). Before application of the coating, use the “Visqueen test” (ASTM D 4263)
to evaluate moisture level in concrete.

105
New Concrete: Allow to cure for a minimum of 28 days. Remove any surface hardener or curing compounds
by using the recommended mechanical methods for surface preparation. Prepare surface as recommended
above. Old Concrete: For quick, small patching use suitable epoxy mortar. For larger areas, use cementitious
patching materials which are compatible with the system. After patching, a light brush blast is recommended
prior to coating. Steel: All oils, greases, dirt, old coatings or chemical contaminants must be removed. All welds
should be continuous and ground to remove all splatter, sharp edges, laps and other surface irregularities. All
steel surfaces should be blasted to a “NEAR WHITE” metal finish using clean dry blasting media.
Mixing: Use clean containers and clean mixers for mixing DURAL EPOXY PRIMER. Using a low speed “Jiffy”
type mixer, mix the A & B components separately for approximately 1 minute. Then combine one part by volume
Part “A” with one part by volume Part “B”. Mix the components together thoroughly for 3 to 5 minutes. Scrape
the bottom and sides of mixing container at least once. Do not aerate the mix. Mix only enough material that can
be used within the working life.
Application: The ambient and surface temperature should be between 50°F to 90°F (10°C to 32.2°C). DURAL
EPOXY PRIMER can be applied using a short nap roller, squeegee, brush, or an airless spray. Top coat materials
can be applied as soon as the DURAL EPOXY PRIMER has become tack free, typically within 3 to 4 hours at 75°F
(24°C), but no later than 24 hours after primer application.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment immediately after use with methyl ethyl ketone or acetone. Clean up spills or drips
with solvent while still wet. Dried product will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• DURAL EPOXY PRIMER is not intended as a finished coating.
• Do not apply to frost filled concrete or at temperatures below 50°F (10°C).
• If applied at higher film builds may cause a yellowish cast to the film.
Rev. 6.11
106
DURAPRIME WB
Water Based Epoxy Primer
Coatings - Primers
Description
DURAPRIME WB is a two component, penetrating water based epoxy primer. It is recommended for use as a
primer with various Euclid Chemical water based epoxies, 100% solids epoxies, and urethane coatings. It has
excellent adhesion to damp concrete, is fast drying, and has low odor making it useful for several industrial
applications. DURAPRIME WB is nonflammable and has a very low VOC content.
• Schools • Hospitals • Walls & barriers
• Warehouses • Clean rooms • Bridge abutments
• Laboratories • Concrete block • Parapets
Features/Benefits
• Can be used on damp concrete • Very low odor - excellent for indoor use
• Fast drying, yet has long pot life • Reduces concrete porosity and outgassing
Mixed viscosity...............................3 to 400 cps
Dry to touch........................................ 2 to 4 hrs
Pot life.................................................. 6 to 8 hrs
VOC Content mixed................................. 50 g/L
Mixed solids (as supplied)..........................32%
Values presented are typical and are not necessarily referenced to create specifications.
DURAPRIME WB
Packaging
DuraPrime WB is available in a 4.75 gal (18 L) kit and a case of two 0.81 gal (3.1 L) units.
Shelf Life
Coverage
ft²/gal (m²/L)
Bare concrete: 300 to 400 (7.36 to 9.82)
Concrete block: 200 to 350 (4.91 to 8.59)
Coated surface: 350 to 450 (8.59 to 11.04)
Note: Coverage rates will vary depending upon porosity and profile of the concrete.
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: New concrete must have cured for at least 21 to 28 days. For old concrete, remove weak,
Master Format #:
contaminated, or deteriorated concrete. If patching is needed, ensure compatibility between patching mortar
and DURAPRIME WB. Honeycombs, bugholes, and shallow repairs may be repaired by using a block filler. Both
09 96 00
old and new concrete must be structurally sound, clean, free of dust, grease, laitance, oil, old coatings, or other
contaminants. Using mechanical abrasion to prepare the concrete substrate is preferred. Surface profile should
be equal to CSP 2-5 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2 at a minimum. Acid etching with 15% hydrochloric
acid may be done, but ensure removal of salts by adequate flushing with water. A pH check after acid washing
is highly recommended. Following surface preparation, the cleaned surface must pull concrete when tested with
a pull tester or an Elcometer.

107
Mixing: Premix DURAPRIME WB Part A and Part B separately using a “Jiffy” mixer at slow speed. Then add the
entire contents of Part A to the Part B container. Mix using a “Jiffy” mixer at slow speed (50 to 100 rpm) for 3
minutes, scraping the sides of the container and paddle blades at least once. Do not aerate while mixing. Allow
the mixed, milky looking, product an induction period of about 20 minutes at 75°F (24°C), which also allows for
the air to release from the mix.
Application: Apply DURAPRIME WB by brush, squeegee, or spray to clean concrete at a coverage rate of 200
to 400 ft²/gal (4.91 to 9.82 m²/L). The initially milky coating will dry to a clear coating. Higher film builds may
cause blistering, entrap water, especially under adverse conditions and impart a yellow cast to the film. The top
coat can be applied typically within 2 to 4 hours of the first coat, depending on ambient conditions and concrete
porosity. When top coating with moisture sensitive materials like Eucothane, ensure that the film is set to touch
and free of any moisture.
Clean-Up
Clean up tools and application equipment with water or a blend of butyl cellosolve and water immediately
after use. Clean up drips and over-sprays with water while still wet. Dried primer requires mechanical
abrasion for removal.
• Store at temperatures between 40° to 90°F (4°C to 32°C).
• DURAPRIME WB is not intended as a finished coating.
• Do not apply to frost filled concrete or at temperatures below 50°F (10°C) or under very high humidity (>90%).
• DURAPRIME WB, if applied at higher film builds may cause blistering and a yellowish cast to the film.
• DURAPRIME WB will darken the concrete surface to give a “wet look” appearance.
Rev. 6.11
108
TAMMS H/P PRIMER
Primer for Concrete or Masonry Surfaces
Coatings - Primers
Description
TAMMS H/P PRIMER aids in the proper curing of acrylic resin or cement based masonry coatings, especially
when applied to hot or porous surfaces. TAMMS H/P PRIMER dries rapidly to create a breathable barrier within
the substrate surface. The barrier retards the excessive absorption of moisture from the coating into the substrate,
and aids in the proper curing of the coating. This action helps to minimize “cratering” of acrylic coatings, and the
formation of shrinkage cracks in cementitious materials. TAMMS H/P PRIMER is necessary on porous surfaces
or when the weather is warm and windy.
• Exterior/interior, above/below grade • Concrete block surfaces such as split face,
• Concrete and masonry surfaces textured, regular, or lightweight block
• Brick • Precast, textured, lightweight and formed
• Stone concrete
Features/Benefits
• Provides a stable base for Euclid Chemical coatings
TAMMS H/P PRIMER is a milky white emulsion of 100 percent acrylic polymer solids and modifiers in a water
based formulation. TAMMS H/P PRIMER turns clear with a slight gloss when dry.
Packaging
TAMMS H/P PRIMER is packaged in 5 gal (18.9 L) pails and 55 gal (208 L) drums.
Shelf Life
TAMMS H/P PRIMER
Coverage
The coverage rates below are approximate and for estimating purposes only. Actual surface texture and porosity
will determine the total amount of TAMMS H/P PRIMER required.
ft²/gal m²/L
Porous 100 to 150 (2.5 to 3.7)
Non Porous 200 to 300 (4.9 to 7.3)
Directions for Use
Surface must be structurally sound, clean, dry, and free of contaminants. Repair surface defects, cracks, and
voids before applying TAMMS H/P PRIMER. Cure new concrete and masonry surfaces minimum 28 days.
Provide an absorptive surface on all substrates, including smooth precast or formed concrete by abrading the
surface. Apply TAMMS H/P PRIMER to a dry surface, and do not apply when rain is expected within 4 hours or if
the primed surface cannot be topcoated within 24 hours. For conditions not covered above, contact your local
Euclid Chemical representative.
Mixing: Stir TAMMS H/P PRIMER slowly and thoroughly, using slow speed mixing equipment that will not aerate
Master Format #:
the product. Do not dilute TAMMS H/P PRIMER.

Application: Use airless spray equipment with 0.017 to 0.021 inch (0.43 to 0.53 mm) orifice size spray tips to
09 96 00
apply TAMMS H/P PRIMER. Hold spray gun 12 to 18 inches (30.4 to 45.7 cm) from the wall surface, and apply
using a “cross coat” technique consisting of a horizontal pass followed by a vertical pass. For hand application,
use equipment designed for latex paints, and dampen the brushes or the 1½ inch (3.8 cm) nap rollers with water
before use. Thoroughly wet the surface with H/P PRIMER to the point of saturation with no run down. Pick up
any drips or runs with a brush or roller. H/P PRIMER is rapid drying, and the finish coat may be applied as the
primer dries, but no later than 24 hours after primer application. Labor costs on large projects may be reduced
by using separate application systems to apply the H/P PRIMER and the finish coat during the same “drop”.

109
Clean-Up
Clean tools and application equipment immediately after use with detergent and hot water. Clean overspray or
drips, while still wet, with detergent and hot water. Clean glass and metal surfaces before material dries. Dried
material will require strong solvents or abrasion for removal.
• Do not thin or dilute TAMMS H/P PRIMER.
• Do not apply to external surfaces if rain is forecast within 4 hours.
• Do not apply TAMMS H/P PRIMER below 50°F (10°C) or above 90°F (32°C), or over frozen or frost-filled surfaces.
• Do not apply TAMMS H/P PRIMER to non-absorbent materials such as glass, metal, glazed brick, or glazed
tile. Primer should be topcoated within 24 hours after application.
• Protect from freezing. If frozen, do not use.
Rev. 6.11
110
TAMMS MASONRY PRIMER
Block Filler with Mold & Fungus Inhibitors
Coatings - Primers
Description
TAMMS MASONRY PRIMER is a heavy bodied, water-based, 100% acrylic resin emulsion block filler used
in as a primer for Euclid Chemical decorative coating systems such as TAMMSCOAT and TAMMOLASTIC.
TAMMS MASONRY PRIMER is formulated with mold and fungus inhibitors, freeze-thaw stabilizers, and finely
graded texture minerals for interior or exterior, above and below grade applications.
• Brick • Stone
• Block • Stucco surfaces
Features/Benefits
• Fills pores • Breathable • Resists mold & fungal growth Can contribute to LEED points
Material Properties @ 75°F (24°C) Freeze Thaw durability ASTM C 666
Weight/gal 13.0 ± 0.5 lb/gal (1.5 ± 0.06 kg/L) 300 cycles 100.90%
VOC Content < 10 g/L Scaling Resistance ASTM 672 25 cycles
Viscosity 120 to 130 KU Visual Rating 0
Solids by Weight 70 ± 2% Scaling Mass None
Solids by Volume 52.5% Freeze Thaw Test, Mod.
Water Permeability ASTM E 514 50 cycles No visible defects
Reference
Dampness Shows 10 mins None Salt spray resistance Kentucky Method
TAMMS MASONRY PRIMER

First Water Shows 12 mins None 300 hrs 5% solution @ 90˚F ± 2˚F (32˚C ± -17˚C)
Dampness area back of wall 75% None No Adhesion Loss
Water Vapor Trans ASTM E 96 Fungus Growth Fed Test 141, Method 6271
20 mils 12 perms 28 days None
Weatherometer ASTM G 26 Values are typical and not necessarily referenced
6,000 hrs No crazing, cracking, chipping or flaking. to create specifications.
Light chalk and color change. No other deterioration.
Appearance: Available in off-white color only.
Packaging
TAMMS MASONRY PRIMER is packaged in 5 gal (18.9 L) pails and 30 gal (113.6 L) drums.
Shelf Life
Coverage
ft²/gal (m²/L)
TAMMS MASONRY PRIMER 40 to 80 (0.98 to 1.96)
Note: Coverage rates are approximate and for estimating purposes only. Surface temperature, porosity of surface and texture will
Master Format #:
determine actual material requirements. Apply samples to all surfaces to be coated. Obtain approval of Architect or Owner for the color,
finish, water repellency, and coverage before proceeding with work. Retain sample or mock-up through completion of project.
09 96 00
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: Cure new concrete and masonry surfaces 28 days. Surface must be structurally sound,
clean, dry, and free of dust, dirt, oil, peeling paint, curing and form release compounds, and other contaminants.
Provide an absorptive surface on smooth precast, formed concrete, and other substances by abrading the
surface. Defective concrete, honeycombs, cracks, cavities and other defects should be routed to sound concrete
and patched using compatible materials.

111
Mixing: TAMMS MASONRY PRIMER should be mechanically mixed using a low speed 3/4” (19 mm) drill with a
mixing paddle. Mix thoroughly to a uniform, smooth consistency. Do not aerate the mix.
Application: Apply TAMMS MASONRY PRIMER to the surface using heavy duty spray equipment capable
of spraying ceiling texture, plaster or cement based coatings, or use stiff brushes or rollers. When sprayed,
backrolling is required to ensure good uniform contact with the surface. Avoid applying to excess which can
cause the product to run down the wall or puddle. For hand application, use brushes and 1½” (3.81 cm) nap
rollers designed for latex paints. Dampen the brushes and rollers with clean water before use. Decorative
topcoats may be applied 12 to 24 hours following the primer application.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and application equipment immediately after use with soap and hot water. Clean overspray or drips while
still wet with soap and hot water. Dried material may require strong solvents or mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Do not thin or dilute TAMMS MASONRY PRIMER.
• Do not apply if rain is expected within 8 hours.
• Do not apply over frozen or frost filled surfaces.
• Do not apply to non-absorbent materials such as glass, metal, glazed brick, or glazed tile.
• Do not apply if temperature is below 45°F (7°C) or above 90°F (32°C).
Rev. 6.11
112
Curing And Curing & Sealing Compounds
Curing Compounds
Kurez DR VOX 115
Kurez DR-100 117
Kurez RC 119
Kurez RC-100 121
Kurez RC-off 123
Kurez VOX White Pigmented 125
Kurez W VOX 127
Solvent Based Curing and Sealing

BrownTone CS 129
BrownTone CS 350 131
Diamond Clear 133
Diamond Clear 350 135
EverClear 137
EverClear 350 139
Lusterseal 350 141
Rez-Seal 143
Rez-Seal AC-UV 145
Super Diamond Clear 147
Super Diamond Clear 350 149
Super Diamond Clear AC 151
Super Floor Coat 153
Super Rez-Seal 155

Water Based Curing and Sealing
Aqua-Cure VOX 157
BrownTone VOX 159
Diamond Clear VOX 161
Eucocure VOX 163
EverClear VOX 165
Super Aqua-Cure VOX 167
Super Diamond Clear VOX 169
Curing and Curing & Sealing Products

Specifications and Compliances
Curing Compounds
ASTM C 309
Product Type 1 Type 1-D Type 2 Class A Class B
Kurez RC
Kurez DR VOX
Kurez W VOX
Kurez VOX White Pigmented
Kurez RC-100
Kurez DR-100
Curing and Sealing Compounds

ASTM C 1315
Product Type 1 Type 2 Class A Class B Class C
Aqua-Cure VOX
BrownTone CS
BrownTone CS350
Diamond Clear
Diamond Clear350
Diamond Clear VOX
Eucocure VOX
EverClear
EverClear350
EverClear VOX
Lusterseal350
Rez-Seal
Rez-Seal AC-UV
Super Aqua-Cure VOX
Super Diamond Clear
Super Diamond Clear AC
Super Diamond Clear350
Super Diamond Clear VOX
Super Floor Coat
Super Rez-Seal
KUREZ DR VOX
Dissipating Curing Compound
Curing and Sealing

Description
KUREZ DR VOX is a reduced odor, liquid membrane forming curing compound formulated from hydrocarbon
resins and dissipating agents. KUREZ DR VOX provides an excellent initial cure for concrete, then begins to
break down and deteriorate upon exposure to traffic and UV light. Dissipation begins approximately 4 to 6
weeks after application. After simple cleaning to completely remove the KUREZ DR VOX, the concrete is ready
for the application of coverings, coatings, or sealers.
• Curing interior or exterior* concrete • Where a long term membrane film is not desired
• Concrete that will later receive a covering or on the concrete surface
coating * Product will discolor when exposed to sunlight
Features/Benefits
• Use of this product ensures proper curing resulting in stronger, more wear resistant concrete
• Helps to minimize dusting
• Breaks down quickly to allow subsequent application of floor coverings
• Quickly and easily applied by spray application
• Available in a fugitive dye formulation
Drying Time* at 73°F, 50% RH:..................... 1 hour
Foot Traffic:........................................... 2 to 4 hours
KUREZ DR VOX
Wheel Traffic:...................................... 6 to 10 hours
VOC Content:................................................285 g/L
Solids Content:..................................................16% .
Moisture Loss (ASTM C 156):................ < 0.55 kg/m2
*Low concrete or air temperature and/or high relative humidity will extend drying time.
Appearance: The color of KUREZ DR VOX may vary from off white to pale yellow. Color variation does not affect
product performance. KUREZ DR VOX may turn a deeper amber color upon exposure to UV light.
Packaging
KUREZ DR VOX is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
• ASTM C 309, Types 1 and 1D, Class A & B
Master Format #:
• AASHTO M 148, Types 1 and 1D, Class A & B

• USDA compliant
03 39 23
Coverage
........................................................ ft2/gal (m2/L)
Textured Concrete:...................................300 (7.4)
Smooth Concrete:....................................400 (9.8)
For good dissipation and easy removal, do not apply at a thicker film than indicated.

115
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: As soon as possible after final troweling (or stripping of forms in vertical applications),
apply KUREZ DR VOX at the recommended coverage rate.
Mixing: Material may separate during long term storage. Mild agitation or mixing is required before use.
Application: Apply at a uniform coverage by spray or roller application. Product may be sprayed with a hand
held “pump-up” sprayer or an airless industrial sprayer. On vertical surfaces such as walls and columns, KUREZ
DR VOX should be applied immediately after forms are stripped. Do not apply at a thicker film than the
suggested coverage rates allow. Heavy or uneven application can result in slow dissipation, difficult
removal of the KUREZ DR VOX, and may discolor the concrete surface. On interior hard troweled floors
where a liquid densifier will be applied (and with approval from the project engineer), the coverage rate of
KUREZ DR VOX may be increased to 400 ft2/gal (9.8 m2/L) in order to facilitate easier removal.
Dissipation and Cleaning: KUREZ DR VOX will begin to break down and lose adhesion from the concrete 4
to 6 weeks after application, but the exact time will vary depending on application rate, moisture level in the
concrete, and the amount of exposure to UV light and construction traffic. Floors to receive coatings, sealers
and coverings must be cleaned thoroughly to ensure complete removal of KUREZ DR VOX. The use of a heavy-
duty floor cleaner such as EUCO CLEAN & STRIP is recommended to aid cleaning and removal. Scrub the floor
with the cleaner and stiff bristle mechanical equipment, then rinse well with clean water. After proper clean-up,
follow the instructions of the sealer, coating or covering manufacturer for the recommended surface preparation
for the particular product to be applied. The use of KUREZ DR VOX does not eliminate the need to adequately
clean and prepare the surface to assure good adhesion of the applied product, particularly when concrete or
terrazzo toppings are to follow.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with warm, soapy water before KUREZ DR VOX dries.
• Do not allow containers of this product to freeze.
• For best application results, product temperature should be between 50°F to 90oF (10°C to 32oC) with ambient
and surface temperatures between 45°F to 100oF (7°C to 38oC).
• After application, KUREZ DR VOX must remain uncovered and unprotected for proper dissipation.
• Do not apply at temperatures below 40oF (4oC).
• Do not use as bond breaker for tilt-up construction.
• Do not subject to rain or water for 12 hours after application.
• Not intended for use on architectural concrete panels unless complete removal is planned.
• Do not thin this product with water or other solvents.
• Longer dissipation times can be expected if the product is not exposed to traffic & sunlight or if the product is
applied heavily or unevenly.
Rev. 6.11
116
KUREZ DR-100
Low VOC, Dissipating Curing Compound
Curing and Sealing

Description
KUREZ DR-100 is a resin-based liquid membrane-forming curing compound that provides an excellent initial
cure for concrete, then begins to break down and deteriorate upon exposure to traffic and UV light. After simple
cleaning to completely remove the KUREZ DR-100, the concrete is ready to receive application of coverings,
coatings, or sealers. With a VOC content of less than 100 g/L, KUREZ DR-100 is fully VOC-compliant in the U.S.
and Canada, even in the highly regulated air quality districts of California.
• Interior or exterior* concrete • Where a long term membrane film is not desired
• Concrete that will later receive a covering or on the concrete surface
coating * Product will discolor when exposed to sunlight
Features/Benefits
• Use of this product ensures proper curing resulting in stronger, more wear resistant concrete
• Helps to minimize dusting
• Breaks down quickly to allow subsequent application of floor coverings
• Quickly and easily applied by spray application
• Available in a fugitive dye formulation
Drying Time* at 73°F, 50% RH:..................... 1 hour
KUREZ DR-100
VOC Content:..................................................95 g/L
Solids Content:..................................................19% .
Moisture Loss (ASTM C 156):................ < 0.55 kg/m2
Appearance: The color of KUREZ DR-100 may vary from off white to pale yellow. Color variation does not affect
product performance. KUREZ DR-100 may turn a deeper amber color upon exposure to UV light.
Packaging
KUREZ DR-100 is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
Master Format #:
• ASTM C 309, Types 1 and 1D, Class A & B

• AASHTO M 148, Types 1 and 1D, Class A & B
03 39 23
• USDA compliant
Coverage
........................................................ ft2/gal (m2/L)
Textured Concrete:...................................300 (7.4)
Smooth Concrete:....................................400 (9.8)
For good dissipation and easy removal, do not apply at a thicker film than indicated.

117
Directions for Use
apply KUREZ DR-100 at the recommended coverage rate.
Mixing: Material may separate during long term storage. Mild agitation or mixing is required before use.
Application: Apply at a uniform coverage by spray or roller application. Product may be sprayed with a hand held
“pump-up” sprayer or an airless industrial sprayer. On vertical surfaces such as walls and columns, KUREZ DR-
100 should be applied immediately after forms are stripped. Do not apply at a thicker film than the suggested
coverage rates allow. Heavy or uneven application can result in slow dissipation and difficult removal of
the KUREZ DR-100, and may discolor the concrete surface. On interior hard troweled floors where a liquid
densifier will be applied (and with approval from the project engineer), the coverage rate of KUREZ DR-100 may
be increased to 400 ft2/gal (9.8 m2/L) in order to facilitate easier removal.
Dissipation and Cleaning: KUREZ DR-100 will naturally break down 4 to 6 weeks after application, but the exact
time will vary depending on application rate, moisture levels in the concrete, and the amount of exposure to UV
light and construction traffic. Floors to receive coatings, sealers and coverings must be cleaned thoroughly to
ensure complete removal of KUREZ DR-100. The use of a heavy-duty floor cleaner such as EUCO CLEAN &
STRIP is recommended to aid cleaning and removal. Scrub the floor with the cleaner and stiff bristle mechanical
equipment, then rinse well with clean water. After proper clean-up, follow the instructions of the sealer, coating or
covering manufacturer for the recommended surface preparation for the particular product to be applied. The
use of KUREZ DR-100 does not eliminate the need to adequately clean and prepare the surface to assure good
adhesion of the applied product, particularly when concrete or terrazzo toppings are to follow.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with warm, soapy water before KUREZ DR-100 dries.
• After application, KUREZ DR-100 must remain uncovered and unprotected for proper dissipation.
• Longer dissipation times can be expected if the product is not exposed to traffic & sunlight or if the product is
applied heavier than recommended.
Rev. 6.11
118
KUREZ RC
Removable Curing Compound
Curing and Sealing

Description
KUREZ RC is a concrete curing compound that can be easily removed from concrete surfaces any time after
application. Unlike curing compounds that use “dissipating” technology, exposure to UV light, traffic, and a long
dissipation time are not required to facilitate removal of KUREZ RC. Using its companion cleaner KUREZ RC-
off, KUREZ RC can be easily cleaned from the concrete whenever the construction schedule dictates removal.
Using the KUREZ RC and KUREZ RC-off system provides scheduling flexibility and puts floors into service faster,
which equals a bottom line cost savings to both the construction team and facility owner.
• Interior concrete floors that require quick removal of • Warehouse and distribution center floors
the curing compound • Retail and commercial floors
• Concrete floors to be sealed, coated, or covered
Features/Benefits
• Ensures proper moisture retention of new concrete, resulting in stronger, more durable slabs
• Easy to apply with conventional spray equipment
• Can be removed at any time with KUREZ RC-off
• Low odor, fast drying formulation
• No residue after removal - allows for hassle-free installation of floor coverings and coatings
Property Result
KUREZ RC
Solids Content, % 18 - 22
VOC Content, g/L (lb/gal) 270 (2.2)
Moisture Retention, ASTM C 156 (kg/m ) 2
less than 0.55
Physical Appearance white to yellow opaque liquid
Unit Weight, lb/gal (kg/L) 8.3 (0.98)
Viscosity, cps 150 - 300
Drying Time @ 70°F (21°C) 1 hour
Properties shown were determined at laboratory conditions of 70°F (21°C).
Packaging
KUREZ RC is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Master Format #:
Shelf Life
03 39 23
• ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class A & B
• AASHTO M 148, Type 1, Class A & B
• USDA compliant

119
Coverage
Coverage of KUREZ RC is 300 - 400 ft2/gal (7.4 - 9.8 m2/L), depending on surface texture and porosity.
Do not apply heavier than recommended, as thick or uneven application can make removal difficult.
Directions for Use
and following cutting of floor joints, apply KUREZ RC at the recommended coverage rate. There should be no
bleed water on the surface at the time of application.
Mixing: Stir well before use to ensure a uniform consistency.
Application: Apply with uniform coverage by spray or roller. Product may be sprayed with a hand held pump-
up sprayer or an airless industrial sprayer. When spraying, backroll overlap areas to eliminate heavy streaks of
product. Do not apply thicker than the suggested coverage rates allow. Heavy or uneven application can result
in difficult removal of KUREZ RC.
After KUREZ RC has been applied and before removal, the floor must be kept dry. Ideally, the concrete will
be under roof when the KUREZ RC is applied. Do not allow water to stand or puddle on KUREZ RC. Allowing
standing or puddled water to dry on KUREZ RC may result in difficult removal.
Removal: When the construction schedule dictates, KUREZ RC can be easily removed with KUREZ RC-off.
KUREZ RC and KUREZ RC-off is a system formulated to be used together - other detergents, cleaners, or
strippers will be ineffective at removing KUREZ RC. Remove construction debris and “open” the KUREZ RC
surface by dry sweeping with stiff bristle brushes affixed to a floor scrubbing machine. Brushes or pads with
grit may be beneficial.
Before using, dilute KUREZ RC-off at a ratio of 1 part KUREZ RC-off to 4 parts water by volume. Using undiluted
KUREZ RC-off will not be as effective. Spray the diluted KUREZ RC-off onto the concrete surface at 300 ft2/
gal (7.4 m2/L). Allow the KUREZ RC-off solution to dwell on the concrete for 30 minutes, adding more diluted
KUREZ RC-off if necessary to keep the floor wet during the entire dwell time. A wet scrub with a stiff bristle brush
or open pad on during the dwell time will facilitate the removal process. After the dwell and wet scrub, follow
with a second scrubbing pass. Remove all excess KUREZ RC-off solution from the surface, then rinse the floor
with clean water. Inspect for complete removal of the KUREZ RC. If residue remains, repeat the entire process
above.
Allow the concrete to dry completely after the clean water rinse, in accordance with the project specification,
before applying a sealer, coating, or installing flooring materials.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with warm, soapy water before KUREZ RC dries.
• Do not subject to rain or other sources of water after application.
Rev. 6.11
120
KUREZ RC-100
Low VOC, Removable Curing Compound
Curing and Sealing

Description
KUREZ RC-100 is a concrete curing compound that can be easily removed from concrete surfaces any time
after application. Unlike curing compounds that use “dissipating” technology, exposure to UV light, traffic, and
a long dissipation time are not required to facilitate removal of KUREZ RC-100. Using its companion cleaner
KUREZ RC-off, KUREZ RC-100 can be easily cleaned from the concrete whenever the construction schedule
dictates removal. Using the KUREZ RC-100 and KUREZ RC-off system provides scheduling flexibility and puts
floors into service faster, which equals a bottom line cost savings to both the construction team and facility
owner. With a VOC content of less than 100 g/L, KUREZ RC-100 is fully VOC-compliant in the U.S. and Canada,
even in the highly regulated air quality districts of California.
• Interior concrete floors that require quick removal of • Warehouse and distribution center floors
the curing compound • Retail and commercial floors
• Concrete floors to be sealed, coated, or covered
Features/Benefits
• Ensures proper moisture retention of new concrete, resulting in stronger, more durable slabs
• Easy to apply with conventional spray equipment
• Can be removed at any time with KUREZ RC-off
• No residue after removal - allows for hassle-free installation of floor coverings and coatings
Low VOC formulation - contributes to LEED points
KUREZ RC-100
Property Result
Solids Content, % 19
VOC Content, g/L (lb/gal) 96 (0.80)
Moisture Retention, ASTM C 156 (kg/m ) 2
less than 0.55
Physical Appearance white to yellow opaque liquid
Unit Weight, lb/gal (kg/L) 8.6 (1.01)
Viscosity, cps 150 - 300
Drying Time @ 70°F (21°C) 1 hour
Properties shown were determined at laboratory conditions of 70°F (21°C).
Packaging
KUREZ RC-100 is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Master Format #:
Shelf Life
03 39 23

• USDA compliant

121
Coverage
Coverage of KUREZ RC-100 is 300 - 400 ft2/gal (7.4 - 9.8 m2/L), depending on surface texture and
porosity. Do not apply heavier than recommended, as thick or uneven application can make removal
difficult.
Directions for Use
and following cutting of floor joints, apply KUREZ RC-100 at the recommended coverage rate. There should be
no bleed water on the surface at the time of application.
Mixing: Stir well before use to ensure a uniform consistency.
Application: Apply with uniform coverage by spray or roller. Product may be sprayed with a hand held pump-
up sprayer or an airless industrial sprayer. When spraying, backroll overlap areas to eliminate heavy streaks of
product. Do not apply thicker than the suggested coverage rates allow. Heavy or uneven application can result
in difficult removal of KUREZ RC-100.
After KUREZ RC-100 has been applied and before removal, the floor must be kept dry. Ideally, the concrete will
be under roof when the KUREZ RC-100 is applied. Do not allow water to stand or puddle on KUREZ RC-100.
Allowing standing or puddled water to dry on KUREZ RC-100 may result in difficult removal.
Removal: When the construction schedule dictates, KUREZ RC-100 can be easily removed with KUREZ RC-off.
KUREZ RC-100 and KUREZ RC-off is a system formulated to be used together - other detergents, cleaners, or
strippers willbe ineffective at removing KUREZ RC-100. Remove construction debris and “open” the KUREZ
RC-100 surface by dry sweeping with stiff bristle brushes affixed to a floor scrubbing machine. Brushes or pads
with grit may be beneficial.
Before using, dilute KUREZ RC-off at a ratio of 1 part KUREZ RC-off to 4 parts water by volume. Using undiluted
KUREZ RC-off will not be effective. Spray the diluted KUREZ RC-off onto the concrete surface at 300 ft2/gal (7.4
m2/L). Allow the KUREZ RC-off solution to dwell on the concrete for 30 minutes, adding more diluted KUREZ
RC-off if necessary to keep the floor wet during the entire dwell time. A wet scrub with a stiff bristle brush or
open pad on during the dwell time will facilitate the removal process. After the dwell and wet scrub, follow with
a second scrubbing pass. Remove all excess KUREZ RC-off solution from the surface, then rinse the floor with
clean water. Inspect the floor for complete removal of the KUREZ RC-100. If residue remains, repeat the entire
process above.
Allow the concrete to dry completely after the clean water rinse, in accordance with the project specification,
before applying a sealer, coating, or installing flooring materials.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with warm, soapy water before KUREZ RC-100 dries.
• Do not subject to rain or other sources of water after application.
Rev. 6.11
122
KUREZ RC-off
Cleaner for Removing KUREZ RC and KUREZ RC-100
Curing and Sealing

Description
KUREZ RC-off is a biodegradable liquid cleaner specifically formulated to quickly and easily remove
KUREZ RC and KUREZ RC-100 concrete curing compounds at any time after application. KUREZ RC and
KUREZ RC-100 are unlike traditional dissipating curing compounds in that exposure to UV light, traffic,
and time to dissipate are not required for their removal. The blend of detergents in KUREZ RC-off are
specifically formulated to cut through KUREZ RC and KUREZ RC-100, destroying the integrity of the curing
compound, allowing it to be removed from the surface and rinsed away. After removal, floors cured with
KUREZ RC or KUREZ RC-100 are clean and ready for the application of a sealer or other covering.
Primary Application
Removal of KUREZ RC and KUREZ RC-100 concrete curing compounds
Features/Benefits
• Quickly removes KUREZ RC or KUREZ RC-100 curing compound from concrete at any time
• Biodegradable, water based formulation
• Waste does not require special handling or hazardous material disposal methods
• Also removes dirt and grease from floors, ensuring a clean surface ready for sealers or other coverings
Typical properties measured at laboratory conditions, 70°F (21°C) and 50% relative humidity.
KUREZ RC-off
Property Result
Appearance Clear green liquid
Unit Weight 8.7 lbs/gal (1.02 kg/L)
pH, undiluted 12.5 - 13.5
pH, diluted 11.5 - 12.5
Dilution Ratio, by volume 1 part KUREZ RC-off to 4 parts water
Packaging
KUREZ RC-off is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
Master Format #:

03 39 23
Coverage
Coverage of KUREZ RC-off after dilution is 300 ft2/gal (7.4 m2/L).
For estimating purposes, one gallon of undiluted KUREZ RC-off will clean 1,500 ft2 (139 m2) of concrete.

123
Directions for Use
Mixing: Before using, KUREZ RC-off must be diluted with water at a ratio of 1 part KUREZ RC-off to 4 parts
water (by volume). Undiluted material will not be as effective. Stir diluted solution well before use.
Application: Apply diluted KUREZ RC-off to the floor at a rate of 300 ft2/gal (7.4 m2/L).
Allow the KUREZ RC-off solution to dwell on the concrete for 30 minutes, adding more diluted KUREZ RC-
off if necessary to keep the floor wet during the entire dwell time. Do not let the RC-off dry out. Immediately
after the dwell time, scrub the floor with an automatic scrubber equipped with stiff-bristle brushes. Remove
all excess KUREZ RC-off solution from the surface, and inspect for complete removal of the KUREZ RC or
KUREZ RC-100. If residue remains, repeat the process. Areas where KUREZ RC or KUREZ RC-100 has
been applied too heavily or unevenly may need additional dwell time of diluted KUREZ RC-off or a more
aggressive scrubbing process.
Allow the concrete to dry completely, or as required by the project specification, before applying a sealer,
coating, or covering material.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with warm water.
• Do not allow this product to freeze. Store between 40°F to 100°F (4°C to 38°C).
Rev. 6.11
124
KUREZ VOX WHITE PIGMENTED
White Pigmented Curing Compound
Curing and Sealing

Description
KUREZ VOX WHITE PIGMENTED is a white pigmented wax emulsion curing compound for new concrete
requiring a reflective curing membrane. It maintains adequate moisture in new concrete so that desired properties,
such as strength and durability, can develop. This white pigmented formulation also reflects sunlight, helping to
keep concrete cool when placed in hot weather.
• Exterior paving • Sidewalks, curbs and gutters
• Walls, columns and highway barriers • Bridge decks and parapet walls
• Residential concrete • Commercial concrete
Features/Benefits
• Forms an efficient moisture barrier for optimum curing of concrete
• Helps ensure proper cement hydration
• Zero VOC’s
• Designed primarily for exterior applications where sunlight reflectivity is needed
• No odor
KUREZ VOX WHITE PIGMENTED

Drying Time* @ 73°F, 50% RH:.....................1 hour
Foot Traffic:...........................................2 to 4 hours
Wheel Traffic:......................................6 to 10 hours
VOC Content:...................................................0 g/L
Moisture Loss (ASTM C 156):................< 0.55 kg/m2
* Low concrete or air temperatures and/or high relative humidity will extend drying times.
Appearance: KUREZ VOX WHITE PIGMENTED is a white pigmented liquid. After application and drying, the
film is white in appearance.
Packaging
KUREZ VOX WHITE PIGMENTED is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
• ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class A
Master Format #:

• USDA compliant
03 39 23
Coverage
........................................................ ft2/gal (m2/L)
Smooth Concrete:..................................300 (7.4)
Textured Concrete:............................... 200 (4.9)
Coverage will vary depending on surface porosity and texture. AVOID EXCESSIVE BUILD-UP. THICKER
APPLICATIONS MAY LEAD TO DISCOLORATION AND POOR PRODUCT PERFORMANCE.

125
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: This product is designed for use on fresh concrete only. The concrete surface should first
be finished to the desired texture.
Mixing: Agitate before using. Material may separate during long term storage. Mild agitation is recommended
before usage.
Application: Apply a uniform coverage by spray or roller application. Product may be sprayed with a hand held
“pump-up” sprayer or with an airless industrial sprayer. If roller applied, use a short nap sleeve.
Curing: For the best cure of freshly placed concrete, apply KUREZ VOX WHITE PIGMENTED as soon as possible
after finishing operations and/or immediately after the disappearance of the “sheen” of surface moisture.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with warm, soapy water before the KUREZ VOX WHITE PIGMENTED dries.
Removal
May be removed by using EUCO CLEAN & STRIP along with aggressive scrubbing, or by the careful use of a
high pressure water spray.
• This product utilizes wax as a curing medium. Application on smooth troweled concrete may result in
significantly increased slipperiness.
• Do not allow containers of product to freeze. Store between 50oF to 100oF (10°C to 38oC).
• Complete removal is necessary before installing adhesives, carpet, tile, or other coverings.
Rev. 6.11
126
KUREZ W VOX
Wax Based, Zero VOC Curing Compound
Curing and Sealing

Description
KUREZ W VOX is a clear, water based wax emulsion curing compound for concrete. It maintains adequate
moisture in new concrete so that desired properties, such as strength and durability, can develop.
• Exterior paving • Interior and exterior concrete
• Walls and columns • Decks and parapet walls
• Sidewalks, curbs and gutters • Residential concrete
Features/Benefits
• Assists in proper cement hydration
• Designed for interior or exterior applications
• Zero VOC’s
Drying Time*@ 73°F, 50% RH:......................1 hour
VOC Content:...................................................0 g/L
Solids Content:................................................15%
KUREZ W VOX
Moisture Loss: (ASTM C 156)..................<0.55 kg m2
* Low concrete or air temperatures and/or high relative humidity will extend the drying time.
Appearance: KUREZ W VOX is a white, opaque liquid. After application, the film dries clear.
Heavy applications and/or prolonged exposure to moisture will cause the cured film to have a milky appearance.
Packaging
KUREZ W VOX is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
Master Format #:
• USDA and Canadian Food Inspection Agency

Coverage
03 39 23
................................. ft2/gal (m2/L)

Smooth Concrete:..................................300 (7.4)
Textured Concrete:................................200 (4.9)
Coverage will vary depending on surface porosity and texture. AVOID EXCESSIVE BUILD-UP. THICKER
APPLICATIONS MAY LEAD TO DISCOLORATION AND POOR PRODUCT PERFORMANCE.

127
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: This product is designed for use on fresh concrete only. The concrete surface should be
finished to the desired texture before application of KUREZ W VOX.
Mixing: Agitate before using. Material may separate during long term storage. Mild agitation is recommended
before usage.
held “pump-up” sprayer or with an airless industrial sprayer. If roller applied, use a short 3/8" (9.5 mm) nap
sleeve.
Curing: For the best cure of freshly placed concrete, apply KUREZ W VOX as soon as possible after finishing
operations, and/or immediately after the disappearance of the “sheen” of surface moisture.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with warm, soapy water before KUREZ W VOX dries.
Removal
May be removed with EUCO CLEAN & STRIP and aggressive scrubbing. KUREZ W VOX may also be removed
with careful use of high pressure water spray.
• Note: this product utilizes wax as a curing medium. Application on smooth troweled concrete may result in
significantly increased slipperiness.
• Do not allow containers of this product to freeze. Store between 50°F to 100oF (10°C to 38oC).
and surface temperatures between 45°F to 110°F (7°C to 45°C).
• This product should be completely removed before installation of adhesives, coatings, or other coverings.
• Do not subject to rain or water for at least 12 hours after application.
Rev. 6.11
128
BrownTone CS
Pigmented Cure & Seal For Exposed Aggregate Concrete
Curing and Sealing

Description
BrownTone CS is a solvent based acrylic polymer blend that cures, seals, and enhances the appearance of
exposed aggregate concrete surfaces. BROWNTONE CS is specially formulated with earth-toned pigments
that highlight the natural color of the aggregate, making exposed aggregate surfaces look more even in color
and richer in appearance. BROWNTONE CS also provides protection against the damaging effects of traffic,
weather, and de-icing salts. Although especially formulated for exposed aggregate concrete, BROWNTONE CS
can be used on any concrete surfaces - new or old - where a translucent brown tint is desired.
• Curing and sealing exposed aggregate concrete
Features/Benefits
• Enhances the natural tone and evens out the color of exposed aggregate concrete
• Cures and seals new concrete in one step
• Protects concrete from the damaging effects of weather and traffic
• Non-yellowing
Drying Time* @ 73°F, 50% RH:................... < 1 hour Alkali Resistance:
BrownTone CS
Recoat:.............................................. 4 to 24 hours 48 hour exposure.......................................excellent
Foot Traffic.......................................... 4 to 6 hours Solvent Resistance:.................................. minimal
Wheel Traffic:..................................... 6 to10 hours Solids Content:...........................................26-28%
VOC Content:..............................................653 g/L Moisture Loss: (ASTM C 156).............. < 0.40 kg/m2
Adhesion to Concrete:.............................excellent
*Low concrete or air temperature and/or high relative humidity will extend drying times.
Packaging
BROWNTONE CS is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
Master Format #:

03 39 23
Coverage
300 to 400 ft/²gal (7.4 to 9.8 m²/L), depending on concrete surface texture and porosity.
AVOID EXCESSIVE BUILD-UP. HEAVY APPLICATIONS MAY LEAD TO DISCOLORATION AND POOR
PRODUCT PERFORMANCE.

129
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: BROWNTONE CS can be applied to freshly placed and finished concrete as soon as the
surface bleed water has disappeared. On cured or older concrete, the surface should be thoroughly cleaned
and dry before application of BROWNTONE CS.
Mixing: BROWNTONE CS should be gently agitated or mixed before using to distribute pigments evenly.
Application: Apply at a uniform coverage with an industrial hand held pump-up sprayer or by roller. Common
garden-type sprayers should not be used. If applying by roller, use a short 3/8" (0.95 cm) nap, solvent resistant
roller cover. One coat is normally sufficient for an even appearance and a good seal, but for a deeper color
and greater protection, two thin coats may be applied. The prescribed coverage rates should be followed. If
applying two coats, allow the first coat to dry tack-free before applying the second coat. Ensure even coverage
and re-distribute any puddles or runs before the BROWNTONE CS dries. Protect freshly coated surfaces from
rain for a minimum of 8 hours after application.
Application of BROWNTONE CS too heavily, in too many successive coats, or in multiple coats over time can
cause bubbling, whitening, peeling, and ultimate failure of the product. To prevent over-application, it is good
practice to measure the area to be sealed and the corresponding volume of product required based on the
coverage rate. Also, applying BROWNTONE CS in hot weather or onto a hot surface can cause bubbling. If
BROWNTONE CS is showing signs of over-application, scrub the surface with a solvent such as acetone* or
xylene*, using a stiff natural bristle brush. Keep the surface wet with the solvent while scrubbing, adding more if
necessary. The solvent will turn the sealer back into a liquid form, at which point excess material can be wiped
off with a lint-free mop or towel. Do not apply additional sealer. After removing the excess BROWNTONE CS,
a roller can be used to redistribute the remaining product evenly across the surface, adding more solvent as
necessary to keep the sealer wet.
*Available at home improvement stores. Follow all safety precautions printed on the package.
Clean-Up
Tools and equipment may be cleaned with EUCO SOLVENT, xylene, xylol or toluene. Run cleaning solvent
through spray equipment to remove residual materials and prevent clogging of nozzle in future use.
Removal
Dried BROWNTONE CS may be removed with strong solvents such as xylene or acetone. (Always follow
package directions and warning labels). EUCO CLEAN & STRIP is a citrus-based stripper that can also be used
to remove BROWNTONE CS. Alternatively, the product can be removed by sandblasting or by other similar
mechanical action.
• Material will not freeze in storage but should be allowed to rise to 50°F (10°C) or more before use.
• Excessive build-up of BROWNTONE CS or puddling of the product during application can lead to bubbling or
whitening of the sealer and discoloration of the concrete.
• Do not apply when concrete surfaces or ambient temperatures are below 40°F (4°C). Do not apply to hot
surfaces, in hot direct sun, or when the ambient temperature is above 90°F (32°C).
• Keep away from open flames, sparks, or other sources of ignition.
• If used on interior concrete, ensure adequate fresh air ventilation and block all HVAC ducts which may
distribute solvent odor.
• Do not apply over concrete that will receive toppings, epoxy or urethane based coatings or adhesives.
• When installing carpet, tile and floor covering adhesives, a test section is recommended to ensure compatibility.
• Not resistant to gasoline or other automotive fluids.
• Do not thin this product.
Rev. 6.11
130
BrownTone CS350
Pigmented, Exempt Solvent Cure & Seal For Exposed Aggregate Concrete
Curing and Sealing

Description
BrownTone CS 350 is a solvent based acrylic polymer blend that cures, seals, and enhances the appearance of
exposed aggregate concrete surfaces. BROWNTONE CS 350 is specially formulated with earth-toned pigments
that highlight the natural color of the aggregate, making exposed aggregate surfaces look more even in color
and richer in appearance. BROWNTONE CS 350 also provides protection against the damaging effects of traffic,
weather, and de-icing salts. Although especially formulated for exposed aggregate concrete, BROWNTONE CS
350 can be used on any concrete surfaces - new or old - where a translucent brown tint is desired.
• Exposed aggregate concrete
Features/Benefits
• Enhances the natural tone and evens out the color of exposed aggregate concrete
• Cures and seals new concrete in one step
• Non-yellowing
• Low VOC content
BrownTone CS350
Wheel Traffic:.................................... 6 to 10 hours Solids Content:...........................................26-28%
VOC Content:..............................................318 g/L Moisture Loss: (ASTM C 156).............. < 0.40 kg/m2
Adhesion to Concrete:.............................excellent Flash Point:.......................................... 63°F (17°C)
Packaging
BROWNTONE CS 350 is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums, 5 gal (18.9 L) pails and 4/1 gal (3.8 L) units per case.
Shelf Life
• ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class A & B Complies with Federal AIM Rule VOC regulations and
Master Format #:
• ASTM C 1315*, Type 1, Class A with VOC standards in the OTC and LADCO regions
• AASHTO Specification M 148, Type 1, Class A & B *Does not meet flash point requirement
03 39 23
• USDA compliant
Coverage
300 to 400 ft/²gal (7.4 to 9.8 m²/L), depending on concrete surface texture and porosity.
AVOID EXCESSIVE BUILD-UP. THICKER APPLICATIONS MAY LEAD TO DISCOLORATION AND POOR

131
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: The concrete surface must be clean and free of standing water. Remove any sealer or
other material that may prevent adhesion of the BROWNTONE CS 350.
Mixing: BROWNTONE CS 350 requires no preblending and should be used directly from the container.
Application: Apply at a uniform coverage with an industrial hand held pump-up sprayer equipped with a 1.0
gallon per minute (3.8 L per minute) spray tip and neoprene fittings. Common garden-type sprayers should not
be used. Keep pressure in pump-up sprayers as high as possible to ensure a steady and even spray pattern.
If backrolling over spray-applied sections, use a short 1/4" (0.64 cm) nap, solvent resistant roller cover. Any
backrolling must immediately follow spraying, as this product dries quickly. It is helpful to keep the roller wet
with BROWNTONE CS 350 or Euco Solvent while rolling.
If applying BROWNTONE CS 350 by roller only, use a short 1/4" (0.64 cm) nap, solvent resistant roller cover.
Keep the roller wet and keep a wet edge while applying to avoid lap marks. Do not roll back and forth excessively,
as this will cause bubbling.
NOTE: BROWNTONE CS 350 dries very quickly (faster than standard solvent-based products). While spraying,
keep the sprayer tip down near the concrete within 8” (20 cm) of the surface. Use of this product in hot weather,
in direct sunlight, or in windy conditions can cause bubbling. The best time to apply this product is on a cool,
overcast day when the temperature is 50°F to 80°F (10°C to 27°C) and is not expected to rise above 85°F (29°C)
during application and drying time. Keep BROWNTONE CS 350 cool before applying.
Curing and Sealing: For the best cure of freshly placed concrete, apply BROWNTONE CS 350 as soon as possible
Removal: Dried product may be removed with strong solvents such as xylene, MEK or toluene. EUCO CLEAN
& STRIP is a citrus-based stripper that can also be used to remove this product. Alternately, BROWNTONE CS
350 can be removed by sandblasting or by other similar mechanical action.
Application of BROWNTONE CS 350 too heavily, in too many successive coats, or in multiple coats over time
can cause bubbling, whitening, peeling, and ultimate failure of the product. To prevent over-application, it is
good practice to measure the area to be sealed and the corresponding volume of product required based on the
coverage rate. Also, applying BROWNTONE CS 350 in hot weather or onto a hot surface can cause bubbling.
If BROWNTONE CS 350 is showing signs of over-application, scrub the surface with a solvent such as acetone*
or xylene*, using a stiff natural bristle brush. Keep the surface wet with the solvent while scrubbing, adding more
if necessary. The solvent will turn the sealer back into a liquid form, at which point excess material can be wiped
off with a lint-free mop or towel. Do not apply additional sealer. After removing the excess BROWNTONE CS
350, a roller can be used to redistribute the remaining product evenly across the surface, adding more solvent
as necessary to keep the sealer wet.
Clean-Up
Tools and equipment may be cleaned with EUCO SOLVENT, xylene or acetone. Run cleaning solvent through
spray equipment to remove residual materials and prevent clogging of nozzle in future use.
• BROWNTONE CS 350 is a Flammable Liquid. Use with adequate ventilation and keep away from heat,
sources of spark or ignition, and open flames. Block all HVAC ventilation ducts which may distribute solvent
odor. If solvent odor is objectionable, use of a water-based, low odor product may be preferred.
• Material will not freeze in storage but should be allowed to rise to 40oF (4oC) before application.
• Not resistant to gasoline or brake fluid.
• Excessive build-up of BROWNTONE CS 350 or puddling of the product during application can lead to bubbling
or whitening of the sealer and discoloration of the concrete.
Rev. 6.11
132
DIAMOND CLEAR
Non-yellowing Curing And Sealing Compound
Curing and Sealing

Description
DIAMOND CLEAR is an acrylic copolymer curing and sealing compound designed to provide a quality cure
and seal while assuring total resistance to yellowing from ultraviolet exposure. DIAMOND CLEAR is particularly
well suited for curing and sealing exterior architectural concrete where membrane yellowing is undesirable.
• Exterior or interior concrete surfaces • Parking garages
• Walls and columns • Dry shake hardened floors
Features/Benefits
• Seals all concrete surfaces providing a glossy appearance and easier clean-up
• Improves new concrete by promoting a proper cure and development of a strong surface
• Dustproofs concrete with a tough durable film
• Will not yellow under ultraviolet exposure
Drying Time* @ 73°F, 50% RH:.................... < 1 hour Alkali Resistance:
Foot Traffic:......................................... 4 to 6 hours Solvent Resistance:.................................. minimal
Wheel Traffic:..................................... 6 to10 hours Solids Content:................................................25%
VOC Content:............................................. 692 g/L Solids Content: (Diamond Clear 13% Canada Only).....13%
Adhesion to Concrete:.............................excellent Solids Content: (Diamond Clear 20% Canada Only).....20%
DIAMOND CLEAR
Moisture Loss: (ASTM C 156).............. < 0.40 kg/m2
Appearance : DIAMOND CLEAR is a clear liquid. After application and drying, DIAMOND CLEAR provides a
clear, glossy film. Follow recommended coverage rates for best performance and appearance.
Packaging
DIAMOND CLEAR is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
• ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class A & B • AASHTO Specification M 148, Type 1, Class A & B
• ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A • USDA compliant
Master Format #:
Coverage
03 39 23
Application ft2/gal (m2/L) First Coat Optional Second Coat

Curing and Sealing New Concrete 300 to 350 (7.4 to 8.6) 350 to 400 (8.6 to 9.8)
Sealing Old Concrete 350 to 400 (8.6 to 9.8) 350 to 400 (8.6 to 9.8)
Coverage will vary depending on surface porosity and texture. Avoid excessive build-up. For best protection
and appearance, the use of EVERCLEAR, EVERCLEAR 350, or EVERCLEAR VOX is recommended for use on
existing, already cured, or older concrete.

133
Directions for Use
other material that may prevent adhesion of the DIAMOND CLEAR.
Mixing: DIAMOND CLEAR requires no preblending and should be used directly from the container.
Application: For the best cure of freshly placed concrete, apply DIAMOND CLEAR as soon as possible after
finishing operations and/or immediately after the disappearance of the “sheen” of surface moisture. Apply at a
uniform coverage by spray or roller application. Product may be sprayed with a hand held “pump-up” sprayer
or with an airless industrial sprayer. If roller applied, use a short 3/8" (0.95 cm)nap solvent resistant sleeve. Keep
a wet edge while spraying and backroll over sprayer lap marks for best appearance.
Application of DIAMOND CLEAR too heavily, in too many successive coats, or in multiple coats over time can
coverage rate. Also, applying DIAMOND CLEAR in hot weather or onto a hot surface can cause bubbling. If
DIAMOND CLEAR is showing signs of over-application, scrub the surface with a solvent such as acetone* or
off with a lint-free mop or towel. Do not apply additional sealer. After removing the excess DIAMOND CLEAR,
Clean-Up
Tools and equipment may be cleaned with EUCO SOLVENT, xylene, xylol, or toluene. Run cleaning solvent
Removal
Dried, cured sealer may be removed with strong solvents such as xylene or acetone (always follow product
directions and warning labels). EUCO CLEAN & STRIP is a citrus-based stripper that can also be used to
remove this product. Alternately, the sealer can be removed by sandblasting or by other similar mechanical
action.
• Material will not freeze in storage but should be allowed to rise to 40°F (4°C) before application.
• Do not apply over bleed water or free standing water.
• Block all HVAC ventilation ducts which may distribute solvent odor.
• Use with adequate ventilation and keep away from open flames. If solvent odor is objectionable, use of a
water based, low odor product may be preferred.
• Do not apply over concrete to receive toppings. KUREZ RC or KUREZ DR VOX are recommended for these
applications.
• When applying DIAMOND CLEAR on concrete that is not freshly poured, this product may darken and highlight
imperfections in the concrete surface, resulting in a mottled appearance.
• When installing carpet, tile and floor covering adhesives, a test section is recommended to ensure good bond
between the adhesive and DIAMOND CLEAR.
• Various concrete finishing techniques may result in a surface with high or non-uniform porosity. Adjustment
in coverage rate or additional coats of DIAMOND CLEAR may be necessary to compensate for excessive
penetration of product.
• For sealing decorative concrete, the use of EVERCLEAR, EVERCLEAR TB, or EVERCLEAR VOX is suggested
for best appearance.
• Do not use as a bond breaker for tilt-up construction.
134
Diamond Clear350
Non-yellowing, Low VOC, Exempt Solvent Based Concrete Curing Compound And Cure & Seal
Curing and Sealing

Description
Diamond Clear 350 is a low VOC, non-yellowing concrete curing compound and cure & seal used to cure and
seal exterior concrete. Diamond Clear 350 is formulated with a unique exempt solvent blend that gives this
product all the performance benefits of traditional solvent based curing and sealing products while ensuring
compliance with VOC laws in regulated areas.
• Curing and sealing concrete surfaces
Features/Benefits
• Maintains adequate moisture in new concrete so that strength and durability properties can develop
• Slower drying than products based on acetone or tert-butyl acetate exempt solvents
• Low VOC content
The following results were developed under
laboratory conditions:
Drying time* @ 73°F (24°C), 50% RH:......... <1 hour Resistance to yellowing.........................excellent
Recoat..............................................2 to 24 hours Solids content................................................15%
Foot traffic..........................................2 to 4 hours Moisture loss ASTM C 156................. < 0.55 kg/m²
Wheel traffic.....................................6 to 10 hours
Diamond Clear 350

VOC content..............................................320 g/L *Low concrete or air temperatures and/or high relative
Flash Point............................................63°F (17°C) humidity will extend drying times. and appearance.
Appearance: Diamond Clear 350 is a clear liquid that after drying provides a clear, glossy film. Follow recommended
coverage rates for best performance.
Packaging
Diamond Clear 350 is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
Coverage

Application Optional
ft2/gal (m2/L) First Coat Second Coat Coverage will vary depending on surface porosity
Curing and Sealing 300 to 400 400 to 450 and texture. Thick applications or build-up of
New Concrete (7.4 to 9.8) (9.8 to 11.0) multiple coats can cause bubbling, whitening, and
Master Format #:
peeling.
Sealing 450 to 550 400 to 450
Older Concrete (11.0 to 13.5) (9.8 to 11.0)
03 39 23
• ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class A & B • Complies with Federal AIM Rule VOC regulations
• AASHTO Specification M 148, Type 1, Class A & B and with VOC standards in the OTC and LADCO
• USDA compliant states

135
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: The concrete surface must be clean and free of standing water. Remove any sealer or other
material that may prevent adhesion of the Diamond Clear 350. Mixing: Diamond Clear 350 requires no
preblending and should be used directly from the container.
Application: Apply at a uniform coverage with an industrial hand held pump-up sprayer equipped with a 1.0 gallon per
minute (3.8 L per minute) spray tip and neoprene fittings. Common garden-type sprayers should not be used. Keep
pressure in pump-up sprayers as high as possible to ensure a steady and even spray pattern. If backrolling over
spray-applied sections, use a short 1/4" (0.64 cm) nap, solvent resistant roller cover. Any backrolling must immediately
follow spraying, as this product dries quickly. It is helpful to keep the roller wet with Diamond Clear 350 or Euco
Solvent while rolling. If applying Diamond Clear 350 by roller only, use a short 1/4" (0.64 cm) nap, solvent resistant
roller cover. Keep the roller wet and keep a wet edge while applying to avoid lap marks. Do not roll back and forth
excessively, as this will cause bubbling.
The first coat of Diamond Clear 350 acts as a primer for the second coat. Allow the first coat to dry tack-free
before applying the second coat. Best performance and appearance is achieved with two THIN coats, following the
prescribed coverage rates.
NOTE: Diamond Clear 350 dries very quickly (faster than standard solvent-based products). While spraying, keep
the sprayer tip down near the concrete within 8” (20 cm) of the surface. Use of this product in hot weather, in direct
sunlight, or in windy conditions can cause bubbling. The best time to apply this product is on a cool, overcast day when
the temperature is 50°F to 80°F (10°C to 27°C) and is not expected to rise above 85°F (29°C) during application and drying
time. Keep Diamond Clear 350 cool before applying.
Curing and Sealing: For the best cure of freshly placed concrete, apply Diamond Clear 350 as soon as possible after
finishing operations and/or immediately after the disappearance of the “sheen” of surface moisture.
Removal: Dried product may be removed with strong solvents such as acetone or xylene. Euco Clean & Strip is a
citrus-based stripper that can also be used to remove this product. Alternately, Diamond Clear 350 can be removed
by sandblasting or by other similar mechanical action.
Application of Diamond Clear 350 too heavily, in too many successive coats, or in multiple coats over time can
cause bubbling, whitening, peeling, and ultimate failure of the product. To prevent over-application, it is good practice
to measure the area to be sealed and the corresponding volume of product required based on the coverage rate.
Also, applying Diamond Clear 350 in hot weather or onto a hot surface can cause bubbling. If Diamond Clear
350 is showing signs of over-application, scrub the surface with a solvent such as acetone* or xylene*, using a stiff
natural bristle brush. Keep the surface wet with the solvent while scrubbing, adding more if necessary. The solvent
will turn the sealer back into a liquid form, at which point excess material can be wiped off with a lint-free mop or towel.
Do not apply additional sealer. After removing the excess Diamond Clear 350, a roller can be used to redistribute
the remaining product evenly across the surface, adding more solvent as necessary to keep the sealer wet.
Clean-Up
Tools and equipment may be cleaned with Euco Solvent, xylene or acetone. Run cleaning solvent through
• Diamond Clear 350 is a Flammable Liquid. Use with adequate ventilation and keep away from heat, sources of
spark or ignition, and open flames. Block all HVAC ventilation ducts which may distribute solvent odor. If solvent
odor is objectionable, use of a water-based, low odor product may be preferred.
• Do not apply when concrete surfaces or ambient temperatures are below 40°F (4°C). Do not apply to hot surfaces, in
hot direct sun, or when the ambient temperature is above 85°F (29°C).
• Do not apply over bleed water or standing water.
• Do not apply over concrete to receive toppings. Kurez RC or Kurez DR VOX are recommended for these applications.
• Before installing carpet, tile and floor covering adhesives, a test section is recommended to ensure good bond
between the adhesive and Diamond Clear 350.
136
EVERCLEAR
Acrylic Cure & Seal For Decorative Concrete
Curing and Sealing

Description
EVERCLEAR is a pure acrylic concrete cure & seal that protects and enhances the appearance of cured
concrete with a clear, non-yellowing seal that is harder and more durable than standard cure and seal products.
EVERCLEAR is specially formulated to enhance the color of stamped concrete, exposed aggregate, and
colored concrete pavers, making these surfaces look deeper and richer in appearance. EVERCLEAR is also an
excellent product for residential concrete driveways, sidewalks, and patios. It provides protection against the
damaging effects of traffic, weather, and de-icing salts while allowing the concrete to “breathe”. EVERCLEAR
gives concrete a satin finish that highlights the color and texture of surfaces without excessive shine.
• Stamped concrete • Concrete pavers
• Terrazzo • Decorative concrete overlays
• Driveways and sidewalks • Acid-stained concrete
Features/Benefits
• Pure acrylic formulation ensures no yellowing and a more breathable seal
• Enhances the appearance of colored concrete
• Easy to apply
• Harder and more durable than standard polymer blend cure & seals
Drying time* at 73°F, 50% RH:.............. < 1 hour Alkali resistance
Recoat..............................................4 to 24 hours 48 hour exposure.....................................excellent
EVERCLEAR
Foot traffic..........................................4 to 6 hours Solvent resistance................................... minimal
Wheel traffic......................................6 to10 hours Resistance to yellowing
VOC content..............................................681 g/L from UV exposure...................................excellent
Adhesion to concrete.............................excellent Solids content............................................> 25%
Moisture loss (ASTM C 156).............. < 0.40 kg/m2
Appearance: EVERCLEAR will darken and highlight the color of concrete, masonry, pavers, etc., giving these
materials a “wet” look. Follow recommended coverage rates carefully for best appearance.
Packaging
EVERCLEAR is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums, 5 gal (18.9 L) pails and 4/1 gal (3.8 L) units per case.
Shelf Life
Master Format #:

03 39 23
• USDA compliant
Coverage
First coat:........................300 ft2/gallon (7.3 m²/L)
Second coat:...................400 ft2/gallon (9.8 m²/L)
Coverage will vary from the above rates depending on surface porosity and texture.

137
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: The concrete surface must be clean and free of puddled or standing water. Although
compatible with other Euclid Chemical solvent-based curing and sealing products, best results are obtained when
applying EVERCLEAR on bare, unsealed concrete. EVERCLEAR can not be applied over curing compounds.
When applying to new stamped concrete, the surface must be free of all release agent powder residue.
Application: Apply at a uniform coverage with an industrial hand held pump-up or airless sprayer, or by roller.
Common garden-type sprayers should not be used. If applying by roller, use a short 3/8” nap, solvent resistant
roller cover. The first coat of EVERCLEAR acts as a primer for the second coat. Allow the first coat to dry tack-
free before applying the second coat. Best performance and appearance is achieved with two coats, following
the prescribed coverage rates.
Application of EVERCLEAR too heavily, in too many successive coats, or in multiple coats over time can cause
bubbling, whitening, peeling, and ultimate failure of the product. To prevent over-application, it is good practice
to measure the area to be sealed and the corresponding volume of product required based on the coverage
rate. Also, applying EVERCLEAR in hot weather or onto a hot surface can cause bubbling. If EVERCLEAR is
showing signs of over-application, scrub the surface with a solvent such as acetone* or xylene*, using a stiff
natural bristle brush. Keep the surface wet with the solvent while scrubbing, adding more if necessary. The
solvent will turn the sealer back into a liquid form, at which point excess material can be wiped off with a lint-free
mop or towel. Do not apply additional sealer. After removing the excess EVERCLEAR, a roller can be used
to redistribute the remaining product evenly across the surface, adding more solvent as necessary to keep the
sealer wet.
Removal
Dried, cured EVERCLEAR may be removed with strong solvents such as acetone or xylene. (Always follow
package directions and warning labels). EUCO CLEAN & STRIP is a citrus based stripper than can also be
used to remove EVERCLEAR. Alternatively, the product can be removed by sandblasting or by other similar
mechanical action.
Clean-Up
Tools and equipment may be cleaned with EUCO SOLVENT, xylene, xylol or toluene. Run cleaning solvent
• EVERCLEAR will deepen the color of concrete. To seal concrete without a change in appearance, the use of
a penetrating sealer such as EUCO-GUARD 100 or any of the BARACADE sealers are recommended.
• Material will not freeze in storage but should be allowed to rise to 50°F (10°C) or more before use.
• Excessive build-up of EVERCLEAR or puddling of the product during application can lead to improper curing,
bubbling, and discoloration.
• Do not apply over curing compounds.
• Do not apply when concrete surfaces or ambient temperatures are below 40°F (4°C), or if rain is expected
within 12 hours after application. Application in hot direct sunlight or when concrete and/or air temperatures
are 95°F (35°C) and above can cause bubbling.
• Use with adequate ventilation. Block all HVAC ventilation ducts which may distribute solvent odor. Keep
away from open flames. If solvent odor is objectionable, the use of a water-based, low odor product may be
preferred.
• Before installing carpet, tile and floor covering adhesives, a test section is recommended to ensure compatibility.
• Not resistant to gasoline or other automotive fluids.
Rev. 6.11
138
EVERCLEAR350
Acrylic Curing Compound And Cure & Seal For Decorative Concrete
Curing and Sealing

Description
EverClear 350 is a pure acrylic curing compound and cure & seal that protects and enhances the appearance
of concrete with a clear, non-yellowing film that is more durable than standard polymer blend cure and seal
products. EverClear 350 is formulated in an exempt solvent carrier formulated for use in VOC-regulated areas.
EverClear 350 is designed to enhance the color of stamped concrete, exposed aggregate, and colored concrete
pavers, making these surfaces look deeper and richer in appearance. EverClear 350 is also an excellent product
for curing and sealing residential concrete driveways, sidewalks, and patios. It provides protection against the
damaging effects of traffic, weather, and de-icing salts while allowing the concrete to “breathe”. Applied properly,
EverClear 350 will not turn white in the presence of moisture. EverClear 350 gives concrete a satin finish that
highlights the color and texture of surfaces without excessive shine or slipperiness.
• Stamped, colored concrete • Acid-stained concrete
• Terrazzo • Concrete pavers
• Driveways and sidewalks • Decorative concrete overlays
Features/Benefits
• Ensures proper curing of new concrete
• Pure acrylic polymer ensures no yellowing and a more breathable seal
• Enhances the appearance of colored concrete
• Harder and more durable than standard cure & seals
• Slower drying than products based on acetone or tert-butyl acetate exempt solvents
EVERCLEAR350
The following results were developed under laboratory conditions of 73°F (23°C), 50% RH.
Dry to touch........................................ 20 minutes Alkali resistance,
Foot traffic...................................................1 hour Solvent resistance................................... minimal
Wheel traffic...................................10 to 12 hours Resistance to yellowing
Flash point (tag closed cup)............ 63°F (17°C) Solids content............................................> 25%
Adhesion to concrete..............................excellent Moisture loss (ASTM C 156)...................< 0.40 kg/m2
Packaging
EVERCLEAR 350 is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums, 5 gal (18.9 L) pails and 4/1 gal (3.8 L) units per case.
Shelf Life
Master Format #:
03 39 23
• USDA compliant • ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A • ASTM C 309 Type 1, Class A & B
Coverage
First Coat:.300 ft2/gallon (7.4 m²/L) Second Coat: 400 ft2/gallon (9.8 m²/L)
Coverage will vary from the above rates depending on surface porosity and texture. NOTE: THICK APPLICATIONS or
build-up of multiple coats WILL LEAD TO DISCOLORATION, whitening, BUBBLING, AND POOR PRODUCT PERFORMANCE.

139
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: The concrete surface must be clean and free of puddled or standing water. Although EverClear
350 can be applied on concrete that has been previously cured and/or sealed with other Euclid Chemical solvent-based
curing and sealing products, best results are obtained when applying EverClear 350 on clean, bare concrete. EverClear
350 can not be applied over curing compounds. When applying to new stamped concrete, the surface must be free
of all unbonded release agent powder or liquid residue. Application: Apply at a uniform coverage with an industrial
hand held pump-up sprayer equipped with a 0.5 gal per minute (1.9 L per minute) spray tip and neoprene fittings.
Common garden-type sprayers should not be used. If backrolling over spray-applied sections, use a short 1/4" (0.65
cm) nap, solvent resistant roller cover. Any backrolling must immediately follow spraying, as this product dries quickly.
It is helpful to keep the roller wet with EverClear 350 or Euco Solvent while rolling. If applying EverClear 350 by
roller only, use a short 1/4” (0.64 cm) nap, solvent resistant roller cover. Keep the roller wet and keep a wet edge while applying to
avoid lap marks. Do not roll back and forth excessively, as this will cause bubbling. The first coat of EverClear 350 acts as
a primer for the second coat. Allow the first coat to dry tack-free before applying the second coat. Best performance
and appearance is achieved with two THIN coats, following the prescribed coverage rates.
NOTE: EverClear 350 dries quickly. While spraying, keep the sprayer tip down near the concrete surface (within
8 in/20 cm of the surface). Use of this product in hot weather, in direct sunlight, or in windy conditions can cause
bubbling. The best time to apply this product is on a cool, overcast day when the temperature is 50°F to 80°F (10°F to
27°C) and is not expected to rise above 85°F (29°C) during application and drying time. Application of EverClear
350 too heavily, in too many successive coats, or in multiple coats over time can cause bubbling, whitening, peeling,
and ultimate failure of the product. To prevent over-application, it is good practice to measure the area to be sealed
and the corresponding volume of product required based on the coverage rate. Also, applying EverClear 350 in
hot weather or onto a hot surface can cause bubbling. If EverClear 350 is showing signs of over-application, scrub
the surface with a solvent such as acetone* or xylene*, using a stiff natural bristle brush. Keep the surface wet with
the solvent while scrubbing, adding more if necessary. The solvent will turn the sealer back into a liquid form, at which
point excess material can be wiped off with a lint-free mop or towel. Do not apply additional sealer. After removing the
excess EverClear 350, a roller can be used to redistribute the remaining product evenly across the surface, adding
more solvent as necessary to keep the sealer wet.
Removal
Dried, cured EverClear 350 can be removed with strong solvents such as xylene or acetone. (Always follow solvent
package directions and warning labels). EUCO CLEAN & STRIP is a citrus-based stripper that can also be used to
remove EverClear 350. Alternatively, the product can be removed by sandblasting or by other similar mechanical
action.
Clean-Up
Tools and equipment may be cleaned with EUCO SOLVENT, xylene, or acetone. Run cleaning solvent through spray
equipment to remove residual materials and prevent clogging of nozzle in future use.
• EverClear 350 is a Flammable Liquid. Use with adequate ventilation and keep away from heat, sources of spark
or ignition, and open flames. Block all HVAC ventilation ducts which may distribute solvent odor. If solvent odor is
objectionable, use of a water-based, low odor product such as EverClear VOX may be preferred.
• EverClear 350 will darken the color of concrete, masonry, pavers, etc., giving these surfaces a “wet” look. To seal
concrete with no change in appearance, the use of a penetrating sealer such as CHEMSTOP WB is recommended.
• This product will not freeze but must be allowed to rise to 60°F (16°C) before using.
• Do not apply if rain is expected within 12 hours of application.
• Not resistant to gasoline or other automotive fluids. May show tire marks and stains.
• Always use with adequate ventilation and keep away from sparks and open flame. If used on interior concrete,
ensure adequate ventilation and block all HVAC ventilation ducts which may distribute solvent odor. Use respirators
in confined areas.
140
LUSTERSEAL350
Clear Non-Yellowing Concrete Curing Compound and Cure and Seal
Curing and Sealing

Description
Lusterseal 350 is a low viscosity, exempt solvent based, curing compound and cure and seal for concrete.
Lusterseal 350 is a proprietary formulation of methyl methacrylate copolymer resin in an exempt solvent
blend. Lusterseal 350 Brown contains a brown pigment that highlights the appearance of exposed
aggregate concrete. Lusterseal 350 and Lusterseal 350 Brown are formulated with exempt solvents
that are compliant with VOC regulations in the OTC and LADCO regulated regions.
• Driveways • Warehouse floors • Showrooms
• Patios • Stamped concrete • Exposed aggregate
• Pavers • Garages • Decorative concrete
Features/Benefits
• Dustproofs, protects, decorates • OTC & LADCO compliant
• Provides glossy, “wet” look • Slower drying than products based on acetone
or tert-butyl acetate exempt solvents
The following results were developed under laboratory conditions of 73°F (23°C), 50% RH.
Dry to touch........................................ 20 minutes Alkali resistance,
Foot traffic...................................................1 hour Solvent resistance................................... minimal
Wheel traffic...................................10 to 12 hours Resistance to yellowing
Lusterseal350
Flash point (tag closed cup)............ 63°F (17°C) Solids content............................................> 25%
Adhesion to concrete..............................excellent Moisture loss (ASTM C 156)...................< 0.40 kg/m2
Packaging
Lusterseal 350 is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums, 5 gal (18.9 L) pails, and 4/1 gal (3.8 L) units per case.
Lusterseal 350 Brown is packaged in 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
Coverage

First Coat: 300 ft2/gallon (7.4 m²/L) Second Coat: 400 ft2 /gallon (9.8 m²/L)
Coverage will vary from the above rates depending on surface porosity and texture. NOTE: THICK APPLICATIONS or
build-up of multiple coats WILL LEAD TO DISCOLORATION, HAZING, WHITENING, BUBBLING, AND POOR PRODUCT
Master Format #:
PERFORMANCE.
03 39 23
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: The concrete surface must be clean and free of puddled or standing water. Although
Lusterseal 350 can be applied on concrete that has been previously cured and/or sealed with other Euclid
Chemical solvent-based curing and sealing products, best results are obtained when applying Lusterseal
350 on clean, bare concrete. Lusterseal 350 can not be applied over curing compounds. When applying to
new stamped concrete, the surface must be free of all unbonded release agent powder or liquid residue.

141
Mixing: Lusterseal 350 clear does not require mixing. Gently stir Lusterseal 350 BROWN for one minute
to re-distribute pigment before use. Do not thin or dilute.
gal per minute (1.9 L per minute) spray tip and neoprene fittings. Common garden-type sprayers should not be
used. If backrolling over spray-applied sections, use a short 1/4” (0.64 cm) nap, solvent resistant roller cover.
Any backrolling must immediately follow spraying, as this product dries quickly. It is helpful to keep the roller
wet with Lusterseal 350 or Euco Solvent while rolling. If applying Lusterseal 350 by roller only, use a
short 1/4” (o.64 cm) nap, solvent resistant roller cover. Keep the roller wet and keep a wet edge while applying
to avoid lap marks. Do not roll back and forth excessively, as this will cause bubbling. Allow the first coat to dry
tack-free before applying the second coat. Best performance and appearance is achieved with two THIN coats,
following the prescribed coverage rates.
NOTE: Lusterseal 350 dries very quickly (faster than standard solvent-based products). While spraying,
keep the sprayer tip down near the concrete surface (within 8” (20 cm) of the surface). Use of this product in hot
weather, in direct sunlight, or in windy conditions can cause bubbling. The best time to apply this product is on
a cool, overcast day when the temperature is 50°F to 80°F (10°F to 27°C) and is not expected to rise above 85°F
(29°C) during application and drying time.
NOTE: Lusterseal 350 dries quickly. While spraying, keep the sprayer tip down near the concrete surface (within
8 in/20 cm of the surface). Use of this product in hot weather, in direct sunlight, or in windy conditions can cause
bubbling. The best time to apply this product is on a cool, overcast day when the temperature is 50°F to 80°F (10°F to
27°C) and is not expected to rise above 85°F (29°C) during application and drying time. Application of Lusterseal
350 too heavily, in too many successive coats, or in multiple coats over time can cause bubbling, whitening, peeling,
and ultimate failure of the product. To prevent over-application, it is good practice to measure the area to be sealed
and the corresponding volume of product required based on the coverage rate. Also, applying Lusterseal 350
in hot weather or onto a hot surface can cause bubbling. If Lusterseal 350 is showing signs of over-application,
scrub the surface with a solvent such as acetone* or xylene*, using a stiff natural bristle brush. Keep the surface wet
with the solvent while scrubbing, adding more if necessary. The solvent will turn the sealer back into a liquid form,
at which point excess material can be wiped off with a lint-free mop or towel. Do not apply additional sealer. After
removing the excess Lusterseal 350, a roller can be used to redistribute the remaining product evenly across the
surface, adding more solvent as necessary to keep the sealer wet.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with acetone or xylene immediately following use. Clean drips and over spray with
solvent while still wet. If not cleaned immediately, the sealer may leave a residue on painted surfaces, glass or
wood.
• Lusterseal 350 is a Flammable Liquid. Use with adequate ventilation and keep away from heat, sources
of spark or ignition, and open flames. Block all HVAC ventilation ducts which may distribute solvent odor.
If solvent odor is objectionable, use of a water-based, low odor product such as EverClear VOX may be
preferred.
• Lusterseal 350 will darken the color of concrete, masonry, pavers, etc., giving these surfaces a “wet” look.
To seal concrete with no change in appearance, the use of a penetrating sealer such as CHEMSTOP WB is
recommended.
• Heavy application of Lusterseal 350 or multiple coats can lead to improper drying, bubbling, and discoloration
of the concrete. Follow coverage rates carefully.
• Do not apply if rain is expected before Lusterseal 350 is dried and cured.
ensure adequate ventilation and block all HVAC ventilation ducts which may distribute solvent odor. Use
respirators in confined areas.
• Although compatible with many carpet, tile and floor covering adhesives, a test section is recommended to
ensure compatibility.
142
REZ-SEAL
Solvent-Based Curing And Sealing Compound
Curing and Sealing

Description
REZ-SEAL is an acrylic polymer curing and sealing compound that cures and seals new concrete, providing for
proper cement hydration and development of strength and durability.
• Industrial floor slabs • Walls and columns
• Parking garages • Dry shake floors
• Exterior pavements • Concrete toppings
Features/Benefits
• Provides a transparent curing film for new concrete
• Seals new concrete surfaces providing a glossy appearance
• Helps strengthen new concrete by promoting proper cement hydration
Drying time* @ 73°F, 50% RH:.................. < 1 hour Alkali resistance:
Recoat................................................. 2 to 24 hours 48 hour exposure........................................ excellent
Foot traffic:............................................ 2 to 4 hours Solvent resistance:......................................minimal
Wheel traffic:....................................... 6 to 10 hours Resistance to discoloration:...................moderate
VOC content:................................................ 666 g/L Solids content:.............................................. > 25%
REZ-SEAL
Adhesion to concrete:...............................excellent Moisture loss (ASTM C 156).................. < 0.40 kg/m2
Appearance: REZ-SEAL is a clear liquid. After application and drying, REZ-SEAL offers a clear, slightly glossy
film. The product may yellow if exposed to sunlight or interior UV light. REZ-SEAL will darken concrete,
masonry, pavers, etc., giving these materials a “wet” look. Follow recommended coverage rates carefully for
best appearance.
Packaging
REZ-SEAL is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
• ASTM C 309, Types 1, Class A & B • AASHTO Specification M 148, Type 1, Class A & B
Master Format #:
• ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class C • USDA compliant

03 39 23
Coverage
Application: ft2/gal (m2/L) First Coat Optional Second Coat
Curing and sealing new concrete 300 to 350 (7.4 to 8.6) 350 to 400 (8.6 to 9.8)
Use on existing, cured concrete 350 to 400 (8.6 to 9.8) 350 to 400 (8.6 to 9.8)
Coverage will vary from the above rates depending on surface porosity and texture. Avoid excessive build-up.

143
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: The concrete surface must be clean and free of standing water. Remove any material that
may prevent adhesion of the REZ-SEAL.
Mixing: REZ-SEAL requires no preblending and should be used directly from the container. Application: Apply
at a uniform coverage by spray or roller application. Product may be sprayed with a hand held “pump-up”
sprayer or with an airless industrial sprayer. If roller applied, use a short 3/8" (0.95 cm) nap, solvent resistant
sleeve. Keep a wet edge while spraying and backroll over sprayer lap marks for best appearance.
Curing and Sealing: For the best cure of freshly placed concrete, apply REZ-SEAL as soon as possible after
finishing operations and/or immediately after the disappearance of the bleed water.
Application of REZ-SEAL too heavily, in too many successive coats, or in multiple coats over time can cause bubbling,
whitening, peeling, and ultimate failure of the product. To prevent over-application, it is good practice to measure the
area to be sealed and the corresponding volume of product required based on the coverage rate. Also, applying
REZ-SEAL in hot weather or onto a hot surface can cause bubbling. If REZ-SEAL is showing signs of over-application,
scrub the surface with a solvent such as acetone* or xylene*, using a stiff natural bristle brush. Keep the surface wet
with the solvent while scrubbing, adding more if necessary. The solvent will turn the sealer back into a liquid form,
at which point excess material can be wiped off with a lint-free mop or towel. Do not apply additional sealer. After
removing the excess REZ-SEAL, a roller can be used to redistribute the remaining product evenly across the surface,
adding more solvent as necessary to keep the sealer wet.
Clean-Up
Tools and equipment may be cleaned with acetone or xylene.
Removal
Dried, cured REZ-SEAL may be removed with strong solvents such as acetone or xylene. Also acceptable
are commercial paint strippers. (Always heed directions and warning labels.) EUCO CLEAN & STRIP is a
citrus based stripper that can also be used to remove REZ-SEAL. Alternatively, the sealer can be removed by
sandblasting or by other similar mechanical action.
• Material will not freeze in storage but should be allowed to rise to 50oF (10oC) or more before use.
• Do not apply when concrete surfaces or ambient temperatures are below 40oF (4oC). Application in hot direct
sunlight or when the concrete or air temperature is above 90°F (32°C) can cause bubbling.
water-based, low odor product may be preferred.
• Do not apply over concrete that will receive toppings, epoxy or urethane based coatings or epoxy adhesives,
use of KUREZ RC or KUREZ DR VOX are recommended for these applications.
• If applying to existing or already cured concrete or masonry, REZ-SEAL will darken the surface and highlight
any imperfections, resulting in a mottled appearance.
• When installing carpet, tile and floor covering adhesives, a test section is recommended to ensure good bond
between the adhesive and the REZ-SEAL.
• Various concrete finishing techniques may result in a surface with high or non-uniform porosity. Adjustment
in coverage rate or additional coats of REZ-SEAL may be necessary to compensate for excessive penetration
of product.
• For decorative concrete, the use of EVERCLEAR, EVERCLEAR TB, or EVERCLEAR VOX is suggested for best
appearance. Apply two thin coats rather than one heavy application for a high gloss finish.
Rev. 6.11
144
REZ-SEAL AC-UV
Non-Yellowing, Low VOC, Concrete Curing Compound And Cure & Seal
Curing and Sealing

Description
REZ-SEAL AC-UV is a non-yellowing acrylic polymer blend curing compound and cure & seal that when applied
to fresh concrete, ensures proper cement hydration and strength gain as well as protection from weathering
and abrasion. REZ-SEAL AC-UV is formulated with a unique solvent system that gives this product all the
performance benefits of traditional solvent based curing and sealing products while ensuring compliance with
VOC regulations in strictly regulated areas of the U.S. and Canada.
• Curing and sealing exterior concrete pavement and slabs
Features/Benefits
• Provides a transparent curing film for new concrete
• Seals concrete surfaces
• Helps strengthen new concrete by promoting proper cement hydration and development of properties
The following results were developed under Solids Content...........................................> 25%
laboratory conditions. Moisture Retention......................... < 0.40 kg/m²
Drying Time* at 73°F (24°C), 50% RH:.< 1 hour *Low concrete or air temperature and/or high
Recoat:.............................................2 to 24 hours relative humidity will extend drying times.
Foot Traffic:........................................2 to 4 hours
Wheel Traffic:...................................6 to 10 hours Appearance
VOC Content:............................................316 g/L REZ-SEAL AC-UV is a clear liquid that provides a
REZ-SEAL AC-UV
Adhesion to Concrete:...........................excellent clear, medium gloss film. Follow recommended
Adhesion of Asphalt Tile:........................ passes coverage rates carefully for best appearance.
Alkali Resistance:
48 hour exposure:....................................excellent
Solvent Resistance:................................ minimal
Packaging
REZ-SEAL AC-UV is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
3 years in unopened package.
Coverage

Curing and Sealing New Concrete: 300 to 350 ft2/gal (7.4 to 8.6 m2/L)
Coverage will vary from the above rates depending on surface porosity and texture. Avoid excessive build-up.
Master Format #:
03 39 23
• ASTM C 309, Types 1, Class A & B • Complies with Federal AIM Rule VOC regulations and
• ASTM C 1315*, Type 1, Class A with VOC standards in Canada, OTC, and LADCO
• AASHTO Specification M 148, Type 1, Class A & B regions
• USDA compliant *Does not meet flash point requirement of C 1315

145
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: The concrete surface must be clean and dry.
Mixing: REZ-SEAL AC-UV requires no preblending and should be used directly from the container. Do not thin or dilute.
gallon per min (1.9 L per min) spray tip and neoprene fittings. Common garden-type sprayers should not be
used. Keep pressure in pump-up sprayers as high as possible to ensure a steady and even spray pattern.
Application of REZ-SEAL AC-UV too heavily, in too many successive coats, or in multiple coats over time can
coverage rate. Also, applying REZ-SEAL AC-UV in hot weather or onto a hot surface can cause bubbling. If
REZ-SEAL AC-UV is showing signs of over-application, scrub the surface with a solvent such as acetone* or
off with a lint-free mop or towel. Do not apply additional sealer. After removing the excess REZ-SEAL AC-UV,
NOTE: REZ-SEAL AC-UV dries very quickly (faster than standard solvent-based products). While spraying,
keep the sprayer tip down near the concrete surface (within 8 inches (20 cm) of the surface). Use of this product
in hot weather, in direct sunlight, or in windy conditions can cause bubbling.
Curing and Sealing: For the best cure of freshly placed concrete, apply REZ-SEAL AC-UV as soon as possible
Product Removal: Dried, cured sealer may be removed with strong solvents such as acetone or xylene. Also
acceptable are commercial paint strippers. (Always heed directions and warning labels.) EUCO CLEAN &
STRIP is a citrus based stripper that can also be used to remove REZ-SEAL AC-UV. Alternatively, the product
can be removed by sandblasting or by other similar mechanical action.
Clean-Up
Tools and equipment may be cleaned with acetone or xylene.
• REZ-SEAL AC-UV is a Flammable Liquid. Use with adequate ventilation and keep away from heat, sources of
spark or ignition, and open flames. Block all HVAC ventilation ducts which may distribute solvent odor. If solvent
odor is objectionable, use of a water-based, low odor product, such as AQUA-CURE VOX, may be preferred.
• Do not apply when concrete surfaces or ambient temperatures are below 40oF (4oC). Application in hot direct
sunlight or when the concrete or air temperature is above 85°F (29°C) can cause bubbling.
• Do not apply over concrete that will receive toppings, epoxy or urethane based coatings or epoxy adhesives.
Use of a dissipating cuirng compound such as KUREZ DR VOX is recommended for these applications.
• Do not use in areas subjected to hot grease or oils.
Rev. 6.11
146
SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR
High Solids, Non-yellowing Curing And Sealing Compound
Curing and Sealing

Description
SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR is a solvent based curing and sealing compound specially designed to cure new
concrete, assuring proper cement hydration and strength gain, while providing a non-yellowing seal to protect
and enhance the appearance of concrete. SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR is particularly suited for curing and sealing
exterior architectural concrete where membrane yellowing is undesirable.
• Driveways & exterior pavements • Dry shake floors
• Walls and columns • Curing and sealing decorative concrete
• Exposed aggregate
Features/Benefits
• Helps promote development of concrete strength and durability through proper curing
• Enhances color and provides gloss to the surface
Drying time* @ 73°F, 50% RH....................<1 hour Adhesion of asphalt tile.............................. passes
Recoat.................................................2 to 24 hours Alkali resistance
Foot traffic.............................................2 to 4 hours 48 hour exposure........................................excellent
SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR

Wheel traffic........................................6 to 10 hours Solvent resistance...................................... minimal
Salt spray 500 hours exposure....................... good Resistance to yellowing............................excellent
VOC content.................................................650 g/L Solids content............................................... > 25%
Adhesion to concrete................................excellent Moisture loss (ASTM C 156)..................< 0.40 kg/m2
* Low concrete or air temperature and/or high relative humidity will extend drying time.
Appearance: SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR is a water clear liquid. After application and drying, SUPER DIAMOND
CLEAR offers a clear, glossy film. SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR will darken concrete, masonry, pavers, etc., giving
these materials a “wet” look. Follow recommended coverage rates carefully for best appearance.
Packaging
SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums, 5 gal (18.9 L) pails and 4/1 gal (3.8 L) units per case.
Shelf Life
• ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class A & B • AASHTO Specification M 148, Type 1, Class A & B
Master Format #:

03 39 23
Coverage
Application ft2/gal (m2/L) First Coat Optional Second Coat
Sealing Cured Concrete 400 to 450 (9.8 to 11.0) 450 to 550 (11.0 to 13.5)
Coverage will vary from the above rates depending on surface porosity and texture. AVOID EXCESSIVE BUILD-
UP. HEAVY APPLICATIONS WILL LEAD TO BUBBLING, WHITENING, AND POOR PRODUCT PERFORMANCE.

147
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: The concrete surface must be clean and free of standing water. Remove any curing
compounds, sealers, or other material that may prevent adhesion of the SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR.
Mixing: SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR requires no preblending and should be used directly from the container.
Application: Apply at a uniform coverage by spray or roller. Product must be sprayed with a high pressure
pump-up sprayer equipped with a high solids nozzle, or with an airless industrial sprayer. If roller applied, use
a short napped, solvent resistant sleeve. Keep a wet edge while spraying and backroll over sprayer lap marks
for best appearance.
Curing and Sealing: For the best cure of freshly placed concrete, apply SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR as soon as
possible after finishing operations and/or immediately after the disappearance of the “sheen” of surface moisture. If
sealing cured concrete, the surface must be thoroughly clean and dry. Pressure washing with a strong alkaline
detergent to remove dirt, waxes, and oil is suggested. Acids will not sufficiently clean or remove dirt, curing
compounds, or old sealer from concrete. NOTE: When sealing decorative concrete, the use of EVERCLEAR,
EVERCLEAR 350, or EVERCLEAR VOX is recommended for best performance and appearance.
Application of SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR too heavily, in too many successive coats, or in multiple coats over
time can cause bubbling, whitening, peeling, and ultimate failure of the product. To prevent over-application,
it is good practice to measure the area to be sealed and the corresponding volume of product required based
on the coverage rate. Also, applying SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR in hot weather or onto a hot surface can cause
bubbling. If SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR is showing signs of over-application, scrub the surface with a solvent such
as acetone* or xylene*, using a stiff natural bristle brush. Keep the surface wet with the solvent while scrubbing,
adding more if necessary. The solvent will turn the sealer back into a liquid form, at which point excess material
can be wiped off with a lint-free mop or towel. Do not apply additional sealer. After removing the excess SUPER
DIAMOND CLEAR, a roller can be used to redistribute the remaining product evenly across the surface, adding
more solvent as necessary to keep the sealer wet.
Clean-Up
Tools and equipment may be cleaned with acetone or xylene before the product dries.
Removal
Dried, cured sealer may be removed with strong solvents such as xylene or acetone. Also acceptable is EUCO
CLEAN & STRIP or commercial paint strippers (always heed directions and warning labels). Alternatively,
SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR can be removed by sandblasting or by other similar mechanical action.
• Material will not freeze in storage but should be allowed to rise to 50°F (10°C) before use.
• Do not apply when concrete surfaces or ambient temperatures are below 40oF (4°C). Application in hot direct
sunlight, or when the concrete and/or air temperature is 90°F (32°C) and rising, may cause bubbling.
• Use with adequate ventilation and keep away from open flames. Block all HVAC ventilation ducts which
may distribute solvent odor. If solvent odor is objectionable, use of a water based, low odor product may be
preferred.
• For a high gloss finish, two THIN coats of SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR is suggested rather than one heavy
application.
• Do not apply over concrete to receive toppings, epoxy or urethane-based coatings or adhesives. KUREZ RC
or KUREZ DR VOX are recommended to cure concrete for these applications.
Rev. 6.11
148
Non-yellowing, Low VOC, Exempt Solvent Based Concrete Curing Compound And Cure & Seal
Curing and Sealing

Description
Super Diamond Clear 350 is a state-of-the-art concrete curing compound and cure & seal specially designed
with a high solids formulation to provide the most efficient moisture retention for proper cement hydration
and strength gain as well as protection from liquids, weathering and abrasion. Super Diamond Clear
350 is particularly well suited for exterior architectural concrete where membrane yellowing is undesirable.
Super Diamond Clear 350 is formulated with a unique exempt solvent blend that gives this product all the
performance benefits of traditional solvent based curing and sealing products while ensuring compliance with
VOC laws in regulated areas.
• Curing and sealing architectural concrete
Features/Benefits
• Enhances color and gives a glossy appearance
• Improves new concrete by providing proper curing
• Slower drying than acetone and tert-butyl acetate based products
laboratory conditions: Flash point..........................................63°F (17°C)
Drying time* @ 73°F (24°C), 50% RH:......... <1 hour Alkali resistance
Recoat..............................................2 to 24 hours 48 hour exposure.................................... excellent

Wheel traffic.....................................6 to 10 hours Resistance to yellowing.........................excellent
VOC content..........................................< 350 g/L Solids content............................................> 25%
Appearance: Super Diamond Clear 350 is a clear liquid Moisture loss ASTM C 156................. < 0.40 kg/m²
that after drying provides a clear, glossy film. Follow *Low concrete or air temperatures and/or high relative
recommended coverage rates for best performance. humidity will extend drying times.
Packaging
Super Diamond Clear 350 is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
Coverage

Application ft2/gal (m2/L)
Optional
First Coat Second Coat Coverage will vary depending on surface porosity
Curing and Sealing 300 to 400 400 to 450 and texture. NOTE: THICK APPLICATIONS or build-
New Concrete (7.4 to 9.8) (9.8 to 11.0) up of multiple coats WILL LEAD TO DISCOLORATION,

Master Format #:
whitening, BUBBLING, AND POOR PRODUCT

Sealing 450 to 550 400 to 450
PERFORMANCE.
Older Concrete (11.0 to 13.5) (9.8 to 11.0)
03 39 23
• ASTM C 1315*, Type 1, Class A with VOC standards in the OTC and LADCO regions
• AASHTO Specification M 148, Type 1, Class A & B *Does not meet flash point requirement
• USDA compliant

149
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: The concrete surface must be clean and free of standing water. Curing and Sealing: For the
best cure of freshly placed concrete, apply Super Diamond Clear 350 as soon as possible after finishing operations
and/or immediately after the disappearance of the “sheen” of surface moisture.
follow spraying, as this product dries quickly. It is helpful to keep the roller wet with SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR 350 or
Euco Solvent while rolling. If applying v by roller only, use a short 1/4" (0.64 cm) nap, solvent resistant roller cover.
Keep the roller wet and keep a wet edge while applying to avoid lap marks. Do not roll back and forth excessively, as
this will cause bubbling. The first coat of SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR 350 acts as a primer for the second coat. Allow
the first coat to dry tack-free before applying the second coat. Best performance and appearance is achieved with two
THIN coats, following the prescribed coverage rates.
NOTE: SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR 350 dries very quickly (faster than standard solvent-based products). While spraying,
keep the sprayer tip down near the concrete within 8” (20 cm) of the surface. Use of this product in hot weather, in
direct sunlight, or in windy conditions can cause bubbling. The best time to apply this product is on a cool, overcast day
when the temperature is 50°F to 80°F (10°C to 27°C) and is not expected to rise above 85°F (29°C) during application and
drying time. Keep Super Diamond Clear 350 cool before applying.
Application of SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR 350 too heavily, in too many successive coats, or in multiple coats over time
can cause bubbling, whitening, peeling, and ultimate failure of the product. To prevent over-application, it is good
practice to measure the area to be sealed and the corresponding volume of product required based on the coverage
rate. Also, applying SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR 350 in hot weather or onto a hot surface can cause bubbling. If
SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR 350 is showing signs of over-application, scrub the surface with a solvent such as acetone*
or xylene*, using a stiff natural bristle brush. Keep the surface wet with the solvent while scrubbing, adding more if
necessary. The solvent will turn the sealer back into a liquid form, at which point excess material can be wiped off with
a lint-free mop or towel. Do not apply additional sealer. After removing the excess SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR 350, a
roller can be used to redistribute the remaining product evenly across the surface, adding more solvent as necessary
to keep the sealer wet.
Removal
Dried, cured SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR 350 can be removed with strong solvents such as xylene or acetone or EUCO
CLEAN & STRIP. (Always follow solvent package directions and warning labels). Alternatively, the product can be
removed by sandblasting or by other similar mechanical action.
Clean-Up
Tools and equipment may be cleaned with EUCO SOLVENT, xylene or acetone.
• Super Diamond Clear 350 is a Flammable Liquid. Use with adequate ventilation and keep away from heat,
sources of spark or ignition, and open flames. Block all HVAC ventilation ducts which may distribute solvent odor.
If solvent odor is objectionable, use of a water-based, low odor product may be preferred.
• Super Diamond Clear 350 will darken the color of concrete, masonry, pavers, etc., giving these surfaces a “wet”
look. To seal concrete with no change in appearance, the use of a penetrating sealer such as CHEMSTOP WB is
recommended.
ensure adequate ventilation and block all HVAC ventilation ducts which may distribute solvent odor. Use respirators
in confined areas.
150
SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR AC
Non-yellowing, Low VOC, Acetone Based Concrete Curing Compound And Cure & Seal
Curing and Sealing

Description
SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR AC is a state-of-the-art concrete curing compound and cure & seal specially designed
with a high solids formulation to provide the most efficient moisture retention for proper cement hydration and
strength gain as well as protection from liquids, weathering and abrasion. SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR AC is
particularly well suited for exterior architectural concrete where membrane yellowing is undesirable. SUPER
DIAMOND CLEAR AC is formulated with a unique solvent blend that gives this product all the performance
benefits of traditional solvent based curing and sealing products while ensuring compliance with VOC regulations
where acetone is an exempt solvent.
• Curing and sealing architectural concrete
Features/Benefits
• Enhances color and gives a glossy appearance
• Improves new concrete by providing proper curing
laboratory conditions: Alkali resistance
Drying time @ 73°F (24°C), 50% RH:.......... <1 hour 48 hour exposure.................................... excellent
Recoat..............................................2 to 24 hours Solvent resistance................................... minimal
SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR AC

Foot traffic..........................................2 to 4 hours Resistance to yellowing.........................excellent
Wheel traffic.....................................6 to 10 hours Solids content............................................> 25%
VOC content..............................................337 g/L Moisture loss ASTM C 156................. < 0.40 kg/m²
Appearance: SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR AC is a clear
liquid that after drying provides a clear, glossy film. Follow Low concrete or air temperatures and/or high relative
recommended coverage rates for best performance. humidity will extend drying time.
Packaging
SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR AC is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
Coverage
ft2/gal (m2/L)
Optional
Application First Coat Second Coat Coverage will vary depending on surface porosity
Curing and Sealing 300 to 400 400 to 450
and texture. NOTE: THICK APPLICATIONS or build-
New Concrete (7.4 to 9.8) (9.8 to 11.0)
up of multiple coats WILL LEAD TO DISCOLORATION,
Master Format #:
Sealing 450 to 550 400 to 450 whitening, BUBBLING, AND POOR PRODUCT
Older Concrete (11.0 to 13.5) (9.8 to 11.0) PERFORMANCE.
03 39 23
• ASTM C 1315*, Type 1, Class A with VOC standards in Canada, OTC, and LADCO
• AASHTO Specification M 148, Type 1, Class A & B regions
• USDA compliant *Does not meet flash point requirement

151
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: The concrete surface must be clean and free of standing water. Remove any sealer or other
material that may prevent adhesion of the SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR AC. Curing and Sealing: For the best cure
of freshly placed concrete, apply SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR AC as soon as possible after finishing operations and/or
immediately after the disappearance of the “sheen” of surface moisture.
follow spraying, as this product dries quickly. It is helpful to keep the roller wet with SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR AC
or Euco Solvent while rolling. If applying SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR AC by roller only, use a short 1/4" (0.64 cm)
nap, solvent resistant roller cover. Keep the roller wet and keep a wet edge while applying to avoid lap marks. Do not
roll back and forth excessively, as this will cause bubbling. The first coat of SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR AC acts as a
primer for the second coat. Allow the first coat to dry tack-free before applying the second coat. Best performance
and appearance is achieved with two THIN coats, following the prescribed coverage rates.
NOTE: SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR AC dries very quickly (faster than standard solvent-based products). While spraying,
keep the sprayer tip down near the concrete within 8” (20 cm) of the surface. Use of this product in hot weather, in
direct sunlight, or in windy conditions can cause bubbling. The best time to apply this product is on a cool, overcast day
when the temperature is 50°F to 80°F (10°C to 27°C) and is not expected to rise above 85°F (29°C) during application and
drying time. Keep SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR AC cool before applying.
Application of SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR AC too heavily, in too many successive coats, or in multiple coats over time
can cause bubbling, whitening, peeling, and ultimate failure of the product. To prevent over-application, it is good
practice to measure the area to be sealed and the corresponding volume of product required based on the coverage
rate. Also, applying SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR AC in hot weather or onto a hot surface can cause bubbling. If
SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR AC is showing signs of over-application, scrub the surface with a solvent such as acetone*
or xylene*, using a stiff natural bristle brush. Keep the surface wet with the solvent while scrubbing, adding more if
necessary. The solvent will turn the sealer back into a liquid form, at which point excess material can be wiped off with
a lint-free mop or towel. Do not apply additional sealer. After removing the excess SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR AC, a
roller can be used to redistribute the remaining product evenly across the surface, adding more solvent as necessary
to keep the sealer wet.
Removal
Dried, cured SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR AC can be removed with strong solvents such as xylene or acetone or EUCO
CLEAN & STRIP. (Always follow solvent package directions and warning labels). Alternatively, the product can be
removed by sandblasting or by other similar mechanical action.
Clean-Up
Tools and equipment may be cleaned with xylene or acetone. Run cleaning solvent through spray equipment
to remove residual materials and prevent clogging of nozzle in future use.
• SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR AC is a Flammable Liquid. Use with adequate ventilation and keep away from heat,
sources of spark or ignition, and open flames. Block all HVAC ventilation ducts which may distribute solvent odor.
If solvent odor is objectionable, use of a water-based, low odor product may be preferred.
• Do not apply when concrete surfaces or ambient temperatures are below 40oF (4oC).
• Do not apply over concrete to receive toppings. KUREZ RC or KUREZ DR VOX are recommended for curing new
concrete in these applications.
• Before installing carpet, tile and floor covering adhesives, a test section is recommended to ensure compatibility
between the adhesive and SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR AC.
152
SUPER FLOOR COAT
High Solids Curing And Sealing Compound
Curing and Sealing

Description
SUPER FLOOR COAT is a 30% solids acrylic copolymer curing and sealing compound for concrete. The high
solids content of SUPER FLOOR COAT gives this product exceptional curing efficiency, which assists in proper
cement hydration and development of the concrete’s strength and durability properties.
• Industrial floor slabs • Dry shake floors
• Warehouses • Walls and columns
• Interior concrete surfaces • Concrete toppings
Features/Benefits
• Higher solids content for increased curing efficiency
• Seals all concrete surfaces - old or new - providing a glossy appearance
• Improves new concrete by promoting a proper cure
Drying time* @ 73°F, 50% RH....................< 1 hour Alkali resistance
Recoat................................................... 2 to 4 hours 48 hour exposure...... ..................................excellent
Foot traffic............................................. 2 to 4 hours Solvent resistance.......................................minimal
SUPER FLOOR COAT

Wheel traffic........................................ 6 to 10 hours Solids content................................................... 30%
VOC content............................................... 611 g/L Moisture loss (ASTM C 156)...................... 0.30 kg/m2
Adhesion to concrete................................ excellent
* Low concrete or air temperature and/or high relative humidity will extend drying time.
Appearance: SUPER FLOOR COAT is a clear solvent based liquid with a slight amber color. After application
and drying, this product gives a clear, glossy appearance to the concrete surface. SUPER FLOOR COAT has
moderate UV resistance and may discolor in UV light.
Packaging
SUPER FLOOR COAT is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
• ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class A & B • AASHTO M 148, Type 1, Class A & B
Master Format #:

03 39 23
Coverage
Application First Coat ft2/gal (m2/L) Second Coat ft2/gal (m2/L)
Curing & Sealing New Concrete 450 to 500 (11.0 to 12.3) 500 to 550 (12.3 to 13.5)
Sealing & Dustproofing Old Concrete 500 to 600 (12.3 to 14.7) 600 to 700 (14.7 to 17.2)
Coverage rates will vary depending on surface porosity. AVOID EXCESSIVE BUILD-UP. THICKER APPLICATIONS MAY
LEAD TO BUBBLING, WHITENING, AND POOR PERFORMANCE.

153
Directions for Use
other material that may prevent adhesion of the SUPER FLOOR COAT.
Mixing: SUPER FLOOR COAT requires no preblending and should be used directly from the container.
Application: Apply at a uniform coverage rate by spray or roller application. Product must be sprayed using
airless type industrial sprayer. A hand held “pump-up” sprayer will not give sufficient pressure for proper
application. If roller applied, use a short napped, solvent resistant sleeve.
Curing: For the best cure of freshly placed concrete, apply SUPER FLOOR COAT as soon as possible after
finishing operations and/or immediately after the disappearance of the “sheen” of surface moisture.
Sealing: When sealing old concrete, the surface must be clean and dry. Remove contaminants and stains such
as waxes, grease and oil with strong soaps or caustics rather than acids. Apply SUPER FLOOR COAT with a
high pressure industrial sprayer, lambswool applicator or short nap roller. Badly worn or porous areas may need
a second application to attain a uniform seal and surface gloss. Apply the second coat within 2 to 24 hours of
the previous coat.
Application of SUPER FLOOR COAT too heavily, in too many successive coats, or in multiple coats over time
can cause bubbling, whitening, peeling, and ultimate failure of the product. To prevent over-application, it is
good practice to measure the area to be sealed and the corresponding volume of product required based on the
coverage rate. Also, applying SUPER FLOOR COAT in hot weather or onto a hot surface can cause bubbling.
If SUPER FLOOR COAT is showing signs of over-application, scrub the surface with a solvent such as acetone*
or xylene*, using a stiff natural bristle brush. Keep the surface wet with the solvent while scrubbing, adding
more if necessary. The solvent will turn the sealer back into a liquid form, at which point excess material can
be wiped off with a lint-free mop or towel. Do not apply additional sealer. After removing the excess SUPER
FLOOR COAT, a roller can be used to redistribute the remaining product evenly across the surface, adding more
solvent as necessary to keep the sealer wet.
Clean-Up
Tools and equipment may be cleaned with EUCO SOLVENT, xylene, or acetone. Run cleaning solvent through
Removal
Dried, cured sealer may be removed with strong solvents such as xylene or acetone. Also acceptable is EUCO
CLEAN & STRIP or commercial paint strippers (always heed directions and warning labels on solvents and
strippers). Alternatively, SUPER FLOOR COAT can be removed by sandblasting or by other similar mechanical
action.
• SUPER FLOOR COAT may discolor and change the appearance of exterior concrete surfaces. Heavy build-up
will increase the potential for discoloration.
• Do not apply when concrete surfaces or ambient-temperatures are below 40oF (4oC).
• Spray application of SUPER FLOOR COAT formula must be done with a high pressure or airless industrial sprayer.
• Use with adequate ventilation and keep away from open flames. If solvent odor is objectionable, use of
a water-based, low odor product may be preferred. Block all HVAC ventilation ducts which may distribute
solvent odor.
• Do not apply over concrete to receive concrete toppings, epoxy or urethane based coatings or epoxy
adhesives. KUREZ RC or KUREZ DR VOX are recommended to cure concrete in these applications.
• Before installing carpet, tile and floor covering adhesives, a test section is recommended to ensure good
bond between the adhesive and SUPER FLOOR COAT.
Rev. 6.11
154
SUPER REZ-SEAL
Solvent Based High Solids Curing And Sealing Compound
Curing and Sealing

Description
SUPER REZ-SEAL is a high solids acrylic polymer curing and sealing compound that cures and seals new
concrete, providing for proper cement hydration and strength gain as well as protection from water ingress and
abrasive traffic. The high solids formulation provides increased coverage and a more durable seal.
• Industrial floor slabs • Dry shake floors
• Parking garages • Concrete floor toppings
Features/Benefits

• High solids content for increased coverage and curing efficiency
• Seals all concrete surfaces - old or new - providing glossy appearance and easier clean-up
• Increases durability of new concrete by promoting a proper cure
Drying time* @ 73°F, 50% RH............... < 1 hour Alkali resistance
Wheel traffic.....................................6 to 10 hours Resistance to discoloration................ moderate
VOC content..............................................657 g/L Solids content.............................................>25%
Adhesion to concrete.............................excellent Moisture loss (ASTM C 156)............... <0.40 kg/m²
SUPER REZ-SEAL
Appearance: SUPER REZ-SEAL is a clear liquid. After application and drying, SUPER REZ-SEAL offers a clear,
glossy film. The product may yellow if exposed to sunlight or interior UV light. SUPER REZ-SEAL will darken
concrete, masonry, pavers, etc., giving these materials a “wet” look. Follow recommended coverage rates
carefully for best appearance.
Packaging
SUPER REZ-SEAL is packaged in 5 gal (18.9 L) pails and 55 gal (208 L) drums.
Shelf Life
• ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B • AASHTO Specification M 148, Type 1
Master Format #:

03 39 23
Coverage
Application First Coat ft2/gal (m2/L) Optional Second Coat ft2/gal (m2/L)
Use on Existing, Cured Concrete 400 to 450 (9.8 to 11.0) 450 to 500 (11.0 to 12.2)
UP. HEAVY APPLICATIONS WILL LEAD TO BUBBLING, WHITENING, AND POOR PRODUCT PERFORMANCE.

155
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: The concrete surface must be clean and free of standing water. Remove any material
that may prevent adhesion of the SUPER REZ-SEAL. Curing and Sealing: For the best cure of freshly placed
concrete, apply SUPER REZ-SEAL as soon as possible after finishing operations and/or immediately after the
disappearance of the “sheen” of surface moisture.
Mixing: SUPER REZ-SEAL requires no preblending and should be used directly from the container.
held pump-up sprayer or with an airless industrial sprayer. If roller applied, use a short 3/8" (0.95 cm) nap, solvent
resistant sleeve. Keep a wet edge while spraying and backroll over sprayer lap marks for best appearance.
Application of SUPER REZ-SEAL too heavily, in too many successive coats, or in multiple coats over time can
coverage rate. Also, applying SUPER REZ-SEAL in hot weather or onto a hot surface can cause bubbling. If
SUPER REZ-SEAL is showing signs of over-application, scrub the surface with a solvent such as acetone* or
off with a lint-free mop or towel. Do not apply additional sealer. After removing the excess SUPER REZ-SEAL,
Removal
Dried, cured sealer may be removed with strong solvents such as xylene, or acetone. Also acceptable is EUCO
CLEAN & STRIP or commercial paint strippers (always heed directions and warning labels). Alternatively, the
sealer can be removed by sandblasting or by other similar mechanical action.
Clean-Up
Tools and equipment may be cleaned with xylene or acetone. Always follow directions and warning labels on
solvent or stripper containers. Run cleaning solvent through spray equipment to remove residual materials and
prevent clogging of nozzle in future use.
• Do not apply when concrete surfaces or ambient temperatures are below 40oF (4oC). Application in hot, direct
sunlight can cause bubbling.
•D o not apply over bleed water or free standing water.
water-based, low odor product may be preferred.
• Do not apply over concrete that will receive toppings, epoxy or urethane based coatings or adhesives. KUREZ
RC or KUREZ DR VOX is recommended for these applications.
• Before installing carpet, tile and floor covering adhesives, a test section is recommended with the adhesives
to be used.
• For best appearance on architectural concrete, the use of EVERCLEAR or SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR is
recommended. Two thin coats rather than one heavy application is suggested for a high gloss finish.
Rev. 6.11
156
AQUA-CURE VOX
Low Odor Water Based Cure And Seal
Curing and Sealing

Description
AQUA-CURE VOX is a water based acrylic polymer curing and sealing compound. AQUA-CURE VOX is suitable
for use over new and old concrete and performs well on both interior and exterior surfaces. It enables fresh
concrete to maintain adequate moisture, seals the surface, and provides an attractive sheen.
• Hospitals • Basements & footings
• Exterior concrete • Interior & exterior concrete surfaces
• Walls • Pavements
• Industrial floors
Features/Benefits
• Seals concrete surfaces to protect against the effects of weathering
• Increases durability by promoting proper cement hydration
• Helps prevent dusting of new concrete
• Dries to a clear transparent film that resists yellowing under exterior or ultraviolet exposure
• Gives an alternative to solvent based materials where fumes may be objectionable, undesirable, or non-compliant
AQUA-CURE VOX
Drying time* @ 73°F, 50% RH.................. 1 to 2 hours Weatherometer testing
Recoat time**........................................ 2 to 4 hours ASTM G 53, @ 500 hours
Foot traffic............................................ 4 to 6 hours Ultraviolet resistance........................................ good
Wheel traffic:....................................... 6 to10 hours Chalk resistance.....................................no chalking
VOC content................................................ 184 g/L Check/peel resistance.................... no deterioration
Adhesion to concrete Solids content...................................................16%
ASTM D 4541................................................. excellent Moisture loss (ASTM C 156)................. < 0.55 kg/m2
* Low concrete or air temperatures and/or high relative humidity will extend the drying time.
** If a second coat will be applied, application must be within 4 hours to ensure proper intercoat adhesion.
Heavy applications, application in cool, cold, or humid conditons, or prolonged exposure to moisture
may cause AQUA-CURE VOX to be powdery or have a milky-white appearance. Follow all application
instructions carefully.
Appearance: AQUA-CURE VOX is a white, opaque liquid. After proper application and drying, the film is clear
Master Format #:
with a slight glossy appearance.

03 39 23
Packaging
AQUA-CURE VOX is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums, 5 gal (18.9 L) pails and 6/1 gal (3.8 L) units per case.
Shelf Life

157
• USDA compliant
• Canadian Food Inspection Agency
Coverage
Application ft2/gallon (m2/L) First Coat Optional Second Coat
Sealing Existing Concrete 250 to 350 (6.1 to 8.6) 350 to 450 (8.6 to 11.0)
UP. THICKER APPLICATIONS MAY LEAD TO DISCOLORATION AND POOR PRODUCT PERFORMANCE.
Directions for Use
other material that may prevent adhesion of the AQUA-CURE VOX.
Mixing: AQUA-CURE VOX requires no preblending and should be used directly from the container.
held “pump-up” sprayer or with an airless industrial sprayer. If roller applied, use a short 3/8" (0.95 cm) nap
sleeve. Do not apply heavily - follow coverage rates carefully.
Curing and Sealing: For the best cure of freshly placed concrete, apply AQUA-CURE VOX as soon as possible
after finishing operations and/or immediately after the disappearance of the “sheen” of surface moisture. When
applying to old concrete, remove contaminants and stains such as waxes, grease and oil with strong soaps
or caustics rather than acids. Apply AQUA-CURE VOX at recommended coverage rates. If a second coat is
desired, apply within 2 to 4 hours of the previous coat.
Removal
Dried, cured AQUA-CURE VOX may be removed with strong solvents such as EUCO SOLVENT, xylene, MEK or
toluene. Also acceptable are commercial paint strippers (always heed directions and warning labels). EUCO
CLEAN & STRIP is a citrus-based stripper that can be used to remove this product. Alternatively, the sealer can
be removed by sandblasting or by other similar mechanical action.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with warm, soapy water before the material has dried.
• Do not allow containers of product to freeze. Store between 50°F to 100°F (10°C to 38°C).
• For best application results, product temperature should be between 50°F to 100°F (10°C to 38°C) with ambient
and surface temperatures between 45°F to 95°F (7°C to 35°C) during application.
• Do not apply over concrete that may receive concrete toppings, epoxy coatings, or urethane coatings.
ensure good bond between the adhesive and AQUA-CURE VOX. Complete product removal or the use of
KUREZ DR VOX is recommended to cure concrete in areas to receive movable carpet squares.
• Do not subject concrete to rain or other sources of water for at least 12 hours after application.
• Do not thin this product with water or any other solvents.
Rev. 6.11
158
BrownTone VOX
Water Based, Pigmented Sealer For Exposed Aggregate Concrete
Curing and Sealing

Description
BrownTone VOX is a water based sealer that enhances the appearance of exposed aggregate and other
decorative concrete surfaces. BROWNTONE VOX is formulated with earth-toned pigments that especially
highlight the natural color of exposed aggregate surfaces, making them look more even in color and richer
in appearance. BROWNTONE VOX also provides protection against the damaging effects of daily traffic and
weather. Although specifically formulated for exposed aggregate concrete, BROWNTONE VOX can be used on
any concrete surfaces - new or old - where a translucent brown tint is desired.
• Exposed aggregate concrete • Colored and stamped concrete
• Concrete pavers
Features/Benefits
• Enhances the natural tone and evens out the color of exposed aggregate and decorative concrete
• Non-yellowing
BrownTone VOX
Wheel Traffic:..................................... 6 to10 hours Solids Content:...........................................25-27%
VOC Content:.......................................... 92 g/L Moisture Loss: (ASTM C 156).............. < 0.40 kg/m2
Adhesion to Concrete:.............................excellent
Packaging
BROWNTONE VOX is packaged in 5 gal (18.9 L) pails and 6/1 gal (3.8 L) units per case.
Shelf Life
Master Format #:
Can be used in USDA inspected facilities

03 39 23
Coverage
300 to 400 ft²/gal (7.4 to 9.8 m²/L), depending on concrete surface texture and porosity.

159
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: BROWNTONE VOX can be applied to freshly placed and finished concrete as soon as the
surface bleed water has disappeared and the surface can support foot traffic. On cured or older concrete, the
surface should be thoroughly cleaned and dry before application of BROWNTONE VOX.
Mixing: BROWNTONE VOX should be gently agitated or mixed before using to distribute pigments evenly.
Application: Apply at a uniform coverage with an industrial hand held pump-up or airless sprayer, or by roller.
Common garden-type sprayers should not be used. If applying by roller, use a short 3/8" (0.95 cm) nap, solvent
resistant roller cover. One coat is normally sufficient for an even appearance and a good seal, but for a deeper
color and greater protection, two thin coats may be applied. The prescribed coverage rates should be followed.
If applying two coats, allow the first coat to dry tack-free before applying the second coat. Ensure even coverage
and re-distribute any puddles or runs before the BROWNTONE VOX dries. Protect freshly coated surfaces from
rain for a minimum of 8 hours after application.
Slight blushing, or whitening of the sealer film, is possible during the first one or two wetting and drying cycles
after sealer application. Likelihood of blushing is increased when the BROWNTONE VOX surface becomes wet
before the sealer has fully dried. This initial blushing is fully recoverable when the source of water is gone. Fully
dried BROWNTONE VOX is extremely blush resistant.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with water immediately following use. Clean drips and overspray with warm soapy
water while still wet. If not cleaned immediately, the sealer may leave an unwanted residue on painted surfaces,
glass or wood.
Removal
Dried BROWNTONE VOX may be removed with strong solvents such as xylene, MEK or toluene. (Always follow
package directions and warning labels). EUCO CLEAN & STRIP is a citrus-based stripper that can also be used
to remove BROWNTONE VOX. Alternatively, the product can be removed by sandblasting or by other similar
mechanical action.
• Do not allow containers of this product to freeze during transport or storage. Material becomes unusable if
allowed to freeze. Store between 50°F to 100°F (10°C to 38°C).
• For best application results product temperature should be between 50°F to 100°F (10°C to 38°C) with ambient
Rev. 6.11
160
Diamond Clear VOX
Non-Yellowing, Water Based Concrete Cure and Seal
Curing and Sealing

Description
DIAMOND CLEAR VOX is a water based acrylic curing and sealing compound. This product provides a quality
cure to freshly placed concrete while assuring total resistance to yellowing from ultraviolet exposure. DIAMOND
CLEAR VOX promotes proper hydration of cement in new concrete by preventing rapid loss of moisture. Used
as a sealer, DIAMOND CLEAR VOX helps concrete repel water and gives surfaces a slightly glossy appearance.
• Curing and sealing new concrete where a non-yellowing membrane with slight gloss is desired
Features/Benefits
• Low odor • Non-yellowing
Material Properties @75°F 50% RH

Viscosity 25 to 50 cp
Solids Content 20%
VOC content 126 g/L
Initial dry time 1 hour
Re-Coat time 2 to 4 hrs
dIAMOND CLEAR VOX

Packaging
DIAMOND CLEAR VOX is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums, 5 gal (18.9 L) pails and cases of 6/1 gal (3.79 L)
containers.
Shelf Life
• ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class A & B • USDA compliant
• AASHTO M 148 Type 1
Coverage

Application ft²/gal (m²/L)
Master Format #:
Cure/seal new concrete 200 to 300 (4.9 to 7.4)

Seal/dustproof old concrete 300 to 400 (7.4 to 9.8)
03 39 23
The following coverage rates are approximate and for estimating purposes only. Make test applications on
actual surfaces to determine exact coverage rates. Additional coats can be used to alter gloss or appearance.
Heavy applications, application in cool, cold, or humid conditons, or prolonged exposure to moisture may
cause DIAMOND CLEAR VOX to be powdery or have a milky-white appearance. Follow all application

161
Directions for Use
urface Preparation, Existing Concrete: Surface must be structurally sound, clean, free of dust, dirt, laitance,
S
efflorescence, curing compound, paint, oil, grease and other contaminants. Prior to application, surface defects,
voids, cracks and joints should be properly treated and repaired. Concrete may be damp, but must be free
of standing water. If acid has been used to clean the surface, neutralize the surface prior to using DIAMOND
CLEAR VOX. Always test surface pH to insure all acid has been neutralized prior to application.
Freshly Placed Concrete: Horizontal surfaces must be finished and show no surface “sheen” from the moisture.
The surface must be able to withstand foot traffic.
Mixing: DIAMOND CLEAR VOX requires no mixing.
Application: Apply DIAMOND CLEAR VOX in an even, continuous film by sprayer, short-napped roller or brush.
Use an applicator pad or roller to pick up puddles or excess material from the surface. A second coat may be
applied depending upon the desired surface gloss. When applying to fresh concrete, a delay of 24 hours is
recommended before application of the second coat. If the delay between the first and second coat results in
the contamination of the surface, the surface must be thoroughly cleaned before the application of the second
coat. When using DIAMOND CLEAR VOX to seal existing concrete, a second coat may be applied as soon as
the first coat has dried 2 to 4 hours at 75°F (24°C). The surface porosity and the amount of surface sheen desired
determines the selection of material for the second coat. The sealed concrete can usually be opened to foot
traffic in 8 to 12 hours, with maximum sealer durability developed within 7 to 10 days. A light maintenance coat
is recommended every 1 to 2 years depending on the concrete’s exposure to traffic, abrasion, weathering, etc.
Clean-Up
Clean up tools and equipment, overspray and drips with hot, soapy water. Dried product is very difficult to remove.
• Before applying the DIAMOND CLEAR VOX to the entire surface, test a small area to verify appearance on the
substrate.
• Do not use on glazed surfaces or over ceramic tile.
• Applications which result in excess material on the concrete surface may result in an uneven, “splotchy”
appearance after cure.
• Heavy applications, applying in cool or cold weather, or prolonged exposure to moisture may cause this
product to have a milky appearance.
• High humidity conditions and very hot/windy days will adversely affect drying and performance of this product.
• Do not apply if rain or heavy fog is likely within 8 to 12 hours after application.
• Do not apply DIAMOND CLEAR VOX to frost-filled or frozen surfaces.
• The sealer may darken the surface and may highlight surface imperfections.
• Do not allow to freeze. Use adequate ventilation during application and cure.
• Application temperature range is 45 - 95°F (7 - 35°C).
Rev. 6.11
162
EUCOCURE VOX
Water Based Concrete Cure and Seal
Curing and Sealing

Description
EUCOCURE VOX is an economical water based acrylic curing and sealing compound. This product assists in
maintaining adequate moisture content in new concrete so that desired properties can develop. The acrylic seal
provided by EUCOCURE VOX provides moderate protection against water prenetration and gives the concrete
a low sheen appearance.
• Curing and sealing concrete • Interior and exterior applications
Features/Benefits
• Low odor Can contribute to LEED points
Material Properties @75°F and 50% RH

Viscosity 5 to 15 cps
Solids Content 15%
VOC content 123 g/L
EUCOCURE VOX
Re-Coat time 2 to 4 hrs

Packaging
EUCOCURE VOX is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
• ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class A & B • USDA compliant
• AASHTO M 148 Type 1
Master Format #:
Coverage

03 39 23

actual surfaces to determine exact coverage rates. Additional coats can be used to alter gloss or appearance.

163
Directions for Use
S
voids, cracks and joints should be properly treated and repaired. Concrete may be damp, but must be free of
standing water. If acid has been used to clean the surface, neutralize the surface prior to using EUCOCURE
VOX. Always test surface pH to insure all acid has been neutralized prior to application.
Mixing: EUCOCURE VOX requires no mixing.
Application: Apply EUCOCURE VOX in an even, continuous film by sprayer, short-napped roller or brush.
Use an applicator pad or roller to pick up puddles or excess material from the surface. A second coat may be
applied depending upon the desired surface gloss. When applying to fresh concrete, a delay of 24 hours is
recommended before application of the second coat. If the delay between the first and second coat results in the
contamination of the surface, the surface must be thoroughly cleaned before the application of the second coat.
When using EUCOCURE VOX to seal existing concrete, a second coat may be applied as soon as the first coat
has dried 2 to 4 hours at 75°F (24°C). The surface porosity and the amount of surface sheen desired determines
the selection of material for the second coat. The sealed concrete can usually be opened to foot traffic in 8 to 12
hours, with maximum sealer durability developed within 7 to 10 days. A light maintenance coat is recommended
every 1 to 2 years depending on the concrete’s exposure to traffic, abrasion, weathering, etc.
Clean-Up
product to have a milky appearance. Dry conditions will allow the product to become clear again.
• Do not apply EUCOCURE VOX to frost-filled or frozen surfaces.
• Temperature during application must be 45 - 95°F (7 - 35°C).
Rev. 6.11
164
EVERCLEAR VOX
Water Based, Low VOC Acrylic Sealer for Concrete
Curing and Sealing

Description
EVERCLEAR VOX is a water based pure acrylic sealer for concrete with excellent blush resistance and total
resistance to yellowing from UV exposure. This sealer imparts an attractive, low gloss and protection to all
concrete surfaces, and is especially suited for decorative concrete. Formulated with a very low VOC content,
EVERCLEAR VOX is compliant with all VOC regulations in the United States and Canada and its low odor makes
it usable indoors or out. EVERCLEAR VOX dries to a clear, matte finish, but a higher gloss can be achieved with
additional coats.
• Concrete driveways, sidewalks, floors • Concrete pavers and precast units
• Stamped, stenciled, colored, acid stained • Cultured stone
concrete
Features/Benefits
• Non-yellowing, medium gloss sealer provides protection and improved appearance to concrete
• Low odor
• Complies with all U.S. EPA and local VOC regulations, including OTC, LADCO, Maricopa County, and California
(CARB and SCAQMD)
• Excellent abrasion and blush resistance
• Can be applied over previous coats of sealers – water based and solvent based
• Excellent recoatability
Can contribute to LEED points (EQ Credit 4.2)
EVERCLEAR VOX
Viscosity, cP 5 VOC Content 93 g/L
Milky White (wet) Weatherometer Cycling No yellowing or loss of
Color Crystal Clear (dry) gloss
@ 100 Hours
Dry to Touch less than 1 hour Rresistance to
Gasoline, Brake Fluid, Poor
Foot Traffic 4 to 6 hours Solvents
Wheel Traffic 6 to 10 hours Resistance to Acids/ Moderate
% Solids (by weight) > 25% Alkalies
Blush Resistance Excellent
*Slight blushing, or whitening of the sealer film, is possible during the first one or two wetting and drying
cycles after sealer application. Likelihood of blushing is increased when the EVERCLEAR VOX surface
becomes wet before the sealer has fully dried. This initial blushing is fully recoverable when the source of
Master Format #:
water is gone. Fully dried EVERCLEAR VOX is extremely blush resistant.

Shelf Life
03 39 23

• ASTM C 1315 (excluding water retention)
• Acceptable for use in USDA inspected facilities

165
Packaging
EVERCLEAR VOX is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums, 5 gal (18.9 L) pails and 6/1 gal (3.8 L) units per case.
Coverage
The coverage rate range is 300 – 400 ft2/gal (7.4 – 9.8 m2/L), and is highly dependent on substrate texture and
porosity.
NOTE: do not apply thicker than recommended AS THIS MAY CAUSE DISCOLORATION AND
POOR PERFORMANCE.
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: The surface to be sealed with EVERCLEAR VOX must be structurally sound, clean, and dry.
EVERCLEAR VOX can be applied over a previous coat of acrylic concrete sealer; however, when the chemical
makeup of the previous sealer is unknown, a small test section is recommended to ensure compatibility. Pre-
mixing of EVERCLEAR VOX is not required. Do not thin or dilute with water or any other solvent.
Application: Apply EVERCLEAR VOX in a uniform, continuous film by hand-held low pressure pump-up sprayer,
short nap roller, or foam roller. When spraying, backroll over any sprayer overlap marks to ensure even coverage.
Redistribute or remove puddles or excess EVERCLEAR VOX before it dries. Follow recommended coverage
rates carefully to avoid uneven or heavy applications. For best results, two thin coats of EVERCLEAR VOX are
recommended, with a minimum 1-2 hour interval between applications, following the perscribed coverage rates.
Removal
Dried, cured EVERCLEAR VOX may be removed with a strong solvent such as acetone. (Always follow package
directions and warning labels).
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with water immediately following use. Clean drips and overspray with warm soapy
water while still wet. If not cleaned immediately, the sealer may leave an unwanted residue on painted surfaces,
glass or wood.
• Do not allow containers of this product to freeze during transport or storage. Material becomes unusable if
allowed to freeze. Store between 50°F to 100°F (10°C to 38°C).
• For best application results product temperature should be between 50°F to 100°F (10°C to 38°C) with ambient
Rev. 6.11
166
SUPER AQUA-CURE VOX
High Solids, Water Based Cure And Seal
Curing and Sealing

Description
SUPER AQUA-CURE VOX is a high solids water based acrylic polymer curing and sealing compound. SUPER
AQUA-CURE VOX is suitable for use over new and old concrete and performs well on both interior and exterior
surfaces. It enables fresh concrete to maintain adequate moisture, seals the surface, and provides an attractive
sheen.
• Parking decks • Basements & footings
• Interior & exterior concrete • Walls
• Industrial floors • Pavements
Features/Benefits
• High solids content permits greater coverage and better durability
• Seals concrete surfaces to help protect against the effects of weathering
• Helps eliminate dusting of new concrete through good surface strength development
• Gives an alternative to solvent based materials where fumes may be objectionable, undesirable or non-compliant
SUPER AQUA-CURE VOX

Drying time* at 73°F, 50% RH..............1 to 2 hours Weatherometer testing ASTM G 53 @500 hours
Recoat**................................................2 to 4 hours Ultraviolet resistance........................................ good
Foot traffic.............................................4 to 6 hours Chalk resistance..................................... no chalking
Wheel traffic.........................................6 to10 hours Check/peel resistance.................... no deterioration
Adhesion to concreteASTM D 4541............... excellent Solids content................................................... 30%
VOC content.............................................< 200 g/L Moisture loss (ASTM C 156)..................< 0.40 kg/m2
**If a second coat will be applied, application must be within 4 hours of previous application to ensure proper
intercoat adhesion.
Appearance: SUPER AQUA-CURE VOX is a white, opaque liquid. After application and drying, the film is
clear with a slight glossy appearance. Heavy applications, application in cool, cold, or humid conditons,
or prolonged exposure to moisture may cause AQUA-CURE VOX to be powdery or have a milky-white
appearance. Follow all application instructions carefully.
Packaging
SUPER AQUA-CURE VOX is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums, 5 gal (18.9 L) pails and 6/1 gal (3.8 L) units
per case.
Master Format #:
Shelf Life
03 39 23

• ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class A & B • AASHTO M 148, Type 1, Class A & B
• ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class B • USDA compliant
• Canadian Food Inspection Agency & MTQ

167
Coverage
Application: ft2/gal (m2/L) First Coat Optional Second Coat
Textured Concrete 300 to 400 (7.4 to 9.8) 400 to 500 (9.8 to 2.2)
Smooth/Troweled Concrete 350 to 450 (8.6 to 11.0) 450 to 550 (11.0 to 13.5)
Coverage will vary depending on surface porosity and texture.
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: The concrete surface must be clean and free of standing water. Remove any foreign
sealer or other material that may prevent the adhesion of SUPER AQUA-CURE VOX.
Mixing: SUPER AQUA-CURE VOX requires no preblending and should be used directly from the container.
Application: Apply at a uniform coverage by spray or roller application. If roller applied, use a short 3/8" (0.95
cm) nap sleeve.
Curing and Sealing: Apply SUPER AQUA-CURE VOX to the concrete surface as soon as finishing operations
are completed, and the surface will not be marred by the application. Surfaces to be sealed must be clean of all
dust, dirt, and debris and all free-standing water must be removed. Remove all oil and grease stains with strong
detergents and degreasers. Apply SUPER AQUA-CURE VOX at recommended coverage rates.
SUPER AQUA-CURE VOX may be placed on top of a previous coat of the same product within 2 to 4 hours of
the first application. If a second coat is to be applied more than 4 hours after the first, the first coat should be
deglossed. The surface must be clean and dry for proper adhesion.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with warm, soapy water before the sealer dries.
Removal
Dried, cured SUPER AQUA-CURE VOX may be removed with strong solvents such as EUCO SOLVENT, xylene,
MEK or toluene. Also acceptable are commercial paint strippers (always heed directions and warning labels).
EUCO CLEAN & STRIP is a citrus based stripper than can also be used to remove this product. Alternatively, the
product can be removed by sandblasting or by other similar mechanical action.
• Do not use in areas that are continually wet and where appearance is important. Product may turn milky white
in these conditions and will clear upon drying.
• Do not allow containers of product to freeze. Store between 50°F to 100°F (10°C to 38°C).
• For best application results, product temperature should be between 50°F to 100°F (10°C to 38°C) with ambient
• Do not apply over concrete that may receive concrete toppings, epoxy coatings or urethane coatings.
ensure good bond between the adhesive and SUPER AQUA-CURE VOX. Complete product removal or the
use of KUREZ RC or KUREZ DR VOX is recommended to cure concrete in areas to receive movable carpet
squares.
• Do not apply if rain or other sources of water are expected within 12 hours of application.
Rev. 6.11
168
SUPER Diamond Clear VOX
Non-Yellowing, High Solids Concrete Cure and Seal
Curing and Sealing

Description
SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR VOX is a high solids, water based acrylic curing and sealing compound. This product
provides a quality cure to freshly placed concrete while assuring total resistance to yellowing from ultraviolet
exposure. SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR VOX helps control hydration of cement by preventing rapid loss of moisture
through the surface of newly placed concrete. SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR VOX can also be used on existing
concrete, giving surfaces a glossy appearance and a protective seal.
• Curing and sealing concrete where a non-yellowing, glossy finish is desired
Features/Benefits
• Low odor • Non-yellowing, high solids formula
Can contribute to LEED points • Excellent cure and durable seal
Material Properties @75°F 50% RH

Viscosity 40 to 100 cps
Solids Content 28%
SUPER dIAMOND CLEAR VOX

VOC content 200 g/L
Recoat time 2 to 4 hrs
Packaging
SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR VOX is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums, 5 gal (18.9 L) pails and cases of 6/1 gal
(3.79 L) containers.
Shelf Life
• ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class A & B • AASHTO M 148 Type 1
Coverage

Master Format #:

03 39 23

actual surfaces to determine exact coverage rates.

169
Directions for Use
S
voids, cracks and joints should be properly treated and repaired. Concrete may be damp, but must be free
of standing water. If acid has been used to clean the surface, neutralize the surface prior to using SUPER
DIAMOND CLEAR VOX. Always test surface pH to insure all acid has been neutralized prior to application.
Mixing: SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR VOX requires no mixing.
Application: Apply SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR VOX in an even, continuous film by sprayer, short-napped roller
or brush. Use an applicator pad or roller to pick up puddles or excess material from the surface. A second
coat may be applied depending upon the desired surface gloss. When applying to fresh concrete, a delay of
24 hours is recommended before application of the second coat. If the delay between the first and second coat
results in the contamination of the surface, the surface must be thoroughly cleaned before the application of
the second coat. When using SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR VOX to seal existing concrete, a second coat may be
applied as soon as the first coat has dried 2 to 4 hours at 75°F (24°C). The surface porosity and the amount of
surface sheen desired determines the selection of material for the second coat. The sealed concrete can usually
be opened to foot traffic in 8 to 12 hours, with maximum sealer durability developed within 7 to 10 days. A light
maintenance coat is recommended every 1 to 2 years depending on the concrete’s exposure to traffic, abrasion,
weathering, etc.
Clean-Up
product to have a milky appearance.
• Do not apply SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR VOX to frost-filled or frozen surfaces.
• Application temperature range is 45 - 95°F (7 - 35°C).
Rev. 6.11
170
Dry Shake Floor Hardeners
Metallic Aggregate
Dry Shake Application Guide 173
Euco Flat-Plate 175
Euco-Plate HD 177
Euco-Plate HD Light Reflective 179
Natural Aggregate
Surflex 181
Surflex E 183
Surflex Light Reflective 185
Surflex TR 187
Non-Oxidizing Metallic Aggregate

Diamond-Plate 189
Diamond-Plate Light Reflective 191
DRY SHAKE FLOOR HARDENERS
Application Instructions
Introduction
The following instructions detail the general installation of Euclid Chemical manufactured dry shake floor
hardeners. The contractor and engineer are encouraged to consult the individual product’s technical data sheet
Shakes
for additional suggestions for a successful installation.
These instructions are written specifically for EUCO-PLATE HD, DIAMOND-PLATE, EUCO FLAT-PLATE and
SURFLEX products.
directions for use
General Guidelines:
The following recommendations of ACI 302 and the following topics should be carefully reviewed prior to the
pre-slab meeting.
1. “Dry Shake Floor Hardeners” are formulated to be applied to properly designed concrete. Conditions such as
high winds, low humidity or hot or cold weather require mix design changes and adjustments in application and/
or finishing procedures. In dry conditions, The Euclid Chemical Company recommends the use of EUCOBAR
to help retain moisture.
2. A well compacted, leveled sub-grade is required. Follow recommendations of ACI 360, “Design of Slabs on
Grade”.
3. Concrete containing calcium chloride or admixtures with > 0.05% chloride ions should not be treated with
metallic dry shakes. Air content must be below 3% for all dry shakes.
4. The correct number of bags should be positioned along the sides of the slab placement prior to the start of

each days concreting operation.
5. Note: Colored (pigmented) dry shakes require special attention to achieve a uniform color. If the job involves
placement of a colored dry shake, the best appearance and performance results from:
a. Delaying application of the shake as long as possible to the get the maximum color saturation at the
surface of the slab.
b. For maximum uniformity, apply the shake in two even passes.
c. Do not burnish the final trowel. Hand troweling the final finish results in the best appearance.
IMPORTANT: If the contractor is not familiar with the standard application techniques of a dry shake floor hardener,
a pre-job meeting is suggested to review the project concrete mix design as well as placement and curing details
unique to the particular job. Contact your Euclid Chemical Company representative for additional information.
Placing: The following directions and ACI 302 Guidelines should be carefully followed when applying the dry
shake floor hardener. Apply the product on well designed, non-air entrained concrete mixes at temperatures
of between 60oF (16oC) and 80oF (27oC). If unusual conditions exist, such as direct hot sun, high winds, low
humidity or cold weather, care should be taken to protect the slab during dry shake placement. Ideally, the
building walls and roof are in place and the slab is protected from the direct environment. If this is not practical,
the placement of wind screens protects the fresh, plastic base concrete from moisture evaporation. This allows
an earlier than normal dry shake application. In dry conditions, use EUCOBAR (evaporation retardant and
Master Format #:
finishing aid) to help retain moisture.

Check the specifications for the amount of hardener required per square foot (square meter), then stack the
03 3000
correct number of bags along the placement area to be used that day. This is important because it gives the
finishers a “gauge” for applying the correct amount of material. After the above conditions have been met,
proceed with work in the following manner:

173
Single Pass Application: This method is used in fast track projects where the application of the shake hardener
is applied directly behind the screeding process.
After the concrete is hand or mechanically screeded, use a bullfloat or highway straightedge to flatten out or
remove any imperfections on the surface of the wet slab. Care should be taken not to “close” the surface of the
concrete. This procedure is quickly followed by the application of the full amount of dry shake, by a mechanical
spreader. Observe the dry shake, for the color will darken as the material absorbs the bleed water from the
slab. Defer initial floating operations until the shake is completely “wetted out” and concrete reaches initial set.
Using a walk-behind or a ride-on power-trowel with float shoes, the shake hardener must be thoroughly worked
into the slab. If not, the risk of delamination is higher. After the shake has been worked into the concrete and
the slab has been given time to further “tighten up”, begin final troweling procedures. Finish the slab according
to specifications, paying close attention not to burnish the surface.
Dual Pass Application: This procedure is the best method to use when a colored shake hardener is applied
for aesthetic purposes.
Screed and bullfloat as described above. Allow the slab to dry sufficiently to a point where the weight of the
finishers and their power-trowel equipment do not leave any indentations. If any excess bleed water remains
on the surface, use a rubber hose to drag the water from the concrete. Using float shoes, break the surface of
the slab open and apply 2/3 of the desired amount of the shake hardener. Once the shake hardener has fully
darkened due to the absorption of moisture, continue to floating process to work the shake hardener into the
surface.
Once the first application of shake has been successfully worked into the slab, immediately place the remaining
1/3 of the material over the slab. Pay close attention to the areas where the color may not be prevalent from the
first application. Continue the floating process to work the second application into the slab. After the slab has
been given time to “tighten up”, final finishing operations can begin as described above.
***In both cases, pay strict attention to the slab edges for they will dry faster than the bulk of the slab.
Curing: Cure the dry shake per instructions on the individual product’s technical data sheet.
Iron Armored Joints: Metallic floor hardeners (EUCO-PLATE HD, DIAMOND-PLATE, EUCO FLAT-PLATE) may
also be used as a mortar in constructing iron armored floor joints. These joints provide added wear resistance
at joint edges increasing the serviceable life of the floor.
Rev. 6.11
174
EUCO FLAT-PLATE
Heavy Duty Metallic Floor Hardener For FF 40 And Higher Flatness Floors
dry shake floor hardeners

Description
EUCO FLAT-PLATE is a specially formulated metallic floor hardener composed of a specially processed and
graded iron aggregate, selected portland cement and necessary plasticizing agents. This hardener is specifically
designed to be used by competent contractors on floors required to achieve high flatness numbers, FF 40 and
higher. EUCO FLAT-PLATE, when properly applied, restraightened and finished, assists the contractor in obtaining
a dense toughened flat floor capable of withstanding abrasion and impact conditions present in many industrial
and manufacturing facilities. EUCO FLAT-PLATE has been formulated to be applied at heavy application rates,
up to 2.5 lb/ft2 (12 kg/m2) using normal procedures, while maintaining a “window of finishability” wide enough for
the contractor to perform the restraightening and finishing operations necessary for high flatness floors.
• FF 40 and greater floors with high traffic patterns • Warehouses
• Narrow aisles in high bay facilities • Industrial floors
• AGV areas • Distribution centers
Features/Benefits
• Designed to be used on ACI 302 Class 6 or greater floors required to be surface toughened with a flatness
rating of FF40 or higher
• Optimum consistency and gradation for restraightening
• Results in a surface 6 times as abrasion resistant as plain cured concrete
• Flatness friendly for use by qualified finishers
• Dense surface resists penetration of oil, grease, and many other liquids
• Virtually non-dusting surface
EUCO FLAT-PLATE
Typical Engineering Data Relative Abrasion Resistance
Compressive Strength ASTM C 109, 2” (50 mm) cubes ASTM C 779
AGE STRENGTH % of Reference

1 day 4,000 psi (27.6 MPa) 600
3 days 5,000 psi (34.5 MPa) 500
7 days 7,000 psi (48.3 MPa) 400
14 days 9,000 psi (62.1 MPa) 300
28 days 10,000 psi (69.0 MPa) 200
Appearance 100
EUCO FLAT-PLATE is packaged as a free
flowing powder. The final finish can be any
Plain Cured Natural High- EUCO FLAT-
texture normally achievable with concrete Concrete Aggre- Strength PLATE
and should be specified by the owner. gate Dry Concrete
Master Format #:
Shakes Topping
Packaging
03 35 16
EUCO FLAT-PLATE is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) bags with polyethylene liners for moisture protection. Material
is shipped 64 bags per pallet.
Shelf Life

175
Coverage
EUCO FLAT-PLATE may be applied at rates from 1.0 to 2.5 lb/ft² (4.9 to 12.2 kg/m²). Greater application rates yield
better total abrasion resistance and may be used with special considerations. Contact your Euclid Chemical
Company representative for recommended procedures.
Directions for Use
The contractor and engineer are encouraged to consult and review the Euclid Chemical bulletin “Dry Shake
Floor Hardeners - Application Instructions”. The document offers instructions detailing the general installation
of Euclid Chemical manufactured dry shake floor hardeners. Note: If the contractor is not familiar with the standard
application techniques of a dry shake floor hardener, a pre-job meeting is suggested to review the project concrete mix design as
well as placement and curing details unique to the particular job. Contact your local Euclid Chemical Company representative for
additional information.
Armored Joints: EUCO FLAT-PLATE may also be used as a mortar to construct armored floor joints.
Application Tips: Striking and Straightening the slab before application of EUCO FLAT-PLATE may require
the use of a highway straight edge and/or use of a laser screed to meet the proper floor tolerances. Use of a
highway straight edge may be required after each application of EUCO FLAT-PLATE to ensure proper tolerances.
A sample slab is recommended to demonstrate proper techniques for the particular mix design.
Curing and Sealing: After finishing operations are complete and the surface will not be marred by foot traffic,
apply a Euclid Chemical curing compound or cure and seal according to product instructions. To produce an
exceptionally durable and dustproof surface, cure with a dissipating or removable curing compound such as
KUREZ DR VOX or KUREZ RC, then seal with EUCO DIAMOND HARD or ULTRASIL Li+.
Clean-up
Clean tools and equipment with soap and water before material hardens.
• Sufficient labor is required to produce consistent results on large placements.
• Important: Air-entraining admixtures may complicate finishing operations and cause blistering. Contact The
Euclid Chemical Company if this product will be applied over air entrained concrete with more than 3% total
air content.
• Not recommended for floors subjected to deicing salts, continuously wet environments or acids or other
corrosive chemicals that may attack a cement based material.
• Store product in a dry place.
Rev. 6.11
176
EUCO-PLATE HD
Heavy Duty Metallic Floor Hardener

Description
EUCO-PLATE HD is a dry shake, metallic floor hardener with graded iron aggregate in a high strength
cementitious binder. Designed to be incorporated into fresh concrete slabs, EUCO-PLATE HD provides a dense,
tough surface capable of withstanding the abrasion and impact loading of industrial and manufacturing facilities.
EUCO-PLATE HD has been specially formulated to be applied at heavy application rates which exceed those of
standard EUCO-PLATE or other first generation metallic hardeners. EUCO-PLATE HD is also used to construct
iron armored joints to protect and reinforce joint shoulders in heavy traffic areas.
• Industrial floors • Main, high traffic aisleways • Towveyors
• Loading docks • Processing plants • Distribution centers
• Warehouses • Passenger and freight terminals • Iron armored joints
Features/Benefits
• Achieves roughly 6 times the abrasion resistance of plain, cured concrete
• Iron aggregate is free of rust, oil, or other contaminants
• Virtually non-dusting in service
• Easy to clean and maintain
• Economical to own over the life of the floor
• Can be applied at coverage rates up to 3.0 lb/ft2 (14.6 kg/m2)
• Available in 8 standard colors
EUCO-PLATE HD
AGE STRENGTH
% of Reference
1 day 4,000 psi (27.6 MPa)
600
3 days 5,000 psi (34.5 MPa)
500
7 days 7,000 psi (48.3 MPa)
400
14 days 9,000 psi (62.1 MPa)
300
28 days 10,000 psi (69.0 MPa) 200
Appearance: EUCO-PLATE HD is a free flowing powder 100

as packaged. Pigmented formulations will appear darker after
placement. Standard colors: French Gray, Battleship Gray,
Black, Brown, Tile Red, Terra Cotta, Green and Tan. The final Plain Cured
finish can be any texture normally achieved with concrete and Natural High- EUCO-PLATE
Master Format #:
Concrete Aggre- Strength HD

should be specified by the owner.
gate Dry Concrete
Topping
03 35 16
Shakes
Packaging
EUCO-PLATE HD is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) bags with polyethylene liners for moisture protection. Material
Shelf Life

177
Coverage
EUCO-PLATE HD may be applied at rates from 1.5 to 3.0 lb/ft² (7.3 to14.6 kg/m²). Greater application rates yield
better total abrasion resistance and may be used with special considerations. Contact your Euclid Chemical
Directions for Use

Armored Joints: EUCO-PLATE HD may also be used as a mortar to construct armored floor joints.
Application Tips: Colored (pigmented) dry shakes require special attention for a uniform color. Care should be
taken with regard to the following; delay application of the shake as long as possible to get the maximum color
saturation at the surface of the slab, apply the shake as evenly as possible and in two applications for maximum
uniformity, do not burnish trowel the floor. Best appearance is achieved by hand trowelling the final finish.
KUREZ DR VOX or KUREZ RC, then seal with or ULTRASIL Li+.
Clean-up
• Proper curing and sealing is required.
• Curing with a sheet membrane (poly or burlene) is acceptable, however potential mottling problems may
occur.
• Sufficient manpower is required to produce consistent results on large placements.
Euclid Chemical Company if application of this product will be over air entrained concrete with more than 3%
total air content.
• Not recommended for floors subjected to deicing salts, continously wet environments or acids or other
corrosive chemicals that may attack a cement based material. Use DIAMOND-PLATE for these applications.
Rev. 6.11
178
EUCO-PLATE HD LIGHT REFLECTIVE
Heavy Duty, Light Reflective, Metallic Floor Hardener

Description
EUCO-PLATE HD LIGHT REFLECTIVE is a dry shake, metallic floor hardener with graded iron aggregate in
a high strength cementitious binder. Designed to be incorporated into the surface of fresh concrete slabs,
EUCO-PLATE HD LIGHT REFLECTIVE provides a dense, tough surface capable of withstanding the abrasion
and impact loading seen by floor slabs of numerous industrial and manufacturing facilities. EUCO-PLATE HD
LIGHT REFLECTIVE has been specially formulated to give increased reflectivity to improve lighting levels in
combination with increased abrasion resistance.
• Warehouses • Passenger and freight terminals • Iron armored joints
Features/Benefits
• Provides a high strength wearing surface
• Achieves roughly 6 times the abrasion resistance of plain, cured concrete
• Iron aggregate is free of rust, oil, and non-ferrous materials
• Virtually non-dusting in service, and easy to clean and maintain
• Capable of reducing annual energy costs with lowering of electrical requirements due to improved lighting
EUCO-PLATE HD LIGHT REFLECTIVE

• Provides reflectivity levels in excess of 60%
% of Reference
AGE STRENGTH
600
1 day 4,000 psi (27.6 MPa)
500
3 days 5,000 psi (34.5 MPa)
400
7 days 7,000 psi (48.3 MPa)
300
14 days 9,000 psi (62.1 MPa)
200
28 days 10,000 psi (69.0 MPa)
100
Appearance: EUCO-PLATE HD LIGHT REFLECTIVE
is a free flowing powder as packaged. The final finish
can be any texture normally achievable with concrete
and should be specified by the owner. Plain Cured Natural High- EUCO-PLATE
Master Format #:
Concrete Aggre- Strength HD LIGHT

gate Dry Concrete REFLECTIVE
Topping
03 35 16
Shakes
Packaging
EUCO-PLATE HD LIGHT REFLECTIVE is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) bags with polyethylene liners for moisture
protection. Material is shipped 64 bags per pallet.
Shelf Life

179
Coverage
EUCO-PLATE HD LIGHT REFLECTIVE may be applied at rates from 1.5 to 3.0 lb/ft² (7.3 to14.6 kg/m²). Greater
application rates yield better total abrasion resistance, and may be used with special considerations. Contact
your Euclid Chemical Company representative for recommended procedures.
Directions for Use
Armored Joints: EUCO-PLATE HD LIGHT REFLECTIVE may also be used as a mortar to construct armored
floor joints.
Clean-up
• Curing with a sheet membrane (poly or burlene) is acceptable, however there is the potential for mottling
problems.
total air content.
• Do not burnish trowel light reflective surface hardeners.
• Not recommended for floors subjected to deicing salts, continously wet environments or acids or other
corrosive chemicals that may attack a cement based material. Use DIAMOND-PLATE LIGHT REFLECTIVE for
these applications.
Rev. 6.11
180
SURFLEX
Non-Metallic Floor Hardener

Description
SURFLEX is a quartz-silica mixture of finely graded non-metallic aggregates, plasticizer and cement binder. It is
an economical concrete floor hardener recommended for both interior and exterior use. It is particularly valuable
because of its non-rusting characteristics when floors will be frequently wet. SURFLEX is available in non-fading
colors as well as a natural cement color.
• Lobbies and waiting rooms of commercial and • Auto showrooms and service centers
public buildings • Factory and warehouse floors
• Corridors and washrooms in institutional and public • Commercial and industrial facilities
buildings • Restaurants and dairies
Features/Benefits
• Hardens concrete in one economical operation
• Use of hard and properly graded aggregates increases the wear resistance over plain concrete floors
• Ready-to-use factory blend eliminates messy and expensive job mixing and minimizes errors
• Non-rusting materials make it possible to use SURFLEX outdoors as well as indoors
• Eucon dispersing agent contained in SURFLEX makes it possible to incorporate SURFLEX into the surface of
low slump concretes resulting in exceptionally high surface strengths for maximum wear resistance
Relative Abrasion Resistance Appearance: SURFLEX is a free flowing powder as
packaged. It is available in a natural cement color
ASTM C 779
or in tile red, terra cotta, black, green, french gray,
battleship gray, light gray, brown and tan. The final
% of Reference
SURFLEX
finish can be any texture normally achievable with
concrete and should be specified by the owner.
250
200
150
100
50
0
Plain Cured High- SURFLEX

Concrete Strength
Concrete
Topping
Master Format #:
Packaging
03 35 16
SURFLEX is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) bags with polyethylene liners for moisture protection. Material is
shipped 64 bags per pallet.
Shelf Life

181
Coverage
SURFLEX may be applied at rates from 0.5 to 2.0 lb/ft² (2.4 to 9.8 kg/m²). Greater application rates yield better
total abrasion resistance, and may be used with special considerations. Contact your Euclid Chemical Company
representative for recommended procedures.
Directions for Use

Application Tips: Colored (pigmented) dry shakes require special attention for a uniform color. If the job
involves placement of SURFLEX, care should be taken with regards to the following; delay application of the
shake as long as possible to get the maximum color saturation at the surface of the slab, apply the shake as
evenly as possible and in two applications for maximum uniformity, and do not burnish trowel the floor. Best
appearance is achieved by hand troweling the final finish.
Clean-up
total air content.
• For additional abrasion resistance beyond that offered by SURFLEX, consider the use of EUCO-PLATE HD,
an iron aggregate floor hardener.
Rev. 6.11
182
SURFLEX E
Non-Metallic Floor Hardener

Description
SURFLEX E is a mixture of a plasticizer, cement and graded emery aggregates. It is a wear resistant concrete
floor hardener recommended for both interior and exterior use. it is particulary valuable because of its non-
rusting characteristics when floors will be frequently wet. SURFLEX E is only available in natural color.
• Lobbies and waiting rooms of commercial and • Auto showrooms and service centers
public buildings • Factory and warehouse floors
• Corridors and washrooms in institutional and public • Commercial and industrial facilities
buildings • Restaurants and dairies
Features/Benefits
• Non-rusting materials make it possible to use SURFLEX E outdoors as well as indoors
• Eucon dispersing agent contained in SURFLEX E makes it possible to incorporate SURFLEX E into the surface
of low slump concretes resulting in exceptionally high surface strengths for maximum wear resistance
Relative Abrasion Resistance Appearance: SURFLEX E is a free flowing powder as
ASTM C 779 packaged. It is available in a natural cement color
only. The final finish can be any texture normally
% of Reference achievable with concrete and should be specified by
the owner.
SURFLEX E
250
200
150
100
50
0
Plain Cured Pea SURFLEX E

Concrete Gravel
Topping
Packaging
SURFLEX E is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) bags with polyethylene liners for moisture protection. Material is
Master Format #:
Shelf Life
03 35 16
Coverage
SURFLEX E may be applied at rates from 1.0 to 2.5 lb/ft² (4.9 to 12.2 kg/m²). Higher application rates yield better
total abrasion resistance. Greater application rates may be used with special considerations. Contact your
Euclid Chemical Company representative for recommended procedures.

183
Directions for Use
Clean-up
• For additional abrasion resistance beyond that offered by SURFLEX E consider the use of EUCO-PLATE HD
an iron aggregate floor hardener.
Euclid Chemical Company if applied over air entrained concrete with more than 3% total air content.
Rev. 6.11
184
SURFLEX LIGHT REFLECTIVE
Non-Metallic Light Relfective Floor Hardener

Description
SURFLEX LIGHT REFLECTIVE is a special formulation of finely graded silica aggregates, pigments, plasticizers
and a cement binder. It is an economical concrete floor hardener recommended for both interior and exterior
use. SURFLEX LIGHT REFLECTIVE has been designed to give increased reflectivity to improve lighting levels in
combination with increased abrasion resistance.
• Where floor surfaces will be subjected to a range of • Factory floors
duty service • Parking garages
• Where light-reflective, non-metallic floors are specified • Auto service centers
• Airline hangars • Commercial and industrial facilities
• Warehouses
Features/Benefits
• Provides reflectivity levels in excess of 60%
• Saves on initial facility investments possibly eliminating some light fixtures
• Capable of reducing annual energy costs by lowering electrical requirements due to improved lighting
• Produces twice the abrasion resistance of plain concrete
• Economical to install
• Pre-mixed and packaged to eliminate jobsite mixing and inconsistencies
• Excellent for both indoor and outdoor use
• Provides a dense, high-strength surface for easy maintenance
SURFLEX LIGHT REFLECTIVE

Compressive Strength ASTM C 109, 2" (50 mm) cubes Relative Abrasion Resistance
ASTM C 779
AGE STRENGTH
% of Reference
1 day 4,000 psi (27.6 MPa)
250
3 days 5,000 psi (34.5 MPa)
200
7 days 7,000 psi (48.3 MPa)
150
14 days 9,000 psi (62.1 MPa)
100
28 days 10,000 psi (69.0 MPa)
50
Appearance: SURFLEX LIGHT REFLECTIVE is a free 0
flowing powder as packaged. The color will appear
darker after placement on the concrete surface, but
will lighten substantially after curing and drying. The Plain Cured High- SURFLEX
Concrete Strength
final finish can be any texture normally achievable Concrete
LIGHT RE-
FLECTIVE
with concrete and should be specified by the owner. Topping
Master Format #:
Packaging
03 35 16
SURFLEX LIGHT REFLECTIVE is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) bags with polyethylene liners for moisture
Shelf Life
1 year in original, unopened package

185
Coverage
SURFLEX LIGHT REFLECTIVE may be applied at rates from 1.0 to 2.5 lb/ft² (4.9 to 12.2 kg/m²). Greater
application rates yield better total abrasion resistance, and may be used with special considerations. Contact
Directions for Use
Application Tips: Colored (pigmented) dry shakes require special attention for a uniform color. If the job
involves placement of SURFLEX LIGHT REFLECTIVE, care should be taken with regards to the following; delay
application of the shake as long as possible to get the maximum color saturation at the surface of the slab, apply
the shake as evenly as possible and in two applications for maximum uniformity, and do not burnish trowel the
floor. Best appearance is achieved by hand troweling the final finish.
Clean-up
Rev. 6.11
186
SURFLEX TR
Traprock Floor Hardener

Description
SURFLEX TR is a special formulation of finely graded trap rock aggregates, plasticizers and cement binder. It is
an economical concrete floor hardener recommended for both interior and exterior use. SURFLEX TR has been
designed to give increased abrasion resistance to both interior and exterior floors and slabs.
• Loading docks • Commercial and industrial facilities
• High wear floors and aisleways • Restaurants and dairies
• Factory and warehouse floors
Features/Benefits
• Non-rusting materials make it possible to use SURFLEX TR outdoors as well as indoors
• Eucon dispersing agent contained in SURFLEX TR makes it possible to incorporate SURFLEX TR into the
surface of low slump concretes resulting in exceptionally high surface strengths for maximum wear resistance.
Relative Abrasion Resistance Appearance: SURFLEX TR is a free flowing powder

as packaged. It is available in a natural cement
ASTM C 779
color only. The final troweled appearance can be any
% of Reference texture consistent with that expected from concrete
SURFLEX TR
and should be specified by the owner.
250
200
150
100
50
0
Plain Cured Pea SURFLEX TR

Concrete Gravel
Topping
Packaging
SURFLEX TR is packaged in 55 lb (24.9 kg) bags with polyethylene liners for moisture protection. Material is
Master Format #:
Shelf Life
03 35 16

187
Coverage
SURFLEX TR may be applied at rates from 0.75 to 2.0 lb/ft² (3.7 to 9.8 kg/m²). The higher the application rate
the better total abrasion resistance. Greater application rates may be used with special considerations. Contact
Directions for Use

Clean-up
• Interior concrete must be non air-entrained. For exterior, air-entrained concrete, contact The Euclid Chemical
Company for special instructions.
• For additional abrasion resistance beyond that offered by SURFLEX TR consider the use of EUCO-PLATE, an
iron aggregate floor hardener.
• Store in a dry place.
Rev. 6.11
188
DIAMOND-PLATE
Non-oxidizing, Heavy Duty Metallic Floor Hardener

Description
DIAMOND-PLATE is a dry shake, metallic floor hardener with graded, non-oxidizing metallic aggregate in a
high strength cementitious binder. Designed to be incorporated into fresh concrete slabs, DIAMOND-PLATE
provides a dense, tough surface capable of withstanding the abrasion and impact loading seen by floor
slabs of numerous industrial and manufacturing facilities. DIAMOND-PLATE has been specially formulated
with a non-rusting aggregate for increased abrasion resistance in areas subject to frequent moisture or water
exposure. DIAMOND-PLATE can also be mixed in a mortar consistency and placed along joints to provide edge
reinforcement.
• Warehouses • Passenger and freight terminals • Joint shoulder reinforcement
Features/Benefits
• Provides a high strength wearing surface in areas subject to constant or frequently wet conditions without
oxidizing
• Gives up to 6 times the abrasion resistance of plain, cured concrete
• Metallic aggregate is free of rust, oil, or other contaminants
• Virtually non-dusting in service, easy to clean and maintain
• Available in 8 standard colors including a natural cement color
DIAMOND-PLATE
Compressive Strength ASTM C 109, 2” (5 cm) cubes ASTM C 779
AGE STRENGTH % of Reference

1 day 4,000 psi (27.6 MPa) 600
3 days 5,000 psi (34.5 MPa) 500
7 days 7,000 psi (48.3 MPa) 400
14 days 9,000 psi (62.1 MPa) 300
28 days 10,000 psi (69.0 MPa) 200
Appearance 100
DIAMOND-PLATE is a free flowing powder as
packaged. The final finish can be any
Plain Cured Natural High- Diamond-
texture normally achievable with concrete
Master Format #:
Concrete Aggre- Strength Plate

and should be specified by the owner. gate Dry Concrete
03 35 16
Shakes Topping
Packaging
DIAMOND-PLATE is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) bags with polyethylene liners for moisture protection. Material
Shelf Life

189
Coverage
DIAMOND-PLATE may be applied at rates from 1.0 to 3.0 lb/ft² (4.9 to 14.6 kg/m²). Greater application rates yield
better total abrasion resistance, and may be used with special considerations. Contact your Euclid Chemical
Directions for Use

Armored Joints: DIAMOND-PLATE may also be used as a mortar in constructing armored floor joints.
Clean-up
occur.
• Not recommended for floors subjected to acids or other corrosive chemicals that may attack a cement based
material.
Rev. 6.11
190
DIAMOND-PLATE LIGHT REFLECTIVE
Non-oxidizing, Light Reflective, Metallic Floor Hardener

Description
DIAMOND-PLATE LIGHT REFLECTIVE is a dry shake, metallic floor hardener with graded, non-oxidizing
metallic aggregate in a high strength cementitious binder. Designed to be incorporated into fresh concrete
slabs, DIAMOND-PLATE LIGHT REFLECTIVE provides a dense, tough surface capable of withstanding the
abrasion and impact loading seen by floor slabs of numerous industrial and manufacturing facilities. DIAMOND-
PLATE LIGHT REFLECTIVE has been specially formulated to give increased reflectivity and to improve lighting
levels in combination with a non-rusting aggregate for increased abrasion resistance. DIAMOND-PLATE LIGHT
REFLECTIVE can also be mixed into a mortar consistency and placed along joints to provide edge reinforcement.
• Warehouses • Passenger and freight terminals • Joint shoulder reinforcement
Features/Benefits
• Provides a high strength wearing surface in areas subject to constant or frequently wet conditions without
oxidizing
• Gives up to 6 times the abrasion resistance of plain, cured concrete
• Metallic aggregate is free of rust, oil, or other contaminants
• Virtually non-dusting in service, easy to clean and maintain
DIAMOND-PLATE LIGHT REFLECTIVE

• Capable of reducing annual energy costs with lowering of electrical requirements due to improved lighting
Compressive Strength ASTM C 109, 2” (50 mm) cubes Relative Abrasion Resistance
AGE STRENGTH ASTM C 779
1 day 4,000 psi (27.6 MPa) % of Reference

3 days 5,000 psi (34.5 MPa) 600
7 days 7,000 psi (48.3 MPa) 500
14 days 9,000 psi (62.1 MPa) 400
28 days 10,000 psi (69.0 MPa) 300

Appearance 200
DIAMOND-PLATE LIGHT REFLECTIVE is a free 100
flowing powder as packaged. The final finish can
be any texture normally achievable with concrete
Plain Cured Natural High- Diamond-
and should be specified by the owner.
Master Format #:
Concrete Aggre- Strength Plate Lt

gate Dry Concrete Reflective
03 35 16
Shakes Topping
Packaging
DIAMOND-PLATE LIGHT REFLECTIVE is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) bags with polyethylene liners for moisture
Shelf Life
2 years in original, unopened package

191
Coverage
DIAMOND-PLATE LIGHT REFLECTIVE may be applied at rates from 1.0 to 3.0 lb/ft² (4.9 to 14.6 kg/m²). Greater
application rates yield better total abrasion resistance and may be used with special considerations. Contact
Directions for Use
Armored Joints- DIAMOND-PLATE LIGHT REFLECTIVE may also be used as a mortar in constructing armored
floor joints.
Curing and Sealing After finishing operations are complete and the surface will not be marred by foot traffic,
Clean-up
occur.
• Not recommended for floors subjected to acids or other corrosive chemicals that may attack a cement based
material.
Rev. 6.11
192
Grouts
Grouts
Cementitious
Cementitous Grout Application Guide 195
Dry Pack Grout 197
Euco Cable Grout 199
Euco Cable Grout PTX 201
Euco Pre-Cast Grout 203
Euco Rock 205
Euco Tremie Grout 207
Hi-Flow Grout 209
Hi-Flow Metallic Grout 211
NC Grout 213
NS Grout 215
NS Metallic Grout 217
Tammsgrout Supreme 219

Epoxy
Epoxy Grout Application Guide 221
E3-F 223
E3-G 225
E -HP
3
227
E3-X 229
Polygrout 231
Grouts
CEMENTITIOUS GROUT
APPLICATION GUIDE
The following instructions detail the general installation procedures for grouts manufactured by The Euclid
Chemical Company. The contractor and engineer are encouraged to consult the individual product’s technical
data sheet regarding possible additional suggestions for successful installations.
Grouts
Note: If the contractor is not familiar with standard grout placement techniques, a pre-job meeting is suggested
to review the project details unique to the particular job. Contact your local Euclid Chemical Company
representative for additional information.
These instructions are written specifically for DRY PACK GROUT, EUCO PRE-CAST GROUT, HI-FLOW GROUT,
HI-FLOW METALLIC GROUT, NC GROUT, NS GROUT, NS METALLIC GROUT, and TAMMSGROUT SUPREME.
General Guidelines
Careful preparation is a must for a successful grouting operation. Grouts generally work best at 50°F to 80°F
(10°C to 27°C). Cold weather retards strength gain and set time. Hot weather accelerates setting time and
causes premature drying of the grout. Provide heating or cooling, as necessary, to compensate for extremes in
ambient temperatures and resulting variations in cure time.
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: Surfaces to be grouted should be clean and free from rust, grease or oil. Determine work
schedule and method of placing grout, then prepare strong, properly braced and oiled forms to retain the grout
and provide relief holes, if needed. Saturate the area to be grouted with water until it is uniformly damp and
CEMENTITIOUS GROUT APPLICATION GUIDE

remove excess water just before placing the grout. For pouring, allow a minimum clearance of 2" (50 mm) for
entry and 6" (150 mm) minimum grout head. On the placing side, slope the form to assist in grout movement
and to prevent trapping air. Do not have close fitting forms, allow 1" (25 mm) horizontal clearance and 1" (25
mm) vertical clearance for height above the bottom of the baseplate. Forming must provide for venting to avoid
entrapment of air. (see figure 1).
Mixing: Consult the particular grout’s individual

data sheet for the correct amount of mixing SHIMS
6" (150 mm)
water. Small quantities may be mixed with a drill 1" (25 mm) minimum
and “jiffy” mixer. Use a paddle type mortar mixer minimum 2" (50 mm)
for large jobs. All materials should be in the
proper temperature range of 50°F to 80°F (10°C
to 27°C). Add the appropriate amount of clean,
potable water for the batch size and then add the
dry grout. Mix for a minimum of 2 to 3 minutes.
The flow of the grout should be checked (for
fluid grouts, use a flow cone) and care taken to
ensure the grout will not bleed with the amount
of water that has been added.The mixed grout
should be quickly transported to the grout head
box and placed immediately. Head boxes are
typically used for flowable and fluid grouts. DRY
BRACE FORMS CAULK AT
PACK GROUT does not use a head box. The
FOUNDATION
amount of time the contractor has to place the
grout varies from product to product. Consult Figure 1 Forming Suggestions
the particular grout’s individual data sheet for
the time allotted. Do not add sand or cement to
the grout since this may significantly change the
grout’s characteristics.

195
Placing: Some grouts set more rapidly than plain mortars, therefore, place quickly and continuously. Carefully
control the water content to be sure excess water is not added forcing the grout to bleed. Place all grout from
one side only to assure complete filling of the space being grouted. Use a rod or strapping to assist in placement
on large or difficult placements. Use a hopper to provide a constant head of grout and to assure a continuous
flow into place. Hand placing must be done with sufficient water to produce a plastic flowable consistency to
assure hydration and strength development of the grout.
Curing: As soon as the sheen of water disappears and the grout has begun to stiffen, pond with water or cover
with wet rags, burlap or plastic to prevent premature drying. The forms may be removed as soon as the grout has
stiffened or set sufficiently to prevent sagging away from the bottom of the baseplate. Cut back shoulders and
finish to desired texture where required or desired. Following the cut back, seal all surfaces with two (2) coats of
a high solids curing compound. If a curing compound is not desired, keep all surfaces wet by sprinkling the
surface with water and covering with burlap or polyethylene for a minimum of 72 hours.
• Keep grout from freezing until it reaches a minimum strength of 4,000 psi (28 MPa).
• Proper curing is required.
• Do not add admixtures or fluidifiers.
• Store materials in a dry place.
• Do not use materials at temperatures that may cause premature freezing.
• Employ cold weather or hot weather grout practices as the temperatures dictate.
• Do not use as a topping.
Rev. 6.11
196
DRY PACK GROUT
Non-shrink Structural Grout
Description
DRY PACK GROUT is a natural aggregate, high strength, non-shrink material designed specifically for mixing
and placing at a damp pack consistency. When mixed with a minimum of water, it can be placed into voids and
Grouts
spaces where forming or containment of self-leveling grouts is not possible or desirable.
• Structural baseplates • Precast elements
• Equipment and machinery • Honeycombing
• Anchor bolts
Features/Benefits
• Extremely cohesive at damp pack consistency
• Non-staining and similar to concrete in appearance
• Contains no chloride based or corrosive ingredients
• High compressive strengths for maximum bearing capability
• Non-shrink for long term support
Compressive Strength 2” (50 mm) cubes (ASTM C 109 Modified*)
Age Strength
1 day......................................3,500 psi (17.2 MPa)
3 days....................................4,000 psi (27.6 MPa)
Dry Pack Grout

7 days....................................6,000 psi (41.4 MPa)
28 days..................................7,000 psi (48.3 MPa)
* See ASTM C1107 Section 11.5
Appearance
DRY PACK GROUT is a free flowing powder designed to be mixed with water. After mixing and placing, the color
may initially appear much darker than the surrounding concrete. While this color will lighten up substantially as
the concrete cures and dries out, the grout may always appear somewhat darker than the surrounding concrete.
Packaging
DRY PACK GROUT is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) bags. When mixed with .55 to .70 gal (2.08 to 2.65 L) of water,
this unit will yield .40 ft3 (.011 m3) of material.
Shelf Life
• Meets requirements of CRD C 621, Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-Shrink Grout. Note: The test
Master Format #:
method does not specifically make provision for the testing of damp pack consistencies. The procedures were modified to
accommodate the placement of damp pack grout into the test mold.
03 61 13
• Meets the performance requirements of ASTM C 1107 (modified) standard specification for packaged dry,
hydraulic cement grout (non-shrink).
Directions for Use
The contractor and engineer are encouraged to consult and review the Euclid Chemical bulletin “Cementitious
Grout Application Guide”. The document offers instructions detailing the general installation of Euclid Chemical
manufactured cement-based grout products.

197
to review the project details unique to the particular job. Contact your local Euclid Chemical Company
Mixing: Water content will vary depending on temperature and relative humidity, but generally will fall between
0.55 and 0.70 gal (2.08 and 2.65L) per 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag. You must use a drill and mixing paddle when mixing
DRY PACK GROUT.
Placement: Using a ramming device with a blunt end, pack the mixed grout into the void or space with sharp,
quick blows. The use of hammers or mallets may also be helpful. Build up material until the space is full. Finish
exposed edges as desired. Be careful during the packing process not to knock critical plates out of alignment.
Curing and Sealing: Proper curing procedures are important to ensure the durability and quality of the grout.
Wet cure the grout for 24 hours. Then, cure the grout with a high solids curing compound, such as SUPER REZ-
SEAL or SUPER AQUA-CURE VOX. All exposed grout must be cured.
Clean-Up
• Keep grout from freezing until it reaches a minimum strength of 4,000 psi (27.6 MPa).
• Do not use material at temperatures that may cause premature freezing.
• Follow ACI guidelines for grouting under hot and cold temperature conditions.
Rev. 6.11
198
EUCO CABLE GROUT
High Performance Cable Grout
Description
EUCO CABLE GROUT is formulated as a pumpable, non-shrink, high strength cementitious grout. It provides
Grouts
corrosion protection for steel cables, anchorages and rods. EUCO CABLE GROUT is extremely fluid and will
fill-in the tighest annular spaces around the cables. In its cured state, EUCO CABLE GROUT is similar in
appearance to concrete.
• Pre-stressed/post-tensioned cables and rods • Beams
• Cable anchor plates • Columns
• Precast wall panels • Tight areas tradtional grouts can reach
Features/Benefits
• Easy to pump or pour • Does not contain any added chloride ions
• Non-shrink performance provides excellent bearing • Contains no aluminum powder
• Fluid, high strength and self-leveling Can contribute to LEED points
Property Result
Fluid Consistency 2.2 gal water/50 lb bag (8.3L/22.7kg)
EUCO CABLE GROUT

Flow Rate (flow cone)
15 to 25 seconds
ASTM C939 & CRD C621
Setting Time at 70°F (21°C) 5 to 7 hours
ASTM C191 (will vary depending on material and ambient temperature)
Modulus of Elasticity
28 days: 5.8 x 106 psi (4.0 x 104 MPa)
ASTM C580
1 day: 2,800 psi (19 MPa)
7 days: 6,200 psi (43 MPa)
ASTM C109 modified
28 days: 10,000 psi (69 MPa)
EUCO CABLE GROUT is a free flowing powder designed to be mixed with water. After mixing and placing, the
color may initially appear much darker than the surrounding concrete. While this color will lighten up substantially
as the grout cures, the grout may appear somewhat darker than the surrounding concrete.
Packaging/Yield
Master Format #:
EUCO CABLE GROUT is packaged in 50 lb (22.7kg) bags and yields 0.59 ft³ (0.017m³) of fluid grout when mixed
03 62 13
with 2.2 gal (8.3L) of water.
Shelf Life
6 months in its original, unopened package

199
Directions for Use
If the contractor is unfamiliar with standard grout placement techniques, a pre-job meeting is suggested to
review the project details unique to the particular job. Contact your local Euclid Chemical representative for
Mixing: Fluid Consistency Estimated Water Content*
Consistency Estimated Water Content*
Fluid 2.0 to 2.2 gal/50 lb (7.6 to 8.3 L/22.7kg)
* Do not add water in an amount that will cause bleeding. Do not add aggregate or cement to the grout since this
action will change its precision grouting characteristics. Note: If checking flow rates on the job site, this product
is not used at a flow cone rate of less than 15 seconds.
Placing: If placing this product in a hot environment, the use of cold water will increase the working time.
Pumping continuously will aid in grout uniformity and ease of placement.
Curing and Sealing: Cure all exposed grout by wet curing for 24 hours. Then, cure any exposed grout with
a high solids curing compound, such as SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR, SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR350 or SUPER
DIAMOND CLEAR VOX.
• Clean tools and equipment with water before the material hardens.
• Do not add any admixture or fluidifiers.
• Do not use mixing water in an amount that will cause the mixed grout to bleed or segregate.
• Rate of strength gain and setting times are significantly affected at temperature extremes.
• The Euclid Chemical Company is not responsible for stress corrosion caused by ingredients in the flushout,
saturation, or mixing water, or for contaminants either in the space being grouted or from other materials used
in the system.
Rev. 6.11
200
EUCO CABLE GROUT PTX
High Tolerance Cable Grout
Description
EUCO CABLE GROUT PTX is formulated to produce a pumpable, non-shrink, high strength grout. It provides
corrosion protection for steel cables, anchorages and rods. EUCO CABLE GROUT PTX is extremely fluid, and
Grouts
cured grout is similar in appearance to concrete. EUCO CABLE GROUT PTX exhibits thixotropic properties
defined in PTI specifications, and can be used to repair previously grouted cables.
• Pre-stressed/post-tensioned cables and rods • Beams
• Post-tensioned ducts • Columns
• Precast wall panels • Cable anchor plates
Features/Benefits
• Easy to pump or pour • Aggregate free
• Non-shrink performance provides excellent bearing • Pumpable for a minimum of 2 hrs @ 90˚F (32˚C)
• Fluid, high strength and self-leveling Can contribute to LEED points
Property Result
Fluid Consistency 1.5 to 1.7 gal water/50 lb bag (5.7 to 6.4 L/22.7 kg)
EUCO CABLE GROUT PTX

Flow Rate
9 to 20 seconds
ASTM C 939 modified
Setting Time at 70°F (21°C) 8 to 10 hours
ASTM C 191 (will vary depending on material and ambient temperature)
1 day: 2,000 psi (14 MPa)
Compressive Strength 3 days: 3,400 psi (23 MPa)
ASTM C 109 7 days: 5,500 psi (38 MPa)
28 days: 7,500 psi (52 MPa)
Hardened Height Change 24 hours: 0% to 0.1%
ASTM C 1090 28 days: ≥ height at 24 hours (0.2%)
Plastic Expansion
0% to 2% for up to 3 hours
ASTM C 940
0% at 5 minutes
Bleeding
0% at 3 hours
ASTM C 94 modified
(200 mL Gellman Filter @ 100 psi)
Chloride Permeability
28 days (30V for 6 hrs): 660 coulombs
ASTM C 1202
Master Format #:
03 62 13
EUCO CABLE GROUT PTX is a free flowing powder designed to be mixed with water. After mixing and placing, the
color may initially appear much darker than the surrounding concrete. While this color will lighten up substantially as
the grout cures, the grout may always appear somewhat darker than the surrounding concrete.
Shelf Life
6 months in original, unopened package

201
Packaging/Yield
EUCO CABLE GROUT PTX is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) bags or pails and yields 0.57 ft³ (0.016 m³) of fluid
grout when mixed with 1.68 gal (6.4 L) of water.
Specifications/compliances
• Complies with Post-Tensioning Institute • ASTM C 887
Specifications (PTI) • ASTM C 1090
• CRD C 621 • Canadian MTQ
• ASTM C 1107-05
Directions for Use

If the contractor is not familiar with standard grout placement techniques, a pre-job meeting is suggested to
review the project details unique to the particular job. Contact your local Euclid Chemical representative for
Mixing:
Consistency Estimated Water Content*
Fluid 1.5 to 1.7 gal/50 lb (5.7 to 6.4 L/22.7kg)
Flowable 1.3 to 1.5 gal/50 lb (4.9 to 5.7 L/22.7kg)
* Do not add water in an amount that will cause bleeding. Do not add aggregate or cement to the grout since
this action will change its precision grouting characteristics. Note: To minimize bleeding in vertical applications
greater than twenty feet, The Euclid Chemical Company recommends a water dosage no greater than 1.54
gal/50 lb (5.8 L/22.7 kg).
Curing and Sealing: Cure all exposed grout by wet curing for 24 hours, then with a high solids curing and
sealing compound, such as SUPER REZ-SEAL or SUPER AQUA-CURE VOX.
• Clean tools and equipment with water before the material hardens.
• Do not use mixing water in an amount or at a temperature that will cause the mixed grout to bleed or segregate.
• Employ cold weather or hot weather grouting practices as the temperature dictates.
• Rate of strength gain and setting times are significantly affected at temperature extremes.
• The Euclid Chemical Company is not responsible for stress corrosion caused by ingredients in the flushout,
saturation, or mixing water, or for contaminants either in the space being grouted or from other materials used
in the system.
Rev. 6.11
202
EUCO PRE-CAST GROUT
Non-shrink, Non-stain, Non-metallic
Description
EUCO PRE-CAST GROUT is designed for critical use where high strength, non-staining characteristics and
positive expansion are required. It contains only natural aggregate and an expansive cementitious binder.
Grouts
• Pre-cast panels
• Structural supports
• Honeycomb detailing
Features/Benefits
• Non-staining natural aggregate for better • High strength and durability
appearance • Appearance similar to concrete
• Non-shrink providing full structural support • Does not contain any added chloride ions
• Extended working time in warm weather
Property Result
Plastic Consistency 0.75 gal water/50 lb bag (2.8 L/22.7 kg)
Flow Rate (flow table)
140% flow
ASTM C 939 & CRD C 621
EUCO PRE-CAST GROUT

1 day: 4,000 psi (27.6 MPa)
3 days: 5,800 psi (40.0 MPa)
ASTM C 109 Modified
7 days: 6,800 psi (46.9 MPa)
see ASTM C 1107 Section 11.5
28 days: 8,000 psi (55.2 MPa)
3 days: 0.03%
Expansion 7 days: 0.06%
CRD C 621 14 days: 0.07%
28 days: 0.07%
Setting Time Initial Set: 40 minutes
ASTM C 191 Final Set: approximately 1 hour
Appearance: EUCO PRE-CAST GROUT is a free flowing powder designed to be mixed with water. After mixing
and placing, the color may initially appear much darker than the surrounding concrete. While this color will
lighten up substantially as the concrete cures and dries out, the grout may always appear somewhat darker
than the surrounding concrete.
Master Format #:
Packaging/Yield
03 62 13
EUCO PRE-CAST GROUT is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) bags and yields 0.42 ft3 (0.012 m3) of plastic grout when
mixed with 0.75 gal (2.8 L) of water.
Shelf Life

203
• Meets the requirements of CRD C 621, Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-Shrink Grout, at a flowable
consistency.
• Shows positive expansion when tested in accordance with ASTM Specification C 1090, Standard Test Method
for Measuring Changes in Height of Cylindrical Specimens from Hydraulic-Cement Grout, at a flowable
consistency.
• Meets the performance requirements of ASTM C 1107, combination volume adjusting grout standard
specification for packaged dry, hydraulic-cement grout (non-shrink), at a flowable consistency.
Directions for Use

If the contractor is not familiar with standard grout placement techniques, a pre-job meeting is suggested to review
the project details unique to the particular job. Contact your local Euclid Chemical Company representative for
Careful preparation is a must for a successful grouting operation.
Grouts generally work best at 50oF to 80oF (10oC to 27oC). Cold weather retards strength gain and set time.
Hot weather accelerates setting time and causes premature drying of the grout. Provide heating or cooling, as
necessary, to compensate for extremes in ambient temperatures and resulting variations in cure time.
Surface Preparation: Surfaces to be grouted should be clean and free from rust, grease or oil. Determine work
schedule and method of placing grout, then prepare strong, properly braced and oiled forms to retain the grout
and provide relief holes, if needed. Saturate the area to be grouted with water until it is uniformly damp and
remove excess water just before placing the grout.
jobs. All materials should be in the proper temperature range of 50°F to 80°F (10°C to 27°C). Add the appropriate
amount of clean, potable water for the batch size and then add the dry grout. Mix for a minimum of 2 to 3
minutes. The mixed grout should be quickly transported to the grouting site and placed immediately.
Consistency Estimated Water Content
Plastic 0.75 gal/50 lb bag (2.8 L/22.7 kg)
Placing: If placing this product in hot weather, the use of cold water will increase the working time.
Cure the grout with a high solids curing compound, such as SUPER REZ-SEAL or SUPER AQUA-CURE VOX.
Clean-Up
• Employ cold weather or hot weather grouting practices as the temperatures dictates.
• Do not allow to freeze until 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) is attained.
• Rate of strength gain is significantly affected at temperature extremes.
Rev. 6.11
204
EUCO ROCK
Quick-setting Flowable Grout
Description
EUCO ROCK is a pourable hydraulic cement designed for anchoring or grouting applications. EUCO ROCK
sets rapidly and quickly achieves load bearing and bond strength properties. It does not contain any metallic
Grouts
aggregate or chloride ions.
• Interior and exterior applications • Reinforcing rods
• Anchoing bolts in concrete slabs • May be mixed with aggregates when placed into
• Hand rails & posts voids requiring large amounts of material
Features/Benefits
• Fast and controlled set • Excellent freeze/thaw durability
• Positive expansion Can contribute to LEED points
• High early strengths
Compressive Strength ASTM C 109, 2” (50 mm) cubes @ 72oF (22oC)
3 hour.s.....................................2,600 psi (17.9 MPa)
24 hours....................................3,800 psi (26.2 MPa)
7 days.......................................5,000 psi (34.5 MPa)
28 days.....................................6,000 psi (41.7 MPa)
Appearance: EUCO ROCK is a free flowing powder designed to be mixed with water. After mixing and placing,
Euco Rock
the product color may initially appear darker than the surrounding concrete. This color will lighten substantially
as the anchoring cement cures and dries out.
Packaging
EUCO ROCK anchoring cement is available in 3 package sizes:
50 lb (22.7 kg) pail........... 0.48 ft³ (0.014 m³) yield
50 lb (22.7 kg) bag........... 0.48 ft³ (0.014 m³) yield
12 lb (5.40 kg) bag........... 0.11 ft³ (0.003 m³) yield
Yields are based upon 1.5 gal (5.7 L) of water/50 lb (22.7 kg) unit.
Shelf Life
Directions for Use

Master Format #:
Hole Preparation: Roughen the surface of the hole with a stiff wire brush on the end of a drill or with a rotary
impact drill and then clean out with water and oil-free compressed air.
03 62 13
Saturation: Saturate the hole for a minimum of one hour before grouting. Remove all free standing water.
Mixing and Placing: EUCO ROCK can be easily mixed with a drill and mixing prop. Mix for 1 minute to a
smooth, lump-free consistency. When anchoring bolts, posts or rails in concrete or masonry, mix EUCO ROCK
to a flowable consistency and pour around the bolt and fill the hole. Crown the cement slightly with a trowel or
putty knife as it stiffens. When anchoring on a horizontal surface, mix EUCO ROCK to a plastic consistency and
fill the predampened, clean hole. Drive the anchor into place and finish surface with a trowel.

205
Clean-Up
• Place material quickly due to fast set.
• Do not use EUCO ROCK as an anchoring grout for rock bolts. Consult your local Euclid Chemical representative
for information on grouting rock bolts.
Rev. 6.11
206
EUCO TREMIE GROUT
Non-shrink Underwater Grout
Description
EUCO TREMIE GROUT is specially designed for use in underwater grouting applications. This highly flowable,
Grouts
cement based, non-shrink grout remains in a cohesive, well blended mix when placed or pumped in off-shore
concrete repairs.
• Underwater grouting • Underwater concrete structures
• Pier supports • Off-shore rigging
Features/Benefits
• Non-shrink for positive, secure support
• Does not contain chlorides as additives which may contribute to rebar corrosion
• Extended working time in hot environment
• Highly flowable for easy mixing & pumping
• Rapid strength gain for early support
Property Result @ 72°F (22°C) Result @ 40°F (4°C)
EUCO TREMIE GROUT

1 day: 3,200 psi (22 MPa) 1 day: 1,000 psi (7 MPa)
3 days: 4,800 psi (33 MPa) 3 days: 3,000 psi (20 MPa)
ASTM C 109 Modified
see ASTM C 1107 Section 11.5
3 days: +0.06%
Volume Change 7 days: +0.06%
--
ASTM C 1090 & CRD C 621 14 days: +0.06%
28 days: +0.06%
Setting Time Initial Set: 5 hours Initial Set: 12 hours
ASTM C 191 Final Set: 7 hours Final Set: 18 hours
Appearance: EUCO TREMIE GROUT is a free flowing powder designed to be mixed with water. After mixing and
placing, the color may initially appear much darker than the surrounding concrete. While this color will lighten
substantially as the concrete cures and dries out, the grout may always appear somewhat darker than the
surrounding concrete.
Master Format #:
Packaging/yield
03 62 13
EUCO TREMIE GROUT is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) bags. Yield is approximately .45 ft3 (.013 m3) of flowable
grout when mixed with 1.2 gal (4.5 L) of water. (Also available in bulk bags).
Shelf Life

207
• Meets the requirements of CRD C 621, Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-Shrink Grout.
• Shows positive expansion when tested in accordance with ASTM Specification C 1090, Standard Test Method
for Measuring Changes in Height of Cylindrical Specimens from Hydraulic-Cement Grout.
• Meets the performance requirements of ASTM C 1107, combination volume adjusting grout standard
specification for packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement grout (non-shrink).
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: All concrete surfaces should be clean, sound and free of surface scaling and any material
which may interfere with bond.
Mixing: Approximately 1.2 gal (4.5 L) of water will be required to produce a flowable consistency. EUCO TREMIE
GROUT should not be placed at a fluid consistency. Mechanically mix for a minimum of 3 minutes then place
the grout. For placements where the clearance is beyond 2" (51 mm), EUCO TREMIE GROUT may be extended
with up to 20 lb (9.1 kg) of 3/8" (9.5 mm) pea gravel per 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag.
Placing: After mixing, grout may be pumped into place. EUCO TREMIE GROUT should be placed continuously.
Curing: No special curing is required when product is placed under water. Air exposed surfaces may be coated
with a curing compound if hot, dry conditions exist.
Clean-up
• Keep exposed portions of the grout from freezing until a minimum strength of 4,000 psi (27.6 MPa) is reached.
Rev. 6.11
208
HI-FLOW GROUT
High-tolerance Non-shrink Grout
Description
HI-FLOW GROUT is specially designed for use where high tolerance, high strength and high fluidity are required.
It is formulated as a natural aggregate system with a shrinkage-compensating binder and is highly flowable
Grouts
without sacrificing strength or performance capabilities. HI-FLOW GROUT is formulated to provide consistent
and exacting performance in critical grouting operations.
• Heavy duty grouting of machinery and equipment • Bridge seats
• Structural columns • Bearing plates
• Crane rails • Anchorages
Features/Benefits
• Highly fluid and extremely placeable for easy field use
• High strength for maximum load bearing
• Non-shrink with minimum positive expansion for high-tolerance performance
• Non-bleeding and non-segregating at a fluid consistency
• Does not contain any chlorides or additives which may contribute to corrosion of base structure
• Total shrinkage compensation provides a maximum bearing surface for the greatest overall support
• Rapid strength gain to minimize turnaround time for equipment regrouts
• Excellent working time at high ambient temperatures
The following results were determined at laboratory conditions.
Hi-Flow Grout
Fluid Consistency
Property 1.2 gal/50 lb
(4.5 L/22.7 kg)
Initial 21 seconds
Flow Rate
30 minutes 29 seconds
(ASTM C939/CRD C621)
1 day 3000 psi (21 MPa)
3 days 4800 psi (33 MPa)
(ASTM C109 Modified*)
2 in (50 mm) cubes
Volume Change
1, 3, 7, and 28 days 0.05%
(ASTM C 1090/CRD C 621)
Freeze-Thaw Resistance
93%
(ASTM C666 Procedure A)
Master Format #:

Flexural Strength
(ASTM C 348)
03 62 13

Split Tensile Strength
28 days 550 psi (3.7 MPa)
(ASTM C 496)
Setting Time Initial Set 3 hrs 50 min
(ASTM C 191) Final Set 4 hrs 50 min
* See ASTM C 1107 Section 11.5

209
Appearance
Appearance: HI-FLOW GROUT is a free flowing powder designed to be mixed with water. After mixing and
up substantially as the concrete cures and dries out, the grout may always appear somewhat darker than the
Packaging
HI-FLOW GROUT is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) bags and yields 0.45 ft3 (0.013 m3) of fluid grout when mixed
with 1.2 gal (4.5 L) of water.
Shelf Life
• CRD C 621, Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-Shrink Grout
• Shows positive expansion when tested in accordance with ASTM Specification C-1090, “Standard Test Method
for Measuring Changes in Height of Cylindrical Specimens from Hydraulic-Cement Grout”
• ASTM C 1107, “Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (non-shrink)”
• Canada MTQ
Directions for Use
General Information: While HI-FLOW GROUT is designed to be fluid poured at temperatures ranging from 40oF
to 100oF (4.5oC to 38oC) the product is most easily placed at temperatures of 60oF to 70oF (16oC to 21oC).
When HI-FLOW GROUT will be placed greater than 5” (12.7cm) in depth, contact Euclid Chemical Technical
Support.

Mixing Water Guide gal (L)/bag
Consistency Estimated Water Content Mix Time
Fluid 1.1 to 1.2 (4.2 to 4.5 L ) 5 Min.
Flowable 0.95 to 1.10 (3.6 to 4.6 L) 5 Min.
Plastic. 0.85 to 0.95 (3.2 to 4.2 L) 5 Min.
Placing: HI-FLOW GROUT should be placed continuously.
Curing & Sealing: Proper curing procedures are important to ensure the durability and quality of the grout. Wet
cure the grout until the forms are stripped. Cure the grout with a high solids curing compound, such as SUPER
REZ-SEAL or SUPER AQUA-CURE VOX.
Note: More or less water may be required to achieve a 25 second flow or the desired placing consistency,
depending on temperature and other variables. Do not add sand or cement to the grout since this action will
change its precision grouting characteristics.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with water before material hardens.
• Do not add sufficient water to promote bleeding of the grout.
• Do not use this product at a flow cone rate of less than 20 seconds if checking flow rate on the job site.
• Keep the grout from freezing until a minimum strength of 4000 psi (28 MPa) is reached.
• Employ cold or hot weather grouting practices per ACI standards as the temperature dictates.
• Shoulder cracking may occur on wide shoulders, improperly cured shoulders, or at stress points such as shimpacks,
bolts or plate stiffeners. These cracks are of no structural significance.
210
HI-FLOW METALLIC GROUT
High-tolerance Non-shrink Grout
Description
HI-FLOW METALLIC GROUT is specially designed for use where high tolerance, high strength and high fluidity
are required. It is formulated as a metallic aggregate system with a shrinkage-compensating binder. It is highly
Grouts
flowable without sacrificing strength or performance capabilities and is formulated to provide consistent and
exacting performance.
Features/Benefits
• Reinforced with metallic aggregate for extra heavy duty service conditions
• Highly fluid and extremely placeable for easy field use
• High strength for maximum load bearing
• Non-shrink with minimum positive expansion for high-tolerance performance
• Non-bleeding and non-segregating at a fluid consistency
• Does not contain any chlorides or additives which may contribute to corrosion of base structure
• Total shrinkage compensation provides a maximum bearing surface for the greatest overall support
• Rapid strength gain to minimize turnaround time for equipment regrouts
• Excellent working time at high ambient temperatures
Hi-Flow Metallic Grout

Fluid Consistency
Property 1.1 gal/50 lb
(4.2 L/22.7 kg)
Initial 22 seconds
Flow Rate
(ASTM C939/CRD C621)
1 day 4,000 psi (27 MPa)
3 days 6,000 psi (40 MPa)
(ASTM C109 Modified*)
2 in (50 mm) cubes
28 days 9,000 psi (61 MPa)
Volume Change
1, 3, 7, and 28 days +0.03%
(ASTM C 1090/CRD C 621)
Flexural Strength
(ASTM C 348)
Split Tensile Strength
28 days 550 psi (3.7 MPa)
Master Format #:
(ASTM C 496)
Setting Time Initial Set 3 hrs 50 min
03 62 16
(ASTM C 191) Final Set 4 hrs 50 min

*See ASTM C 1107 Section 11.5
Appearance: HI-FLOW METALLIC GROUT is a free flowing powder designed to be mixed with water. After mixing
and placing, the color may initially appear much darker than the surrounding concrete. While this color will lighten up
substantially as the concrete cures and dries out, the grout may always appear somewhat darker than the surrounding
concrete.

211
Packaging
HI-FLOW METALLIC GROUT is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) bags and yields 0.40 ft3 (0.013m3) of fluid grout when
Shelf Life
• CRD C 621, Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-Shrink Grout
• Shows positive expansion when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1090, “Standard Test Method for Measuring
Changes in Height of Cylindrical Specimens from Hydraulic-Cement Grout”
• ASTM C 1107, “Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (non-shrink)”
Directions for Use
General Information: While HI-FLOW METALLIC GROUT is designed to be fluid poured at temperatures ranging
from 40oF to 100oF (4oC to 38oC) the product is most easily placed at temperatures of 60oF to 70oF (16oC to 21oC).
Mixing: Where HI-FLOW METALLIC GROUT will be placed at a thickness over 5” (12.7cm), up to 20 lb (9.1 kg) of pea
gravel must be added to each bag of grout. Note that the water demand to achieve a certain flow level of the grout will
change. Mixing Water Guide gal (L)/bag
Consistency Estimated Water Content* Mix Time
Fluid 1.10 to 1.35 (4.2 to 5.1 L) 5 Min.
Flowable 1.05 to 1.10 (3.9 to 4.2 L) 5 Min.
Plastic .95 to 1.05 (3.6 to 4.0 L) 5 Min.
Placing: HI-FLOW METALLIC GROUT should be placed continuously.
Curing & Sealing: Proper curing procedures are important to ensure the durability and quality of the grout. Wet
cure the grout until the forms are stripped. Cure the grout with a high solids curing compound, such as SUPER
REZ-SEAL or SUPER AQUA-CURE VOX.
*More or less water may be required to achieve a 25 second flow or the desired placing consistency, depending on temperature and
other variables. Do not add sand or cement to the grout since this action will change its precision grouting characteristics.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with water before material hardens.
• Do not use this product at a flow cone rate of less than 20 seconds if checking flow rate on the job site.
• Keep the grout from freezing until a minimum strength of 4000 psi (28 MPa) is reached.
• Employ cold or hot weather grouting practices per ACI standards as the temperature dictates.
• Shoulder cracking may occur on wide shoulders, improperly cured shoulders, or at stress points such as shimpacks,
bolts or plate stiffeners. These cracks are of no structural significance.
Rev. 6.11
212
NC GROUT
Non-Corrosive Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout
Description
NC GROUT is a non-shrink, non-staining grout. Its multi-flow quality allows this product to be used at various
consistencies including pumping into inaccessible areas. NC GROUT may be packed, rodded, vibrated, poured or
Grouts
pumped. It has high compressive and flexural strengths and is non-rusting and non-corrosive. For high performance
base plate applications, use NS GROUT.
• Interior or exterior • Columns • Precast structural members
• Machinery base plates • Post tensioned cables • Tee joints
• Structural steel • Anchor bolts
Features/Benefits
• Extended working time for easier placement • Sets rapidly and uniformly
• Can be used in wet areas - will not rust • Versatile flow capability
• Above or below grade Can contribute to LEED points
Plastic Consistency Pourable Consistency Fluid Consistency
Property 0.9 gal/50 lb 1.0 gal/50 lb 1.2 gal/50 lb
(3.4 L/22.7 kg) (3.8 L/22.7 kg) (4.5 L/22.7 kg)
Flow Rate
100% (Flow Table) 120% (Flow Table) 30 seconds (flow cone)
(ASTM C 230)
Compressive Strength 3 days 5500 psi (38 MPa) 3 days 4000 psi (28 MPa) 3 days 3000 psi (21 MPa)
(ASTM C109 Modified*) 7 days 7500 psi (52 MPa) 7 days 6000 psi (41 MPa) 7 days 4800 psi (33 MPa)
2 in (50 mm) cubes 28 days 8000 psi (55 MPa) 28 days 7500 psi (52 MPa) 28 days 6000 psi (41 MPa)
3 days 0.06% 3 days 0.08% 3 days 0.09%
NC GROUT
Expansion (CRD C 621)
28 days 0.08% 28 days 0.08% 28 days 0.10%
Initial: 1.5 to 2 hrs Initial: 2.5 to 3.5 hrs Initial: 5 to 5.5 hrs
Setting Time (ASTM C 191)
Final: 3 to 4 hrs Final: 4 to 5 hrs Final: 7 to 8 hrs
7 day: 900 psi (6 MPa)
Flexural Strength (ASTM C 348) -- --
28 day: 1200 psi (8 MPa)
Modulus of Elasticity 4.31 x 106 psi
-- --
(ASTM C 469) (3.0 x 104 MPa)
Note: Normal 28 day compressive strength of portland cement concrete is 3,000 psi. Controlled expansion measures the
grout’s ability to attain and maintain positive and complete contact with base plates, rebars, bolts, etc. Fluidity and flowability
describes the grout’s ability to flow freely into a cavity. Pull-out tests are conducted to establish anchoring strength. There
are no standard tests for this. NC GROUT was tested by drilling 2˝(50mm) diameter holes in fully cured concrete with a
compressive strength of 7,520 psi (52 MPa). Pull out tests made at 7, 14 and 28 days on #9 grade 60 bars embedded in the
Master Format #:
holes at depths of 12” (200mm), 15” (380mm), and 18” (460 mm) showed that the ultimate failure load exceeded the 60,000 psi
(414 MPa) specified minimum yield point of the rebar.
03 62 13
Packaging
NC GROUT is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) poly-lined bags.
Shelf Life

213
• Corp of Engineer Specifications CRD C 621 and CRD C 588
• ASTM standards: ASTM C 827 and ASTM C 1107
Coverage
One 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag will yield approximately 0.43 ft³ (0.012 m³) of grout.
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: Concrete surface must be structurally sound, dry, free of grease, oils, coatings, dust, curing
compounds and other contaminants. Edges of concrete to be grouted that are less than 1“ (25 mm) thick must be
vertically cut to form a uniform edge. Smooth substrates must be abraded to ensure proper bonding. Shim and
anchor support elements to prevent movement. Steel must be free of oils, greases, dirt, old coatings or chemical
contaminants. Saturate the prepared area with potable water for 12 to 24 hours before application. Remove excess
water from holes and voids just before placement to prevent dilution of the grout. Mixing: NC GROUT is factory-
proportioned and comes ready to use by adding only potable water. Use 0.9 gal (3.4L) of water per bag of grout for
a plastic mix: 1 gal (3.8L) for a pourable mix and 1.2 gal (4.5L) for a high flow mix. For a uniform mix, use a paddle
type mortar mixer. Add 2/3 of the water for the mix consistency desired into the mixer. Add the grout and mix partially.
Add the remaining water to achieve the final consistency. Thoroughly mix the entire quantity for 2 to 3 minutes. Do
not mix more material than can be placed in 30 minutes. Application: All grouting should be done using established
procedures and recommendations of ACI for placing and curing concrete. The method of forming must provide for
rapid continuous pouring of the grout and allow a clearance of at least 3” (76mm) for entry and a “grout head” of 4” to
6” (100 to 152 mm). Avoid air entrapment by providing adequate venting at the high point and by pouring the grout
from one side only. Forms should be 1 to 2” (25 to 50 mm) above the base plate. NC GROUT must be placed by
pumping, pouring, rodding or vibrating. Lengths of small link chain laid in the form before placing the grout will assist
in compacting the grout and eliminating air voids. The grout must be placed and compacted within 30 minutes after
mixing. In applications where grout thickness exceeds 5” (12.7cm) up to 25 lbs(11.3 kg) of 3/8” (9.5 mm) clean
and damp pea gravel may be added per 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag to extend the mix. After placement, rapid drying must
be prevented by covering the grout with wet burlap or by applying a membrane forming curing compound from
the Euclid Chemical series of products. The forms may be removed after the grout has hardened to an initial set
(see material properties). When grouting at higher temperatures, use cold water, shade the area to be grouted and
protect the placed grout from direct sunlight for at least 48 hours by covering with wet burlap. When grouting at low
temperatures, raise the temperature of foundation bedplate by using steam or infrared heaters. Use warm mixing
water and cover the grout to retain warmth. Do not apply heat directly to the grout after its placement. Chloride
based set accelerators are not recommended.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with water immediately following. Clean drips with water while still wet. Dried NC
GROUT will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Do not add anything but potable water.
• Do not add water in an amount that will cause bleeding or segregation. More or less water may be required to
achieve a 25 second flow or the desired placing consistency, depending on temperature and other variables.
• Do not retemper with additional water after the mixture has started to set.
• Do not add sand or cement to the grout since this action will change its precision grouting characteristics.
• Do not aerate the mix.
• Use appropriate cold and hot weather grouting procedures per ACI guidelines as the temperature dictates.
• Proper curing practices must be used.
• Apply at temperatures 40°F (4°C) and rising.
• Do not use as an overlay.
Rev. 6.11
214
NS GROUT
Non-shrink, Non-staining, Non-metallic Grout
Description
NS GROUT is designed for critical use where high strength, non-staining characteristics and positive expansion
are required. NS GROUT contains only natural aggregate and an expansive cementitious binder. It is extremely
Grouts
flowable. When cured, it appears similar to concrete in appearance.
• Pumps and fans • Generators • Anchor bolts
• Compressors & motors • Machine bases of all types • Column baseplates
Features/Benefits
• Non-staining natural aggregate for better • Outstanding strength
appearance • Appearance of plain concrete
• Excellent bearing • Does not contain any added chloride ions
• Flowable and self-leveling Can contribute to LEED points.
• Compatible with galvanic anodes (Fluid)
The following results were determined at laboratory conditions.
Flowable Consistency Fluid Consistency

Property 1.0 gal/50 lb 1.2 gal/50 lb
(3.8 L/22.7 kg) (4.5 L/22.7 kg)
Flow Rate 20 to 30 seconds (Flow
120% (Flow Table)
(ASTM C939/CRD C621) Cone)
NS GROUT
Compressive Strength 3 days 4500 psi (31 MPa) 3 days 3500 psi (24 MPa)
(ASTM C109 Modified*) 7 days 6000 psi (41 MPa) 7 days 5000 psi (34 MPa)
2 in (50 mm) cubes 28 days 8500 psi (59 MPa) 28 days 6800 psi (47 MPa)
3 days 0.01% 3 days 0.01%
7 days 0.03% 7 days 0.03%
Expansion (CRD C621)
14 days 0.05% 14 days 0.05%
28 days 0.05% 28 days 0.05%
Freeze-Thaw Resistance
300 cycles: 97% NA
(ASTM C666 Procedure A)
Initial Set 3 hrs 5 min
Setting Time
Final Set 4 hrs 47 min
* See ASTM C 1107 Section 11.5
Packaging/Yield
Master Format #:
NS GROUT is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) bags and pails. 50 lbs yields 0.45 ft3 (0.013 m3) of fluid grout when
03 62 13
NS GROUT 50 lb (22.7 kg) with 25 lbs (11.3 kg) of 3/8” (9.5 mm) pea gravel will yield approximately 0.60 ft3
(0.017 m3) of flowable consistency grout. Use pea gravel for deep fills over 5” (12.7 cm) only.
Shelf Life

215
Appearance
NS GROUT is a free flowing powder designed to be mixed with water. After mixing and placing, the color may
initially appear much darker than the surrounding concrete. While this color will lighten up substantially as it
cures and dries out, the grout may always appear somewhat darker than the surrounding concrete.
• Fully complies with CRD C 621, Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-Shrink Grout
• Fully complies with ASTM C 1107, Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout
• C anadian MTQ
Directions for Use
Note: The contractor and engineer are encouraged to consult and review the Euclid Chemical bulletin: "Cementitious Grout
Application Guide". The document offers instructions detailing the general installation of Euclid Chemical manufactured
cement-based grout products. Important: If the contractor is not familiar with standard grout placement techniques, a
pre-job meeting is suggested to review the project details unique to the particular job. Contact your local Euclid Chemical
Mixing Consistency: Estimated Water Content*
Fluid 1.1 to 1.2 gal/50 lb bag (4.2 to 4.5 L/22.7 kg)
Flowable 1.0 gal/50 lb bag (3.8 L/22.7 kg)
Plastic 0.9 gal/50 lb bag (3.4 L/22.7 kg)
* Do not add water in an amount that will cause bleeding or segregation. More or less water may be required to achieve a 25
second flow or the desired placing consistency, depending on temperature and other variables. Do not add sand or cement
to the grout since this action will change its precision grouting characteristics.
Where NS GROUT will be placed at a thickness over 5" (12.7 cm), up to 25 lb (11.3 kg) of pea gravel must be
added to each bag of grout. Note that the water demand to achieve a certain flow level of the grout will change.
Once the correct amount of water has been added to a clean mixing pail, mix the grout with a high speed drill
and mixing paddle for 3 minutes. Quickly transport the grout to the placement area.
Placing: NS GROUT sets more rapidly than plain mortars; therefore, place quickly and continuously. If placing
this product in hot weather, the use of cold water will increase the working time.
Wet cure the grout until the forms are stripped. Cure the grout with a high solids curing compound, such as
SUPER REZ-SEAL or SUPER AQUA-CURE VOX .
Clean-Up
• Do not use this product at a flow cone rate of less than 20 seconds if checking flow rates on the job site (see
CRD C-611 or ASTM C 939 for flow cone method).
• Do not allow it to freeze until 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) is attained.
• Employ cold or hot weather grouting practices per ACI guidelines as the temperature dictates.
• Add pea gravel when placing at a thickness greater than 5” (12.7 cm).
Rev. 6.11
216
NS METALLIC GROUT
Non-catalyzed Grout
Description
NS METALLIC GROUT is a factory-blended, non-shrink grout for use in critical applications. It incorporates
the latest technological advances in shrinkage prevention and internal reinforcement. It is non-staining and,
Grouts
therefore, useful in many aesthetic applications. The expansion of NS METALLIC GROUT is not dependent
upon, nor accompanied by oxidation of metallic aggregate, nor is the expansion dependent on the liberation
of gas. NS METALLIC GROUT is internally reinforced with specially processed iron aggregate for exceptional
durability under heavy duty loading.
Features/Benefits
• Non-shrink; positive expansion • Easily placed at fluid consistency
• Stable iron aggregate - edges will not ravel Can contribute to LEED points
• Does not contain added chloride
Property Result
Fluid Consistency 1.0 gal water/50 lb bag (8.7 L/22.7 kg)
Flow Rate (flow cone)
25 seconds
NS METALLIC GROUT
ASTM C 939 & CRD C 621
3 days: +0.06%
Expansion
14 days: +0.06%
CRD C 621
28 days: +0.06%
1 day: 3,500 psi (24 MPa)
3 days: 5,000 psi (34 MPa)
ASTM C 109 Modified
7 days: 6,500 psi (45 MPa)
(see ASTM C 1107 Sections 11.5)
28 days: 7,000 psi (48 MPa)
Appearance: NS METALLIC GROUT is a free flowing powder designed to be mixed with water. After mixing and
substantially as the grout cures and dries out, the grout may always appear somewhat darker than the surrounding
concrete.
Packaging/yield
NS METALLIC GROUT is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) bags. One 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag of NS METALLIC GROUT
Master Format #:
mixed with 1.0 gal (3.8 L) of water will yield 0.38 ft3 (.011 m3) of fluid grout.
03 62 16
Shelf Life

217
• Fully complies with CRD C 621, Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-Shrink Grout
• Shows positive expansion when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1090, Standard Test Method for Measuring
Changes in Height of Cylindrical Specimens from Hydraulic Cement Grout.
• Meets the performance requirements of ASTM C 1107, Combination Volume Adjusting Grout Standard
Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-Shrink)
Directions for Use

Note: The contractor and engineer are encouraged to consult and review the Euclid Chemical bulletin: “Cementitious Grout
Application Instructions”. The document offers instructions detailing the general installation of Euclid Chemical manufactured
cement-based grout products. Important: If the contractor is not familiar with standard grout placement techniques, a pre-job
meeting is suggested to review the project details unique to the particular job. Contact your local Euclid Chemical Company
Mixing Consistency Estimated Water Content Mix Time
Fluid 0.85 to 1.05 gal (3.2 to 3.8 L) 5 min.
Flowable 0.80 to 0.90 gal (3.0 to 3.4 L) 5 min.
Plastic 0.70 to 0.80 gal (2.6 to 3.0 L) 5 min.
Where NS METALLIC GROUT will be placed at a thickness over 5” (12.7 cm), up to 20 lb (9.1 kg) of clean and
damp pea gravel must be added to each bag of grout. Note that the water demand to achieve a certain flow
level of the grout will change slightly. Do not add sufficient water to promote bleeding of the grout.
Placing: NS METALLIC GROUT sets more rapidly than plain grouts; therefore, place quickly and continuously. If
placing this product in hot weather, the use of cold water will increase the working time. NS METALLIC GROUT
is most easily placed at temperatures of 60°F to 70°F (16°C to 21°C).
Wet cure the grout until the forms are stripped. Then, cure the grout with a high solids curing compound, such
as SUPER REZ-SEAL or SUPER AQUA-CURE VOX as described in the Application Guidelines for Cementitious
Grout.
Clean-Up
• Do not use a flow cone rate of less than 20 seconds if checking flow rates on the job site (see CRD C 611 of
ASTM C 939 for flow cone method).
• Do not use with any admixtures or fluidifiers.
• Add clean and damp pea gravel when plaing at a thickness over 5” (12.7 cm) deep.
• Employ cold and hot weather grouting practices per ACI standards as the temperatures dictate.
• Keep the grout from freezing until a minimum strength of 4,000 psi (27.6 MPa) is reached.
Rev. 6.11
218
TAMMSGROUT SUPREME
Heavy Duty Multiflow Grout
Description
TAMMSGROUT SUPREME is a heavy duty, high early strength, non-shrink, non-staining, ready-to-use grout.
The multiflow characteristic enables this single product to be packed, rodded, vibrated, poured, or pumped.
Grouts
TAMMSGROUT SUPREME is a proprietary formulation of modified cements and selectively graded aggregates
containing no chlorides, iron, or gas forming materials.
• Interior or exterior • Anchor bolts
• Large structural columns • Precast “tee” joints
• Pump & machine bases • Bearing plates
• Post-tension cables
Features/Benefits
• High flexural and compressive strengths • Non-corrosive
• Non-metallic • Non-gas forming
• Non-rusting Can contribute to LEED points
Plastic Consistency Flowable Consistency Fluid Consistency

Property 0.8 gal/55 lb 0.9 gal/55 lb 1.1 gal/55 lb
TAMMSGROUT SUPREME
(3.1 L/25 kg) (3.3 L/25 kg) (4.0 L/25 kg)
Flow Rate
100% (Flow Table) 140% (Flow Table) 27 seconds (flow cone)
(ASTM C 230)
1 day 7000 psi (49 MPa) 1 day 6510 psi (45 MPa) 1 day 4314 psi (30 MPa)
Compressive Strength 3 days 9356 psi (64 MPa) 3 days 7245 psi (50 MPa) 3 days 6541 psi (45 MPa)
(ASTM C109 Modified*) 7 days 10856 psi (75 MPa) 7 days 9688 psi (67 MPa) 7 days 7968 psi (55 MPa)
2 in (50 mm) cubes 14 days 11863 psi (82 MPa) 14 days 10565 psi (73 MPa) 14 days 8355 psi (58 MPa)
28 days 13210 psi (91 MPa) 28 days 11510 psi (79 MPa) 28 days 9410 psi (65 MPa)
1 day 0.051%
Expansion (CRD C 621) 7 days 0.057% -- --
28 days 0.057%
Initial: 12 min Initial: 27 min Initial: 35 min
Setting Time (ASTM C 191)
Final: 28 min Final: 37 min Final: 46 min
Master Format #:
• ASTM C 827
• CRD C 621
03 62 13
Coverage/Yield
One 55 pound (24.9 kg) bag will yield approximately 0.5 ft³ (0.014 m³)

219
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: Concrete surface must be structurally sound, clean, free of loose or deteriorated concrete,
dust, dirt, and other contaminants. Steel or other surfaces must be clean and free of paint, dust, oil, rust, and other
contaminants. Edges of concrete to be grouted that are less than 1” (25 mm) thick must be vertically cut to form a
uniform butt. Smooth substrates must be abraded to ensure proper bonding. Saturate prepared area with potable
water for 12 to 24 hours minimum, before application. Remove excess water from holes and voids just before
placement, to prevent dilution of the TAMMSGROUT SUPREME.
Forming: Construct forms to provide for rapid and continuous grout placement. Provide venting or air relief openings
to avoid air entrapment. Allow 1” (25 mm) for “head,” and 1/2 in (13 mm) for clearance. For pouring, allow a
minimum 3” (7.6 cm) entry clearance, and a 6” (15.2 cm) “head”. Seal wood forming surfaces to prevent absorption
of moisture from the TAMMSGROUT SUPREME. Anchor forms tightly to prevent movement. Caulk to prevent
moisture loss. Remove forms after final set, usually in 1 to 2 hours.
Mixing: TAMMSGROUT SUPREME requires only potable water for mixing. Use a rotary mixer with rubber tipped
blades. Small quantities may be mechanically mixed using a slow speed motor and mixing blade. Measure mixing
water accurately. Add the following measured amount of water to achieve the proper grout consistency: Plastic:
3.25 to 3.5 qt (3.1 to 3.3 L) Flowable: 3.5 to 3.75 qt (3.3 to 3.6 L) Fluid: 4.25 to 4.5 qt (4.0 to 4.3 L). With the mixer
running, add water, then slowly add the bag of TAMMSGROUT SUPREME. Mix for 2 to 3 minutes to a smooth, even
consistency. Place the grout within 5 min of mixing to utilize the full benefit of the expansion process. Continue
mixing additional batches as necessary to maintain a continuous grout flow into the forms. Do not mix more material
than can be placed in 20 min. Do not retemper TAMMSGROUT SUPREME.
Application: Mix TAMMSGROUT SUPREME in sufficient quantities to ensure continuous flow at time of placement.
Pack or pour grout to vent air and avoid air entrapment. Maintain a minimum 6”(15.2 cm) “head” of pourable grout
mix, to allow for grout flow, proper filling, and air venting. TAMMSGROUT SUPREME may be pumped with a heavy
duty progressive cavity or diaphragm type pump specifically designed for the purpose. Protect grout areas from sun and
wind during hot weather, and use cold water for mixing. Warm water may be used during colder weather. TAMMSGROUT
SUPREME normally achieves final set in 1 to 2 hours. Following final set, strip formwork and remove excess grout. For
placements deeper than 5” (2.7 cm), contact your local Euclid Chemical representative.
Curing: Immediately following form removal, cure the TAMMSGROUT SUPREME using standard ACI curing
procedures. To prevent rapid water loss, apply a Euclid Chemical curing compound or cover with wet burlap for 48
hours.
Clean-Up
Clean application tools and mixing equipment with water immediately after use. Hardened TAMMSGROUT
SUPREME will require removal by mechanical means.
• Measure water accurately to prevent strength reduction.
• Do not use additives such as set retarders, set accelerators, or calcium chloride.
• Do not place TAMMSGROUT SUPREME when temperatures are below, or expected to fall below 35°F (1.7°C)
within 72 hours.
• Do not retemper TAMMSGROUT SUPREME.
Rev. 6.11
220
EPOXY GROUT APPLICATION GUIDE
The following instructions detail the general installation procedures for epoxy grouts manufactured by The
Euclid Chemical Company. The contractor and engineer are encouraged to consult the individual product’s
technical data sheet regarding possible additional suggestions for successful installations.
Grouts
to review the project details unique to the particular job. Contact your local Euclid Chemical sales representative
for additional information.
These instructions are written specifically for e3-F, e3-G, e3-HP, E3-X, and polygrout epoxy grouts.
General Guidelines
Careful preparation is a must for a successful grouting operation. Grouts generally work best at 40°F to 90°F
(4°C to 32°C). Cold weather retards strength gain and set time. Hot weather accelerates setting time and causes
premature curing of the grout. Provide heating or cooling, as necessary, to compensate for extremes in ambient
temperatures and resulting variations in cure time. The testing data listed on the product technical data sheets
was under laboratory conditions at a temperature of 70°F (21°C).
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: The base concrete to which the grout will be placed upon must be cured and free from
any curing compounds, grease, oil, or any other contaminants. Mechanical preparation is the preferred means
of cleaning concrete. The surface profile must resemble a freshly fractured surface, with coarse aggregate
showing and in sound condition. Any anchor bolt holes to be filled must also be clean and sound. Mechanical
preparation is recommended with the holes being flushed with water and blown dry with oil-free compressed air.
The baseplates of machinery that will be grouted must also be free of rust, grease, oil, and other contaminants.
EPOXY GROUT APPLICATION GUIDE

Sandblasting to a “white metal” finish is desired and recommended for full effectiveness of the grout.
Form Preparation: Forms must be liquid tight. Seal all joints with a joint sealant, putty, or other means to create
a waterproof barrier. Forms must be strong and well braced. To facilitate stripping, forms should be coated with
two coats of a paste wax or individually wrapped in polyethylene film. A head box should be used in conjunction
with the form work to facilitate placement. A 45° slope angle on the head box will be sufficient and aid in flowing
the grout under the equipment. Forms should be set slightly raised higher than the plate itself. This ensures
that 100% bearing is attained.
Mixing: DO NOT ADD WATER, SOLVENT OR ANY OTHER CHEMICALS TO THE PRODUCT! Mix the A &
B components separately for 1 minute each prior to mixing together. Be sure to clean the mixing paddle in
between. Secondly, using a drill and a prop mixer, mix the A & B components together for 2 minutes. For ease
of mixing, add the Part B to the Part A (not the reverse). The epoxy must be well mixed to ensure the proper
chemical reaction. After 2 minutes, place the epoxy into a clean and dry mortar mixer. Add the bags of Part C
(aggregate) and mix for 2 or 3 minutes until the aggregate is completely wetted out. Place immediately.
Placement: If space permits, place the mortar directly into anchor bolt holes and blockouts using a funnel to
insure proper direct placement. When grouting machinery plates, pour mixed epoxy grout into the head box
to aid in flow of material under the machinery. If a head box is not used, flow the grout across the shortest
dimension of the baseplate. Pre-placing straps underneath the machinery can aid in moving the material across
the area, especially if it is cooler and the grout is less viscous. Epoxy grouts should be placed at a minimum
thickness of 1 inch (2.54 cm) and a maximum of 3-6 inches(7.6-15.2 cm), depending upon the product. Please
refer to the individual product data sheet for placement limitations. Epoxy products cure by exotherming. If
the material is placed too thick, excessive heat buildup can cause the material to crack. Cracking occasionally
occurs with epoxy grouts. This does not mean the grouting job was a failure. If it is possible for detrimental
fluids to seep through the grout into the substrate, then the cracks in the grout may be filled with a low viscosity
epoxy product produced by The Euclid Chemical Company. Note: Please bring all epoxy grout materials and
working areas as close to 70°F (21°C) as possible. Colder temperatures will significantly reduce flowability of
grout, thus making it more difficult for placement, which could have an effect on bearing. Higher temperatures
will increase initial flowability, but it will also cut down on working time. Vibrating epoxy grout in any case is not
acceptable.

221
Finishing: If a smooth finish to the visible area is desired, a light misting of EUCO SOLVENT on the surface
followed by a trowel is acceptable.
Curing: Epoxy grouts need no special curing procedures, for they will cure on their own, unless the temperature
is below 40°F (4°C).
• Wear protective gear, gloves, and safety goggles when handling epoxies.
• Do not use over frozen concrete.
• Grout should be placed at ambient temperatures of 40°F to 90°F (4°C to 32°C).
• Store material at room temperature hours prior to use; 70°F (21°C) is optimal.
• Rate of strength gain is significantly affected by temperature extremes
• In all cases, consult the Material Safety Data Sheet for the product prior to use.
Rev. 6.11
222
E3-F
High Flow Epoxy Grout System
Description
E3-F high flow epoxy grout is the performance standard for flowable epoxy grouts. A special resin and hardener
formulation plus a proprietary aggregate filler allows E3-F to travel through a standard grout box in less than a minute.
Grouts
Designed with excellent engineering properties, this product provides high bearing and ease of placeability. E3-F
was specially designed for applications involving the grouting of large plates and narrow configurations.
• Large or wide plates requiring precision grouting • Rail grouting, keyways and inverted baseplates
• Machinery, equipment or structural elements • Narrow clearance situations including anchor bolts
needing maximum bearing support
Features/Benefits
• Fast return to service • Maximum possible bearing
• User friendly placing characteristics • High chemical resistance
• Excellent bond, machinery to foundation • Exceptional strengths including flexural and tensile
Property 1 day 3 days 7 days 28 days

Compressive Strength 6,900 psi 10,400 psi 11,500 psi 12,700 psi
ASTM C 579, 2 in (50 mm) cubes @ 70°F
(48 MPa) (72 MPa) (79 MPa) (88 MPa)
(21°C)
Creep --
0.00034 in/in 0.00044 in/in 0.00055 in/in
ASTM C 1181 (0.00034 mm/mm) (0.00044 mm/mm) (0.00055 mm/mm)
Modulus of Elasticity 0.75 x 106 psi 1.16 x 106 psi 1.21 x 106 psi 1.46 x 106 psi
E3-F
ASTM C 580 (5.2 x 103 MPa) (8.0 x 103 MPa) (8.3 x 103 MPa) (10.1 x 103 MPa)
Flexural Strength 3,300 psi 3,600 psi 3,800 psi 3,900 psi
ASTM C 580 (23 MPa) (25 MPa) (26 MPa) (27 MPa)
Tensile Strength 1,850 psi 2,100 psi 2,150 psi 2,225 psi
Coefficient of Thermal Expansion 2.7 x 10-5 in/in/°F (4.9 x 10-5 mm/mm/°C)

ASTM C 531
Bond to Concrete Exceeds tensile and shear strength of concrete
Chemical Resistance Excellent resistance to most industrial chemicals
Abrasion Resistance Greater than concrete
Gel Time
Master Format #:
80 minutes at 73°F (23°C)

ASTM D 2471
Peak Exotherm
03 63 00
91°F (33°C) at 230 minutes

ASTM D 2471
Appearance Dark gray
Packaging
E3-F is packaged in 1.5 ft3 (0.042 m3) units. Part A, resin: 2.87 gal (10.8 L) Part B, hardener: 0.36 gal (1.4 L)
Part C, aggregate: 3/60 lb (27.2 kg) bags

223
Shelf Life
Coverage
One unit of E3-F will grout approximately 18 ft2 (1.7 m2) when placed at an average depth of 1" (25 mm).
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: New concrete must be a minimum of 28 days old. The concrete must be clean and rough.
All oil, dirt, debris, paint and unsound concrete must be removed. The surface must be prepared mechanically
using a scabbler, bushhammer, shotblast or other suitable equipment which will give a surface profile of a
minimum 1/8" (3 mm) and expose the coarse aggregate of the concrete. The final step in cleaning should be the
complete removal of all residue with a vacuum cleaner or pressure washing. Acid etching is acceptable only
when mechanical preparation is impractical. It is recommended that only contractors experienced in the acid
etching process use this means of surface preparation. The salts of the reaction must be thoroughly pressure
washed away. Allow the concrete to completely dry. Note: Even with proper procedures, an acid etched surface
may not provide as strong a bond as mechanical preparation procedures. All concrete must possess an open
surface texture with all curing compounds and sealers removed.
Form Preparation: Forms must be liquid tight to prevent leakage, and they should be strong and well braced.
To facilitate stripping, the forms should be coated with two applications of paste wax or each piece wrapped
with polyethylene.
Anchor Bolt Holes and Blockouts: Holes and blockouts must be cleaned of all dust, dirt and debris and
allowed to dry. If the sides are smooth, roughen the hole with a stiff bristle wire brush or with a rotary brush hammer.
Mixing: Mix parts A & B (resin & hardener) for 2 minutes using a drill and mixing prop. For ease of mixing, add
the Part B to the Part A (not the reverse). The epoxy must be well mixed to ensure proper chemical reaction. After
the epoxy has been mixed, add the Part C (aggregate) and mix for 2 to 3 minutes more until the aggregate is
completely wetted out. For large jobs, use a mortar mixer for mixing in the Part C aggregate. Place immediately.
Placement: Pour into anchor bolt holes and blockouts through a funnel or directly if space permits. When
grouting plates, pour grout into the headbox and allow to flow under the plate. Straps pre-placed under the plate
will aid in working the grout across. Grout should be placed at a maximum of 3" (75 mm) per lift when placed
in a large mass. Note: Bring all E3-F materials as well as foundation and baseplate as close to 70°F (21°C)
as possible. Cold temperatures will significantly reduce flow characteristics and will increase the difficulty of
baseplate grouting. Higher temperatures will increase initial flow but cut down on working time.
Curing: E3-F requires no special curing procedures.
Finish: If a smooth finish is desired, the surface of the grout may be brushed and troweled with a light application
of EUCO SOLVENT.
Clean-Up
Tools and mixer may be cleaned with EUCO SOLVENT, xylene or toluene solvents.
• Wear protective gloves and eye glasses when handling epoxies.
• Store material at room temperature before use.
Rev. 6.11
224
E3-G
Epoxy Grout System For Equipment Bases
Description
E3-G is a high strength epoxy grout designed for grouting machine and equipment bases of all types. Formulated
to be used in both thin and thick sections, E3-G is suitable for grouting bases of numerous configurations. This
Grouts
formula gives excellent strengths and resistance to many corrosive chemicals. E3-G provides excellent bond to
the foundation and provides maximum bearing for long lasting grouting projects.
• Pumps, compressors and fans • Tanks, turbines and housings
• Deep fill machine bases • Large anchor bolts and keyways
• All high strength applications including crane rails • Pour-backs for post tension projects
Features/Benefits
• Fast setting/quick return to service • Excellent bond foundation to base plate
• High chemical resistance • Stable in deep or thick sections
• Excellent bearing
Property 1 day 3 days 7 days 28 days

Compressive Strength 8,000 psi 10,800 psi 11,900 psi 13,000 psi
ASTM C 579, 2 in (50 mm) cubes @ 70°F
(55 MPa) (74 MPa) (82 MPa) (90 MPa)
(21°C)
Creep --
0.00028 in/in 0.00029 in/in 0.00040 in/in
ASTM C 1181 (0.00028 mm/mm) (0.00029 mm/mm) (0.00040 mm/mm)
Modulus of Elasticity 0.95 x 106 psi

-- --
1.24 x 106 psi
ASTM C 580 (6.5 x 103 MPa) (8.5 x 103 MPa)
E3-G
Flexural Strength 3,500 psi 3,700 psi 3,800 psi 3,900 psi
Tensile Strength 2,000 psi 2,040 psi
-- --
ASTM C 307 (14 MPa) (14 MPa)
Coefficient of Thermal Expansion 2.6 x 10-5 in/in/°F (4.5 x 10-5 mm/mm/°C)

ASTM C 531
Abrasion and Impact Resistance Greater than concrete
Gel Time 172 minutes at 73°F (23°C)
ASTM D 2471
Master Format #:
Peak Exotherm 91°F (33°C) at 320 minutes

ASTM D 2471
03 63 00
Appearance Dark gray
Coverage
One 0.5 ft3 (0.014 m3) unit of E3-G will cover approximately 6 ft2 (0.6 m2) when placed at a depth of 1" (25 mm).
One 2.0 ft3 (0.057 m3) unit of E3-G will cover approximately 24 ft2 (2.2 m2) when placed at a depth of 1" (25 mm).

225
Packaging
E3-G is packaged in 0.5 ft3 (0.014 m3) and 2.0 ft3 (0.057 m3) kits.
0.5 ft3 (0.014 m3) Kit 2.0 ft3 (0.057 m3) Kit E3-G aggregate can be adjusted for flowability:
Resin, Part A: Aggregate Loading Yield
0.86 gal (3.3 L) 3.43 gal (13.0 L) 4.00 bags 2.00 ft3 (0.057 m3)
Hardener, Part B: 3.75 bags 1.89 ft3 (0.054 m3)
0.11 gal (0.4 L) 0.44 gal (1.67 L) 3.50 bags 1.78 ft3 (0.050 m3)
Aggregate, filler Part C: 3.25 bags 1.67 ft3 (0.047 m3)
60 lb (27.2 kg) 4/60 lb (27.2 kg) bags 3.00 bags 1.56 ft3 (0.044
m )
3
Shelf Life
Directions for Use
minimum 1/8" (3 mm) and expose the coarse aggregate of the concrete. The final step in cleaning should be
the complete removal of all residue with a vacuum cleaner or pressure washing. Acid etching is acceptable
only when mechanical preparation is impractical. It is recommended that only contractors experienced in
the acid etching process use this means of surface preparation. The salts of the reaction must be thoroughly
pressure washed away. Allow the concrete to completely dry. Note: Even with proper procedures, an acid
etched surface may not provide as strong a bond as mechanical preparation procedures. All concrete must
possess an open surface texture with all curing compounds and sealers removed.
Form Preparation: Forms must be liquid tight to prevent leakage, and should be strong and well braced. To
facilitate stripping, the forms should be coated with two applications of a paste wax or each form wrapped with
polyethylene.
Anchor Bolt Holes and Blockouts: Holes and blockouts should be cleaned of all dust, dirt and debris and
allowed to dry. If the sides are smooth, roughen the hole with a stiff bristle wire brush or with a rotary brush
hammer if access permits.
the Part B to the Part A (not the reverse). The epoxy must be well mixed to ensure proper chemical reaction.
After the epoxy has been mixed, add the Part C (aggregate) and mix for 2 to 3 minutes more until the aggregate
is completely wetted out. For large jobs, use a mortar mixer. Place immediately.
grouting plates, pour grout into the headbox and allow to flow under the plate. Straps pre-placed under the
plate will aid in working the grout across. Grout should be placed at a minimum of 1" (25 mm) thick and a
maximum of 6" (152 mm) per lift when placed in a large mass. Note: Bring all E3-G materials as well as the
foundation and baseplate as close to 70°F (21°C) as possible. Cold temperatures will significantly reduce flow
characteristics and will increase the difficulty of baseplate grouting. Higher temperatures will increase initial flow
but cut down on working time. Curing: E3-G requires no special curing procedures. Finish: If a smooth finish
is desired, the surface of the grout may be brushed and troweled with a light application of EUCO SOLVENT.
Clean-Up
Tools and mixer may be cleaned with EUCO SOLVENT, xylene, or acetone.
226
E3-HP
High Performance Epoxy Grout System
Description
E3-HP high performance epoxy grout is a performance standard for epoxy grouts. E3-HP is formulated from a
new resin technology. Further, a proprietary aggregate blend has created a grout which exceeds all current
Grouts
performance standards. This product is characterized by high bearing surface, low creep and excellent
flowability. E3-HP is clearly the choice for the toughest and most demanding epoxy installations where bond to
existing foundation and machinery is critical.
• Turbines, compressors or stamping machines with • Industrial areas requiring maximum bond
dynamic loading to foundation with maximum bearing
• Quick re-grouts and start-ups • Pour-backs for post tension projects
Features/Benefits
• Fast return to service • Excellent bearing
• High chemical resistance • Superior stability under elevated
• Excellent bond, machinery to foundation service temperatures of up to 220°F (105°C)
Property Test Method Result
4 hours: 700 psi (5 MPa)
6 hours: 5,000 psi (34 MPa)
ASTM C 579 1 day: 11,900 psi (82 MPa)
2 in (50 mm) cubes @ 70°F (21°C)
3 days: 13,100 psi (90 MPa)
7 days: 13,600 psi (94 MPa)
E3-HP
28 days: 14,800 psi (102 MPa)
3 days: 1.9 x 10-4 in/in (mm/mm)
Creep ASTM C 1181
28 days: 3.6 x 10-4 in/in (mm/mm)
120 days: 7.1 x 10-4 in/in (mm/mm)
Coefficient of Thermal Expansion
ASTM C 531 2.0 x 10-5 in/in/°F (3.6 x 10-5 mm/mm/°C)
@ 100°C, 16 hours
1 day: 3,600 psi (25 MPa)
Flexural Strength ASTM C 580
28 days: 4,100 psi (28 MPa)
1 day: 1,200,000 psi (8,500 MPa)
Modulus of Elasticity ASTM C 580
28 days: 1,500,000 psi (10,500 MPa)
1 day: 1,900 psi (13 MPa)
Master Format #:
Tensile Strength ASTM C 307

28 days: 2,200 psi (15 MPa)
03 63 00
Gel Time @ 73°F (23°C) ASTM D 2471 109 minutes

Peak Exotherm ASTM D 2471 116°F (47°C) @ 126 minutes
Heat Deflection Temperature 192°F (89°C)
Abrasion Resistance Greater than concrete

227
Appearance
E3-HP is dark gray in color.
Packaging
E3-HP is packaged in 1.5 ft3 (0.042 m3) kits. Resin Part A: 2.54 gal (9.6 L) Hardener Part B: 0.64 gal (2.4 L)
Aggregate Part C: 3/60 lb (27.2 kg) bags. E3-HP is also available in a 0.5 ft3 (0.01m³) unit.
Shelf Life
Coverage
One unit of E3-HP will grout approximately 18 ft2 (1.7 m2) when placed at a depth of 1" (25 mm).
Directions for Use
Form Preparation: Forms must be liquid tight to prevent leakage, and they should be strong and well braced.
To facilitate stripping, the forms should be coated with two applications of a paste wax or each form wrapped
with polyethylene.
the part B to the part A (not the reverse). The epoxy must be well mixed to ensure proper chemical reaction.
After the epoxy has been mixed, add the part C (aggregate) and mix for 2 to 3 minutes more until the aggregate
maximum of 6" (152 mm) per lift when placed in a large mass. Note: Bring all E3-HP materials as well as the
but cut down on working time.
Curing: E3-HP requires no special curing procedures.
Finish: If a smooth finish is desired, the surface of the grout may be brushed and troweled with a light application
of EUCO SOLVENT.
Clean-Up
Tools and mixer may be cleaned with EUCO SOLVENT, xylene, or acetone before the material hardens.
• Rate of strength gain is significantly slowed at temperature extremes.
228
E3-X
Epoxy Grout System for Extreme Applications
Description
E3-X high performance, highly fluid epoxy grout sets a new performance standard for epoxy grouts. E3-X is formulated
from a new resin technology. Furthermore, an added proprietary aggregate blend has created a grout which exceeds
Grouts
all current performance standards. This product is characterized by an ultimate bearing surface, low creep and
excellent flowability. E3-X is clearly the choice for the toughest and most extreme epoxy installations where bond to
the foundation and machinery is critical.
• Turbines, compressors or stamping machines with • Industrial areas requiring maximum bond
dynamic loading to foundation with maximum bearing
• Quick re-grouts and start-ups • Windmill bases
Features/Benefits
• Fast return to service • Superior flowability
• High chemical resistance • Excellent bearing
• Excellent bond of machinery to foundation • Superior stability under elevated
• Low creep service temperatures of up to 220°F (105°C)
Specification
Property Test Method Result
(at 7 days)
8 hours: 10,800 psi (74 MPa)
12 hours: 13,300 psi (92 MPa)
Compressive Strength ASTM C 579 > 10,000 psi (69 MPa)
1 day: 16,000 psi (110 MPa)
E3-X
7 days: 18,000 psi (124 MPa)
28 days: 19,000 psi (131 MPa)
Creep @ 400 psi, 73°F ASTM C 1181 NA 7 days: 2.5 x 10-4 in/in (mm/mm)
28 days: 2.7 x 10-4 in/in (mm/mm)
7 days: 0.007%
Linear Shrinkage ASTM C 531 <0.025%
14 days: 0.02%
Coefficient of Thermal Expansion <2.0 x 10-5 in/in/°F 2.0 x 10-5 in/in/°F
ASTM C 531
@ 100°C, 16 hours (3.6 x 10-5 mm/mm/°C) (3.7 x 10-5 mm/mm/°C)
1 day: 4,200 psi (29 MPa)
Flexural Strength ASTM C 580 >3,600 psi (25 MPa)
28 days: 4,500 psi (31 MPa)
< 2,100,000 psi 1 day: 1,300,000 psi (8,960 MPa)
Master Format #:
Modulus of Elasticity ASTM C 580

(14,480 MPa) 28 days: 1,280,000 psi (8,800 MPa)
03 63 00
1 day: 2,600 psi (18 MPa)

Tensile Strength ASTM C 307 >2,100 psi (14.5 MPa) 7 days: 2,450 psi (17 MPa)
28 days: 2,500 psi (17.2 MPa)
Gel Time @ 73°F ASTM D 2471 < 4 hours 83 minutes
Peak Exotherm ASTM D 2471 < 150°F (65°C) 106°F (41°C) @ 92 minutes

229
Appearance
E3-X is a three-part system that consists of a Part A, Part B, and Part C. After mixing and placing, the color is
similar to that of concrete, though the grout may always appear somewhat darker than the surrounding concrete.
Shelf Life
Packaging
E³-X is packaged in 1.65 ft³ (.047m³) kits. Resin Part A: 2.88 gal (10.9L) Hardener Part B: 0.72 gal (2.73L)
Aggregate Filler Part C: 3/60 lb (27.2 kg) bags Also available in a 0.55 ft³ (.016m³) kit
Coverage
One 1.65 ft³ (.047m³) unit of E³-X will grout approximately 19.8 ft² (1.84m²) when placed at an average depth of
1 inch (2.5cm).
Directions for Use
Form Preparation: Forms must be liquid tight to prevent leakage and should be strong and well braced. To
facilitate stripping, the forms should be coated with two applications of a paste wax or each form should be
wrapped with polyethylene. Forms should be set slightly higher than the bottom of the baseplate.
the part B to the part A (not the reverse). The epoxy must be well mixed to ensure proper chemical reaction.
After the epoxy has been mixed, add the part C (aggregate) and mix for 2 to 3 minutes more until the aggregate
maximum of 6" (152 mm) per lift when placed in a large mass. Note: Bring all E3-X materials as well as the
but cut down on working time.
Curing: E3-X requires no special curing procedures. Finish: If a smooth finish is desired, the surface of the
grout may be brushed and troweled with a light application of EUCO SOLVENT.
Clean-Up
Tools and mixer may be cleaned with EUCO SOLVENT or acetone.
• Rate of strength gain is significantly slowed at temperature extremes.
230
POLYGROUT
High Performance Epoxy Grout
Description
POLYGROUT is a three-component, 100% solids, high strength, epoxy grouting system. POLYGROUT, which
comes ready to mix in a proportioned kit, offers great chemical resistance to a wide variety of chemicals including
Grouts
oils, fuels, acids, caustics and solvents.
• Heavy duty grouting of machinery and equipment • Pumps
• Compressors • Ball mills
• Bearing plates • Pipe supports
• Rail supports
Features/Benefits
• Excellent bearing • Greatly reduces dust
• Good flow • Safer and easier to use
• High early strength
Property Result
Gel Time, 100g neat resin 35 to 45 minutes
1 day: 10,000 psi (69 MPa)
(ASTM C 579)
Mix Ratio by Weight, lbs (kg) 15.5 to 2.1 to 110
POLYGROUT
A to B to C (7 to 1 to 50)
Bond to Concrete Stronger than concrete
Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion 75°F to 140°F (24°C to 60°C): 27 x 10-6 in/in/°F
(ASTM D 696) (49 x 10-6 mm/mm/°C)
Linear Shrinkage (ASTM D 2566) 0.0007 in (0.012 mm)
Flexural Strength (ASTM C 580) 4,250 psi (29 MPa)
Tensile Strength (ASTM C 307) 2,200 psi (15.2 MPa)
Tensile Strength, neat resin
5,600 psi (39 MPa)
(ASTM D 638)
Impact Strength Greater than concrete
Packaging
Master Format #:
A 1 ft³ (0.028 m3) unit consists of: Part A (base) 15.5 lbs (7.0 kg) in a 2 gal container, Part B (hardener) 2.1 lbs
03 64 00
(1.0 kg) in a 1/2 gal container, Part C (aggregate) 110 lbs (49.9 kg) in two 55 lb (24.9 kg) bags
Shelf Life
2 years in original, unopened packaging.
Coverage
One POLYGROUT kit yields approximately 1 ft³ (0.028 m³) of grout.

231
Directions for Use
compounds and other contaminants. Surface laitance must be removed by chipping, sandblasting or other
appropriate mechanical methods. Steel must be free of oils, greases, dirt, old coatings or chemical contaminants.
Surfaces should be blasted to a white metal finish using clean dry aggregate. Any areas where bond is not
desired should be treated with an appropriate “release” agent (wax, polyethylene), prior to placing POLYGROUT.
Mixing: Condition the materials for at least 24 hours at 65°F to 75°F (18°C to 24°C) prior to mixing. Premix
Part A (base) and Part B (hardener). Combine Part A and Part B in a clean container and mix thoroughly with
a slow speed motor and “jiffy’’ mixer. Scrape the sides and the bottom while mixing. Do not aerate the mix.
Pour the mixed liquid components into a clean, dry mortar mixer while the blade is moving. Gradually add the
pre-measured bags of aggregate to the mixer. Mix until the aggregate is “wet out” and free of lumps. Do not
over-mix for it will cause air entrapment. Do not mix partial units.
Application: POLYGROUT is a flowable material. All forms must be liquid tight and strong enough to withstand
head pressure during placement. Prepare formwork to maintain a 2” (50 mm) liquid head to facilitate placement.
During placement, seal any leaks in the form immediately. Provide for expansion or control joints as necessary.
It is recommended that the work area be kept shaded from sunlight on hot days for 24 hours prior to placement
and for 48 hours after placement. Ideal placement temperatures range from 60°F to 90°F (16°C to 32°C).
POLYGROUT should be placed from only one side of a base plate to avoid air entrapment. Placement should
be in a continuous manner to avoid cold joints and voids. Rods, plungers or chains may be used to aid in the
consolidation of the grout. Maximum depth of grout is 4” (10.2 cm) per lift. Subsequent lifts should be applied
after initial set but within 2 hours of the prior lift. All finishing should be completed prior to initial set. Forms
should remain in place for at least 24 hours after placement.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment immediately following use with methyl ethyl ketone or acetone. Clean drips and
overspray while still wet with the same solvent. Dried POLYGROUT will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Store at temperatures between 50°F and 90°F (10°C to 32°C).
• Do not mix or apply POLYGROUT if the temperature is below 60°F or above 90°F (16°C to 32°C).
• Low early and ultimate strengths may result for placements below 60°F (16°C).
• Condition the resins/aggregate at 65°F to 75°F (18°C to 24°C) for 24 hours prior to placement.
• Do not aerate materials during mixing. Do not mix partial units.
• The performance of POLYGROUT may be adversely affected if concrete is not cured a minimum of 28 days.
• Minimum grout depth is 1” (2.5 cm). Maximum depth per lift is 4” (10.2 cm).
• For proper seating, the grout should rise above the bottom of the base plate.
Rev. 6.11
232
Epoxy Joint Fillers and Sealants

Dural 340 NS & SL 235
Euco #452-P Epoxy 237
Euco 700 239
Euco 800 241
Polysulfide Sealants
Tammsflex NS, SL 243
Polyurea Joint Fillers

Polyurethane Sealants
Eucolastic I 249
Eucolastic II 251
Eucolastic Primer 253
Stain Prevention Film

Euco Clean-Cut 255
Euclid Chemical Joint Filler Maintenance Procedures
The following procedures are provided for the cleaning and maintenance of Euclid Chemical epoxy and
polyurea joint filler products. These procedures may vary due to the type and amount of traffic over the
joints, chemical exposure, and other in-use conditions.
Daily Care
Dust and dirt removal from concrete floors, including over joint filler, is accomplished on a day-to-day basis
through the use of large dust mops, which may be treated with a dust attractor. Commercial vacuuming is
another useful alternative. Dry buffing with a soft bristled brush or an electric buffing machine will loosen
most well-bonded dirt, which can then be removed with a dry mop or vacuum cleaner.
Periodic Cleaning
Concrete floors and joint filler may need to be wet cleaned on occasion. Water soluble, non-acidic
detergent should be added to the floor to emulsify surface soil. While cleaning, all dirty detergent water
is to be removed using a vacuum, clean mop, or squeegee to prevent re-depositing of dirt onto the floor.
If mop rinsing is elected, change the rinse water frequently.
Deep cleaning with an electric scrubbing machine may be necessary depending on the amount and
type of dirt and debris. Caution should be taken in the selection and use of scrubbing pads. Do not use
materials that will scratch or mar the surface of the concrete or joint filler. Stubborn tire marks or other
scuffs can normally be carefully removed with citrus based industrial cleaners such as EUCO Clean &
Strip. Buffing the mark or scuff with the cleaner should remove the scuff or rubber residue.
Joint Filler Separation Repair Options

Because all concrete shrinks, and joints widen over time, it is common for semi-rigid joint filler to split or
separate in the joint if it was installed before the slab shrinkage has fully occurred. This is not an indication
of joint filler failure, as stated in ACI Section 9.10 of ACI 302.1R-04 (Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab
Construction). If correcting this separation is necessary or desired, the following methods can be used.
1. Clean dirt and debris from separation voids, solvent wipe the surface to remove any remaining grime,
and refill (overfill) with either the same joint filler or with faster-setting QWIKjoint 200 if quick turnaround
is desired. Razor off excess filler flush with the concrete surface.
OR
2. S
aw out top 1/2” (12 mm) of joint filler using dustless concrete saw or crack chaser, remove any dirt
and debris from filler surface, solvent wipe to remove any remaining grime and refill (overfill) with epoxy
or polyurea joint filler. Razor off excess filler flush with the concrete surface.
DURAL 340 SL, DURAL 340 NS
Construction and Control Joint Filler and Traffic Loop Sealant

Description
DURAL 340 SL and DURAL 340 NS are two component, 100% solids semi-rigid epoxy joint fillers.
• Filling concrete construction joints • Cracks in concrete
• Control joints • Traffic loop sealant
• Wire sealant
Features/Benefits
• Protects joint edges and prevents spalling in control joints
• High bond strength
• Resistance to mild acids/alkalis and incidental contact with aromatic solvents
• Excellent thermal shock resistance
• DURAL 340 NS is a non-sag version used for vertical surfaces or horizontal sloped surfaces
DURAL 340 SL DURAL 340 NS
Mix Ratio (A:B by volume) 1:1 1:1
Mixed Viscosity (cp) 4,000 to 7,000 Gel
Gel Time (100 g), minutes 50 to 60 50 to 60
DURAL 340 SL, DURAL 340 NS

Pot Life (full unit), minutes 30 to 45 30 to 45
Tack Free Time hours 5 to 6 5 to 6
Hardness - Shore A ASTM D 2240 80 to 90 85 to 90
Tensile Strength psi (MPa)
ASTM D 638 800 (5.5) –
Tensile Elongation % ASTM D 638 95 to 105 –
Appearance
Light gray is standard. Custom colors are available with minimum order requirements.
Packaging
DURAL 340 SL and DURAL 340 NS are packaged in 10 gal (37.85 L) and 4 gal (15.5 L) units.
Shelf Life
• USDA compliant
Coverage
Approximate gal (L) per 100 linear feet (30 m) of joint
Master Format #:
Joint Depth, in (cm) Joint Width, in (cm)

07 92 16
1/4" (0.63) 1/2" (1.27) 3/4" (1.9) 1" (2.5)

1/4" (0.63) 0.33 (1.2) 0.65 (2.5)
3/8" (0.95) 1.0 (3.8) 1.5 (5.7) 1.9 (7.2)
1/2" (1.3) 1.3 (4.9) 1.9 (7.2) 2.6 (9.8)
3/4" (1.9) 1.9 (7.2) 2.9 (11.0) 3.9 (14.8)
1" (2.5) 3.9 (14.8) 5.2 (9.7)

235
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: Surface must be structurally sound, dry, clean, free of dust, dirt, grease, oil, coatings,
laitance, and other contaminants that would interfere with proper adhesion. Surface should be abrasive blasted,
or water blasted. Rout all cracks to at least 1/4” (0.63 cm) wide and deep. Saw-cut joints in concrete and/or
asphalt should be thoroughly flushed with water under pressure, the joint should then be blow dried with oil
free compressed air until all debris from sawing is removed from the joint. Joints must be completely dry before
installing DURAL 340 SL and DURAL 340 NS. Do not apply if rain is forecast within 18 to 24 hours.
Mixing: Premix Part A and Part B. Combine 1 part by volume of Part A to 1 part by volume of Part B and mix
thoroughly with a slow speed motor and mixing blade. A drill and Jiffy mixer is acceptable. Do not thin. Scrape
the side and bottom of the mixing container to assure uniform and complete mixing. Mix for 2 to 3 minutes. Do
not aerate mix.
Application: Gun DURAL 340 SL and DURAL 340 NS into the joints with a bulk caulking gun, pressure extruder,
or other low pressure extrusion methods. Apply the material from the bottom of the joint up to minimize voids
or air pockets. Any topping off or subsequent retooling of the joint filler should be done prior to the product
achieving its initial set. When DURAL 340 is used as a traffic loop sealant, start at the highest elevation and pour
into the sawed joint until it is filled to 2/3 of its full depth. Allow DURAL 340 to settle around the wires. Immediately
thereafter make a second application to completely fill the slot. Do not apply when temperature is below 50°F
(10°C). Allow to cure for 24 hours at 75°F (24°C), or longer at colder temperatures, before opening to traffic.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment immediately after application with acetone. Clean up spills and drips while still wet.
Dried DURAL 340 SL and DURAL 340 NS will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Do not thin DURAL 340 SL and DURAL 340 NS.
• Cure concrete a minimum of 28 days before application since the sealant acts as a vapor barrier.
• Do not store below 50°F (10°C) or above 90°F (32°C).
• Do not apply to frozen or frost filled substrates, or when the temperature is below 50°F (10°C), or expected to
fall below that temperature within 24 hours.
• Not intended for areas subject to constant immersion.
• Not intended for areas subject to prolonged or strong chemical attack.
• DURAL 340 SL and DURAL 340 NS should not be used in expansion joints, or to repair any type of moving
cracks.
Rev. 6.11
236
EUCO #452-P EPOXY SYSTEM
Epoxy Security Sealant

Description
EUCO #452-P EPOXY SYSTEM is a 100% reactive, two component material specifically designed as a prison
security sealant because of its pick-proof properties. It is a sand filled, moisture insensitive epoxy gel that can
be used to bond, repair, or seal vertical, horizontal and overhead concrete.
• Control joints • Fixture grouting
• Wall/floor joint sections • Anchoring and hand rail grouting
• Beam interfacings • Precast elements
Features/Benefits
• High strength material resists tampering
• Excellent bond strength to prevent removal
• Water tight
• Wear resistant for high traffic applications
• Resists picking and removal with pointed tools
EUCO #452-P EPOXY SYSTEM

Gel Time (ASTM C 881)................................. 50 min Tensile Strength (ASTM D 638)
Gel Time 1 gal (3.8 L)................................. 25 min @ 14 days...................... >6,800 psi (>46.7 MPa)
Bond Strength (ASTM C 882) Modulus of Elasticity (ASTM D 638)
@ 48 hours.......................... >900 psi (>6.1 MPa) @ 14 days.................1.3 x 106 psi (8.9 x 103 MPa)
@ 14 days...................... >1,700 psi (>11.7 MPa) Compressive Strength (ASTM C 695)
@ 14 days.................... >10,900 psi (>75.2 MPa)
Appearance: EUCO #452-P EPOXY SYSTEM is a 2-part system consisting of a black pigmented Part B and a
white pigmented Part A. When these are combined, the resultant material has a gray color similar to concrete.
Packaging/Yield
EUCO #452-P EPOXY SYSTEM is available in 1 gal (3.8 L) and 3 gal (11.4 L) units.
Volume
Part A resin 0.73 gal (2.8 L)
Part B hardener 0.27 gal (1.0 L)
Yield 1.00 gal (3.8 L)
Shelf Life
Master Format #:
ASTM C 881, Types I, IV and VI, Grade 3, Class B and Class C. It is suitable for use under ACI specifications
07 92 16
503.1, 503.2, 503.3 and 503.4.

Coverage
One gallon (3.8 L) of EUCO #452-P EPOXY SYSTEM will lay a 1/4" (6 mm) square bead for 308 linear feet (94
linear meters).

237
Directions for Use
with all curing compounds and sealers removed. Old concrete must be clean and rough. All oil, dirt, debris,
paint and unsound concrete must be removed. The surface of the joint must be prepared mechanically using a
bushhammer, sawcut or other equipment specifically designed for joint and crack filling preparation. The final
step in cleaning should be the complete removal of all residue with a vacuum cleaner or pressure washing. Acid
etching is acceptable only when mechanical preparation is impractical. It is recommended that only contractors
experienced in the acid etching process use this means of surface preparation. The salts of the reaction must be
thoroughly pressure washed away. The best bond will be achieved if the concrete is allowed to completely dry.
Note: Even with proper procedures, an acid etched surface may not provide as strong a bond as mechanical
preparation procedures.
Priming: EUCO #452-P EPOXY SYSTEM requires no special primers. The product may be placed directly on
the properly prepared surface.
Mixing: All materials should be in the proper temperature range of 60°F to 90°F (15°C to 32°C). Mix Parts A and
B (resin & hardener) for 2 minutes using a drill and mixing prop. For ease of mixing, add the Part B to the Part
A (not the reverse). The epoxy must be well mixed and streak free to ensure proper chemical reaction. Place
immediately. Warm temperatures will reduce working time.
Placement: EUCO #452-P EPOXY SYSTEM is normally placed by hand or with caulking/joint filling equipment
capable of pumping very high viscosity (gel) materials.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with solvent such as EUCO SOLVENT, acetone, toluene or MEK. Do not allow the
• Bring materials as close to 70°F (21°C) as possible before using. Store in room temperature environment
24 hours prior to use. Do not heat with open flame.
• Minimum storage temperature is 45°F (7°C).
Rev. 6.11
238
EUCO 700
Semi-Rigid Industrial Floor Joint Filler

Description
EUCO 700 is a two component, semi-rigid epoxy for filling control and construction joints in industrial concrete
floors. This product supports the joint edges and reduces spalling of the edges caused by wheel traffic. EUCO
700 has been designed for use in compliance with ACI 302 recommendations for epoxy joint fillers used in
control and construction joints.
• Concrete construction & control joints • Industrial and commercial floors
• Crack filling in concrete floors • Interior applications
Features/Benefits
• Semi-rigid formula that allows for limited temperature and humidity movement of concrete
• Tough performance reduces floor joint repairs and maintenance
• Suitable for filling cracks in older floors to reduce the rate of deterioration
• Available in selected color formulations for use with colored dry shake floor hardeners
Elongation, ASTM D 638
Pot Life @ 75°F (24°C)........................ 15 minutes
Tack-Free Time @75°F (24°C)................12 hours 7 days..............................................................55%
Compressive Strength, ASTM D 695 Water Absorption, ASTM D 570
@72 hours..............................3000 psi (20.7 MPa)
72 hour immersion.........................................1.1%
Tensile Strength, ASTM D 638 Shore D Hardness ASTM D 2240
7 days................................................................. 55
7 days.........................................690 psi (4.6 MPa)
EUCO 700
Shore A Hardness..................................... .> 100
Chemical Resistance: Contact The Euclid Chemical Company for complete chemical resistance information.
EUCO 700 will accept normal traffic in 24 hours if ambient conditions are at 70°F (21°C) and 50% relative
humidity. Expect complete cure within one week.
EUCO 700 is also available in a GEL formulation. This material is a standard setting, thick paste consistency
epoxy for sloped floors where a non-sag material is required. However, EUCO 700 GEL is not designed for
vertical/overhead applications. EUCO 700 GEL is available in gray color only.
Appearance: EUCO 700 is a two-part epoxy product. The Part A is pigmented gray. The Part B is cream
colored. When the two parts are mixed together, the result is a gray color similar to concrete. The user
should expect some batch to batch variability in color.
EUCO 700 is also available in the following standard colors: Green, Yellow, Terrra Cotta, Tile Red, Redwood,
Mocha Brown, Antique Cork, Tan, Light Reflective, Battleship Gray, and Black. Custom colors of EUCO 700
are also available; lead times and minimum order quantities apply. Contact The Euclid Chemical Company
for additional information.
Master Format #:
Packaging/Yield
07 92 16
EUCO 700 is a two part epoxy product packaged in 1 gal (3.8 L) kits which contain both the hardener and the
resin. The premeasured mix ratio is 1:1. A 1 gal (3.8 L) unit yields 231 in3 (3785 cm3) of product. EUCO 700 is also
available in 10 gal (37.9 L) and 100 gal (379 L) kits for use on large projects in machine placement applications.
Shelf Life

239
• EUCO 700 is a semi-rigid joint filler designed to comply with ACI 302 recommendations regarding control and
construction joints.
Coverage
Values in the table are linear feet/gallon (m/L) coverage of EUCO 700 for the joint dimensions shown.
Joint Depth
1.5˝ (38 mm) 2˝ (51 mm) 2.5˝ (63 mm)
Joint Width
3/16˝(4.8 mm) 68 ft (5.5 m) 51 ft (4.2 m) 41 ft (3.2 m)
1/4˝(6.4 mm) 51 ft (4.2 m) 38 ft (3.2 m) 30 ft (2.4 m)
3/8˝(9.5 mm) 34 ft (2.6 m) 25 ft (2.1 m) 20 ft (1.6 m)
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: The joint must be clean and sound. All oil, dirt, debris, paint and any other material that
may be a bond breaker must be removed. The final step in cleaning should be the complete removal of all
residue with a vacuum cleaner or pressure washing. All joint facings must possess an open surface texture with
all curing compounds and sealers removed. If this product will be used for filling floor cracks, the cracks should
be routed out and cleaned before filling. Ideally, all crack edges should be squared.
Joint Backing: The Euclid Chemical Company recommends the full depth of the joint or crack be filled with
EUCO 700 for proper load transfer. Avoid the use of backer rod, sand or other fill material for the purpose of
reducing volume.
Priming: EUCO 700 does not require a primer before application.
Mixing: EUCO 700 is a two part product and requires mixing. Premix each part separately before combining
the materials. Pour all of the Part B hardener into the Part A resin and mix with a mechanical mixer and prop for
2 to 3 minutes. Make sure that the sides of the can are scraped to assure that all of the resin and hardener are
thoroughly mixed.
Placement: After the liquids are thoroughly mixed, pour or gun the mixed material into the joint, filling it
approximately 2/3 its full depth. Allow the joint filler to settle and then complete filling within 1 hour to the level
of the floor. Use all material rapidly due to the short pot life.
Finishing: Joints should be overfilled during placement. Cut flush with a razor knife or grind flush with the floor
within 24 hours after placement. If EUCO 700 has completely hardened, heat may be used to soften the material
for easier removal.
Curing: EUCO 700 will cure within 24 hours of placement @70°F (21°C). Lower temperatures will slow the curing
rate.
Clean-Up
Tools, equipment and general clean-up of EUCO 700 before it cures can be done with a solvent such as acetone
or xylene. Cured product will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Based on ACI 302 recommendations, joint fillers should be installed as late as possible after construction to
allow for minimal additional slab shrinkage. Consult ACI 302 regarding concrete shrinkage, joint filling and
user expectations.
• Do not use EUCO 700 as an expansion joint sealant.
• Use only at temperatures above 40°F (4°C).
• Contact surfaces must be clean and dry.
• Proper joint design will affect performance.
• To ensure proper adhesion, joint edges must be thoroughly cleaned prior to filling, particularly if a floor sealer
or liquid densifier has been applied.
• Product is designed for use in joints with minimal movement.
• Product may discolor in direct or strong UV indoor or outdoor light.
• Do not use in large movement (expansion/isolation) joints.
240
EUCO 800
Semi-rigid Industrial Floor Joint Filler

Description
EUCO 800 is a two component, 100% solids semi-rigid epoxy for filling contraction (control) and construction
joints in industrial concrete floors. This joint filler supports the joint edges and reduces spalling of the edges
caused by wheel traffic. EUCO 800 has been designed for use in compliance with ACI 302 recommendations
for epoxy joint fillers used in sawcut/control joints. This product also protects against water intrusion in the joint
and provides satisfactory bond to the concrete.
• Interior applications • Industrial and commercial floors
• Concrete construction & control joints • Excellent wear and durability
• Crack filler repair for old floors
Features/Benefits
• Extended pot life for longer working time in warm weather and for larger jobs
Typical Engineering Data: The following results were developed under laboratory conditions.
Pot Life @ 73°F (23°C)........................... 50 minutes Bleach................................................................ good
Working Time @ 73°F (23°C).................90 minutes Brake Fluid.......................................................... poor
Compressive Strength ASTM D 695 Ethanol................................................................ poor
7 days.......................................3,000 psi (20.8 MPa) Ethylene Glycol.................................................. good
Tensile Strength ASTM D 638....650 psi (4.5 MPa) Gasoline............................................................. good
EUCO 800
Elongation ASTM D 638.................................. 110% Hydrochloric Acid (10%).................................... good
Water Absorption ASTM D 570................... < 3.0% MEK..................................................................... poor
Shore A Hardness ASTM D 2240........................ 90 Methylene Chloride............................................. poor
Shore D Hardness ASTM D 2240....................... 50 Oil..................................................................excellent
Bond Strength ASTM C 882.....1,200 psi (8.3 MPa) Salt Water......................................................excellent
CHEMICAL RESISTANCE Skydrol................................................................ poor
Alkalies..........................................................excellent Toluene................................................................ poor
Ammonia............................................................ good Urine..............................................................excellent
Battery Acid......................................................... poor Xylene................................................................. poor
Beer...............................................................excellent
Ratings: Poor-affected within 24 hours; Good-no effect for 24 hours; Excellent-no effect after 2 weeks
Appearance: EUCO 800 is a two part epoxy product consisting of a Part A (resin) and a Part B (hardener).
The product is pigmented gray.
Packaging/Yield
EUCO 800 is a two part epoxy packaged in 2 gal (7.6 L) kits which contain both the hardener and the resin.
Master Format #:
The pre-measured mix ratio is 1:1. A 2 gal (7.6 L) kit yields 462 in3 (7,570 cm3) of product. EUCO 800 is also
available in 10 gal (37.9 L) kits for use on large projects in machine placement applications.
07 92 16
Shelf Life
2 years in original, unopened container
• EUCO 800 complies with ACI 302 requirements for joint fillers.

241
Coverage
The following table gives guidelines on theoretical material estimates in linear ft/gal (linear m/L)
Joint Depth
1.5" (38 mm) 2" (51 mm) 2.5" (63 mm)
Joint Width
3/16" (4.8 mm) 68 ft (5.5 m) 51 ft (4.2 m) 41 ft (3.2 m)
1/4" (6.4 mm) 51 ft (4.2 m) 38 ft (3.2 m) 30 ft (2.4 m)
3/8" (9.5 mm) 34 ft (2.6 m) 25 ft (2.1 m) 20 ft (1.6 m)
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: The joint edges must be clean and sound. All oil, dirt, debris, paint and any other material
that may be a bond breaker must be removed. All joint facings must possess an open surface texture with all
curing compounds and sealers removed. If filling floor cracks, the cracks should be routed out and cleaned
before filling. Ideally, all edges will be squared. The final step in cleaning should be the complete removal of all
residue with a vacuum cleaner or pressure washing.
Joint Backing: The Euclid Chemical Company recommends full depth of the joint or crack be filled with EUCO
800 for proper load transfer. Avoid the use of backer rod, sand or other fill material for the purpose of reducing
volume. Sand or other material may be used to seal the crack at the bottom of the joint.
Priming: EUCO 800 does not require a primer before application.
Mixing: EUCO 800 is a two part product and requires mixing. Pre-mix each part separately before combining the
materials. Mix the Part A and Park B together with a mechanical mixer and prop for 2 to 3 minutes. Make sure
that the sides of the cans are scraped to assure that all of the resin and hardener are thoroughly mixed.
Placement: After the liquids are thoroughly mixed, pour the mixed material into the joint, filling it approximately
2/3 its full depth. Allow the joint filler to settle and then complete filling within 5 hours to the level of the floor.
Finishing/Shaving: Joints should be overfilled during placement. Cut flush with a razor knife or ground flush
with the floor within 24 hours after placement. At temperatures of 70°F (21°C) product can be shaved in 5 to 7
hours. Temperatures of 50°F (10°C) will take 10 to 12 hours. If EUCO 800 has completely hardened, a heat flame
may be used to soften the material for easier shaving.
Curing: EUCO 800 requires no special curing instructions. The product will cure within 24 hours @ 70°F (21°C).
Lower temperatures will slow the curing rate.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with solvents such as EUCO SOLVENT, xylene, xylol, toluene or MEK. Do not allow
• Based on ACI 302 recommendations, joint fillers should be applied as late as possible after construction
to allow for minimal additional slab shrinkage. Consult ACI 302 comments regarding concrete
shrinkage, joint filling and user expectations.
• Designed for interior use only.
• Cool temperatures extend working times and cure schedules. Warmer temperatures reduce working and
cure times.
• Minimum storage temperature is 45°F (7°C).
has been applied.
• For proper adhesion, concrete must be a minimum of 28 days old.
• Product may discolor in direct or artificial light.
Rev. 6.11
242
TAMMSFLEX NS / TAMMSFLEX SL
Two-Part Polysulfide Joint Sealants

Description
TAMMSFLEX sealants are two-part, elastomeric, caulking and sealing compounds. TAMMSFLEX cures at
normal temperatures to a tough elastomeric seal which will adhere tenaciously to masonry, metal and wood.
TAMMSFLEX will withstand repeated expansion and contraction and remain resilient through daily and seasonal
cyclic changes in temperature. TAMMSFLEX has excellent chemical, solvent, and water resistance and will
withstand joint movement of up to ±25%.
TAMMSFLEX NS is a non-sag gun grade sealant designed for use in vertical and non traffic bearing horizontal
joints subject to expansion resulting from temperature changes. TAMMSFLEX NS is used for all normal
construction joints such as panel and curtain wall construction, copings, masonry joints, bridge abutments and
building joints. TAMMSFLEX NS is formulated for use in joints subject to long term contact with water and may
be used in water reservoirs, dams and foundation joints.
AMMSFLEX SL is a flowable, self leveling, traffic grade sealant designed for horizontal joints in patios, plazas,
T
floors, sidewalks, roadways and other areas exposed to pedestrian or vehicular traffic.
Features/Benefits
• Joint sealant between similar/dissimilar materials Can contribute to LEED points
• Glazing & caulking
TAMMSFLEX NS / TAMMSFLEX SL
Typical Properties % Elongation........................................500 to 550
Specific Gravity mixed.................................... 1.6 Tensile Strength psi (MPa).150 to 200 (3.68 to 4.91)
% Solids........................................................... 100 100% Modulus psi (MPa).........................50 (1.23)
% Joint Movement......................................... ±25 200% Modulus psi (MPa)........................80 (1.96)
Hardness, Shore A..................................25 to 30 Appearance: TAMMSFLEX is gray/brown in color.
Pot Life Temperature Dependent..... approx 2 hrs
Tack Free............................................12 to 24 hrs
Packaging
TAMMSFLEX NS and TAMMSFLEX SL are packaged in 1.5 gal (5.68 L) units. TAMMSFLEX PRIMER is packaged
in a 1 qt (0.95 L) unit.
Shelf Life
• ASTM C 920
• NSF Standard 61
Coverage
Inches (cm) Linear ft/gal (m/L) Note: Tammsflex coverage rates are approximate
Joint Width Joint Depth and provided for estimating purposes only.
Master Format #:
1/4 (0.64) 1/4 (0.64) 308 (25)

1/4 (0.64) 3/8 (0.95) 136 (11)
07 92 13
3/8 (0.95) 3/8 (0.95) 102 (8)

1/2 (1.27) 3/8 (0.95) 68 (5.5)
1/2 (1.27) 1/2 (1.27) 77 (6.2)
5/8 (1.6) 1/2 (1.27) 61(4.9)
3/4 (1.9) 1/2 (1.27) 51 (4.1)
7/8 (2.2) 1/2 (1.27) 44 (3.5)
1 (2.5) 1/2 (1.27) 38 (3.1)

243
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: Surface of the joint must be clean, sound, and dry. Contaminants such as previously
applied sealants, form release agents, grease, oil, etc. must be removed by scarifying, wire brushing, or sanding.
All traces of asphalt or other bituminous materials must be removed. Dust should be blown out of the joint with
oil free, moisture free compressed air. Protective coatings of lacquer or oil must be removed from metal surfaces
with methyl ethyl ketone or xylol. Cure new concrete or masonry surfaces for 28 days. Do not apply TAMMSFLEX
if the temperature of the sealant, air, or substrate is below 40°F (4°C). Priming is not normally required with
common building materials. A primer may be required for optimum adhesion in demanding environments,
continuous immersion for example, or for certain substrates. In these cases TAMMSFLEX PRIMER should be
used and the sealant must be applied within 8 hours after priming. A field trial is recommended to determine
actual adhesion with and without a primer.
Joint Design: The minimum width of the joint should be 4 times the anticipated movement but not less than 1/4” (0.64
cm). Maximum recommended width is 1“ (2.5 cm). The depth of the joint should be no more than one-half the
width without exceeding the minimum/maximum limits. In joints up to 1/2” (1.3 cm) wide, the sealant depth
should be equal to the joint width. In joints from 1/2” (1.3 cm) to 1.0” (2.5 cm) wide, sealant depth should be
1/2” (1.3 cm). For joints over 1” (2.5 cm) wide, sealant depth should be 1/2 of the width. In joints deeper than
1/2” (1.3 cm), a flexible, non-asphaltic or non-oil impregnated backing material should be used to fill the lower part
of the joint cavity. For traffic bearing areas, a round rod of synthetic rubber of the same Shore A as TAMMSFLEX
SL (or harder) is recommended. The backing rod should be round to minimize the stress on the joint sealant.
The sealant should not adhere to the bottom of the joint or the backing material. A strip of polyethylene film may
be installed as a bond breaker between the filler or the bottom of the joint and the sealant.
Mixing: Thorough mixing of the components is essential for maximum performance of TAMMSFLEX. Remove
the activator (Part B) from the base material (Part A) container. Also remove the polyethylene sheet or tray. Mix
Part A with a slow speed 1/2” (1.3 cm) drill (250 to 300 rpm) with a “Jiffy” mixing paddle. Then add Part B to Part A
and mix for 3 to 4 minutes until the material is completely blended with a uniform color. While mixing, periodically
scrape down the sides of the container and mixing paddle.
Caution: Do not mix base and activator components from one shipment with components from another.
Application: TAMMSFLEX sealants allow 1 to 2 hours of working time under normal conditions. Do not mix
more than can be applied in this period. TAMMSFLEX NS can be applied with standard caulking equipment.
Always fill the joint from the bottom up or from the inside out to avoid entrapping air. The gun nozzle should
be the largest size which can be inserted to the bottom of the joint. Tooling is recommended immediately after
application to ensure full contact with the joint surfaces. Dry tooling is preferred. TAMMSFLEX SL may be poured
into the joint. It pours readily and is self-leveling.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment immediately after application with xylene or acetone. Clean up spills and drips while
still wet with the same solvents.
• Do not mix base and activator components from one shipment with components from another.
• For water immersion conditions allow TAMMSFLEX to cure for 7 days at 70°F (21°C) prior to filling with water.
Rev. 6.11
244
EUCO QWIKjoint 200
Polyurea Floor Joint Filler

Description
EUCO QWIKjoint 200 is a fast-setting, semi-rigid polyurea used for filling control and construction joints
in industrial concrete floors. EUCO QWIKjoint 200 represents a new generation of polyurea technology with
features and benefits unlike any other polyurea joint filler on the market. Among these benefits are a super-fast
set time and an extended shave time: EUCO QWIKjoint 200 can be trimmed flush with the floor immediately after
placement or up to 24 hours later. EUCO QWIKjoint 200 supports and protects joint edges from heavy loads
and wheel traffic, reducing spalling of the joint edges.
• Concrete construction and control joints • Industrial and commercial floors
• Crack repair for old floors • Freezer floors
Features/Benefits
• Fast setting formula reduces downtime
• Large shave time window allows for greater flexibility in scheduling joint filling operations
• No bubbles - no foaming
• Suitable for filling cracks in older floors to reduce the rate of joint deterioration
• Will cure in temperatures as low as -20° F (-29°C)
• Less moisture-sensitive than standard polyureas
Chemical Resistance:
Acetic Acid, 5%........................................excellent
Tack Free Time @70oF (23oC)..................1 to 3 min Alcohol, 10%............................................excellent
EUCO QWIKjoint 200

Light Traffic @70oF (23oC)............................ 15 min Alkalies.....................................................excellent
Full Traffic @70oF (23oC)............................... 30 min Ammonium Hydroxide, 10 %...................excellent
Tensile Strength Brake Fluid.................................................... good
ASTM D 412................................ >800 psi (>5.52 MPa) Diesel Fuel................................................excellent
Elongation ASTM D 412.......................200 to 250% Ethylene Glycol............................................. good
Tensile Modulus Gasoline...................................................excellent
ASTM D 412.................... 600 to 675 psi (4.65 MPa) Hydrochloric Acid, 20%...........................excellent
Shore D Hardness ASTM D 2240...............32 to 38 JP-4 Jet Fuel.............................................excellent
Shore A Hardness ASTM D 2240...............88 to 90 Motor Oil...................................................excellent
Salt Water.................................................excellent
Sodium Hydroxide, 10%..........................excellent
Chemical Poor - affected within 24 hours Sulfuric Acid,10%.......................................... good
Ratings: Good - no effect for 24 hours
Excellent - no effect after 2 weeks Xylene............................................................. poor
Appearance: EUCO QWIKjoint 200 is a two-part product available in Gray or Mocha Brown. Part A is transparent
amber and the Part B is pigmented Gray or Mocha Brown. The user should expect some batch to batch variability
in color. Product may discolor over time if exposed to either natural or artificial ultraviolet light.
Packaging
Master Format #:
EUCO QWIKjoint 200 is a two part product packaged in 10 gal (37.9 L) kits, 100 gal (379 L) kits and 22 oz (600 mL)
side-by-side cartridges, packaged 12 per case. The mix ratio for 10 gal kits, 100 gal kits and cartridges is 1:1.
07 92 16
Shelf Life
• EUCO QWIKjoint 200 complies with ACI 302 performance recommendations regarding control and construction
joint fillers.

245
Coverage
The following table gives guidelines on theoretical material estimates in linear ft/gal (liner m/L).
Joint Depth
1.5"(38 mm) 2"(51 mm) 2.5"(63 mm)
Joint Width
3/16" (4.8 mm) 68 ft (5.5 m) 51 ft (4.2 m) 41 ft (3.2 m)
1/4" (6.4 mm) 51 ft (4.2 m) 38 ft (3.2 m) 30 ft (2.4 m)
3/8" (9.5 mm) 34 ft (2.6 m) 25 ft (2.1 m) 20 ft (1.6 m)
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: The joint must be clean and dry. All oil, dirt, debris, paint and any other material that may
be a bond breaker must be removed. The final step in cleaning should be the complete removal of all residue
with a vacuum cleaner or pressure washing. All joint facings must possess an open surface texture with all
curing compounds and sealers removed. If this product will be used for filling floor cracks, the cracks should be
routed out and cleaned before filling. Ideally, all edges will be squared.
EUCO QWIKjoint 200 for proper load transfer. Avoid the use of backer rod, sand or other fill material for the
purpose of reducing volume.
Priming: EUCO QWIKjoint 200 does not require a primer before application.
Mixing: Due to its extremely fast set time, EUCO QWIKjoint 200 requires machine mixing and placing. Pre-mix
Part B separately before using. Follow mechanical pump manufacturer’s equipment instructions for operation.
QWIKjoint 200 cartridges should be shaken before using, as some settlement is normal during storage. Follow
the specific installation instructions on the cartridge label.
Note: If EUCO QWIKjoint 200 is to be stored in the dispensing pump overnight, place a piece of plastic wrap
directly on top of the material in each tank to prevent exposure to air. EUCO QWIKjoint 200 Part B thickens upon
standing, but can be thinned back to a normal consistency by gentle mixing with a drill or by hand.
Placement: Euclid Chemical recommends full depth placment. Joints should be overfilled and shaved even
with the surrounding joint edge giving the floor joints a flat, smooth appearance. Shaving of excess EUCO
QWIKjoint 200 can begin approximately 30 minutes after placement, and up to 24 hours later, depending on
jobsite conditions such as the concrete and ambient temperatures.
Clean-Up
Tools, equipment and general clean-up can be done with EUCO SOLVENT or acetone. Clean equipment before
EUCO QWIKjoint 200 has cured.
to allow for minimal additional slab shrinkage. Consult ACI 302 comments regarding concrete shrinkage,
joint filling and user expectations.
• EUCO QWIKjoint 200 material and all appliation equipment should be kept at ambient temperatures of 50°F
(10°C) or above.
• For filling joints greater that 1/2 inch (1.3 cm) in width, the use of EUCO QWIKJOINT 300 is strongly
recommended.
• Do not use EUCO QWIKjoint 200 as an expansion joint sealant.
• Contact surfaces must be clean and dry for best adhesion.
• Joint edges must be thoroughly cleaned prior to filling, particularly if a floor sealer or densifier has been
applied.
• Product may discolor in direct sunlight or artificial light.
Rev. 6.11
246
EUCO QWIKjoint 300
High Performance Polyurea Floor Joint Filler And Joint Repair Material

Description
EUCO QWIKjoint 300 is a fast-setting, semi-rigid polyurea used for both initial filling and repair of control and
construction joints in concrete floors. EUCO QWIKjoint 300 has been formulated for fast strength development
and exceptional durability, making it especially suited for filling wide and deep joints. EUCO QWIKjoint 300
supports and protects joint edges from heavy loads and wheel traffic, eliminating spalling of the joint edges.
• Concrete construction and control joints
• Repair and filling of wide and deep floor joints
• Crack repair
• Industrial and commercial floors
• Freezer floors
Features/Benefits
• Fast setting formula reduces downtime
• Reduced staining of adjacent concrete due to overfilling
• No bubbles - no foaming when used in damp joints
• Can be used in wide joints and cracks
• Suitable for filling cracks in older floors to reduce the rate of deterioration
• Cures at ambient temperatures as low as -20° F (-29°C)
Typical Engineering Data CHEMICAL RESISTANCE
EUCO QWIKjoint 300

Gel Time........................................50 to 60 seconds Acetic Acid, 5%........................................... excellent
Tack free time @70oF (23°C)..............1 to 3 minutes Alcohol, 10%............................................... excellent
Light Traffic @70oF (23oC).......................15 minutes Alkalies........................................................ excellent
Full Traffic @70oF (23oC).........................30 minutes Ammonium Hydroxide, 10 %...................... excellent
Tensile Strength ASTM D 412...... 1000 psi (6.9 MPa) Brake Fluid........................................................ good
Elongation ASTM D 412...........................300 to 350% Diesel Fuel................................................... excellent
Tensile Modulus ASTM D 412........ 800 psi (5.5 MPa) Ethylene Glycol................................................. good
Shore D Hardness ASTM D 2240............................40 Gasoline...................................................... excellent
Shore A Hardness ASTM D 2240............................90 Hydrochloric Acid, 20%.............................. excellent
JP-4 Jet Fuel................................................ excellent
Appearance: Part A is transparent amber and the Part Motor Oil...................................................... excellent
B is pigmented gray. When the two parts are mixed Salt Water.................................................... excellent
together, the result is a gray color similar to concrete. Sodium Hydroxide, 10%............................. excellent
Note: The user should expect some batch to batch Sulfuric Acid,10%...............................................good
variability in color. Product may discolor over time if Xylene..................................................................poor
exposed to either natural or artificial ultraviolet light.
Ratings
Poor: affected within 24 hours
Master Format #:
Good: no effect for 24 hours

Excellent: no effect after 2 weeks.
07 92 16
Packaging
EUCO QWIKjoint 300 is a two-part product packaged in 10 gal (37.9 L) kits, which include a 5 gal (18.9 L) pail of Part
A and 5 gal (18.9 L) pail of Part B and in 22 oz (600 mL) side-by-side cartridges, packaged 12 per case. The mix
ratio is 1:1. A 10 gal (37.9 L) kit yields 2,310 in³ (37,861 cm³) of material.
Shelf Life

247
• EUCO QWIKjoint 300 meets ACI 302 performance recommendations regarding control and construction joints.
• USDA compliant
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: The joint must be clean and dry. All oil, dirt, debris, paint and any other material that may
be a bond breaker must be removed. The final step in cleaning should be the complete removal of all residue
with a vacuum cleaner or pressure washing.
All joint facings must possess an open surface texture with all curing compounds and sealers removed.
If this product will be used for filling floor cracks, the cracks should be routed out and cleaned before filling.
Ideally, all edges will be squared.
EUCO QWIKjoint 300 for proper load transfer. EUCO QWIKjoint 300 requires sufficient joint sidewall area contact
to function properly. Avoid the use of backer rod, sand or other fill material for the purpose of reducing volume.
Sand or other material may be used to seal the crack at the bottom of the joint.
Priming: EUCO QWIKjoint 300 does not require a primer before application.
Mixing: Due to its extremely fast set time, EUCO QWIKjoint 300 requires machine mixing and placing. Pre-mix
Part B separately before using. Follow mechanical pump manufacturer’s equipment instructions for operation.
If storing QWIKjoint 300 in pump reserviors overnight, place a sheet of plastic wrap directly on top of the Part A
and Part B liquid to prevent contact with air. Shake cartridges well before using.
Placement: Euclid Chemical recommends full depth placement. Joints should be overfilled and shaved even
with the surrounding joint edge giving the floor joints a flat, smooth appearance. Shaving of excess EUCO
QWIKjoint 300 can begin approximately 30 minutes after placement, and up to 6 hours later, depending on
jobsite conditions such as the concrete and ambient temperatures.
Clean-Up
Tools, equipment and general clean-up can be done with EUCO SOLVENT or acetone. Clean before EUCO
QWIKjoint 300 has cured.
to allow for minimal additional slab shrinkage. Consult ACI 302 comments regarding concrete shrinkage,
joint filling and user expectations.
• Maximum joint width for installation of QWIKjoint 300 is 3 inches (7.6 cm).
• EUCO QWIKjoint 300 material and all appliation equipment should be kept at ambient temperatures of 50°F
(10°C) or above.
• Do not use EUCO QWIKjoint 300 as an expansion or isolation joint sealant.
• Contact surfaces must be clean and dry for best adhesion.
or densifier has been applied.
• For proper adhesion, concrete should be a minimum of 28 days old.
• Product may discolor in direct sunlight or artificial light.
Rev. 6.11
248
EUCOLASTIC I
One Part Urethane Sealant

Description
EUCOLASTIC I is a one part, flexible urethane for sealing and protecting joints and cracks.
• Concrete construction & control joints • Window perimeters
• Precast concrete and masonry units • Interior and exterior applications
Features/Benefits
• Available in both gun grade (non-sag) and pourable formulas
• Remains adhesively and cohesively bonded during temperature cyclic movement
• Passes accelerated weathering test for suitability in harsh environments
• USDA compliant
Typical Engineering Data EUCOLASTIC I: (Pourable Grade)
The following results were developed under laboratory Properties Actual Result Requirement
conditions: Rheology
EUCOLASTIC I: (Gun Grade) @40°F (4°C) Self-Leveling Self-Leveling
Properties Actual Result Requirement Hardness 35 25 to 50
Rheology Weight Loss 5% 10% max
@40°F (4°C) No Flow No Flow Tack Free Time 30 hours 72 hours max
@122°F (50°C) No Deformation No Deformation Adhesion-in-Peel (<25% bond loss)
Shore A Hardness 40 15 to 50 Concrete 16 to 20 PLI > 5 PLI
Elongation 250% none Aluminum 30 to 34 PLI > 5 PLI
Weight Loss 9% 10% max Granite 30 to 34 PLI > 5 PLI
Tack Free Time 30 hours 72 hours max
EUCOLASTIC I
Adhesion-in-Peel (<25% bond loss) EUCOLASTIC I will accept normal traffic in 48 hours
Concrete 20 to 25 PLI > 5 PLI if curing temperature is 70°F (21°C) and 50% relative
Aluminum 18 to 22 PLI > 5 PLI humidity. Expect complete cure within two weeks.
Brick 19 to 23 PLI > 5 PLI
Appearance: EUCOLASTIC I is available in the following colors: Gun Grade: Standard Colors: limestone and gray.
Special Order Colors*: aluminum, buff, black, bronze, white, and redwood tan. Pourable Grade: Standard Colors:
limestone and gray. Special Order Colors*: white, buff, and black. *Special orders may require two week lead time.
The following chemical resistance guide is applicable to both the gun and pourable grades.
Splash & Splash &
Acids Concentration Spill Immersion Alkalis Concentration Spill Immersion
Sodium Hydroxide 10% OK NO
Potassium Hydroxide 10% OK NO
Acetic Acid 25% OK OK Calcium Hydroxide 10% OK NO
Butyric Acid 25% OK OK Ammonium Hydroxide 10% OK NO
Citric Acid 25% OK OK Solvents
Oxalic Acid 25% OK OK Benzene 100% OK softens/swells
Lactic Acid 25% OK OK Toluene 100% OK softens/swells
Master Format #:
Hydrochloric Acid 40% OK OK Xylene 100% OK softens/swells

Hydrobromic Acid 50% OK OK Gasoline 100% OK softens/swells
07 92 13
Phosphoric Acid 50% OK OK Mineral Spirits 100% OK softens/swells

Carbonic Acid Any OK OK Paint Thinner 100% OK softens/swells
Methylene Chloride 100% OK softens/swells
Sulfuric Acid Max. 50% OK OK
Acetone 100% OK softens/swells
Muriatic Acid 40% OK OK Methyl Alcohol 100% OK softens/swells
Nitric Acid 5% Max. OK NO Ethylene Glycol 30% OK OK
Chromic Acid 5% Max. OK NO Ethyl Alcohol 100% OK OK
Perchloric Acid 5% Max. OK NO Methyl Ethyl Ketone 100% OK OK

249
Splash & Splash &
Miscellaneous Concentration Spillage Immersion Miscellaneous Concentration Spillage Immersion
Lubricating Oil 100% OK OK Liquid Nitrogen --- OK NO
Diesel Fuel 100% OK OK Liquid Oxygen --- NO NO
Neutral Salt Solutions 30% OK OK Liquid Ammonia --- NO NO
Dry Fertilizer --- NO NO
*This product is not designed for chemical
resistance above normal room temperatures.
Packaging/Yield
EUCOLASTIC I (gun grade) is packaged in 11 oz (325 ml) tubes, 15/20 oz (.59 L) sausage cases and 2 gal (7.6 L) bulk
units. One 11 oz (325 ml) tube yields 19 in3 (311 cm3) of product. One 2 gal (7.6 L) bulk unit yields 462 in3 (7571 cm3)
of product.
EUCOLASTIC I (pourable grade) is packaged in 30 oz (887 ml) tubes and 2 gal (7.6 L) bulk units. One 30 oz (887 ml)
tube yields 54 in3 (884 cm3) of product. One 2 gal (7.6 L) bulk unit yields 462 in3 (7571 cm3) of product.
Shelf Life
• EUCOLASTIC I (Gun Grade) meets Federal Specification TT-S-00230C, Type II, Class A. This product also
meets industry standard ASTM C 920-86, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, T, A, L, O and CAN/CGSD-
19.13, MCG-2-25-B-N.
• EUCOLASTIC I (Pourable Grade) meets Federal Specification TT-S-00230C, Type I, Class A. This product
also meets industry standard ASTM C 920-86, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Use T, M, A, O, I. Passes Canadian
Standard 19GP16a.
• Gun Grade and Pourable Grade: Canadian Food Inspection Agency, MTQ
Directions for Use
Joint Dimensions: Joint width should be 4 times the expected joint movement, but not less than 1/4" (6 mm).
Width to depth ratios should be equal for joints that are 1/4" (6 mm) to 1/2" (13 mm) in width. If joint width is
greater than 1/2" (13 mm), depth of EUCOLASTIC I must be kept at 1/2" (13 mm) maximium. Installation of
EUCOLASTIC I deeper than what is recommended can cause bubbling or incomplete curing of the material.
Surface Preparation: New concrete must be minimum of 28 days old. The joint must be clean and sound. All
oil, dirt, debris, paint and any other material that could be a bond breaker must be removed. The final step in
cleaning should be the complete removal of all residue with a vacuum cleaner or pressure washing. Substrates
must be dry - application in wet or damp joints will cause bubbling of the material.
Priming: EUCOLASTIC PRIMER is required to prime the joint facing when the product will be used on non-
porous surfaces (metal, granite, etc.) or when the sealant will be underwater. See EUCOLASTIC PRIMER
technical data sheet for use instructions.
Mixing: EUCOLASTIC I is a one part product and requires no pre-blending. It should be used directly from the container.
Placement: Pourable and gun-grade cartridges can be used with a standard caulking gun. Horizontal joints
requiring large quantities of material may be dispensed directly from the pail or a can with a pour spout.
Finishing: Although not normally required, tooling should be done immediately when necessary. Solvent may
be used if necessary to help with tooling.
Curing: EUCOLASTIC I requires no special curing instructions. A skin forms on the surface within 24 hours at
75oF (24oC) and 50% relative humidity. Total cure time is 2 weeks after placement.
Clean-Up
Tools, equipment and general clean-up can be done with EUCO SOLVENT or acetone before the material dries.
removal of dried EUCOLASTIC I can only be done by mechanical means.
• Use only at temperatures above 40oF (4oC).
• Installing EUCOLASTIC I deeper than what is recommended can cause bubbling or incomplete curing of the
material.
• For a faster cure, use EUCOLASTIC II two part urethane.
250
EUCOLASTIC II
Two-Part Urethane Sealant

Description
EUCOLASTIC II is a two-part urethane sealant for sealing and protecting cracks and joints.
• Concrete construction & control joints • Window perimeters
• Precast concrete and masonry units • Interior and exterior applications
Features/Benefits
• Available in both gun grade (non-sag) and pourable for universal applications
• Remains adhesively and cohesively bonded during temperature cyclic movement
• Passes accelerated weathering test for suitability in harsh environments
• USDA compliant
Typical Engineering Data EUCOLASTIC II: (Pourable Grade)
The following results were developed under laboratory
Properties Actual Result Requirement
conditions: Rheology
EUCOLASTIC II: (Gun Grade) @40oF (4oC) Self-Leveling Self-Leveling
Properties Actual Result Requirement Hardness 30 25 to 50
Rheology Weight Loss 5% 10% max
@40oF (4oC) No Flow No Flow Tack Free Time 20 hours 72 hours max
@122oF (50oC) No Deformation No Deformation Adhesion-in-Peel (<25% bond loss)
Shore A Hardness 35 15 to 50 Concrete 18 to 25 PLI > 5 PLI
Elongation 350% none Aluminum 28 to 32 PLI > 5 PLI
Weight Loss 9% 10% max Granite 28 to 32 PLI > 5 PLI
Tack Free Time 24 hours 72 hours max
EUCOLASTIC II
Adhesion-in-Peel (<25% bond loss) EUCOLASTIC II will accept normal traffic in 48 hours
Concrete 18 to 25 PLI > 5 PLI if curing temperature is 70oF (21oC) and 50% relative
Aluminum 19 to 23 PLI > 5 PLI humidity. Expect complete cure within two weeks.
Brick 18 to 23 PLI > 5 PLI
Appearance: EUCOLASTIC II is available in the following colors: Gun Grade: Standard Colors: limestone and
gray. Special Order Colors*: white, buff, bronze and black. Pourable Grade: Standard Colors: limestone and
gray. Special Order Colors*: white, buff and black. *Special orders may require two week lead time.
The following chemical resistance guide is applicable to both the gun and pourable grades.
Splash & Splash &
Acids Concentration Spill Immersion Alkalis Concentration Spill Immersion
Sodium Hydroxide 10% OK NO
Potassium Hydroxide 10% OK NO
Acetic Acid 25% OK OK Calcium Hydroxide 10% OK NO
Butyric Acid 25% OK OK Ammonium Hydroxide 10% OK NO
Citric Acid 25% OK OK Solvents
Oxalic Acid 25% OK OK Benzene 100% OK softens/swells
Lactic Acid 25% OK OK Toluene 100% OK softens/swells
Master Format #:
Hydrochloric Acid 40% OK OK Xylene 100% OK softens/swells

Hydrobromic Acid 50% OK OK Gasoline 100% OK softens/swells
07 92 13
Phosphoric Acid 50% OK OK Mineral Spirits 100% OK softens/swells

Carbonic Acid Any OK OK Paint Thinner 100% OK softens/swells
Methylene Chloride 100% OK softens/swells
Sulfuric Acid Max. 50% OK OK
Acetone 100% OK softens/swells
Muriatic Acid 40% OK OK Methyl Alcohol 100% OK softens/swells
Nitric Acid 5% Max. OK NO Ethylene Glycol 30% OK OK
Chromic Acid 5% Max. OK NO Ethyl Alcohol 100% OK OK
Perchloric Acid 5% Max. OK NO Methyl Ethyl Ketone 100% OK OK

251
Splash & Splash &
Miscellaneous Concentration Spillage Immersion Miscellaneous Concentration Spillage Immersion
Lubricating Oil 100% OK OK Liquid Nitrogen --- OK NO
Diesel Fuel 100% OK OK Liquid Oxygen --- NO NO
Neutral Salt Solutions 30% OK OK Liquid Ammonia --- NO NO
*This product is not designed for chemical Dry Fertilizer --- NO NO
resistance above normal room temperatures.
Packaging/Yield
EUCOLASTIC II (both gun grade and pourable grade) is a two part urethane product packaged in 2 gal (7.6 L)
kits which contain both the bulk urethane (EUCOLASTIC II) as well as the required hardener. One 2 gal (7.6 L)
bulk unit yields 462 in3 (7571 cm3) of product.
Shelf Life
• EUCOLASTIC II (Gun Grade) meets Federal Specification TT-S-00227E, Type II, Class A. This product also
meets industry standard ASTM C 920-86, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, T, A, and O.
• EUCOLASTIC II (Pourable Grade) meets Federal Specification TT-S-00227E, Type I, Class A. This product also
meets industry standard ASTM C 920-86, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T, M, A, I and O. Passes Canadian
Standard 19GP16a.
• EUCOLASTIC II (Gun Grade and Pourable Grade): Canadian Food Inspection Agency
• EUCOLASTIC II (Pourable Grade): Canada MTQ
Directions for Use

Joint Dimensions: Joint width should be 4 times the expected joint movement, but not less than 1/4" (6 mm).
Width to depth ratios should be equal for joints that are 1/4" (6 mm) to 1/2" (13 mm) in width. If joint width is
greater than 1/2" (13 mm), depth of EUCOLASTIC II must be kept at 1/2" (13 mm) maximium. Installation of
EUCOLASTIC II deeper than what is recommended can cause bubbling or incomplete curing of the material.
Surface Preparation: New concrete must be minimum of 28 days old. The joint must be clean and sound. All
cleaning should be the complete removal of all residue with a vacuum cleaner or pressure washing.
Priming: EUCOLASTIC PRIMER is required to prime the joint facing when the product will be used on non-
porous surfaces (metal, granite, etc.) or when the sealant will be underwater. See EUCOLASTIC PRIMER
technical data sheet for use instructions.
Mixing: EUCOLASTIC II is a two-part product and requires mixing. Pour all of the prescribed hardener into the
pail and mix with a mechanical mixer and prop for 5 minutes. Make sure that the sides of the can are scraped to
assure all of the sealant is catalyzed.
Placement: Pourable and gun-grade cartridges can be used with a standard caulking gun. Horizontal joints
requiring large quantities of material may be dispensed directly from the pail or a can with a pour spout.
Finishing: Although not normally required, tooling should be done immediately when necessary. Solvent may
be used if necessary to help with tooling.
Clean-Up
Tools, equipment and general clean-up can be done with EUCO SOLVENT or acetone before the material dries.
Removal of dry EUCOLASTIC II can only be done by mechanical means.
• Use only at temperatures above 40oF (4oC).
• Installing EUCOLASTIC II deeper than what is recommended can cause bubbling or incomplete curing of the
material.
Rev. 6.11
252
EUCOLASTIC PRIMER
Urethane Sealant Primer

Description
EUCOLASTIC PRIMER is a one component fast drying liquid primer that prepares non-porous surfaces for the
application of EUCOLASTIC I and EUCOLASTIC II. EUCOLASTIC PRIMER imparts a surface finish which is very
receptive to urethane sealants.
• To prepare surface for the adhesion of urethane sealants
• Assures a water resistant bond on porous and non-porous substrates
Features/Benefits
• Provides primer base for adhesion of EUCOLASTIC I and EUCOLASTIC II
• Increases adhesion for use in immersion situations
• Seals porous surfaces increasing water tightness
EUCOLASTIC PRIMER will dry in 30 to 45 minutes @ 70°F (21°C). Primer must be completely dry before
installation of EUCOLASTIC I or II.
If the EUCOLASTIC PRIMER beomes hard and glossy, the surface must be cleaned with solvent and reprimed.
Appearance: EUCOLASTIC PRIMER is a clear, one component liquid with a slight amber color.
Packaging/Yield
EUCOLASTIC PRIMER
EUCOLASTIC PRIMER is available in 1 qt (0.95 L) units
Shelf Life
1 year in original, unopened container
Coverage
Estimated coverage is 2400 lineal ft/gal per 1/2" depth of double faced joint (193 lineal m/L per 13 mm depth of
double faced joint).
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: New concrete must be a minimum of 28 days old. The joint must be clean and sound. All
cleaning should be the complete removal of all residue with a vacuum cleaner or by pressure washing. All joint
facings must possess an open surface texture with all curing compounds and sealers removed.
Application: EUCOLASTIC PRIMER should be applied liberally with a clean brush or roller, but do not allow the
product to puddle or pond. Use with adequate ventilation.
Clean-Up
Master Format #:
Tools, equipment and general clean-up can be done with EUCO SOLVENT, acetone or toluene.
07 92 13
• Keep containers sealed until ready to use.

• Opened containers have limited shelf life (less than 1 month).
• This product is amber in color and is noticeable on some surfaces. Care must be taken to apply only to areas
that will be covered by final product.

253
Rev. 6.11
254
EUCO CLEAN-CUT
Joint Filler Stain Prevention Film

Description
EUCO CLEAN-CUT is a water based blend of film-forming polymers that prevents staining of concrete due to
overfill of epoxy or polyurea joint fillers. When applied to concrete adjacent to floor joints prior to filling, EUCO
CLEAN-CUT dries to form a clear, glossy film that seals and protects the surface. After joint filling and shaving,
EUCO CLEAN-CUT is easily removed with water. EUCO CLEAN-CUT also acts as a release film, making joint
filler shaving operations faster and less labor-intensive.
• Concrete construction and control joints
• Expecially suitable for colored concrete where appearance is critical
Features/Benefits
• Prevents unsightly stains caused by joint material overfill
• Makes joint filler shaving easier
• Can be removed from concrete and tools with water
• Water-based, very low odor formula
VOC Content: 0 g/L
Dry Time: 15 to 20 minutes @ 77°F (25°C), 40% RH
Appearance: Clear liquid
EUCO CLEAN-CUT
Packaging
EUCO CLEAN-CUT is packaged in 5 gal (18.9 L) pails and in cases of 6/1 gal (3.8 L) units.
Shelf Life
Coverage
700 to 800 ft²/gal (17.2 to 19.6 m²/L), depending on the texture and porosity of the concrete, the type of joint
filler used, and the width of film applied. One coat is normally adequate, but a second coat may be required if the
concrete is extremely rough or porous. A test application is recommended to determine the required coverage rate.
Directions for Use
Concrete surfaces should be clean and dry. Ambient and concrete temperature must be between 40°F to 90°F
(4°C to 32°C). EUCO CLEAN-CUT should be applied the same day as the joint filler installation. Apply EUCO
CLEAN-CUT to concrete next to the unfilled joint using a small, short-napped paint roller, brush, or sprayer. DO
NOT ALLOW EUCO CLEAN-CUT TO FLOW INTO THE JOINT. The interior of the joint must be protected
from run-off or overspray. The width of film applied to the concrete surface adjacent to the joint will depend on
Master Format #:
the expected amount of joint material overfill. Allow EUCO CLEAN-CUT to dry completely before installation of
joint filler. Dry time will depend on application rate as well as ambient temperature and humidity conditions.
07 92 00
After joint filler shaving is complete, the remaining EUCO CLEAN-CUT can be removed with clean water. Allow
the water to soften and dissolve the EUCO CLEAN-CUT film, then wash away. Some scrubbing with a brush
or abrasive pad may be required. Use a household alkaline cleaner or detergent such as TSP (trisodium
phosphate) to help remove stubborn spots or thick applications of EUCO CLEAN-CUT. Removal of EUCO
CLEAN-CUT must be done immediately after joints are filled and shaved. If the EUCO
CLEAN CUT is allowed to remain on the concrete, removal may be extremely difficult.

255
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with water.
• Do not use EUCO CLEAN-CUT at temperatures below 40°F (4°C).
• Do not allow EUCO CLEAN-CUT to freeze.
• The performance of EUCO CLEAN-CUT is dependent on the texture and porosity of the concrete and the type
of joint filler used. A test section is strongly recommended to determine the thickness of EUCO CLEAN-CUT
film required, and to estimate the overall effectiveness of the product given the site conditions.
Rev. 6.11
256
Penetrating Sealers/Liquid Densifiers
Liquid Densifiers
Euco Diamond Hard 259
Eucosil 261
Surfhard 263
UltraGuard 265
UltraSil Li+ 267
Penetrating Sealers
Baracade M.E. 269
Baracade Silane 40 271
Baracade Silane 40 IPA 273
Baracade Silane 100 275
Baracade WB 244 277
Chemstop WB Regular, HD 279
Euco #512 VOX Epoxy Sealer 281
Euco-Guard 100 283
Linseed Oil Treatment 285
Weather-Guard 287
Specialty Sealers
Duralprep 3020 289
EUCO Diamond Hard Chemical Resistance
Acids Effect Bases Effect

10% Lactic M 5% Ammonium Hydroxide O
10% Citric M Concentrated Ammonium Hydroxide O
Glacial Acetic M 50% Potassium Hydroxide M
10% Acetic M 50% Sodium Hydroxide M
10% Formic M Concentrated Calcium Hydroxide O
10% Oxalic M 10% Potassium Hydroxide M
10% Tannic O 10% Sodium Hydroxide M
10% Chromic M
10% Hydrochloric M Solvents Effect
Concentrated Hydrochloric S Acetone O
10% Nitric S Benzene/Xylene O
Concentrated Phosphoric M Carbon Tetrachloride O
10% Sulfuric M Cyclohexane O
Conentrated Sulfuric S Dichlorobenzene M
Dichloroethane M
Alcohols Effect Hydraulic Fluids/Oils/Fuels Effect

Benzyl Alcohol O Skydrol O
Ethyl Alcohol (Ethanol) O Automatic Transmission Fluid O
Isopropyl Alcohol (Isopropanol) O Brake Fluid O
Methyl Alcohol (Methanol) O Gasoline/Jet Fuel O
Ethylene Glycol (anti-freeze) O JP-4 Kerosene O
MEK O 10W30 Motor Oil O
Aircraft Motor Oil O
Salts (30% Solutions) Effect Heating Oil O
Ammonium Chloride M
Ammonium Nitrate O Other Chemicals Effect
Calcium Chloride O Formaldehyde O
Calcium Hypochlorite M 10% Urea O
Cupric Chloride M Cola O
Ferric Chloride M Mustard O
Ferric Nitrate O Ketchup O
Magnesium Chloride M
Potassium Chloride M Water/Miscellaneous Effect
Sodium Bicarbonate O Tap/Deionized/Distilled Water O
Sodium Chloride O Sea Water M
Sodium Chloride - Saturated
Solution M Clorox (beach) O
Animal Fat, Blood, Urine O
Alkaline Detergent Cleaning Solution O
KEY:
O = No Effect
M = Moderate Effect
S = Severe Effect
Chemical attack is influenced by temperature, exposure period, and concentration. The information above
should be used for reference purposes only and is not intended to guarantee product performance.
EUCO DIAMOND HARD

Liquid Densifier and Sealer For Concrete
Description
EUCO DIAMOND HARD is a unique blend of silicate and siliconate polymers that penetrate concrete surfaces and
chemically react to provide an increase in surface density, durability, and abrasion resistance. Concrete treated with
EUCO DIAMOND HARD is dust-proofed, resists tire marks, and is easier to maintain. Over time, EUCO DIAMOND
HARD provides an attractive, slip resistant sheen to concrete that never peels, fades, or wears away.
• Interior or exterior • Manufacturing plants
• Warehouse floors • Distribution centers
• Commercial and retail floors • Polished concrete
Features/Benefits
• Reduces porosity and increases durability of the • Minimizes tire marks and enables them to be
concrete surface more easily removed
• Complies with VOC regulations across North • Can be applied to new or existing concrete
America
• Treated surfaces have increased liquid repellency Can contribute to LEED points
• Equipment can be cleaned with water
VOC Content.................................................0 g/L EUCO DIAMOND HARD
ASTM C 779 Wear Resistance Results @ 28 Days
Drying Time at 70°F (21°C):
Light Foot Traffic...............................4 to 6 hours 250
Wheel Traffic...........................................24 hours
EUCO DIAMOND HARD

Abrasion/Wear Resistance, ASTM C 779 200
Coefficient of Friction, ASTM F 1679

Dry: 0.81 Wet: 0.72
% of Reference
150
Liquid Repellency, RILEM Method 11.4
Water absorbed in 24 hours:
Untreated concrete: 5 mL 100
EUCO DIAMOND HARD treated concrete: 1 mL

Chemical Resistance: For a complete chemical 50
resistance chart, contact The Euclid Chemical Co.

Appearance: EUCO DIAMOND HARD is a clear,
water-based liquid that cures without a significant 0
change in concrete appearance. During placement, 30 min 60 min

the color of the concrete may initially appear darker Reference DH Applied @ 7 days Mineral Aggregate Shake-On Hardener
but will lighten upon drying. Tightly troweled concrete surfaces treated with EUCO DIAMOND HARD will achieve a
glossy sheen over time with traffic and regular cleaning or buffing. If immediate gloss is desired, the floor may be
Master Format #:
dry buffed with a lambswool buffing pad after the sealer has cured for 24 hours.
Packaging
03 35 00
EUCO DIAMOND HARD is packaged in 275 gal (1041 L) totes, 55 gal (208 L) drums and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
• USDA compliant

259
Coverage
One gallon of EUCO DIAMOND HARD will cover 200 to 250 ft²/gal (4.9 to 6.1 m²/L) of steel troweled concrete
depending on the surface porosity and texture.
Directions for Use
EUCO DIAMOND HARD should be used directly from the container and requires no pre-mixing or blending.
Surface Preparation (New Concrete): Cure the concrete by a wet or sheet cure method in accordance with
ASTM C-171, or with a curing compound such as KUREZ RC or KUREZ DR VOX. New concrete should cure
seven days or longer before application of EUCO DIAMOND HARD. For fast track projects, the wet cure time may be
reduced at the discretion of the project engineer. Allow concrete to air dry a minimum of 24 hours prior to application
of EUCO DIAMOND HARD. Insufficient drying of the concrete will prevent full penetration of EUCO DIAMOND HARD,
reducing its effectiveness.
Surface Preparation (Existing/Older Concrete): Concrete that is already in service or older floors must be
clean and free of any materials that could prevent penetration of EUCO DIAMOND HARD, such as curing
compounds or cure & seals, paints, coatings, dirt/oil, waxes, etc. If necessary, use EUCO CLEAN & STRIP to
remove these contaminants before applying EUCO DIAMOND HARD.
Application (New or Old Concrete): Air temperature during application must be between 35°F and 100°F (2°C
and 38°C). At temperatures below 50°F (10°C), the reaction and “gelling” process of EUCO DIAMOND HARD is
slower, so the concrete will need to remain wet with EUCO DIAMOND HARD for a longer period of time. In hot or
windy conditions, the reaction may take less than the normal 30 to 60 minute period. Concrete should be pre-
dampened in hot weather; apply EUCO DIAMOND HARD when all standing water has disappeared. Apply the
EUCO DIAMOND HARD to the concrete surface by low pressure sprayer or by pouring directly onto the surface
and distributing evenly by broom or squeegee. With soft bristle hand brooms or brushes on an auto-scrubber,
work the EUCO DIAMOND HARD around the area to be treated and into the surface. The concrete must be kept
wet with EUCO DIAMOND HARD for at least 30 minutes - add additional EUCO DIAMOND HARD if necessary
to maintain a wet surface. As the EUCO DIAMOND HARD begins to thicken and gel underfoot, lightly spray
the area with clean water to break up the thickened EUCO DIAMOND HARD and move the excess material on
to the adjacent floor area next to be treated. Do not track EUCO DIAMOND HARD onto untreated concrete, as
permanent footprints or tire marks can result. Continue the application process until the entire floor has been
treated. When finished, completely remove all excess EUCO DIAMOND HARD from the surface. If excess
EUCO DIAMOND HARD is allowed to dry on the concrete surface, a white residue will form that can only
be removed by mechanical means such as grinding or sanding. Prevent this by completely removing all
excess EUCO DIAMOND HARD from the surface when application is complete.
Floor Joints: If the floor joints are to be filled after EUCO DIAMOND HARD has been applied, they must be
thoroughly cleaned before installation of joint filler. Cleaning joints by circular concrete saw or a drill equipped
with a wire wheel is recommended.
Maintenance: Contact The Euclid Chemical Company for detailed maintenance procedures for a EUCO
DIAMOND HARD treated floor.
Clean-Up
Clean brooms, tools and all equipment and sprayers with clean water immediately after use. The residue from
application and clean up process is non-toxic.
• Protect containers of EUCO DIAMOND HARD from freezing. In the event of freezing, thaw and stir or agitate before use.
• EUCO DIAMOND HARD is not recommended for use as a curing compound. It does not meet the requirements
of ASTM C 309 or ASTM C 1315.
• Although EUCO DIAMOND HARD has successfully demonstrated resistance to common chemicals in laboratory
testing, the in-place performance will depend on surface porosity, application rate, chemical exposure and dwell
time. If chemical resistance is of concern, a concrete sample treated with EUCO DIAMOND HARD should be
constructed on the jobsite and subjected to the anticipated chemical exposure to verify in-place performance. This
performance should be verified and approved by the owner prior to installation.
• Protect all adjacent surfaces including metals, glass, wood, paint or brick from contact with EUCO DIAMOND
HARD. If accidentally over sprayed, wash adjacent surfaces with potable water immediately.
• Waste resulting from EUCO DIAMOND HARD application must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations.
260
EUCOSIL

Liquid Densifier For Concrete Surfaces
Description
EUCOSIL is a water-based sodium silicate solution used to densify and dustproof concrete. EUCOSIL chemically
reacts within concrete and becomes an integral part of the surface, making treated concrete denser and easier
to maintain.
• Interior or exterior horizontal concrete
• Educational and medical facilities
• Office and multi-residential buildings
• Warehouse floors
• Food storage areas
Features/Benefits
• Seals, densifies and dustproofs in one operation • Can be tiled over
• Water based, no odor • Zero VOC’s
• Treated concrete resists penetration of water Can contribute to LEED points
Typical Performance at 70°F (21°C)
Application Cure Time
Foot Traffic...........................................4 to 6 hours
Wheel Traffic.............................................24 hours
VOC Content ................................................. 0 g/l
Appearance: EUCOSIL is a clear liquid that does not change the appearance of concrete. Immediately after
application, the color of the concrete may appear darker. As the EUCOSIL cures and dries out, the treated
EUCOSIL
concrete will have a nearly unaffected appearance. Treated concrete will slightly bead water.
Packaging
EUCOSIL is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
USDA and Canadian Food Inspection Agency
Coverage
1 gal (3.8 L) of EUCOSIL will cover from 150 to 600 ft2 (14 to 56 m2) of concrete surface depending upon the
Master Format #:
porosity of the concrete and job requirements. The following rates of coverage are approximate:
03 35 00
ft2/gal (m2/L) Rough Finish Finely Textured Hard Troweled

Newly Cured Bare Concrete 200 (4.9) 300 (7.4) 400 (9.8)
Floors to be tiled 500 (12.3)
Dusting Concrete or Terrazzo 300 (7.4) 500 (12.3)
Additional Coats: After initial coat, additional coats may be required to seal the surface. The coverage will
increase with each additional coat.

261
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: The concrete surface must be clean, dry and free of any contaminant or coating which
may interfere with the penetration of EUCOSIL. EUCOSIL is not a curing compound and should only be
applied to concrete that has been cured with an industry accepted method, such as wet curing, sheet curing, or
application of a curing compound. If a curing compound has been used, it must be completely removed before
applying EUCOSIL.
Mixing: EUCOSIL is ready to use and requires no pre-mixing.
Placement: Apply EUCOSIL to a concrete surface in a continuous film. Scrub the EUCOSIL into the concrete
and brush out all puddles and runs immediately. All of the EUCOSIL should soak into the concrete. Additional
coats may be applied if the concrete surface is absorptive, but do not allow excess EUCOSIL to dry on
the surface. If subsequent coats do not appear to be soaking in, immediately stop application and vacuum/
squeegee excess EUCOSIL from the surface.
Clean-Up
Clean brushes, tools, equipment and flush sprayer with potable water immediately after use.
• Protect EUCOSIL from freezing. In the event of freezing, thaw and stir or agitate before using.
• Protect metal, glass, wood, paint or brick from contact with EUCOSIL. If accidently oversprayed on these
surfaces, wash surface with clean water immediately.
• If added abrasion resistance is required in new construction, consider the use of a dry shake floor hardener.
See SURFLEX, EUCO-PLATE HD or DIAMOND-PLATE data sheets.
• Allow the product to dry 4 to 6 hours at 70oF (21oC) before exposure to foot traffic or rain.
• If excess EUCOSIL is left on the concrete surface, a white residue may form and should be removed by
scrubbing immediately. If this residue is allowed to dry, removal of the white discoloration may require
mechanical means, such as grinding or sanding.
Rev. 6.11
262
SURFHARD

Liquid Densifier And Dustproofer For Concrete
Description
SURFHARD is a water-based magnesium fluorosilicate solution that reacts chemically with alkaline materials in
concrete to produce a more dense, durable, and chemically resistant floor. SURFHARD is especially effective at
strengthening weak, soft, or dusting concrete surfaces. A patented penetrating agent in SURFHARD assists in
its penetration and reactivity, enabling SURFHARD to dustproof and densify at a greater depth.
• Concrete floors, especially those with carbonated, soft, or dusting surfaces
• Schools
• Industrial floors
• Commercial buildings
• Residential basements
Features/Benefits
• Densifies and dustproofs concrete surfaces
• Prolongs floor life
• Resists acids, alkalies, oils and salts
• Improves concrete that is carbonated, soft, or powdery
• Can be used without interrupting production schedules
Typical Performance
SURFHARD
Application Cure Time
Foot traffic...........................................4 to 6 hours
Wheel traffic................................................4 hours
VOC Content..................................................0 g/L
SURFHARD helps protect concrete against the harmful effects of:
• Caustic soda • Ammonium chloride
• Calcium chloride • Solvents
• Sodium chloride • Fuel oils
• Soap solutions • Sugar solutions
Appearance: SURFHARD is a clear liquid that does not change the color or appearance of concrete. Immediately
after application, the color of the treated concrete may initially appear darker. As the sealer cures and dries out, the
treated concrete will have little change in appearance. Treated concrete will slightly bead water and other liquids.
Packaging
SURFHARD is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Master Format #:
Shelf Life
03 35 00
• USDA compliant

263
Coverage
SURFHARD is applied in up to three coats per the following recommended dilutions:
Coat Dilution
1st coat 1 part SURFHARD to 2 parts water
2nd coat 1 part SURFHARD to 1 part water
3rd coat 2 parts SURFHARD to 1 part water
Coverage Rate
Undiluted Surfhard Diluted Surfhard
1st coat: 225 ft²/gal (5.5 m²/L) 150 ft²/gal (3.7 m²/L)
2nd coat: 400 ft²/gal (9.8 m²/L) 200 ft²/gal (4.9 m²/L)
3rd coat: 900 ft²/gal (22.1 m²/L) 300 ft²/gal (7.4 m²/L)
All coverage rates are approximate on hard-troweled concrete floors.
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: The surface to be treated should be clean, free of curing compounds, sealers, paint or
any other contaminants that could prohibit penetration of SURFHARD. Membrane forming curing compounds
should not be used on new concrete if SURFHARD is to be applied, unless a dissipating curing compound
such as KUREZ DR VOX is used and cleaned off the surface after the curing period. For best performance,
concrete should be dry before applying SURFHARD. New concrete surfaces should be at least 7 days old prior
to application. Extremely soft and porous surfaces should be saturated with water prior to application. When
the surface is dry, apply the 1st coat of SURFHARD and proceed as indicated under Placement below. This
pre-wetting concentrates the chemical at the top level of the concrete. The final coat will then harden at the top
surface and yield maximum wearing and resistance qualities. In some instances, or in some selected areas, a
surface may require an additional application of undiluted SURFHARD to complete hardening and dustproofing.
Mixing: SURFHARD is easily diluted in water with mild agitation.
Placement: Flood each coat of SURFHARD onto the surface and spread with a soft fiber broom, squeegee, or
mop. Allow the solution to soak into the concrete for 10 to 15 minutes and redistribute any puddles that remain.
Treated surfaces should be thoroughly dry between coats. Drying time may vary from 4 to 12 hours depending
upon the temperature, humidity, and whether the concrete is indoors or outdoors. As the various coats of
SURFHARD are applied, each succeeding coat will yield increased coverage because the concrete surface is
in the process of hardening and becoming denser. After the third coat, the floor should be thoroughly flushed
with water and scrubbed with a stiff broom to remove any residual material. If the floor should show patches of
white upon drying, immediately flood with water and scrub the floor with a mechanical scrubber, rinse and dry.
Do not attempt further treatment.
NOTE: All three coats may not be necessary to harden the floor. If the floor should show patches of white on
drying, immediately flood with water and scrub the floor with a mechanical scrubber, rinse and dry. Do not
attempt further treatment.
Clean-Up
• SURFHARD is not recommended for application to colored concrete surfaces.
• Allow the product to dry 4 to 6 hours at 70oF (21oC) before exposure to traffic or rain.
• SURFHARD is a water-based material and must be kept from freezing.
• If excess SURFHARD is left on the concrete surface, a white residue may form and should be removed by
scrubbing immediately. If this residue is allowed to dry, removal may require mechanical means such as
sanding or grinding.
Rev. 6.11
264
UltraGuard

Protectant and Densifier for Concrete Floors
Description
UltraGuard is a water-based polymeric protectant that improves the appearance and durability of concrete
floors. UltraGuard contains a powerful stain-resistant additive and is further enhanced with lithium silicate,
which provides densification of the concrete surface. This product also contains UV absorbers that enable the
UltraGuard to protect colored or dyed concrete against UV degradation. UltraGuard can be used alone or in
combination with a reactive sealer such as UltraSil Li+ to give concrete floors a glossy finish, harder surface, and
protective seal.
• Interior concrete floors • Distribution centers • Health care facilities
• Commercial and retail floors • Institutional floors • Schools
Features/Benefits
• Can provide instant gloss to concrete floors • Treated concrete is easier to maintain
• Water based, low odor, low VOC content • Protects colored or dyed concrete from UV
• Treated concrete is more dense and durable degradation
• Breathable Can contribute to LEED points (EQ Credit 4.2)
Appearance Milky-white liquid Solids/Active Content 21-23%
Specific Gravity 1.03 VOC Content 111 g/L
pH 9.5 - 10.5 Freeze Point 32°F (0°C)
Drying Time (Dry-to-Touch) 1 to 2 hours Flash Point NA
Stain Resistance (ASTM D 1308)
ULTRAGUARD
Concrete Treated with
Staining Untreated Concrete After After
UltraSil Li+ and UltraGuard
Agent Rebuffing Rebuffing
30 minutes 8 hours 30 minutes 8 hours
Gloss
Ketchup 2 1 4 4 Restored
Mustard 2 1 3 3 Gloss
Restored
Pickle Juice 4 (absorbed 4 (absorbed 4 3 Gloss

into surface) into surface) Rebuffing Restored
resulted
Balsamic 2 1 in no 3 3 Gloss
Vinegar improvement Restored
in Gloss
Red Wine 1 1 appearance. 3 3 Restored
Transmission Gloss
Master Format #:
1 1 4 4
Fluid Restored
Brake Fluid 1 1 3 3 3
03 35 00
Used Motor 1 1 4 4 4
Oil
KEY: 1 - stained, 2 - slight discoloration, 3 - loss of gloss, 4 - no effect
Specimen preparation: The untreated and UltraGuard test specimens were honed to 600 grit. The UltraGuard
specimens were treated with UltraSil Li+ after the 220 grit pass. Two coats of UltraGuard were applied after the 600
grit pass, buffing after each coat. Gloss was restored by re-applying UltraGuard and buffing.

265
Packaging
UltraGuard is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
One year in original, unopened package.
USDA compliant
Coverage
1 gallon (3.8 L) of UltraGuard will cover from 500 to 1000 ft2 (46 to 95 m2) of concrete depending upon the texture
and porosity of the surface.
The actual coverage rate required to achieve the appearance and protection desired should be determined
by performing a small test application on-site.
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: Cure new concrete by a wet or sheet cure method in accordance with ASTM C 171, or
with a curing compound that meets the requirements of ASTM C 309. Euclid Chemical’s removable curing
compounds Kurez RC or Kurez RC-100 or the dissipating curing compounds Kurez DR VOX or Kurez DR-100
are recommended. To maximize strength and other physical properties of the concrete slab, the American Concrete
Institute recommends new concrete cure seven days or longer before removal of the curing method. For fast track
projects, the cure time may be reduced at the discretion of the project engineer. If a curing compound is used, it must
be completely removed before application of UltraGuard. After the curing method is removed, allow the slab to air
dry a minimum of 24 hours prior to application.
All concrete must be clean of dirt, oil, and other contaminants before applying UltraGuard. The performance of
UltraGuard is maximized when applied to concrete already densified with Euco Diamond Hard or UltraSil
Li+. Allow at least 24 hours of drying time after densifier application before applying UltraGuard.
Application to New or Old Concrete: Air temperature during application must be between 40°F and 100°F
(4°C and 38°C). Prior to application, if the floor is very absorptive, light sprinkling with water is recommended
for more uniform coverage and smoother appearance. Do not apply over standing water. UltraGuard may be
diluted up to 1:1 with potable water when applying in dry or windy environments to avoid premature drying of
the product and streaking during application.
Using a pump-up sprayer, spray UltraGuard on the surface and while wet, immediately spread with a microfiber
pad. Ensure that the coverage rate is followed - do not apply too heavily. Keep a wet edge and do not overlap
over dried areas to avoid lap marks. Allow the UltraGuard to dry tack-free, about 30-60 minutes, then buff or
burnish as desired. Best shine and stain resistance is achieved with a high speed burnisher equipped with a
soft pad. Up to three coats can be applied following the same technique - spray, spread, let dry, then burnish.
Under normal conditions, the floor will be traffic ready approximately one to two hours following final burnishing.
Do not expose the floor to water for 72 hours.
Floor Joints: If the floor joints are to be filled after UltraGuard has been applied, they must be thoroughly
cleaned before installation of joint filler. Cleaning joints by concrete saw or a grinder equipped with a wire wheel
is recommended.
Clean-Up
• Protect UltraGuard from freezing. In the event of freezing, thaw and stir before using.
• Protect metal, glass, wood, paint or brick from contact with UltraGuard. If accidently oversprayed on these
• Acid-stained concrete must be thoroughly neutralized before application of UltraGuard.
• Allow the product to dry 72 hours at 70°F (21°C) before exposure to water or rain.
• The stain resistance of UltraGuard gradually develops over the first 5-7 days after application and is greatly
increased by burnishing. Prevent spills as much as possible during this time. Immediate clean-up of spills
will reduce the occurrence of staining.
266
UltraSil Li+

Liquid Densifier, Sealer, and Dustproofer For Concrete
Description
UltraSil Li+ is a water-based lithium silicate solution used to densify, seal and dustproof concrete surfaces.
UltraSil Li+ penetrates and chemically reacts within the concrete surface, producing extremely hard and dense
calcium silicate hydrate (CSH) in the pores. The result is concrete that is more durable, easier to clean, and
more resistant to damage from water and mild chemicals. Because the product of the lithium silicate-concrete
reaction is formed internally, the protection of UltraSil Li+ never peels or flakes off, is unaffected by moisture, and
lasts much longer than surface sealers and coatings.
• Interior concrete floors • Distribution centers • Clean rooms
• Commercial and retail floors • Transportation terminals • Mechanical rooms
• Warehouse floors • Institutional floors
• Manufacturing plants • Health care facilities

Features/Benefits
• Seals, densifies and dustproofs concrete in one • Permanent treatment that never peels off
operation • Makes concrete easier to maintain
• Water based, no VOCs Can contribute to LEED points (EQ Credit 4.2)
• Treated concrete is more dense and durable
Physical Properties at 70°F (21°C)
Form Clear, thin liquid
ULTRASIL LI+
pH 11.7
Density 9.2 lb/gal (1.1 kg/L)
Solids/Active Content 15%
VOC Content 0 g/L
Freeze Point 32°F (0°C)
Packaging
UltraSil Li+ is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
Master Format #:

03 35 00
USDA compliant
Coverage
1 gallon (3.8 L) of UltraSil Li+ will cover from 250 to 800 ft2 (23 to 74 m2) of concrete depending upon the texture
and porosity of the surface.

267
Directions for Use
UltraSil Li+ should be used directly from the container and requires no dilution or pre-mixing.
Surface Preparation (New Concrete): Cure the concrete by a wet or sheet cure method in accordance with
ASTM C-171, or with a curing compound that meets the requirements of ASTM C 309. Euclid Chemical’s
removable curing compound Kurez RC or dissipating curing compound Kurez DR VOX are recommended. To
maximize strength and other physical properties of the concrete slab, new concrete should cure seven days or longer
before application of UltraSil Li+. For fast track projects, the cure time may be reduced at the discretion of the project
engineer. If a curing compound is used, it must be completely removed before application of UltraSil Li+. After the
curing method is removed, allow the slab to air dry a minimum of 24 hours prior to application. Insufficient drying of
the concrete will prevent full penetration of UltraSil Li+, reducing its effectiveness.
Surface Preparation (Existing/Older Concrete): Concrete must be clean and free of any materials that could
prevent penetration of UltraSil Li+, such as curing compounds or cure & seals, paints, coatings, dirt/oil, waxes,
etc. If necessary, use EUCO Clean & Strip to remove these contaminants before applying UltraSil Li+.
Application (New or Old Concrete): Air temperature during application must be between 35°F and 100°F (2°C
and 38°C) for proper chemical reaction of the UltraSil Li+. Apply a single coat of UltraSil Li+ using a low pressure
sprayer equipped with a 0.5 gal/min (1.9 L/min) spray tip. Apply at a coverage rate that results in a uniformly wet
surface without puddles. While UltraSil Li+ is still wet, use a soft-bristle broom or microfiber pad to redistribute
and evenly spread out the material. Do not continue to brush or spread out UltraSil Li+ once the product begins
to dry. Keep the floor wet with UltraSil Li+ for 5-10 minutes.
Do not allow excess UltraSil Li+ to puddle and dry on the floor. This may result in a white residue that must be
removed immediately with scrubbing.
If immediate surface sheen is desired, dry buff or burnish the floor with a polishing pad appropriate for the
desired end gloss result.
Floor Joints: If the floor joints are to be filled after UltraSil Li+ has been applied, they must be thoroughly
cleaned before installation of joint filler. Cleaning joints by circular concrete saw or a grinder equipped with a
wire wheel is recommended.
Clean-Up
• Protect UltraSil Li+ from freezing. In the event of freezing, thaw and stir or agitate before using.
• Protect metal, glass, wood, paint or brick from contact with UltraSil Li+. If accidently oversprayed on these
• If added abrasion resistance is required in new construction, consider the use of a dry shake floor hardener.
such as SURFLEX, EUCO-PLATE HD, or DIAMOND-PLATE.
• Allow the product to dry 4 to 6 hours at 70oF (21oC) before exposure to foot traffic or rain.
Rev. 6.11
268
BARACADE M.E.

Silicone Micro Emulsion Water Repellent
Description
BARACADE M.E. is an oligomeric alkyl alkoxy siloxane concentrate. When diluted with water, BARACADE M.E.
self-emulsifies into a unique product capable of repelling water on concrete or masonry surfaces. BARACADE M.E.
is a breathable, non-staining, colorless material which penetrates deep into the surface to seal out moisture,
reduce efflorescence and minimize the damaging effects of freeze-thaw cycles. BARACADE M.E. protects
without altering the appearance or texture of the treated surface and improves resistance to airborne dirt, smog
and other air pollutants.
• BARACADE M.E./9 is mixed 9 parts water to 1 part BARACADE M.E./4.5 is mixed 4.5 parts water to 1 part
BARACADE M.E. for vertical applications such as: BARACADE M.E. for horizontal applications such as:
• Precast & prestressed • Sidewalks
• Above grade • Ramps
• Exposed aggregate • Parking decks
• Poured-in-place • Bridge decks
• Concrete block • Industrial floors
Material Properties* @ 75°F (25°C) Flash point of concentrate 77°F
Baracade M.E. Test Results Nchrp 244 Series II Tests Flash point after dilution None
Minimum BARACADE Solids by weight (after dilution)
Requirement M.E./4.5 BARACADE M.E./9 10%
Reduction in water absorption 75% 80% BARACADE M.E./4.5 18%
Water vapor transmission 100% 121% Appearance of Liquid pale yellow
Reduction in chloride ion Intrusion 75% 83% Appearance when dry clear
California Test Method (Cal trans) Resistance to UV excellent
BARACADE M.E.
Water absorption, 24 hours 1% max 0.65% Abrasion Resistance excellent
Freeze thaw cycles 200 max 433 Water permeance ASTM E 514
VOC content, ASTM D 3960 400 max 349 g/L BARACADE M.E./9 passes
* Values presented are typical and are not necessarily referenced to create specifications.
Packaging
Baracade M.E. is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums, 5 gal (18.9 L) pails and 1 gal (3.8 L) units.
Shelf Life
Coverage
Because of variations in surface density, the following coverage rates are approximate and are intended for estimating
purposes only. Use test applications on actual surfaces to accurately determine coverage rates. Extremely porous
surfaces may require two coats.
Vertical Applications BARACADE M.E./9 ft²/gal (m²/L)
Surface Type # of Coats 1st Coat 2nd Coat
Poured and Precast Concrete Fogs 120 to 170 (2.9 to 4.2) -
Master Format #:
Slump Block 1 70 to 80 (1.7 to 2.0) -

Brick and Stucco 1 80 to 125 (2.0 to 3.1) -
07 19 23
Plaster and Stone/Tile 1 200 to 300 (4.9 to 7.4) -

Standard Block ASTM C 90 Grade N Type I) 2 40 to 80 (0.98 to 2.0) 60 to 120 (1.5 to 2.9)
Split Faced Block 2 40 to 80 (0.98 to 2.0) 60 to 120 (1.5 to 2.9)
Horizontal Applications BARACADE M.E./4.5

Concrete 2 100 to 150 (2.4 to 3.7) 100 to 150 (2.4 to 3.7)

269
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: Cure new concrete 28 days before application. Surface must be clean, dry, structurally
sound, free of curing or form release compounds, and other contaminants that will prevent the proper penetration
of BARACADE M.E. Prior to application, joints or cracks in movement must be properly sealed with an elastomeric
joint sealant. Non-moving cracks or voids wider than 1/64 inch (0.4 mm) must be filled with a suitable patching
material. Do not apply BARACADE M.E. to a wet surface. Surfaces must dry a minimum of 24 hours following
rain or other moisture. Install caulking before BARACADE M.E. application. Mask or protect adjacent surfaces,
including grass, plants, shrubs, glass, rubber, and asphalt from overspray or drips. For surfaces that have had
prior coatings or treatments, contact your local Euclid Chemical representative.
Mixing: BARACADE M.E. is supplied in a concentrated form and must be mixed with clean, potable water
immediately before application. Prepared solutions must be applied within 12 hours of mixing.
Vertical Surfaces: BARACADE M.E./9 has a 9:1 mix ratio. (9 gal (34 L) water to 1 gal (3.8 L) BARACADE M.E.)
Horizontal Surfaces: BARACADE M.E./4.5, has a 4.5:1 mix ratio. (4.5 gal (17 L) water to 1 gal (3.8 L)
BARACADE M.E.) Special Conditions: For extremely dense, porous, or surfaces to be painted, contact your
local Euclid Chemical representative.
Applications: Apply BARACADE M.E. with low pressure airless spray equipment using no more than 15 to
20 psi (0.103 to 0.138 MPa) air pressure. For proper application to most porous substrates, use spray tips
with an orifice size no smaller than 0.035 inch (0.889 mm). Some vertical dense surfaces may require smaller
orifice sizes to prevent sags and run downs. Each coat consists of a light fogging spray followed immediately
with a flood coat. The fog spray wets the surface to break the surface tension and allows the flood coat
the deep penetration required for waterproofing. The flood coat must be applied before the fog coat dries.
Dense Vertical Surfaces: On precast concrete and other dense surfaces, apply BARACADE M.E. in several
fog coats to the point of saturation with no “run down.” Roll out excess material to prevent surface build-
up and curtaining. Porous Vertical Surfaces: Spray a fog coat and follow immediately with the flood coat of
BARACADE M.E. applied with uniform, overlapping, horizontal strokes. Use sufficient material for saturation and
to cause an 8 to 10 inch (20.3 to 25.4 cm) rundown from the point of contact. Fully saturate mortar joints. One
coat of material is generally sufficient. Very porous surfaces such as normal weight concrete block may require
two coats. Excess material that remains on the surface may result in a glossy appearance and impair subsequent
paint or coating applications. Horizontal Surfaces: Apply two coats of BARACADE M.E. in a uniform coat “wet
on wet basis” to the point of saturation. Do not apply more material than can be absorbed into the surface within
10 seconds. Remove excess material with a squeegee or paint roller.
Clean-Up
Clean drips, runs and overspray residue while still wet, with detergent and water. Dried material may require solvent
for removal. Clean application and spray equipment with detergent and water immediately following use.
• Do not overdilute BARACADE M.E.
• Do not apply BARACADE M.E. to frozen or frost filled surfaces, or when the ambient or surface temperature
falls below 40°F (4°C).
• Do not apply BARACADE M.E. to surfaces warmer than 95°F (35°C).
• Do not apply BARACADE M.E. if rain is forecast within 12 hours.
• Do not apply BARACADE M.E. to non-absorbent materials such as glass, metal, glazed brick, or glazed tile.
• Do not allow BARACADE M.E. to puddle. All product should penetrate the substrate with no surface build-up.
Rev. 6.11
270
Baracade Silane 40

Silane Based Water Repellent
Description
BARACADE SILANE 40 is a breathable, ready-to-use, colorless, non-staining, non-yellowing, deep penetrating
concrete and masonry water repellent compound. It protects concrete, block, stone and brick against the
damaging effects of water intrusion, deicing chemicals, freeze-thaw exposure and airborne contaminants such
as acid rain, smog and industrial fumes. BARACADE SILANE 40 protects without altering the appearance or
texture of the treated surface. BARACADE SILANE 40 produces a non filming water repellent surface while
penetrating deep into the capillaries of the subsurface. Chemical reactions within the capillaries form long
lasting water repellent groups that crosslink into a silicone compound.
• Sidewalks & ramps • Parking and bridge decks
• Exposed aggregate • Industrial floors
• Precast, prestressed & poured • Lightweight & air entrained
in place concrete concrete
Typical Material Properties @ 75° F (24°C)
Flash point min 105°F (41°C)
Actives content min 40%
Weight/gal 6.88 lbs/gal
Resistance to UV excellent
Abrasion resistance excellent
Average depth of penetration (substrate dependent) 3/8" (0.95 cm)
VOC content 580 g/L
Drying time (foot traffic) 2 to 6 hrs
Baracade Silane 40
NCHRP 244 Series II
Minimum Requirement BARACADE SILANE 40
Reduction in water absorption 75% 87.6%
Water vapor transmission 100% 131.7%
Reduction in chloride intrusion 75% 85.3%
NCHRP 244 Series IV
Northern climate 97.6%
Southern climate 97.6%
Freeze thaw durability ASTM C 666 93.5%
Scaling resistance ASTM C 672 0
100 cycles no scaling
Wind driven rain ASTM E 514 brick 100%
Reduction in leakage CMU 95%
Packaging
BARACADE SILANE 40 is packaged in 5 gal (18.9 L) pails and 55 gal (208 L) drums.
Shelf Life
Master Format #:

Coverage
07 19 16
Because of variations in surface density,

Surface Type ft²/gal (m²/L) per coat the coverage rates are approximate and
are intended for estimating purposes only.
Smooth Concrete 150 to 250 (3.68 to 6.14) Use test applications on actual surfaces
Exposed Aggregate 100 to 200 (2.45 to 4.91) to accurately determine coverage rates.
Bridge Decks/Ramps/Driveways 100 to 150 (2.45 to 3.68) Extremely porous surfaces may require two
Resealing Bridge Decks/Ramps 150 to 250 (3.68 to 6.14) coats of BARACADE SILANE 40.

271
BARACADE SILANE 40 meets the performance standards of NCHRP 244
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: Cure new concrete 28 days before application. Surface must be clean, dry and structurally
sound. The substrate must also be free of all curing compounds, form release agents and any other contaminants
which may prevent the proper penetration of BARACADE SILANE 40. Prior to application, joints or cracks in
movement must be properly sealed with an elastomeric joint sealant. Surfaces must be dry for a minimum of 24
hours prior to application. Mask all adjacent surfaces including grass, plants, shrubs and asphalt to protect from
drips or over spray. For surfaces that have had prior coatings or surface treatments, contact your local Euclid
Chemical representative for recommendations.
Application: BARACADE SILANE 40 should be applied using airless spray equipment. A garden sprayer may
be used for smaller projects only when an airless sprayer is not available. Do not use pressure pot or lacquer
type paint sprayers. To produce the proper material flow, reduce air pressure on pumping equipment and
use spray tips with orifice sizes no smaller than 0.035” (0.9 cm). Larger tips may be required with some spray
equipment to get desired material flow. Flood the surface with BARACADE SILANE 40 using a low pressure
sprayer, roller or broom. Distribute material evenly. After the surface absorbs the BARACADE SILANE 40, apply
a second coat before the surface dries. Do not allow the material to puddle.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with mineral spirits or similar solvent immediately following use. Clean drips and over
spray with mineral spirits while still wet. Clean glass and other non absorbent materials soon after application.
• Do not dilute.
• Do not allow to puddle. All product should penetrate the substrate with no surface build-up.
• Do not apply to a frost filled surface or when the temperature is below 40°F (4°C).
• Do not apply to non-absorbent surfaces such as glass, metal, glazed brick or tile.
• Use in a well ventilated area. Avoid breathing vapors or mist.
Rev. 6.11
272
Baracade Silane 40 IPA

Silane Water Repellent
Description
BARACADE SILANE 40 IPA is a breathable, ready-to-use, colorless, non-staining, non-yellowing, deep
penetrating concrete and masonry water repellent.
• Brick walls • Bridge decks • Precast concrete
• Concrete block & CMU • Concrete surfaces • Concrete ramps
• Brick pavers • Parking decks
Features/Benefits
• enetrates deep into capillaries of treated surface
P
• Reduces intrusion of water, deicing chemicals, and airborne contaminants
• Improves freeze-thaw resistance
• Will not alter texture or appearance of treated surface
• Will not leave a residue on most non-porous substrates, such as, glass, metal frames and painted surfaces
Nchrp 244 Series I Tests BARACADE
Material properties @ 75° F (24°C)
Minimum SILANE 40 IPA
Flash point - min................................ 53°F (11°C)
Reduction in water
Active solids by weight..............................>40%
absorption 75% 83.8%
VOC content..............................................592 g/L
Baracade Silane 40 IPA
Water vapor transmission 100% 111.4%
Resistance to UV....................................excellent
Reduction in chloride
Abrasion resistance...............................excellent
intrusion 75% 82.7%
Alberta transportation & utilities results
Nchrp 244 Series IV Tests
Specification B388, Type 1A &1B.............. passes
Northern Climate 97.6%
Waterproofing, % reduction of absorption.... 85.6
Southern Climate 97.6%
Waterproofing after abrasion
Freeze thaw durability ASTM C 666 95.3%
% reduction in absorption............................... 87.7
Scaling resistance ASTM C 672 0
Alkali resistance
Wind driven rain ASTM E 514 Brick 100%
% reduction in absorption...............................86.1
Reduction in leakage CMU 95%
Packaging
BARACADE SILANE 40 IPA is packaged in 6/1 gal (3.8 L) units, 5 gal (18.9 L) pails and 55 gal (208 L) drums.
Shelf Life
Coverage
Master Format #:
Surface Type ft²/gal (m²/L) per coat Because of variations in surface density, the following
Concrete Block 50 to 75 (1.23 to 1.84) coverage rates are approximate and are intended
07 19 16
Concrete Masonry Unit 50 to 75 (1.23 to 1.84) for estimating purposes only. Use test applications
Smooth Concrete 150 to 250 (3.68 to 6.14) on actual surfaces to accurately determine coverage
Exposed Aggregate 100 to 200 (2.45 to 4.91) rates. Extremely porous surfaces may require two
Decks/Ramps 100 to 125 (2.45 to 3.07) coats of BARACADE SILANE 40 IPA.
Brick 100 to 250 (2.45 to 6.14)
Stone 100 to 250 (2.45 to 6.14)

273
BARACADE SILANE 40 IPA meets the requirements of Alberta Transportation and Utilities (AT&U) Specification
B388 Sealer Types 1A and 1B. BARACADE SILANE 40 IPA meets NCHRP 244 performance standards.
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: Cure new concrete 28 days before application. Surface must be clean, dry, open capillary,
structurally sound, free of curing or form release compounds and other contaminants that will prevent the proper
penetration of product. Prior to application, joints and moving cracks must be properly sealed with an elastomeric
joint sealant. Non-moving cracks and voids wider than 1/64 inch (0.4 mm) must be filled with a suitable patching
material. Do not apply product to a wet surface. Surfaces must dry a minimum of 24 hours following rain or
exposure to other sources of moisture. Install caulking before product application. For surfaces that have had
prior coatings or treatments, contact your local Euclid Chemical representative for recommendations.
Application: Flood the surface with BARACADE SILANE 40 IPA using a low pressure sprayer, roller or broom.
Distribute material evenly. Do not allow the material to puddle. If a second coat is required, apply after the
surface absorbs the initial coat of BARACADE SILANE 40 IPA. Use low pressure spray equipment for application.
Do not vaporize the material. Use solvent resistant equipment and gaskets. When applying to horizontal areas
brush out puddles or excess material. For vertical surfaces apply from top down to produce a 6” to 8” (15 to 20
cm) rundown.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with alcohol, mineral spirits or similar solvent immediately following use. Clean drips and
over spray while still wet. Clean overspray from glass and other non-absorbent materials soon after application.
• Store material between 40°F to 85°F (4°C to 29°C). Protect from moisture, direct sunlight, and freezing.
• BARACADE SILANE 40 IPA contains alcohol solvent and is FLAMMABLE with a flash point of 53°F (12°C).
Avoid fire, open flame and sparks.
• Do not dilute.
• Do not apply to a frost filled surface.
• Caution should be taken with specialty coated glass, plastic windows or dirty windows.
• Check compatibility before application of BARACADE SILANE 40 IPA. Certain types of concrete block, particularly
those containing integral water repellents, may exhibit a darkening effect when BARACADE SILANE 40 IPA is
applied. A test area is always recommended prior to application to confirm performance and appearance.
Rev. 6.11
274
Baracade Silane 100

High Performance Water Repellent
Description
BARACADE SILANE 100 is a breathable, ready-to-use, colorless, non-yellowing, deep penetrating concrete and
masonry water repellent. BARACADE SILANE 100 is a 100% silane formulation that produces a hydrophobic
treatment to reduce water absorption. BARACADE SILANE 100 protects concrete, block, stone and brick against
the damaging effects of water intrusion, deicing chemicals, freeze-thaw exposure and airborne contaminants
such as acid rain, smog and industrial fumes. Due to the 100% silane composition, BARACADE SILANE 100
exhibits low volatility and higher coverage rates than solvent based silane materials.
• Sidewalks • Parking decks
• Ramps • Bridge decks
Features/Benefits
• Reduces water absorption • Protects against air-borne contaminants, such as acid rain
• Protects concrete against the damaging effects of water intrusion and deicing chemicals
Material Properties @ 75° F (24°C) NCHRP 244, Series II Reduction of water .
Flash point min................................ 145°F (63°C) absorption, %
Silane %........................................................... 100 Days in water
Weight/gal............................................ 7.6 lbs/gal 1 day................................................................... 94
VOC content..............................................248 g/L 3 days................................................................. 89
Resistance to UV....................................excellent Chloride penetration
Baracade Silane 100
Abrasion resistance...............................excellent % Reduction....................................................... 91
Average depth of penetration....... 0.2 in (5 mm)
Packaging
BARACADE SILANE 100 is packaged in 5 gal (18.9 L) pails and 55 gal (208 L) drums.
Shelf Life
Coverage
Because of variations in surface density, the following
Surface Type ft²/gal (m²/L) per coat coverage rates are approximate and are intended for
Smooth Concrete 200 to 350 (4.91 to 8.59) estimating purposes only. Use test applications on
Exposed Aggregate 225 to 375 (5.52 to 9.20) actual surfaces to accurately determine coverage rates.
Decks/Ramps 200 to 300 (4.91 to 7.36) Extremely porous surfaces may require two coats of
BARACADE SILANE 100.
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: Cure new concrete 28 days before application. Surface must be clean, dry, open
capillary, structurally sound, free of curing or form release compounds and other contaminants that will prevent
Master Format #:
the proper penetration of product. Prior to application, joints and moving cracks must be properly sealed with
an elastomeric joint sealant. Non-moving cracks and voids wider than 1/64 inch (0.4 mm) must be filled with a
07 19 16
suitable patching material. Do not apply product to a wet surface. Surfaces must dry a minimum of 24 hours
following rain or exposure to other sources of moisture. Install caulking before product application. Mask or
protect adjacent surfaces, including grass, plants, shrubs, glass, autos, and asphalt from overspray or drips.
For surfaces that have had prior coatings or treatments, contact your local Euclid Chemical representative for
recommendations.

275
Application: Use low pressure airless spray equipment with solvent resistant hose and gaskets. Garden type
sprayers may be appropriate for smaller projects. Brushes and rollers on large projects may not achieve a
uniform coverage rate. Apply BARACADE SILANE 100 in a single application to the horizontal surface with
enough material to saturate the surface. Remove excess material with a broom or squeegee. If a second coat
is required it should be applied “wet on wet” before first coat dries.
Typical traffic-ready time for BARACADE SILANE 100 is 4 hours after application at 75°F (24˚C) and 50% relative
humidity. Cooler temperatures and/or high humidity will extend the dry time.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with alcohol, mineral spirits or similar solvent immediately following use. Clean drips and
over spray while still wet. Clean glass and other non absorbent materials soon after application.
• Store at temperatures below 90°F (32˚C).
• BARACADE SILANE 100 is a DOT combustible liquid. Avoid fire, open flame and sparks.
• Do not dilute.
• Do not apply to a frost filled surface or when the temperature is below 32°F (0˚C).
• Not intended for use on below grade applications or applications where hydrostatic pressures exist. May
not be effective on certain types of limestone or marble. Test application is always recommended to confirm
performance and appearance. Use in a well ventilated area.
Rev. 6.11
276
Baracade WB 244

Water Based, Penetrating Water Repellent for Horizontal Surfaces
Description
BARACADE WB 244 is a water based, oligomeric siloxane/silane, ready-to-use, deep penetrating water
repellent. Water repellency is achieved via an impregnation of the substrate. BARACADE WB 244 is a colorless,
odorless, non-staining, non-yellowing and non-film forming penetrant used to protect concrete surfaces without
altering the appearance or texture of the treated surface.
• Sidewalks • Parking decks • Industrial floors
• Ramps • Bridge decks
Features/Benefits
• Odorless, colorless and non-staining • Non-yellowing
Can contribute to LEED points • Non film-forming; no gloss or shine
NCHRP Report No. 244
Material Properties @ 75° F (24° C) Reduction in chloride ion content
Flash point.................................. > 200°F (93° C) 1 day................................................................80%
Weight/gal.................................................. 8.4 lbs 5 days..............................................................82%
VOC content ASTM 3960-81..........................50 g/L 21 days............................................................84%
Viscosity.......................................................50 cp Average...........................................................82%
Average depth of penetration Min. specification requirement........................75%
(substrate dependent).................... 3/8" (0.95 cm) Reduction in weight gain
Absorption reduction 1 day................................................................79%
Baracade WB 244
Federal Specification SS-W-110C...................88% 5 days..............................................................81%
21 days............................................................85%
Packaging
BARACADE WB 244 is packaged in 5 gal (18.9 L) pails and 55 gal (208 L) drums.
Shelf Life
Coverage
Approximate Coverage ft²/gal (m²/L)
Surface 1st Coat 2nd Coat
Dense 100 to 150 (2.45 to 3.68) —
Porous 100 to 150 (2.45 to 3.68) 100 to 150 (2.45 to 3.68)
Because of variations in surface density, the following coverage rates are approximate and are intended for
estimating purposes only. Use test applications on actual surfaces to accurately determine coverage rates.
Extremely porous surfaces may require two coats of BARACADE WB 244. When two coats are required, apply
the second coat on the still wet BARACADE WB 244 by following a “wet on wet” technique.
Master Format #:
07 19 00
BARACADE WB 244 meets the performance standards of NCHRP 244 and SS W110C specifications
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: Cure new concrete 21 days before application. Surface must be clean, dry and structurally
sound. The substrate must also be free of all curing compounds, form release agents and any other contaminants
which may prevent the proper penetration of BARACADE WB 244. Prior to application, moving joints or cracks
must be properly sealed with an elastomeric joint sealant.

277
Non-moving cracks or voids wider than 1/64 inch (0.4 mm) must be filled with a suitable material. Surfaces must
be dry for a minimum of 24 hours prior to application. Mask all adjacent surfaces including grass, plants, shrubs
and asphalt to protect from drips or over spray. For surfaces that have had prior coatings or surface treatments,
contact your local EUCLID representative for a recommendation.
Mixing: BARACADE WB 244 does not normally require mixing.
Application: For best results, BARACADE WB 244 should be applied using airless spray equipment. A garden
sprayer may be used for smaller projects only when an airless sprayer is not available. To produce the proper
material flow, reduce air pressure on pumping equipment and use spray tips with orifice sizes no smaller than
0.035 inches (0.9 mm). Larger tips may be required with some spray equipment to get desired material flow.
Flood the surface with BARACADE WB 244 using a low pressure sprayer. A roller or broom may also be used.
Distribute material evenly. Do not allow the material to puddle.
Clean-Up
Clean drips, runs, and overspray residue while still wet, using detergent and water. Dried material may require
mechanical abrasion for removal. Clean application and spray equipment with detergent and water immediately
following use.
• Store material between 40°F to 90°F (4°C to 32°C).
• PROTECT FROM FREEZING.
• Temperature of air and surface must be at least 40°F (4°C) and rising.
• Do not dilute.
• BARACADE WB 244 can be applied to pH neutral surfaces; however, longer cure times may be required to
develop full repellency.
• BARACADE WB 244 is non flammable and non hazardous.
• BARACADE WB 244 may exhibit minor settling upon storage. Agitation prior to use may be necessary.
Rev. 6.11
278
CHEMSTOP WB Regular/Heavy Duty

Water Based, Silane/Siloxane Penetrating Water Repellent
Description
CHEMSTOP WB is a water based, ready to use, siloxane/silane water repellent. CHEMSTOP WB REGULAR is
formulated for use on dense surfaces, such as pre-cast or poured-in-place concrete. CHEMSTOP WB HEAVY
DUTY is used on porous surfaces such as light weight concrete, concrete block and mortar joints.
Horizontal and vertical surfaces such as:
• Concrete
• Concrete block
• Lightweight concrete
• Brick
• Mortar joints
Features/Benefits
• Makes concrete/masonry repellant to water and • Reduce efflorescence and spalling
salts • Will not alter texture or appearance of treated
• Colorless & odorless surface
• Non-staining, non-yellowing, breathable Can contribute to LEED points
CHEMSTOP WB Regular/Heavy Duty

Material Properties @ 75°F (24°C), 50% RH
REGULAR HEAVY DUTY

Viscosity 50 cp 50 cp
Depth of penetration
(substrate dependent) 3/8" (9.5 mm) 3/8" (9.5 mm)
Reduction in water leakage ASTM E 514-90
Brick — 100%
Mortar Block — >91%
Reduction in water
absorption, SS-W-110C 90.5% 92.3%
Flash point >200 °F (93°C) >200 °F (93°C)
Accelerated weathering
1500 hours no change no change
Abrasion resistance excellent excellent
Dirt pick-up none none
VOC content 50 g/L 50 g/L
Packaging
CHEMSTOP WB is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums, 5 gal (18.9 L) pails and 6/1 gal (3.8 L) units.
Master Format #:
Shelf Life
07 19 00
Meets performance standards of SS-W-110C

279
Coverage
Surface 1st Coat 2nd Coat

Regular dense 80 to 150 ft²/gal (2.0 to 3.7 m²/L) NA
Heavy Duty porous 40 to 60 ft²/gal (1.0 to 1.5 m²/L) 60 to 100 ft²/gal (1.5 to 2.4 m²/L)
Coverage rates are approximate and for estimating purposes only. Make test applications on actual surfaces to
determine more accurately the coverage rates and effectiveness of water repellent.
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: Cure new concrete 28 days before application. Surface should be structurally sound,
clean, dry, free of dust, dirt, paint, efflorescence, laitance and other contaminants that will prevent the proper
penetration of CHEMSTOP WB. A dry substrate is required for proper penetration of the sealer. Prior to
application, joints or cracks must be properly sealed or filled. If acid is used for cleaning, neutralize completely
before application of CHEMSTOP WB.
Application: Low pressure airless spray equipment is the preferred method of application, although for smaller
areas, application with brush or rollers may also be acceptable. Application should be from the bottom up to
ensure uniform product distribution. Apply a saturation coat with a 6 to 8 in (15 cm to 20 cm) controlled rundown.
For dense surfaces, one saturation coat of CHEMSTOP WB Regular is normally required. For porous surfaces
two or more saturation coats of CHEMSTOP WB Heavy Duty may be required, applied using a “wet on wet”
technique.
Clean-Up
Clean drips, runs, and overspray residue while still wet, using detergent and water. CHEMSTOP WB will not
etch common glass; spills and overspray onto glass can be easily removed with a damp cloth. Dried material
may require mechanical abrasion for removal. Clean application and spray equipment with detergent and water
immediately following use.
• Do not dilute.
• Temperature of air and surface must be at least 45°F (7° C) and rising.
• Application at temperatures above 90°F (32°C) is not recommended.
• Water repellency properties will develop 24 hours to 5 days after application.
• CHEMSTOP WB is not intended to seal cracks or withstand hydrostatic pressure.
• Uneven application may result in a blotchy appearance of the surface.
• Do not apply a “fog” coat.
• Store between 40°F to 90°F (4° to 32°C)
• PROTECT FROM FREEZING.
• CHEMSTOP WB may exhibit minor settling upon storage.
• Agitation prior to use may be necessary.
Rev. 6.11
280
EUCO #512 VOX EPOXY SEALER

Penetrating Epoxy Sealer
Description
EUCO #512 VOX EPOXY SEALER is a two-component water-based epoxy designed to penetrate and seal
concrete surfaces. It fills surface pores resulting in improved wear resistance and lower absorption of water and
salts. This system is supplied as a 20% solids formulation.
• Parking decks • Improve durability of dusting concrete surfaces
• Bridge decks • Seals and protects concrete flooring in livestock
• Industrial floors pens and facilities
Features/Benefits
• Improves wear and chemical resistance • Can be used as a primer under epoxy or urethane
• Reduces water and salt absorption coatings
• Water-based, low odor • Resistant to gasoline and other solvent spills
• Resistant to mild acids Can contribute to LEED points
EUCO #512 VOX EPOXY SEALER

Technical Engineering Data
Suitable for foot traffic.....................12 to 24 hours
Suitable for wheel traffic...........................48 hours
Total Solids: ................................................... 20%
Pot Life:......................................................4 hours
VOC Content................................................68 g/L
Appearance
EUCO #512 VOX EPOXY SEALER is a two-component epoxy system consisting of Part A and Part B. When first
applied, it has a milky-white appearance. After curing, the product has a clear, smooth, semi-gloss appearance.
Broadcast a light application of silica sand for a slip resistant finish.
Packaging
EUCO #512 VOX EPOXY SEALER is an epoxy system that utilizes a 2 to 1 ratio by volume - 2 gal (7.6 L) of Part A is
mixed with 1 gal (3.8 L) of Part B. The units are pre-proportioned and packaged in 3 gal (11.4 L) kits.
Master Format #:
Shelf Life
03 64 23
USDA compliant

281
Coverage
ft2/gal (m2/L)
Concrete Surface First Coat Second Coat
Troweled Smooth 250 to 300 (6.1 to 7.4) 400 to 600 (9.8 to 14.7)
Broomed Textured 200 to 300 (4.9 to 7.4) 300 to 400 (7.4 to 9.8)
Material Requirements: A two coat application using a coverage rate of 200 ft2/gal (4.9 m2/L) will require
approximately 5 gal (18.9 L) of material per 1000 ft2 (92.9 m2) of area. Two coats are recommended for best
results. The concrete surface texture greatly affects coverage rates and final appearance. Additionally, introducing
silica sand for slip resistance will reduce coverage rates. Do not apply at less than 150 ft2/gal (3.7 m2/L). Apply
a second coat if a thicker film is desired. Allow the first coat to dry tack free (but wait no more than 24 hours)
before the second coat is applied.
Directions for Use

paint and unsound concrete must be removed. Pressure washing and/or power scrubbing is recommended.
The concrete surface can be damp or dry at the time of application of EUCO #512 VOX EPOXY SEALER.
However, best results are obtained when the concrete is damp with all puddles removed.
Mixing: All materials should be in the proper temperature range of 60°F to 90°F (16°C to 32°C). Pre-mix Part A
and add the entire container of Part B to all the Part A. Mix for 2 to 3 minutes using a mechanical (drill) mixer. The
epoxy must be well mixed to ensure proper chemical reaction. After mixing, place immediately.
Placement: To apply the sealer to concrete, use a pump-up or airless sprayer for best results. A short nap roller
or lambs wool applicator may also be used.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with warm, soapy water before the material dries.
• Follow application rates. Heavy applications will result in poor performance and a blotchy appearance.
• Do not apply over curing membranes and sealers.
• Do not use on a surface previously treated with a liquid densifier, paint, or coating.
• Product may discolor or chalk with outdoor use.
Rev. 6.11
282
EUCO-GUARD 100

Siloxane Water and Chloride Repellent for Concrete & Masonry
Description
EUCO-GUARD 100 is a deep penetrating siloxane sealer designed to protect concrete structures, decks,
pavements and surfaces against the adverse effects of de-icing salts, moisture, weathering and freeze damage.
EUCO-GUARD 100 reacts chemically with the concrete to provide a highly effective chloride screen and water
barrier. In addition to its ease of application, EUCO-GUARD 100 has the added versatility to be used on both new
and old concrete surfaces. If a higher solids material is required, use EUCO-GUARD 200 (20% solids).
• Parking structures • Marine platforms
• Lane barriers & ramps • Auto/truck repair bays
• Bridges • Exterior concrete surfaces
Features/Benefits
• Provides an efficient, continuous chloride barrier
• Blocks pores and capillaries for outstanding water repellency
• May be applied to new, cured concrete or old concrete
• Extremely high alkali resistance
• Dries to tack-free and skid-resistant surface
• Suitable for use over dry or damp (not saturated) concrete
• Full protection in one treatment, but may be reapplied later at any time
• Provides a low cost protection system over the life of a structure
• Protects reinforcing steel against the corrosive effects of surface absorbed chlorides and moisture
• Renders new concrete virtually free of surface scaling
EUCO-GUARD 100
• Retards deterioration of existing, distressed structures
Test Specimens NCHRP 244 Series IV @ 21days
Typical Engineering Data: The following results 4000 psi (27.6 MPa), 3”(76 mm) x 6”(152 mm) cylinders
were developed under laboratory conditions. 5.25% air entrainment, 15% NaCl solution
Drying Time Type % Weight Chloride Repellency
Foot traffic ..............................................4 to 6 hrs gain screened factor
Wheel traffic.........................................10 to 12 hrs Untreated 2.802% ––– –––
Euco-Guard 100 0.212% 96% 92%
Type.............................................................. siloxane
Flash point............................................ 105oF (41oC) Test Specimens ASTM C 642 ASTM C 672
EUCO-GUARD 100:................................. 10% solids
Water absorption Scaling
24 hour results resistance
EUCO-GUARD 200:................................. 20% solids
Solvent................................................ mineral spirits % weight water 50 125
gain repellency cycles cycles
Appearance: EUCO-GUARD 100 is a clear, solvent factor
based material. After placement and drying, the product Untreated 4.85% ---- 4 5
moderate severe
has virtually no effect on the appearance of dry concrete. to severe scaling
EUCO-GUARD 100 treated concrete will cause water to
Master Format #:
Euco-Guard 100 0.364% 92% 0 to no 0 to no

“bead” at the surface. scaling scaling
07 19 23
Packaging
EUCO-GUARD 100 is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life

283
EUCO-GUARD 100 will function as a 96% chloride screen when tested by NCHRP 244 criteria for Northern and
Southern exposure.
Coverage
Concrete Surface Application Rate
Troweled Smooth 125 to 150 ft2/gal (3.1 to 3.7 m2/L)
Broomed Textured 75 to 125 ft2/gal (1.8 to 3.1 m2/L)
Material Requirements: A one coat application using a coverage rate of 125 ft2/gal (3.1 m2/L) will require
approximately 8 gal (30.3 L) of material per 1000 ft2 (92.9 m2) of area. For exterior concrete with a textured finish,
a coverage rate of 75 to 125 ft2/gal (1.8 to 3.1 m2/L) is required to achieve NCHRP #244 results. Higher coverage
rates may be used depending on surface porosity and desired level of protection.
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation (New Concrete): Surface should be well cured using water, wet burlap, polyethylene,
curing paper, or a dissipating curing compound such as KUREZ DR VOX. Surfaces must be free of all dirt and
debris. All joint sealants and caulks should be in place before applying EUCO-GUARD 100. Surface Preparation
(Old Concrete): Remove all foreign substances that could prevent absorption-dirt, dust, tar, oil, etc. Pressure wash
with water and cleaners where appropriate. Membranes of any kind must be removed.
Mixing: EUCO-GUARD 100 is a one component material which requires no pre-blending prior to use. The
product should be used directly from the container.
Placement: Horizontal Surfaces - Flood surface using low pressure sprayer, roller, brush or broom. Broom
or squeegee material around for even distribution. Let the surface absorb the EUCO-GUARD 100 solution and
follow immediately with a second application before the surface dries. Redistribute any puddles or free-standing
EUCO-GUARD 100. Vertical Surfaces - Apply by sprayer, roller or brush in two applications from the bottom
up. Be sure to apply “wet-on-wet” as described for horizontal surfaces. To apply the sealer to concrete, use a
pump-up or airless sprayer for best results. A short nap roller or lambswool applicator may also be used.
Clean-Up
Use mineral spirits or acetone to clean tools and equipment.
• Do not dilute EUCO-GUARD 100 with solvents or thinners.
• Protect metal, glass and other surfaces from overspray.
• Do not use at temperatures below 40oF (4oC).
• Do not use over saturated surfaces or curing membranes.
• All joint sealants and caulks should be in place before applying EUCO-GUARD 100.
• EUCO-GUARD 100 is a solvent-based product with a distinct odor. When used in enclosed areas or on
extremely porous substrates, the solvent odor may dissipate slowly. If HVAC intake ducts will distribute
solvent odor into adjoining occupied areas of the building, care should be taken to block these ventilation
vents. If solvent odor is unacceptable, use a water-based product such as BARACADE WB 244.
• This product does not prevent oil stains or discoloration from fallen tree leaves.
Rev. 6.11
284
LINSEED OIL TREATMENT

Concrete Sealer
Description
LINSEED OIL TREATMENT is a blend of boiled linseed oil and solvents. When applied in a thin coating to
concrete surfaces, it protects them from winter damage due to freeze-thaw cycling and the effects of de-icing
salts. Two applications of the oil compound will protect concrete and increase its resistance to winter damage.
• Roads and bridge decks • Concrete exposed to freeze-thaw cycles
• Parking ramps and curbs • Exterior concrete surfaces
• Sidewalks and driveways
Features/Benefits
• Deep penetration • Ease of application
• Salt protection • Rapid drying
Suitable for exposure to traffic........4 to 6 hours
Viscosity.................... 25 to 35 sec, #1 Zahn Cup
Percent Solids by Volume.....................min 50%
Flash Point.............................. 116°F (47°C) TCC
VOC Content.............................................389 g/L
LINSEED OIL TREATMENT

Drying Time: 2 hours, depending on humidity and other climatic conditions.
Appearance
LINSEED OIL TREATMENT is a light brown material that will slightly darken concrete.
Packaging
LINSEED OIL TREATMENT is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums, and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
• Linseed Oil portion meets ASTM D 260
• Mineral Spirits portion meets ASTM D 235
Coverage
Master Format #:
Troweled Smooth 300 ft2/gal (7.4 m2/L)

Broomed Textured 400 ft2/gal (9.8 m2/L)
07 19 00
Material Requirements
A two coat application using a coverage rate of 300 ft2/gal (7.4 m2/L) for each coat will require approximately 6.7
gal (25.4 L) of material per 1000 ft2 (92.9 m2) of area.

285
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: Concrete surfaces must be clean, dry and free of oil, dirt, loose scale and any other
contaminants. Surfaces shall be swept clean by hand or by mechanical means. Remove oil and grease as
completely as possible. New concrete should be at least twenty-eight days prior to application. New concrete
cured with curing compounds or cure & seals should not be treated until such agents have completely weathered
away or been removed by other means.
Mixing: LINSEED OIL TREATMENT is a one component product that requires no pre-blending prior to placement.
LINSEED OIL TREATMENT should be used directly from the container.
Placement: LINSEED OIL TREATMENT should be applied sparingly in two coats, at the average rate of 300
ft2/gal (7.4 m2/L) per coat. Application may be done by medium nap paint roller or industrial pump-up sprayer,
using a wide fan nozzle. The second coat may be applied as soon as the first coat is dry to touch. In warm, dry
weather this requires only one to four hours, but in cool weather, drying times up to 24 hours may be required.
The preferred time for application is late afternoon so that when the concrete cools, the compound penetrates
deep into the pores. Further treatment is recommended in form of a single application annually on surfaces
subject to de-icing chemicals and wear.
Clean-Up
Clean equipment with mineral spirits.
• All rags soaked with the compound must be stored in air-tight covered steel drums.
Rev. 6.11
286
WEATHER-GUARD

Siloxane Penetrating Water Repellent
Description
WEATHER-GUARD is a siloxane penetrating sealer designed specifically for the treatment of masonry materials
and concrete surfaces. WEATHER-GUARD protects concrete and masonry surfaces from the effects of exterior
exposure and weathering. WEATHER-GUARD penetrates deep into the surface pores and reacts chemically to
provide a durable, long lasting barrier against water and salt intrusion. This guard of defense can substantially reduce
the damaging effects of freeze/thaw cycling, precipitation, acid rain, efflorescence, and dust/dirt degradation.
• Concrete and masonry block • Exposed aggregate
• Natural stone • Stucco
• Brick facings • Chimney columns
• Precast concrete • Architectural concrete
• Clay brick
Features/Benefits
• Deep penetrating pore action for long lasting • Allows concrete and masonry surfaces to
protection maintain breathability while providing high water
• Preserves a natural appearance without repellency characteristics
membrane build-up • Easy to use requiring only low pressure spraying
• Provides a highly efficient barrier to water and equipment or brushes and rollers
salt ingress • Economical to use because of its durability over
many years
WEATHER-GUARD
Flash point...................................................................104°F (40°C)
Solids .......................................................................................... 5%
ASTM C 67 Water Absorption
(multi-celled brick raked face, 24 hr immersion)................. 0.259%
Drying time at 70oF(21oC)........................................... 4 to 6 hours
Traffic.............................................................................6 to 8 hours
Appearance: WEATHER-GUARD is a clear liquid that does not change the color or appearance of the substrate
After application of WEATHER-GUARD, the color of the substrate may initially appear darker but will lighten upon
drying. Treated masonry or concrete will bead water.
Packaging
WEATHER-GUARD is available in 55 gal (208 L) drums, 5 gal (18.9 L) pails, and cases of 4/1 gal (3.8 L) units.
Master Format #:
Shelf Life
2 years in original unopened package.
07 19 23
Coverage
Required coverage rates will vary depending on surface density and porosity. In some cases, test sections may
be necessary to develop a feel for adequate coverage. In general, coverage rates of 100 to 150 ft2/gal (2.4 to 3.7
m2/L) are recommended.

287
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: All surfaces to be treated should be clean and free from all dirt, dust, and other forms of
contamination that could prevent WEATHER-GUARD penetration. Any membranes present on the surface must
be completely removed. Protect adjacent glass and metal surfaces from overspray or accidental contamination.
All joint materials should be installed before WEATHER-GUARD application. Surfaces should be in a dry or
damp condition without being saturated.
Mixing: WEATHER-GUARD is ready to use and requires no pre-mixing.
Placement: The preferred method of application is with a low pressure sprayer. Brushes or rollers may also be
used if enough material can be applied to assure uniform coverage. Use WEATHER-GUARD directly from the
container. No dilution is necessary or permissible. Apply in a uniform manner working back and forth lapping
the previous pass. On vertical surfaces, apply from the bottom up. Avoid extra heavy build-up in isolated areas.
One application in two passes is recommended to assure complete, uniform coverage. After the first pass has
been completed, apply the second pass so that a wet-on-wet process is assured.
Clean-Up
Tools and equipment may be cleaned with acetone or mineral spirits.
• Do not use over previously applied membrane-forming curing compounds or sealers.
• Masonry temperature at the time of application should be above 40°F (4°C). Drying time in cool weather will
be extended.
• New concrete and masonry surfaces should be a minimum of 14 days old and have undergone some drying
before WEATHER-GUARD application.
• Confined or inside areas must be properly ventilated.
• Protect adjacent areas from overspray.
• COMBUSTIBLE - Keep material away from open flame.
• WEATHER-GUARD is a solvent-based product with a distinct odor. When used in enclosed areas, or on
extremely porous substrates, the solvent odor may dissipate slowly. Where solvent odors are not acceptable,
use a water-based product such as EUCO-GUARD VOX or CHEMSTOP WB.
• All joint sealant materials should be installed before WEATHER-GUARD application.
• This product does not prevent oil stains or discoloration from fallen tree leaves.
Rev. 6.11
288
DURALPREP 3020

Penetrating, Migratory Corrosion Inhibitor for Concrete
Description
DURALPREP 3020 is an innovative product for fighting corrosion in existing concrete structures. DURALPREP
3020 is a water-based, topically applied, migrating corrosion inhibitor system formulated to migrate through
concrete and bond to the surface of the reinforcing steel. The DURALPREP 3020 migrates to the reinforcing steel
via liquid and vapor diffusion. Upon contact with the reinforcing steel, DURALPREP 3020 forms a monomolecular
protective layer that dramatically reduces corrosion. The DURALPREP 3020 is designed to reduce and inhibit
corrosion in all types of concrete structures, significantly extending their service life.
• All reinforced, precast, pre-stressed, post-tensioned or marine concrete structures
• Steel-reinforced concrete bridges, highways and streets exposed to corrosive environments (carbonation,
deicing salts and atmospheric attack)
• Parking decks, ramps and garages
• Preventive maintenance of all reinforced concrete commercial and civil engineered structures
• Concrete piers, piles, pillars, and utility poles
• For applications where corrosion problems exist
Features/Benefits
DURALPREP 3020 contains a water-based, organic, calcium nitrate free, migratory corrosion inhibitor.
Can contribute to LEED points.
Material Properties
DURALPREP 3020
75°F @ 50% RH
Viscosity..................................................... 15 cps.
(Brookfield Viscometer, Spindle # 1; Speed 100)
Color................................................... Light amber
Density................................8.8 lbs/gal (1.05 kg/L)
pH............................................................9.0 to 9.5
Flash point............................... none(water based)
Reduction in corrosion
currents after treatment, % (SHRP-S-666)...... >75
VOC content......................................................... 0
Packaging
DURALPREP 3020 is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums, 5 gal (18.9 L) pails, and 1 gal (3.8L) jugs.
Shelf Life
Master Format #:
Coverage
Porous Concrete 150 sq ft /gal (3.7 m²/L)
03 21 00
Dense Concrete 200 to 400 sq ft/gal/coat (4.9 to 9.8 m²/L)

DURALPREP 3020 coverage rates are approximate and for estimating purposes only. Make test applications on
the actual surfaces to determine exact coverage rates.

289
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: Surface should be dry, sound, clean and free of all dirt, dust oil, grease, efflorescence,
sealers, coatings, membranes, asphalt and other contaminants. Cleaning may be done by steam cleaning,
water blasting, shot blasting or abrasive blasting.
Mixing: DURALPREP 3020 comes ready to use and requires no mixing.
Application: The DURALPREP 3020 should be applied liberally and allowed to soak into the substrate. Apply
DURALPREP 3020 by spray (conventional airless or hand pressure spray equipment), roller, squeegee or paint
brush to the concrete surface. Dense substrates and vertical and overhead applications will require two coats
with a minimum of 7½ hours between coats. When applying a follow-up sealer, coating, repair mortar, or
concrete or polymer overlay, the surface should be pressure washed or blastcleaned a minimum of 8 hours after
application to remove any residue left from the DURALPREP 3020. The residue byproduct must be removed
before applying subsequent products because the residue can interfere with adhesion.
Curing: No cure time is required. Allow product to penetrate the surface. Traffic may resume minutes after
application if necessary.
Clean-Up
Clean drips, runs, and overspray residue while still wet using detergent and water. Dried material may require
mechanical abrasion for removal. Clean application and spray equipment with detergent and water immediately
following use.
• Do not dilute product.
• The substrate and ambient temperature should be above freezing.
• Do not apply if temperature is expected to fall below freezing within 12 hours of application.
• DURALPREP 3020 will not penetrate film-forming sealers, coatings, paints, membranes or asphalt.
• Store between 40°F to 90°F (4°C to 32°C). Protect from freezing.
Rev. 6.11
290
Repair - Horizontal
Repair - Horizontal
Cementitious Mortars
Concrete-Top Supreme 293
Duraltop Flowable Mortar 295
Euco Iron Top 297
Euco Re-Cover 299
Euco-Speed 301
Euco-Speed MP 303
Eucocrete 305
Eucocrete Supreme 307
Express Repair 309
Form and Pour CP 311
Speed Crete 2028 313
Speed Crete Green Line 315
Tamms Form and Pour 317
Tamms Thin Patch 319
Tammspatch II 321
Thin-Top Supreme 323
Ultra-Tex 325
VersaSpeed 327
VersaSpeed LS 329
Epoxy Mortars
Duralflex Fastpatch 331
Euco #456S Mortar 333
Self Leveling Underlayments

Flo-Top 335
Level Magic Lightweight 337
Super Flo-Top 339
Tamms SLU 341
Urethane Crack Mender

Euco QWIKstitch 343

Repair - Horizontal
Concrete Repair Mortars – Horizontal Surfaces
This symbol indicates product can contribute points toward the LEED certification of a building. For additional product information refer to the product tech-
nical data sheet. *Technical results developed under laboratory conditions at approximately mid 70 degree Fahrenheit range.
Concrete-Top Supreme
Single-component, Cementitious Topping & Repair Mortar
Horizontal Repair
Description
Concrete-Top Supreme is a latex and microsilica modified cementitious mortar designed for use as a
concrete repair mortar at thicknesses of 3/8” to 2” (10mm to 50mm). This product is a single-component
formula which incorporates a powder latex technology. It provides protection from corrosion and excellent
durability under freeze-thaw cycling as well as reducing ingress by water and de-icing salts.
• Parking decks • Warehouse floors • Shoulder repairs • Walkways
• Pavements • Light industrial floors • Ramps
Features/Benefits
• Provides a strong, wear resistant overlay • Suitable for both interior and exterior use
• Contains an integral corrosion inhibitor • Formulated for easy placement
• Excellent bond to properly prepared sound concrete Can contribute to LEED points
• Compatible with galvanic anodes
Typical Engineering Data Obtained Under Laboratory
Conditions 23oC (73oF ) 50% RH
Compressive Strength ASTM C 109, 2” (50 mm) cubes Chloride Permeability ASTM C 1202
Age Strength 28 days.........................................1,000 coulombs
Concrete-Top Supreme
1 day.....................................27.6 MPa (4,000 psi )
7 days...................................48.3 MPa (7,000 psi ) Freeze/Thaw Resistance ASTM C 666 Procedure A
28 days.................................67.6 MPa (9,800 psi ) 300 Cycles.......... 100% relative dynamic modulus
56 days...............................69.0 MPa (10,000 psi )
Flexural Strength ASTM C 348 Working Time............................... approx. 30 min
7 days.....................................8.3 MPa (1,200 psi )
28 days...................................8.6 MPa (1,250 psi ) Initial Set.......................................approx. 1 hour
Final Set...................................... approx. 3 hours
Linear Shrinkage ASTM C 157 50% RH @ 23oC (73oF )
Unit Weight............approx. 140 lb/ft³ (2243 kg/m³)
14 days........................................................-0.06%
56 days........................................................-0.08%
Volumetric Resistivity..................10,000 ohms/cm
CONCRETE-TOP SUPREME is a free-flowing powder as packaged. After mixing and placing, the color may
initially appear darker than the surrounding concrete. The color will lighten up substantially as it cures.
Packaging/yield
CONCRETE-TOP SUPREME is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) moisture resistant bags. Yield: is 0.40 ft3/bag (0.011
Master Format #:
m³) when mixed with 2.5 qt (2.4 L) of water. Typical water requirement is 2.0 to 3.0 qt (1.9 to 2.8 L)/bag. A unit of
03 01 30.61
material may be extended with 15 lb (6.8 kg) of 3/8” (9.5 mm) pea gravel. This will yield 0.47 ft³ (0.013 m³) and
may be used for overlay placements that exceed 2” (50 mm) in depth.
Shelf Life

293
Canadian Food Inspection Agency, MTQ, MTO
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: Concrete surfaces must be structurally sound, free of loose or deteriorated concrete and
free of dust, dirt, paint, efflorescence, oil and all other contaminants. Mechanically abrade the surface to achieve
a surface profile equal to CSP 5-7 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2. Properly clean profiled area.
Priming: Clean and prime exposed steel with DURALPREP AC. Concrete should be primed with a spray or
brush coat of DURALPREP AC. You must allow the DURALPREP AC to thoroughly dry prior to applying the
repair material. Alternately, a Saturated Surface Dry (SSD) concrete surface can be primed with a scrub coat of
CONCRETE TOP SUPREME. The repair or topping must be made before the scrub coat dries out.
Mixing: A single bag of CONCRETE-TOP SUPREME may be mixed with a drill and “jiffy” mixer. Use a paddle
type mortar mixer for large jobs. All material should be in the proper temperature range of 45oF (7oC) to 90oF
(32oC). Add the appropriate amount of water, 2 to 3 qt (1.9 to 2.8 L)/bag, then slowly add the dry product. Mix
for 3 to 5 minutes.
Placement: For patching, spread with a trowel, come-a-long, or square tipped shovel to a thickness that matches
the surrounding concrete. When used as an overlay, use screed strips along with vibratory screeding to level.
Finishing: Finish the repair material to the desired texture. This product is designed for finishing with a float
or broom texture. A steel trowel finish may be applied but timing of the final trowel is critical. For a hard, flat
troweled surface, delay finishing until the product is near final set to reduce the risk of blistering during troweling.
Do not add additional water to the surface during the finishing operation. If additional liquid is required, use
EUCOBAR evaporation retarder. NOTE: Always re-establish joints when using this product as an overlay.
Curing and Sealing: Proper curing procedures are important to ensure the durability and quality of the repair.
To reduce surface cracking, cure the floor with a high solids curing compound, such as SUPER AQUA-CURE
VOX or SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR VOX. Note: Do not use a solvent based curing compound on this product. If
a curing compound is not desired, cover with quality plastic sheeting for a minimum of three days.
Clean-Up
• Do not allow repairs to freeze until the material has reached a minimum 7 MPa (1000 psi ) compressive strength.
• Use only potable water for mixing.
• Do not use material at temperatures below 7oC (45oF).
• Always mix full units.
• Do not use a solvent based curing compound on this product.
• Always use good concrete practices in hot & cold weather per ACI guidelines.
Rev. 6.11
294
DURALTOP FLOWABLE MORTAR
Polymer-Modified, Cementitious, Horizontal Repair Mortar w/Corrosion Inhibitor
Description
Horizontal Repair
DURALTOP FLOWABLE MORTAR is a two-component, pre-proportioned, polymer modified, highly flowable,
cementitious repair mortar. DURALTOP FLOWABLE MORTAR is a proprietary compound of portland cements,
finely graded aggregates, corrosion inhibitors and specific chemical additives formulated with polymer based
binders and modifiers providing superior horizontal repair performance.
• Interior and exterior • S tructural repairs
• Leveling and repair of horizontal concrete and • Parking & bridge decks
masonry surfaces • Industrial floors
Features/Benefits
• H ighly flowable repair mortar for hard to reach • R esistant to abrasion, freeze-thaw and deicing
places chemicals
• Polymer modified • Pre-proportioned unit for ease of use
• Contains a migratory corrosion inhibitor Can contribute to LEED points
• Excellent adhesion and durability
Material Properties @ 75°F (24°C) Bond Strength, ASTM C 882 (Mod) psi (MPa)
Compressive Strength ASTM C 109 (Mod) psi (MPa). 7 days....................................................1,100 (7.6)
4 hours.....................................................800 (5.5) 28 days................................................2,450 (16.9)
DURALTOP FLOWABLE MORTAR
1 day....................................................2,500 (17.2) Tensile Bond Strength
3 days..................................................4,600 (31.7) CAN A23.2-6B (28 days)........... greater than concrete
7 days..................................................6,000 (41.4) Splitting Tensile Strength, ASTM C 496 psi (MPa)
28 days................................................7,200 (49.6) 28 days.....................................................710 (4.9)
Flexural Strength ASTM C 293 psi (MPa) Chloride Perm ASTM C 1202
7 days..................................................1,750 (12.1) 28 days..............................120 coulombs “very low”
28 days................................................2,000 (13.8) Freeze Thaw Durability ASTM C 666
300 cycles....................................................99.4%
Packaging
DURALTOP FLOWABLE MORTAR Part A (powder) is packaged in 52 lb (23.6 kg) bags. Part B (liquid), in a 1 gal
(3.8 L) jug
Coverage/Yield
One kit of DURALTOP FLOWABLE MORTAR will yield approximately 0.5 ft³ (0.014 m³) of mortar
Shelf Life
Directions for Use

Master Format #:
Surface Preparation: Concrete surfaces must be structurally sound, free of loose or deteriorated concrete
03 0130
and free of dust, dirt, paint, efflorescence, oil and all other contaminants. Mechanically abrade the surface to
achieve a surface profile equal to CSP 5-7 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2. Properly clean profiled
area. Priming: Clean and prime exposed steel with DURALPREP AC. Concrete should be primed with a spray
or brush coat of DURALPREP AC. The primer coat of DURALPREP AC must be thoroughly dry prior to the
application of the repair material. Alternately, a Saturated Surface Dry (SSD) concrete surface can be primed
with a scrub coat of DURALTOP FLOWABLE MORTAR. The repair must be made before the scrub coat dries out.

295
Mixing: Mix only one kit of DURALTOP FLOWABLE MORTAR at a time. In a clean container, add 2/3 of liquid
(Part B). Use a 1/2” slow speed (400 to 600 rpm) drill and a “Jiffy” mixer, gradually add the powder (Part A) to
produce a mortar with a smooth consistency and without lumps. Add remaining liquid (Part B) to get desired
consistency. Do not mix longer than 3 minutes. The aggregate should be added after the powder is added to
the liquid. To fill areas deeper than 1½” (3.8 cm), use clean, damp 3/8” (0.95 cm) pea gravel. Do not use
limestone aggregate. Do not exceed 35 lb (15.9 kg) of aggregate for each unit of DURALTOP FLOWABLE
MORTAR.
Application: Air and surface temperature must be at least 45°F (7°C) and rising. Apply DURALTOP FLOWABLE
MORTAR immediately after mixing. The approximate working life is 30 minutes depending on the temperature.
Apply DURALTOP FLOWABLE MORTAR to the prepared surface. Consolidate and screed as necessary. Apply
the mortar in lifts of not more than 1½” (3.8 cm). Follow standard procedures for finishing.
Curing: Follow standard ACI guidelines for curing. In case of high temperature, high wind or low humidity
causing rapid surface drying, use wet burlap, plastic or a water based curing compound. Protect from rain and
freezing. DO NOT use solvent based curing compounds.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment immediately after use with water. Clean up spills or drips while still wet. Dried
product will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Apply immediately after mixing. Minimum application thickness 1/4”(6.4 mm), maximum thickness 1½” (38.1 mm)
neat; greater than 1½ ”(38.1 mm) extended.
• Store at tempatures between 40°F to 90°F (4°C to 32°C). Protect from freezing.
• Do not allow liquid (Part B) component to freeze.
• Do not apply DURALTOP FLOWABLE MORTAR below 45°F (7°C).
• Mix only one unit at a time.
• DO NOT MIX DURALTOP FLOWABLE MORTAR LONGER THAN 3 MINUTES.
• SSD surface before applying.
• Do not use limestone aggregate.
• Do not use solvent base curing compounds.
Rev. 6.11
296
EUCO IRON TOP
rapid-setting metallic aggregate Repair Mortar
Description
Euco Iron Top is a dense, high-early strength metallic aggregate concrete repair mortar formulated for heavy
duty applications. EUCO IRON TOP is especially suited for repair of concrete subjected to frequent and abrasive
traffic, heavy point loads, and impact. Critical applications requiring a fast return to service will benefit from the
quick cure time and strength gain of EUCO IRON TOP.
• Repair of concrete floors where durability and • Repair of deteriorated floor joints
fast set time are critical requirements
• Repairs 1” (2.5 cm) in depth or greater
Features/Benefits
• Fast set time and quick turnover of projects
• Rapid strength gain
• Provides a dense surface resistant to wear
• Can receive traffic in 2 to 3 hours
• Requires only water for mixing
Property Result
Flow @ 25 drops 90 - 120%
Initial Set > 5 minutes
EUCO IRON TOP

Final Set < 15 minutes
(ASTM C 109)
1 hour 4,000 (27.6)
3 hours 5,000 (34.5)
1 day 8,000 (55.2)
28 days 10,000 (69.0)
Note: All data was collected in the laboratory under controlled conditions 70°F (21°C) & 50% relative humidity.
Expect reasonable variation in properties depending on mixing equipment, temperature and curing conditions.
Packaging/yield
EUCO IRON TOP is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) bags
Master Format #:
Yield: 0.26 ft³ (0.007 m³) per bag when mixed with 0.54 gal ( 2.0 L) of water
03 53 16.00
Shelf Life
Coverage
One unit of EUCO IRON TOP will cover approximately 3 ft² (0.28 m²) when placed at an average depth of
1” (2.5 cm)

297
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: Concrete surfaces must be structurally sound, free of loose or deteriorated concrete and free
of dust, dirt, paint, efflorescence, oil and all other contaminants. Mechanically abrade the surface to a minimum depth
of 1/8” (3 mm) to achieve a surface profile equal to CSP 6 - 7 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2. Properly clean
profiled area. Priming: Prior to placement the prepared concrete surface should be SSD (saturated surface dry).
A brush or spray application of DURALPREP AC can be used as a bonding agent. The DURALPREP AC must be
allowed to thoroughly dry prior to the application of EUCO IRON TOP. Alternately, a scrub coat of EUCO IRON
TOP can be applied to the SSD surface. The repair must be made before the scrub coat dries out.
Mixing: Small quantities may be mixed with a drill and “jiffy” mixer. Use a paddle type mortar mixer for large
jobs. Add the appropriate amount of water for the batch size and then add the EUCO IRON TOP. Mix for 2
minutes or until uniform consistency is reached.
Placement: EUCO IRON TOP has a fast set time; mixing and application must proceed quickly. Place EUCO
IRON TOP immediately after mixing, and finish the material to the desired texture.
Curing: Proper curing is critical to product performance. As soon as possible without marring the surface of
EUCO IRON TOP, apply a concrete curing or cure & seal compound.
Clean-Up
• If aesthetics is an issue, consider another product rather than EUCO IRON TOP.
• Mix only one unit at a time.
• The temperatures at the time of placement must be at least 40oF (4oC) and rising.
Rev. 6.11
298
Euco Re-Cover
Fiber-Reinforced Concrete Resurfacer
Horizontal Repair
Description
EUCO RE-COVER is a polymer modified, fiber-reinforced concrete resurfacing mortar. Adding only water, EUCO
RE-COVER provides a fresh, aesthetically pleasing appearance to new concrete that has been marred by rain
or plastic covering, old or spalled concrete, and salt damaged concrete.
• D riveways • G arage floors
• Sidewalks • Elevated slabs
• Pool decks • Vertical concrete surfaces
Features/Benefits
• Excellent working time at 70°F (21°C) • Polymer modified
• Micro-fiber reinforced • Suitable for freeze-thaw environments
• Open to foot traffic in 4 hours, rubber tire traffic in 12 hours at 75°F (24°C)
Physical Property Test Method Result

Working Time - 30 minutes at 70°F (21°C)
Initial Set ASTM C 266 approx. 1 hour
Final Set ASTM C 266 approx. 2.5 hours
Euco Re-Cover
Compressive Strength ASTM C 109 4000 psi (28 MPa) at 28 days
Packaging/Yield
EUCO RE-COVER is packaged in 40 lb (18 kg) moisture resistant bags. The yield of EUCO RE-COVER is
0.48 ft3 (0.01 m3) per bag.
A mixed unit of EUCO RE-COVER will cover approximately 92 ft² (8.6 m²) at 1/16” (1.6 mm).
Shelf Life
Directions for Use

and be free of curing and sealing compounds, dust, dirt, paint, efflorescence, oil and all other contaminants.
Typically, pressure washing the surface with a commercial pressure washer (3000 psi, 4 GPM) (21MPa, 0.25 L/s)
Master Format #:
and allowing to fully dry will be sufficient for preparation. In areas of heavy contamination, preparing the concrete
03 01 30.61
through mechanical means is recommended. Abrade the surface to a profile of at least CSP 2, in accordance
with ICRI Guideline 310.2-1997.
Priming: Apply EUCO RE-COVER to dry surfaces. Although a primer is typically not needed, if pinholes form in
the EUCO RE-COVER due to application on porous surfaces, TAMMSWELD bonding adhesive should be used.
Please refer to the TAMMSWELD technical data sheet for further instructions.

299
Mixing: All materials should be conditioned to the appropriate temperature range of 50°F - 90°F (10°C - 32°C)
prior to mixing and placement. EUCO RE-COVER mixes with 4.5 quarts (4.3 L) of clean, potable water for
standard overlay applications. Up to an additional pint (0.4 L) can be added when the temperature exceeds
80°F (27°C). For repairing deeper spalls prior to overlaying, EUCO RE-COVER can be mixed with 3.5 to 4 quarts
(3.3-3.8 L) of water to make a stiff paste suitable for spall repairs. Place 80% of the mixing water into a clean
pail. Slowly add the dry EUCO RE-COVER powder into the mixing pail. During this time, the material should be
mixed with a drill and “jiffy” type mixing paddle. Slowly add the remaining 20% of the mixing water to the pail
and mix for 3 minutes to achieve the desired consistency. Place immediately.
Coloring: EUCO RE-COVER can be integrally colored. Add the desired liquid or dry colorant to the mixing
water and stir until colorant evenly disperses throughout the water. Continue mixing in the EUCO RE-COVER as
directed. The Euclid Chemical Company does not warrant any colored application. For even results, it is a best
practice to “box” all mixing water that has been colored prior to mixing individual bags of EUCO RE-COVER.
Colored results vary based on the colorant and amount used.
Placement: Place the mixed EUCO RE-COVER onto the concrete in the desired area. For best adhesion to the
concrete, use a scrub brush or stiff street broom to scrub the material onto the prepared substrate. Following
the initial placement of the material to the concrete, finish as desired, using either a trowel or a broom. The
maximum placement depth of EUCO RE-COVER is 3/8” (9.5 mm). If multiple lifts are to be applied, score the
last lift after placing; this will provide a great surface to mechanical bond subsequent lifts over. Since EUCO RE-
COVER is a thinly applied material, surface and air temperatures greatly effect the working time of the material.
On hotter days, it is best practice to work in small, controlled areas to avoid cold joints. Use Euclid Chemical’s
EUCOBAR evaporation retardant to retain moisture in the material and to provide longer finishing time. Working
from joint to joint in the base concrete is a good practice. All saw cuts and joints in the base concrete will have
to be honored through the EUCO RE-COVER material.
Curing and Sealing: Proper curing procedures are important to ensure the durability and quality of the repair. As
soon as the material can be walked on without harming the finish, apply a water-based cure and seal compound
to the EUCO RE-COVER. If you can apply a cure and seal sooner from the sides of the project, then do so. The
use of Euclid Chemical’s EVERCLEAR VOX is highly recommended for use on this product.
Clean-Up
Clean all tools and equipment with water prior to the material hardening. EUCO RE-COVER develops a tenacious
bond and is difficult to remove after drying.
• Try to avoid applying material in direct sun.
• Mixing partial bags will give variable results; always mix full units.
• DO NOT use this material below 50°F (10°C).
• DO NOT use a solvent-based cure and seal on this product.
• DO NOT use plastic or other covering means to cure EUCO RE-COVER, for discoloration will occur.
• Store product in a cool, dry place.
• In all cases, consult the Material Safety Data Sheet before use
Rev. 6.11
300
EUCO-SPEED
Rapid-Setting, Horizontal Repair Mortar
Horizontal Repair
Description
EUCO-SPEED is a rapid-setting, rapid-hardening, cementitious material for repairing horizontal concrete
surfaces. Requiring only the addition of water, EUCO-SPEED is easy to use and can be installed with standard
equipment and procedures. It tenaciously bonds to properly prepared concrete and provides a durable repair.
• Bridge decks • Pavements
• Ramps • Walls (formed) and floors
• Parking garages • Marine structures
Features/Benefits
• Rapid-setting for quick repairs • Suitable for both interior and exterior applications
• Rapid, high-early strength for quick turnaround time • Versatility in thickness from 1/2” (12 mm) to
• Easy to use single-component mortar 6” (15 cm)
Typical Engineering Data:
Compressive Strengths ASTM C109 2”(50mm) cubes Wheeled traffic @ 70oF (21oC)...approx.6 to 8 hours
40oF (4oC) 72oF (22oC) Flow after 5 min per ASTM C 109....................105%
3 hours 1,000 psi (7 MPa) 1,100 psi (8 MPa)
1 day 4,000 psi (28 MPa) 5,000 psi (35 MPa) Scaling per ASTM C 672 25 cycles...................none
3 days 4,500 psi (31 MPa) 5,500 psi (38 MPa) Length change in water at 28 days
7 days 5,500 psi (38 MPa) 6,000 psi (41 MPa) ASTM C 157....................................................+0.129%
28 days 7,000 psi (48 MPa) 7,000 psi (48 MPa)
Euco-Speed
Length change in air at 28 days
Final set time @ 72oF (22oC)............appprox.18 min ASTM C 157................................................... - 0.026%
Appearance: EUCO-SPEED is a free-flowing powder as packaged. After mixing and placing, the color may
initially appear slightly darker than the surrounding concrete. While this color will lighten up substantially
as the concrete cures and dries out, the repair may always appear somewhat darker than the surrounding
concrete. This product is designed to be finished with a float or broom appearance. A steel trowel finish
may be applied, but timing of the final trowel is critical and the contractor may have difficulty achieving a
smooth finish over a large area.
Packaging/yield
One 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag of EUCO-SPEED, mixed with .75 gal (2.85 L) of water, will yield approximately 0.41 ft3
(0.012 m3) of mortar. EUCO-SPEED may be extended with up to 25 lb (11.3 kg) of 3/8” (9.5 mm) pea gravel per
bag for deeper areas. Yield with pea gravel will increase to approximately 0.56 ft3 (.016 m3) per bag.
Shelf Life
Master Format #:
03 01 30.71
ASTM C 928: Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Rapid-Hardening, Cementitious Materials for Concrete Repairs
Coverage
One unit of EUCO-SPEED will cover approximately 9.8 ft2 (0.91 m2) when placed at an average depth of 1/2”
(12 mm). When one unit of material is extended with 25 lb (11 kg) of 3/8” (9.5 mm) pea gravel, the mixed material
will cover 13.4 ft2 (1.24 m2) when placed at an average depth of 1/2” (12 mm).

301
Directions for Use
area. Priming: Clean and prime exposed steel with DURALPREP A.C. Concrete should be primed with a spray
or brush coat of DURALPREP A.C. Allow the DURALPREP A.C. to thoroughly dry prior to mortar application.
Alternately, a Saturated Surface Dry (SSD) concrete surface can be primed with a scrub coat of EUCO-SPEED.
The repair must be made before the scrub coat dries out.
Mixing: Single bags may be mixed with a drill and “jiffy” mixer. Use a paddle type mortar mixer for large jobs. All
materials should be in the proper temperature range of 60oF (16oC) to 90oF (32oC). Add the appropriate amount
of water, .70 - .75 gal (2.65 - 2.85L) per bag, for the batch size and then add the EUCO-SPEED. Mix material for
about 2 minutes. The mixed product should be quickly transported to the repair area and placed immediately.
If extending, add pea gravel to mix water before adding dry powder.
Placement: EUCO-SPEED sets quickly; the time available for placement and finishing will be very limited. For
repairs; spread with a trowel, come-a-long, or square tipped shovel to a thickness that matches the surrounding
concrete. Float to even out mortar.
Finishing: Finish EUCO-SPEED to the desired float or broom finish. Do not add additional water to the surface
during the finishing operation; use EUCOBAR evaporation retarder on sunny, hot & windy days.
To prevent surface cracking, cure EUCO-SPEED with a high-solids curing compound, such as SUPER AQUA-
CURE VOX or SUPER REZ-SEAL. In hot, windy or direct sunlight situations, re-wet the surface after the curing
compound has dried and cover with polyethylene for a minimum of 3 days. If a curing compound is not desired,
wet cure for a minimum of 3 days.
Clean-Up
• If used in cold weather, the repair must be kept from freezing for at least 8 hours.
• Do not apply over frozen concrete.
• Do not place material at temperatures below 40oF (4oC).
• No heavy traffic until the product has reached a minimum of 2,000 psi (14 MPa).
Rev. 6.11
302
EUCO-SPEED MP
Magnesium Phosphate Repair Mortar
Description
Horizontal Repair
EUCO-SPEED MP is a rapid-setting, rapid hardening magnesium phosphate material for the repair of concrete
and masonry surfaces. EUCO-SPEED MP requires only the addition of water and can be installed with standard
equipment and procedures. It bonds tenaciously to properly prepared concrete and provides a durable repair
which is resistant to freeze-thaw cycling and deicing salts. For temperatures above 85oF (29oC), EUCO-SPEED
MP Hot Weather should be used. For large placements use EUCO-SPEED MP HOT WEATHER extended with
pea gravel.
• Bridge decks • Parking garages • Hand rail grouting • Marine structures
• Anchoring • Floors • Pavements • Joint repairs
Features/Benefits
• Rapid-setting for turnaround in less than one hour • Versatility in thickness from 1/2” (12 mm) to 8” (20
• Suitable for both interior and exterior applications cm) when extended with aggregate
• Durable under freeze-thaw cycling and salt • May be placed down to 0oF (-17oC)
exposure Can contribute to LEED points
Typical Engineering Data*
Compressive Strength ASTM C 109, 2” (50 mm) cubes Bond Strength ASTM C 882 (modified)
@720F (220C) 3 hours.......................................1,000 psi (7 MPa)
Age Strength 1 day...........................................1,300 psi (9 MPa)
2 hours.................................... 3,500 psi (24 MPa) 3 days.......................................1,500 psi (10 MPa)
3 hours.....................................5,000 psi (35 MPa) 7 days.......................................1,600 psi (11 MPa)
Euco-Speed MP
6 hours.....................................5,500 psi (38 MPa) 28 days.....................................1,700 psi (12 MPa)
1 day.........................................6,000 psi (41 MPa)
Wheel Traffic......................................1 to 2 hours
3 days.......................................6,500 psi (45 MPa)
7 days.......................................7,000 psi (48 MPa) Setting Time (Gillmore Needles)
28 days.....................................7,500 psi (52 MPa) Initial Set................................................ 8 to12 min
Final Set........................................... 12 to 20 min
Flexural Strength ASTM C 78
4 hours.......................................400 psi (2.8 MPa) * All testing was conducted on neat material under controlled
3 days.........................................500 psi (3.4 MPa) laboratory conditions. Do not expect similar compressive
strength results using cylinder type molds. Also, strengths will
Freeze/Thaw Resistance ASTM C-666 Procedure A be affected by the amount and type of aggregate added to
500 Cycles............ 93% relative dynamic modulus extend EUCO-SPEED MP.
Appearance: EUCO-SPEED MP is a free flowing powder as packaged. After mixing and placing, the color may initially
appear slightly darker than the surrounding concrete. While this color will lighten up substantially as the concrete
cures and dries out, the repair may always appear somewhat darker than the surrounding concrete.
Packaging/yield
EUCO-SPEED MP is available in 50 lb (22.7 kg) bags or pails. Yield: Approximately 0.42 ft3 (0.012 m3) of mortar
Master Format #:
when mixed with 0.45 gal (1.7 L) of water. For areas deeper than 1” (25.4 mm), EUCO-SPEED MP must be
03 01 30.71
extended with up to 30 lb (13.6 kg) of 3/8” (9.5 mm) pea gravel*. Yield will increase to approximately 0.57 ft3
(0.016 m3) per unit. * Use only dust free, properly graded hard aggregate. Never extend EUCO-SPEED MP with limestone
or aggregate containing limestone.
Shelf Life

303
ASTM C 928, Standard Specifications for Packaged, Dry, Rapid-Hardening Cementitious Materials for Concrete Repair
Coverage
One unit of EUCO-SPEED MP will cover approximately 10 ft2 (0.93 m2) when placed at an average depth of 1/2”
(13 mm). When one unit of material is extended with 30 lb (13.6 kg) of 3/8” (9.5 mm) pea gravel, the mixed
material will cover 13.7 ft2 (1.3 m2) when placed at an average depth of 1/2” (13 mm).
Directions for Use

Priming: Clean and prime exposed steel using a spray or brush coat of DURAPREP A.C.
Bonding: EUCO-SPEED MP requires no bond coat.
Mixing: Single bags may be mixed with a drill and “jiffy” mixer. Use a paddle type mortar mixer for large jobs.
Add the appropriate amount of water for the batch size and then add the EUCO-SPEED MP. The amount of
water to be mixed with EUCO-SPEED MP is critical. Add between 0.4 to 0.5 gal (1.5 to 1.9 L) of water per
50 lb (22.7 kg) unit. Mix material for about 2 minutes. The mixed material should be quickly transported to the
repair area and placed immediately. For patches greater than 1” (25 mm) in depth, pea gravel must be used.
Add the pea gravel (up to 30 lb (13.6 kg)) after the neat material has mixed, mix for 1 additional minute. In hot
weather, greater than 85oF (29oC), the use of EUCO-SPEED MP HOT WEATHER is recommended. For large
placements, regardless of the temperature, EUCO-SPEED MP HOT WEATHER is recommended along with the
use of cold water to extend setting time.
Placement: EUCO-SPEED MP requires a minimum depth of 1/2” (13 mm). Spread with a trowel, screed, come-
a-long or square tipped shovel to a thickness that matches the surrounding concrete. EUCO-SPEED MP sets
quickly; the time available for placement and finishing will be very limited.
Finishing: Finish EUCO-SPEED MP to the desired float or broom finish texture. Do not add additional water to
the surface during the finishing operation.
Curing and Sealing: EUCO-SPEED MP is self-curing; no curing is need of this product.
Clean-Up
• DUE TO THE CHEMICAL NATURE OF EUCO-SPEED MP, DO NOT LET IT COME IN CONTACT WITH
GALVANIZED STEEL.
• Do not overwater.
• As EUCO-SPEED MP cures, a chemical reaction generates excessive heat. Mixed material must be maintained
at or below 180oF (82oC) if satisfactory results are to be expected.
• Although EUCO-SPEED MP may be used down to 0°F (-17°C), the material must be stored at a room
temperature of 60o-70°F (16o-21°C) for at least 24 hours prior to use.
• Do not add sand or cement.
• Do not place EUCO-SPEED MP over an ice covered substrate.
• When mixing in an enclosed area, provide adequate ventilation.
• Do not featheredge.
• For repairs deeper than 1” (25 mm), pea gravel must be used to extend the product.
• No heavy traffic until the product has reached a minimum of 2,000 psi (13.8 MPa).
• Do not place over carbonated concrete. All carbonation must be removed to assure a good bond.
Rev. 6.11
304
EUCOCRETE
High Performance Repair Material with Corrosion Inhibitor
Description
Horizontal Repair
eucocrete is a versatile, single-component, microsilica-modified repair mortar that contains an integral
corrosion inhibitor for concrete repair projects of all types. Requiring only the addition of water, EUCOCRETE
is a high strength material with an extended working time for ease of placement. It is similar in appearance to
concrete and is suitable for use as a topping or repair mortar concrete structures from 1” (2.5 cm) to full depth.
• Parking decks • Balconies • Floor toppings • Beams
• Joint repairs • Equipment bases • Pavements • Form & pour jobs
Features/Benefits
• Microsilica modified for high strength • Compatible with galvanic anodes
• Pre-mixed with pea gravel, ready-to-use • Interior or exterior
• Low permeability with excellent freeze-thaw resistance • Contains an integral corrosion inhibitor
• Long working time Can contribute to LEED points
Typical Engineering Data @70oF (21oC)
Compressive Strength ASTM C 109, 2” (50 mm) cubes Flexural Strength ASTM C 78
@ 0.5gal/50 lb bag. 7 days............................................900 psi (6 MPa)
Age Strength 28 days.......................................1,050 psi (7 MPa)
1 day.........................................5,000 psi (35 MPa)
7 days.......................................8,800 psi (61 MPa) Rapid Chloride Permeability ASTM C 1202
28 days.....................................9,750 psi (67 MPa) 28 days..........................................1000 coulombs
56 days...................................10,000 psi (69 MPa)
Eucocrete
Working Time.....................................2 hrs 30 min
Compressive Strength ASTM C 39, 3”x6” cyl.
@ 0.5gal/50lb. bag. Consistency:
1 day.........................................4,500 psi (31 MPa) Initial slump.......................................10” (254 mm)
7 days.......................................7,000 psi (48 MPa) 30 minute slump..................................9.5” (241 mm)
28 days.....................................8,500 psi (59 MPa) 1 hour slump.......................................9” (229 mm)
56 days.....................................8,900 psi (61 MPa)
Freeze/Thaw Resistance ASTM C 666 Procedure A Set Time ASTM C 403
300 cycles............ 99% relative dynamic modulus Initial.................................................. approx. 4 hrs
Final.................................................. approx. 5 hrs
Sulfate Resistance ASTM C 1012
28 days....................................................+0.006% Unit Weight...............146.41 lb/ft³ (2345.49 kg/m³)
6 months..................................................+0.016%
12 months................................................+0.018% Volumetric Resistivity.....................15,400 Ω/cm
EUCOCRETE is a free-flowing powder designed to be mixed with water. After mixing and placing, the color may
Master Format #:
initially appear somewhat darker than the surrounding concrete. While this color will lighten up substantially as
03 01 30.71
the concrete cures and dries out, the repair may always appear slightly darker than the surrounding concrete.
Packaging/yield
EUCOCRETE is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) bags. Yield: 0.37 ft³ (0.01m³) per bag when mixed with 0.5 gal (1.9
L) of water. Bulk bags suitable for mixing in ready-mix trucks are also available.

305
Shelf Life
Coverage
One unit of EUCOCRETE will cover approximately 4.5 ft² (0.42 m²) when placed at an average depth of 1” (2.5
cm). EUCOCRETE may be extended with up to 15 lb (6.8 kg) of 3/8” (9.5 mm) pea gravel for placements over
6” (15 cm), which will yield 0.46 ft³ (0.013 m³). This may alter certain engineering properties.
Directions for Use

achieve a surface profile of at least CSP 5-7 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2. Properly clean profiled
or brush coat of DURALPREP AC. Alternately, a Saturated Surface Dry (SSD) concrete surface can be primed
with a scrub coat of EUCOCRETE. The repair must be made before the scrub coat dries out.
of water, .45 - .50 gal (1.7 - 1.9L) per bag, for the batch size and then add the dry product. Mix a minimum of 3
minutes. If additional pea gravel is to be added, mix an additional 2 to 3 minutes. The mixed product should be
transported to the repair area and placed immediately.
Placement: For make repairs, spread with a trowel, come-a-long, or square tipped shovel to a thickness that
matches the surrounding concrete. Finish to desired texture. Note: On large floor areas, use screed strips as
guides in combination with vibratory screeding to level. Compact and finish by hand or machine trowel.
Finishing: This product is designed for finishing with a float or broom appearance. A steel trowel finish may be
applied but timing of the final trowel is critical and the contractor may have difficulty achieving a smooth finish
over a large area. Do not add water to the surface during the finishing operation; use EUCOBAR evaporation
retarder.
Curing and Sealing: To prevent surface cracking, cure the floor with a high-solids curing compound from
The Euclid Chemical Company. In hot, windy or direct sunlight situations, re-wet the surface after the curing
compound has dried and cover with polyethylene for a minimum of three days. If a curing compound is not
desired, wet cure for a minimum of three days.
Clean-Up
• No heavy traffic until the product has fully cured.
• Keep repair from freezing until a minimum strength of 1,000 psi (6.90 MPa) is reached.
• EUCOCRETE requires a primer/bond coat and a curing compound.
Rev. 6.11
306
EUCOCRETE SUPREME
Polymer-Modified, High Performance Repair Mortar with Corrosion Inhibitor
Description
Horizontal Repair
EUCOCRETE SUPREME is a versatile, single-component, latex and microsilica modified, repair mortar containing
a migratory corrosion inhibitor, designed to provide protection from corrosion for repair projects of all types.
Requiring only the addition of water, EUCOCRETE SUPREME is a high strength material which is easy to use
with an extended working time for ease of placement. It is similar in appearance to concrete and is suitable for
use as a topping or repair mortar on horizontal surfaces and formed vertical and overhead repairs.
• Parking decks • Balconies • Floor toppings • Beams
• Joint repairs • Equipment bases • Pavements • Form & pour jobs
Features/Benefits
• Microsilica modified for high strength • Applications from 1” (2.5 cm) to full depth
• Pre-mixed with pea gravel, ready-to-use • Interior or exterior
• Low permeability with excellent freeze/thaw resistance • Form and pour repairs
• Contains an integral corrosion inhibitor Can contribute to LEED points
Typical Engineering Data @ 70°F (21°C)
Compressive Strength ASTM C 109, 2” (50 mm) cubes Rapid Chloride Permeability ASTM C 1202
@ 0.5gal/50 lb bag. 28 days.........................................1,100 coulombs
Age Strength
1 day.........................................4,700 psi (32 MPa) Freeze/Thaw Resistance ASTM C 666 Procedure A
7 days.......................................7,250 psi (50 MPa) 300 Cycles....... 101.1% relative dynamic modulus
EUCOCRETE SUPREME
28 days..................................10,300 psi (71 MPa)
56 days..................................11,000 psi (76 MPa) Linear Shrinkage ASTM C 157 50% R.H.@73°F (23°C)
28 days........................................................-0.05%
Compressive Strength ASTM C 39, 3”x 6’ cyl.
@ 0.5gal/50 lb bag. Unit Weight..........approx.148.0 lb/ft³ (2,371 kg/m³)
1 day.........................................4,530 psi (31 MPa)
7 days.......................................6,820 psi (47 MPa) Consistency, Slump Cone ...........>10” (254 mm)
28 days....................................8,500 psi (59 MPa)
56 days....................................9,000 psi (62 MPa) Set Time ASTM C 403
Initial................................................... approx. 6 hr
Flexural Strength ASTM C 78 Final.................................................... approx. 7 hr
7 days.........................................950 psi (6.6 MPa)
28 days....................................1,050 psi (7.2 MPa) Volumetric Resistivity
28 days ..............................................34,275 ohm/cm
EUCOCRETE SUPREME is a free-flowing powder designed to be mixed with water. After mixing and placing,
the color may initially appear somewhat darker than the surrounding concrete. While this color will lighten
up substantially as the concrete cures and dries out, the repair may always appear slightly darker than the
Master Format #:
Packaging/yield
03 01 30.71
EUCOCRETE SUPREME is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) bags. Yield: 0.37 ft³ (0.01m³) per bag when mixed with
0.5 gal (1.9 L) of water. Bulk bags suitable for mixing in ready-mix trucks are also available.
Shelf Life

307
Coverage
One unit of EUCOCRETE SUPREME will cover approximately 4.5 ft² (0.42 m²) when placed at an average
thickness of 1” (2.5 cm). EUCOCRETE SUPREME may be extended with up to 15 lb (6.8 kg) of 3/8” (9.5 mm)
pea gravel for placements over 6” (15 cm), which will yield 0.46 ft³ (0.013 m³). Product strength may be reduced
10 to 15% with aggregate extension.
Directions for Use

with a scrub coat of EUCOCRETE SUPREME. The repair must be made before the scrub coat dries out.
of water, .45 - .50 gal (1.7 - 1.9L) per bag, for the batch size and then add the dry product. Mix a minimum of 3
minutes. If additional pea gravel is to be added, mix an additional 2 to 3 minutes. The mixed product should be
Placement: For patching, spread with a trowel, come-a-long, or square tipped shovel to a thickness that matches
the surrounding concrete. Finish to desired texture. Note: On large floor areas, use screed strips as guides in
combination with vibratory screeding to level. Compact and finish by hand or machine trowel.
Finishing: This product is designed for finishing with a float or broom. A steel trowel finish may be applied, but
timing of the final trowel is critical and the contractor may have difficulty achieving a smooth finish over a large
area. Do not add water to the surface during the finishing operation; use EUCOBAR evaporation retarder.
Curing and Sealing: To prevent surface cracking, cure the floor with a water-based curing compound from
The Euclid Chemical Company, or cure a minimum of three days with a moisture retaining covering, such
as polyethylene film. In hot, windy or direct sunlight situations, re-wet the surface and cover with a moisture
retaining covering.
Clean-Up
• No heavy traffic until the product has fully cured.
Rev. 6.11
308
EXPRESS REPAIR
Rapid-Setting Repair Mortar w/Corrosion Inhibitor
Horizontal Repair
Description
EXPRESS REPAIR is a cement based, ready to use, rapid strength gaining repair mortar containing a migratory
corrosion inhibitor. EXPRESS REPAIR is capable of being extended up to 100% with pea gravel. Requiring only
the addition of water, EXPRESS REPAIR is easy to use for fast turn-around projects.
Interior and exterior, horizontal concrete repairs on:
• Highways • L oading docks
• Bridge decks • Pavement joints
• Parking decks • Industrial floors
Features/Benefits
• F ast setting • Excellent durability
• Rapid strength gain • Develops tenacious bond
• Contains a migratory corrosion inhibitor • Compatible with galvanic anodes
Material Properties @ 75°F (24˚C)
Split Tensile Strength, ASTM C 496 psi (MPa)
Initial Set, ASTM C 266
1 day.........................................................300 (2.1)
Gilmore Needle..................................20 to 30 min
7 days.......................................................550 (3.8)
Compressive Strength, ASTM C 109 psi (MPa) 28 days.....................................................800 (5.5)
3 hours................................................3,200 (22.0)
Scaling Resistance ASTM C 672
24 hours..............................................5,800 (40.0)
100 cycles............................................. no scaling
EXPRESS REPAIR
7 days..................................................7,000 (48.3)
28 days..............................................10,040 (69.2) Freeze Thaw, Durability Factor................. ASTM C 666
350 cycles.................................................................100%
Flexural Strength, ASTM C 348 psi (MPa)
1 day.........................................................800 (5.5) Shrinkage, ASTM C 157
7 days..................................................1,500 (10.3) 3 days........................................................-0.040%
28 days................................................1,700 (11.7) 7 days........................................................-0.078%
28 days......................................................-0.093%
Volumetric Resistivity.....................13,390 Ω/cm
Packaging
EXPRESS REPAIR is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) poly-lined bags
Shelf Life
Coverage
Master Format #:
One 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag yields approximately 0.42 ft³ (0.01m³) when mixed with 3 qt (2.8 L) of potable water.
Extending with 50 lb (22.7 kg) of 3/8” (9.5 mm) pea gravel per bag increases the yield to approximately 0.75 ft³
03 01 30.71
(0.02 m³).
Complies with ASTM C 928 Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Rapid-Hardening, Cementitious Materials for Concrete Repair

309
Directions for Use
achieve a surface profile equal to CSP 5 - 7 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2. Properly clean profiled
area. Priming: Clean and prime exposed steel with DURALPREP A.C. Concrete should be primed with a spray
or brush coat of DURALPREP A.C. The primer coat of DURALPREP AC must be allowed to thoroughly dry prior
to the application of EXPRESS REPAIR. Alternately, a Saturated Surface Dry (SSD) concrete surface can be
primed with a scrub coat of EXPRESS REPAIR. The repair must be made before the scrub coat dries out.
Mixing: EXPRESS REPAIR requires 2.75 to 3 qt (2.6 to 2.8 L) of mix water per 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag. Use a drill with
a “jiffy” type mixer for mixing single bags. For larger applications use a paddle type mortar mixer or a standard
concrete mixer. Do not add additional water. For repair areas over 1½“ (38.1 mm) deep, extend by adding up
to 50 lbs (22.7 kg) of 3/8" (9.5 mm) clean, well-graded SSD pea gravel per 50 lb (22.7 kg) of EXPRESS REPAIR.
Proper mixing sequence involves first, adding the measured quantity of water to the mortar mixer; second,
adding the pea gravel; and third, adding the EXPRESS REPAIR and thoroughly mixing for 2 to 4 minutes. Do
not mix longer than 4 minutes.
Application: EXPRESS REPAIR should be mixed, placed and finished within 15 minutes. Place the mixed
material into the prepared area to be repaired. Work the material firmly into the bottom and sides of the repair
area to ensure good adhesion. Screed and trowel the material level with the existing concrete, and finish the
surface as desired. Thickness of EXPRESS REPAIR must be a minimum of ½“ (12.7 mm) and a maximum of 1½”
(38.1 mm) neat. Repair areas over 1½” (38.1 mm) must be extended or applied in multiple lifts. When applying
multiple lifts, allow the initial repair to reach final set, score the surface and then place the subsequent lift. Do not
overtrowel or featheredge. Follow ACI guidelines for proper curing. On windy or hot days or when under direct
sunlight, wet curing is recommended.
Cold Weather Application: Application at temperatures below 45°F (7°C) extends the set time. Heating the
repair area, using warm water for mixing, and tenting or insulating the repair area after application will increase
rate of strength development. Do not use direct, unvented heat on the repair after installation.
Clean-Up
Clean application tools and mixer with water immediately after use. Hardened EXPRESS REPAIR will be difficult
to remove.
• Do not featheredge, overwork, retemper or overtrowel the patching material.
• Minimum depth of patching is 1/2" (13 mm).
• Do not add any admixtures or bonding agents to EXPRESS REPAIR.
• The repair area should be frost free prior to application.
• Do not apply at temperatures below 35°F or above 90°F (1.7°C or above 32°C).
• Store in covered storage away from all moisture.
Rev. 6.11
310
FORM AND POUR “CP”
Highly Flowable Repair Mortar
Horizontal Repair
Description
FORM and POUR “CP” is a flowable mortar, suitable for pumping or pouring into areas, such as voids and cores
in concrete masonry units requiring complete filling. Formulated with a with a very low volumetric resistivity to
be compatible with cathodic protection devices, such as sacrificial galvanic anodes used to protect the steel
within concrete structures.
• Compatible with cathodic protection systems
• Structural galvanic jacket anodes used to protect bridge piers
• Filling cores in concrete masonry units
• Filling voids
• Bridge repairs
• Beams
Features/Benefits
• Appropriate permeability, volumetric resistivity in range for use with galvanic jacket anodes
• Long working time
• Can be hand applied or mechanically pumped
• Does not contain microsilica, fly ash, slag or chlorides
Form and Pour “CP”

laboratory conditions:
Compressive Strength (ASTM C 1019) Flexural Strength ASTM C 348
1 day......................................3,000 psi (20.7 MPa) 7 days...........................................700 psi (4.8 MPa)
7 days....................................4,200 psi (29.0 MPa) 28 days......................................1,000 psi (6.9 MPa)
28 days..................................5,560 psi (38.3 MPa)
Rapid Chloride Permeability ASTM C 1202
Compressive Strength @ 0.84 gal/50 lb bag 28 days......................................3,000+ coulombs
(3.18 L/22.7 kg) ASTM C 109 2” (50 mm) cubes
1 day........................................2,000 psi (13.8 MPa) Unit Weight....approx. 135.36 lb/ft³ (2,168.26 kg/m³)
7 days......................................6,000 psi (41.4 MPa)
28 days....................................7,500 psi (51.7 MPa) Volumetric Resistivity....................4,840 ohm/cm
Appearance: FORM and POUR “CP” is a free-flowing powder designed to be mixed with water.
Packaging
FORM and POUR “CP” is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) bags
Shelf Life
Master Format #:
03 01 30.71
Specification/Compliances
FORM AND POUR “CP” meets the 28 day strength requirement of ASTM C 476. FORM AND POUR “CP”
also meets the proportional requirements of ASTM C 476 as a “fine” grout when used as supplied, and as a
“coarse” grout when mixed with an additional 25 lbs (11.3 kg) of 3/8” (9.5 mm) pea gravel.

311
Coverage/Yield
When mixed with 0.84 gal (3.18 L) of water, the unit yields 0.40 ft³ (0.011m³) per bag. A unit of FORM and POUR
“CP” may be extended with up to 25 lbs (11.4 kg) of 3/8” (9.5 mm) pea gravel which will yield 0.57 ft³(0.016 m³).
This may alter certain engineering properties.
Directions for Use

area. Priming: Clean and prime exposed steel using a spray or brush coat of DURALPREP AC. The primer coat
of DURALPREP AC must be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to the application of the repair mortar. Alternately, a
Saturated Surface Dry (SSD) concrete surface can be primed with a scrub coat of FORM and POUR “CP”. The
repair must be made before the scrub coat dries out.
materials should be in the proper temperature range of 60oF (15oC) - 90oF (32oC). Add the appropriate amount
of water for the batch size and then add the dry product. Mix for 3 minutes. If placement is over 2” (5 cm) deep,
add the necessary pea gravel and mix an additional 2-3 minutes. The mixed product should be transported to
the repair area and placed immediately. Place material in a continuous pour to avoid cold joints.
Placement: Discharge material from mixer and place by pouring or pumping into form.
Curing and Sealing: To prevent surface cracking, cure FORM and POUR “CP” with an appropriate curing
compound from The Euclid Chemical Company. If a curing compound is not desired, wet cure for a minimum
of three days.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with warm, soapy water before material hardens.
• Not designed to be an expansive or non-shrink form and pour.
• In all cases, consult the product’s material safety data sheet before use.
Rev. 6.11
312
SPEED CRETE 2028
Rapid-Setting Horizontal Repair Mortar w/Corrosion Inhibitor
Horizontal Repair
Description
SPEED CRETE 2028 is a cement based, ready to use, repair mortar which sets quickly, and achieves rapid
strength gain. SPEED CRETE 2028 is a proprietary formulation of blended cements, selected aggregates and
it contains a migratory corrosion inhibitor.
• Highways • Pavement joint repairs
• Loading docks • Parking decks
• Bridge decks • Industrial floors
Features/Benefits
• Sets fast, with rapid strength gain
• Very low permeability
• Non-shrink
• Contains a migratory corrosion inhibitor
• Develops a tenacious bond
• Excellent resistance to freeze-thaw conditions and deicing chemicals
• Repair can be coated or over-layed with an epoxy or other products after a 24 hour cure
Material Properties at 75°F (24°C) Bond Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM C 882 (mod)
Initial Set Time, min ASTM C 266...............15 to 25. 28 days................................................2,400 (16.5)
SPEED CRETE 2028

Final Set Time, min Gilmore Needle.......30 to 35 Tensile Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM C 190
Compressive Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM C 109 24 hours...................................................420 (2.9)
1 hour..................................................2,600 (17.9) 7 days.......................................................540 (3.7)
2 hours................................................4,400 (30.3) 28 days.....................................................650 (4.5)
3 hours................................................5,000 (34.5) Scaling Resistance, ASTM C 672
24 hours..............................................7,000 (48.3) 100 cycles.............................................No scaling
3 days..................................................7,500 (51.7) Freeze-Thaw, Durability Factor ASTM C 666
7 days..................................................8,600 (59.3) 350 cycles.....................................................100%
28 days................................................9,000 (62.1) Expansion/Contraction, CRD-C 621
Compressive Strength, ASTM C 39 24 hours....................................................-0.010%
Extended 50% with 3/8" (9.5 mm) pea gravel, psi (MPa) 3 days........................................................-0.011%
1 hour..................................................3,800 (26.2) 7 days........................................................-0.013%
24 hours..............................................6,500 (44.8) Chloride Permeability ASTM C 1202
Flexural Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM C 78 27 coulombs....................................... “negligible”
4 hours.....................................................500 (3.4) Volumetric Resistivity
24 hours...................................................750 (5.2) 28 days..........................................65,000 ohm/cm
3 days.......................................................780 (5.4)
7 days.......................................................900 (6.2) Typical results obtained under laboratory conditions
Master Format #:
28 days..................................................1,050 (7.2)
03 01 30.71
Packaging
SPEED CRETE 2028 is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) polylined bags
Shelf Life

313
Meets or exceeds ASTM C 928, Type R3
Coverage/Yield
One 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag yields approximately 0.42 ft³ (0.012 m³). Extending with 40 lb (18.1 kg) of 3/8" (9.5 mm)
pea gravel increases the yield to approximately 0.70 ft³ (0.02 m³).
Directions for Use

achieve a surface profile equal to CSP 5-7 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2. Properly clean profiled area.
brush coat of DURALPREP AC. The primer coat of DURALPREP AC must be alllowed to thoroughly dry prior to
the application of the repair mortar. Alternately, a Saturated Surface Dry (SSD) concrete surface can be primed
with a scrub coat of SPEEDCRETE 2028. The repair must be made before the scrub coat dries out.
Mixing: SPEED CRETE 2028 requires 2.25 to 2.5 qt (2.13 to 2.37 L) of water per 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag. Use a drill
with a “jiffy” type mixer for optimal mixing of single bags. For larger applications use a paddle type, horizontal
shaft mortar mixer. The material is stiff initially but relaxes after 4 to 5 minutes of mixing. Do not add any
additional water to loosen up the mix. For repair areas over 1½" (38 mm) deep, extend by adding up to 40 lb
(18.1 kg) of 3/8" (9.5 mm) clean, well-graded, damp pea gravel per 50 lb (22.7 kg) of SPEED CRETE 2028. Do
not use limestone aggregate. Proper mixing sequence involves; first, adding the measured quantity of
water to the mortar mixer, second, adding the SPEED CRETE 2028 and mixing for 4 minutes to thoroughly wet
it out, and third, adding pea gravel, if required.
Application: SPEED CRETE 2028 should be mixed, placed and finished within 15 minutes. Place the mixed
material into the prepared area to be repaired. Work the material firmly into the bottom and sides of the repair
area to ensure good adhesion. Screed and trowel the material so as to level with the existing concrete, and
finish the surface as desired. Thickness of SPEED CRETE 2028 repair must be a minimum of 1/2" (12 mm) and
a maximum of 1½" (38 mm) per lift. When applying multiple lifts, allow the repair to reach final set, score the
surface and then place the subsequent lift. Repair areas over 1½" (38 mm) deep should either be extended or
applied in multiple lifts. Do not over-trowel or featheredge. Follow ACI guidelines for proper curing. On windy
or hot days or when under direct sunlight, wet curing is recommended.
Cold Weather Application: Application at temperatures below 45°F (7°C) extends the set time. Heating the
repair area until warm, using warm water for mixing and tenting or insulating the repair area after application will
assist in reaching higher strength development. Do not use direct heat on the repair after its installation.
Clean-Up
To prevent buildup, clean application tools and mixer with water immediately after use.
• Do not featheredge, overwork, retemper or over-trowel the repair material.
• Minimum depth of patching is 1/2" (12 mm).
• Do not add any admixtures or bonding agents to SPEED CRETE 2028.
Rev. 6.11
314
SPEED CRETE GREEN LINE
Fast Setting Horizontal Cement Based Repair Material
Horizontal Repair
Description
SPEED CRETE GREEN LINE is a fast-setting, semi-flowable, high strength repair material requiring only potable
water for mixing. SPEED CRETE GREEN LINE is a proprietary formulation of blended portland cements, finely
processed selected aggregates, and specific chemical additives designed for horizontal repair.
• R apid repair of horizontal concrete surfaces
• Interior or exterior, above and below grade
• Repair material for expressways, bridge decks, streets, loading docks, and parking decks
Features/Benefits
• S emi-flowable • O pen to traffic in 1 hour
• Initial set in 6 to 15 minutes • High strength
• Final set in 20 minutes • Excellent durability
Material Properties @ 75°F (24˚C) Shear Bond Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM C 1042
Compressive Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM C 109 24 hour .........................................................939 (6.5)
1 hour..................................................2,000 (13.8) 3 day...........................................................1,092 (7.5)
24 hours..............................................4,500 (31.0) Freeze Thaw Durability Factor ASTM C 666
7 days..................................................4,860 (33.5) 310 cycles.......................................................96.00%
28 days................................................6,375 (43.9) Length Change ASTM C 157
SPEED CRETE GREEN LINE
Set Time, Gilmore ASTM C 266 Moist cure (28 days)....................................+0.061%
Initial.....................................................6 to 15 min Air cure (28 days)...........................................-0.054%
Final............................................................. 20 min Difference between moist & air cure = 0.115%
Flexural Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM C 78 (0.20% allowable)
24 hour......................................................510 (3.5) Scaling Resistance ASTM C 672
7 day.........................................................890 (6.1) 25 cycles........................................................0% loss
28 day.......................................................948 (6.5)
Typical results obtained under laboratory conditions
Packaging
SPEED CRETE GREEN line is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) poly-lined bags
Shelf Life
Meets or exceeds requirements of ASTM C 928
Coverage/Yield
One 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag yields approximately 0.50 ft³ (0.014 m³)
Master Format #:
Directions for Use

03 01 30.71
a surface profile equal to CSP 7 - 8 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2. Properly clean profiled area.
Priming: Clean and prime exposed steel with DURALPREP A.C. Concrete should be primed with a spray or
brush coat of DURALPREP A.C. The primer coat of DURALPREP AC must be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to
with a scrub coat of SPEED CRETE GREEN LINE. The repair must be made before the scrub coat dries out.

315
Mixing: SPEED CRETE GREEN LINE will require approximately .95 to 1 gal (3.6 to 3.8 L) of potable water per
50 lb (22.68 kg) bag. Pour a measured amount of water into a clean mixing container, add the SPEED CRETE
GREEN LINE, and thoroughly mix for no more than 60 seconds. Initially, the mixture will seem very stiff, but near
the end of the mixing time, it will relax and achieve a semi-flowable consistency. Do not add additional water.
Too much water weakens the mixture. For large projects, use a rotary mixer with rubber tipped blades. Pour
the required amount of water into the mixer, and add the SPEED CRETE GREEN LINE. Mix just long enough
to achieve the proper consistency, but not more than 60 seconds. Do not mix more than 100 lb (45.36 kg) at
one time. Small amounts of SPEED CRETE GREEN LINE, such as 5 to 10 pounds (2.27 to 4.54 kg), may be
mixed in a clean pail with a hand trowel. To fill repairs 2” (5.1 cm) deep or greater, add clean, damp, 3/8” (9.5
mm) size pea gravel to the SPEED CRETE GREEN LINE. The mix ratio must not exceed 40 lb (18.1 kg) of pea
gravel to each 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag. Mixing Procedure: Start mixer, load water, load pea gravel, and then add
SPEED CRETE GREEN LINE. Mix no more than 60 seconds. Do not add sand. Important: Use potable water
for mixing. Clean mixing equipment between batches.
Application: A minimum 1” (2.54 cm) application depth is required for traffic bearing surfaces, 3/4" (1.91cm) for
others. Pour mixed material into prepared area to be repaired, and immediately screed the surface. Trowel the
surface before it becomes firm, using standard finishing techniques. Cure SPEED CRETE GREEN LINE using
normal curing methods. Do not overwork, over-trowel, or featheredge SPEED CRETE GREEN LINE.
Cold Weather Installation: Application at temperatures below 40°F (4°C) extends the set time. Heating the
repair area until warm, using warm water for mixing and tenting or insulating the repair area after application will
assist in reaching faster strength development. Do not use direct heat on the repair after its installation.
Clean-Up
Clean application tools and mixing equipment with water immediately after use. Hardened SPEED CRETE
GREEN LINE is difficult to remove.
• Store covered storage away from all moisture.
• Mix no more than 60 seconds.
• Clean mixing equipment between batches.
• Do not featheredge.
Rev. 6.11
316
TAMMS FORM AND POUR
Flowable, Shrinkage Compensated Mortar with Corrosion Inhibitor
Horizontal Repair
Description
TAMMS FORM AND POUR is a flowable, single-component, polymer-modified, cementitious repair mortar
containing silica fume and a migratory corrosion inhibitor, capable of full depth repairs.
• U
se on grade, above and below grade
• H
orizontal surfaces and formed vertical and overhead surfaces
• R
epair material for parking facilities, industrial plants, walkways, bridges, tunnels, dams and balconies
• F
iller for voids and cavities
• Compatible with galvanic anodes
Features/Benefits
• 3 /4” to 3" (1.9 cm to 7.6 cm) depth repairs (neat) • H igh bond strength
• Can be extended with pea gravel for deeper • Pumpable
repairs • Easily mixed
• Silica fume enhanced Can contribute to LEED points
Material Properties at 75°F (24°C)
Typical results under laboratory conditions
Compressive Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM C 109 Shrinkage, % ASTM C 157
1 day....................................................3,000 (20.7) 3 days...........................................................-0.016
TAMMS FORM AND POUR

7 days..................................................6,500 (44.8) 7 days...........................................................-0.043
28 days................................................7,800 (53.8) 28 days.........................................................-0.084
Flexural Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM C 348 Freeze-Thaw Durability, ASTM C 666
7 days....................................................1,000 (6.9) 300 cycles.............100 relative dynamic modulus
28 days..................................................1,200 (8.3) Chloride Permeability ASTM C 1202
Splitting Tensile Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM C 496 Coulombs...................................................... 3,000
7 days.......................................................700 (4.8) Volumetric Resistivity
28 days.....................................................900 (6.2) 28 days............................................8,650 ohm/cm
Packaging
TAMMS FORM AND POUR is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) poly-lined bags
Shelf Life
Coverage
Master Format #:
One 50 lb bag yields approximately 0.42 ft³ (0.01 m³)

03 01 30.71
Directions for Use


317
brush coat of DURALPREP AC. Alternately, a Saturated Surface Dry (SSD) concrete surface can be primed with
a scrub coat of TAMMS FORM & POUR (horizontal only). The repair must be made before the scrub coat dries
out.
Mixing: TAMMS FORM AND POUR requires 2.75 to 3 qt (2.6 to 2.8 L) of mix water per 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag. Use
a drill with a “jiffy” type mixer to mix single bags. For larger applications use a paddle type mortar mixer or a
standard concrete mixer. Do not add additional water. Mix for 2 to 3 minutes until a smooth flowable consistency
is achieved. For application depths in excess of 3“ (7.6 cm) add 30 lb of 3/8" (0.95 cm) clean, saturated surface
dry (SSD) pea gravel.
Application: The unrestrained surface area of the repair should be kept to a minimum. TAMMS FORM AND
POUR should be mixed, placed and finished within 30 minutes. Pour the mixed material into the prepared area
to be repaired. Screed and trowel the material so as to level with the existing concrete. Finish the surface as
desired. Do not over-trowel or featheredge. Follow ACI guidelines for proper curing. On windy or hot days or
when under direct sunlight, wet curing is recommended.
Clean-Up
Clean application tools and mixer with water immediately after use. Hardened TAMMS FORM AND POUR will
be difficult to remove.
• Minimum depth of patching is 3/4" (1.9 cm).
• Do not add any additives to TAMMS FORM AND POUR.
• Condition material to room temperature at least 24 hours prior to use.
Rev. 6.11
318
TAMMS THIN PATCH
Polymer-Modified, Multi-use Repair Mortar
Horizontal Repair
Description
TAMMS THIN PATCH is a polymer-modified, cement based mortar formulated for repairing defects in concrete
and masonry surfaces from featheredge up to 1” (2.54 cm).
• Horizontal, vertical or overhead repairs • F ill small holes, honeycomb and spalled areas
• Interior and exterior use • Repoint mortar joints
Features/Benefits
• S ingle-component • O utstanding bond strength
• Trowelable repair mortar • High strength
• Long-term durability • User friendly
Set Times ASTM C 266 Flexural Strength psi (MPa) ASTM C 348
Initial set....................................approx. 30 to 50 min 7 day.............................................................630 (4.3)
Final set...........................................approx. 1 to 2 hr 28 day...........................................................725 (5.0)
Compressive Strength psi (MPa) ASTM C 109 Shrinkage % ASTM C 157
7 day........................................................3,000 (20.7) 7 day..............................................................-0.008%
28 day......................................................3,500 (24.1) 28 days..........................................................-0.050%
Split Tensile Strength psi (MPa) ASTM C 496 Scaling Resistance ASTM C 672
7 day.............................................................300 (2.1) 50 cycles........................................................0% loss
28 day...........................................................410 (2.8)
TAMMS THIN PATCH
Shelf Life
Packaging
TAMMS THIN PATCH is packaged in 25 lb (11.3 kg) plastic pails, and 50 lb (22.7 kg) poly lined bags
Coverage/Yield
A 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag of TAMMS THIN PATCH will yield approximately 0.4 ft³ (0.01 m³) of material.
Applied at the following thicknesses, one 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag of TAMMS THIN PATCH will cover:
1/4“ (6.3 mm) 19.2 ft² (1.78 m²)
1/2” (12.7 mm) 9.6 ft² (.891 m²)
1” (25.4 mm) 4.8 ft² (.445 m²)
Note: Coverage rates are approximate and are for estimating purposes only
Directions for Use

Master Format #:
03 01 30.71
achieve a surface profile of CSP 4 or greater in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2. Properly clean profiled
or brush coat of DURALPREP AC. The primer coat of DURALPREP AC must be allowed to thoroughly dry prior
to the application of the repair mortar. Alternately, a Saturated Surface Dry (SSD) concrete surface can be
primed with a scrub coat of TAMMS THIN PATCH. The repair must be made before the scrub coat dries out.

319
Mixing: One 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag of TAMMS THIN PATCH will require 3.25 to 3.5 qt (3.1 to 3.3 L) of potable water.
Mix TAMMS THIN PATCH in a clean container using a slow speed drill and mixing blade. Pour clean water into
the clean container and gradually add the TAMMS THIN PATCH. Mix thoroughly to disperse all ingredients and
to achieve a trowelable consistency. Do not use excess water, and do not retemper TAMMS THIN PATCH.
Application: Apply sufficient pressure to fill all holes and voids, then trowel to a smooth finish. On large areas,
use a screed to obtain a uniform level before troweling. Do not overtrowel. TAMMS THIN PATCH will achieve
initial set in approximately 40 minutes; final set in approximately 1 hour, and cures within 24 hours under normal
drying conditions. Maximum thickness of application is 1" (25 mm) per lift. When applying multiple lifts, allow
prior lift to reach final set, score the surface then place the subsequent lift.
Clean-Up
Clean all mixing and application equipment with water immediately following use. If material is allowed to dry
on a surface, removal becomes extremely difficult.
• Do not apply to frozen or frost filled surfaces, at temperatures below 40°F (4°C) or if temperature is expected
to fall below 40°F (4°C) within 24 hours.
• Application temperatures below 60°F (16°C) will extend set time.
• On windy or hot days or for application in direct sunlight, use wet burlap or plastic sheet for curing.
• Do not use TAMMS THIN PATCH in joints or cracks that are subject to movement.
• Do not apply TAMMS THIN PATCH in more than 1” (25 mm) deep lifts.
• Do not over-work or over-trowel the repair.
• Do not add more water than recommended.
• Protect from rain for 24 hours after placement.
Rev. 6.11
320
TAMMSPATCH II
Two-Component Repair Mortar and Underlayment
Horizontal Repair
Description
TAMMSPATCH II is a two-component, polymer-modified, cementitious repair mortar and flowable underlayment.
When the two components are combined, TAMMSPATCH II becomes a versatile mortar for numerous
applications, due to its ability to be mixed at different consistencies. From flowable to firm, TAMMSPATCH II
provides an aesthically pleasing surface in multiple applications.
• F lowable underlayment • H orizontal, vertical or overhead repairs
• Trowelable repair mortar • Pointing mortar joints
• Decorative overlays
Features/Benefits
• F eatheredge to 1” (2.5 cm) per lift neat, 2.5” • User friendly
(6.3 cm) if extended • USDA compliant
• Highly durable • Color controlled
• Outstanding bond strength Can contribute to LEED points.
• High strength
Material Properties at 75°F (24˚C)
Initial Set, hrs.....................................approx.1.5 to 3 Flexural strength, psi (MPa) ASTM C 348
Final Set, hrs........................................approx. 4 to 5 7 days...........................................................700 (4.8)
Compressive strength,psi (MPa) ASTM C 109 28 days.........................................................900 (6.2)
TAMMSPATCH II
3 days......................................................2,500 (17.2) Bond strength, psi (MPa)ASTM C 1042
7 days......................................................3,800 (26.2) 28 days.....................................................1450 (10.0)
28 days....................................................5,000 (34.5) Shrinkage, % ASTM C 157
Tensile strength, psi (MPa) 28 days.........................................................+0.0011
28 days.........................................................650 (4.5) Freeze thaw durability factor, ASTM C 666
Tensile Bond Strength CAN A23.2-6B 300 cycles.........................................................99.4%
28 days....................................Greater than concrete
Packaging/Yield
TAMMSPATCH II Part A (powder) is packaged in a 45 lb (20.4 kg) bag. Part B (liquid) is packaged in a 1 gal (3.7
L) jug. A mixed unit will yield approximately 0.42 ft³ (0.011m³).
Shelf Life
1 year in original, unopened packaging
Master Format #:
03 01 30.71
Canadian MTQ
Directions for Use

a surface profile of at least CSP 4 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2. Properly clean profiled area.

321
brush coat of DURALPREP AC. The primer coat of DURALPREP AC must be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to
with a scrub coat of TAMMSPATCH II. The repair must be made before the scrub coat dries out.
Mixing: In a clean container, add 3/4 of liquid (Part B). Using a 1/2” slow speed (400 to 600 rpm) drill and
a “Jiffy“mixer, gradually add the powder (Part A) to produce a mortar with a smooth consistency and without
lumps. Add remaining liquid to obtain desired consistency. Do not mix longer than 3 minutes. Do not add
water. If extending with an aggregate, the use of a mortar mixer is recommended. The aggregate should be
added after the powder is added to the liquid. To fill areas deeper than 1” (2.5 cm), TAMMSPATCH II should be
extended with up to 20 lb (9.1 kg) of clean, 3/8” (0.95 cm) pea gravel. When extended, TAMMSPATCH II can be
applied in lifts of up to 2.5” (6.3 cm). Use multiple lifts for deeper repairs.
Application: Expansion and control joints must be extended up through TAMMSPATCH II. Moving cracks will
“telegraph” a crack through TAMMSPATCH II if they are covered over. Apply TAMMSPATCH II with a trowel
using sufficient pressure to fill surface holes and voids and to ensure maximum bond to the substrate. A broom,
float or steel trowel finish may be applied to the surface. Avoid excessive troweling, as this will weaken the
surface. For repair depths greater than 1” (2.5 cm), extend with up to 20 lb (9.1 kg) of clean, dry pea gravel
per bag of TAMMSPATCH II. When using as a wearing surface, mix to a stiffer consistency (use less than full
container of mixing liquid) and install to a minimum thickness of 3/8” (0.95 cm). Do not featheredge when using
as a wearing surface.
Curing: For best results cure with wet burlap, plastic or a water-based curing compound. Take precautions
when placing during difficult conditions when the chance for rapid surface drying is evident such as: high winds,
high temperatures, or low humidity. Do not use solvent based curing compounds on this product.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with water before TAMMSPATCH II hardens. Hardened TAMMSPATCH II will require
mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Store in protected, dry storage at tempatures between 40°F to 90°F (4˚C to 32˚C).
• Do not apply TAMMSPATCH II below 40°F (4°C).
• Do not apply to a frost filled surface.
• Prior to coating TAMMSPATCH II with an epoxy or other non-breathable coating, verify that all moisture is out
of the product prior to application.
Rev. 6.11
322
Thin-top Supreme
Single-Component, Modified, Premium Overlay Mortar
Horizontal Repair
Description
Thin-Top Supreme is a latex and microsilica modified cementitious mortar designed for use as a floor or deck
topping at thicknesses of 1/16” to 3/8” (1.6 mm to 10 mm). This product is a single-component formula which
incorporates a powder latex technology. It provides excellent durability under freeze-thaw cycling as well as
reducing the ingress of water and de-icing salts, which lead to corrosion. THIN-TOP SUPREME offers normal
set times in a trowelable consistancy for easy workability.
• Parking decks • Joints • Curbs and gutters • Floors
• Pavements • Marine structures • Ramps • Walkways
Features/Benefits
• Provides a strong, wear resistant thin overlay • Reduces the penetration of water and de-icing salts
for substrate protection
• Excellent durability under freeze-thaw cycling
• Suitable for both interior and exterior use
• Contains an integral corrosion inhibitor
• Excellent bond to prepared concrete
Typical results under laboratory conditions
Compressive Strength ASTM C 109, 2” (50 mm) cubes Flexural Strength ASTM C 348
@ 2.9 qts (2.7 L)/50 lb (22.7 kg) bag. 7 days.........................................950 psi (6.6 MPa)
Age Strength 28 days....................................1,150 psi (7.9 MPa)
Thin-Top Supreme
1 day......................................2,800 psi (19.3 MPa)
7 days....................................5,000 psi (34.5 MPa) Split Tensile Strength ASTM C 496
28 days..................................6,700 psi (46.2 MPa) 7 days.........................................500 psi (3.5 MPa)
56 days..................................7,900 psi (54.5 MPa) 28 days.......................................550 psi (3.8 MPa)
Linear Shrinkage ASTM C 157 50% RH @ 73˚F (23˚C) Freeze/Thaw Resistance ASTM C 666 Procedure A
3 days..........................................................-0.02% 300 cycles.......... 100% relative dynamic modulus
7 days..........................................................-0.05% Working Time..............................30 to 40 minutes
14 days........................................................-0.08%
28 days........................................................-0.10% Initial Set..........................................1 to 1.5 hours
56 days........................................................-0.11% Final Set....................................... approx. 3 hours
Unit Weight.............approx. 127 lb/ft³ (2036 kg/m³)
Appearance: THIN-TOP SUPREME is a free-flowing powder as packaged. After mixing and placing, the color
may initially appear darker than the surrounding concrete. The color will lighten up substantially as it cures and
dries out, though it may always appear somewhat darker than the surrounding concrete.
Packaging/yield
Master Format #:
THIN-TOP SUPREME is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) moisture resistant bags. Yield: 0.43 ft3/bag (0.012 m³) when
03 01 30.61
mixed with 3 qt (2.8 L) of water. Typical water requirement is 2.75 to 3.5 qt (2.6 to 3.3 L)/bag.
Shelf Life
Canadian Food Inspection Agency, MTQ and MTO

323
Directions for Use
with a scrub coat of THIN TOP SUPREME. The repair must be made before the scrub coat dries out.
All material should be in the proper temperature range of 60˚F (15˚C) to 90˚F (32˚C). Add the appropriate
amount of water 2.75 to 3.5 qt (2.6 to 3.3 L) per bag for the batch size and then add the dry product. Mix for 3
to 5 minutes.
Placement: Discharge material from mixer immediately and place on to the repair area. For repairs, spread with
a trowel, come-a-long, or square tipped shovel to a thickness that matches the surrounding concrete. Work
material into place by floating or troweling. On large areas, use screed strips with a vibratory screeding to level.
Finishing: This product is designed for finishing with a float or broom appearance. Do not add additional water
to the surface during the finishing operation; use EUCOBAR evaporation retarder. For a hard, flat troweled
surface, delay finishing until the product is near final set (approx. 3 hours) to reduce the risk of blistering during
troweling.
To prevent surface cracking, cure the material with a high solids curing compound, such as SUPER AQUA-
CURE VOX or SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR VOX. Note: Do not use a solvent based curing compound on this
product. If a curing compound is not desired, cover with polyethylene for a minimum of 3 days. Do not wet
cure. Always re-estabish floor and slab joints when using this product as an overlay.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with water before the material hardens. Hardened THIN-TOP SUPREME will require
removal by mechanical means.
• Do not wet cure.
• Do not allow repairs to freeze until the material has reached a minimum of 1,000 psi (7 MPa) compressive
strength.
• Do not add admixtures or sand.
• Do not use material at temperatures below 45°F (7°C) or above 100˚F (38˚C).
• Mixing partial bags may yield variable results; always mix full units.
• For repairs and toppings thicker than 3/8” (9.5 mm), use CONCRETE-TOP SUPREME.
Rev. 6.11
324
ULTRA-TEX
Decorative Concrete Overlay System
Horizontal Repair
Description
ULTRA-TEX is a thin, cementitious, decorative wear surface that utilizes liquid pigments and a template system
to create the look of real stone, slate or tile. The appearance of ULTRA-TEX is only limited by the imagination.
ULTRA-TEX is a overlay system designed to protect, beautify and enhance concrete balconies, decks, walkways
and any interior or exterior concrete surface. This multi-component system for new or existing concrete and
masonry surfaces is designed to protect while offering a variety of patterns and colors simulating natural stone
and masonry effects.
• Balconies • Foyers • Showrooms • Vertical applications
• Pool decks • Walkways • Driveways
Features/Benefits
• Polymer-modified • Freeze-thaw resistant • Rejuvenates old concrete
• Attractive • Self-curing • Versatile
Appearance: ULTRA-TEX is a multi-component
Typical Engineering Data The following results were system consisting of a powder, a liquid and a color
developed under laboratory conditions. pack. After mixing and placing, the color and texture
Pot Life @ 70°F (21°C)......................20 to 30 min will vary depending on application methods and
Adhesion to Concrete techniques. ULTRA-TEX color packs are available in
ASTM D 4541, 14 days..................193 psi (1.3 MPa) twelve standard colors.
Abrasion Resistance (% Weight Loss): • 901 Executive gray • 910 Mud Pie
ASTM D 4060, CS-10 wheel @3000 cycles....... 0.57
• 902 Arizona Tan • 913 Revere
@6000 cycles....... 0.94
• 903 White • 914 Stamford
Drying / Working Time @70°F (21°C)
Working Time over concrete..............10 to 20 min • 904 Terra Cotta • 915 Hickory
Ultra-Tex
Drying Time........................................20 to 30 min • 907 Dark Gray • 916 Cedar
Open to Foot Traffic...............................24 hours • 908 Sandstone • 917 Brandy
Note: View colors on the ULTRA-TEX BI-FOLD BROCHURE
Packaging/Yield
UT91-1 Powder........................ 46 lb (20.9 kg) bag Tint Packs ............................................... case of 6
UT91-1 Liquid.............................5 gal (18.9 L) pail Note: Template packaging varies depending on pattern.
UT Retarder ........... case w/ 6 one gal (3.8 L) jugs Templates sold by the case only.
Shelf Life
Coverage*
UT 91-1 Powder.... 125-175 ft² (11.6-16.3 m²)/bag Templates.....................................See chart below
UT 91-1 Liquid............ 1-1.25 gal (3.8-4.7 L)/batch Note: Sealers vary depending on type used
Tint Packs............................................ 1 per batch *Coverage may vary depending on texture
Template Styles w/Packaging
Master Format #:
03 01 30.61
Template Name Size sq. ft. linear ft. Template Name Size sq. ft.
American Flagstone 36”x 60” 405 - Norman Cobbles 36”x 60” 404
Baltimore Brick 36”x 59½” 404 - Palos Verdes Stone 36”x 60” 405
Basket Weave 34”x 59½” 407 - Satillo 36”x 59” 404
Brick Ribbon 9”x 60” - 540 Serpentine 22½”x 48” 405
Fanfare 22½”x 48” 405 - Soldier Course Brick 10½”x 57” 404
Herringbone 31”x 59” 407 - Used Wall Brick 21”x 58” 406
Hexagon 32”x 55” 406 - Utility Brick 20”x 60” 406
King’s Slate 36”x 60” 403 - Note: View templates on the Ultra-Tex Bi-Fold Brochure.

325
Directions for Use
For complete installation guidelines, please refer to ULTRA-TEX Professional Use Application Instructions
available from The Euclid Chemical Company or available for download from www.euclidchemical.com.
area. Priming: Concrete should be primed with a spray or brush coat of a mixture of 4 parts water to 1 part
UT91-1 liquid to achieve a Saturated Surface Dry (SSD) concrete surface. The material must be placed before
the primer coat dries out.
Mixing: All materials should be in the proper temperature range of 60°F (16°C) to 90°F (32°C). Mix using a
drill and paddle mixer (a jiffy mixer is also acceptable). Measure out desired amount of liquid, 4-5 quarts (3.8-
4.7 L)per bag. Pour 3/4 of the liquid into an empty 5 gal (18.9 L) pail. Add the desired color pack and begin
gradually mixing in the UT91-1 Powder. For additional working time, especially in hot weather applications,
add 3 oz (88.7 mL) of Ultra-Tex Retarder to the liquid mix for each bag of powder. Once the material is
thoroughly mixed (3 minutes), add the remaining liquid and let stand. Allow material to take a false set (thicken
up). Depending on the mix and environment, this can be from 1 to 10 minutes. Remix material for another 2
minutes, and then apply.
If multiple bags of the same color will be used, mix 4-5 color packs into the pail of UT-91 liquid prior to measuring
out per bag. This will give more consistent results (similar to boxing paint).
Note: In cooler climates all of the remaining liquid may not be necessary. Adjust amount suitable for your
application, depending on the temperature. Do not exceed 5 quarts (4.7 L) per bag. Important: Material can
be retempered only one time.
Placement: This product may be applied by squeegee, trowel or hopper gun (for vertical applications).
Curing: ULTRA-TEX is a self-curing product. ULTRA-TEX may be sealed with a variety of sealer options
depending on the desired look or protection needed. Refer to the sealer selection guide found in the Ultra-Tex
bi-fold brochure.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with water IMMEDIATELY after use. Cured material can only be removed
mechanically.
• Do not apply at ambiant and surface temperatures below 50°F (10°C) or above 120°F (48°C).
• Do not add water to this product.
• Protect from rain until completely dry.
• Mix only in the specified proportions.
• Follow ACI hot weather procedures if needed.
• Product dries very quickly. Clean tools with water immediately after use.
• Store all ULTRA-TEX components in a dry area.
• Keep liquid and color packs from freezing. If frozen, ULTRA-TEX liquid & color components may not be used.
• Important! This product is to be installed by professional contractors only.
Rev. 6.11
326
VersaSpeed
Rapid-Setting Repair Mortar
Horizontal Repair
Description
VersaSpeed is a versatile, single-component, rapid-setting repair mortar for horizontal, and form and pour
repair projects. Requiring only the addition of water, VersaSpeed is a low shrinkage, high early strength
material that is easy to use with an accelerated set time for fast project turn-around. Repaired areas may be
open to standard tire traffic after 2 hours following the final set and an epoxy coating can be applied after 4
hours. VersaSpeed is similar in appearance to concrete and is suitable for use in repairing concrete surfaces
from approximately 1/4” to 6” (6 mm to 15.2 cm) in thickness.
• Multi-unit residential • Bridges • Loading docks • Highways
• Warehouses • Pavements • Roads • Parking decks and ramps
• Industrial / commercial / institutional floors • Form and pour applications
Features/Benefits
• Fast set time and quick turnover of projects • Low permeability “Very Low” coulomb rating
• Suitable for interior or exterior applications allowing excellent freeze-thaw damage resistance
• Rapid strength gain • Wide temperature range of applications 20° to 85°F
• Economical repairs (-7° to 29°C)
• Open to standard rubber-tire traffic after 2 hours • Excellent bond to properly prepared sound concrete
at 70°F (21° C) • Can be extended up to 50% by weight
• Coat with epoxy after 4 hours at 70°F (21° C) Can contribute to LEED points
VersaSpeed
Compressive Strength ASTM C 109, 2” (50 mm) cubes Linear Shrinkage ASTM C 157
@ 0.44 gal/50 lb bag. 50% R. H. @ 730F (230C)
Age Strength 1 day..........................................................-0.064%
3 hours..................................3,500 psi (24.1 MPa) 7 days........................................................-0.077%
1 day......................................5,500 psi (37.9 MPa) 14 days......................................................-0.078%
7 days....................................8,500 psi (58.6 MPa) 28 days......................................................-0.083%
28 days................................10,000 psi (68.9 MPa) Chloride Permeability ASTM C 1202
Flexural Strength ASTM C 348 28 days........................... 900 coulombs (very low)
1 day...........................................900 psi (6.2 MPa) Set Time ASTM C 403 @ 72°F (22°C)
7 days......................................1,000 psi (6.9 MPa) Initial Set.......................................... 15 to 30 min
28 days....................................1,100 psi (7.6 MPa) Final Set........................................... 20 to 40 min
Freeze/Thaw Resistance ASTM C 666 Procedure A Volumetric Resistivity
300 Cycles............ 90% relative dynamic modulus 28 days..........................................41,610 ohm/cm
Unit Weight.............approx.144 lb/ft³ (2245 kg/m³) Final............................................137,100 ohm/cm
Note: All data was collected in the laboratory under controlled conditions (70°F & 50% humidity). Expect
reasonable variations depending on mixing equipment, temperature and curing conditions.
Master Format #:
Packaging/yield
03 01 30.71
VERSASPEED is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) bags. Yield: 0.37ft³ (0.01m³) per bag when mixed with 0.42 gal (1.6
L) of water. VersaSpeed may be extended with up to 25 lb (11.4 kg) of clean, SSD, 3/8” (9.5 mm) pea gravel.
Approximate Extended Yield: 0.52 ft³ (0.0147 m³) per bag.
Shelf Life

327
Canadian MTQ and MTO
Coverage
One unit of VersaSpeeD will cover approximately 4.4 ft² (0.41 m²) when placed at an average depth of
1” (25 mm).
Directions for Use

or brush coat of DURALPREP AC. The primer coat of DURALPREP AC must be allowed to thoroughly dry before
with a scrub coat of VERSASPEED. The repair must be made before the scrub coat dries out.
All materials should be in the proper temperature range of 60˚F (15˚C) to 85˚F (29˚C). Add the appropriate
amount of water for the batch size and then add the VersaSpeed. The amount of water to be mixed with the
VersaSpeed is critical. Initially add 0.42 gal [54 oz] (1.6 L [1,597 mL]) of water per 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag
and mix for 2 minutes. If after the initial 2 minutes of mixing, the desired flow is not obtained, no more
than 6 oz (177mL) of additional water should be added to the mix in order to achieve more flow. Mix an
additional 2 minutes after adding extra water. Use neat material for repairs less than 1” (25 mm) in depth. For
deeper repairs, VersaSpeed may be extended with up to 25 lb (11.4 kg) of clean, SSD pea gravel.
Placement: Important-The application temperature range of VersaSpeed is from 20˚ to 85˚F (-7 to 29˚C).
For temperatures above 85˚F (29˚C) use VersaSpeed LS. Allow approximately 15 minutes to mix, place, and
finish VersaSpeed repair mortar at 72°F (22°C). To make repairs; spread with a float, come-a-long, or square
tipped shovel to a thickness that is level with the surrounding concrete and then float to the desired contour is
attained. Do not use VersaSpeed for repairs less than 1/4”(6 mm) deep.
Finishing: Finish the repair material to the desired texture. For an epoxy coating, a broom finish is likely required.
Do not add water to the surface during the finishing operation. When steel trowel finishing, it is suggested to
allow the repaired area to stand undisturbed until it has reached initial set, approximately 15 to 30 minutes, and
then finish with steel trowels. If a finishing aid is needed, EUCOBAR evaporation retarder is recommended.
Curing & Sealing: If an epoxy coating will not be applied, wet cure the surface with water and polyethylene
sheets at least one day, or use a curing compound. If applying an epoxy coating, it is important to wet cure with
wet burlap for at least 2 hours and then allow to air dry 1 hour before coating. VersaSpeed can be coated
with epoxy systems after 4 hours at 70°F (21° C).
Clean-Up
• The application temperture range of VersaSpeed is 20o to 85oF (-7o to 29oC).
• Do not use VersaSpeed for repairs less than 1/4” (6 mm) deep.
• Extending VERSAPEED with 3/8” (9.5 mm) pea gravel may alter certain engineering properties by 15% to 20%.
• Do not add water to the surface during the finishing operation. If needed, use Eucobar.
• If an epoxy coating will be applied, the repair should be broom finished.
Rev. 6.11
328
VersaSpeed LS
Slower Setting, Rapid Repair Mortar
Description
Horizontal Repair
VersaSpeed LS is a versatile, single-component, rapid strength gaining repair mortar for horizontal, and form
and pour repair projects. Requiring only the addition of water, VersaSpeed LS is a low-shrinkage, high early
strength material that is easy to use for fast turn-around projects. Repaired areas may be open to standard
tire traffic after 5 hours following the final set. VersaSpeed LS is similar in appearance to concrete and is
suitable for use in repairing concrete surfaces from approximately 1/4” to 6” (6 mm to 15 cm) in thickness.
VERSASPEED LS is a slower setting version of our popular VERSASPEED material.
• Multi-unit residential • Bridges • Loading docks • Highways
• Warehouses • Pavements • Roads • Parking decks and ramps
• Industrial / Commercial / Institutional Floors • Form and pour applications
Features/Benefits
• Fast setting time • Low permeability; “Very Low” coulomb rating allowing
• Quick turnover of projects excellent freeze-thaw damage resistance
• High early strength • Wide temperature and environment range of applications
• Economical repairs • Excellent bond to properly prepared sound concrete
• Open to rubber tire traffic after 5 hours at 70°F (21°C) • Suitable for interior or exterior applications
• Can be coated with epoxy after 5 hours at 70°F (21°C) • Can be extended up to 50% by weight
VersaSpeed LS
Compressive Strength ASTM C 109, 2” (50 mm) cubes Linear Shrinkage ASTM C 157
@ 0.46 gal/50 lb bag. 50% R. H. @ 73°F (23°C)
Age Strength 1 day.........................................................-.0.064%
5 hours..................................3,500 psi (24.2 MPa) 7 days........................................................-0.077%
1 day......................................5,500 psi (37.9 MPa) 14 days......................................................-0.078%
7 days....................................8,500 psi (58.6 MPa) 28 days......................................................-0.083%
28 days................................10,000 psi (68.9 MPa) Chloride Permeability ASTM C 1202
Flexural Strength ASTM C 348 28 days........................... 900 coulombs (very low)
1 day...........................................700 psi (6.2 MPa) Set Time ASTM C 266 @ 72°F (22°C)
7 days......................................1,000 psi (6.9 MPa) Initial Set.......................................... 60 to 90 min
28 days....................................1,250 psi (8.6 MPa) Final Set........................................100 to 150 min
Freeze/Thaw Resistance ASTM C-666 Procedure A Unit Weight............. approx.144 lb/ft³ (2245 kg/m³)
300 Cycles............ 80% relative dynamic modulus
Note: All data was collected in a laboratory under controlled conditions (70°F & 50% humidity). Expect
reasonable variations depending on mixing equipment, temperature and curing conditions.
Packaging/yield
Master Format #:
VersaSpeed LS is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) bags. Yield: 0.37ft³ (0.01m³) per bag when mixed with 0.42 gal
03 01 30.71
(1.6 L) of water. VersaSpeed LS may be extended up to 25 lb (11.4 kg) with clean, SSD, 3/8” (9.5 mm) pea
gravel. Approximate Extended Yield: 0.52 ft³ (0.147m³) per bag.
Shelf Life

329
Coverage
One unit of VersaSpeed LS will cover approximately 4.4 ft² (0.41 m²) when placed at an average depth of
1” (25 mm)
Directions for Use

area. Priming: Clean and prime exposed steel with DURALPREP AC. Concrete should be primed with a spray or
with a scrub coat of VERSASPEED LS. The repair must be made before the scrub coat dries out.
All materials should be in the proper temperature range of 60°F (15°C) to 95°F (35°C). Add the appropriate
amount of water for the batch size and then add the VersaSpeed LS. The amount of water to be mixed with
the VersaSpeed LS is critical. Initially add 0.42 gal [54 oz] (1.6 L [1597 mL]) of water per 50 lb (22.7
kg) bag and mix for 2 minutes. If after the initial 2 minutes of mixing the desired flow is not obtained, no
more than 6 oz (177 mL) of additional water should be added to the mix in order to achieve more flow. Mix
an additional 2 minutes after adding extra water. Use neat material for repairs less than 1” (25 mm) in depth.
For deeper repairs, VersaSpeed LS may be extended with up to 25 lb (11.4 kg) of pea gravel. This may alter
certain engineering properties.
Placement: Important- The application temperature range of VersaSpeed LS is from 50° to 95°F (10° to
35°C). Allow approximately 30 minutes to mix, place, and finish VersaSpeed LS repair mortar at 72°F (22°C).
For making repairs; spread with a float, come-a-long, or square tipped shovel to a thickness that is level with
the surrounding concrete, then float to the desired contour. Do not use VersaSpeed LS for repairs less than
1/4”(6 mm) deep.
Finishing: Finish the repair material to the desired texture. For an epoxy coating, a broom finish may be
required. Do not add additional water to the surface during the finishing operation. When steel trowel finishing,
it is suggested to allow the repaired area to stand undisturbed until it has reached initial set, approximately 15
to 30 minutes, then steel trowel as desired. If an evaporation retarder is needed, EUCOBAR is recommended.
Curing/Sealing: When an epoxy coating will not be applied, wet cure the surface with water and polyethylene
sheets at least one day, or use a curing compound. If applying an epoxy coating, it is important to cure with
wet burlap for at least 3 hours and then allow to air dry at least 1 hour before coating. VersaSpeed LS can
be coated with epoxy systems after 5 hours at 70°F (21° C). Cooler temperatures will increase the time before
a coating can be applied.
Clean-Up
• The application temperture range of VersaSpeed LS is 50° to 95°F (10° to 35°C).
• Do not use VersaSpeed LS for repairs less than 1/4” (6 mm) deep.
• Extending VERSAPEED LS with 3/8” (9.5 mm) pea gravel may alter certain engineering properties by 15% to
20%.
• Do not add additional water to the surface during the finishing operation. If needed, use Eucobar as an
evaporation retarder.
Rev. 6.11
330
DURALFLEX FASTPATCH
Low-Modulus Epoxy Repair Kit
Horizontal Repair
Description
DURALFLEX FASTPATCH is a three-component, 100% solids, low-modulus, moisture insensitive, epoxy repair
kit designed to provide a high strength, wear resistant surface to worn and damaged high-use floors.
Repair of interior or exterior, horizontal concrete surfaces such as:
• Warehouse floors • Food storage areas
• Loading docks • Bridge decks and nosings
• Mechanical rooms • Runways
• Parking decks and ramps
Features/Benefits
• N o measuring of components • R esistant to thermal and mechanical movements
• Pre-measured resin, hardener and specially • Rapid cure, minimizes down-times
blended “non-dusting” aggregate • May be applied as low as 40°F (4°C)
• Low modulus resin binder used for stress relief
and resistance to impact
Material Properties @ 75°F (24°C) Adhesion to Concrete
Pot Life, kit, minutes.................................20 to 30 ACI Method 503R-30..........................concrete failure
Initial Cure, 1/2” (13mm) thick, hrs..............3 to 4 Data presented are typical laboratory values.
DURALFLEX FASTPATCH
Tensile Strength, ASTM D 638 psi (MPa) Compressive Strength, psi (MPa), ASTM C 109
.............................................................2,700 (18.6) (modified)
Tensile Elongation, %....................................... 45
Tensile Strength, ASTM C 307 psi (MPa) Duration 75°F 40°F
...............................................................1,250 (8.6) 18 hours 7,000 (48.7) 4,000 (27.6)
Flexural Strength, ASTM C 580 psi (MPa) 3 days 9,400 (64.8) 6,800 (46.9)
.............................................................3,600 (24.8) 7 days 9,800 (67.6) 8,000 (55.1)
Hardness, Shore D, min. ASTM D 2240.............. 85
Water Absorption, ASTM D 570 24 hrs %....... <0.5 Appearance: DURALFLEX FASTPATCH resembles
Thermal Compatibility ASTM C 884............passes light brown sugar when applied on a concrete floor.
Effective Shrinkage ASTM C 883................passes DURALFLEX FASTPATCH is also available in light
gray.
Packaging
DURALFLEX FASTPATCH is packaged in 0.4 ft³ (.011 m³) kit consisting of premeasured components of Part A
(Base), Part B (Hardener) and Part C (Aggregate) all contained in a 5 gal (18.7 L) bucket.
Shelf Life
Master Format #:

03 01 30.71
ASTM C 881 Type III, Grade 1, Class A & B
Coverage/Yield
One kit yields 0.4 ft³ (.011 m³). Applied at 1/4” (6.3 mm) thickness, one kit will cover approximately 18 to 20 ft²
(1.6 to 1.8 m²)

331
Directions for Use
achieve a surface profile equal to CSP 3 - 5 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2. Any exposed steel must
be cleaned to a “white” metal finish.
Mixing: Remove the contents from the DURALFLEX FASTPATCH KIT. Premix can containing Part A (base) and
Part B (hardener) separately. Pour the entire contents of Part A and Part B into the supplied pail. Mix thoroughly
using a slow speed ½” drill and a “Jiffy” mixer. Mix for 3 minutes. Make sure to scrape the bottom and sides
of mixing container while mixing. Do not whip air into the product while mixing. Gradually add the supplied
aggregate to premixed epoxy and blend thoroughly. BE SURE TO MIX THE EPOXY THOROUGHLY BEFORE
ADDING THE AGGREGATE.
Application: For best results, condition the DURALFLEX FASTPATCH to 75°F (24°C) for at least 24 hours prior
to application. Apply epoxy repair kit immediately after mixing with a trowel or screed. Material should be
scrubbed into a dry surface for best adhesion. Trowel the material against the edge and gradually work toward
the center of the repair area. Immediately after the mortar has been placed, aggregate can be broadcast into
the wet resin to provide a more textured finish. Minimum application thickness of DURALFLEX FASTPATCH is
1/4” (6 mm); the maximum thickness is 3” (7.62 cm).
Clean-Up
or drips while still wet with same solvent. Dried DURALFLEX FASTPATCH will require mechanical abrasion for
removal.
• Store at tempatures between 40°F to 90°F (4 to 32°C).
• Do not apply at application temperatures below 40°F (4°C).
• The materials should be conditioned at 75°F( 24°C) when used for low temperature applications.
• This material should not be exposed to water during initial cure.
• If the repaired area is to be exposed to severe chemical abuse, it should be top coated with a chemical
resistant coating from Euclid Chemical.
Rev. 6.11
332
EUCO #456S MORTAR
Iron Aggregate Epoxy Mortar System
Horizontal Repair
Description
euco #456S Mortar is an epoxy repair material for use where exceptional strength and durability are needed.
It consists of a two-component epoxy resin system and a specially graded iron aggregate. EUCO #456S
MORTAR has excellent adhesion and provides maximum abrasion and impact resistance on floors with extra
heavy duty traffic.
• Floor joint repairs and overlays • High impact areas in steel mills and other plants
• New installations to armor floor surfaces and joints • Repairing metallic shake floors
• Floor areas subject to cutting from steel flanges • Areas needing superior abrasion resistance
Features/Benefits
• The most durable topping available for high impact • Excellent bonding to concrete
and abrasive conditions • Extremely high early strengths
• Fast and economical repair system • Solvent free and VOC compliant - 100% solids
Typical Engineering Data The following results were
developed under laboratory conditions. Compressive Strength ASTM C 109 2” (50 mm) cubes
Temperature Working Time 1 day.......................................12,000 psi (83 MPa)
90oF (32oC)...........................................30 min 3 days.....................................12,500 psi (86 MPa)
75oF (24oC)...........................................75 min 7 days.....................................13,000 psi (90 MPa)
60oF (16oC)...........................................90 min 14 days...................................13,500 psi (93 MPa)
Euco # 456S Mortar

Maximum Continuous Service Temperature Bond Strength ASTM C 882 2,200 psi.....(15 MPa)
........................................................... 170oF (77oC) Abrasion Resistance ASTM C 779 Procedure A
Appearance: EUCO #456S MORTAR will appear as Euco 456S Plain Concrete
a charcoal gray metallic gray surface when applied 30 minutes: 0.008” (.20 mm) 0.048” (1.22 mm)
over a concrete floor. It is not intended to be used as 60 minutes: 0.013” (.33 mm) 0.102” (2.59 mm)
a decorative overlay.
Packaging/Yield
EUCO #456S MORTAR is available in a .35 ft³ (.01 m³) kit. Part A (resin): 0.97 gal (3.7 L), Part B (hardener): 0.25
gal (0.95 L), Part C (aggregate): 53 lb (24 kg)
Shelf Life
ASTM C 881, Type II & IV, Grade 1 Class B & C
Coverage
Thickness Coverage
Master Format #:
1/4” (6 mm) 16.8 ft² (1.6 m²)

03 01 30.71
1/2” (13 mm) 8.4 ft² (0.8 m²)

Directions for Use
Priming: Concrete must be primed with a coat of EUCO #456 PRIMER/SEALER.

333
Joints and Edges: Edges should be sawcut to 1/4” (6 mm) more than the overlay thickness and notched at
the edge of the overlay to provide a locked edge. Moving joints as in the case of expansion joints should be
brought up through the overlay by sawcutting or with the use of a divider strip. All cracks over 1/16” (2 mm)
wide should be routed out to a 1/4” (6 mm) width and 1/4” (6 mm) depth prior to application of the mortar.
Mixing: All materials should be in the proper temperature range of 60oF to 90oF (16oC to 32oC). Separately mix
Part A and part B individually before mixing together. Mix parts A and B (resin & hardener) for 2 minutes using a
drill and mixing prop. For ease of mixing, add the Part B to the Part A (not the reverse). Slowly add Part C (iron
aggregate). Mix for an additional 2 minutes or until all aggregate pieces are completely covered by the epoxy.
For large placements, mix the epoxy separately in a 5 gallon pail then mix the epoxy and aggregate together in
a mortar mixer. Place immediately.
Placement: For large overlays, use of vibratory screed is strongly recommended to maximize product density
and ultimate performance. Finish by machine trowel. For patching, spread with a trowel, come-a-long, or
square-tipped shovel to a thickness of about 1/8” (3 mm) higher than the final desired height of the overlay.
Compact and finish by hand or machine trowel.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with solvent such as acetone, toluene or MEK. Do not allow the epoxy to harden
on tools or equipment. Hardened EUCO #456S MORTAR will require mechanical removal.
• Interior use only.
• EUCO #456S MORTAR is not a decorative product and should not be used where aesthetics are an issue.
• Not recommended where floor temperature will exceed 170oF (77oC) on a continual basis.
• Keep at room temperature 60oF to 70oF (16oC to 21oC) 24 hours prior to use for ease of product placement.
• Not suitable for use where the topping will be exposed to acids.
Rev. 6.11
334
FLO-TOP
Pumpable, Single-Component, Self-Leveling Underlayment
Horizontal Repair
Description
Flo-Top is a free-flowing, self-leveling, compound specially designed for easy application over concrete and
wooden floors as an underlayment for the subsequent placement of floor coverings. It may be applied at
thicknesses from featheredge to 1" (25 mm). FLO-TOP is a one part system requiring only the addition of water
for mixing.
• Interior, sound, concrete sub-flooring
• Unlevel floors
• Repair of old, worn concrete that will receive a decorative topping
• Wood floors
• Floors with cut back adhesive
Features/Benefits
• Flowable consistency for self-leveling application • Minimal shrinkage for outstanding resistance to
• Pumpable through standard equipment cracking
• Self-leveling for smooth, flat floors • High early strength for early turnaround
• Exceptional coverage rate for maximum yield • Excellent bond strength for a composite floor
and value section
Compressive Strength ASTM C 109 2" (50 mm) cubes Bond Strength ASTM C 1042
FLO-TOP
Age Strength Age Strength
2 hours.....................................1,500 psi (10 MPa) 7 days............................................700 psi (5 MPa)
24 hours...................................2,300 psi (16 MPa) 14 days.......................................1,000 psi (7 MPa)
3 days.......................................2,800 psi (19 MPa)
Unit Weight...................... 115 lb/ft3 (1842 kg/m3)
7 days.......................................3,600 psi (25 MPa)
28 days.....................................5,000 psi (34 MPa) Set Time ASTM C 191 @ 70oF (21oC)
Appearance: FLO-TOP provides a light gray floor Initial ............................................approx. 45 mins
surface when cured. Final..............................................approx. 70 mins
Packaging/yield
FLO-TOP is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) bags that yield approximately 0.51 ft3 (0.014 m3) of material when mixed
with 7 quarts (6.6 L) of potable water
Shelf Life
Master Format #:

03 54 13
Coverage
Coverage is approximately 25 ft2 (2.3 m2) at a 1/4" (6 mm) thickness

335
Directions for Use
and free of dust, dirt, paint, efflorescence, oil and all other contaminants. Mechanically abrade the surface.
Preparation should be done by mechanical means to achieve a surface profile equal to CSP 3 - 5 in accordance
with ICRI Guideline 310.2. Properly clean profiled area. IMPORTANT: For wood floors, secure metal lathe over
the floor that has been fully braced and secured so that it is stable, without flexibility. Priming: Concrete and
wooden floors must to primed with a spray or brush coat of TAMMSWELD prior to application of FLO-TOP. Allow
the TAMMSWELD to fully dry before applying the FLO-TOP material.
Mixing: All materials should be in the proper temperature range of 60°F (16°C) to 90°F (32°C). Single bags
of FLO-TOP may be bucket mixed with a drill and “jiffy” mixer. Larger projects are best placed with standard
grouting or underlayment equipment. Add the appropriate amount of water for the batch size and then add the
dry product. Do not over water, for that will cause bleeding or segregation. Add 6.5 to 7 qts (6.15 to 6.6 L) of
water per 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag. Mix a minimum of 3 minutes. If mixed in a pail, the product should be quickly
Application: For applications over 1" (25.4 mm) in thickness, add 20 to 25 lb (9.1 to 11.3 kg) of 3/8" (9.5 mm)
pea gravel to extend the initial layer. Placement options include screeding or the use of pre-placed aggregate
grouting techniques. After 24 hours, prime the surface of the initial layer and place additional underlayment to
achieve the final smooth surface.
Placement: The product must be placed continuously to provide a smooth and uniform surface. Start in one
corner placing a continuous stream of material along one edge of the area and back lap as soon as possible for
a uniform, smooth surface. Tools such as spiked rollers, notched squeegees, trowels and smoothers may be
used to assist placement.
Finishing: This product is self-leveling and requires no finishing or troweling operation.
Curing: (See Precautions/Limitations) FLO-TOP does not require curing with standard methods for most
applications. Under hot, rapid-drying conditions or if there is much air movement, the use of EUCOBAR,
evaporation retardant, is recommended after placement.
Clean-Up
• Designed for interior use.
• FLO-TOP is not a vapor barrier and will allow free passage of vapor.
• Do not use for exterior applications or in areas continuously subjected to moisture or water.
• Do not use FLO-TOP as a wearing surface.
• Do not add admixtures or calcium chloride.
• Do not use at ambient temperatures that will fall below 40°F (4°C) within 72 hours.
• Do not allow to freeze for 7 days after placement.
• FLO-TOP must be well cured before application of floor coverings.
• Contact and rely upon floor covering manufacturer for specific requirements regarding maximum moisture
content, adhesive selection and intended end use of the product prior to application of floor coverings.
• If placing Flo-Top over a wood floor, it is very important to secure the floor soldily to prevent all movement.
Rev. 6.11
336
LEVEL MAGIC LIGHT WEIGHT
Pumpable Self-Leveling Underlayment
Horizontal Repair
Description
LEVEL MAGIC LIGHT WEIGHT is a cement based, self-leveling, high strength underlayment designed for
leveling floors without adding the weight of traditional cementitious leveling products. LEVEL MAGIC
LIGHT WEIGHT can be featheredged and has properties similar to that of concrete, but at a much lower
load weight. LEVEL MAGIC LIGHT WEIGHT eliminates the need for trowelling. It requires the addition
of only potable water to achieve a fluid consistency and produces a smooth, level and hard surface after
curing. LEVEL MAGIC LIGHT WEIGHT can be applied in multiple lifts with each lift being no greater than
1” (2.5 cm).
• Repair, fill, or level surfaces in new • Underlayment for structures not designed for
construction or restoration much additional load prior to installation of
floor coverings
Features/Benefits
• Can receive floor coverings within 24 hours of • Compatible with commonly used flooring
installation adhesives
LEVEL MAGIC LIGHT WEIGHT

Physical Property Test Method Result
Self-Healing Time ASTM C 191 10 to 15 minutes
Final Set Time ASTM C 191 approx. 1 to 3 hours
7 days: 3,200 psi (22 MPa)
Compressive Strength ASTM C 109
28 days: 4,000 psi (27 MPa)
Unit Weight - 80 lb/ft3 (1280 kg/m3)
Flame Spread: 0
Flammability ASTM E 84 Fuel Contribution: 0
Smoke Development: 0
Packaging
LEVEL MAGIC LIGHT WEIGHT is packaged in 25 lb (11.3 kg) polylined bags
Shelf Life
Master Format #:

03 5416
Coverage/Yield
One 25 lb (11.3 kg) bag of LEVEL MAGIC LIGHT WEIGHT will yield approximately 0.42 ft³ (0.012 m³) of
mixed material. TAMMSWELD will cover approximately 250 to 300 ft²/gal (6.1 to 7.3 m²/L).

337
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: Surface must be dry, structurally sound, clean, free of dust, dirt, wax, oil grease, asphalt,
mastic, latex compounds, adhesives, paint, gypsum based products and other contaminants. Surfaces must be
fully cured and free of laitance, loose or deteriorated concrete, curing and form release compounds and other
contaminants. Deeply contaminated substrates must be abraded to a clean and sound surface. Patch large
cracks and holes with TAMMSPATCH II or other suitable patching mortar. Porous surfaces should be primed
with TAMMSWELD.
Wood Surfaces must be structurally sound and thoroughly cleaned to remove shellac, varnish, paint and other
contaminants. Wood floors must be fully braced and nailed to provide a stable, non-flexible surface. Use wire
mesh as an artificial key for fills over wood. Apply TAMMSWELD as a primer to the wood surface.
Surface Priming: Porous concrete surfaces should be primed with TAMMSWELD. Concrete surfaces prepared
after removal of cutbacks and nonporous surfaces may be primed with a water based primer such as DURAPRIME
WB. A test patch to evaluate substrate/primer/LEVEL MAGIC LIGHT WEIGHT adhesion should be installed
and approved.Wood/Plywood surfaces should be primed using TAMMSWELD. LEVEL MAGIC LIGHT WEIGHT
requires 9 pints (4.3 L) of water per 25 lb (11.3 kg) bag. Use power drill with a “jiffy” type mixer to mix small
quantities. For larger applications use a paddle type mortar mixer or a standard concrete mixer.
Application Techniques: Pump or hand pour LEVEL MAGIC LIGHT WEIGHT on to primed surface. Move it into
approximate position with an underlayment spreader, and allow the material to seek its own level. Place LEVEL
MAGIC LIGHT WEIGHT soon after mixing. During cure, protect the surface from direct sunlight and winds to
prevent rapid hydration.
Clean-Up
Clean mixing and application equipment with water immediately following use. Remove splatter or spills with
water before material sets. LEVEL MAGIC LIGHT WEIGHT contains cementitious materials, and if allowed to dry,
removal becomes extremely difficult.
• New concrete must be fully cured for 28 days.
• Joints or cracks in movement must be detailed through the LEVEL MAGIC LIGHT WEIGHT to prevent cracking.
• Do not overwater, overmix, or retemper LEVEL MAGIC LIGHT WEIGHT.
• Do not add cement, lime, gypsum, plaster, bonding agents, or other materials except specified aggregates.
• Clean mixer after each batch to avoid material build up.
• Do not mix or apply LEVEL MAGIC LIGHT WEIGHT when temperatures are below or expected to fall below
40°F (4°C) or above 90°F (32°C) for at least 24 hours after application.
• Do not apply LEVEL MAGIC LIGHT WEIGHT over frozen or frost filled surfaces.
• Not recommended over particle board, gypsum, asphalt, or very porous surfaces.
• Do not apply LEVEL MAGIC LIGHT WEIGHT over very warm surfaces such as radiant heated floors or over
boiler rooms.
• Test applications are recommended.
Rev. 6.11
338
SUPER FLO-TOP
Cementitious, Self-leveling Underlayment & Light-Duty Wearing Surface
Horizontal Repair
Description
Super Flo-Top is a single-component, cement based, free-flowing, self-leveling compound specially designed
for easy application over concrete floors as an underlayment for subsequent placement of floor coverings. It is
suitable for use as a repair and leveling course and may be applied at thicknesses from featheredge to 1" (25
mm) neat. SUPER FLO-TOP may be used as a light-duty (foot traffic only) wearing surface, when protected by
a Euclid Chemical epoxy/urethane system.
• Leveling interior or exterior (see precautions/limitations) sound concrete surfaces
• Leveling wood subfloors
• Repair of old, worn concrete
• Old floors with cut back adhesive
• Light duty wearing surface
Features/Benefits
• Fluid consistency for self-leveling applications • High early strength for early turnaround
• Pumpable through standard equipment • Excellent bond strength
• Self-leveling for smooth, flat floors • Excellent self-healing properties
• Minimal shrinkage and outstanding resistance • Extended open time
to cracking
SUPER FLO-TOP
The following results were developed under laboratory
conditions:
Compressive Strength ASTM C109 2" (50 mm) cubes Bond Strength ASTM C 1583
Age Strength Age Strength
4 hours.......................................1,300 psi (9 MPa) 7 days.........................................250 psi (1.7 MPa)
24 hours...................................2,200 psi (15 MPa) 28 days.......................................280 psi (1.9 MPa)
7 days.......................................3,000 psi (21 MPa)
28 days.....................................3,500 psi (24 MPa) Unit Weight...........approx. 118 lb/ft3 (1890 kg/m3)
56 days.....................................4,000 psi (27 MPa) Set Times ASTM C 191 @ 70oF (21oC).....1 to 1.5 hrs
Appearance: SUPER FLO-TOP is a free-flowing powder designed to be mixed with water, then it dries to a light
gray finish.
Packaging/yield
Master Format #:
SUPER FLO-TOP is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) bags that yield approximately 0.52 ft3 (0.015 m3) of material.
03 54 16
Shelf Life
Coverage
Coverage is approximately 25 ft2 (2.3 m2) at a 1/4” (6 mm) thickness

339
Directions for Use
Priming: Concrete should be primed with a spray or brush coat of TAMMSWELD. Allow TAMMSWELD to fully
dry prior to the application of SUPER FLO-TOP.
Mixing: All materials should be in the proper temperature range of 60oF (16oC) to 90oF (32oC). Single bags
of SUPER FLO-TOP may be mixed in a pail with a drill and “jiffy” mixer. Larger projects are best placed with
standard grouting or underlayment equipment. Add the appropriate amount of water, 6.0 to 6.5 qt (5.7 to 6.2
L) per bag and then add the dry product. Do not use water at a rate that will cause bleeding or segregation.
Under no circumstances use more than 6.5 qt (6.2 L) of water per 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag. Mix a
minimum of 3 minutes. If bucket mixed, the product should be quickly transported to the repair area and placed
immediately.
Application: For applications over 1" (25.4 mm) in thickness, add 20 to 25 lb (9.1 to 11.3 kg) of 3/8" (9.5mm)
pea gravel to extend the initial layer. Placement options include screeding or the use of pre-placed aggregate.
Apply a bond coat to the surface of the initial layer and place additional underlayment to achieve the final
smooth surface.
Placement: The product must be continuously placed to provide a smooth and uniform surface. Start in one
corner placing a continuous stream of material along one edge of the area and back lap as soon as possible for
a uniform, smooth surface. Tools such as spiked rollers, notched squeegees, trowels and smoothers may be
used to assist placement.
Finishing: This product is self-leveling and requires no finishing or troweling operation.
Curing: (See Precautions/Limitations) SUPER FLO-TOP does not require curing with standard methods for most
applications. Under hot, windy or rapid drying conditions, the use of Eucobar is recommended after placement.
Clean-Up
• Do not use SUPER FLO-TOP as a heavy-duty wearing surface for industrial floors.
• If used as a light-duty wearing surface, the use of a Euclid Chemical clear epoxy topcoat is recommended for
added wear resistance.
• SUPER FLO-TOP is not to be used in areas of constant water exposure or in areas exposed to permanent
or intermittent substrate moisture, for this could jeopardize the performance of the underlayment and floor
covering.
• SUPER FLO-TOP is not a vapor barrier and will allow free passage of moisture.
• Do not add admixtures or calcium chloride.
• Do not use if ambient temperatures that will fall below 40oF (4oC) within 72 hours after placement.
• Do not allow freshly placed SUPER FLO-TOP to freeze for 7 days.
• Contact and rely upon floor covering manufacturer for specific requirements regarding maximum moisture
content, adhesive selection and intended end use of the product prior to application of floor coverings.
• Not for use in freeze-thaw environments.
• If placing SUPER FLO-TOP over a wood floor, it is very important to secure the floor solidly to prevent all
movement.
Rev. 6.11
340
TAMMS SLU
Pumpable, Single-Component, Self-leveling, Cementitious Underlayment
Horizontal Repair
Description
TAMMS SLU is a proprietary formulation of blended portland cements, finely processed aggregates and
chemical additives designed for use as an underlayment for leveling floors and to provide a sound surface for
floor coverings.
• Repair, fill and level uneven surfaces
• Interior use over properly prepared concrete, plywood, and other rigid substrates
Features/Benefits
• S elf leveling • P roperties similar to concrete
• Yields a smooth, level and hard surface • Pump or pour application
• Floor coverings can be applied after 72 hours
Material Properties at 75°F (24°C) Tensile strength psi (MPa) ASTM C 190
Final Set Time hrs ASTM C 191.......... approx. 3 to 4 7 days.......................................................400 (2.8)
Compressive strength ASTM C 109 28 days.....................................................680 (4.7)
1 days..................................................1,500 (10.3) Flammability ASTM E 84
3 days..................................................2,440 (16.8) Flame Spread....................................................... 0
7 days..................................................3,800 (26.2) Fuel Contribution.................................................. 0
28 days................................................4,440 (30.6) Smoke Development........................................... 0
Flexural strength psi (MPa) ASTM C 78
7 days.......................................................450 (3.1)
28 days.....................................................675 (4.6)
TAMMS SLU
Packaging
TAMMS SLU is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) polylined bags
Shelf Life
Coverage/Yield
One 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag yields approximately 0.42 ft³ (.011m³)
Directions for Use

a surface profile equal to CSP 3 - 5 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2. Properly clean the profiled area.
Wood surfaces must be fully clean, braced and secure to provide a stable, non-flexible surface. Secure metal
Master Format #:
lathe to wood as an artifical key. Priming: Concrete and wood must be primed using a spray or brush coat of
TAMMSWELD. Allow the TAMMSWELD to fully dry prior to application of the TAMMS SLU. Concrete surfaces
03 54 16
prepared after the removal of cutback adhesives and non-porous surfaces may be primed with DURAPRIME WB
(water-based epoxy). A test patch to verify adhesion should be installed and approved.
Mixing: Mix TAMMS SLU in a clean rotary mixer equipped with rubber tipped blades. With the mixer running,
add 8 to 9 qt (7.6 to 8.5 L) of potable water and slowly add the 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag of TAMMS SLU. Mix
approximately one minute to provide a smooth, lump free, flowable blend similar to pancake batter. If a foam
appears, the TAMMS SLU is over-watered and should not be placed. For pours at depths greater than 1” (2.5
cm), TAMMS SLU may be extended with clean, sand free, damp pea gravel.

341
Mix the TAMMS SLU first and then add the pea gravel to the mixed material. Reduce the water if the aggregate
is damp. The addition of aggregate will reduce flowability. Mix single bags of TAMMS SLU in a clean container
using a slow speed drill and “Jiffy” mixing paddle. Clean mixing container thoroughly after each batch.
Application: Pump or pour TAMMS SLU on to the primed surface. Move and level with an underlayment
spreader. TAMMS SLU will achieve initial set in 1 to 2 hours and may receive foot traffic after 48 hours. Protect
the surface from direct sunlight and high winds to prevent drying cracking. If fills greater than 1” (2.5 cm) are
required, TAMMS SLU may be extended with 3/8” (9.5 mm) pea gravel. Fill to within 1/2” (13 mm) of the finished
grade and then cap with neat material as soon as the extended layer will support foot traffic.
Cold Weather Application: Do not apply at temperatures below 40°F (4°C). Heating the substrate, using warm
water for mixing and tenting or insulating after application will assist in reaching higher strength development.
Clean-Up
To prevent buildup clean application tools and mixer with water immediately after each use.
• Store in protected, dry storage.
• Do not featheredge, overwork, re-temper or overtrowel.
• Minimum placement depth 1/4” (6.4 mm).
• Do not add any admixtures to TAMMS SLU.
Rev. 6.11
342
EUCO QWIKstitch
Fast Setting Urethane Crack & Spall Repair
Horizontal Repair
Description
EUCO QWIKstitch is a two-component hybrid urethane repair liquid used to mend cracks in concrete, repair
spalled joints and repair damaged or uneven concrete surfaces. EUCO QWIKstitch is an ultra-low viscosity material
formulated to penetrate deep into cracks, mending them back together. Its fast cure time makes quick work of repair
jobs; concrete repaired with QWIKstitch can be opened to heavy traffic in less than one hour. QWIKstitch can be
mixed with aggregate to make a tough mortar perfect for quickly repairing pop-outs and spalls.
• Cracked concrete surfaces, interior and exterior
• Spalled floor joints
• Repair of pop-outs and delaminations on floors
Features/Benefits
• Can be applied at a range of thicknesses with • Low viscosity - deep penetration into cracks
the use of clean, oven-dried silica • Wide application temperature range: 0oF to 115°F
• Very fast cure time (-17oC to 46°C)
• Repairs can be made to blend in with the concrete
Property Result
Mix Ratio, Part A to Part B 1:1 by volume
Mix Ratio, sand to mixed liquid 2:1 by volume
Color Part A: Clear/Amber Part B: Black Mixed: Gray
EUCO QWIKstitch
Gel Time at 75°F (24°C) 2 - 3 minutes
Tack Free Time at 75°F (24°C) 10 minutes
Shore D Hardness
70
ASTM D 2240
4,090 (28)
ASTM D 638
4.6
ASTM D 638
Compressive Strength, psi (MPa) 1 hour: 4,760 (33)
ASTM D 695 24 hours: 5,110 (35)
1,847 (12.8)
ASTM C 882
Water Absorption, %
0.25
ASTM D 570
Master Format #:
Appearance: EUCO QWIKstitch is a two-component product has a light gray after curing. When used with
03 01 30.71
sand, the final color of the repair will depend on the type, color, and gradation of the sand. Manufactured or
colored quartz can be blended on the jobsite to match the color of the floor.
Packaging
EUCO QWIKstitch is packaged in cases of 12/22 oz (600 ML) dual cartridges and cases of 12/9 oz (245 ML)
single-tube cartridges with static mixers and retaining nuts included. QWIKstitch is also available in 2 gal (7.6 L)
bulk units consisting of 1 gal (3.8 L) Part A and 1 gal (3.8 L) Part B.

343
Coverage/Yield
22 oz (0.7 L) cartridge: 36 in³ (590 cm³) of neat material
9 oz (0.27 L) cartridge: 16 in³ (256 cm³) of neat material
2 gal (7.6 L) bulk unit: 462 in³ (7577 cm³) of neat material
Shelf Life
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: All dirt, oil, dust, foreign contaminants, and laitance must be removed to assure a good
bond to the concrete. For repair of spalled concrete or pop-outs, a stiff wire brush or twisted wire wheel on
a grinder can be used to remove all loose or unsound concrete. Cracks should be similarly cleaned with a
diamond blade saw, wire brush or wire wheel. After preparing area, remove all dust and debris with an industrial
vacuum and oil-free compressed air. All surfaces must be clean and dry before installation of QWIKstitch.
Environment: Condition QWIKstitch to room temperature, 60oF to 80oF (16oC to 27oC) before using. Any sand
used with the product must be dry and kept at room temperature. Warmer material and/or application on
hot concrete or in a warm environment will accelerate curing of QWIKstitch. Cold material, cold concrete,
or application in a cold environment will delay curing. Heat cold concrete to remove any visible frost before
application of QWIKstitch.
Readying Cartridges: Cartridges of QWIKstitch must be shaken well before using. After shaking, let cartridge
stand for one minute to allow any entrapped air to disperse. Insert cartridge into a dual component, 300 mL x
300mL manual dispenser with a 1:1 mix ratio. Remove cap from top of cartridge by prying up with a flat head
screwdriver. Save the cap; it can be re-inserted to save a partially used cartridge. Hold cartridge at a slightly
upward angle and slowly dispense a small amount of material into a disposable container until both materials
flow evenly from cartridge. Continue to hold cartridge & gun at an upward angle and install flow control and
mixing nozzle onto cartridge. Next, point mixing nozzle straight up and slowly begin gunning material through
the mixing nozzle until it reaches the tip. Point upwards at a 45° angle and dispense one stroke into a disposable
container.
Crack/Spall Repair, Cartridges: Gun QWIKstitch directly into cracks, allowing adhesive to penetrate into the
crack and top-off as needed. Kiln-dried medium grade (30 mesh) silica sand or dry floor grindings can be
sprinkled on top of the wet QWIKstitch to add texture and closely match the appearance of the surrounding
concrete. Alternately, larger cracks can be filled with dry, medium grade silica sand then saturated with
QWIKstitch. Keep QWIKstitch flowing to prevent material from hardening in the nozzle. Mixed QWIKstitch will be
tack-free in 10 minutes at 75°F (24°C). Excess material may be removed immediately or within 20 to 30 minutes
after installation by scraping/shaving with a sharp blade. If necessary, cured QWIKstitch can be ground smooth
with a brick rub or hand grinder approximately one hour after application.
Crack/Spall Repair, 2 gal unit: QWIKstitch can be mixed with kiln dried medium grade (30 mesh) silica sand
to create a mortar suitable for repairs ½ inch to 3 inches (1.3 to 7.6 cm) in thickness per lift. QWIKstitch mortars
must be mixed, placed, and finished in less than 3 minutes, so only prepare an amount of QWIKstitch mortar
that can be mixed and placed within that time.
Thoroughly but quickly, mix Part A with Part B with a Jiffy mixing blade and drill at low speed for 20 seconds
maximum. While one person is mixing A & B, have a second person swiftly add the sand at a ratio of 2 parts
sand to one part mixed QWIKstitch, by volume. Make sure all sand is saturated and there are no clumps of dry
sand remaining. Scrape bottom and sides of pail to assure good mix. Place and finish immediately.
Clean-Up
Tools, equipment and general clean-up can be done before the product cures with MEK or acetone.
• Wet substrates or wet sand can cause foaming of the EUCO QWIKstitch and result in a low strength, less
durable repair.
Rev. 6.11
344
Repair - Vertical/Overhead
Cementitious Mortars
Duraltop Gel 347
Eucopatch 349
Eucoshot 351
Speed Crete PM 353
Tamms Cement Wash 357
Tamms Structural Mortar 359
Tammscrete 361
Verticoat 363
Verticoat Supreme 365
Concrete Repair Mortars – Vertical/Overhead Surfaces
This symbol indicates product can contribute points toward the LEED certification of a building. For additional product information refer to the product tech-
nical data sheet. *Technical results developed under laboratory conditions at approximately mid 70 degree Fahrenheit range.
DURALTOP GEL
Vertical and Overhead Structural Repair Mortar w/Corrosion Inhibitor
Description
Vertical Repair
DURALTOP GEL is a fast setting, two-component, polymer reinforced, non-sag, cementitious repair mortar for
vertical/overhead applications. DURALTOP GEL contains a migratory corrosion inhibitor for added protection.
• S tructural repairs
• Exterior or interior, above or below grade
• Vertical and overhead concrete and masonry repairs
Features/Benefits
• R apid setting, polymer modified repair mortar • N on-sag, high build properties
• Achieves high compressive, flexural and bond • Pre-proportioned unit
strengths quickly Can contribute to LEED points
• Contains a migratory corrosion inhibitor
Tensile Bond Strength CAN A23.2-6b
Material Properties @ 75°F (24°C) 28 days................................ greater than concrete
Compressive Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM C 109 (Mod.) Splitting Tensile Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM C 496
4 hours..................................................1,150 (7.9) 28 days.....................................................750 (5.2)
1 day....................................................4,000 (27.6) Freeze/Thaw Resistance NYSDOT 502.3P
3 days..................................................6,100 (42.1) 50 cycles....................................... 0.18% Weight Loss
7 days..................................................7,050 (48.6) Expansion/Contraction: ASTM C 157
28 days................................................8,500 (58.6) 7 days.........................................................0.040%
Flexural Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM C 293 28 days.......................................................0.062%
1 day....................................................2,000 (13.8) Vertical/Overhead Patching NYS DOT 701.08
DURALTOP GEL
28 days................................................2,180 (15.0) .................................................................... passes
Bond Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM C 882 (Mod.) Chloride Permeability ASTM C 1202
7 days..................................................2,100 (14.5) 160 coulombs........................................“very low”
28 days................................................2,475 (17.1) Typical results obtained under laboratory conditions.
Packaging/Yield
Part A (powder) 44 lb (20 kg) bag. Part B (liquid) 1 gal (3.8 L) container. One kit of DURALTOP GEL will yield
approximately 0.4 ft³ (0.01 m³).
Shelf Life
Coverage
Applied at the following thicknesses, one bag will cover:
1/4” (6.3mm) 19.2 ft² (1.78 m²)
1/2” (12.7 mm) 9.6 ft² (0.89 m²)
Master Format #:
Coverage rates are approximate and are for estimating purposes only.
03 01 30.71
Directions for Use

Priming: Concrete and exposed steel should be primed with a spray or brush coat of DURAPREP AC. The
DURALPREP AC must be thoroughly dry prior to the application of DURALTOP GEL. Alternately, a Saturated
Surface Dry (SSD) concrete surface can be primed with a scrub coat of DURALTOP GEL. The repair must be

347
made before the scrub coat dries out.
Mixing: Mix only one kit of DURALTOP GEL at a time. In a clean container, add 80% of liquid Part B. Using a "
slow speed (400 to 600 rpm) drill and a “Jiffy” mixer, gradually add the powder (Part A) to produce a mortar with
a smooth, no lumps consistency. Add remaining liquid, if necessary, to get desired consistency. Do not mix
longer than 3 minutes.
Application: Air and surface temperature must be above 45°F (7°C). Apply DURALTOP GEL immediately
after mixing. The working time is about 15 minutes, and finish time about 20 to 30 minutes, depending on
temperature, humidity and finish desired. The surface must be SSD at the time of application. Before the scrub
coat dries, trowel the material against the edge, and gradually work towards the center of the repair area. Apply
at a minimum thickness of 1/8” (0.32 cm) and in lifts of no more than 1.5” (3.81 cm). Each lift should be allowed
to reach final set, then scored to produce a roughened surface before applying the next lift. Consolidate,
screed, and then finish following standard practices.
Curing: Follow standard ACI guidelines for curing. In the case of high temperature, high wind, or low humidity
causing rapid surface drying, use wet burlap/plastic or a water based curing compound. Protect from rain and
freezing temperatures before the product is sufficiently cured. DO NOT use solvent based curing compounds.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with water before DURALTOP GEL hardens. Hardened DURALTOP GEL will need to
be mechanically removed from equipment.
• Store at temperatures between 45°F and 90°F (7°C to 32°C), protected from moisture.
• Mix only one kit at a time.
• DO NOT MIX DURALTOP GEL LONGER THAN 3 MINUTES.
• Do not apply DURALTOP GEL below 45°F (7°C).
• Apply immediately after mixing.
• Delayed application will reduce adhesion.
• Minimum thickness 1/8" (3.2 mm), maximum per lift 1½" (38.1mm).
Rev. 6.11
348
EUCOPATCH
Single component, Rapid Setting Repair Material
Description
Vertical Repair
EUCOPATCH is a single-component, rapid-setting, repair mortar for use on new and existing concrete and
masonry surfaces. This product is designed for the reconstruction of damaged vertical and overhead concrete
and masonry structures, both interior and exterior. EUCOPATCH can also be used in light-duty, pedestrian,
horizontal applications. The light color of EUCOPATCH closely resembles aged, sun-bleached concrete.
• Walls • Precast panels
• Light-duty (pedestrian) pavements • Columns
• Curbs and gutters • Masonry units
Features/Benefits
• Rapid setting for repairs up to 4” (10 cm) • Suitable for both interior and exterior applications
• High compressive strength • Excellent bond to sound concrete
• Excellent resistance to freeze-thaw cycling and • Compatible with galvanic anodes
de-icing salts
Typical Engineering Data The following results were Compressive Strength ASTM C 109 2” (50 mm) cubes
developed under laboratory conditions using 0.7 gal Age Strength
/50 lb bag (2.65 L/22.7 kg) 1 day.........................................2,000 psi (14 MPa)
Set Times 70oF (21oC) ASTM C 266 7 days.......................................4,500 psi (31 MPa)
Initial set........................................................ 8 min 28 days.....................................5,500 psi (38 MPa)
Final set....................................................... 20 min 56 days....................................6,500 psi (45 MPa)
Bond Strength
EUCOPATCH
Volumetric Resistivity..................3,270 ohm/cm
28 days.....................................1,400 psi (10 MPa)
Appearance: EUCOPATCH is a free-flowing powder designed to be mixed with water. After mixing and placing,
the color may initially appear darker than the surrounding concrete. This color will lighten up substantially as the
EUCOPATCH cures, resulting in the repair area very closely matching the surrounding concrete.
Packaging/Yield
EUCOPATCH is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) bags which yield 0.44 ft3 (0.013m3) when mixed with 0.7 to 0.75
gal (2.65 to 2.81L) of water. EUCOPATCH is also available in 60 lb (27.2 kg) pails which yield 0.56 ft3 (0.016 m3)
when mixed with 0.84 to 0.90 gal (3.2 to 3.4 L) of water.
Shelf Life
Coverage
Master Format #:
One 50 lb (22.7 kg) unit of EUCOPATCH will cover approximately 11.3 ft² (1.05 m²) when placed at an average
03 01 30.71
depth of 1/2” (13 mm). One 60 lb (27.2 kg) unit of EUCOPATCH will cover approximately 13.6 ft² (1.26 m²) when
placed at an average depth of 1/2” (13 mm).

349
Directions for Use
a minimum surface profile of CSP 5 - 7 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2. Properly clean profiled area.
brush coat of DURALPREP AC. The DURALPREP AC primer coating must be allowed to fully dry prior to the
placement of EUCOPATCH. Alternately, a Saturated Surface Dry (SSD) concrete surface can be primed with a
scrub coat of EUCOPATCH. The repair must be made before the scrub coat dries out.
materials should be in the proper temperature range of 60oF to 90oF (16oC to 32oC). Add the appropriate amount
of water for the batch size and then add the dry product. The mixed product should be quickly transported to the
repair area and placed immediately.
Placement: Place EUCOPATCH onto the prepared concrete or masonry surface at a minimum depth of at least
1/16” (1.6mm). Float or trowel flush with adjacent surface and allow to set. Finish to match the surrounding
surfaces. Place EUCOPATCH while the scrub coat is still wet.
Finishing: Finish the repair material to the desired texture. Do not add additional water to the surface during the
finishing operation. Use EUCOBAR evaporation retarder.
To prevent surface cracking, cure the material with a high solids curing compound, such as SUPER AQUA-CURE
VOX or SUPER REZ-SEAL. Allow the curing compound to dry. In hot, windy or direct sunlight situations, apply
a second coat of curing compound. If a curing compound is not desired, wet cure for a minimum of three days.
Clean-Up
• Only mix as much material that can be used in 10 minutes.
• Do not use for a topping or overlay.
• For structural repairs of vertical and overhead surfaces, use VERTICOAT SUPREME or TAMMS STRUCTURAL
MORTAR.
• Do not use material at temperatures below 45oF (7oC).
• Keep repair from freezing until a minimum strength of 1000 psi (7 MPa) is reached.
• For high strength repairs of floors and pavements, use Thin-TOP SUPREME or ConcretE-TOP SUPREME.
Rev. 6.11
350
EUCOSHOT
Silica Fume Modified Shotcrete Mix
Description
Vertical Repair
EUCOSHOT is a microsilica-modified, single-component, shotcrete material. This cement based, modified
mortar is designed for use on vertical and overhead surfaces by dry-mix shotcrete (gunite) application or by
mixing with water and applying as a wet-mix shotcrete. EUCOSHOT is specially formulated for interior or
exterior uses.
• Shotcrete projects • Bridge structures • Retaining walls • Piers/docks • Mining applications
• Parking decks • Marine environments • Dams • Tunnels
Features/Benefits
• Single-component, ready to use with only the • Compatible with galvanic anodes
addition of water • Excellent freeze-thaw resistance
• Helps protect rebar and welded wire mesh from • Low shrinkage properties
corrosion • High abrasion resistance
• Low chloride salt permeability Can contribute to LEED points
Typical Engineering Data Length Change ASTM C 157, 50% R.H.
The following results were developed under 2 days........................................................-0.003%
laboratory conditions. 7 days........................................................-0.003%
Compressive Strength 14 days......................................................-0.007%
ASTM C 109 2" (50 mm) cubes 21 days......................................................-0.025%
1 day..........................................3,500 psi (24 MPa) 28 days......................................................-0.033%
3 days........................................5,000 psi (34 MPa) Rapid Chloride Permeability ASTM C 1202
EUCOSHOT
7 days........................................7,000 psi (48 MPa) 7 days...........................................4,000 coulombs
28 days......................................9,500 psi (65 MPa) 14 days.........................................1,600 coulombs
Flexural Strength ASTM C 348 (modified) 21 days............................................975 coulombs
1 day............................................550 psi (3.8 MPa) 28 days............................................575 coulombs
7 days..........................................775 psi (5.3 MPa) Freeze/Thaw Resistance
28 days.....................................1,100 psi (7.6 MPa) ASTM C 666 Procedure A
Shear Bond Strength ASTM C 882 (modified) 300 cycles...........................................>98% RDM
3 days........................................2,000 psi (14 MPa) Scaling Resistance ASTM C 672
7 days........................................2,500 psi (17 MPa) 10 cycles.............................................................. 0
4 days........................................2,800 psi (19 MPa) 20 cycles.............................................................. 0
28 days......................................3,000 psi (21 MPa) 30 cycles.............................................................. 0
Direct Tensile Bond (Germann Test) 50 cycles.............................................................. 0
14 days........................................350 psi (2.4 MPa)
28 days........................................425 psi (2.9 MPa) Volumetric Resistivity.................11,490 ohm/cm
Master Format #:
Appearance: EUCOSHOT is a free flowing powder as packaged. After application, the color may appear darker
than the surrounding concrete. Note: Color may lighten as the EUCOSHOT cures and dries out. The final finish
03 37 13
appearance can be any texture consistent with that expected from sprayed concrete.
Packaging/yield
EUCOSHOT is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) moisture resistant bags, 2,200 lb (1000 kg) and 3,300 lb (1,500 kg)
bulk bags. Yield will vary according to the amount of water added during the shotcreting operation. Approximate
yield is 0.42 ft3 (0.012 m3) per 50 lb bag when mixed with 3 qt (2.8 L) water.

351
Shelf Life
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: The concrete must be clean and rough. All oil, dirt, debris, paint and unsound concrete
must be removed. The surface must be mechanically prepared to achieve a profile similar to CSP 7 or greater
in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2, exposing the coarse aggregate of the base concrete. The final step in
cleaning should be the complete removal of all residue by pressure washing.
Exposed Reinforcement Steel: Remove all loose rust and scaling, preferably by sandblasting to white metal
prior to application.
Bonding: No bond coat should be used for this product.
Mixing Dry Shotcrete/Gunite: Set up dry process equipment in an area convenient to the placement site.
Pre-dampening is recommended prior to adding material to gun. Gauge water at the nozzle and adjust to the
desired consistency.
Placing Dry Shotcrete/Gunite: In general, EUCOSHOT should be applied in accordance with the
recommendations of ACI 506R “Guide to Shotcrete”. Pay special attention to the angle of the application (i.e.
90o) and distance from the substrate, normally 2 ft (0.6 m) to 6 ft (1.8 m). Typical application depths range from
1" to 6" (2.54 to 15.24 cm). If placement at a depth greater than 6" (150 mm) is required, cross hatch the surface
of the initial layer. After the surface has sufficiently hardened, additional layers may be placed.
Mixing Wet Shotcrete: Add EUCOSHOT to water in the mixer drum [35 gal (130 L) of water per 3,300 lb (1500
kg)] bag of EUCOSHOT. Mix for 2 minutes and add remaining water up to 15 gal (60 L). eucoN 37 can be used
to reduce the amount of water required.
Placing Wet Shotcrete: In general, EUCOSHOT should be applied in accordance with the recommendation of
ACI 506R “Guide to Shotcrete”.
Finishing: A natural gun finish is preferred; however, conventional finishing methods such as screeding,
troweling, or brooming are acceptable. Do not add additional water to surface for finishing. If an evaporation
retarder is necessary, use EUCOBAR. Note: Over-finishing can cause debonding.
To prevent surface cracking, cure with water spray or a high-solids curing compound, such as KUREZ W VOX
or KUREZ DR VOX.
clean-up
• Do not allow applied shotcrete to freeze until the material has reached a minimum of 1,000 psi (7 MPa)
compressive strength.
• In adverse temperatures, follow ACI recommendations for hot/cold weather concreting practices.
• Use only potable water at the nozzle.
• Minimum application thickness is 1" (2.54 cm).
• Minimum surface and ambient temperatures are 40°F (5°C) and rising at the time of application.
• For optimum results, condition material to 65°F to 85°F (18°C to 29°C).
Rev. 6.11
352
SPEED CRETE PM
Single-Component, Vertical/Overhead Mortar w/Corrosion Inhibitor
Description
Vertical Repair
SPEED CRETE PM is a single-component, polymer-modified, ready-to-use, cement based concrete and masonry
repair mortar that requires only potable water for mixing. SPEED CRETE PM is a proprietary formulation of
portland cement, finely graded aggregates and special polymer modifiers used to increase adhesion, strength,
and aid in curing. The integral corrosion inhibitor slows down impeeding corrosion causing chlorides.
• Repair of numerous interior/exterior, above/below grade, vertical/overhead structural surfaces without forming
Features/Benefits
• Compatible with galvanic anodes • Repairs from featheredge to 3” (7.6 cm)
• Excellent workability • D evelops high strength and tenacious bond
• Contains a migratory corrosion inhibitor • E xcellent resistance to freeze-thaw conditions
• A
fter initial set, may be shaved to conform to contours of the surrounding surface
Material Properties @75°F (24°C) Flexural Strength psi (MPa) ASTM C 78
Set Time, ASTM C 266, Gilmore 7 Day........................................................650 (4.5)
Initial Set approx ........................................ 15 min 28 Days.................................................1,300 (9.0)
Final Set approx ......................................... 40 min Shear Bond Strength psi (MPa) ASTM C 882
Working Time...................................10 to 15 min 28 Day.................................................2,650 (18.3)
Compressive Strength psi (MPa) ASTM C 109 Splitting Tensile Strength psi (MPa) ASTM C 496
1 day...................................................2,500 (17.2) 7 day........................................................450 (3.1)
SPEED CRETE PM
7 days.................................................6,500 (44.8) 28 day......................................................550 (3.8)
28 days...............................................7,000 (48.3) Freeze Thaw Resistance ASTM C 666
320 cycles............................................99.0% RDF
Volumetric Resistivity.................7,980 ohm/cm
Packaging
SPEED CRETE PM is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) poly-lined bags
Shelf Life
1 year in unopened package
Coverage/Yield
One 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag yields approximately 0.5 ft³(0.014m³)
Directions for Use

Master Format #:
03 01 30.71
or brush coat of DURALPREP AC. The primer coat of DURALPREP AC must be allowed to fully dry prior ot the
application of SPEED CRETE PM. Alternately, a Saturated Surface Dry (SSD) concrete surface can be primed
with a scrub coat of SPEED CRETE PM. The repair must be made before the scrub coat dries out.

353
Mixing: SPEED CRETE PM will require approximately 4.0 to 4.25 qt (3.8 to 4.0L) of potable water per 50 lb
bag (22.7 kg) to achieve the proper mix consistency. Pour the measured amount of water into a clean mixing
container, slowly add the SPEED CRETE PM and thoroughly mix for 2 to 3 minutes to a stiff, no slump, putty-like
consistency. Use a rotary mixer with rubber tip blades for mixing quantities up to 100 lb (45.4 kg).
Application: Apply a scrub coat of neat mortar to the prepared SSD substrate. Before the scrub coat dries,
apply SPEED CRETE PM. To ensure complete bond with the entire surface, force the SPEED CRETE PM firmly
into the repair area by hand or with a trowel. Place the SPEED CRETE PM so that the material conforms to the
contours of the surrounding surface. Always finish the SPEED CRETE PM toward the common bonding edge
between the repair material and the existing surface. For repairs deeper than 3” (7.6cm) apply in multiple lifts.
Score surface between lifts. Cure material using standard curing practices.
Curing: Follow standard ACI guidelines for curing. In case of high temperature, high wind, or low humidity
causing rapid surface drying, use wet burlap/plastic or a water-based curing compound.
Clean-Up
Clean application tools and mixing equipment with water immediately following use.
• Use only potable water with SPEED CRETE PM.
• Do not retemper or add sand to SPEED CRETE PM.
• Do not over-work or over-trowel the repair material.
Rev. 6.11
354
SPEED CRETE RED LINE
Rapid-Setting Repair Material
Description
Vertical Repair
SPEED CRETE RED LINE is a rapid-setting, cement-based concrete and masonry repair mortar. SPEED CRETE
RED LINE is a proprietary formulation of blended portland cements, finely processed selected aggregates,
and specific chemical additives which undergoes a chemical "hyper hydration" and produces a stable, low
permeability, cementitious matrix. SPEED CRETE RED LINE can be “shaved” for detailed repairs
• Interior and exterior
• Vertical, overhead and horizontal repairs
• Used at no slump consistency
• Outstanding repair material for concrete pipe, curbs, sidewalks, formed and precast concrete
Features/Benefits
• Initial set in 8 to 10 minutes • H igh strength
• Final set within 20 minutes • Excellent durability
• Can be “shaved” to desired shape • Compatible with galvanic anodes
Compressive Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM C 109 Freeze Thaw Durability Factor ASTM C 666
24 Hour..................................................2,550 (17.6) 300 Cycles...................................................96.75%
7 Day......................................................4,700 (32.4) Shrinkage 50% RH ASTM C 157
28 Day....................................................5,900 (40.7) 28 Day.........................................................-0.069%
Set Time, ASTM C 266 Expansion 100% RH ASTM C 157
SPEED CRETE RED LINE
Initial..........................................................8 - 20 Min 28 Day..........................................................0.077%
Final.........................................................15 - 30 Min Scaling Resistance ASTM C 672
Split Tensile Strength,psi (MPa) ASTM C 496 50 Cycles....................................................0% loss
7 Day...........................................................400 (2.8)
28 Day.........................................................500 (3.4) Volumetric Resistivity....................5,250 ohm/cm
Flexural Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM C 348
7 Day...........................................................700 (4.8)
28 Day.........................................................918 (6.3)
Packaging
SPEED CRETE RED line is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) poly-lined bags, and 50 lb (22.7 kg) pails
Shelf Life
1 year in original, unopened packaging
Coverage
One 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag yields approximately 0.47 ft³ (0.013 m³) when mixed with 5.5 qt (5.2 L) water.
Master Format #:
Directions for Use

03 01 30.71
to the application of SPEED CRETE RED LINE. Alternately, a Saturated Surface Dry (SSD) concrete surface

355
can be primed with a scrub coat of SPEED CRETE RED LINE. The repair must be made before the scrub coat
dries out.
Mixing: SPEED CRETE RED LINE will require approximately 5 to 5.5 qt (4.7 to 5.2 L) of potable water per 50 lb
(22.7 kg) bag to achieve the proper mix consistency. Pour the measured amount of water into a clean mixing
container, then add the SPEED CRETE RED LINE, and thoroughly mix for no more than 60 seconds to a stiff,
no slump, putty-like consistency. Mix small quantities of SPEED CRETE RED LINE in a clean pail with a hand
trowel. Use a rotary mixer with rubber tip blades for mixing quantities up to 100 lbs. (45.4 kg). To fill patches 2”
(5.1 cm) deep or greater, add clean, pre-dampened, 3/8” (0.96 cm) size pea gravel. Do not use limestone
aggregate. The mix ratio must not exceed 40 lbs. (18 kg) of pea gravel to each 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag or pail
of SPEED CRETE RED LINE. Mixing procedure: Start mixer, load water, load pea gravel, and then load the
SPEED CRETE RED LINE. Mix for no more than 60 seconds.
Application: To ensure a complete bond with the entire surface, force the SPEED CRETE RED LINE firmly into
the SSD area by hand or with a trowel. Slightly overfill the repair, and following initial set, shave the material
to conform to the contour of the surrounding surface. Always shave SPEED CRETE RED LINE toward the
common bonding edge between the repair mortar and the existing surface. Cure material using standard curing
practices.
Cold Weather Installation: Application at temperatures below 40°F(4°C) extends the set time. Heating the
repari area until warm, using warm water for mixing and tenting or insulating the repair area after application
will assist in reaching greater strength development. Do not use direct heat on the repair after its installation.
Clean-Up
• Keep in covered storage away from all moisture.
• Use only potable water with SPEED CRETE RED LINE.
• Mix to a stiff, putty-like, no slump consistency.
• Do not retemper or add sand to SPEED CRETE RED LINE.
• Do not overwork or overtrowel patching material.
• Do not featheredge SPEED CRETE RED LINE on horizontal surfaces.
Rev. 6.11
356
TAMMS CEMENT WASH
Polymer-Modified, Cementitious, Vertical Finishing Material
Description
Vertical Repair
TAMMS CEMENT WASH is a single-component, polymer-modified, cement based material used for achieving
a smooth finish on precast, cast-in-place, tilt-up or other unfinished concrete surfaces. This fast setting mortar
offers superior adhesion and durability. It is not a vapor barrier, contains no added gypsum, has excellent
workability for trowel application. With its smooth feel, TAMMS CEMENT WASH is an excellent product for filling
in bugholes and other small imperfections in newly placed concrete surfaces.
• S
kim coat on interior, exterior, vertical or overhead • Finishing newly cast concrete surfaces with
surfaces for filling bugholes and honeycombs imperfections, where a smooth finish is desired
Features/Benefits
• S ingle-component • S uperior adhesion and durability
• Rapid setting • Has no added gypsum
• Trowelable • User friendly
Packaging
TAMMS CEMENT WASH is packaged in 20 lb (9.1 kg) pails, 50 lb (22.7 kg) pails, and 50 lb (22.7 kg) poly-lined
bags.
Shelf Life
2 years in original, unopened packaging
TAMMS CEMENT WASH

Coverage/Yield
50 lb (22.7 kg) of TAMMS CEMENT WASH will yield approximately 0.45 ft³ (0.01m³). Note: Coverage rates are
approximate and are for estimating purposes only.
Directions for Use

free of dust, dirt, paint, efflorescence, oil and all other contaminants. Abrade the surface by mechanical means
to achieve a surface profile equal to CSP 2 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2. Properly clean profiled
area.
Mixing: TAMMS CEMENT WASH requires 6.75 to 7 qt (6.4 to 6.6 L) of potable water per 50 lb (22.7 kg) of
material. Use a power drill with a “jiffy” type mixer to mix single bags. For larger applications, a paddle type
mortar mixer is recommended. The material is stiff initially but relaxes within 3 minutes of mixing. Do not
add additional water to loosen the mix. Properly mixed product will have a smooth, thick, pancake batter like
consistency.
Application: At the time of application, the surfaces should be Saturated Surface Dry (SSD). Brush or trowel
Master Format #:
TAMMS CEMENT WASH onto the substrate, scrubbing or forcing the material into all pores and voids. After
reaching the desired consistency, double back with additional material and press firmly in place. Trowel to a
03 01 30.61
smooth finish.
Curing: Follow ACI guidelines for curing. In the case of high temperatures, high wind, or low humidity causing
rapid surface drying, use a fog curing system or a water based curing compound. DO NOT use solvent based
curing compounds.

357
Clean-Up
Clean all mixing and application equipment with water immediately following use. If allowed to dry on a surface,
removal becomes extremely difficult.
• Store TAMMS CEMENT WASH between 50°F to 90°F (10°C to 32°C) in dry conditions.
• TAMMS CEMENT WASH is not a wearing surface.
• Minimum ambient and surface temperature must be 45°F (7°C) and rising at the time of application.
• TAMMS CEMENT WASH can be applied to a maximum thickness of 1/8” (3.2 mm) per application.
• Do not add more water, retemper or over-trowel.
• Portions of the surface treated with TAMMS CEMENT WASH will have a different appearance than untreated
surfaces. If a unifom appearance is desired, a decorative coating may be applied over the entire surface.
• Do not use solvent based curing compounds on this product.
Rev. 6.11
358
Tamms Structural Mortar
Fiber-Enhanced, Low Pressure Spray Repair Mortar w/Corrosion Inhibitor
Description
Vertical Repair
Tamms Structural Mortar is a single-component repair mortar applied by low pressure spray or hand
trowel for structural concrete repairs. Tamms Structural Mortar is a proprietary formulation of portland
cement, graded aggregates, unique fibers, and polymers used to increase adhesion, strength, and sprayability.
• V ertical and overhead concrete repairs • Compatible with galvanic anodes
• Interior and exterior use • Manholes, pipelines, dams and other waste
• Bridge, parking garages, and tunnels water structures
Features/Benefits
• ow pressure spray or trowel applied
L • 3 /8” (0.95 cm) to 2.0” (5 cm) applications
• 30 minute working time • Contains a migratory corrosion inhibitor
• Single-component, micro-fiber enhanced • Freeze-thaw resistant
• Silica fume and polymer enhanced Can contribute to LEED points
Tamms Structural Mortar

Set Time ASTM C 266, Gilmore Shear Bond Strength psi (MPa) ASTM C 882
Initial Set approx hrs........................................... 1 28 days................................................3,250 (22.4)
Final Set approx hrs............................................ 2
Splitting Tensile Strength psi (MPa) ASTM C 496
Compressive Strength psi (MPa) ASTM C 109 7 days.......................................................480 (3.3)
1 day....................................................3,200 (22.0) 28 days.....................................................660 (4.5)
7 days..................................................6,200 (42.7)
28 days................................................8,500 (58.6) Freeze Thaw Resistance ASTM C 666)
300 cycles...............................................96% RDF
Flexural Strength psi (MPa) ASTM C 78
7 days..................................................1,500 (10.3) Chloride Permeability
28 days................................................1,650 (11.4) ASTM C 1202...................................1,050 coulombs
Volumetric Resistivity...............11,300 ohms/cm .
Shelf Life
Master Format #:
Packaging
03 37 19
TAMMS STRUCTURAL MORTAR is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) poly-lined bags
Coverage/Yield
One 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag yields approximately 0.45 ft³ (0.012 m³)

359
Directions for Use
brush coat of DURALPREP AC for low pressure spray applications. The primer coat of DURALPREP AC must be
allowed to thoroughly dry prior to the application of TAMMS STRUCTURAL MORTAR. Alternately, a Saturated
Surface Dry (SSD) concrete surface can be primed with a scrub coat of TAMMS STRUCTURAL MORTAR for
hand applications. The repair must be made before the scrub coat dries out.
Mixing: Tamms Structural Mortar will require approximately 2.5 to 3.5 qt (2.4 to 3.3 L) of potable water
per 50 lb bag (22.7 kg) to achieve the proper mix consistency. Pour the measured amount of water into a clean
mixing container, then add the Tamms Structural Mortar, and mechanically mix for 3 to 4 minutes. For
hand applications, the lower end of the water range is recommended. Application: Tamms Structural
Mortar may be hand applied or with low-pressure spray equipment commonly used for plastering. It is
always recommended to use spray equipment for larger repairs. Succeeding lifts may be placed after material
reaches initial set. Curing: TAMMS STRUCTURAL MORTAR is a cementitious repair mortar and must be
cured per ACI guidelines using a Euclid Chemical curing/ cure and seal compound or appropriate water curing
methods, such as wet burlap/burlene.
Clean-Up
• Protect stored bags from moisture.
• Protect repair from direct sunlight, wind, and other conditions that could cause rapid drying.
• Minimum ambient and surface temperature should be 40°F (4°C) and rising at the time of application.
• Curing according to ACI guidelines is required for optimum performance and durability.
Rev. 6.11
360
TAMMSCRETE
Polymer-Modified, Cementitious Finishing Material
Description
Vertical Repair
TAMMSCRETE is a single-component, polymer-modified, cement based material used for achieving a smooth
finish on precast, cast-in-place, tilt-up or other unfinished concrete surfaces with imperfections.
• F ill bug holes and honeycombs • B
righten and restore vertical/overhead concrete
• Skimcoats surfaces
Features/Benefits
• F eatheredge to 1/8" (3.1 mm), 1/4" (6.4 mm) when • dd only water
A
extended with sand • Low shrinkage
• Smooth, creamy consistency • Color controlled, concrete gray or white
• User friendly • Long working time
Initial Set min. ASTM C 266....................... 20 to 30
Compressive Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM C 109 Flexural Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM C 78
7 days..................................................3,000 (20.7) 7 days..............................................500 (3.4) . 7 days..............................................500 (3.4)
28 days................................................4,500 (31.0) 28 days............................................750 (5.2). 28 days............................................750 (5.2)
Bond Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM C 1042

7 days...................................................1,000 (6.9)
28 days................................................1,450 (10.0)
TAMMSCRETE
Packaging
TAMMSCRETE is packaged in 40 lb (18.1 kg) poly-lined bags
Shelf Life
Coverage/Yield
One 40 lb (18.1 kg) bag will yield approximately 0.40 ft³ (0.011 m³) and cover approximately 40 ft² (3.7 m²) at
1/8" (3.2 mm) thickness.
Directions for Use
Master Format #:
03 01 30.61
with a scrub coat of TAMMSCRETE. The repair must be made before the scrub coat dries out.
Mixing: Add TAMMSCRETE to the measured water, using only enough water to produce a mixture with
a soft creamy putty-like consistency. Water requirements are 4 to 5 qt (3.79 to 4.73 L) per 40 lb (18.1kg)
bag. Use a power drill with a “jiffy” mixer to mix single bags. For larger applications, a paddle type mortar
mixer is recommended. Do not entrap air while mixing. TAMMSCRETE can be extended with sand for a
coarser texture and deeper repairs. For improved properties replace 25% of the mix water with AKKRO 7T.

361
Application & Finish: Apply TAMMSCRETE to walls with a float or trowel in a smooth uniform coat. Deep repair
areas should be patched to within 1/8" (3.2 mm) of the surface using a compatible repair mortar such as SPEED
CRETE RED LINE. Neat TAMMSCRETE can be used from featheredge to 1/8" (3.2 mm). If extended with sand,
TAMMSCRETE can be applied up to 1/4" (6.4 mm).
Curing: Moist cure for best results in hot windy weather. Do not use solvent based curing compounds.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and application equipment immediately after use with water before TAMMSCRETE hardens.
Hardened TAMMSCRETE will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Store in dry conditions at temperatures between 50°F to 90°F (10°C to 32°C).
• Unextended TAMMSCRETE should be applied to a maximum thickness of 1/8" (3.2 mm) per lift.
• Do not retemper or over trowel.
• Minimum ambient and surface temperature must be 40°F(4°C) and rising at the time of application.
• Protect from rain for 24 hours after application.
Rev. 6.11
362
Verticoat
Two-Component, Trowel Grade Vertical/Overhead Concrete Repair Mortar
Description
Vertical Repair
Verticoat is a polymer-modified cementitious mortar for vertical/overhead concrete and masonry repairs.
It sets rapidly to allow quick, easy repairs of concrete surfaces both interior and exterior. VERTICOAT is a
two-component mortar designed for trowel applied repairs.
• Vertical and overhead repairing of scaled and • Parking structures & bridges
spalled concrete • Retaining walls
• Resurfacing of damaged concrete • Ceilings and sloped surfaces
• Repair of honeycombed surfaces • Large placements
Features/Benefits
• Fast setting for rapid repairs up to 4” (10 cm) • Suitable for both interior and exterior applications
• High compressive strengths • Excellent bond to sound concrete
• Excellent resistance to freeze-thaw cycling and • Compatible with galvanic anodes
deicing salts Can contribute to LEED points
Compressive Strength ASTM C109, 2”(50 mm) cubes Flexural Strength ASTM C348
Age Strength 7 days.....................................1,200 psi (8.3 MPa)
1 day........................................4,000 psi (28 MPa) 28 days...................................1,300 psi (9.0 MPa)
Verticoat
3 days......................................5,000 psi (38 MPa)
7 days......................................6,000 psi (41 MPa) Set Time 70oF (21oC), ASTM C 191
28 days ...................................6,500 psi (45 MPa) Initial Set.......................................approx. 25 min.
Final Set........................................approx. 40 min.
Split Tensile Strength ASTM C496 @ 72oF (22oC)
7 days........................................700 psi (4.8 MPa) Working Time .............................approx. 20 min.
28 days......................................800 psi (5.5 MPa)
Freeze/Thaw Resistance ASTM C666 Procedure A .
Volumetric Resistivity................6,730 ohms/cm 300 cycles Relative Durability Modulus.......>80%
Appearance: VERTICOAT is a free-flowing powder designed to be mixed with a white latex liquid (VERTICOAT
LIQUID). After mixing and placing, the color may initially appear darker than the surrounding concrete. While
this color will lighten up substantially as the VERTICOAT cures and dries out, the repair may always appear
somewhat darker than the surrounding concrete.
Master Format #:
Packaging/Yield
03 01 30.71
VERTICOAT is packaged in a kit containing a 54 lb (24 kg) pail of dry powder and 1gal (3.8 L) of VERTICOAT
LIQUID or as a matched bag and jug unit. Yield: 0.48 ft3 (0.014 m3) per kit.
Shelf Life

363
VERTICOAT attains a bond strength in compliance with ASTM C 1059-91, Type II systems.
Coverage
One unit of VERTICOAT will cover approximately 23 ft2 (2 m2) when placed at an average depth of 1/4” (6 mm).
Directions for Use

achieve a surface profile of at least CSP 6 - 8 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2. Properly clean profiled
to the application of the VERTICOAT repair mortar. Alternately, a Saturated Surface Dry (SSD) concrete surface
can be primed with a scrub coat of VERTICOAT. The repair must be made before the scrub coat dries out.
Mixing: Single units may be mixed with a drill and “jiffy” type mixer. Use a paddle type mortar mixer for large
jobs. NOTE: VERTICOAT HAS A WORKING TIME OF 20 MINUTES. DO NOT MIX MORE MATERIAL THAN
CAN BE USED IN THAT TIME FRAME. All materials should be in the proper temperature range of 60°F (16°C)
to 90°F (32°C). Add the appropriate amount of VERTICOAT LIQUID for the batch size, and then add the dry
product. Mix for 2 to 3 minutes. The mixed product should be quickly transported to the repair area and placed
immediately.
Placement: Place the VERTICOAT while the scrub coat is still wet. Trowel VERTICOAT onto the prepared
surface at a minimum of 1/8” (3 mm). Trowel flush with surface and allow to stiffen. Finish to match the
surrounding concrete surfaces.
To prevent surface cracking, cure the repair mortar with a high solids curing compound, such as SUPER AQUA-
CURE VOX or SUPER DIAMOND CLEAR VOX. (NOTE: A SOLVENT BASED CURING COMPOUND SHOULD
NOT BE USED ON THIS PRODUCT.) Under hot, windy or direct sunlight situations, apply a second coat of
curing compound after the first has dried. If a curing compound is not desired, wet cure for a minimum of three
days.
Clean-Up
• Do not use at temperatures below 45°F (7°C).
• Store material in a dry place, above freezing.
• Cool temperatures slow setting while warm temperatures speed up set times.
• Keep repair from freezing until a minimum strength of 1000 psi (7 MPa) is reached.
Rev. 6.11
364
Verticoat Supreme
Single-Component, Vertical/Overhead Repair Mortar w/ Corrosion Inhibitor
Description
Vertical Repair
Verticoat Supreme is a one-component, microsilica and latex modified, non-sag repair mortar formulated
to provide protection against corrosion. This cement based product is designed for trowel applied vertical and
overhead repairs requiring high performance.
• Vertical and overhead repairs • Parking structures & bridges
• Resurfacing of damaged/deteriorated concrete • Parapet walls
• Marine structures, tunnels and dams • Above and below grade applications
Features/Benefits
• One component for easy mixing and handling • Contains an integral corrosion inhibitor
• Excellent freeze-thaw resistance for difficult climates • Low permeability helps protect rebar from corrosion
• High bond strength provides excellent adhesion • Normal setting times increase workability
• Microsilica and latex modified and reduce waste
Working Time ........................approx. 30 minutes Flexural Strength ASTM C348
Set Times 70°F (21°C) ASTM C266 7 days....................................... 1,200 psi (8.3 MPa)
Initial Set ........................................ approx. 1 hour 28 days......................................1,250 psi (8.6 MPa)
Final Set ................................. approx. 2 1/2 hours
Linear Shrinkage ASTM C157 50% RH @ 73oF(23oC)
Verticoat Supreme
Unit Weight ...........approx. 115 lb/ft (1836 kg/m )
³ ³
3 days..........................................................-0.03%
7 days..........................................................-0.06%
Compressive Strength 14 days........................................................-0.08%
ASTM C109 modified, 2" (50 mm) cubes 28 days........................................................-0.10%
1 day.......................................2,000 psi (13.8 MPa) 56 days........................................................-0.11%
7 days.....................................3,500 psi (24.1 MPa)
28 days...................................5,500 psi (37.9 MPa) Freeze/Thaw Resistance ASTM C666 Procedure A
300 cycles Relative Durability Modulus............90%
Split Tensile Strength ASTM C496
7 days..........................................500 psi (3.4 MPa)
28 days........................................600 psi (4.1 MPa)
Appearance: VERTICOAT SUPREME is a free-flowing powder designed to be mixed with water. After mixing and placing,
the color may initially appear darker than the surrounding concrete. While this color will lighten up substantially as the
VERTICOAT SUPREME cures and dries out, the repair may always appear somewhat darker than the surrounding concrete.
Packaging/Yield
VERTICOAT SUPREME is packaged in 50 lb (22 kg) moisture resistant bags. Yield: 0.48 ft3 (0.014 m3) per bag
Master Format #:
when mixed with 2.75 qts (2.6L) of water.

03 01 30.71
Shelf Life
Canadian Food Inspection Agency, MTQ and MTO

365
Coverage
One unit of VERTICOAT SUPREME will cover approximately 11.5 ft2 (1.1 m2) when placed at an average depth
of 1/2" (13mm).
Directions for Use

the application of VERTICOAT SUPREME. Alternately, a Saturated Surface Dry (SSD) concrete surface can be
primed with a scrub coat of VERTICOAT SUPREME. The repair must be made before the scrub coat dries out.
Mixing: Single bags may be mixed with a drill and “jiffy” type mixer. Use a paddle type mortar mixer for large
amount of water for the batch size 2.5 to 3.0 qt (2.4 to 2.8 L)/bag, then add the dry product. Mix for 3 to 5
minutes. Do not mix more material than can be placed within 20 minutes.
Placement: Place in 1/4" to 2" (6 to 50 mm) lifts. Trowel into place and allow to stiffen before the next lift. If
additional lifts are required after material has hardened, score the surface before proceeding to the next lift.
Curing and Sealing: Curing is required. Cure with a Euclid Chemical high solids, water-based curing compound.
(NOTE: A SOLVENT BASED CURING COMPOUND SHOULD NOT BE USED ON THIS PRODUCT). Under hot,
windy or direct sunlight situations, apply a second coat of curing compound after the first has dried. If a curing
compound is not desired, wet cure for a minimum of three days.
Clean-Up
• Do not allow repairs to freeze until the material has reached a minimum of 1000 psi (7 MPa) compressive
strength.
• In adverse temperatures, follow ACI recommendations for hot/cold weather concrete practices.
• Minimum application thickness 1/4" (6 mm).
• Minimum surface and ambient temperature 45°F (7°C) and rising at time of application.
• For optimum results, condition material to 65°F to 85°F (18°C to 29°C) at least 24 hours prior to use.
Rev. 6.11
366
Repair - Underwater
Repair - Underwater
Aquaseal Epoxy System 369

Speed Crete Blue Line 371
Repair - Underwater
AQUASEAL EPOXY SYSTEM
Underwater Epoxy Coating and Repair Systems
Description
Underwater
The AQUASEAL family of products are two-part, 100% solids epoxy systems specifically designed for underwater
applications on concrete or masonry surfaces. These products are suitable for applications in both fresh and
saltwater. AQUASEAL MV is a high build protective coating for structures below water. AQUASEAL LV is a low
viscosity version that can be mixed with aggregate to form a mortar for repair or can also be used “neat’’ for
crack repair using pressure injection techniques. AQUASEAL GEL can be used neat or with an aggregate for
repairing and grouting of underwater vertical surfaces.
• Coating concrete, steel piers and piles • Grouting and pointing of granite block
• Grouting pile jackets • Anchor bolt grouting
• Underwater pressure injection
Material Properties @ 75°F(24°C) (Values are typical and not necessarily referenced to create specifications).
AQUASEAL MV AQUASEAL LV AQUASEAL GEL
Mixing Ratio A:B by volume 1:1 1:1 1:1
Viscosity A & B mixed, cps 5,000 to 7,000 1,000 to 1,500 Gel
Gel Time 100 grams 60 min 40 min 60 min
Pot Life 2 gal (7.6 L)unit 30 to 40 mins 15 to 30 mins 30 to 35 mins
Tensile Strength min psi (MPa) ASTM D 638
7 Day 3,000 (20.7) 6,500 (44.82) –
Tensile Elongation % 1 to 5 6 to 12 –
AQUASEAL EPOXY SYSTEM

Compressive Strength psi (MPa) ASTM D 695
7 Day 7,000 to 8,000 8,000 to 9,000 7,000 to 8,000
(48.3 to 55.2) (55.2 to 62.1) (48.3 to 55.2)
Compressive Mortar Strength psi (MPa) ASTM C 109
7 Day 9,000 to 10,000 7,000 to 8,000 8,000 to 9,000
(62.1 to 69.0) (48.3 to 55.2) (55.2 to 62.1)
Parts sand, by volume 3 3 1
Shore D Hardness ASTM D 2240, 85 to 90 90 to 95 85 to 90
(3 parts sand) 2,200 (15.2) 3,000 (20.7) –
Tensile Strength psi (MPa) ASTM C 307
(3 parts sand) – 1,250 (8.6) –
Appearance: AQUASEAL epoxies are manufactured in light gray. Special colors are available subject to
minimum quantities.
Packaging
AQUASEAL LV, MV & GEL are packaged in 10 gal (37.9 L) units and 4/1 gal (3.8 L)/case.
Shelf Life
Master Format #:

35 01 00
AQUASEAL LV: ASTM C 881, Type III, Grade 1, Class C
AQUASEAL MV: ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 2, Class C
AQUASEAL GEL: ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, Class C

369
Coverage
ft²/gal (m²/L) AQUASEAL MV AQUASEAL LV AQUASEAL GEL
bond coat 100 (2.45) 150 (3.68) 100 (2.45)
1st coat 50 (1.23) – –
2nd coat 75 (1.84) – –
Epoxy:Aggregate (by vol) – 1:3 1:1
Epoxy:Aggregate per ft³ (.028 m³) – 2.7 gal:8.0 lbs 4.7 gal:4.7 lbs
(10.2 L : 3.6 kg) (17.8 L : 2.1 kg)
Note: AQUASEAL product coverage rates are approximate and for estimating purposes only.
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: Surface must be structurally sound, and clean of laitance, dirt, marine growth, scale, oil,
coatings and other contaminants. All surfaces should be sandblasted, water-blasted or mechanically abraded to
remove all contaminants and provide a roughened, structurally sound substrate. Application of the appropriate
AQUASEAL product should begin promptly to avoid re-contamination of the surface.
Mixing: The AQUASEAL products should be conditioned to 75°F (24°C) for 24 hours prior to mixing above water.
Premix Part A (Base) and Part B (Hardener) individually. Then combine Part A and Part B 1:1 by volume in a clean
container. Mix thoroughly with a slow speed motor and “Jiffy’’ Mixer. Make sure to scrape the sides and bottom of
the mixing container. Do not aerate the mix. Mortar: AQUASEAL LV and AQUASEAL GEL can be mixed with clean,
dry silica aggregate to make a mortar. Gradually add an appropriate aggregate to the mixed binder and blend
thoroughly. Mix Ratios for Mortar: Mixed binder to aggregate (by volume). AQUASEAL LV 1:3 and AQUASEAL GEL
1:1 maximum. (May be varied depending upon desired consistency).
Application: The AQUASEAL products should be applied at water and surface temperatures of at least 55°F
(13°C) and rising. The mixed AQUASEAL system should be transported underwater after mixing. Agitation while
underwater must be minimized. Coating: Apply a thin coat of AQUASEAL MV as a primer, by brush or gloved hand
working and scrubbing the coating into the pores of the substrate in order to displace the water. Follow with a
regular heavy coat of AQUASEAL MV, applied by gloved hand, brush or roller.
Grouting/Patching: Horizontal: Prime by scrubbing the surface with neat AQUASEAL LV in order to displace
the water. Place the prepared AQUASEAL LV mortar by pouring from the bottom and one side and finish with
a trowel. The material’s density should displace the water. Pile Jacket Grouting: Pump or pour the prepared
AQUASEAL LV mortar, starting at the bottom of the jacket and work up. The density of the material should displace
the water from the jacket. Vertical and Overhead: Prime the surface by scrubbing or working the surface with neat
AQUASEAL GEL. Apply by pressing the AQUASEAL GEL neat or mixed with aggregate, firmly on the substrate
with gloved hand or trowel so as to displace the water. Build up the material to the desired thickness. For deep
patching, the repairs should be made in lifts of no more than 1” (2.5 cm) at a time allowing each lift to achieve an
initial set prior to applying the next lift. Anchor Bolt Grouting: Before grouting, ensure that the anchor hole is
free of all debris and foreign objects. Vertical Anchor Bolt Holes: Place the anchor bolt into the hole and pour
the neat AQUASEAL LV around the bolt allowing the air to vent before filling completely. Horizontal Anchor Bolt
Holes: Prime by scrubbing the anchor bolt hole with neat AQUASEAL GEL. Fill approximately half the hole with the
gel, and push the anchor bolt into the hole, twisting the bolt to make sure full contact is made. Pack the hole with
additional gel to finish flush with the substrate.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and application equipment immediately after use with methyl ethyl ketone or acetone. Clean spills and
drips while still wet with solvent. Dried AQUASEAL will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Do not thin or dilute AQUASEAL materials.
• Do not mix and apply below 55°F (13°C).
• Use only clean oven-dry aggregates.
• AQUASEAL is not designed to resist hydrostatic pressure from the negative side.
• Agitation of the product once under water must be kept to a minimum.
• Due to the many variables which can exist under water, a test application under jobsite conditions is recommended
prior to the start of every project to evaluate both application techniques and adhesion after cure.
370
SPEED CRETE BLUE LINE
Rapid Setting, Cement Based Repair Mortar for Underwater
Description
Underwater
SPEED CRETE BLUE LINE is a proprietary formulation of blended portland cements, finely processed select
aggregates, and specific chemical additives designed to provide a rapid set, particularily for underwater use.
SPEED CRETE BLUE LINE undergoes a chemical "hyper hydration" and produces a very stable, low permeable,
cementitious matrix, when combined with the correct amount of water.
• U nderwater and below grade repairs
• Vertical, overhead and horizontal restoration
• Outstanding material for repair of dams, piers, reservoirs, pilings, seawalls, tunnels, sewer pipe and other
underwater surfaces
Features/Benefits
• Initial set in 3 to 5 minutes • D urable in fresh and salt water
• Underwater cure • Placed without forming, at no slump consistency
• High strength • Can be “shaved” to desired contour
Material Properties at 75°F (24°C) Freeze Thaw Durability Factor ASTM C 666
Compressive Strength psi (MPa) ASTM C 109 300 cycles..................................................98.05%
24 hours..............................................3,200 (22.1) Shrinkage ASTM C 157
7 days..................................................4,800 (33.1) 7 days........................................................-0.011%
28 days................................................6,015 (41.5) 28 days......................................................-0.060%
SPEED CRETE BLUE LINE
Set Time Gilmore ASTM C 266 Scaling Resistance ASTM C 672
Initial......................................... approx. 3 to 5 min 25 cycles................................................... 0% loss
Final................................................approx. 20 min Chlorides ASTM D 1411............................... 0.01%
7 days.......................................................600 (4.1)
28 days.....................................................700 (4.8)
Packaging
SPEED CRETE blue line is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) poly-lined bags, and 50 lb (22.7 kg) pails.
Shelf Life
Coverage/Yield
Approximately 0.47 ft³ (0.013 m³) when mixes with 5.5 qt (5.2L) of water per 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag
Directions for Use

Master Format #:
35 01 00.00
free of dust, dirt, paint, efflorescence, oil and all other contaminants. Mechanically abrade the surface to achieve a
surface profile equal to CSP 6 - 7 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2. Properly clean profiled area. Priming:
Clean and prime exposed steel above water with DURALPREP AC. Concrete that is and will remain above water
throughout the repair should be primed with a spray or brush coat of DURALPREP AC. DURALPREP AC must
be allowed to fully dry prior to the application of SPEED CRETE BLUE LINE. Alternately, a Saturated Surface Dry
(SSD) concrete surface can be primed with a scrub coat of SPEED CRETE BLUE LINE. The repair must be made
before the scrub coat dries out.

371
Mixing: SPEED CRETE BLUE LINE will require approximately 5 to 5.5 qt (4.7 to 5.2 L) of potable water per 50
lb (22.7 kg) bag or pail to achieve the proper mix consistency. Pour the measured amount of water into a clean
container. Add the measured amount of SPEED CRETE BLUE LINE, and thoroughly mix for no more than 60
seconds to a stiff, no slump, putty-like consistency. Because of fast initial set time, do not mix more than 50 lb
(22.7 kg) at a time. Mix small quantities of SPEED CRETE BLUE LINE in a clean pail with a hand trowel.
Application: To ensure complete bond with the entire surface, force the SPEED CRETE BLUE LINE firmly
into the Saturated Surface Dry area by hand or with a trowel. Underwater applications may be smoothed or
finished by hand. For out-of-water applications, slightly overfill the patch, and following initial set, shave the
material to conform to the contour of the surrounding surface. Always shave SPEED CRETE BLUE LINE toward
the common bonding edge between the patching material and the existing surface. Cure the material using
standard curing practices. For additional information, contact your local Euclid Chemical representative.
Clean-Up
Clean application tools and mixing equipment with water immediately following use. Hardened SPEED CRETE
BLUE LINE is difficult to remove.
• Store material undercover and away from all moisture.
• Use only potable water with SPEED CRETE BLUE LINE.
• Mix to a stiff, putty-like, no slump consistency.
• Do not re-temper or add sand to SPEED CRETE BLUE LINE.
• Minimum application 3/4” (19 mm), maximum application is 3” (7.62 cm) per lift.
• Do not overwork or overtrowel the material.
• Do not featheredge SPEED CRETE BLUE LINE.
• Clean mixing equipment between batches.
Rev. 6.11
372
Cathodic Protection
Cathodic Protection
Sentinel Galvanic Anodes 375
Sentinel Galvanic Anodes

Cathodic Protection
Sentinel Galvanic Anodes
Self-generating Cathodic Protection
Description
Cathodic Protection
Sentinel Galvanic Anodes are designed to mitigate the corrosion of reinforcing steel in concrete. Their
principal function is to counteract the “anode ring effect” and significantly extend the service life of concrete
repairs. They can also be used in locations where new concrete is placed adjacent to existing chloride-
contaminated or carbonated concrete. In either case, SENTINEL anodes generate an effective current to the
surrounding reinforcing steel, thus protecting the steel from corrosion. SENTINEL GL is the backbone of the
Sentinel family. At 38 grams of pure zinc, SENTINEL GL has provided corrosion protection across the globe
for many years. For projects where more zinc is requested, SENTINEL SILVER provides 100 grams of zinc
protection. For projects requiring the ultimate protection, SENTINEL GOLD contains a massive 200 grams of
zinc.
• Parking decks • Pier & dock supports
• Bridge structures • Balconies
Features/Benefits
• Offers the highest self-generating protective current output of any cathodic protection devices on the market
ensuring long service life and large coverage area
• Unique v-notch design minimizes chipping of concrete assuring easy, efficient placement, reduced labor
requirements and lower installation costs
• Exclusive insulating barrier design will not “dump” current into attachment bar extending the coverage area
and service life of the cathodic protection device
SENTINEL Galvanic Anodes

• Snugly fits against any size rebar, requires no special training and is easily installed with standard tools
• Engineered to provide long lasting service that maximizes the life of the repair and delivers an excellent cost
benefit advantage. SENTINEL anodes are designed to deliver beneficial protective current for 10 to 20 years*,
thus allowing the owner to skip a repair cycle or two
• Galvanized tie wire will not rust and mounts tightly to rebar forming a secure connection
*Current required to completely prevent corrosion of steel in concrete will vary with conditions, as will effective service life
Typical Engineering Data - The following results were developed under laboratory conditions:
Current Output: SENTINEL anodes deliver a protective current equal to or greater than 1.0 milliamps after 90
days. Test performed in an environment that is maintained at room temperature and about 55% relative humidity,
and conducted in a concrete test block containing not more than 0.7 ft² (0.065 m²) of reinforcing steel.
Packaging
SENTINEL GL are packaged 20 units per box. SENTINEL SILVER and SENTINEL GOLD are packaged 10 units
per box.
Shelf Life
Master Format #:
18 months in original, unopened package.

03 21 00
• Test values of the SENTINEL anodes in repair areas indicate complete cathodic protection of the steel rebar
adjacent to the repair based upon standards set by NACE RPO290-90.
• ASTM B 418-01 (Previously ASTM B418-95a) and ASTM A 82 -02 (Previously ASTM A 82-97a).
• Listed under US Patents 6,217,742, 6,958,116, 7,160,443, and 7,488,410.

375
Installation Preparation
he area to be repaired should be prepared in accordance with industry (ICRI & ACI) guidelines. All unsound
T
concrete should be removed from around and behind the steel reinforcement inside the repair area. Sufficient
clearance should be provided between the anode and the substrate concrete (minimum of 3/4" (19 mm) or 1/4"
(6 mm) larger than the top size aggregate in the repair material, whichever is greater).
Where anodes will be attached, clean exposed rebar to bright metal to facilitate a good electrical connection.
Electrical continuity of the rebar within the repair area should be confirmed with the use of a high-impedance
multimeter. When placed on the mV scale, a reading of 1.0 mV or less on the voltmeter indicates good continuity
between reinforcing bars. Electrical discontinuity can be resolved by wiring discontinuous bars to adjacent bars
using steel tie wire.
Spacing Requirements
When using SENTINEL anodes to extend the life of repairs, the anodes should be placed as close as practical
to the edge of the repair area (within 6” or 15cm) while still providing sufficient clearance for the anode to be
completely surrounded by the repair material.
Anode spacing shall be as specified by the designer, but anode spacing must not exceed 30” (75cm) on
center. Spacing is dependent on steel density and the corrosive nature of the environment.
The density of the reinforcing steel is the total surface area of the bar (ft²) within a square foot of concrete
(regardless of depth). Heavy density: >1.0 ft²/ft² Moderate density: .5 to 1.0 ft²/ ft² Light density: <0.5 ft²/ft²
Corrosion levels in the environment effecting the concrete can be broken into two measurable categories:
Light to moderate corrosion levels: < 5 lb/yd3 High

corrosion levels: > 5 lb/yd3
For further information on spacing requirements, please contact the Euclid Chemical Technical Services
Department for additional spacing and specification information.
Installation Procedure
Complete the repair following good concrete repair procedures, taking care not to create any voids around the
anode. Repair material must have a volumetric resistivity below 15,000 ohm/cm after 28 days when maintained
at room temperature and 80% relative humidity. The Euclid Chemical Company recommends that its specially
formulated line of repair materials: EUCOCRETE, EUCOPATCH, CONCRETE-TOP SUPREME, VERTICOAT,
EXPRESS REPAIR, TAMMS FORM & POUR, SPEED CRETE PM, SPEED CRETE RED LINE, TAMMS
STRUCTURAL MORTAR, NS GROUT (fluid) and EUCOSHOT be used with SENTINEL anodes as a complete
corrosion prevention system. For other acceptable product recommendations, contact your local area Euclid
Chemical representative. Caution: Repair materials with significant polymer modification and/or silica fume
content may not be suitable for use with Sentinel anodes. If you are unsure of the volumetric resistivity of the
cover material, please contact Euclid Chemical Technical Services for instructions on creating an allowable “safe
zone” between the anode and the surrounding cementitious material.
Note: See installation procedures included in each box of the SENTINEL anodes.
Although not required, the use of insulating rebar coatings (such as epoxy coatings) in the repair area will
increase the effectiveness and service life of SENTINEL anodes by directing protective current to reinforcing
steel outside the patch. If such coatings are used, coating of rebar should be done after installation of the
anodes, and care must be taken not to apply any coating to the anode itself. In this case, electrical continuity
between the anode wires and the rebar must be checked thoroughly.
Special Condition: SENTINEL anodes can be used in certain circumstances on structural steel. Please consult
the Euclid Chemical Technical Service Department for further information on this type of installation.
SENTINEL anodes should be installed and covered within 48 hours of removal from their original sealed
packaging. Any anodes removed from their original packaging should be protected by temporarily sealing in
plastic (e.g. Ziploc® bags).
DO NOT allow the Sentinel anodes to freeze.
Rev. 6.11
376
Semi-Flexible Pavement
EucoPave 379
EucoPave
Semi-Flexible, Hybrid Pavement System
semi-flexible pavement
Description
EucoPave is a semi-flexible pavement combining the best properties of asphalt and concrete. EucoPave
consists of an open-graded asphalt in which the voids are filled with EucoPave mortar. In this way, the EucoPave
system combines the flexibility and freedom of jointless asphalt and the excellent bearing capacity and wear
resistance of concrete. Suitable for new construction and renovation, EucoPave is well suited for use in heavy
traffic areas, where flexibility, durability and wear resistance are high priorities. EucoPave is applied in a 1.5 to 6
inch (3.8 to 15 cm) layer, and is laid on an adequate base course such as asphalt, lean-mix concrete or standard
concrete. EucoPave can be colored in a variety of shades.
Light Industrial and Airports Harbors Heavily Trafficked
Commercial • Aircraft aprons • Container terminals Areas
• Warehouses • Apron taxiways • Cargo terminals • Bus stops
• Distribution centers • De-icing areas • Bulk terminals • Bus and car
• Retail areas • Push-back areas • Harbor storage and terminals
• Goods terminals • Runway ends warehouse facilities • Roads for heavy
• Industrial floors traffic
• Refueling pads
• Production floors • Road crossings
Features/Benefits
• Simple and rapid installation • Excellent driving and walking comfort
• Attractive solution in areas where demands for • Joint-free pavement & flooring
strength, durability and chemical resistance • Freeze/thaw resistance
cannot be fulfilled with concrete or asphalt alone • Minimum maintenance
• Solar reflectance reduces heat island effect • Early trafficking
EUCOPAVE
• Economical solution due to low installation costs Can contribute to LEED points
and short construction process
The properties below depend on curing temperature.
Data given is typical for curing at 68°F (20°C). EucoPave asphalt with 8/11 crushed aggregate.
EucoPave Mortar
Property Standard Value 1 day 7 days 28 days
Compressive Strength,psi (MPa) BS 1881 6,000 (41) 9,800 (68) 13,000 (90)
Flexural Strength, psi (MPa) EN 196 1,015 (7) 1,500 (10) 1,600 (11)
Density, lb/ft3 (kg/m3) 135 (2,171)
EucoPave System - Mortar and Asphalt

Property Standard Value 1 day 7 days 28 days
700-800 1,000-1,450 1,160-1,740
Master Format #:
Compressive Strength, psi (MPa) BS 1881

(4.8-5.5) (6.9-10.0) (8.0-12.0)
32 12 19
Flexural Strength, psi (MPa) EN 196 507

1,160,000
Modulus of Elasticity, psi (MPa)
(7998)
Freeze/Thaw Resistance SS 137244 Very Good
Free From
Wear Resistance Classification
Dust

379
Packaging
50 lb (22.6 kg) and 3000 lb (1360 kg) bags.
Shelf Life
One year in original, unopened package.
Coverage
Per 1” (2.5 cm) of thickness, the consumption of EucoPave is 3 lb/ft2 (14.6 kg/m2).
Directions for Use

Applying EucoPave – New Construction
General Specification
Given a good supporting subgrade, EucoPave is easily The base course is sealed with bitumen
and quickly installed. The total pavement design, in emulsion.
terms of subbase, gravel, asphalt or lean mix concrete The open-graded asphalt is laid (special mix).
and EucoPave topping, is determined by the loads to The dry EucoPave mortar is mixed with water in
be applied. a special continuous flow mixer or batch mixer.
The open-graded asphalt is filled with
The EucoPave pavement is installed onto a layer of
EucoPave mortar.
lean mix concrete or asphalt. This layer is sprayed with
a bitumen emulsion, which seals the surface. The surface is finished with a rubber scraper.
The next step is to apply the open-graded asphalt. The Finally, the EucoPave is cured with a Euclid
asphalt is prepared in an ordinary asphalt plant and Chemical curing compound.
laid with a traditional asphalt paver. A non-vibrating
steel wheel roller is then used to produce a uniform
and even surface. Applying EucoPave – Renovation
When the asphalt has cooled down, the EucoPave The simple and rapid application process makes
mortar can be applied. The mortar is supplied as a EucoPave suitable for renovating old pavements.
homogeneous dry powder and is mixed with water It is equally effective whether the original material
with a continuous flow mixer or a batch mixer. The is asphalt, concrete or interlocking paving blocks.
mortar is pumped onto the open-graded asphalt and Once severe imperfections such as holes, cracks
worked into the surface with rubber scrapers. and joints have been filled or repaired, the
Immediately after the asphalt is filled with mortar, the EucoPave can be laid and the renovated pavement
EucoPave is sprayed with Euclid Curing Compound to can normally be trafficked after 24 hours at 68°F
prevent the surface from drying out. The surface can (20°C).
normally be used after 24 hours at 68°F (20°C).
After laying EucoPave, the surface must be protected against drying out. If a smooth surface is desired, Euclid
Curing Compound should be sprayed on. If the texture in the EucoPave does not provide a sufficiently skid-
resistant surface, the EucoPave topping may be shot blasted.
When sprayed with a Euclid Chemical curing compound, the surface will have an unevenly pigmented
appearance. As a natural part of the material’s characteristics a fine pattern of map cracks, which has no
influence on its function, will appear on the surface.
The standard color of EucoPave mortar is light gray, but it is also available in other colors.
Clean-Up
Clean application tools and mixers with water immediately after use.
Rev. 6.11
380
Waterproofing & Dampproofing
Asphaltic Dampproofing
Dehydratine #75 383
Cementitious Systems
Concrete Finisher 385
Iron Waterpeller 387
Speed Plug 389
Tamms SBC 391
Tamoseal 393
Tamoseal Foundation Coating 395
Crystalline Waterproofing
Hey’Di K-11 397
Hey’Di Powder X System 399
Urethane – Chemical Grouts

Dural Aqua-Dam 401
Dural Aqua-Dam 100 403
Dural Aqua-Dam 200F 405
Dural Aqua-Dam LV 407
Dural Aqua-Fil 409
Dural Mud Lock 411
Dural Pump Rinse 413
VANDEX SYSTEMS
Cementitious Coatings
Vandex BB 75 415
Vandex Cemelast 417
Cementitious Repair Mortar

Vandex Uni Mortar 1 ZSR 419
Cementitious Waterproofing
Vandex Quickbinder 421
Vandex Super/Super White 423
Joint & Crack Tapes

Vandex Construction Joint Tape 425
Vandex Flextape 427
DEHYDRATINE 75
EMULSIFIED ASPHALT DAMPROOFING COMPOUND
Description
Waterproofing
DEHYDRATINE 75 is a VOC compliant, water-based compound designed to dampproof concrete and masonry.
The DEHYDRATINE formulation is derived from mineral colloid, asphalt-based clay emulsions, which utilize a
water carrier. It can be used above and below grade. DEHYDRATINE 75 is highly effective and is easily applied
by trowel or spray.
Features/Benefits
DEHYDRATINE 75 is an effective dampproofing product on roofing materials such as fiber glass fabric and
metal (see Roofing under Application Techniques). DEHYDRATINE 75 can be used over most metals to protect
against rust and corrosion. It has good weathering and abrasion resistance. It resists flow or sag even when
exposed to high ambient temperatures. Other advantages include:
• Solvent free
• Environmentally safe
• Adheres tenaciously to damp or “green” surfaces
• Breathes to allow water vapor to escape and reduce blistering
• Flexible and will not crack as a result of normal contraction & expansion
• Asbestos free
ASTM D 1227 Type III Appearance: DEHYDRATINE 75 is black.
ASTM D 1187 Type I
DEHYDRATINE 75
Packaging
DEHYDRATINE 75 is packaged in 5 gal (18.9 L) and 55 gal (208 L) containers.
Shelf Life
Coverage
The following coverage rates are approximate and for estimating purposes only. Surface temperature, porosity
and texture will determine actual material requirements:
One Coat Application ft²/gal (m²/L)
(not more than) 33 (0.81)
Two Coat Application
1st coat 50 (1.23)
2nd coat 50 (1.23)
Master Format #:
Directions
Directions for
for Use
07 11 13
Use
Surface Preparation: Surface must be structurally sound, clean, free of dust, dirt, mortar, residue curing and
parting compounds, and other contaminants. Use of wire brushes, sandblasting or other mechanical means is
recommended. Prior to application, surface defects, voids, joints or cracks must be properly sealed or filled. Dry
surfaces should be dampened with water and kept damp before application.

383
Mixing: DEHYDRATINE 75 does not normally require mixing.
Application: Apply by soft bristle brush or suitable spray equipment at a rate of not more than 33 ft²/gal (.81
m²/L) in a single coat. When two coats are applied especially in hot weather when it may be difficult to keep the
surface damp, the first coat may be diluted with up to 10% of clean, cool water. The first coat should be dry to
the point where it is tacky to the touch before the second coat is applied.
ackfilling: Do not backfill until the film has dried (at least 24 to 48 hours after application). Backfilling should
B
be accomplished as soon as possible (after 24 to 48 hours) to protect the film from damage by outside sources.
Place backfill with care so that the film will not be ruptured.
Spraying: Use an air operated piston pump (such as Graco) with a 9:1 ratio and a pole gun with a 3/32" (0.2
cm) tip. A 3/4" (1.9 cm) ID material hose and a 1/2" (1.3 cm) ID air hose from the pump to the gun is preferred
for most applications.
oofing: DEHYDRATINE 75 can be used with fiberglass fabric for built-up waterproofing and roofing applications.
R
DEHYDRATINE 75 has excellent rust inhibiting qualities and can be applied as a coating over metal roofs. It has
good weathering properties and resistance to corrosive fumes and smoke.
Clean-Up
Clean tools or equipment with mineral spirits immediately following use. Clean drips while still wet.
DEHYDRATINE 75 will not harm glass or metal by etching, pitting, or staining; however, it will leave a residue
which is easily removed with a clean cloth and petroleum based paint thinner. Stronger solvents may be required
to remove the residue if allowed to remain on the surface. Once final set has occurred, DEHYDRATINE 75 may
be impossible to remove from surfaces. Flush rubber surfaces with water immediately following contact with
DEHYDRATINE 75.
• Do not apply DEHYDRATINE 75 to surfaces that are to receive a concrete overlay or topping, or be sealed with
another type of sealer.
• Mask or protect the sides of joints that are to receive DEHYDRATINE 75.
• Applications of Dehydratine 75 at higher coverage rates than recommended above may result in improper
drying.
• Do not allow to freeze.
Rev. 6.11
384
CONCRETE FINISHER
Cement Based Decorative and Dampproofing Coating
Description
Waterproofing
CONCRETE FINISHER is a portland cement based dampproofing coating.
• Interior/exterior • Precast • B
rick • S tucco
• A
bove/below grade • Masonry units • S
tone • Cement plaster
Features/Benefits
• T
rowel or spray applied • P
rovides uniform surface textures and color
• E
xcellent adhesion • H
ighly durable
• B
ecomes an integral part of the wall • B
reathable, decorative finish
• F
ills and levels surface • E
liminates the high cost of hand rubbed finishing
Material Properties @ 75°F (24°C) Durability Factor, ASTM C666
Compressive Strength, ASTM C109 psi (MPa) 300 cycles.........................................................97.6%
7 days..................................................... 2,700 (18.6) Chloride Content, ASTM C144 0.0098%
28 days................................................... 4,000 (27.6) Fungus growth Fed Test 141
Flexural Strength, ASTM C348 psi (MPa) Method 6271-1 ............................................. resistant
7 days.......................................................... 400 (2.8) Weatherometer ASTM G 26 6000 hours:
28 days........................................................ 850 (5.9) No crazing, cracking, chipping,or flaking. Light chalk
Tensile Strength, ASTM C190 psi (MPa) and color change. No other deterioration.
7 days.......................................................... 310 (2.1) Salt Spray Resistance
5% solution @ 90°F (32°C) 300 hour exposure:
28 days........................................................ 398 (2.7) No adhesion loss or deterioration at completion of the test
Impact Resistance, ASTM D2794 in. lbs.................28
CONCRETE FINISHER
Pull-off Strength, ASTM D4541 psi(MPa).... 310 (2.1)
Absorption, ASTM C67 Appearance: CONCRETE FINISHER is available in White,
24 hour soak.......................................................4.9% and Oyster Gray. It is also available in Gray, which should
5 hour boil...........................................................5.3% be used as a base coat for other finish coats. Various
Freeze-Thaw Resistance, % textures may be developed by the applicator using either
50 cycles.................................................-0.67% Loss trowel and float or spray equipment during application.
Packaging
CONCRETE FINISHER is packaged in 70 lb (31.8 kg) poly-lined bags.
Shelf Life
Coverage
One 70 lb (31.8 kg) bag of CONCRETE FINISHER will cover approximately 55 ft² to 70 ft² when applied at 1/8”
(5.1m² to 6.5m² at 3.2 mm). Leveling uneven surfaces will require more material.
Note: Coverage rates are approximate and for estimating purposes only. Surface texture, porosity, and thickness of coating will
determine actual material requirements. Apply samples to all surfaces to be protected. Obtain approval of Architect or Owner for
color, texture, and coverage before proceeding with work. Retain sample or mock-up through completion of project.
Master Format #:
Directions for Use

07 11 16
Surface Preparation: Surface must be structurally sound, and free of contaminants including dust, dirt,
curing compounds, form release agents, oil, paint, and old coatings. Cure new concrete and masonry
surfaces 28 days. Provide an absorptive surface by abrading all substrates including smooth precast or formed
concrete. Concrete honeycombs, cavities, joints, cracks, voids, tie holes, and other defects must be opened
and routed to sound material. Rout broken or uneven brick or block to sound material. Remove form marks
and other protrusions to prevent “show through”. Repair surface defects, cracks, and voids before applying
CONCRETE FINISHER.

385
Cure patches or other surface preparations 1/2” (1.3 cm) or less a minimum of 24 hours before applying
CONCRETE FINISHER. Deeper fills will require longer curing periods. Dampen surface with potable water
immediately before CONCRETE FINISHER application.
Mixing: CONCRETE FINISHER must be mechanically mixed using a slow speed motor and mixing blade to
thoroughly disperse ingredients. A mortar mixer may be used for larger quantities. Do not aerate the CONCRETE
FINISHER mix. Make mixing liquid by blending 3 parts potable water with 1 part AKKRO-7T in a clean container.
Pour approximately one half of the required mixing liquid into an empty, clean container, and begin slow speed
power mixing while slowly adding CONCRETE FINISHER. Gradually add more CONCRETE FINISHER and
mixing liquid to bring the mixture to the consistency of a heavy, completely blended “pancake batter.” Stop
mixing, and allow material to “fatten” for 10 minutes. When “fattened”, remix, and if necessary, add more mixing
liquid to adjust mixture to proper application consistency. One 70 lb (31.8 kg ) bag of CONCRETE FINISHER will
require approximately 8 to 9 qt (7.6 L to 8.6 L) of mixing liquid when mixed for spray consistency, and 6 to 7 qt
(5.7 L to 6.7 L) when mixed to trowel consistency. For estimating purposes, one bag of CONCRETE FINISHER
will require approximately 2 to 3 qt (1.9 L to 2.8 L) of AKKRO-7T.
Application: Dampen surface with potable water before starting application. CONCRETE FINISHER should
be applied while the wall is damp. Trowel: Used when the wall surface is uneven, and when it is necessary
to level and hide varying surface textures. Trowel apply a base coat, and when partially set, double back with
additional material. After the surface has sufficiently set, lightly float to an even, uniform texture using a sponge
rubber float. Do not exceed 3/8”(0.95 cm) for each lift. To prevent “shadowing” or “photographing” caused by
joints, small holes, or uneven absorption, the first coat must cure a minimum of 5 days before the finish coat
is applied. Proper trowel and float procedures will result in an even, uniform, attractive sand finish. A complete
range of textures can be obtained by using standard plaster finishing techniques. Spray: Used primarily when
large areas are to be coated and when it is not necessary to level the wall. Spray applications will seal and
decorate, but will not level the surface or fill holes. Some variance in the spray texture can be expected. Apply
a light spray coat to retard surface absorption. Then, double back with additional material before the base coat
has lost its sheen. For best results, use an overlapping, circular spray pattern. Do not exceed 3/8” (0.95 cm)
for each lift. Two coats of CONCRETE FINISHER will be necessary to prevent “shadowing” or “photographing”
caused by joints, small holes, or uneven absorption. Cure the first coat for a minimum of 5 days before the final
coat is applied. Use only high production plaster spray machines or hopper type texture spray guns. Do not use
high pressure or airless spray equipment. The AKKRO-7T to water ratio may require adjustment when spraying
CONCRETE FINISHER.
Clean-Up
Clean mixing and application equipment with water immediately after use. Clean splatter or spills with water
before material sets. CONCRETE FINISHER is a cementitious product containing an acrylic additive, and if
allowed to dry on the surface, removal becomes extremely difficult.
• Do not apply to frozen or frost filled surfaces or when temperature is below, or expected to fall below 40°F
(4°C) in 24 hours.
• Do not use on traffic bearing surfaces.
• Do not fill open cisterns, tanks, reservoirs, etc. with water for at least 7 days.
• When using CONCRETE FINISHER containing AKKRO-7T in enclosed tanks or reservoirs, ensure that
adequate ventilation is available during application and the total curing period.
• Allow minimum 24 hours drying time before application of a liquid polymer decorative coating.
• CONCRETE FINISHER is not recommended where hydrostatic pressure is present.
• Some colors of CONCRETE FINISHER may chalk or show water marks upon weathering.
Rev. 6.11
386
IRON WATERPELLER
Catalyzed Metallic Waterproofing Treatment
Description
Waterproofing
IRON WATERPELLER is a mixture of clean commercial pulverized cast iron mixed with a chemical oxidizing
agent which acts as a catalyst and causes the iron particles to rust and increase in size. IRON WATERPELLER
is jobsite mixed with cement and water. This product is used as a multiple-coat surface treatment to waterproof
concrete and masonry surfaces.
• Interior/exterior below grade
• Floors
•  Wall slabs
• Foundations
• Increased water resistance of storage tanks
• Elevator pits
Features/Benefits
• Easy to use
• Cures to a water-tight surface coating
• Excellent bond to block and concrete
IRON WATERPELLER is formulated with catalyzed iron for safety and effectiveness.
IRON WATERPELLER®
VOC Content ............................................. 0 g/L
Chemical Analysis Percent by Weight Specified Typical
Oxidizing agent as Na Chloride 3% to 5% 4%
Total Iron 87.3%
Magnetic Iron 85.0% min 86.1%
Iron Oxide 5.0% max 1.2%
Graded Sieve Analysis (% passing)
#20 screen 100 100
#35 screen 95 to 100 100
#40 screen 90 to 100 100
#60 screen 65 to 100 95.1
#100 screen 45 to 70 53.9
#200 screen 10 to 25 21.7
Appearance: IRON WATERPELLER is a black, fine iron aggregate. When mixed with water and cement, the
in-place appearance resembles concrete. A protective coating of cement and aggregate is recommended to
prevent excess oxidation of the iron. Some speckling from the oxidation of the iron is normal.
Packaging
Master Format #:
IRON WATERPELLER is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) pails.

07 16 19
Shelf Life
Tested in accordance with Specification GSA Washington, D.C. 65-170-43, Section 13.

387
Coverage
A total of 30 lb (13.6 kg)) of IRON WATERPELLER is required to waterproof each 100 ft2 (9.3m2) of area. This
quantity is applied as a four-coat application (including bond coat).
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: The block or concrete must be clean and sound. All oil, dirt, debris and unsound materials
must be removed. The surface must be prepared mechanically using a wire brush, scraping or chipping. The final
step in cleaning should be the complete removal of all residue by vacuum cleaning or pressure washing. All block
and concrete should possess an open surface texture with all curing compounds and sealers removed. Repair
all cracks and holes with SPEED PLUG. Pre-dampen the surface prior to application of IRON WATERPELLER.
Bonding: After the surface has been prepared, prime all areas with a bond coat of IRON WATERPELLER. Place
the IRON WATERPELLER coating on the wet bond coat before it dries.
Bond coat: After the surface has been prepared and pre-dampened, prime all areas with a bond coat. For a
bond coat, mix the product as instructed but add an additional 1 to 2 pints (0.5 to 1.0 L) of water per pail. Broom
the bond coat on to the prepared and pre-dampened concrete. Apply the IRON WATERPELLER treatment
before the bond coat has dried.
Waterproof Coat:
Mixing: Mix 2 parts by weight IRON WATERPELLER with 1 part by weight portland cement. Add enough water
for a brushable consistency. Deep areas may be filled with a mixture of 25 lb (11.3 kg) portland cement, 50 lb
(22.7 kg) silica sand and 25 lb (11.3 kg) of IRON WATERPELLER.
Placement: A total of three waterproof coats of product should be brush applied to ensure a waterproofing
treatment. Fog mist each layer to ensure oxidation will begin and allow each layer to dry (6 to 8 hours) before
the application of the next layer.
Finishing/Walls: Treated surfaces, except floors, should receive a protective coating, of a minimum 1/8" (3 mm)
thickness, consisting of one (1) part by weight portland cement and two and a half (2 1/2) parts by weight fine
aggregate, applied directly over the treatment. The protective coating, unless indicated to receive other finishes,
shall be floated to a smooth, level surface. Where other finishes are scheduled, the protective coating should be
scratched or roughened to a granular texture.
Finishing/Floors: Immediately after the application of the last coat of metallic waterproofing treatment on floors,
apply a protective topping of 1" (25.4 mm) thickness minimum, since IRON WATERPELLER is not intended for
use as a wearing surface.
Clean-Up
• Keep repair from freezing until a minimum age of three days is reached.
Rev. 6.11
388
SPEED PLUG
Quick Setting Hydraulic Cement
Description
Waterproofing
SPEED PLUG is a quick setting hydraulic cement compound used to instantly stop running water or seepage
in masonry or concrete. SPEED PLUG is ready to use and requires only the addition of water before plugging
and sealing active leaks. SPEED PLUG is available in a standard 1-3 minute set time formula, as well as a faster
setting 45 second version and a slower setting 3-5 minute formulation.
Used above or below grade, interior or exterior to stop seepage and flowing water on:
• Concrete and masonry walls and floors
• Dams, swimming pools, cisterns, reservoirs, water tanks and manhole repairs
Features/Benefits
• N on-shrinking, non-metallic and non-corrosive • H igh strength
• Initial set in 1 to 3 minutes • Controlled expansion
• Stops running water or seepage leaks • Can be applied underwater
Test Method Expansion/Shrinkage ASTM C 157
Compressive Strength ASTM C 109 psi (MPa) 28 Day Test Chg. Length
1 hour 1,000 (6.9) Moist Room 100% RH 0.103%
1 day 1,500 (10.3) Dry Room 50% RH -0.180%
28 days 3,000 (20.7)
Flexural Strength ASTM C 348 Appearance: SPEED PLUG is a gray
SPEED PLUG
7 days 300 (2.1) hydraulic cement compound.
28 days 350 (2.4)
Packaging
SPEED PLUG is packaged in 4/10 lb (4.5 kg) tubs/case; 20 lb (9.2 kg) and 50 lb (22.7 kg) pails.
Shelf Life
Coverage/Yield
1 lb (0.45 kg) of SPEED PLUG yields approximately 17 in³ (171 cm³) and will repair approximately 30” of a 3/4”
x 3/4” (1 kg for 155 cm of 2 cm x 2 cm) crack.
Master Format #:
Directions for Use

03 01 30.71
a surface profile equal to CSP >3 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2. Properly clean profiled area.
Priming: Clean and prime exposed steel with DURALPREP AC and allow to fully dry prior to the application of
SPEED PLUG.

389
Mixing: Pour potable water into a clean mixing container and gradually add SPEED PLUG. Use approximately
1 quart of water to 8 to 9 lbs (3.8 to 4.3 kg/L) of material. Mix rapidly with a trowel to the consistency of stiff
putty with no slump for no more than 30 seconds. SPEED PLUG will flash set in 1 to 3 minutes. Properly mixed,
SPEED PLUG can be hand formed into a ball.
Application: SSD areas for repair with potable water immediately before application of SPEED PLUG.
General Patching: Force SPEED PLUG into the crack or hole by hand or with a trowel. Rapidly fill to the full
depth of the opening. Patching Active Leaks: Start at the top of the crack or hole, and force the SPEED PLUG
to the full depth of the prepared area. Apply direct pressure to the new patch until the SPEED PLUG has taken
a firm set. Mix fresh material, and continue patching toward the area of the greatest pressure. When extreme
water pressure is encountered, physically hold the mixed SPEED PLUG with a hand against the leak and apply
continuous pressure until the SPEED PLUG has set, and the water has stopped running. Do not use a twisting
motion. Floor-Wall Patching: Follow above methods for the specific conditions encountered. Use a rounded
tool to force the SPEED PLUG into the joint, and construct a 45o transitional cove between the floor and wall at
the same time. Expansion/Contraction Cracks: Do not use SPEED PLUG to treat dynamic cracks. Consult
the technical data sheets for the DURAL AQUA LINE of chemical/urethane grouts.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and mixing equipment with water immediately after use.
• Do not retemper SPEED PLUG. Do not apply SPEED PLUG to frozen or frost filled surfaces.
• Do not twist SPEED PLUG into the hole while plugging running water leaks.
• In warm weather, mix SPEED PLUG with ice water. In cold weather, mix SPEED PLUG with warm water and
use a torch to preheat the area to be patched.
• Do not prewet in cold weather.
• Do not use in dynamic (moving) cracks or expansion joints. Use a chemical grout from the DURAL AQUA
Line
Rev. 6.11
390
TAMMS SBC
Cement Based, Fiber-Reinforced Waterproofing Coating
Description
Waterproofing
TAMMS SBC is a trowel or spray applied, decorative, fiber reinforced, portland cement based, breathable, waterproofing
coating. The high flexural strength of TAMMS SBC provides excellent resistance to cracking and superior durability
against weathering. TAMMS SBC is a proprietary formulation of special cements, finely graded aggregates, graded
glass fibers, plasticizers, and waterproofing compounds.
Tamms sbc is applied exterior or interior, above or below grade to:
• Concrete block •Precast or formed concrete •Stucco
• Brick •Stone •Cement plaster
Features/Benefits
TAMMS SBC conforms to, and is used to construct unit masonry walls without mortar. TAMMS SBC is crack resistant
and used as a waterproof parge coat for below grade walls. It is used to level and fill surface holes and voids. TAMMS
SBC is an excellent base coat for liquid acrylic polymer coatings such as TAMMSCOAT, and flexible polymer coatings
such as TAMMOLASTIC.
Compressive Strength ASTM C 109 Flexural Strength ASTM C 348
1 day 1,950 psi (13.4 MPa) 3 day 930 psi (6.4 MPa)
Appearance: TAMMS SBC is available in natural cement gray, and natural cement white. Application by trowel and
float, or spray equipment allows the applicator to produce textures ranging from smooth to coarse. For custom color
information, contact your local Euclid Chemical representative.
Packaging
TAMMS SBC is packaged in 60 lb (27.2 kg) poly-lined bags.
Shelf Life
TAMMS SBC
Coverage
One 60 lb (27.2 kg) bag of TAMMS SBC will yield 40 to 50 ft² (3.72 to 4.65 m²) applied at approximately 1/8“ (3.22
mm) thickness. Leveling uneven surfaces will require additional material. For estimating purposes, 12 to 14 lbs of
TAMMS SBC per yd² (6.52 to 7.61 kg/m²) will generally result in a finished coating 1/8” to 1/4” (3.22 to 6.4 mm) thick.
Note: The coverage rates are approximate and for estimating purposes only. Surface texture, porosity, and thickness of coating
determines the total amount of TAMMS SBC required. Apply a field sample to all materials to be coated. Obtain approval of
Architect or Owner for the final color, texture, waterproofing, and coverage rate before proceeding with work. Retain sample
or mock-up until work is completed.
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: Surface must be structurally sound, clean, and free of contaminants including paint, sealers,
and efflorescence. Cure new concrete for a minimum of 28 days. Remove form marks and other protrusions to
prevent “show through”. Repair surface defects, cracks, and voids before applying. Cure patches and other surface
preparations for a minimum of 24 hours before coating. Provide an absorptive surface on all substrates, including
smooth precast or formed concrete by abrading the surface. Dampen surface with potable water immediately before
Master Format #:
TAMMS SBC application. Apply TAMMS H/P PRIMER to very dense, very smooth, or questionable surfaces. Do not
pre-wet the surface when a bonding agent is used. For maximum performance and adhesion, use AKKRO-7T with the
07 16 13
mixing liquid.
Mixing: Mix TAMMS SBC in a slow speed rotary mixer with rubber tipped blades, to thoroughly disperse all ingredients
and obtain a uniform consistency. Do not aerate mix. Use only potable water for mixing and for dampening the surface.
To improve physical properties, adhesion, and curing of TAMMS SBC, blend 1 part AKKRO-7T with 3 parts water to
use as the mixing liquid. With the mixer running, add one half of the required liquid, and then slowly add TAMMS SBC.
Gradually add more TAMMS SBC and liquid to obtain a smooth, workable consistency. Limit the mixing time to 3 to 4
minutes to avoid damage to the glass fibers. Stop the mixer, and allow material to “fatten” for 5 to 10 minutes. When
“fattened,” restart mixer to check the uniformity of the mix.

391
If necessary, add mixing liquid to bring the mix to the proper trowel or spray application consistency. One 60 lb
(27.2 kg) bag of TAMMS SBC will require approximately 6 qt to 7 qt (5.7 L to 6.6 L) of mixing liquid. When using
AKKRO-7T in the mix, each bag of TAMMS SBC will require approximately 1.5 qt to 2 qt (1.4 L to 1.9 L) of AKKRO-7T.
Application: Uniformly dampen surface with potable water immediately before starting application. Do not saturate
substrate. Re-dampen the surface as needed during application. Trowel Application: Apply TAMMS SBC with a steel
trowel. Use sufficient pressure and material to ensure a good bond, uniform thickness, and complete coverage of the
surface. Maintain a minimum thickness of 1/8” (3.2 mm) for each application. When heavier coats are required, build up to
the desired thickness in successive applications. Allow 24 hours drying time between coats. Do not exceed a maximum
thickness of 3/16“ (4.8 mm). Spray Application: Dampen the wall as indicated above. Apply TAMMS SBC by spray
when large areas are to be coated. For best results, use an overlapping, circular spray pattern. The finished two-coat
system should be approximately 1/4” to 5/16” thick (6.4 mm to 8.0 mm). Structural Application: Spray applications of
TAMMS SBC may be used to convey large amounts of material to the wall; however, the material must be steel troweled to
ensure a firm mechanical bond of the base coat to the surface. This method is also used for surface bonding application.
Additional coats may be spray troweled or float finished, or left with the spray applied texture. Decorative Application:
Spray apply TAMMS SBC when it is not necessary to level the wall (Spray applications will seal and decorate, but
will not level the surface or fill voids). Some variance in the spray texture can be expected. Apply a light spray coat of
TAMMS SBC to retard surface absorption. Then, double back with the finish coat before the first coat has lost its sheen.
Surface Bonding: TAMMS SBC may be used to build unit masonry walls without mortar. Concrete block must be dry,
clean, sound, and free of contaminants that would prevent proper adhesion. Level the first course of block in a full
bed of mortar or TAMMS SBC. Stack the remaining courses of block, without mortar, in a running bond pattern. To
plumb and level the wall, use mortar or TAMMS SBC. Do not use wood shims or sand for leveling. Use TAMMS SBC
or mortar to fill gaps 1/4” (6.4 mm) or larger. Lay the top course of the wall in a full mortar bed. Dampen wall with
potable water immediately before the application. Trowel on a minimum 1/8” (3.2 mm) thickness of TAMMS SBC.
Continue to wet the wall as needed to maintain a damp surface ahead of the trowel application. Should the surface dry
out, and the material start to pull, dampen the wall again. For surface bonding construction, TAMMS SBC must be
applied to both sides of the wall. Apply the material to each complete wall section without interruption. When this
is not possible, cut the material straight and square in the middle of one course to form a butt joint, so that the
horizontal joint will not be overlapped when the application is resumed. Do not exceed 45 ft²/60 lb bag (6.5 m²/27.2 kg).
Curing: To prevent the development of shrinkage cracks from very rapid drying, the finished work should
be periodically fog spray cured with water for 24 to 48 hours following application. Weather and jobsite
conditions will dictate the amount and frequency of dampening required. Protect finished work from rain
and other adverse weather conditions for 48 hours following application. Cold Weather Protection: When
temporary heaters are required to maintain temperature, ensure that the heat and fumes face away from the
finished work. Use fans for proper air movement and circulation as needed. Hot Weather Protection: Protect
surfaces with wind screens and shade screens during periods of high temperatures, low humidity, sun, or wind.
Clean-Up
Clean mixing and application equipment with water immediately after use. Clean splatter or spills with water before
material sets. TAMMS SBC with AKKRO-7T in the mixing liquid becomes extremely difficult to remove if allowed to dry
on a surface.
• Do not retemper TAMMS SBC.
• Spray using only high production plaster spray machines or hopper-texture spray guns.
• Do not use high pressure or airless spray equipment.
• Spray applications should be performed only by experienced applicators.
• Protect application surface during weather extremes.
• Do not apply TAMMS SBC to frozen or frost filled surfaces, or when temperatures are expected to fall below 40°F (4 °C)
or rise above 100°F (37°C) in 72 hours without proper protection and temperature control.
• Do not deviate from curing recommendations.
• When using TAMMS SBC containing AKKRO-7T in enclosed tanks or reservoirs, ensure that adequate
ventilation is available during application and the full curing period.
• Do not fill open cisterns, tanks, etc. with water for a minimum of 7 days. Wait a minimum of 72 hours after
curing before applying a decorative coating.
Rev. 6.11
392
TAMOSEAL
Cement Based Waterproofing and Decorative Finish
Description
Waterproofing
TAMOSEAL is a cement-based, polymer-modified material designed to waterproof and decorate concrete and
masonry. When mixed with AKKRO-7T or FLEX-CON acrylic admixture, it becomes suitable to seal vertical and
light duty horizontal surfaces.
• Concrete and block wall foundations • Reservoirs
• M anholes • Balconies
• Water tanks • Interior/exterior
Features/Benefits
• Waterproofs and decorates • D
urable
• T enacious bond • B
reathable
• Becomes an integral part of substrate • Slightly flexible to seal static cracks
Material Properties @ 75°F (24°C), 50% RH Water Permeance ASTM E 514 (after coating leaking wall)
Compressive Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM C 109 Extent of damp area: 72 hours...................... 0.0%
7 days..................................................4,500 (31.0) Maximum leakage: 1 hour.............................none
28 days................................................6,400 (44.1) Leakage rate ml/hr.........................................none
Flexural Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM C 348 Permeance rating.................................... Excellent
7 days.......................................................350 (2.4) Salt Spray Resistance 300 hour exposure at 5%
28 days.....................................................810 (5.6) solution at 90°F (32 °C) resulted in no adhesion loss or
Tensile Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM C 190 deterioration at completion of test.
TAMOSEAL
7 days.......................................................330 (2.3) Fungus Growth Resistance Fed Test 141,
28 days.....................................................390 (2.7) Method 6272............................................... Resistant
Absorption, % ASTM C 67 Resistance to Wind Driven Rain
24 hour soak..................................................4.4% Fed. Spec TT-C-00555 ........................................ Excellent
5 hour boil......................................................3.9% Weatherometer ASTM G 96 6000 hours
Freeze-Thaw Resistance, % ASTM C 672 No crazing, cracking, chipping or flaking. Light
Loss at 50 cycles..........................................1.20% chalking and color change. No other deterioration.
Durability Factor ASTM C 666
After 300 cycles............................................. 101.0 Appearance: TAMOSEAL is available in standard colors:
white, oyster and gray. Special colors include: adobe,
cream, custard, pearl, pewter, pueblo, sand, suede, and
summer. Custom colors are also available.
Packaging
TAMOSEAL is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) plastic pails and 50 lb (22.7 kg) poly-lined bags.
Shelf Life
Master Format #:

07 16 13
Coverage
Under normal waterproofing conditions, apply the TAMOSEAL base coat at 2 lb/yd² (1.08 kg/m²), which equals
225 ft2/50 lb bag (21 m2/22.7 kg bag). Add a finish coat at 1 lb/yd² (0.5 kg/m²), which equals 450 ft2/50 lb bag
(42 m2/22.7 kg bag). The total thickness of the two coats will be approximately 1/16 to 1/8 inch (1.6 to 3.22 mm).
Note: Coverage rates are approximate and will depend on the texture and porosity of the substrate.

393
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: The surface must be structurally sound, clean and free of dirt, oil, and other contaminants.
New concrete and masonry must be cured 7 days before application of TAMOSEAL. Abrade the surface to
provide an absorptive surface. Repair all surface defects including cracks and voids. Allow patches and other
surface preparations to cure for 24 hours. Saturate surface dry (SSD) the substrate with potable water prior to
TAMOSEAL application.
Mixing: TAMOSEAL must be mechanically mixed using a slow speed motor and mixing blade to thoroughly disperse
the ingredients. Do not aerate the mix.
For Vertical Applications: One 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag of TAMOSEAL requires 2 gal (7.6 L) of mixing liquid. This consists
of 2 qt (1.9 L) of AKKRO-7T blended with 6 qt (5.7 L) of potable water, or 2.3 qt (2.2 L)of FLEX-CON blended with
5.7 qt (5.4 L) of potable water.
For Horizontal Applications: One 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag of TAMOSEAL requires 2 gal (7.6 L) of mixing liquid. This
consists of 1 gallon (3.8 L) of AKKRO-7T blended with 1 gal (3.8 L) of potable water, or 1.15 gallon (4.4 L) of
FLEX-CON blended with 0.85 gallon (3.2 L) of potable water.
Pour approximately one half of the required mixing liquid into an empty, clean container and begin slow speed
mixing. Slowly add TAMOSEAL and the remainder of the mixing liquid as needed to the mixture. Stop mixing
and allow the mixture to “fatten” for ten minutes. Re-mix to achieve proper consistency.
Application: Saturate surface dry (SSD) the substrate with potable water before starting any TAMOSEAL
application. Hand Brush: Apply TAMOSEAL using a 6”(15 cm) masonry brush. Load bristles with TAMOSEAL
and apply a heavy coat using long, smooth horizontal strokes. Apply sufficient material to fill all voids. Final
strokes should all be in one direction to produce an even texture and finish. Allow first coat to dry for 12 to 24
hours before applying a finish coat. Push Broom: Use a 5 gal (18.9 L) pail or wide mouth tub to hold TAMOSEAL.
Dip a 10” (25 cm) tampico-bristle push broom into the TAMOSEAL mix just enough to load the bristles. Apply a
heavy coat using long, even horizontal strokes. Apply sufficient material to fill all voids. Lift the brush at the end of
each stroke. Final strokes should all be in one direction to produce an even texture and finish. Do not overbrush.
Allow first coat to dry for 12 to 24 hours before applying a finish coat.
Spray: Use heavy duty spray equipment capable of spraying cement coatings or mastics.
Horizontal Applications: Use a water-based cure and seal from Euclid Chemical on all horizontal applications
for added protection and ease of cleaning.
Note: Prior to application, it is recommended that a mock up or field sample be made containing all materials
that will be coated. Obtain approval of the architect or owner for the final color, texture and coverage rate before
proceeding with work. Retain approved sample until the project is completed.
Clean-Up
Clean mixing and application equipment with water immediately after use. Clean any splatter or spills with water
before material sets. TAMOSEAL is a cementitious product containing an acrylic additive, and if allowed to dry
on the surface, removal becomes extremely difficult.
• Do not apply to frozen or frost filled surfaces or when temperature is expected to fall below 40°F (4°C) in the
24 hour period following application.
• Do not use on moderate to heavy traffic bearing surfaces.
• Do not fill open cisterns, tanks, etc. with water for at least 7 days.
• Some colors may chalk or show water marks after weathering.
• When using TAMOSEAL containing AKKRO-7T or FLEX-CON in enclosed tanks or reservoirs, make sure that
adequate ventilation is available during the application and the total curing period.
• Not recommended for negative side waterproofing where hydrostatic pressures exceed 8 ft (2.4 m) water head.
• TAMOSEAL should not be applied to surfaces actively leaking.
Rev. 6.11
394
TAMOSEAL FOUNDATION COATING
Cement-Based Waterproofing Finish
Description
Waterproofing
TAMOSEAL FOUNDATION COATING is a cement-based waterproofing material specifically designed to
waterproof the exterior surface of below grade concrete and masonry. When properly applied, this formulation
becomes an integral part of the wall, filling and sealing the pores and voids in the surface while allowing full
breathing. TAMMOSEAL FOUNDATION COATING is normally applied to the positive side, but may be applied to
the negative side when hydrostatic pressures are low and aesthetics are not important.
• Concrete block • Back coating between face brick and back-up units
• Precast concrete • Below grade surfaces subject to water
• Formed concrete penetration
• Foundations • Brick and stone
Features/Benefits
• Tenacious bond • B
reathable
• B ecomes an integral part of substrate • C
ustom and special colors
• Durable
Freeze-Thaw Resistance, ASTM C 672
% loss at 50 cycles.......................................... 1.20
Compressive Strength, ASTM C 109 psi (MPa)
Durability Factor, % ASTM C 666
7 days.....................................................4,500 (31)
After 300 cycles............................................. 101.0
TAMOSEAL FOUNDATION COATING

28 days...................................................6,400 (44)
Chloride Content ASTM D 144..................0.0098%
Flexural Strength, ASTM C 348 psi (MPa)
Water Permeance ASTM E 514 (after coating leaking wall)
7 days.......................................................350 (2.5)
Extent of damp area: 72 hours...................... 0.0%
28 days.....................................................810 (5.6)
Maximum leakage:1 hour..............................none
Tensile Strength, ASTM C 190 psi (MPa)
Leakage rate: mL/hr.......................................none
7 days.......................................................330 (2.3)
Permeance rating.....................................excellent
28 days.....................................................390 (2.7)
Water Vapor Transmission, ASTM E 96
Absorption, % ASTM C 67
Perms................................................................. 12
24 hour soak..................................................... 4.4
Standard Building Code
5 hour boil......................................................... 3.9
(SBCCI), Section 1814............................Complies
Note: Test results obtained when AKKRO-7T is used in mixing liquid.
Packaging
TAMOSEAL FOUNDATION COATING is packaged in 50 lb (22.7 kg) poly-lined bags.
Shelf Life
Coverage
Block Walls: Normal waterproofing conditions - 2 coats of TAMOSEAL FOUNDATION COATING at a rate of 2 lb/
yd² (1.08 kg/m²) per coat. Concrete Foundations: Normal waterproofing conditions - one coat at a minimum of
Master Format #:
2 lb/yd² (1.08 kg/m²) using AKKRO-7T/water mixing liquid blend. Walls: Severe water pressure - a base coat at
07 16 13
2 lb/yd² (1.08 kg/m²) and trowel on finish coat at a rate of 1 lb/yd² (.54 kg/m²). Trowel Applications: Add 25 lb
(11.3 kg) clean silica sand to each 50 lb (22.7 kg) of TAMOSEAL FOUNDATION COATING and use the AKKRO-
7T/water mixing liquid blend. Parge Coating Masonry Units: Mix 25 lb (11.3 kg) of clean silica sand to each bag
of TAMOSEAL FOUNDATION COATING and apply uniformly. Upon completion of the parge coat, apply a coat of
TAMOSEAL FOUNDATION COATING at a rate of 2 lb/yd² (1.08 kg/m²). Note: Coverage rates are approximate
and will depend on the texture and porosity of the substrate.

395
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: The surface must be structurally sound, clean and free of dirt, form oil, efflorescence,
laitance, curing agents and other contaminants. Remove form marks and other protrusions to prevent “show
through.” Form a cove at the footer-wall intersection, point and fill all broken corners of block and breaks in the
surface and repair all surface defects including cracks and voids with TAMOSEAL FOUNDATION COATING
mixed to a mortar consistency. Cut back wires a minimum of 3/4" (19mm) and patch with SPEED CRETE RED
LINE or SPEED PLUG. Dampen the surface with potable water immediately before TAMOSEAL FOUNDATION
COATING application.
Mixing: TAMOSEAL FOUNDATION COATING must be mechanically mixed using a slow speed motor and
mixing blade to thoroughly disperse the ingredients. Do not aerate the mix. Pour approximately one half of the
required 2 gal (7.57 L) of clean potable water per 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag into an empty, clean container and begin
slow speed mixing. Slowly add TAMOSEAL FOUNDATION COATING and the remaining liquid as needed to
bring the mixture to a heavy, completely blended pancake batter consistency. Stop mixing and allow the mixture
to “fatten” for 10 minutes. Re-mix and if necessary add more liquid to reduce to batter consistency.
Note: To improve bonding and mechanical properties, on smooth or dense concrete, masonry and for all trowel
applications, prepare a mixing liquid consisting of a blend of 3 parts potable water with 1 part AKKRO-7T in a clean
container. Substitute this mixing liquid blend in place of the water described above. Two gal (11.3 L) of mixing liquid
consists of 2 qt (1.89 L) of AKKRO-7T blended with 6 qt (5.68 L) of potable water. When using as a pointing mortar,
AKKRO-7T mixing liquid is recommended.
Application: Dampen the wall with potable water before starting any TAMOSEAL FOUNDATION COATING
application. Make sure all applications completely cover the footer forming a cove at the walls/footer intersection.
Hand Brush: Apply TAMOSEAL FOUNDATION COATING using a 6” (15 cm) masonry brush. Load bristles with
TAMOSEAL FOUNDATION COATING and apply a heavy coat using long, smooth horizontal strokes. Apply
sufficient material to fill all voids. Final strokes should all be in one direction to produce an even texture and
finish. Allow first coat to dry for 12 to 24 hours before applying a finish coat. Push Broom: Use a 5 gal (18.9 L)
pail or wide mouth tub to hold TAMOSEAL FOUNDATION COATING. Dip a 10” (25 cm) tampico-bristle push
broom into the TAMOSEAL FOUNDATION COATING mix just enough to load the bristles. Apply a heavy coat
using long, even horizontal strokes. Apply sufficient material to fill all voids. Lift the brush at the end of each
stroke. Final strokes should all be in one direction to produce an even texture and finish. Do not overbrush. Allow
first coat to dry for 12 to 24 hours before applying a finish coat. Spray: Use heavy duty spray equipment capable
of spraying cement coatings or mastics. Trowel: Trowel applications are required in some severe water pressure
situations.
Clean-Up
Clean mixing and application equipment with water immediately after use. Clean any splatter or spills with water
before material sets.
• Do not apply to frozen or frost filled surfaces or when temperature is below 40°F (4°C), or expected to fall below
40°F (4°C) in 24 hours.
• Do not dampen walls excessively.
• If application is made during hot or windy weather, finished surfaces should be fog sprayed several times
during the day to prevent rapid drying.
• TAMOSEAL FOUNDATION COATING is normally applied to the positive side but may be applied to the negative
side when hydrostatic pressures are low and aesthetics are not important.
Rev. 6.11
396
HEY’DI K-11
Cement-Based, Crystalline Waterproofing System
Description
Waterproofing
HEY’DI K-11 is a breathable, two-part, polymer-modified, cement-based system for waterproofing concrete and masonry.
HEY’DI K-11 has a texture and consistency similar to concrete and may be brush or spray applied. HEY’DI K-11 becomes
an integral part of the wall and waterproofs the negative or positive side through a crystallization process. HEY’DI SB is
the bonding agent used with HEY’DI K-11. It improves adhesion, flexibility and the permeability resistance of the system.
HEY’DI K-11 must be allowed to cure before applying a finishing floor system.
• Below or above grade surfaces • Tunnels • Sewage & water treatment plants
• Horizontal structural slabs • Dams & water reservoirs • Interior/exterior
• Foundations & basements • Manholes • Spillways
Features/Benefits
Waterproofs a wide variety of surfaces including concrete, medium/heavy weight block, brick and shotcrete.
Material Properties @ 75° F (24°C) Values are typical and not necessarily referenced to create specifications.
Test Method Criterion Results
Adhesion, ASTM C 952 psi(MPa) 75°F 175 (1.2)
Tensile Strength, ASTM C 190 psi(MPa) 100% RH 332 (2.3)
50% RH 118 (0.8)
Flexural Strength, ASTM C 580 psi(MPa) 75°F 472 (3.3)
Permeability, CRD 48-73 psi(MPa) water head @ 461.6 ft 200 (1.4)

Appearance: HEY’DI K-11 is available in gray or white. HEY’DI K-11 white is used to enhance the aesthetic appearance of the
waterproofing system and is used as a topcoat for HEY’DI K-11 gray.
Packaging
HEY’DI K-11 is packaged in 50 lb(22.7 kg) polylined bags. HEY’DI SB Bonding Agent is available in 5 gal (18.9 L) pails or
HEY’DI K-11
cases of six 1 gal (3.8 L) pails. HEY’DI K-11 Contractor Kit consists of 25 lb(11.4 kg) of HEY’DI K-11 powder and 1 gal (3.8L)
of a ready to use, prediluted mixture of water and HEY’ DI SB BONDING AGENT.
Shelf Life
Coverage
Under normal waterproofing conditions, one 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag of HEY’DI K-11 will cover approximately 100 ft² (2.45 m²) in
two coats. Note: Coverage rates are approximate and will depend on the texture and porosity of the substrate.
• HEY’DI K-11 is approved by NSF (ANSI STD 60/61) for use with potable water
• USDA compliant • HEY’ DI SB BONDING AGENT is approved for use by the Canadian MTQ
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: The surface must be structurally sound, clean and free of dirt, oil and other contaminants including
curing compounds, form release agents, old coatings, paint and efflorescence. New concrete and masonry must be cured
a minimum of 7 days. All concrete laitance must also be removed. Provide an absorptive surface on all substrates including
Master Format #:
precast and formed concrete. The surface must have an open capillary system for adhesion and for optimum crystalline
growth. Remove form marks and other protrusions. Concrete honeycombs, cavities, joints, cracks, voids, tie holes and other
07 16 16
defects must be opened and routed to sound material. Follow the recommended methods for repairing defects as suggested
below. No active water leaks should be present at the time of application of HEY’DI K-11. Use the HEY’DI POWDER X
SYSTEM to seal active leaks.
Mixing: Positive Side Waterproofing: Blend a 1:5 ratio of HEY’DI SB Bonding Additive with potable water to make the “mixing
liquid.” Negative Side Waterproofing, blend a 1:3 ratio of HEY’DI SB Bonding Additive with potable water to make the “mixing
liquid.” To mix a 50 lb (22.7 kg) bag of HEY’DI K-11, pour approximately one gal (3.8 L) of mixing liquid into a clean container
and begin slow speed power mixing.

397
Slowly add HEY’DI K-11. Gradually add more mixing liquid to bring the mixture to the consistency of a completely blended
slurry. Mixing 50 lb (22.7 kg) of HEY’DI K-11 will require a 1½ to 2 gal (5.68 to 7.57 L) of mixing liquid. When mixing is
completed, do not add additional mixing liquid and do not retemper the mix.
Application: Dampen the surface with potable water prior to application. There should be no running or standing water
present. A minimum of two coats of HEY’DI K-11 Gray is applied to a surface for effective waterproofing. Each coat is applied
at 2.25 lbs/yd² (1.22 kg/m²) which yields approximately 30 mils thickness per coat. Brush: Surface must be damp at the
time of application. Load bristles of a masonry brush with HEY’DI K-11 Gray. Work the slurry into the surface to fill pores and
voids. The final brush strokes should be in one direction to produce an even texture and finish. Apply at a rate of 2.25 lbs/
yd²( 1.22 kg/m²). Allow HEY’DI K-11 Gray to cure for 24 hours before applying a second coat. After 24 hours, dampen the first
coat and apply a second coat of HEY’DI K-11. Gray must be used as the second coat when waterproofing the negative side
and when waterproofing the positive side in critical applications. HEY’DI K-11 White may be used as a finish coat to enhance
the aesthetic appearance. Apply the second coat in the same manner as the first coat except that the finish brush strokes
should be at right angles to those of the first coat. Apply the second coat at a rate of 2.25 lb/yd² (1.22 kg/m²). Spray: Use air
operated spray equipment capable of spraying cementitious materials. Use a 1/8" (0.32 cm) nozzle. On concrete surfaces,
HEY’DI K-11 is to be sprayed in two coats. The first coat should be light and followed immediately by a second heavier coat.
Total coverage of the two coats should be 4.5 lb/yd² (2.45 kg/m²). On concrete masonry surfaces, apply a first coat at 2.25
lb/yd² (1.22 kg/m²). Before initial set, back brush the surface with a mason’s brush or broom to fill voids and ensure uniform
coverage. Allow the first coat to cure for 24 hours. Dampen the surface and spray on a second coat at 2.25 lbs/yd² (1.22 kg/
m²) in the same manner as the first coat. Back brushing the second coat is not required. Broadcast & Trowel for Horizontal
Applications: When the concrete starts to reach initial set (no bleed water visible), dry sprinkle HEY’DI K-11 at the rate of 4 to
5 lb/yd² (2.2 to 2.7 kg/m²) on the concrete surface. Power trowel the surface until HEY’DI K-11 coverage is uniform.
Special Applications: Repairs: After proper surface preparation of the areas to be repaired, apply HEY’DI K-11 Gray in two
coats of 2.25 lbs/yd² (1.22 kg/m²) each to the areas which require patching. After the second coat has cured for 24 hours,
apply TAMMSPATCH II to the defective area per instructions in their respective technical data sheet. Allow patches to cure for
24 hours. Apply HEY’DI K-11 Gray per the above application instructions over the entire area to be waterproofed including the
patches. For optimum waterproofing, patched areas will have a total of 4.5 lbs/yd² (2.45 kg/m²) of HEY’DI K-11 Gray under the
patch and another total of 4.5 lbs/yd² (2.45 kg/m²) of HEY’DI K-11 Gray over the entire surface including the patched areas.
Coved or Canted Applications: Apply 2 coats of HEY’DI K-11 Gray to the area to be coved. After the second coat has cured
for 24 hours, use DURALTOP GEL or TAMMSPATCH II to form the required cove. Waterproof over coves or canting with two
coats of HEY’DI K-11 Gray (1.22 kg/m²/coat). Cracks or Expansion Joints: Cut out cracks to a minimum of 1" by 1" (2.54 cm
by 2.54 cm) depth and width. Apply 2 coats of HEY’DI K-11 Gray into sides and bottom of crack or joint. Cure the second coat
for a minimum of 4 days and then install a flexible, waterproof joint sealant. The joint sealant may be filled approximately 1/4"
to 1/2" (.64 cm to 1.27 cm) from the top of the surface. Apply a bond breaker tape over the sealant and fill the remaining joint
area flush to the surface with TAMMSPATCH II. Apply 2 coats of HEY’DI K-11 Gray over the entire area to be waterproofed
including the patched cracks and joints. New Construction Joints: Brush apply 2 coats of HEY’DI K-11 Gray onto the
concrete surface to be joined. After second coat has cured 24 hours, pour the new concrete against the HEY’DI K-11 Gray
surface to form the bond and continuous membrane. Through Wall Penetrations: Cut around the pipe, electrical conduit or
other embedded material a minimum of 1" deep and 1" wide (2.54 cm by 2.54 cm) at the surface. Clean the pipe or conduit
thoroughly. Mix HEY’DI SB Bonding additive with potable water at a 1:1 ratio. Dry blend cement and sand at a 1:1 ratio.
Combine mixtures and apply the slurry to the pipe or conduit. Allow 24 hours for curing. Dampen area and apply 2 coats of
HEY’DI K-11 Gray allowing a 24 hour cure time between coats. Fill the remaining cavity with TAMMSPATCH II. After allowing
the TAMMSPATCH II to cure for 24 hours, apply 2 more coats of HEY’DI K-11 Gray over the entire area to be waterproofed.
Clean-Up
Clean mixing and application equipment with water immediately after use. Clean splatter or spills with water before material
sets. If allowed to dry on the surface, removal becomes extremely difficult.
• Do not retemper HEY’DI K-11.
• Do not apply to frozen or frost filled surfaces or when temperature is below or expected to fall below 40°F (4°C) within 48
hours.
• Do not apply HEY’DI K-11 at temperatures above 90°F (32°C), unless the surface has been fully saturated with water at the
time the application begins.
• HEY’DI K-11 is not designed as a wearing surface. Apply a protective topcoat before subjecting it to traffic.
• Do not fill open cisterns, tanks, pools, etc. with water for at least 7 days.
• Ensure that adequate ventilation is available during the application and the full curing period when using HEY’DI K-11
containing HEY’DI SB Bonding Additive in enclosed tanks or reservoirs. Allow minimum 7 days drying time before
backfilling unless protection board is used.
• Allow 7 days cure at 75°F (24°C) before covering or before the application of waterbased decorative coatings.
• Do not apply lime contained paints over HEY’DI K-11.
• Allow minimum 7 days cure before exposing HEY’DI K-11 to water pressure, or any contact with water.
• When HEY’DI is used in areas exposed to chemicals or high sulfate containing soils, consult technical service for specific
recommendations.
• Apply a test patch to evaluate performance and appearance on concrete or block substrates which have been subjected
to contamination, efflorescence or chemical attack.
Rev. 6.11
398
HEY’DI POWDER X SYSTEM
Waterproofing System for Active Leaks
Description
Waterproofing
HEY’DI POWDER X SYSTEM is a combination of cementitious and silicate based materials used on negative side
surfaces to seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. HEY’DI POWDER X SYSTEM is a 3 coat, two component
system consisting of one powder and a liquid. HEY’DI POWDER X is a dry powder that hardens in seconds when exposed
to water. HEY’DI SEALING LIQUID (ordered separately) penetrates through HEY’DI POWDER X into the capillaries of
the substrate. It reacts with moisture and the constituents of the substrate to form crystals. While moisture is present, the
crystallization process will continue for approximately six months. HEY’DI POWDER X SYSTEM is not designed to be used
as a wearing surface. Horizontal surfaces subject to vehicle or heavy foot traffic must be covered with a protective topping.
• Interior/exterior walls below grade • Foundations • Tunnels
• Slabs on grade and basements • Reservoirs • Dry docks
Features/Benefits
• Leaking and weeping concrete or masonry from the negative side
• Protects against hydrostatic water pressure
• Will not debond from the surface by water pressure
Material Properties: Values are typical and not necessarily referenced to create specifications.
Test Method Criterion Results
HEY’DI POWDER X SYSTEM
Adhesion ASTM E 149, psi (MPa), 3 day cure Open structure concrete 84.6 (0.58)
Closed structure concrete 42.2 (0.29)
Steel formed concrete 61.4 (0.42)
Tensile Strength ASTM C 190, psi (MPa) 100% RH 380 (2.62)
50% RH 325 (2.24)
Permeability CRD 48-55 Water head @ 4.3 ft 7.6 x 10 to 11-11
Water head @ 144 ft 8.1 x 10 to10 -10
Appearance: HEY’DI POWDER X SYSTEM is a dark concrete gray color, and is not intended as a decorative
finish.
Packaging
HEY’DI POWDER X is packaged in 30 lb (13.6 kg) pails and HEY'DI SEALING LIQUID is packaged in 1 gal (3.8
L) and 5 gal (37.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
Coverage
HEY’DI POWDER X applied dry at 0.28 lb/ft² (1.16 kg/m²) and depends on the extent of the active leaking areas
HEY’DI SEALING LIQUID used as received, 60 ft²/gal (1.47 m²/L)
Master Format #:
Directions for Use

General Surface Preparation: New concrete and masonry surfaces should be cured a minimum of 7 days. Surface
07 16 16
must be structurally sound, clean, and free of contaminants including curing compounds, form release agents, dust,
dirt, oil, efflorescence, old coatings, and paint. Substrates must be roughened and absorptive. Smooth precast or
formed concrete must be opened to an exposed aggregate surface. The surface must have an open capillary system
for adhesion and optimum crystalline growth. Remove form marks and other protrusions. Concrete honeycomb,
cavities, joints, cracks, voids, tie holes, and other defects must be opened and routed to sound material. Rout broken
or uneven brick or block to sound material.

399
Application: For application to actively leaking surfaces, put on rubber gloves and immediately rub POWDER X well
into the wet surface until the surface is dry. This application should not be greater than 1/32" (0.8 mm) in thickness.
As soon as the POWDER X has been applied, brush the area with Hey’di sealing liquid using a clean brush. As
soon as the SEALING LIQUID is applied, rub another batch of POWDER X into the wet surface. The entire procedure
may be repeated for difficult to control leaks. Upon completion of the three steps, protect the surface from rain, hot
sun, or wind, and freezing or frost for 24 hours while monitoring the area to ensure leaks have been stopped and
have not been re-directed to new locations. To produce an uninterrupted waterproof membrane, apply two coats of
HEY’DI K-11 over the entire surface, including the repaired surface and the surrounding wall area. Apply HEY’DI K-11
as described in the HEY’DI K-11 Technical Data Sheet.
Moderate leakage or small holes: Clean and prepare the surface as described above. Press a generous handful of
dry HEY’DI POWDER X into the hole and maintain constant pressure until leakage stops. High pressure leakage or
heavy flow: Premix HEY’DI POWDER X with potable water into a thick putty and use it as a plug. Finish sealing off the
remaining flow using dry HEY’DI POWDER X as directed above.
Dynamic and Static Cracks: Cut out the crack 3”(7.6cm) wide at the surface and 2” to 3” deep (5cm to 7.6cm). Use
HEY’DI POWDER X System to stop active leaking. Dampen area, and apply HEY’DI K-11 to the sides and bottom of
the cut and overlap onto the sides and bottom of the cut and overlap onto the adjacent surfaces.
ollowing cure of the HEY’DI K-11, apply a bond breaker tape in the bottom of the cut and install a waterproof flexible
F
joint sealant. Maintain top surface of sealant 1½ “ (3.8cm) below the top of the substrate. Following cure of sealant,
install a bond breaker tape to only the cured surface of the sealant. Fill the remaining cut with TAMMSPATCH II to
the level of the substrate. To create a joint for movement control, cut into the center of the fill mortar 1/8” wide and a
minimum one half of the depth of the fill mortar.
Through Wall Penetrations - Including piping, electrical conduit, and other embedded materials: Cut
around pipes a minimum 1” deep and 1” wide (2.5cm x 2.5cm) at the surface, and clean pipe thoroughly. Mix
HEY’DI SB BONDING AGENT with potable water in a 1:1 ratio. Dry blend cement and sand in a 1:1 ratio, mix with the
liquid, and apply this “key coat” to only the pipe. Cure for 24 hours. Dampen area, and apply HEY’DI K-11 to the pipe
and substrate. Fill the remaining cavity with TAMMSPATCH II and cure 24 hours. Apply HEY’DI K-11 waterproofing.
Floor/Wall Joint Leakage: Cut an area approximately 1/2” (12mm) deep a minimum 3” to 4” (7.6cm to 10cm) up
the wall, and 3” to 4” (7.62 cm to 10.16 cm) onto the floor. Use HEY’DI POWDER X SYSTEM to stop active leaking.
Dampen the area and apply HEY’DI K-11 to the sides and bottom of the area and overlap the adjacent surfaces.
Following cure, use TAMMSPATCH II to level the area with the floor surface.
Clean-Up
Clean all mixing and application equipment with water immediately after use. Clean all splatter or spills with water
before material sets. HEY’DI POWDER X is a cementitious product and if allowed to dry on the surface, removal
becomes very difficult.
• Do not apply to frozen or frost filled surfaces or when temperature is below 40°F (4°C) or expected to fall below
40°F (4°C) in 48 hours.
• Do not apply in temperatures above 90°F (32°C).
• Protect with a topping when used as a traffic wearing surface.
• Do not fill open cisterns, tanks, etc. with water for at least 7 days. Ensure that adequate ventilation is available during
the application and the full curing period when using HEY’DI POWDER X SYSTEM in enclosed tanks or reservoirs.
• Allow minimum 7 days drying time before backfilling.
• Allow 7 days cure before covering or before the application of a waterbased decorative coating.
• Do not apply lime based products over HEY’DI POWDER X SYSTEM.
• Do not substitute HEY’DI SEALING LIQUID.
• Apply a test patch to evaluate performance and appearance on concrete or block substrates which have been
subjected to contamination.
Rev. 6.11
400
Dural Aqua-Dam
Hydrophobic Polyurethane Grouting System
Chemical-Urethane Grouts
Description
DURAL AQUA-DAM is a hydrophobic polyurethane compound that is injected in concrete and other sound
substrates to stop water from entering into occupied or unwanted places. The reaction time of the DURAL
AQUA-DAM is controlled through the use of its accelerator, known as DURAL AQUACCELERATOR. DURAL
AQUA-DAM forms a water tight seal within the substrate, that remains even after the water has subsided.
• Leaking cracks and joints • Mines & tunnels
• Water treatment facilities • Sewers & manholes
• Wastewater treatment facilities • Below grade walls subject to high water tables
Features/Benefits
• ANSI/NSF 61 Certified • Bonds to wet and dry substrates
• Fast reaction time with added accelerator • Needs very little water to react and cure
• Very little shrinkage • Remains active when the water subsides
• Excellent elongation to handle moving cracks
and joints
Typical Properties - Liquid Results Test Method

Viscosity @ 77°F (25°C) 500 cps ASTM D 1638
DUral Aqua-Dam
Specific Gravity 1.058 -
Physical State Liquid -
Color Amber -
Typical Properties - Cured Results Test Method

Density 4 lb/ft (64 kg/m )
3 3
ASTM D 1622
Elongation 40% ASTM D 638
Tensile Strength 27 psi (0.19 MPa) ASTM D 638
Shear Strength 16 psi (0.11 MPa) ASTM C 273
Water Absorption < 1% by volume ASTM D 2842
Typical Reaction Profile

Aquaccelerator 0% 1.25% 2.5%
Percentage
Master Format #:
Initial Foam Not Recommended 50 sec 15 seconds

03 64 00
Reaction Time Not Recommended 3 min 20 sec 1 min 5 seconds
Packaging/Yield
DURAL AQUA-DAM is packaged in 5 gal (19 L) pails and 55 gal (208 L) drums. DURAL AQUACCELERATOR
is packaged in 1 pint (0.47 L) cans and 5 gal (19 L) pails. DURAL PUMP RINSE is packaged in 5 gal (19 L)
pails only.

401
Shelf Life
All materials have a 3 year shelf life in their original, unopened packages. Products are moisture sensitive and need
to remain in airtight containers.
• ANSI/NSF 61
Directions for Use

Surface & Crack Preparation: To ensure the project is completed properly, clean the exterior of the surface so that the
full extent of the crack or joint can be seen. This will aid in proper hole drilling. Start by determining the thickness of the
concrete substrate that will be repaired. This will be used in the spacing of packers. Starting at the lowest point of the
crack; triangulate the position of the first hole to be drilled, so it will intersect the crack at a 45° angle, half-way through
the thickness of the concrete. Drill a 5/8” (16 mm) hole in this position and ensure that the bit used is long enough to
pass through the crack. Drill the next hole in the same manner on the opposite side of the crack. The spacing between
holes should be equal to the thickness of the concrete. Continue to drill holes in the same manner, moving up the crack
until the entire length of the crack or joint has an equal chance of receiving the grout. Install 5/8” (16 mm) injection
packers into the drilled holes and tighten. Inject water through the packers to make sure they don’t leak around the
sides. This water injection will also flush out any dust and debris that is in the crack due to the drilling process.
Mixing: Prior to injecting DURAL AQUA-DAM, properly stir the material and the accelerator. Do not use high speed
mixing equipment and avoid whipping air into the product. Pour the appropriate amount of DURAL AQUACCELERATOR
into the DURAL AQUA-DAM and mix on slow speed for a minute or two, to ensure the accelerator is fully mixed in. The
mixing ratios are as follows:
DURAL AQUA-DAM DURAL AQUACCELERATOR
Package Size Standard Amount Minimum Maximum

5 gal (19 L) Pail 16 oz. (0.47 L) 8 oz. (0.24 L) 32 oz. (0.94 L)
55 gal (208 L) Drum 1.25 gal (4.75 L) 80 oz. (2.4 L) 2.5 gal (9.5 L)
The standard mixing ratio should be used in most instances. Do not mix less than the minimum amount of accelerator
because the material may not react correctly, especially in colder weather. Do not add more than the maximum amount
of accelerator or the material risks shrinking, thus allowing water to pass through the crack or joint again.
Placement: Once the injection packers have been set and the drilled holes and crack have been flushed out with water,
the injection of the material can begin. Start at the lowest point of a vertical crack and work upwards. Pump DURAL
AQUA-DAM into the packer until foaming material comes out the face of the crack and starts to approach the next
packer. On a horizontal crack, start at the end that was first installed and flushed with water. The more water left in the
crack and injection site, the better. Move the injection head to the second packer and repeat for the entire length of the
crack. A standard airless paint pump can be used for this application. Typical injection pressure into cracks is 200-3000
psi (1.4-20 MPa), depending on the width and depth of the crack. For large cracks and joints, oakum rope or a similar
open celled structure device can be soaked in DURAL AQUA-DAM and placed into the crack or joint. Once the DURAL
AQUA-DAM has cured, the packers can be removed or cut-off, flush with the surrounding surface. Any grout cured
outside of the face of the crack can be cut-back with a margin trowel or similar scraping tool. The packer holes can then
be filled in with Euclid Chemical’s Speed Plug hydraulic cement and finished as desired.
Clean-Up
Use all appropriate protective equipment. Avoid contact with the active grout. Use DURAL PUMP RINSE to clean out the
lines of the injection equipment. DURAL PUMP RINSE can be left in the lines as a primer, prior to the next project. Be
sure to expel all DURAL PUMP RINSE from the lines prior to the next grouting job, or it will drastically affect the curing
capability of the grout.
• Colder temperatures will affect the viscosity and setting times of the product.
• Avoid exceeding 90°F (32°C) when warming product.
• Water mixed with DURAL AQUA-DAM must be in the pH range of 3-10.
• Store material in moisture free packaging. Atmospheric moisture can cause a foam “head” on the product inside of
pail. Remove the foam and the remaining material can be used.
402
Dural Aqua-Dam 100
Hydrophobic Polyurethane Cartridge System
Description
DURAL AQUA-DAM 100 is a hydrophobic polyurethane grout packaged in a convenient single cartridge.
DURAL AQUA-DAM 100 is injected into concrete and other sound substrates to stop water from entering into
occupied or unwanted places. DURAL AQUA-DAM 100 is perfect for small jobs where the use of standard
pumping equipment isn’t feasible or possible. DURAL AQUA-DAM 100 forms a water tight seal within the
substrate, with very little shrinkage after curing.
• Basement walls • Sewers & manholes
• Below grade walls subject to high water tables
Features/Benefits
• Tenacious bond to wet and dry substrates • Needs very little water to react and cure
• Fast reaction time • Remains active when the water subsides
• Very little shrinkage • Excellent elongation to handle moving cracks and joints
DUral Aqua-Dam 100

Typical Properties Result
Viscosity @ 77°F (25°C) 300 ± 100 cps
Color Amber
Density 5 lb/ft3 (80 kg/m3)
Elongation 140%
Tensile Strength 25 psi (0.17 MPa)
Reactivity on Contact with Water

Initial Foam 60 seconds
Reaction Time 7 minutes
Master Format #:
Packaging
03 64 00
DURAL AQUA-DAM 100 is packaged in 11 oz. (325 ml) cartridges. 12 to a case.
Shelf Life
DURAL AQUA-DAM 100 has a 1 year shelf life in its original, unopened cartridge.

403
Directions for Use
Surface & Crack Preparation: To ensure the project is completed properly, clean the exterior of the surface so
that the full extent of the crack or joint is visible. Using a wire brush or a wire wheel on a grinder, vigorously clean
the crack or joint to allow maximum penetration of the grout. While typically not needed, small pilot holes can be
drilled directly into the face of the crack allowing for easy insertion of the cartridge tip into the crack.
Mixing: While mixing is not necessary, shake the DURAL AQUA-DAM 100 cartridges vigorously prior to
dispensing. There is a chance that some settling may have occurred within the cartridge during storage.
Placement: Prior to dispensing DURAL AQUA-DAM 100, ensure the crack or joint has been flushed out with water
to remove any dust or debris left behind by the preparation process. Do not remove any of the excess water. The
DURAL AQUA-DAM 100 will use this water to react. Start at the lowest point of a vertical crack, or at either end
of a horizontal crack. Place the tip of the cartridge inside the crack and apply slow and steady pressure to the
dispensing tool. The DURAL AQUA-DAM 100 grout will enter the crack and joint and start to displace the water
within. The grout will shortly start to foam up and travel up the crack. Once you observe the grout ceasing to
move further up the crack, remove the tip of the cartridge from its current position, and place it at the point the
grout movement stopped. Continue this action until you have reached the top or end of the crack or joint. Once
cured, DURAL AQUA-DAM 100 will resemble a hardened foam. Using a margin trowel or similar scraper, remove
the excess grout from the face of the crack or joint. Any topically applied, aesthetically pleasing compound can
now be placed over the grouted area if desired.
Clean-Up
Use all appropriate protective equipment. Avoid contact with the active grout. A solvent based cleaner can be
used to clean any tools used in this procedure.
• Water mixed with DURAL AQUA-DAM 100 must be in the pH range of 3-10.
• Store material at room temperature. Avoid freezing conditions.
Rev. 6.11
404
Dural Aqua-Dam 200f
Rapid Setting, Hydrophobic Polyurethane Cartridge System
Description
DURAL AQUA-DAM 200F is a hydrophobic polyurethane grout packaged in a convenient dual cartridge.
DURAL AQUA-DAM 200F is injected into concrete and other sound substrates to rapidly stop water from
entering into occupied or unwanted places. DURAL AQUA-DAM 200F is perfect for small jobs where the use
of standard pumping equipment isn’t feasible or possible. DURAL AQUA-DAM 200F quickly forms a water
tight seal within the substrate, with very little shrinkage after curing.
• Heavily leaking cracks and joints • Mines & tunnels
• Basement walls • Sewers & manholes
• Below grade walls subject to high water tables
Features/Benefits
• Rapid setting • Needs no water to react and cure
• Tenacious bond to wet and dry substrates • Excellent elongation to handle moving cracks and joints
• Remains active when the water subsides • Very little shrinkage
Typical Properties Result Test Method
DUral Aqua-Dam 200f

Viscosity @ 77°F (25°C) 250 cps “A” Side ASTM D 1638
500 cps “B” Side
Water Absorption
< 1% ASTM D 2127
(Volume Confined)
Color Amber -
3 3
ASTM D 1622
Compressive Strength 37 psi (0.26 MPa) ASTM D 1621
Class I YES ASTM E 84 @ 2 inches (5.1 cm)
USDA Approved YES -
Packaging
Master Format #:
DURAL AQUA-DAM 200F is packaged in 22 oz. (650 ml) dual cartridges. 6 to a case.
03 64 00
Shelf Life
DURAL AQUA-DAM 200F has a 1 year shelf life in its original, unopened cartridge.

405
Directions for Use
that the full extent of the crack or joint is visible. Using a wire brush or a wire wheel on a grinder, vigorously clean
the crack or joint to allow maximum penetration of the grout. While typically not needed, small pilot holes can be
drilled directly into the face of the crack allowing for easy insertion of the cartridge tip into the crack.
Mixing: While mixing is not necessary, shake the DURAL AQUA-DAM 200F cartridges vigorously prior to
dispensing. There is a chance that some settling has occurred within the cartridge during storage.
Placement: Prior to dispensing DURAL AQUA-DAM 200F, ensure the crack or joint and any drilled holes have
been flushed out with water to remove any dust or debris left behind by the preparation process. Do not remove
any of the excess water. The DURAL AQUA-DAM 200F grout will use this water to react. Remove the shipping cap
and plugs from the dual cartridge and place in a dispensing tool. Holding the cartridge over a waste receptacle,
dispense a small amount to make sure an even amount of grout is coming out of both sides of the cartridge.
Place the static mixing nozzle on the cartridge and proceed. Start at the lowest point of a vertical crack, or at
either end of a horizontal crack. Place the tip of the cartridge inside the crack or pilot hole and apply slow and
steady pressure to the dispensing tool. The DURAL AQUA-DAM 200F grout will enter the crack and joint and start
to displace the water within. The grout will quickly start to foam up and travel up the crack. Once you observe the
grout ceasing to move further up the crack, remove the tip of the cartridge from its current position, and place it
at the point the grout movement stopped. Continue this action until you have reached the top or end of the crack
or joint. Once cured, DURAL AQUA-DAM 200F will resemble a hardened foam. Using a margin trowel or similar
scraper, remove the excess grout from the face of the crack or joint. Any topically applied, aesthetically pleasing
compound can now be placed over the grouted area if desired.
Clean-Up
Use all appropriate protective equipment. Avoid contact with the active grout. A solvent based cleaner can be
used to clean any tools used in this procedure.
• Store material at room temperature. Avoid freezing conditions.
Rev. 6.11
406
Dural Aqua-Dam LV
Low Viscosity Hydrophobic Polyurethane Grouting System
Description
DURAL AQUA-DAM LV is a low viscosity, hydrophobic polyurethane compound that is injected into hairline
cracks in concrete and other sound substrates to stop water from entering into occupied or unwanted places.
The reaction time of the DURAL AQUA-DAM LV is controlled through the use of its accelerator, known as
DURAL AQUACCELERATOR. DURAL AQUA-DAM LV forms a water tight seal within the substrate that remains
even if the water subsides.
• Sealing fine cracks and joints • Below grade walls subject to high water tables
• Sewers & manholes • Wastewater treatment facilities
• Can be used in porous soils as a stabilizer
Features/Benefits
• Low viscosity for smaller cracks • Needs very little water to react and cure
• Fast reaction time with added accelerator • Remains active when the water subsides
• Bonds to wet and dry substrates • Excellent elongation to handle moving cracks and joints

DUral Aqua-Dam LV
Color Amber -

3 3
ASTM D 1622
Shear Strength 19 psi (0.13 MPa) ASTM D 273
Water Absorption < 1% by volume ASTM D 2842

Aquaccelerator 0% 1.25% 2.5%
Percentage
Master Format #:
Initial Foam Not Recommended 45 sec 30 seconds

03 64 00
Reaction Time Not Recommended 3 min 1 min 45 seconds
Packaging/Yield
DURAL AQUA-DAM LV is packaged in 5 gal (19 L) pails and 55 gal (208 L) drums. DURAL AQUACCELERATOR
is packaged in 1 pint (0.47 L) cans and 5 gal (19 L) pails. DURAL PUMP RINSE is packaged in 5 gal (19 L) pails
only.

407
Shelf Life
All materials have a 3 year shelf life in their original, unopened packages. Products are moisture sensitive and need
to remain in airtight containers.
Directions for Use

that the full extent of the crack or joint can be seen. This will aid in proper hole drilling. Start by knowing the
thickness of the concrete substrate that is to be repaired. This will be used in the spacing of packers. Starting at
the lowest point of the crack; triangulate the position of the first hole to be drilled, so that it will intersect the crack
at a 45° angle, half-way through the thickness of the concrete. Drill a 5/8” (16 mm) hole in this position and ensure
that the bit used is long enough to pass through the crack. Drill the next hole in the same manner on the opposite
side of the crack. The spacing between holes should be equal to the thickness of the concrete. Continue to drill
holes in the same manner, moving up the crack until the entire length of the crack or joint has an equal chance of
receiving the grout. Install 5/8” (16 mm) injection packers into the drilled holes and tighten. Inject water through
the packers to make sure they don’t leak around the sides. This water injection will also flush out any dust and
debris that is in the crack due to the drilling process.
Mixing: Prior to injecting DURAL AQUA-DAM LV, properly stir the material and the accelerator. Do not use
high speed mixing equipment, for that will “whip” air into the product. Pour the appropriate amount of DURAL
AQUACCELERATOR into the DURAL AQUA-DAM LV and mix on slow speed for a minute or two, to ensure the
accelerator is fully mixed in. The mixing ratios are as follows:
DURAL AQUA-DAM LV DURAL AQUACCELERATOR

The standard mixing ratio should be used in most instances. Do not go below the minimum mixing amount, for
the material will struggle to react, especially in colder weather. Do not add more than the maximum amount of
accelerator for the material will face a great risk of shrinking, thus allowing water to pass through the crack or joint
again.
Placement: Once the injection packers have been set and the drilled holes and crack have been flushed out
with water, the injection of the material can begin. Start at the lowest point of a vertical crack and work upwards.
Pump DURAL AQUA-DAM LV into the packer until foaming material comes out the face of the crack and starts to
approach the next packer. On a horizontal crack, start at the end that was first installed and flushed with water.
The more water left in the crack and injection site, the better. Move the injection head to the second packer and
repeat until you have moved the entire length of the crack. A standard airless paint pump can be used for this
application. Typical injection pressure into cracks is 200-3000 psi (1.4-20 MPa), depending on the width and
depth of the crack. Once the DURAL AQUA-DAM LV has cured, the packers can be removed or cut-off, flush with
the surrounding surface. The grout that has cured outside of the face of the crack can be cut-back with a margin
trowel or similar scraping tool. The packer holes can then be filled in with Euclid Chemical’s Speed Plug hydraulic
cement and finished as desired.
Clean-Up
lines of the injection equipment. DURAL PUMP RINSE can then be left in the lines as a primer, prior to the next project.
Be sure to expel all DURAL PUMP RINSE from the lines prior to the next grouting job, for it will drastically affect the curing
• Water used to react DURAL AQUA-DAM LV must be in the pH range of 3-10.
• Store material in moisture free packaging. Atmospheric moisture may get to product causing a foam “head”
inside of pail. This can be peeled off and the material below can still be usable.
408
Dural Aqua-Fil
Hydrophilic Polyurethane Grouting System
Description
DURAL AQUA-FIL is a single component hydrophilic polyurethane compound that is injected in concrete and
other sound natural substrates to stop water from entering into occupied or unwanted places. DURAL AQUA-FIL
follows the path of water into fine cracks and fissures within the substrate. DURAL AQUA-FIL forms a water tight
seal within cracks and joints, while providing good chemical resistance.
• Water & wastewater treatment facilities • Sewers & manholes
• Repair of faulty or misplaced waterstops • Below grade walls subject to high water tables
Features/Benefits
• Tenacious bond to wet and dry substrates • Seeks out water within the crack and all its fissures
• Provides good chemical resistance • Excellent elongation to handle moving cracks and joints
• Can seal small and large cracks within concrete and other natural substrates

DUral Aqua-Fil
Color Pale Yellow -

3 3
ASTM D 1622

Initial Foam 30 seconds
Reaction Time 6 minutes
Master Format #:
03 64 00
Packaging/Yield
DURAL AQUA-FIL is packaged in 5 gal (19 L) pails and 55 gal (208 L) drums. DURAL PUMP RINSE is
packaged in 5 gal (19 L) pails only.

409
Shelf Life
DURAL AQUA-FIL has a 3 year shelf life in its original, unopened package. The product is moisture sensitive and
needs to remain in an airtight container.
Directions for Use

Surface & Crack Preparation: To ensure the project is completed properly, clean the exterior of the surface so that the
full extent of the crack or joint can be seen. This will aid in proper hole drilling. Start by determining the thickness of
the concrete substrate that is to be repaired. This will be used in the spacing of packers. Starting at the lowest point
of the crack; triangulate the position of the first hole to be drilled, so that it will intersect the crack at a 45° angle, half-
way through the thickness of the concrete. Drill a 5/8” (16mm) hole in this position and ensure that the bit used is
long enough to pass through the crack. Drill the next hole in the same manner on the opposite side of the crack. The
spacing between holes should be equal to the thickness of the concrete. Continue to drill holes in the same manner,
moving up the crack until the entire length of the crack or joint has an equal chance of receiving the grout. Install 5/8”
(16mm) injection packers into the drilled holes and tighten. Inject water through the packers to make sure they don’t
leak around the sides. This water injection will also flush out any dust and debris that is in the crack due to the drilling
process.
Mixing: Prior to injecting DURAL AQUA-FIL, properly stir the material thoroughly. Do not use high speed mixing
equipment, for that will “whip” air into the product.

Placement: Once the injection packers have been set and the drilled holes and crack have been flushed out with water,
the injection of the material can begin. Start at the lowest point of a vertical crack and work upwards. Pump DURAL
AQUA-FIL into the packer until foaming material comes out the face of the crack and starts to approach the next packer.
On a horizontal crack, start at the end that was first installed and flushed with water. The more water left in the crack and
injection site, the better. Move the injection head to the second packer and repeat until you have moved the entire length
of the crack. Follow the injection of DURAL AQUA-FIL with a good flush of water through the ports. DURAL AQUA-FIL
uses water to react and cure. A standard airless paint pump can be used for the injection of the grout and water. Typical
injection pressure into cracks is 200-3000 psi (1.4-20 MPa), depending on the width and depth of the crack. For large
cracks and joints, oakum rope or a similar open celled structure device can be used to soak in DURAL AQUA-FIL and
then placed into the crack or joint. Once the DURAL AQUA-FIL has cured, the packers can be removed or cut-off, flush
with the surrounding surface. The grout that has cured outside of the face of the crack can be cut-back with a margin
trowel or similar scraping tool. The packer holes can then be filled in with Euclid Chemical’s SPEED PLUG hydraulic
cement and finished as desired.
Clean-Up
lines of the injection equipment. DURAL PUMP RINSE can be left in the lines as a primer, prior to the next project. Be
sure to expel all DURAL PUMP RINSE from the lines prior to the next grouting job, for it will drastically affect the curing
• Water used to react DURAL AQUA-FIL must be in the pH range of 3-10.
inside of pail. This can be peeled off and the material below can still be usable.
Rev. 6.11
410
Dural Mud Lock
Hydrophobic Polyurethane Soil Stabilizer
Description
DURAL MUD LOCK is an ultra low viscosity, hydrophobic, polyurethane grout that is injected into unstable
soils and sands to help solidify and stabilize various earthen structures. DURAL MUD LOCK reacts with
ground moisture to encapsulate loose particles and forms a solid, stable mass. DURAL MUD LOCK can also
be topically applied to soils, which will help stabilize and firm up areas that would be loose under footing.
DURAL MUD LOCK is resistant to typical contaminants located within soils. This includes gas, oils, mildly
acidic agents, and other biological elements.
• Hillsides • Embankments
• Excavations • Pavement sub-base reinforcement
• Seawall repairs • Mines & tunnels
• Shoring and piling projects • Topical application to trails and pathways
Features/Benefits
• Super low viscosity for deep penetration • Needs very little water to react
• Adheres large and fine particles together • Freeze/thaw resistant
• Safe for surrounding environment
Dural Mud Lock

Color Amber -

Aquaccelerator 0% 2.5%
Percentage
Initial Foam 10 to 15 minutes 2 to 3 minutes
Reaction Time 20 to 25 minutes 4 to 5 minutes
Packaging/Yield
Master Format #:
DURAL MUD LOCK is packaged in 5 gal (19 L) pails and 55 gal (208 L) drums. DURAL AQUACCELERATOR is
31 32 23
packaged in 1 pint (0.47 L) cans and 5 gal (19 L) pails. DURAL PUMP RINSE is packaged in 5 gal (19 L) pails.
Shelf Life
DURAL MUD LOCK and DURAL AQUACCELERATOR have a 3 year shelf life in their original, unopened
packages. Products are moisture sensitive and need to remain in airtight containers.

411
Directions for Use
Mixing: For soil stabilization projects, an accelerator is not typically used. Important: It is more beneficial to allow
the material to soak further into the soil before it sets, rather than having a catalyst react the material before it can
fully penetrate. If you feel you need to mix an accelerator into DURAL MUD LOCK, mix in the appropriate amount
of DURAL AQUACCELERATOR according to the chart below.
Dural Mud Lock Dural Aquaccelerator

For most applications, the reaction will occur underground, so visual inspection of this reaction will be difficult. Do
not add more than the maximum amount of DURAL AQUACCELERATOR or the grout will face a greater risk of
shrinking, thus allowing some loose soil to free up from the bound mass.
Placement: Placement techniques vary for this application due to variations in soil type and content, compaction
of the ground, amount of water/moisture present, and temperature. Injection rods are placed into the ground at
spacing which will be predetermined. To ensure the DURAL MUD LOCK will react appropriately, introduce water
into the soil through the injection rods. Follow up by injecting DURAL MUD LOCK into the soil through the rods
by means of a single component, airless pump. Track the flow and progress of the DURAL MUD LOCK as the
reacted foam will appear out of adjacent injection rods. Move the injection equipment around accordingly to
ensure the entire area is injected. Once the entire area is completed, the injection rods can be snapped off and
any subsequent work can begin.
Clean-Up
lines of the injection equipment. DURAL PUMP RINSE can then be left in the lines as a primer, prior to the next project.
Be sure to expel all DURAL PUMP RINSE from the lines prior to the next grouting job, for it will drastically affect the curing
• Do not allow product to freeze.
inside of pail. This can be peeled off and the material below is still usable.
Rev. 6.11
412
Dural Pump Rinse
Injection Pump Cleaner/Primer
Description
DURAL PUMP RINSE is a non-flammable, solvent free fluid used to clean out the lines of polyurethane grout injection
equipment. DURAL PUMP RINSE can also be left in the pump lines as a primer.
• Injection pump cleaner • Priming lines of injection pumps
Features/Benefits
• Non-flammable, non-corrosive
• Contains no solvents
• Thoroughly cleans urethane grouting equipment, ensuring a moisture-free injection system
Typical Properties Result

Specific Gravity @ 77°F (25°C) 0.96
Viscosity @ 77°F (25°C) 122 cps
Flash Point 450°F (232°C)
DUral Pump Rinse

Packaging
DURAL PUMP RINSE is packaged in 5 gallon (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
DURAL PUMP RINSE has a shelf life of 3 years in original, unopened containers.
Directions for Use

Pour DURAL PUMP RINSE into both A side and B side pump tanks. Use a scrubrush to remove any grout
residue from the sides or bottom of tanks. Dispense The DURAL PUMP RINSE through hoses into an
appropriate waste receptacle. Add clean DURAL PUMP RINSE into the pump and prime the lines, leaving the
DURAL PUMP RINSE in the pump until the next project. Be sure to expel all DURAL PUMP RINSE from the
lines prior to the next grouting job, because remaining material will drastically affect the curing capability of
urethane grouts.
Master Format #:
11 01 20

413
Rev. 6.11
414
Vandex BB 75
NSF Approved Waterproof Coating
Description
Waterproofing
VANDEX BB 75 is an engineered surface waterproof coating with hydrophobic properties that is NSF/ANSI Standard 61
approved for use with potable water. VANDEX BB 75 can be brush or spray applied to either the positive or negative side of
a concrete or masonry substrate in need of waterproofing. Tested to over 230 feet of hydrostatic pressure, VANDEX BB 75 is
suitable for horizontal and vertical/overhead uses. While resistant to water and moisture, VANDEX BB 75 allows the structure
to breathe by allowing the passage of vapor.
• Structural slabs • Tunnels • Sewage & water treatment plants
• Swimming pools • Dams & water reservoirs • Culverts
Features/Benefits
• Positive or negative side to minimize excavation • NSF approved for potable water
• Allows vapor to pass through substrate • Perfect for vertical/overhead and horizontal surfaces
Material Properties @70oF and 50% RH under laboratory conditions
Setting Time...........................2 to 4 hours Flexural Strength ASTM C348
Compressive Strength ASTM C109 28 days........................................870 psi
28 days........................................5,800 psi Modulus of Elasticity ASTM C469
VANDEX BB 75 is concrete gray in color 28 days...............................3.1 x 106 psi
Packaging
VANDEX BB 75 is packaged in 55 lb. bags
Vandex BB 75
Shelf Life
VANDEX BB 75 is NSF (ANSI STD 61) approved for use with potable water
US Army Corps of Engineers CRD C-48
Coverage
Coverages rates for VANDEX BB 75 vary depending on the application. Below are typcial applications and their usage rate.
Dampness - 5.5 lbs/yd2 (90 ft2/bag per coat) Surface water/seepage - 7.4 lbs/yd2 (66 ft2/bag per coat)
Water pressure - 11 lbs/yd (45 ft /bag per coat)
2 2
Directions for Use

Master Format #:
07 16 13
precast and formed concrete. The surface must have an open pore appearance for proper adhesion. Remove form marks
and other protrusions. Concrete honeycombs, cavities, joints, cracks, voids, tie holes and other defects must be opened and
routed to a 3/4” depth or to sound material. No active water leaks should be present at the time of application of VANDEX BB
75. Use SPEED PLUG, VANDEX PLUG, or VANDEX SUPER mixed with VANDEX QUICKBINDER to stop all active leaks. Any
surface defects need to be addressed with the application of VANDEX UNI MORTAR 1 ZSR. Once prepared, the substrate
needs to soaked with water to a saturated, surface-dry (SSD) condition just prior to the application of the material.

415
Mixing: Mix the entire of bag of VANDEX BB 75 with 1.3 - 1.5 gal of clean water for brush or trowel applications. For spray
applications, mix the entire bag with 1.5 - 1.65 gal of clean water. In either case, mix the material for at least 3 minutes with
a drill and mixing paddle.
Application: Brush or trowel: After the substrate has been prepared as described above, apply VANDEX BB 75 from the
bottom-up and work well into the substrate. Ensure that all cavities on the surface are filled. If a second layer is required
it must be applied while the first coat is still “green”. The time between applications is 2 to 4 hours, depending on local
conditions. Take care not to damage the first coat while applying the second coat. If a trowel is used to apply the material,
use a mason’s brush to texture the first coat prior to the application of the second coat for maximum adhesion.
Spray: VANDEX BB 75 may be applied using appropriate spray equipment with compressed air (i.e. hoppergun). For spray
equipment, the recommended air pressure is approx. 73 psi with a delivery rate of 18 ft3/minute, using a 1/4” nozzle diameter.
The first layer of VANDEX BB 75 is applied using a circular motion with nozzle at a 90o angle to the substrate. A trowel or
brush is then used to work the material into the substrate. If needed, spray apply a second coat while the first coat is still
“green” and can support the second coat. Time between coats is typically 2 to 4 hours, depending on local conditions. The
second layer can be trowelled flat or left textured.
Curing and protection: VANDEX BB 75 is cement based and will cure in the same fashion as ordinary concrete. For
maximum effectiveness, it is essential that the material be wet cured for a minimum of 5 days. Once VANDEX BB 75 has
hardened sufficiently, standard wet curing processes such as wet or fog spraying, or covering with polyethylene sheeting,
wet burlap or burlene. VANDEX BB 75 must be protected from rain during the first 24 hours and be protected from frost for
at least 5 days. Use insulation blankets if necessary. Backfilling can occur 3 days after placement. VANDEX BB 75 treated
surfaces need to be protected from gouging and scratching during the backfill process using protective mats or boards.
Application of topical treatments: Prior to the application of aesthetic coatings over top of VANDEX BB 75 treated surfaces,
the material needs to be cured for 28 days. If a plaster or stucco finish is to be used, apply a compatible bonding agent to
the VANDEX BB 75 surface.
Filling of water retaining structures: Filling of VANDEX BB 75 treated structures can occur once the material has had
sufficient time to cure. Typically, 14 days would be required prior to filling. If the project is “fast-tracked” and the structure
needs filled sooner, the material needs to be checked for sufficient hardness no sooner than 7 days after placement.
Clean-Up
• Do not apply to frozen or frost filled surfaces or when temperature is below or expected to fall below 40°F within 48 hours.
• Protect treated surfaces from frost for 5 days.
• Do not fill open cisterns, tanks, pools, etc. with water for at least 7 days. Inspect for hardness prior to filling.
• Allow minimum 3 days drying time before backfilling. Use protection boards to prevent gouging.
• Allow 28 days cure before the application of coatings and cementitious treatments.
• Protect treated surfaces for 24 hours from rain.
Rev. 6.11
416
Vandex Cemelast
Elasticized Waterproof Coating
Description
Waterproofing
VANDEX CEMELAST is an elastic surface waterproof coating with hydrophobic properties. VANDEX CEMELAST is comprised
of VANDEX CEMELAST LIQUID and VANDEX BB 75 powder. When the two are mixed together to create VANDEX CEMELAST,
areas that are subject to cracking and minor movement can be easily waterproofed. Tested to over 50 feet of hydrostatic
pressure, VANDEX CEMELAST is suitable for horizontal and vertical/overhead uses. While resistant to water and moisture,
VANDEX CEMELAST allows the structure to breathe by allowing the passage of vapor.
Features/Benefits
• Positive side waterproofing • Elastomeric properties for cracked substrates
• Allows vapor to pass through substrate • Perfect for vertical/overhead and horizontal surfaces
Setting Time...........................2 to 4 hours Elongation at Rupture
Adhesive Strength final..................................................13%
28 days........................................175 psi Tear Resistance
VANDEX CEMELAST is concrete gray in color final.............................................130 psi
Vandex Cemelast
Packaging
VANDEX CEMELAST LIQUID is packaged in 2.6 gal pails. VANDEX BB 75 is packaged in 55 lb. bags
Shelf Life
VANDEX CEMELAST LIQUID is good for 6 months in the original, unopened package. VANDEX BB 75 has a shelf life of 12
months in the original, unopened packaging.
Coverage
One mixed unit of VANDEX CEMELAST will cover approximately 109 ft2 at 2mm in thickness. Two coats are recommended
for proper performance.
Directions for Use

Master Format #:
07 16 13
routed to a 3/4” depth or to sound material. No active water leaks should be present at the time of application of VANDEX
CEMELAST. Use SPEED PLUG, VANDEX PLUG, or VANDEX SUPER mixed with VANDEX QUICKBINDER to stop all active
leaks. Any surface defects need to be addressed with the application of VANDEX UNI MORTAR 1 ZSR. Once prepared, the
substrate should be dry, but slight dampness is acceptable prior to the application of the material.

417
Mixing: Place the entire contents of VANDEX CEMELAST LIQUID into a clean mixing pail. Slowly add the entire bag of
VANDEX BB 75. Mix the material for at least 3 minutes with a drill and mixing paddle. in the event small amounts of VANDEX
CEMELAST need to be mixed, mix at a ratio of 5.5 lbs. of powder to 2 lbs. of liquid.
Application: Brush or trowel: After the substrate has been prepared as described above, apply VANDEX CEMELAST from
the bottom-up and work well into the substrate. Ensure that all cavities on the surface are filled. Apply the second layer while
the first coat is still “green”. The time between applications is 2 to 4 hours, depending on local conditions. Take care not to
damage the first coat while applying the second coat. If a trowel is used to apply the material, use a mason’s brush to texture
the first coat prior to the application of the second coat for maximum adhesion. Apply 2 coats at 2mm in thickness each. The
entire coating is not to exceed 4mm in thickness.
Spray: VANDEX CEMELAST may be applied using appropriate spray equipment with compressed air (i.e. hoppergun). For
spray equipment, the recommended air pressure is approx. 73 psi with a delivery rate of 18 ft3/minute, using a 1/4” nozzle
diameter. The first layer of VANDEX CEMELAST is applied using a circular motion with nozzle at a 90o angle to the substrate.
A trowel or brush is then used to work the material into the substrate. If needed, spray apply a second coat while the first coat
is still “green” and can support the second coat. Time between coats is typically 2 to 4 hours, depending on local conditions.
The second layer can be trowelled flat or left textured.
Curing and protection: VANDEX CEMELAST requires no curing procedures due to the enhancement from the VANDEX
CEMELAST LIQUID. Take caution to shield the freshly placed material from extreme temperatures and wind. VANDEX
CEMELAST must be protected from rain during the first 24 hours and be protected from frost for at least 5 days. Use
insulation blankets if necessary. Backfilling can occur 3 days after placement. VANDEX CEMELAST treated surfaces need to
be protected from gouging and scratching during the backfill process using protective mats or boards.
Application of topical treatments: Prior to the application of aesthetic coatings over top of VANDEX CEMELAST treated
surfaces, the material needs to be cured for 28 days. If a plaster or stucco finish is to be used, apply a compatible bonding
agent to the VANDEX CEMELAST surface.
Filling of water retaining structures: Filling of VANDEX CEMELAST treated structures can occur once the material has had
Clean-Up
Rev. 6.11
418
Vandex Uni Mortar 1 ZSR
NSF Approved Repair and Waterproofing Mortar
Description
Concrete Repair
VANDEX UNI MORTAR 1 ZSR is a single component, NSF approved for potable water resurfacing mortar and liner for
horizontal, vertical and overhead repairs. In addition to repairing concrete and masonry substrates, VANDEX UNI MORTAR
1 ZSR also waterproofs and is resistant to residential sewage and sulfates. VANDEX UNI MORTAR 1 ZSR is applied in 1/4”
to 1/2” lifts by trowel or spray equipment.
Features/Benefits
• NSF approved for potable water • Perfect for horizontal, vertical and overhead surfaces
• Sewage and sulfate resistant • Repairs and waterproofs at the same time

Compressive Strength ASTM C109 Tensile Bond ASTM C321
28 days.........................................................6,500 psi 28 days...............................................................220 psi
Modulus of Elasticity ASTM C469 Shrinkage ASTM C596
28 days..................................................3.55 x 106 psi 28 days................................................................ .025%
Flexural Strength ASTM C348 Set Time.....................................................4 to 6 hours
Vandex Uni Mortar 1 ZSR

28 days.........................................................1,000 psi
VANDEX UNI MORTAR 1 ZSR is concrete gray in color
Packaging
VANDEX UNI MORTAR 1 ZSR is packaged in 55 lb. bags
Shelf Life
VANDEX UNI MORTAR 1 ZSR is NSF (ANSI STD 61) approved for use with potable water
Coverage
When mixed with 1 gal of clean water, VANDEX UNI MORTAR 1 ZSR yields .44 ft3. This will cover approx. 22 ft2 at 1/4”.
Directions for Use

Master Format #:
03 01 30.71
a minimum of 7 days. All concrete laitance must also be removed. Mechanically prepare the concrete to a CSP 3-5 in
accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2. Concrete honeycombs, cavities, joints, cracks, voids, tie holes and other defects
must be opened and routed to a 3/4” depth or to sound material. No active water leaks should be present at the time of
application of VANDEX UNI MORTAR 1 ZSR. Use SPEED PLUG, VANDEX PLUG, or VANDEX SUPER mixed with VANDEX
QUICKBINDER to stop all active leaks. Once prepared, the substrate needs to soaked with water to a saturated, surface-dry
(SSD) condition just prior to the application of the material.

419
Mixing: Mix the entire of bag of VANDEX UNI MORTAR 1 ZSR with .8 to 1 gal of clean water for at least 3 minutes with a drill
and mortar mixing paddle. For single bags, add the correct amount of water to a clean pail. Slowly mix in the contents of the
bag. For multiple bag batches, use a horizontal shaft mortar mixer.
Application: After the substrate has been prepared as described above and the surface is in SSD condition, use a brush
and apply a scrub coat of the mixed VANDEX UNI MORTAR 1 ZSR onto the substrate. Ensure that all cavities on the surface
are filled. Don’t apply the scrub coat too far ahead of where the repair is being made. The scrub coat must be covered by
the initial lift before it dries out or it will become a bond breaker. Once the scrub coat has been applied, apply the first lift of
mortar. The minimum thickness per lift is 1/4”, while the maximum is 1/2”. If additional lifts are to be applied, wait approx.
2-4 hours for the last lift applied to tighten up. Using the side of a trowel or a brush, score or texture the visible layer to give
the additional layers a mechanical bond as well as a chemical bond. For small areas such as coves & fillets, VANDEX UNI
MORTAR 1 ZSR can be applied up to 1 1/4” x 1 1/4” to create a smooth transition.
Spray: VANDEX UNI MORTAR 1 ZSR may be applied using appropriate spray equipment with compressed air. For spray
equipment, the recommended air pressure is approx. 73 psi with a delivery rate of 18 ft3/minute, using a 3/8” nozzle diameter.
The first layer of VANDEX UNI MORTAR 1 ZSR is applied using a circular motion with nozzle at a 90o angle to the substrate.
Use a trowel or brush to texture the top lift if additional material will be applied. If needed, spray apply additional lifts while
the exposed layer is still “green” and can support the additional lift. Time between lifts is typically 2 to 4 hours, depending
on local conditions.
Curing and protection: VANDEX UNI MORTAR 1 ZSR is cement based and will cure in the same fashion as ordinary
concrete. For maximum effectiveness, it is essential that the material be wet cured for a minimum of 5 days. Once VANDEX
UNI MORTAR 1 ZSR has hardened sufficiently, standard wet curing processes such as wet or fog spraying, or covering with
polyethylene sheeting, wet burlap or burlene if a topical treatment is to be applied. If VANDEX UNI MORTAR 1 ZSR is going
to be the final finish a water based curing compound should be applied. The mortar must be protected from rain during the
first 24 hours and be protected from frost for at least 5 days. Use insulation blankets if necessary. Backfilling can occur 3
days after placement.
Application of topical treatments: Prior to the application of waterproofing or aesthetic coatings over top of VANDEX UNI
MORTAR 1 ZSR repairs, the material needs to be cured for 28 days.
Filling of water retaining structures: Per standard water industry practices, filling of VANDEX UNI MORTAR 1 ZSR repaired
structures can occur once the material has had sufficient time to cure. This is usually after 14 days, but if the project is fast
tracked and requires quicker filling, consideration may be given after 7 days, but the material needs checked for sufficient
hardness.
Clean-Up
Clean mixing and application equipment with water immediately after use. If allowed to dry on the surface, removal becomes
extremely difficult.
• Condition all materials to room temperature at least 24 hours prior to use.
• Protect repairs from frost for 5 days.
• Allow minimum 3 days cure time before backfilling. Use caution when backfilling early to prevent damage.
• Protect repaired substrates for 24 hours from rain.
• Apply a test patch to evaluate performance on concrete or block substrates which have been subjected to contamination,
efflorescence or chemical attack.
Rev. 6.11
420
Vandex Quickbinder
Accelerating Agent for Vandex Super
Description
Waterproofing
VANDEX QUICKBINDER is an alkaline liquid that is mixed into VANDEX SUPER crystalline waterproofing
powder to create a fast-setting mortar that stops actively leaking water. VANDEX QUICKBINDER can be used
as supplied or diluted with water to control the setting time of the mortar. It does not contain chlorides or solvent.
With the addition of VANDEX QUICKBINDER, VANDEX SUPER takes on hydraulic cement properties to cease
water penetration through joints, cracks, form tie holes, etc. The setting time of VANDEX SUPER when mixed
with VANDEX QUICKBINDER is approximately 1 minute at 68oF (20oC).
• Structural slabs • Tunnels • WTP & WWTP
• Swimming pools • Dams & water reservoirs • Construction joints
Features/Benefits
• Rapid setting for quick turnaround • Can be quickly coated with VANDEX SUPER
• Stops gushing water immediately • Crystalline growth occurs with treated substrate
Packaging
VANDEX QUICKBINDER is available in 2.6 gal (10 L) pails
Shelf Life
Vandex Quickbinder
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: The surface must be structurally sound, clean and free of dirt, oil and other contaminants
including curing compounds, form release agents, old coatings, paint and efflorescence. All concrete laitance
must also be removed. Provide an absorptive surface on all substrates including precast and formed concrete.
The surface must have an open capillary system for adhesion and for optimum crystalline growth. Concrete
honeycombs, cavities, joints, cracks, voids, tie holes and other defects must be opened and routed to sound
material. Once prepared, the substrate needs to soaked with water to a saturated, surface-dry (SSD) condition
just prior to the application of the material.
Mixing & Application: SEEPING WALLS: Prior to application, dilute VANDEX QUICKBINDER 1:1 with potable
water. Create a brushable slurry by mixing 2 parts of VANDEX SUPER with 0.8 part of the diluted solution by
volume (2:0.8). Immediately brush the slurry onto the seeping wall. This slurry will take initial set quickly. Mix
only enough slurry that can be applied before it takes initial set.
Master Format #:
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS: Prepare by chasing the joint down to 2” (5 cm) deep. Remove any dust and loose
07 16 16
concrete. Mix 3 to 4 parts of VANDEX SUPER with 1 part of undiluted VANDEX QUICKBINDER by volume.
Firmly press a 3/4” (2 cm) plug into the bottom of the joint. Once the leak has stopped, mix a slurry coat of
VANDEX SUPER by mixing 2 parts VANDEX SUPER with 0.8 part water by volume. Brush apply the VANDEX
SUPER slurry over the previously placed plug. While the VANDEX SUPER slurry is still wet, fill in the rest of the
joint with a damp pack of VANDEX UNI MORTAR 1 ZSR.

421
RANDOM LEAKS: Locate the leak and chase the surrounding substrate back to 4” (10 cm) in depth. Mix 4
parts of VANDEX SUPER with 1 part of undiluted VANDEX QUICKBINDER by volume to a semi-dry consistency.
Firmly press and hold the cementitious plug in the leaking void until it sets (approx. 1 minute). Once the leak
has stopped, mix a slurry coat of VANDEX SUPER by mixing 2 parts VANDEX SUPER with 0.8 part water by
volume. Brush apply the VANDEX SUPER slurry over the previously placed plug. While the VANDEX SUPER
slurry is still wet, fill in the rest of the joint with a damp pack of VANDEX UNI MORTAR 1 ZSR. After the mortar
has set, coat the surface of it and the rest of the project with VANDEX SUPER as described on the VANDEX
SUPER technical data sheet.
Clean-Up
Clean mixing and application equipment with water immediately after use. Clean splatter or spills with water
before material sets. If allowed to dry on the surface, removal becomes extremely difficult.
• Do not mix allow VANDEX QUICKBINDER liquid to freeze.
• Do not mix more material than can be placed before it sets.
• Do not apply to frozen or frost filled surfaces or when temperature is below or expected to fall below 40°F within
48 hours.
• Do not apply VANDEX SUPER at temperatures above 90°F, unless the surface has been fully saturated
with water at the time the application begins. Take protective measures to shade substrates in elevated
temperatures.
• VANDEX SUPER slurry is not designed as a wearing surface. Apply a protective topcoat before subjecting it
to traffic.
• Allow 28 days cure and neutralize the product before the application of coatings.
Rev. 6.11
422
Vandex Super/Super White
NSF Approved Crystalline Waterproofing
Description
Waterproofing
VANDEX SUPER and VANDEX SUPER WHITE are of similar nature. VANDEX SUPER is based on gray cement and is concrete
gray in color, whereas VANDEX SUPER WHITE utilizes white cement as the binder and is white in color. The remainder of
this document will reference both products as VANDEX SUPER, unless noted. VANDEX SUPER becomes an integral part
of the concrete substrate once applied and waterproofs the negative or positive side through a crystallization process. The
crystals created block the capillaries and minor shrinkage cracks within the concrete to prevent any further water ingress. In
addition to waterproofing, VANDEX SUPER protects concrete substrates against saltwater, wastewater, harsh ground water
and certain chemical solutions. VANDEX SUPER (gray) is ANSI/NSF approved for use with potable water.
• Swimming pools • Dams & water reservoirs • Construction joints
Features/Benefits
• Positive or negative side to minimize excavation • NSF approved for potable water (gray only)
• Allows vapor to pass through substrate • Remains permanently active within concrete
Packaging
VANDEX SUPER (gray) is packaged in 50 lb. bags and 50 lb. plastic pails. VANDEX SUPER WHITE is packaged in 50 lb.
pails only.
Vandex Super/Super White

Shelf Life
VANDEX SUPER (gray only) is approved by NSF (ANSI STD 61) for use with potable water
US Army Corps of Engineers CRD C-48
Coverage
Coverages rates for VANDEX SUPER vary depending on the application. Below are typcial applications and their usage rate.
Positive and negative side wall waterproofing 1.4 lb/yd2 x 2 applications (320 ft2/bag per coat)
Water retaining structures 1.4 lb/yd2 x 2 applications (320 ft2/bag per coat)
Freshly placed concrete slabs (including split slabs) 2.2 lb/yd2 x 1 application (204 ft2/bag per coat)
Construction joints 2.8 lb/yd2 x 1 application (160 ft2/bag per coat)
Directions for Use

Master Format #:
precast and formed concrete. The surface must have an open capillary system for adhesion and for optimum crystalline
07 16 16
growth. Remove form marks and other protrusions. Concrete honeycombs, cavities, joints, cracks, voids, tie holes and other
defects must be opened and routed to sound material. No active water leaks should be present at the time of application
of VANDEX SUPER. Use SPEED PLUG, VANDEX PLUG, or VANDEX SUPER mixed with VANDEX QUICKBINDER to stop
all active leaks. Any surface defects need to be addressed with the application of VANDEX UNI MORTAR 1 ZSR. Once
prepared, the substrate needs to soaked with water to a saturated, surface-dry (SSD) condition just prior to the application
of the material.

423
Mixing: Approximate mixing ratio is 2 parts clean, potable water to 5 parts of VANDEX SUPER powder by volume. Alternately,
mix the entire 50 lb. bag or pail with 1.75 to 2.0 gal of water. DO NOT MIX any more material than can be used within 20
minutes. Agitate the mixture frequently to restore workability.
Application: Brush: Apply VANDEX SUPER to properly prepared concrete and masonry substrates with a masonry brush.
Spread the material across the SSD surface and work into the surface at the specified coverage rate. If a second coat is
required, apply the second coat while the coat is still “green” and can support the second coat being scrubbed over top of
it. The setting time of VANDEX SUPER (gray) is 60 minutes, while the setting time of VANDEX SUPER WHITE is approx. 150
minutes. Set times were determined under laboratory conditions at 72oF.
Spray: VANDEX SUPER may be applied using appropriate spray equipment with compressed air (i.e. hoppergun). For spray
equipment, the recommended air pressure is approx. 73 psi with a delivery rate of 18 ft3/minute. If needed, spray apply a
second coat while the first coat is still “green” and can support the second coat.
New concrete slabs: Place and screed concrete as usual. Once the concrete has reached initial set and the bleed water
has disappeared, use a power trowel with float shoes to open the surface of the concrete. Broadcast VANDEX SUPER over
the surface at the specified amount with a mesh sieve or other mechanical means. The material must then be worked into
the surface with float shoes prior to the start of final finishing procedures.
Split slab construction: Once the base slab has been placed (min. 4”), apply VANDEX SUPER at the specified rate with a
mesh sieve. Proceed to placing the topping slab as to not displace any of the material on the base slab.
Construction joints: Just prior to the placement of the adjoining slab, apply the specified amount of VANDEX SUPER slurry
to the prepared, exposed side of the slab in place. Take care in not displacing the material as the adjacent slab is placed.
Curing and protection: VANDEX SUPER is cement based and will cure in the same fashion as ordinary concrete. For
maximum effectiveness, it is essential that the material be wet cured for a minimum of 5 days. Once VANDEX SUPER has
hardened sufficiently, standard wet curing processes such as wet or fog spraying, or covering with polyethylene sheeting,
wet burlap or burlene. VANDEX SUPER must be protected from rain during the first 24 hours and be protected from frost for
at least 5 days. Use insulation blankets if necessary. Backfilling can occur 3 days after placement. VANDEX SUPER treated
surfaces need to be protected from gouging and scratching during the backfill process.
Application of topical treatments: Prior to the application of aesthetic coatings over top of VANDEX SUPER treated surfaces,
the material needs to be cured and neutralized. Allow 28 days for the VANDEX SUPER to fully cure. After that time, soak
the treated surface with water and apply a diluted solution of hydrochloric (muriatic) acid (1:8). Thoroughly rinse with clean
water immediately after the application. DO NOT ALLOW the diluted acid solution to dry on the material. Use all necessary
protective means (gloves, goggles, respirators and clothing) when working with the diluted acid solution.
Filling of water retaining structures: Filling of VANDEX SUPER treated structures can occur once the material has had
Clean-Up
• Do not retemper VANDEX SUPER/SUPER WHITE.
• Do not mix more material than can be placed in 20 minutes.
• Do not apply VANDEX SUPER at temperatures above 90°F, unless the surface has been fully saturated with water at the time
the application begins. Take protective measures to shade substrates in elevated temperatures.
• VANDEX SUPER slurry is not designed as a wearing surface. Apply a protective topcoat before subjecting it to traffic.
• Allow 28 days cure and neutralize the product before the application of coatings.
Rev. 6.11
424
Vandex Construction Joint Tape
Waterproofing strip for static joints and cracks
Description
Waterproofing
VANDEX CONSTRUCTION JOINT TAPE is a 7” wide synthetic rubber “tape” that is covered with an alkali resistant and flexible
polyester fabric, which forms a web around the edges. VANDEX CONSTRUCTION JOINT TAPE is used in conjunction with
VANDEX BB 75, VANDEX BB 75E, or VANDEX CEMELAST to provide a permanent waterproof seal over static joints and
cracks on either the positive or negative side of a substrate where water is a problem.
Features/Benefits
• Waterproofs on the positive or negative side • Remains flexible
• Resistant to hydrostatic pressure • Can be applied to green concrete for fast turnaround
Packaging
VANDEX CONSTRUCTION JOINT TAPE is supplied in 98.4 ft (30m) rolls.
Shelf Life
Vandex Construction Joint Tape

VANDEX CONSTRUCTION JOINT TAPE has an infinite shelf life provided it is stored in its original, unopened package in a
dry environment.
Coverage
One roll of VANDEX CONSTRUCTION JOINT TAPE will seal 98.4 linear feet of joint or crack. The tape is 7” wide with an
additional 1 1/4” of fabric webbing off the edges.
Directions for Use

CONSTRUCTION JOINT TAPE. Use SPEED PLUG, VANDEX PLUG, or VANDEX SUPER mixed with VANDEX QUICKBINDER
to stop all active leaks. Any surface defects need to be addressed with the application of VANDEX UNI MORTAR 1 ZSR. If
the VANDEX CONSTRUCTION JOINT TAPE is going to be used to treat cracks and joints on the negative side, rout out the
cracks and joints to 3/4” in depth and fill with VANDEX UNI MORTAR 1 ZSR. Once prepared, the substrate should be dry, but
slight dampness is acceptable prior to the application of the material.
Master Format #:
Mixing: VANDEX CONSTRUCTION JOINT TAPE requires no mixing or preparation, however the VANDEX slurry materials
07 16 16
used to adhere the tape to the substrate require mixing. Please refer to the technical data sheets of either VANDEX BB 75,
VANDEX BB 75E, or VANDEX CEMELAST for proper mixing and application instructions.

425
Application: After preparing the joint or crack as described above, follow the directions on the VANDEX slurry material
technical data sheet for mixing and placement. Apply the first coat of slurry material and be sure to extend the application
of the VANDEX slurry material at least 3/8” beyond the width of the tape in each direction. Position the tape over the applied
coating and embed properly, making sure the fabric webbing on the edges gets fully embedded. Overcoat the tape with a
second lift of VANDEX slurry mortar and smooth with a trowel or damp brush. In the event the VANDEX CONSTRUCTION
JOINT TAPE and slurry are applied for negative side protection, mechanical bracing will be required if hydrostatic pressure is
present through the crack or joint in the substrate.
For lap splices, overlap the tape at least 8”, using the VANDEX slurry material as an adhesive for the splice. For internal and
external corners, use a 1 1/4” x 1 1/4” piece of VANDEX CONSTRUCTION JOINT TAPE adhered to the material in the corner
for added reinforcement.
Curing and protection: While the VANDEX CONSTRUCTION JOINT TAPE requires no special curing, the slurry mortar used
in the process may. Please refer to the technical data sheet of the VANDEX slurry mortar used for all curing, protection and
return to service requirements.
Clean-Up
Rev. 6.11
426
Vandex Flextape System
High performance sealing system for dynamic joints and cracks
Description
Waterproofing
The VANDEX FLEXTAPE SYSTEM is comprised of the VANDEX FLEXTAPE thermoplastic elastomer (TPE) seal strip and
the VANDEX FLEXTAPE EPOXY ADHESIVE, which is a two component (1:1) gel epoxy used to adhere the seal strip to the
concrete structure. The VANDEX FLEXTAPE SYSTEM has been designed to permanently seal dynamically moving cracks
and joints from either the positive or negative side. Following a simple installation process, the VANDEX FLEXTAPE SYSTEM
provides excellent resistance to municipal sewage, saltwater, UV radiation and microorganisms. VANDEX FLEXTAPE is
available in three sizes to accomodate different joint and crack configurations. VANDEX FLEXTAPE 150/1 is 6” (150mm) wide
and 1mm thick. VANDEX FLEXTAPE 200/1 is 8” (200mm) wide and 1mm thick. VANDEX FLEXTAPE 200/2 is 8” (200mm)
wide and 2mm thick.
• Marine environments • Tunnels & subways • Sewage & water treatment plants
• Foundations & basements • Spillways
Features/Benefits
• Waterproofs on the positive or negative side • Remains permanently flexible
• Resistant to hydrostatic pressure • Three sizes for accurate joint configuration
Material Properties @ 73oF and 50% RH under laboratory conditions
Vandex Flextape Epoxy Adhesive
Bond Strength ASTM D882 Compressive Strength ASTM D695
Vandex Flextape System

14 days..................................................................2,460 psi final..............................................................11,236 psi
Flexural Strength ASTM D790
final.........................................................................5,582 psi Gel Time.......................................................... 35 min
Vandex Flextape
Tear Strength.......................................................> 870 psi Elongation at Rupture..................................> 400%
Packaging
VANDEX FLEXTAPE 150/1, 200/1, and 200/2 are all supplied in 65.6 ft rolls. VANDEX FLEXTAPE EPOXY ADHESIVE is
available in a 2 gallon unit (1:1).
Shelf Life
VANDEX FLEXTAPE rolls have an infinite shelf life provided they are stored in their original, unopened packaging in a dry
environment. VANDEX FLEXTAPE EPOXY ADHESIVE has a 2 year shelf life if stored in its original, unopened packaging.
Coverage
Master Format #:
All VANDEX FLEXTAPE rolls are 65.6 ft in length. Depending on the style used, the usage rate of the VANDEX FLEXTAPE EPOXY
07 16 16
ADHESIVE varies. The list below outlines the type of seal used and the approximate amount of epoxy consumed.
VANDEX FLEXTAPE 150/1 37 linear feet per gallon

427
Directions for Use
FLEXTAPE SYSTEM. Use SPEED PLUG, VANDEX PLUG, or VANDEX SUPER mixed with VANDEX QUICKBINDER to stop all
active leaks. Any surface defects need to be addressed with the application of VANDEX UNI MORTAR 1 ZSR. At the time of
application, the substrate must not exceed 4% (content by weight) moisture.
Mixing: Pre-mix the “A” and “B” components of the VANDEX FLEXTAPE EPOXY ADHESIVE. Place the “A” component into a
clean mixing vessel and slowly add the “B” component. Mix for at least 3 minutes, until a uniform color is reached.
Application: Apply the properly mixed epoxy adhesive as an initial coating to both sides of the joint or crack with a straight
edged or notched trowel. Don’t apply the epoxy right up to the edge of the crack or joint. Leave the epoxy recessed slightly
so that when the sealing tape is pressed into the epoxy, it doesn’t get displaced into the joint or crack. The thickness of
the VANDEX FLEXTAPE EPOXY ADHESIVE depends on the texture of the substrate. That standard thickness is 1 to 2mm.
Immediately after the epoxy adhesive is applied, press the VANDEX FLEXTAPE firmly into the epoxy. Any entrapped air
bubbles must be removed with a small roller. Where the anticipated joint movement exceeds the performance characteristics
of the material, the tape can be applied with a bellows configuration to the increase the movement capabilities of the system.
Immediately after placing the tape, apply a second application of the epoxy adhesive over the top of the ends of the VANDEX
FLEXTAPE. Don’t apply the epoxy adhesive directly over the tape where it spans the joint or crack, as this is the area where
the expansion and contraction will occur. In areas where the VANDEX FLEXTAPE SYSTEM is to be used for negative side
waterproofing, a counterpressure device, such as a field fabricated brace, must be used. If the sealed joint or crack area is
going to have a coating system applied over it, broadcast oven dried silica sand to refusal over the wet epoxy. Once dry,
remove any excess sand prior to the installation of the coating.
For applications where chemical attack isn’t a concern, VANDEX UNIFLEX NV polymer adhesive can be used to adhere
the FLEXTAPE materials to the concrete substrate. Please refer to the technical data sheet for VANDEX UNIFLEX NV for
application instructions.
For lap splices, overlap the tape at least 1 1/2”. The tape must be thermally welded together with hot air. The temperature of
the hot air for the 1mm thick tapes must be around 465oF and the temperature for the 2mm tape must be around 645oF. Use
a roller to smooth out the splice as it is being heated. For internal and external corners, cut the material half way up so that it
will easily bend around the corner. Cut out enough of the sealing tape from a scrap piece to make the necessary 1 1/2” lap
in all transition areas. It is recommended to dry fit all corner transitions prior to applying the epoxy adhesive.
Curing and protection: VANDEX FLEXTAPE EPOXY ADHESIVE requires no curing procedures. Epoxy adhesives are
self-curing and their cure time is dependent on the temperature. Protect the tape against any possible damage during the
remainder of any additional construction.
Clean-Up
Clean mixing and application equipment with a solvent such as acetone immediately after the application. Use personal
protection such as the appropriate gloves, goggles and respirators when working with epoxies and solvents. Cured epoxy
is very difficult to remove and will require mechanical means to do so.
• Protect the tape from damage during construction.
• Use personal protection when using epoxies and solvents.
• VANDEX FLEXTAPE SYSTEM must be protected against heat exposure in excess of 155oF.
Rev. 6.11
428
Cleaners
Concrete Blaster 431
Euco Clean & Strip 433
Euco Concrete Floor Cleaner 435
Euco Solvent 437
Evaporation Retarders
Concrete Surface Retarders 439
Eucobar 441
Form Release Agents

Form-Eze Natural 443
Formshield PURE 445
Formshield WB 447
Mortar Admixtures
Accelguard 80 449
Blocktite Mortar Admixture 451
Euco Winter Admixture 453
Euco Winter Mix Powder 455
Integral Waterpeller 457
Rebar Coating
Tammsbar 459
Slip-Resistant Additive
Euco Grip 461
CONCRETE BLASTER
High Performance Equipment Cleaner
Description
Miscellaneous
CONCRETE BLASTER is a patented liquid with the ability to remove hardened, built-up concrete from tools
and equipment. It is designed to eliminate the need for sand blasting, bushhammering and jack-hammering
hardened concrete from equipment.
• Ready mix trucks • Floats
• Transport buggies • Concrete forms
• Trowels • Precast forms
• Troweling machines • Concrete and mortar mixers
• Screeds • Other concrete placing equipment
Features/Benefits
• Ready to use - no mixing required
• Biodegradable - used material need not be recycled
• Reduces the related costs of sand blasting and chip-hammering
• Reduces labor costs and equipment damage normally associated with removing built-up, hardened concrete
Appearance: CONCRETE BLASTER is a clear liquid with a slight amber cast. When applied to concrete the product
will foam slightly. CONCRETE BLASTER will not affect the appearance of typical equipment used in the concrete
industry.
CONCRETE BLASTER
Packaging
CONCRETE BLASTER is packaged in 275 gal (1041 L) totes, 55 gal (208 L) drums, and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
• Biological Oxygen Demand (B.O.D.) Test - F factor (0.28): Biodegradable
Coverage
Approximately 3 gal (11.4 L) of CONCRETE BLASTER will be required to clean the typical rear exterior of a ready
mix truck. This assumes an average depth of built-up concrete of 1/2” (13 mm).
Directions for Use

Master Format #:
Surface Preparation: CONCRETE BLASTER works best when applied to dry concrete.
03 01 30.51
Mixing: CONCRETE BLASTER is packaged ready to use. No pre-mixing is required. Do not dilute.
Application: To remove hardened concrete, apply CONCRETE BLASTER directly to the area to be cleaned
with a brush or pump-up type sprayer. THE CONCRETE SURFACE MUST BE THOROUGHLY SATURATED.
Allow CONCRETE BLASTER to remain on the concrete until the cement matrix becomes soft to the touch. The
minimum recommended time is 20 minutes but treated concrete may be left to react overnight. The product will
continue to attack the cement matrix even after the foaming action has subsided.

431
After the concrete has softened, re-apply CONCRETE BLASTER and allow to remain on the surface for
approximately 10 minutes. Remove concrete with a scraper. If additional concrete remains, subsequent
applications may be necessary. The final application may be removed by power washing. Concrete buildup
of 1/4” (6 mm) or more will require multiple applications. If treated concrete will set overnight, apply additional
CONCRETE BLASTER the next morning to re-soften the concrete. Leave the fresh application on 10 to 15
minutes. Then, remove softened concrete as stated above.
Regular maintenance: CONCRETE BLASTER may be used on a regular basis to remove concrete build-up.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with soap and water.
• Though CONCRETE BLASTER is a relatively safe product to use, always wear protective clothing (rubber
gloves, eye protection, etc.).
• Do not dilute or effectiveness will be greatly diminished.
• CONCRETE BLASTER contains a mild organic acid which may oxidize certain metals if left in contact for long
periods of time. After the concrete residue has softened, complete the removal and thoroughly flush the area
with clean water.
• Concrete surface must be dry.
• Do not allow this product to freeze.
• The effectiveness of CONCRETE BLASTER is reduced in cold weather.
• Protect concrete floors or driveways from spillage.
• A small area should be tested to ensure against staining of paint finishes.
Rev. 6.11
432
EUCO CLEAN & STRIP
Concrete Floor Stripper
Description
Miscellaneous
EUCO CLEAN & STRIP is a heavy duty concrete floor stripper that is highly effective at removing curing compounds,
oils, grease, most concrete sealers, and other contaminants from concrete floors. EUCO CLEAN & STRIP is formulated
from an easy to use, biodegradable citrus-based solvent that will not etch concrete like acid based removers. EUCO
CLEAN & STRIP replaces hazardous petroleum and chlorinated solvent based removal products.
• Dissolves resin based concrete curing compounds and sealers
• Breaks down and removes grease, oil, and dirt stains and rubber tire marks
• Degreases tools and equipment
Features/Benefits
• High strength, concentrated formula
• Easy to apply - rinses clean with water
• Pleasant citrus smell
• Environmentally safe
Weight per gallon:.............7.0 lbs/gal (0.85 kg/L)
Flash Point:..................................... 117°F (47°C)
Odor:............................................................ Citrus
Appearance: Clear, light yellow liquid
EUCO CLEAN & STRIP

Packaging
EUCO CLEAN & STRIP is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums, 5 gallon (19 L) pails, and cases of 4/1 gallon
(3.8 L) units.
Shelf Life
Coverage
After dilution with water, coverage is 100 to 400 ft2/gal (2.4 to 4.9 m²/L), depending on the dilution ratio.
Directions for Use
EUCO CLEAN & STRIP may be diluted with water before using, depending on the extent of the stripping to
be done. Experimenting with different dilution ratios may be necessary to determine which strength is most
suitable. Always test a small area before use.
Mixing: For stripping curing compounds: Use EUCO CLEAN & STRIP at a 10:1 ratio. Measure required amount
of EUCO CLEAN & STRIP and add to water and mix thoroughly. For best results, curing compounds should be
Master Format #:
3 weeks old before attempting removal.

03 01 30.51
For stripping concrete curing and sealing products: Use EUCO CLEAN & STRIP up to full strength, depending
on age and service conditions of the sealer.
Application: Apply to floor using sprayers, automatic floor scrubbers, or other conventional methods. EUCO
CLEAN & STRIP should remain on the floor for 30 minutes*. Redistribute puddles during this soak time - do
not allow the EUCO CLEAN & STRIP to dry. Add more product if necessary.
* Times are approximate. More or less soak time may be needed for the desired result.

433
After EUCO CLEAN & STRIP has been on the floor for the approporiate amount of time, scrub with ride-on or
walk behind mechanical scrubbers. After scrubbing, rinse the area with clean water or vacuum until there is no
visible trace of EUCO CLEAN & STRIP remaining on the floor. Disposal of rinse water should follow local, state
and Federal regulations. If necessary, repeat process until the desired results are achieved.
Clean-Up
• Use in well ventilated areas.
• Wear protective clothing (gloves, eye protection, etc.)
• Keep away from heat and flame.
• Do not add water directly to EUCO CLEAN & STRIP. Always add EUCO CLEAN & STRIP to water.
• Do not use near food. Remove food before using.
• Do not use on resilient tile, asphalt, or painted surfaces.
• When used at high strengths, EUCO CLEAN & STRIP may soften rubber tires and cause them to become
tacky. Use caution when operating wheeled equipment in these conditions.
Rev. 6.11
434
EUCO CONCRETE FLOOR CLEANER
Concrete Surface Salt And Laitance Remover
Description
Miscellaneous
EUCO CONCRETE FLOOR CLEANER is a heavy duty diammonium citrate cleaner that is highly effective at
removing laitance and surface salts from concrete floors. This residue is often encountered after curing blankets
have been removed from the concrete surface. Without removal of the laitance and salts and proper cleaning
of the concrete floor, future applications of surface treatments such as liquid densifiers will not perform properly.
EUCO CONCRETE FLOOR CLEANER is formulated as a water based solution with zero VOC’s.
• Removes laitance and residual salts from concrete surfaces
• Ensures a clean floor for proper penetration and performance of liquid densifier applications
Features/Benefits
• High strength, effective formula
• Contractor-friendly water based formulation
• Safer to use than other types of acidic cleaners
Odor........................................................ammonia
Specific gravity................................... 1.08 ±0.10
Weight/gal................... 9.02 lbs/gal (1.08 mg/mL)
EUCO CONCRETE FLOOR CLEANER

Volatiles by volume.......................................89%
pH................................................ 6 (as packaged)
VOC content..................................................0 g/L
Appearance: Clear liquid
Packaging
EUCO CONCRETE FLOOR CLEANER is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums and 5 gallon (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
Coverage
Approximately 400 ft2/gallon (9.8 m2/L), depending on dilution rate.
Directions for Use
Verify Required Dilution Rate: Dilute a sample of EUCO CONCRETE FLOOR CLEANER to a 1:1 ratio (by
volume) with water. Apply diluted sample to concrete area to be tested. Test effectiveness of EUCO CONCRETE
FLOOR CLEANER. Additional dilution rates may be required as necessary.
Surface Salt and Laitance Removal: Apply EUCO CONCRETE FLOOR CLEANER to floor using sprayers,
Master Format #:
automatic floor scrubbers, or other conventional methods. For cleaning and removal of surface salts and laitance,
03 01 30.51
allow EUCO CONCRETE FLOOR CLEANER to dwell on the floor for 15 minutes*. Redistribute puddles during this
soak time. Add more product if necessary. After dwell time, remove salts and laitance by scrubbing the floor with
water and brushes. Neutralize the EUCO CONCRETE FLOOR CLEANER with the following solution: Dissolve
1.0 lb of baking soda in 5 gal (18.9 L) of water. For use in an autoscrubber, add this solution to an additional 50
gal (189 L) of water in the scrubber tank. Wash the area with this neutralizing solution, followed by a final rinse
with clean water to flush residue and any debris from the floor. * Times are approximate. More or less dwell
time may be needed for the desired result. Excessive dwell time can result in etching of the concrete surface.

435
Clean-Up
• Always wear protective clothing (rubber gloves, eye protection, respirator, etc.). Consult the MSDS before using.
• Protect adjacent concrete slabs and polished and painted surfaces, metal and glass from exposure to EUCO
CONCRETE FLOOR CLEANER.
• Do not track EUCO CONCRETE FLOOR CLEANER onto an area that is not presently being treated. Any
tracked material should be removed immediately.
• Storage: EUCO CONCRETE FLOOR CLEANER is unusable if allowed to freeze. Store between 50oF to
90oF (10oC to 32oC).
Caution: While the EUCO CONCRETE FLOOR CLEANER is reacting on the concrete, there may be a mild to
heavy ammonia odor; a respirator equipped with an appropriate cartridge for ammonia should be used.
Rev. 6.11
436
EUCO SOLVENT
Clean-up And Floor Stripper Product
Description
Miscellaneous
EUCO SOLVENT is a high-strength solvent for numerous uses from tool clean-up to cure & seal membrane
removal. It is a pure liquid and contains no added fillers or solids.
• Tools and equipment
• Removal of resin based curing membranes and sealers from floor surfaces
• Breakdown of oil, grease and tar build-up
• Clean-up of epoxy equipment and tools
• Troweling aid for epoxy mortars
Features/Benefits
• High strength for fast clean-up
• Multiple components for maximum effectiveness
Appearance: EUCO SOLVENT is a clear, low viscosity liquid.
Packaging
EUCO SOLVENT is packaged in 5 gal (18.9 L) pails and 4/1 gal (3.8 L) units per case.
Shelf Life
EUCO SOLVENT
Coverage
Floor Stripping: For solvent based curing compound removal, an application rate of 100 ft2/gal (2.45 m2/L) will
remove most of the sealer. (This product may not be effective in removing some water based curing and sealing
products.) Cured epoxy sealers and coatings may require 2 to 3 applications for complete removal.
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: Cleaning or curing compound/sealer removal is easiest if the material has not hardened.
Mixing: EUCO SOLVENT requires no premixing. The product is ready for use directly from the container.
Placement: Apply EUCO SOLVENT directly on the area to be cleaned or stripped. Keep the area wet and allow
to soften for 5 to 10 minutes. Reapply additional solvent and begin resin removal by scraping or scrubbing.
Clean-up
Clean tools with brushes before resin residue has hardened. If the resin has hardened, submerge the tools
in EUCO SOLVENT until the residue has softened and can be scraped away.
Master Format #:
• Do not use near sparks or open flames.

03 01 30.51
• Use only in well ventilated areas.

• If HVAC intake ducts will distribute solvent odor into adjoining occupied areas of the building, care should be
taken to block these ventilation vents.
• Always wear protective clothing (rubber gloves, eye protections, etc).
• Use EUCO CLEAN & STRIP whenever solvent odor is unacceptable.

437
Rev. 6.11
438
CONCRETE SURFACE RETARDERS
Formula F & Formula S For Exposed Aggregate Surfaces
Description
Miscellaneous
CONCRETE SURFACE RETARDERS F & S are chemical formulations which retard, but do not “kill” the set
of the mortar at the surface of concrete. When the underlying concrete has hardened, the retarded mortar
surface can be flushed off with a stream of water and/or removed by scrubbing with a stiff brush. Since these
compounds do not “kill” the set, if they are left on the concrete or unintentionally splashed on other fresh
concrete, they will permit the concrete to eventually attain a set and achieve full strength. These CONCRETE
SURFACE RETARDERS are available in two formulations to meet varying job requirements:
Formula F is a paint-like emulsion designed for application directly to forms.
Formula S is a neutral, sprayable liquid for application to freshly placed horizontal concrete surfaces.
• Creation of exposed aggregate surfaces • Bond improvement for water-proofing materials
• Precast panels • Slip-resistant surfaces
• Decorative sidewalks and walkways • Formulations for both horizontal and vertical
Features/Benefits
• Safe to use - easy to apply • Reduces cost of mechanically preparing surfaces
• Works quickly and effectively for waterproofing, stucco or plaster application
• Provides up to 1/4” (6 mm) depth retardation • Etch depth can be adjusted as desired
CONCRETE SURFACE RETARDERS

Formula S Formula F
Weight/gal 8.9 lb/gal (1.1 kg/L) 8.8 lb/gal (1.0 kg/L)
Solids Content 17% 30%
VOC 0 g/L 653 g/L
Appearance: CONCRETE SURFACE RETARDER Formula ‘F’ is a tan paint-like emulsion for application on
vertical surfaces such as forms. CONCRETE SURFACE RETARDER Formula ‘S’ is a low viscosity green liquid
for application directly on freshly placed horizontal concrete surfaces.
Packaging
CONCRETE SURFACE RETARDER F&S are packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums, 5 gal (18.9 L) pails and cases
of 6/1 gal (3.8 L) units.
Shelf Life
Coverage
Formula ‘F’: 1 gal (3.8 L) will cover 150 ft2 (3.7 m2) and provide up to 1/4” (6 mm) depth.
Formula ‘S’: 1 gal (3.8 L) will cover 100 to 200 ft2 (2.5 to 4.9 m2) and provide from 1/8” to 3/16” (3.2 to 4.8 mm)
depth retardation.
Master Format #:
Directions for Use

03 35 23
Surface Preparation: Forms to be coated should be clean and free of oil, dirt and form release agents.
Mixing: CONCRETE SURFACE RETARDERS do not require pre-blending. These products should be used
directly from the container.

439
Application: CONCRETE SURFACE RETARDER Formula F should be painted on forms without thinning in a
continuous unbroken film. Forms may be coated several days in advance or in as short a time as will allow complete
drying of the film. Drying time varies between one and four hours depending on weather conditions. In warm weather,
forms may be stripped in one day, in cooler weather allow two to three days. Immediately after stripping remove the
retarded surface mortar by flushing off with a stream of water and/or remove by scrubbing with a stiff brush. Pre-cast
structural members should be stripped from their forms in their usual time and the surface mortar then removed.
CONCRETE SURFACE RETARDER Formula S is applied to freshly placed horizontal concrete surfaces
immediately after final finishing operations. It should be applied by low pressure spray and the treated surfaces
then covered to prevent rapid evaporation. The retarded mortar should be flushed off with water in 12 to 24
hours after application depending upon weather conditions.
Use BROWNTONE CS to cure and seal exposed aggregate concrete to give these surfaces a subtle, earthtoned
look with an attractive gloss.
Clean Up
Clean tools and equipment with soap and water before the material dries.
• These products are affected by environmental conditions. Warmer temperatures will allow earlier stripping of
forms and earlier surface flushing, while cooler temperatures delay these procedures.
• Store in a dry place and protect from freezing.
Rev. 6.11
440
EUCOBAR
Evaporation Retardant
Description
Miscellaneous
EUCOBAR is designed to be used as an evaporation retardant on concrete surfaces of all types. When sprayed
over fresh concrete, EUCOBAR forms a thin, continuous film which prevents rapid moisture loss from the
concrete surface. It is easy to use requiring only the addition of water before spray application. EUCOBAR is
especially effective when concreting operations must be performed in direct sun, wind, high temperatures, or
low relative humidity.
• Floors • Dry shake floors including all SURFLEX and
• Pavements EUCO-PLATE formulations
• Plain concrete toppings • Specialty iron toppings
• Vertical/overhead repairs • Parking decks and ramps
Features/Benefits
• Holds in surface moisture on concrete floors, slabs, • Water based for total compatibility with fresh
and repairs concrete
• Helps prevent plastic shrinkage cracking • Excellent for both interior and exterior concrete
• Easy and economical to use projects
• Helps eliminate crusting caused by loss of surface • Will not effect adhesion of curing compound or
moisture other treatments
EUCOBAR is a water based polymer concentrate that is readily dilutable in water.
Evaporation rate is a function of relative humidity, concrete temperature, air temperature and wind velocity.
EUCOBAR
Plastic shrinkage cracking is a strong possibility when the rate of evaporation exceeds 0.2 lb/ft2/hr (1.0 kg/m2/
hr). The chart on the back of this page (Fig. 2.1.5 of ACI 305, Hot Weather Concreting) is useful in determining
the evaporation rate under a given set of jobsite conditions. Use EUCOBAR when the above limit is exceeded.
Appearance: EUCOBAR is a free flowing pink liquid designed to be mixed with water. The use of EUCOBAR will
not affect the color of concrete.
Packaging
EUCOBAR is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums, 5 gal (18.9 L) pails and 6/1 gal (3.8 L) units per case.
Shelf Life
Coverage
Master Format #:
Dilution Rate: 9:1 (Water:EUCOBAR)

EUCOBAR (after dilution) will cover approximately 200 to 400 ft2/gal (5 to 10 m2/L). Coverage will vary depending
03 35 00
on concrete texture and wind conditions. For estimating purposes, 1 gal (3.8 L) of EUCOBAR concentrate will
treat 2000 to 4000 ft2 (186 to 372 m2) of concrete surface area, but is highly dependent upon ambient conditions.

441
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: EUCOBAR is applied directly to
the surface of fresh concrete. No surface preparation 5 15 25 35
is necessary.
Mixing: EUCOBAR is supplied as a concentrate and
must be diluted with water at a 9:1 (water:EUCOBAR) Relative 90
humidity 100%
ratio. Determine capacity of sprayer and divide by 80
Co
10. Add this amount of EUCOBAR to the sprayer
nc
70
re
canister followed by 9 times that amount of water. For
te
60
te
m
example, if 1 quart (0.95 L) of EUCOBAR is added,
pe
50
ra
tu
dilute with 9 quarts (8.5 L) of water. Mix or shake until
re
40
10
0F
thoroughly blended. 30
(3
8C
)
20
Placement: Apply using a tank type, hand pump
90
10
80
50
70
60
F
F
F
F
F
(3
sprayer capable of spraying in a fine mist. Use a
(2
(1
(2
(1
2C
40
7C
0C
1C
6C
)
F(
)
)
)
)
slotted tip for the best spray. Spray EUCOBAR over
4C
40 50 60 70 80 90 100
)
Air tempature, deg F
the fresh concrete surface as soon as possible after
r)
/h
floating. A pink, translucent sheen will appear as the 0.8 4.0
km
To use this chart:
r)
0
/h
(4
surface is treated. On extreme drying conditions,
Rate of evaporation, lb/sq ft/hr
0.7
km
ph
1. E nter with air r)
2
m
additional applications may be given as needed. When
(3
/h
25
temperature, 3.0
ph
0.6 km
ity
m
4
kg/m2/hr
used on floors with dry shake hardener applications, move up to (2
loc
20
ph
ve
relative humidity 0.5 m )
/hr
EUCOBAR may be used on the fresh concrete as well 15
nd
2. Move right km
wi
to concrete 0.4 h (16 2.0
as between each shake application. temperature 10
mp
0.3 m /hr)
3. Move down to (8 k
Curing & Sealing: Proper curing procedures are wind velocity 5m
ph
r) 1.0
0.2 (3 km
/h
important to ensure the durability and quality of 4. Move left, read 2 mp
h
approx. rate of 0.1 0
concrete. To prevent surface cracking, cure flatwork evaporation
0
with a high solids curing compound, such as SUPER
AQUA-CURE VOX or SUPER REZ-SEAL.
Fig. 2.1.5, ACI 305, Hot Weather Concreting
Clean Up
Clean spray equipment with soap and water.
• Use with proper dilution rate.
• Do not use as a curing compound.
• Apply only as a fine spray.
• Do not allow to freeze.
Rev. 6.11
442
FORM-EZE NATURAL
Biodegradable, Concrete Form Release Agent
Description
Miscellaneous
FORM-EZE NATURAL form release is an emulsion of natural, biodegradable oils that will minimize
surface defects and provide a quick, easy release of concrete from forms. This environmentally friendly
formula will not stain or discolor the surface of concrete. FORM-EZE NATURAL can be used on metal, wood and
fiberglass forms.
• Used on metal, fiberglass or wood forms • Concrete molds, overlaid plywood and
• Used for hoist buckets, wheel barrows, and fiberglass
paving machinery • Spray on precast, prestressed, masonry block
• Spray on tools and equipment to prevent and tile forms
build-up
Features/Benefits
• All natural formula • Safe to handle, safe to use
• Helps eliminate surface defects • Reduces clean-up cost while extending the life of
• Will not discolor the surface of concrete the forms
• Economical and easy to use
Freeze Point..................................... 30°F (-1.1°C)
Viscosity.......................................... 50 to 300 cps
Specific Gravity........................................... 0.959
FORM-EZE NATURAL
VOC Content.................................................0 g/L
Pounds/gal....................................................... 8.0
Appearance: FORM-EZE NATURAL is an off-white emulsion.
Packaging
FORM-EZE NATURAL is packaged in 275 gal (1041 L) totes, 55 gallon (208 L) drums, and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
Coverage
FORM-EZE NATURAL should be applied to the forms at the following rates:
Wood forms: 600 to 800 ft²/gal
(14.7 to 19.63 m2/L)
Metal forms : 800 to 1600 ft²/gal
(19.63 to 39.3 m2/L)
Directions for Use
Master Format #:
FORM-EZE NATURAL can be sprayed or rolled on the forms or machinery in thin, even layers for maximum
03 11 00
performance and economy. For a more uniform and economical application, use a sprayer equipped with a
fan type nozzle. Overspray and puddling should be wiped up immediately. Excess application of FORM-EZE
NATURAL may cause “bugholes” or imperfections.
For best results, all surfaces should be completely free of old concrete. NOTE: Clean residual amounts of
previous form release agents from forms or equipment using a degreaser.

443
• Do not dilute.
• Protect from freezing; store at 30°F (-1.1°C) or above.
• Always spray or roll thin, even layers.
• Agitate before use.
• IMPORTANT: Clean all petroleum based form oil from forms before using FORM-EZE NATURAL.
Rev. 6.11
444
FORMSHIELD Pure
Low VOC, Oil Based Concrete Form Release
Description
Miscellaneous
FORMSHIELD Pure is a concrete form release agent with exceptional performance and ease of use that
is unmatched by water based form release products. Formshield Pure has a unique crystal clear
formulation containing a proprietary ingredient that provides release capability superior to traditional
form oils. FORMSHIELD PURE is environmentally friendly and compliant with all VOC regulations in
the U.S. and Canada. Because it is not water based, pails, drums, or totes of FORMSHIELD PURE do
not require protection from freezing. Forms treated with Formshield Pure can be put to use faster
than those treated with water based release products. Metal, plastic, wood and composition forms strip
cleanly with FORMSHIELD PURE.
Primary Application
• Preventing the adhesion of concrete to forms of all types
Features/Benefits
• Forms release easily and cleanly from concrete • Tolerant to freezing conditions during storage
• No staining and transportation
• Compliant with all VOC regulations, including • Treated forms are ready for use quickly
Federal EPA, OTC, LADCO, Maricopa County, • DOT non-regulated: easy storage and
CARB, and SCAQMD shipping
• Dramatically reduces the occurrence of voids • Very low odor
and bugholes • Reduces the need for heavy prying tools that
can cause concrete and form damage
FORMSHIELD Pure
VOC content........................................... 90 g/L
Weight/gal......................... 7.3 lb/gal (0.86 kg/L)
Packaging
FORMSHIELD PURE is packaged in 275 gallon (1041 L) totes, 55 gal (208 L) drums and 5 gal (18.9 L)
pails.
Shelf Life
• Corp of Engineers CE 1401.01 (17.4) & CW 03101 (5.3)
• GSA CE 204 (3-03-K)
• ACI 347-68
• Compliant with Federal, OTC, California, and Maricopa County regulations
Master Format #:
Coverage
03 11 00
ft²/gal (m²/L)
Plywood Forms 350 to 500 (8.59 to 12.27)
Wood Composition Forms 350 to 500 (8.59 to 12.27)
Plastic Forms 800 to 1000 (19.63 to 24.54)
Metal Forms 800 to 1000 (19.63 to 24.54)
Note: Coverage rates are approximate and for estimating purposes only. Surface temperature, porosity and texture

445
Directions for Use
Surface Preparation: The form surface must be free from dirt, cement paste, hardened concrete and
other residue that could transfer to the finished concrete surface. Before coating plywood forms, apply a
heavy brush coat to the plywood edges to protect laminations.
Application: In cold weather or if FORMSHIELD PURE has been stored in a cold location, gently stir
the product before using. FORMSHIELD PURE can be applied by brush, spray or roller. Apply in a
continuous film, avoiding excessive buildup, runs and puddles. Forms treated with FORMSHIELD PURE
will be ready to use within one hour on plywood and 2 to 3 hours on metal and plastic forms. Used forms
can be re-coated with FORMSHIELD PURE if proper surface preparation techniques are followed.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and application equipment immediately after use with mineral spirits. Clean drips and
overspray while still wet.
• Do not thin or dilute FORMSHIELD PURE.
• The viscosity of FORMSHIELD PURE increases at low temperatures, resulting in reduced sprayability.
Rev. 6.11
446
FORMSHIELD WB
Release Agent for Concrete Forms
Description
Miscellaneous
FORMSHIELD WB is a low cost, highly effective release agent for metal, plastic, wood and composition forms.
It is a blend of natural organic chemicals which impart a waterproof film to prevent adhesion of concrete to the
forms and provide for quick and easy release. FORMSHIELD WB is supplied ready to use as a thin, milky white
colored liquid of low viscosity.
FORMSHIELD WB is used to provide quick, clean release of forms minimizing preparation for reuse.
FORMSHIELD WB lengthens the life of wood forms by preventing the penetration of water and consequent
deterioration of the plywood. FORMSHIELD WB lengthens the life of the steel forms by preventing corrosion.
Hand rubbing, required for most architectural concrete, is greatly reduced by the smoother, denser concrete
surface which results from use of FORMSHIELD WB. FORMSHIELD WB also minimizes finishing time by
preventing stains, streaks, and reduces the transfer of grain markings to the concrete surface.
Features/Benefits
• Reduces labor and construction time • Can be used on metal or plastic forms and on
• Lowers costs previously oiled or untreated wood forms
• Allows the forms to be re-used • Excellent release properties
• Minimizes clean-up and maintenance • Reduces transfer of wood grain markings
Weight/gal.......................... 8.3 lb/gal (0.994 kg/L)
VOC..............................................................99 g/L
Packaging
FORMSHIELD WB
FORMSHIELD WB is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails.
Shelf Life
• Corps of Engineers Specifications CE-1401.01
• Corps of Engineers Specifications CW-03101
Coverage
Coverage rates are approximate and for estimating purposes only. Surface temperature, porosity and texture
ft²/gal (m²/L)
Plywood Forms 350 to 500 (8.59 to 12.27)
Wood Composition Forms 350 to 500 (8.59 to 12.27)
Plastic Forms 800 to 1000 (19.63 to 24.54)
Metal Forms 800 to 1000 (19.63 to 24.54)
Master Format #:
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: Forms must be free from dirt, hardened concrete, and other extraneous matter. Before
03 11 00
coating plywood panel surfaces, apply one, or preferably two, heavy brush coats to the edges to protect
laminations.
Mixing: Mix FORMSHIELD WB prior to use to ensure that settling has not occurred.
Application: FORMSHIELD WB is applied by brush, spray, or roller to metal, plastic, or plywood forms. One or
two heavy brushcoats should be applied to the edges of plywood forms to protect the laminations.

447
The surface of forms should receive one light, uniform coat. Avoid excessive build-up and runs or puddles
since an excess of coating may retard the concrete. For proper performance, always make sure brush is fully
saturated with FORMSHIELD WB. Attempts to “stretch or skinny” FORMSHIELD WB will result in sub-standard
performance of product. FORMSHIELD WB should be applied evenly over the panel. One full coat provides
proper protection. FORMSHIELD WB will set and be ready to use within one hour on plywood; 2 hours on
metal and plastic forms.
Clean Up
Clean tools or equipment with water and soap/detergent immediately following use. Clean drips and overspray
while still wet. Dried FORMSHIELD WB becomes very difficult to remove.
• Store in a dry, ventilated, 40°F to 90°F (4°C to 32°C) area. Protect from freezing.
• Do not thin or dilute FORMSHIELD WB.
• Do not apply in rain, and protect from rain for at least 1 hour after application.
• Do not apply FORMSHIELD WB when temperature is below freezing.
• FORMSHIELD WB is not recommended when concrete is to be steamcured, or for tilt up work.
Rev. 6.11
448
ACCELGUARD 80
Non-chloride Mortar Accelerator
Description
Miscellaneous
ACCELGUARD 80 is an accelerating, water-reducing admixture for mortar that does not contain calcium chloride
or added chloride ions. It improves certain properties of plastic and hardened mortar, provides benefits such as
significant improvement in early stiffening and setting characteristics. ACCELGUARD 80 can be used in mortar
which will be in contact with steel since it is completely free of materials that cause corrosion.
• Cold weather masonry work
• Stucco
• Brick laying
• Block and structural clay tile
Features/Benefits
• Accelerates mortar set time in cold weather
• Aids in protecting masonry mortar in cold weather
• Reduces job delays during cold weather
• Increases strengths at all ages
• Improves workability
• Completely non-corrosive with steel embedments
Typical Engineering Data - Mortars proportioned & tested per ASTM C270
ACCELGUARD 80
Typical Test Results @ 40°F (4°C)
Dosage: 16 oz (473 ml)/bag of masonry cement.
3 Day 7 Day
Mix Setting Time Strength Strength
psi (MPa) psi (MPa)
Type M
Plain 470 (3.2) 975 (6.7)
with A80 28% faster 575 (4.0) 1123 (7.7)
than plain
Type S
Plain 428 (3.0) 825 (5.7)
with A80 40% faster 434 (3.0) 876 (6.0)
than plain
Type N
Plain 237 (1.6) 459 (3.2)
with A80 38% Faster 312 (2.2) 543 (3.7)
than plain
Appearance: ACCELGUARD 80 is a slightly amber colored liquid which, when added to concrete has no effect
on the appearance of treated concrete.
Master Format #:
Packaging
04 05 13
ACCELGUARD 80 is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums, 5 gal (18.9 L) pails and 6/1 gal (3.8 L) units per case.
Shelf Life

449
• ACCELGUARD 80 is formulated to comply with ASTM C 494, Type E, and consequently it may be used in
cement mortars to improve their properties.
• In compliance with ASTM C 494, Type E requirements, this product offers a minimum of 5% water reduction,
will increase one day strength a minimum of 125% over plain and will quicken the setting time a minimum of
1 hour but no more than 3 hours and 30 minutes.
Dosage Rates
Dosage Rates [per 94 lb (42.6 kg)]
Daily Working Temperature
32°F (0°C) 25°F (-4°C)
and rising and rising
Portland cement mortars 1 quart 1 1/2 quart
(0.9 L) (1.4 L)
Masonry cement 1 pint 1 1/2 pint
(0.47 L) (0.7 L)
Colored mortars 1 pint 1 1/2 pint
(0.47 L) (0.7 L)
NOTE: This product does not protect plastic mortar from freezing. This product will allow the mortar to gain
strength at a faster rate in cold weather. The mortar must achieve a minimum strength of 500 psi (3.5 MPa)
before exposure to freezing temperatures.
Directions for Use
ACCELGUARD 80 recommended dosage should be added directly to each batch of mortar at a rate of 6 oz (0.18
L) to 48 oz (1.4 L) per bag. Add directly to mortar after the initial charge of water and the mortar has “wetted out”.
Mixing: ACCELGUARD 80 is ready to use and requires no pre-mixing.
The Euclid Chemical Company recommends the contractor follow typical cold weather masonry practices.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and equipment with water before mortar hardens.
• Bring material to 32°F (0°C) before use.
• ACCELGUARD 80 will freeze at temperatures of approximately -15°F (-26°C); however, freezing and thawing
will not harm the material if thoroughly agitated at 40°F (4°C) or higher.
• ACCELGUARD 80 is not an anti-freeze for mixed mortar.
• Test batches/mix designs/sample slabs may be required due to variations in local cement and aggregates.
• Keep mortar from freezing until a minimum strength of 500 psi (3.5 MPa) is reached.
Rev. 6.11
450
BLOCKTITE MORTAR ADMIXTURE
Integral Water Repellent Admixture For Mortar
Description
Miscellaneous
BLOCKTITE MORTAR ADMIXTURE is a ready to use liquid mortar admixture that will effectively prevent
moisture from entering masonry structures. To ensure durability and long lasting beauty, use BLOCKTITE
MORTAR ADMIXTURE in conjunction with EUCON BLOCKTITE integral water repellent admixture. BLOCKTITE
MORTAR ADMIXTURE will reduce secondary efflorescence in mortar which will help maintain color integrity.
• Masonry mortar
Features/Benefits
• Water repellency • Inhibits growth of mold and mildew
• Improved durability • Improved color integrity
• Reduced secondary efflorescence
Physical Properties
Specific Gravity............................................. 1.02
Freeze Point..................................... 20°F (-6.7°C)
Color............................................. White emulsion
Appearance: BLOCKTITE MORTAR ADMIXTURE is a white, free flowing liquid which when added to mortar
does not alter the color.
BLOCKTITE MORTAR ADMIXTURE

Packaging
BLOCKTITE MORTAR ADMIXTURE is available in cases of 12 (32 oz [0.9 L]) bottles.
Shelf Life
Dosage Rates
BLOCKTITE MORTAR ADMIXTURE should be dosed at 32 oz (1.0 L) per 94 lbs (42.6 kg) of portland cement
and 16 oz (0.5 L) for each bag of hydrated lime, masonry cement or mortar cement. For pre-blended bags of
portland cement and lime, add approximately 16 oz (0.5 L) per bag. For pre-blended bulk mortar, add 10
oz (0.5 L) for every 3 ft3 of mortar produced.
Directions for Use

BLOCKTITE MORTAR ADMIXTURE is compatible with all Euclid Chemical manufactured concrete product
admixtures and should be added to approximately 75% of the mix water before sand or cement are added. Add
additional water to achieve desired consistency and mix for 5 minutes.
Master Format #:
• DO NOT ALLOW BLOCKTITE MORTAR ADMIXTURE to freeze. Once frozen, it becomes ineffective.
04 05 13
• Shake well before using.

• Consult your Euclid Chemical representative for assistance with trial batches.
• BLOCKTITE MORTAR ADMIXTURE can effectively add water repellency when adhering to industry
recommendations for creating concave mortar joints through proper joint tooling.

451
Rev. 6.11
452
EUCO WINTER ADMIXTURE
Masonry Mortar Accelerator
Description
Miscellaneous
Euco Winter Admixture is a multi-purpose liquid admixture designed to accelerate the normal setting rate
of mortar, increase strength development at all ages, and to improve workability. It can be used safely with gray
or white portland cement or colored masonry cements without causing discoloration.
Euco Winter Admixture is used in mortar to lay brick, block, structural clay tile and glass block to eliminate
the dangers connected with freezing mortar joints.
Features/Benefits
• Accelerates set times of mortar • Increases strengths at all ages
• Aids in protecting mortar in cold weather • Improves workability
• Cuts construction cost - no cold weather job delay
Test Results-Prepared Mortars
Brickset Mortar
Setting Rate @70oF (21oC) Plain with EWA
Initial Set 3 hrs15 min 2 hrs 15 min
Final Set 5 hrs 0 min 4 hrs 45 min
Compressive Strength ASTM C 109 2" (50 mm) cubes
EUCO WINTER ADMIXTURE

Plain with EWA
24 hours 4.3 psi (0.03 MPa) 64 psi (0.4 MPa)
3 days 495 psi (3.4 MPa) 606 psi (4 MPa)
7 days 787 psi (5.4 MPa) 1015 psi (7 MPa)
28 days 857 psi (6 MPa) 1191 psi (8 MPa)
Water Retention ASTM C 91 76.1% 82.3%
Absorption ASTM C 642 7.0% 5.6%
Stoneset Mortar
Setting Rate @70oF (21oC) Plain with EWA
Initial Set 3 hrs 0 min 2 hrs 10 min
Final Set 5 hrs 0 min 4 hrs 30 min
Compressive Strength ASTM C 109 2" (50 mm) cubes
24 hours 8.5 psi (0.6 MPa) 44 psi (0.3 MPa)
3 days 317 psi (2.2 MPa) 329 psi (2.3 MPa)
Water Retention ASTM C 91 74.0% 80.1%
Master Format #:
Appearance: EUCO WINTER ADMIXTURE is a clear liquid with a deep blue color.
Packaging
04 05 13
EUCO WINTER ADMIXTURE is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums, 5 gal (18.9 L) pails, and 6/1 gal (3.8 L) units
per case.
Shelf Life

453
• When tested according to ASTM C 494, Type C, Euco Winter Admixture complies and gives a freeze-
thaw relative durability factor of 102%.
• In compliance with ASTM C 494, Type C requirements, this product will increase one day strength a minimum of
125% over plain and will quicken the setting time a minimum of 1 hour but no more than 3 hours and 30 minutes.
strength at a faster rate in cold weather. The mortar should achieve a minimum strength of 500 psi (3.4 MPa)
Dosage Rates
Euco Winter Admixture may be added directly to the gauging water [85 to 100oF (29 to 38oC) if possible]
in the following proportions based on the temperatures expected during the 24 hours following the work:
Temperature EWA Water
25°F (-4°C) 1 gal (3.8 L) 15 gal (57 L)
20°F (-7°C) 1 gal (3.8 L) 10 gal (38 L)
15°F (-9°C) 1 gal (3.8 L) 7 gal (27 L)
Add an additional quart of Euco Winter Admixture for each bag of lime in the mix.
OR
Euco Winter Admixture may be added directly to each mortar batch. Add the quantity indicated per bag of
cement and/or lime.
Daily Working Temperature*
32o (0oC) 25o (-4oC) 20o (-7oC)
Portland Cement
Mortars 1 quart 1 1/2 quart 2 quart
(0.9 L) (1.4 L) (1.9 L)
Masonry Cement 1 pint 1 1/2 pint 1 quart

(0.5 L) (0.7 L) (0.9 L)
Colored Mortar 1 pint 1 1/2 pint 1 quart

(0.5 L) (0.7 L) (0.9 L)
*The given temperatures are an assumed minimum with warming conditions.
Directions for Use

At the recommended dosage rate, EUCO WINTER ADMIXTURE is added directly to the gauging water.
The Euclid Chemical Company recommends the contractor follow typical cold weather concreting practices
such as the guidelines in ACI 306, Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting.
Clean-Up
• When filling metal door bucks and hollow metal window frames, the mortar must be stiff and packed tightly
without voids.
• Use no more than the prescribed amount of Euco Winter Admixture.
• Test batches/mix design/sample slabs may be required due to variations in local cement and aggregate.
• Keep mortar from freezing until a minimum strength of 500 psi (3.4 MPa) is reached.
• Do not add EUCO WINTER ADMIXTURE directly to dry cement.
Rev. 6.11
454
EUCO WINTER MIX POWDER
Powdered Masonry Mortar Accelerator
Description
Miscellaneous
EUCO WINTER MIX POWDER is a multi-purpose, calcium chloride based admixture designed to accelerate
the normal setting rate of mortar, increase strength development at all ages and improve workability. EUCO
WINTER MIX POWDER is the dry version of the EUCO WINTER ADMIXTURE. It produces virtually the same
results in mortar as does the EUCO WINTER ADMIXTURE liquid formula. Tests of EUCO WINTER ADMIXTURE
liquid show that both plastic and hardened mortar properties are improved.
EUCO WINTER MIX POWDER is used in mortar to lay brick, block, structural clay tile and glass block to
eliminate the dangers connected with freezing mortar joints.
Features/Benefits
• Accelerates setting times of mortar • Increases strengths at all ages
• Aids in protecting mortar in cold weather • Improves workability
• Cuts construction costs-no cold weather job delays • Does not affect bond strength of mortar
Typical Engineering Data Prepared Mortars (white cement)
Test Results Prepared Mortars Plain With Euco
Plain With Euco Setting Rate:
Setting Rate: Initial Set: 3 hrs 0 min 2 hrs 10 min
Initial Set: 3 hrs 15 min 2 hrs 15 min Final Set: 5 hrs 0 min 4 hrs 30 min
EUCO WINTER MIX POWDER

Final Set: 5 hrs 0 min 4 hrs 45 min Compressive Strength ASTM C 109 2" (50mm) cubes
Compressive Strength ASTM C 109 2" (50 mm) cubes 24 hours 8 psi (0.06 MPa) 45 psi (0.3 MPa)
24 hours 4 psi (0.03 MPa) 65 psi (0.4 MPa) 3 days 300 psi (2.1 MPa) 330 psi (2.3 MPa)
3 days 500 psi (3.4 MPa) 600 psi (4.1 MPa) 7 days 630 psi (4.3 MPa) 640 psi (4.4 MPa)
7 days 780 psi (5.4 MPa) 1000 psi (6.9 MPa) 28 days 775 psi (5.3 MPa) 800 psi (5.5 MPa)
28 days 850 psi (5.9 MPa) 1200 psi (8.3 MPa) Water Retention ASTM C 91
Water Retention ASTM C-91 74.0% 80.1%
76.1% 82.3% Absorption ASTM C 642
7 . 0 % Appearance: EUCO WINTER MIX POWDER is a
5.6% white, free flowing, fine grained powder.
Packaging
EUCO WINTER MIX POWDER is packaged in 1.25 lb (0.6 kg) bags, packed 20 per case.
Shelf Life
Master Format #:
• When tested in accordance with ASTM C 494, Type C, EUCO WINTER MIX POWDER complies and gives a
freeze/thaw relative durability of 102%.
04 05 13
• In compliance with ASTM C 494, Type C , this product will increase one day strength a minimum of 125% over
plain and will quicken the setting time a minimum of 1 hour but no more than 3 hours and 30 minutes.
strength at a faster rate in cold weather. The mortar should achieve a minimum strength of 500 psi (3.4 MPa)

455
Dosage Rates
Temperatures ranging from 15° to 32°F (-10° to 0°C)
Masonry Cements: One bag of EUCO WINTER MIX POWDER to each bag of masonry cement.
Portland Cement Lime: Two bags EUCO WINTER MIX POWDER to each bag of Portland cement.
Above 32°F (0°C)

Masonry Cements: One-half bag EUCO WINTER MIX POWDER to each bag of masonry cement.
Portland Cement-Lime: One bag EUCO WINTER MIX POWDER to each bag of Portland cement.
Directions for Use

Empty contents of bag into mortar mixer with part or all of mixing water. Rotate mixer blades approximately 15
seconds until EUCO WINTER MIX POWDER has dissolved. Add cement, lime and sand or masonry cement
and sand in normal manner. The Euclid Chemical Company recommends the contractor follow typical cold
weather masonry practices. Please refer to "Recommended Practices for Cold Weather Masonry Construction"
as published by the International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council or "Cold Weather Concrete Masonry
Construction" as published by the National Concrete Masonry Association (publication TEK 16B).
Mixing: EUCO WINTER MIX POWDER is ready to use and requires no pre-blending.
Clean-Up
• EUCO WINTER MIX POWDER must be completely dissolved in water prior to the addition of masonry cement,
lime and sand.
• When filling metal door bucks and hollow metal window frames, the mortar must be stiff and packed tightly
without voids. Use no more than the prescribed quantity of EUCO WINTER MIX POWDER.
• Test batches/mix design/sample slabs may be required due to variations in local cement and aggregates.
• Keep concrete from freezing until a minimum strength of 500 psi (3.4 MPa) is reached.
Rev. 6.11
456
INTEGRAL WATERPELLER
Water Repellant Admixture for Concrete and Mortar
Description
Miscellaneous
INTEGRAL WATERPELLER is a balanced blend of stearate water repellants and other chemicals which, when
used as an admixture, forms an internal barrier against water penetration. INTEGRAL WATERPELLER also
increases the plasticity of mortar, reduces water absorption and thereby guards against freeze-thaw damage.
It is available in powdered form without chlorides or in a liquid formula which contains chlorides for additional
densification and acceleration of the mortar or concrete. INTEGRAL WATERPELLER will not increase the air
content of mortar or concrete.
• Mass concrete
• Foundation walls
• Floors
• Cement stucco
• Mortar for setting masonry and glass block
Features/Benefits
• Reduces moisture absorption as much as 60%
• Reduces capillary action
• Reduces vapor transmission through walls and slabs
• Provides greater workability
• Does not effect bond strength of mortar
INTEGRAL WATERPELLER
Typical Engineering Data Test Results Concrete
Fed. Spec. SS-C-181b
Appearance Absorption
Relative Absorption
Total
INTEGRAL WATERPELLER liquid has an
Absorption Ratio
Immersion
amber color.
10 minutes
INTEGRAL WATERPELLER powder is a white

24 Hours
powdery material.
Plain Mortar 0.34 100% 1.28% 4.10%
Mortar with
"Dry" Waterpeller 0.18 53% 0.47% 0.65%
Master Format #:
Mortar with
"Liquid" Waterpeller 0.16 47% — —
04 05 13
Packaging
INTEGRAL WATERPELLER LIQUID is packaged in 55 gal (208 L) drums and 5 gal (18.9 L) pails. INTEGRAL
WATERPELLER POWDER is available in 25 lb (11.3 kg) bags.

457
Shelf Life
INTEGRAL WATERPELLER is approved for use by The Veterans Administration.
Dosage Rates
1 to 1½ gal (3.9 to 5.7 L) liquid or 4 to 6 lb (1.8 to 2.7 kg) powder of INTEGRAL WATERPELLER will treat 1 yd3
(0.76 m3) of concrete or mortar.
Directions for Use

Add INTEGRAL WATERPELLER to concrete or mortar in the following proportions:
Liquid: 1 qt (0.95 L) per 94 lb (42.7 kg) bag of cement
Powder: 1 lb (0.45 kg) per 94 lb (42.7 kg) bag of cement. 1/4 lb per bag of prepared mortar.
In cement-lime mortar the above quantities should be added for each 1 ft3 (0.03m3) of lime, in addition to the
quantity added for each bag of cement. INTEGRAL WATERPELLER may be added to the mix after all other
components have been added.
Note: Follow cold weather concreting practices such as those dwetailed in ACI 306, Standard Specification for
Cold Weather Concreting.
Clean-Up
• Liquid INTEGRAL WATERPELLER must be stored above 32°F (0°C).
Rev. 6.11
458
TAMMSBAR
Rebar Touch-up Epoxy Coating
Description
Miscellaneous
Tammsbar is a two part ambient temperature cure thermosetting liquid epoxy coating designed to repair
scrapes, scars, damage or imperfections of Fusion Bonded Epoxy Powder Coatings. TAMMSBAR utilizes the
latest in corrosion mitigation technology for long term service life. It can be conveniently applied to rebar with
brush, roller or spray in the shop or field. TAMMSBAR meets the stringent standards of ASTM D 3963 as a patch
compound.
• Repair of scrapes, scars, cuts, and splices to • Repair of imperfections in fusion bonded epoxy
coated rebar powder coated materials
Material Properties at 75˚F (24˚C)
Mix ratio (by volume)........................................1:1
Mixed viscosity (cps)...................................... 1500
Gel time (minutes).....................................45 to 60
Tack free time (hrs.)......................................4 to 5
Flexibility, 1/8” (3.22 mm) Mandrel Bend... passes
Induction time................................................none
VOC Content ...........................................< 50 g/L
Test Result
Chloride Permeability
Coating Thickness: 8 mils, 45 days test duration Accumulative Concentration of Chloride
TAMMSBAR
FHWA-RD-74-18, Section 4.1.3 Ions Permeating Through Film: Pass
ASTM D 3963 (A1.4.1)
Salt Scaling
Coating Thickness: 8 mils, 400 days test duration
No blisters or rust holes
ASTM B 117
ASTM D 3963 (A1.4.2)
Chemical Resistance
Coating Thickness: 8 mils, 28 days test duration
No blisters or rust holes
ASTM G 20
ASTM D 3963 (A1.4.3)
Appearance: TAMMSBAR is a light green color that is matched to standard epoxy coated reinforcing steel.
Packaging
Master Format #:
Tammsbar is packaged in 1 pint (0.5 L), and ½ gal (1.9 L) units.

03 21 16
Shelf Life
2 years in unopened containers.

459
Coverage
The coverage rate of Tammsbar is 120 to 175 ft2/gal (2.9 to 4.3 m2/L), with a final film thickness of 8 to 12
mils.
Note: Coverage rates are for estimating purposes only. Surface texture and temperature will determine actual
material requirements.
Directions for Use

Surface Preparation: Steel surfaces must be clean, dry, free of all oil, grease, dust, scale, rust, damaged
coating from the repair area and any other contaminants that may interfere with adhesion.
Mixing: Premix Tammsbar Part A and Part B separately then combine one part by volume of Part A with one
part by volume of Part B in a clean, dry container. Scrape the sides of the mixing container at least once during
the mixing. Mix until uniform. Do not aerate during mixing. Mix only the quantity of material that can be used
with its pot life.
Application: For best results the ambient and surface temperature should be above 50°F (10˚C). Minimum
application temperature is 40°F (4˚C). Tammsbar can be applied by brush, roller or standard spray or airless
spray equipment. Apply to the rebar, completely covering the defect area and overlapping onto existing powder
coating. Allow the Tammsbar to dry prior to handling and storage.
Clean-Up
Clean tools and application equipment immediately after use with acetone. Clean up spills or drips while still wet
with the same solvents. Dried Tammsbar will require mechanical abrasion for removal.
• Store at 50°F to 90°F (10˚C to 32˚C).
• Do not thin.
Rev. 6.11
460
EUCO GRIP
Slip-Resistant Additive for Concrete Sealers & Coatings
Description
Miscellaneous
EUCO GRIP is a finely ground polymer added to concrete sealers and coatings for slip resistance, reduction in
gloss, and fine texturizing of the surface. EUCO GRIP mixes easily into solvent-based or 100% solids sealers
and coatings with little effect on the product’s sprayability and overall viscosity. EUCO GRIP will stay well
suspended in the sealer or coating without the need for constant stirring. The micro-spherical shape of EUCO
GRIP’s polymer beads provide a smoother feel underfoot when compared to traditional silica sand or other
aggregate broadcast systems.
EUCO GRIP is commonly added to sealers or coatings applied to:
• Concrete floors • Driveways

• Patios and walkways • Garage floors
• Pool decks • Any concrete where a slip-resistant finish is
desired
Features/Benefits
• Provides a slip-resistant finish • No change in product viscosity or sprayability
• Easily stirred into sealers or coatings • Smoother feel underfoot than sand or other
aggregate broadcasts
Packaging
EUCO GRIP
EUCO GRIP is packaged in cases of twelve 1 lb (0.45 kg) bags.
Shelf Life
The shelf life of EUCO GRIP is indefinite when stored in original, unopened packaging.
Dosage
EUCO GRIP is typically added at a rate of 3.2 oz EUCO GRIP per 1 gallon of sealer or coating (91 g/3.8 L)
and 16 oz of EUCO GRIP per 5 gallons of sealer or coating (454 g/18.9 L). Less or more EUCO GRIP can be
added to achieve the desired texture, but do not exceed 8 oz per gallon of product (227 g/3.8 L).
Directions for Use

Master Format #:
Add the desired amount of EUCO GRIP to the sealer or coating while mixing. When adding EUCO GRIP to a
two-component product, stir the EUCO GRIP into one component before mixing both components together.
03 3000
After incorporating the EUCO GRIP completely into the sealer or coating, allow it to dwell in the product for at
least 30 minutes, and up to 24 hours, before application. If the sealer or coating is not used immediately, it may
be necessary to gently re-mix the EUCO GRIP into the product before application.
A small test batch and application is recommended when using EUCO GRIP in a product for the first time to
determine the proper dosage rate for the texture desired.

461
• EUCO GRIP will increase the coefficient of friction and slip resistance of sealers and coatings to which it has
been added. However, the sealer or coatings should not be considered completely non-slip or non-skid.
• When adding EUCO GRIP to concrete cure & seals or sealers containing acetone or tertiary butyl acetate
(TBAC), the product must be applied immediately after incorporation of the EUCO GRIP.
• Do not use in penetrating sealers such as silane or siloxane water repellents.
• Do not apply by broadcasting into a wet sealer surface.
• Not recommended for use in water based products.
Rev. 6.11
462
Measurement Conversions
If You Have Multiply By To Find
inches 1000 mils
inches 25.4 millimeters
inches 2.54 centimeters
inches 0.0254 meters
in2 6,452 cm2
in2 0.00694 ft2
in3 0.554 fl. oz.
in3 0.01639 liters
in3 0.004329 gallons US
in3 16.39 cm3
in3 0.00058 ft3
ft2 144 in2
ft2 9729.03 cm2
ft2/gal 0.02454 m2/liter
ft3 1728 in3
ft3 0.02832 m3
ft3 0.037 yd3
yard 0.9144 meter
yd2 0.8361 m2
yd3 27 ft3
yd3 0.7646 m3
acres 43,560 ft2
fl. oz. 1.805 in3
fl. oz. 0.03215 quart
fl. oz. 0.00781 gallons US
fl. oz. 0.02957 liter
fl. oz./cwt 0.652 ml/kg
fl. oz./cwt 65.2 ml/100 kg
fl. oz./cwt 0.03868 l/m3
quart 32 fl. oz.
quart 0.25 gallons US
gallon US 231 in3
gallon US 4 quarts
gallon US 128 fl. oz.
gallon US 3.785 liter
gal/yd3 4.951 liter/m3
lb 0.0005 ton US
lb 453.5924 g
lb 0.4536 kg
lb/ft2 4.88 kg/m
lb/ft3 16.02 kg/m3
lb/yd3 0.5933 kg/m3
psi 0.006895 Mpa
w/c ratio 11.3 gal water/bag of cement
gal/water/bag of cement 0.0885 w/c ratio
Measurement Conversions
If You Have Multiply By To Find
g 0.0022 lbs
g 0.001 kg
liters 61.024 in3
mils 0.001 inches
millimeters ÷ 25.4 inches
centimeters 0.3937 inches
cm2 0.155 in2
meters 39.37 inches
cm2 0.155 in2
cm3 0.06102 in3
cm2 0.00108 ft2
m2/liter 40.75 ft2/gal
m3 35.314 ft3
meter 1.0936 yard
m2 1.196 yd2
m3 1.308 yd3
liter 33.8141 fl. oz.
ml/kg ÷ .6520 fl. oz./cwt
ml/100 kg ÷ 65.20 fl. oz./cwt
l/m3 ÷ .03868 fl. oz./yd3
liter ÷ 3.785 gallon US
liter/m3 ÷ 4.951 gal/yd3
g 0.0022 lb
kg 2.205 lb
kg/m3 ÷ 16.02 lb/ft3
kg/m3 ÷ .5933 lb/yd3
kg/m2 0.2048 lb/ft2
kg 1000 g
Mpa 145 psi
Water
Water weighs 8.345 lbs/ gallon.
One cubic foot weighs 62.45 lbs.
One lb = 27.7 in3 = 0.1198 gallons.
Temperature Conversions
°C = (°F-32) x (5 /9)
°F = (1.8 x °C) + 32
Note: 32°F = 0°C
212°F = 100°C
Sand
One yd3 of bulk sand weighs about 2,700 lbs.
One ft3 of bulk sand weighs about 100 lbs.
One gallon of bulk sand weighs about 13-14 lbs.
The specific gravity of sand is approximately 2.6.
Decimal Equivalents
1/ 16 = .0625 1/2 = .500
1/ 8 = .125 5/8 = .625
1/ 4 = .250 3/4 = .750
3/ 8 = .375 7/8 = .875
Volume and Area Formulas

Area of a square (or rectangle) = length x width
Circumference of a circle = radius x 2π
Area of a circle = (radius)2 x π
weight of material
Absolute volume = specific gravity x 62.4
Surface area of cylinder = π x diameter x length
Coverage yield of one yard of concrete at various

thicknesses.
Thickness (inches) Square Feet
1 324
2 162
3 108
4 81
5 65
6 54
7 46
8 40
9 36
10 32
ft2 /yd = 324 /depth (inches)
Repair Material Usage
The coverage rate of the repair material can be calculated by
multiplying the cubic feet of product by 12 and dividing by the
inches in depth of the repair:
Square feet of coverage = (cubic feet) x (12) / (depth of repair)
(example: 35 cubic feet of repair material placed at 2 1/2" in depth
would cover 168 square feet.)
Anchor Bolt Grouting

The cubic inches of grout required is equal to the total volume of
the hole less the volume of the bolt. The volume of a hole (cylinder)
is equal to 3.141 times the radius of the hole squared times the
length of the hole:
Volume of a hole (cylinder) = (π) x (radius) x (radius) x (length)
and
Cubic inches of grout required = (Volume of the hole) - (Volume
of the Bolt)
(example: If a bolt 1/2" in diameter (radius of .25 inches) and 5"
long is surface flush anchored in a hole 3/4" in diameter (radius
of .375 inches) and 6" long, the amount of grout required will be
1.67 cubic inches)
Anchoring and Doweling with EUCO Epoxy Cartridges
Estimating Guide for Number of Holes per EUCO #452/#620 Epoxy Cartridge
Threaded Rod in Concrete Hole Depth (inches)
Rod Size Hole Size
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
(inches) (inches)
Number of Holes per Cartridge
3/8 7/16 192 128 96 77 64 55 48 43 39 35 32 30 28 26 24 23 22 21 20
1/2 9/16 136 91 68 55 46 39 34 29 28 25 23 21 19 18 17 16 15 15 14
5/8 3/4 70 47 35 28 24 20 18 16 14 13 12 11 10 10 9 9 8 8 7
3/4 7/8 56 37 28 23 19 16 14 13 11 10 10 9 8 8 7 7 7 6 6
7/8 1 47 31 24 19 16 12 12 11 10 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 6 5 5
1 1-1/8 38 26 19 16 13 11 10 9 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 5 5 4 4
1-1/8 1-1/4 34 23 17 14 12 10 9 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 5 4 4 4 4
1-1/4 1-3/8 29 20 15 12 10 9 8 7 6 6 5 5 5 4 4 4 4 3 3
1-1/2 1-5/8 23 16 12 10 8 7 6 5 5 5 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 3 3
Rebar in Concrete Hole Depth (inches)

Rebar Size Hole Size
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
(inches) (inches)
No. 3 1/2 163 109 82 66 55 47 41 37 33 30 28 26 24 22 21 20 19 18 17
No. 4 5/8 127 85 64 51 43 37 32 29 26 24 22 20 19 17 16 15 15 14 13
No. 5 3/4 103 69 52 41 35 30 26 23 21 19 17 16 15 14 13 12 12 11 11
No. 6 7/8 82 55 41 32 28 24 21 19 17 15 14 13 12 11 11 10 10 9 9
No. 7 1 72 48 36 29 24 21 18 16 15 13 12 11 11 10 9 9 8 8 8
No. 8 1-1/8 62 41 31 25 21 18 16 14 13 12 11 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 7
No. 9 1-3/8 31 21 16 13 11 9 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 4 4 4 3
No. 10 1-1/2 30 20 15 12 10 9 8 7 6 6 5 5 5 4 4 4 4 4 3
Smooth Dowel in Concrete Hole Depth (inches)

Dowel Size Hole Size
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
(inches) (inches)
3/4 7/8 83 56 42 34 28 24 21 19 17 15 14 13 12 11 11 10 10 9 9
7/8 1 72 48 36 29 24 21 18 16 15 13 12 11 11 10 9 9 8 8 8
1 1-1/8 61 41 31 25 21 18 16 14 12 11 10 10 9 8 8 8 7 7 6
1-1/4 1-3/8 50 33 25 20 17 14 13 11 10 9 9 8 7 7 7 6 6 6 5
1-1/2 1-5/8 42 28 21 17 14 12 11 10 9 8 7 7 6 6 6 5 5 4 4
Epoxy Information
Epoxy Mortar
Coverage of one gallon of mixed epoxy mortar.
Depth Coverage
1/16" 25.5 ft2
1 /8" 12.8 ft2
3/ 16" 8.5 ft2
1 /4" 6.4 ft2
3 /8" 4.2 ft2
1 /2" 3.2 ft2
Yield for one gallon of epoxy mixed with sand.
Gallons of Sand Gallons Ft3
1 1.6 0.213
2 2.2 0.293
3 2.8 0.372
4 3.4 0.452
5 4.0 0.532
Epoxy Usage
Typically an 18°F (8°C) increase in temperature will cut the pot
life and cure time in half. Likewise, a similar drop in temperature
will double the pot life and cure time for most epoxies.
Coating Coverage Calculation
The coverage rate required for a particular job can be obtained by
dividing 1604 by the mil thickness specified:
Square feet/gallon coverage = (1604) / (mil thickness specified)
or
Wet Film Thickness required = (1604) / sq. ft. per gallon
(example: A 12 mil thickness coating specification would require
placement at 134 sq. ft./gal.)
Assuming the solids content of the coating in the example above

is 35%, the dry film thickness would be reduced from 12 mils to
4.2 mils:
Dry Film Thickness = (Wet Film Thickness) x (% Solids) / (100)
Inches Mils Coverage per U.S. Gallon

1/16 62.5 25.5 ft2
1/32 31.25 51.0 ft2
20 80.0 ft2
15 102.0 ft2
10 160.0 ft2
5 320.0 ft2
1 1600.0 ft2
Floor Systems Thicknesses and Conversions
STANDARD MILS MILLIMETERS
2 INCHES 2000 50.8
1.5 INCHES 1500 38.1
1 INCH 1000 25.4
3/4 INCH 750 19.05
1/2 INCH 500 12.7
3/8 INCH 375 9.52
5/16 INCH 312.5 7.94
1/4 INCH 250 6.35
3/16 INCH 187.5 4.76
1/8 INCH 125 3.175
3/32 INCH 93.8 2.38
1/16 INCH 62.5 1.59

Joint Sealant Calculations
To obtain the quantity of joint filler required, multiply the inch
decimal equivalent of the depth, width and length of the joint to
determine the total cubic inches:
Cubic inches required = (width) x (depth) x (length)
To obtain the gallons of joint filler required, divide the volume of

cubic inches to be filled by 231:
Gallons of material required = (cubic inches to be filled) / 231
Joint Filler and Sealant Estimating Guide

EUCO 700 & 800
Table Values: Number of Lineal Feet Per Gallon of Product
Width of Joint (in)
1/4 1/2 3/4 1
1/4 308
1/2 154 77
3/4 102 51 34
Depth of 1 77 39 26 19
Joint (in) 1-1/2 51 26 17 13
2 39 19 13 10
2-1/2 31 15 10 8
3 26 12 9 6
4 19 10 6 5
EUCO QWIKjoint 200
Table Values: Number of Lineal Feet Per 10 Gallon Unit of Product
Width of Joint (in)
1/4 1/2 3/4 1
1/4 3080
1/2 1540 770
3/4 1020 510 340
Depth of 1 770 390 260 190
Joint (in) 1-1/2 510 260 170 130
2 390 190 130 100
2-1/2 310 150 100 80
3 260 120 90 60
4 190 100 60 50
Eucolastic I, Gun Grade
Table Values: Number of Lineal Feet Per 11 oz Tube
Width of Joint (in)
1/4 1/2 3/4 1
1/4 25.3 12.7 8.4 6.3
1/2 12.7 6.3 4.2 3.2
3/4 8.4 4.2 2.8 2.1
Depth of 1 6.3 3.2 2.1 1.6
Joint (in) 1-1/2 4.2 2.1 1.4 1.1
2 3.2 1.6 1.1 0.8
2-1/2 4.2 2.1 1.4 1.1
3 2.1 1.1 0.7 0.5
4 1.6 0.8 0.5 0.4
Eucolastic I, Pourable Grade

Table Values: Number of Lineal Feet Per 30 oz Tube
Width of Joint (in)
1/4 1/2 3/4 1
1/4 72.0 36.0 24.0 18.0
1/2 12.7 18.0 12.0 9.0
3/4 8.4 12.0 8.0 6.0
Depth of 1 6.3 9.0 6.0 4.5
Joint (in) 1-1/2 4.2 6.0 4.0 3.0
2 3.2 4.5 3.0 2.3
2-1/2 4.2 6.0 4.0 3.0
3 2.1 3.0 2.0 1.5
4 1.6 2.3 1.5 1.1
Eucolastic I or II, Gun or Pourable Grade
Table Values: Number of Lineal Feet Per 2 Gallon Unit
Width of Joint (in)
1/4 1/2 3/4 1
1/4 616.0 308.0 205.3 154.0
1/2 308.0 154.0 102.7 77.0
3/4 205.3 102.7 68.4 51.3
Depth of 1 154.0 77.0 51.3 38.5
Joint (in) 1-1/2 102.7 51.3 34.2 25.7
2 77.0 38.5 25.7 19.3
2-1/2 102.7 51.3 34.2 25.7
3 51.3 25.7 17.1 12.8
4 38.5 19.3 12.8 9.6
Type of Cements
Type I Portland cement- General purpose cement suitable for all uses where the special
properties of other types of cements are not required. Its uses include pavements,
floors, reinforced concrete buildings, tanks, reservoirs, pipes, masonry units, and
precast concrete products.
Type II Portland cement- Where structures will be exposed to elements exposed to

soil or ground waters where sulfate concentrations are higher than normal but not
unusually severe. Type II cement in concrete must be accompanied by the use of low
water to cementitious ratio and low permeability to control sulfate attack. Because of
the high degree of availability, the use of Type II cement is used in all types of
construction, regardless of the need for sulfate resistance or moderate heat generation.
Cements labeled Type I/II simply means that such cement meets the requirements of
both Type I and Type II.
Type III Portland cement- Type III cement provides strength at an early period, usually
a week or less. It is chemically similar to Type I cement except the particles have been
ground finer. Type III cement is used in cooler weather and where high early strengths
are desired.
Type IV Portland cement- Type IV cement is used where the rate and amount of heat
generated from hydration must be minimized. Strength development is slower than
other types of cement and is intended for use in massive structures such as gravity
dams. Type IV cement is rarely available.
Type V Portland cement- Type V cement is used in concrete exposed to severe sulfate
action-principally where soils or ground waters have high sulfate content. Type V
cement will gain strengths more slowly than Type I cements. To resist sulfate attack,
use Type V cement and a low water to cementitious ratio.
Type IA, IIA, and IIIA Portland cements- These cements correspond with Types I,
II, and III and have small quantities of air-entraining materials. These cements produce
concrete with improved resistance to freeze-thaw stresses. Air-entraining cements are
available in limited areas.
White Portland Cement- This Portland cement differs from grey cement chiefly in
color. White cement is used primarily for architectural purposes in structural walls,
precast and glass reinforced concrete (GFRC) facing panels, terrazzo surfaces, stucco,
cement paint, tile grout and decorative concrete.
Blended Hydraulic Cements
Type IS - Type IS is a portland blast-furnace slag cement that may be used in general
construction. The slag content is between 25-70% by mass. There are different types
with different characteristics such as A, MS, or MH.
Type IP and Type P - Type IP and Type P cements may be used for general construction
where early strengths are not required. These cements are manufactured by inter-
grinding portland cement clinker with a suitable pozzolan, by blending portland cement
or portland blast-furnace slag cement and a pozzolan, or by a combination of inter-
grinding and blending. The pozzolan content of these cements is between 15-40% by
mass.
Type I (PM) - Pozzolan modified portland cement is used in general concrete

construction. This cement is manufactured by combining portland cement, or portland
blast-furnace slag cement and a fine pozzolan. The pozzolan content is less than 15%
by mass.
Type S - Slag cement is used with portland cement to make concrete with lime for
mortar, but is not used alone in structural concrete. The minimum slag content is 70%
by mass.
Magnesium Phosphate cement - Magnesium phosphate cement is a rapid-setting,

early strength gain cement. It is usually used for special applications, such as repair
of pavements and concrete structures, or for resistance to certain aggressive chemicals.
It does not contain portland cement.
* Source- Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures, 14th edition Portland Cement
Association.
ASTM C-494 Classifications
Type A Water Reducing
Type B Retarding
Type C Accelerating
Type D Water Reducing and Retarding
Type E Water Reducing and Accelerating
Type F High Range Water Reducing
Type G High Range Water Reducing
and Retarding
Cold Weather Concreting Tips
The use of accelerating admixtures has extended the construction season through the
winter in North America. Specific precautions and curing methods are recommended
by The Euclid Chemical Company to ensure years of durability from your concrete.
Euclid Chemical offers the industry several chloride and non-chloride accelerators and
a freeze-resistant accelerator that will keep your construction project on schedule even
in 20°F (-6.7°C) temperatures.
Concrete will gain very little strength in cooler weather. If concrete freezes before
reaching 500 psi (3.5 Mpa), the hardened properties will be compromised. Concrete can
lose up to 50% of its potential strength if precautions are not taken to ensure cement
hydration continues.
The use of Type III portland cement will reduce the time required for the concrete to
reach initial set 500 psi (3.5 Mpa). Using Type III cement with an accelerating admixture
is a recommended but not necessary practice in cooler temperatures. Depending on the
project requirements, choose a calcium chloride or non-chloride accelerator. Non-chloride
accelerators are recommended for concrete that will come in contact with steel.
1. Always attend a pre-job conference and discuss the plan of action for cold weather
concreting. Include a local Euclid Chemical sales professional for technical
expertise.
2. In cooler weather, it is not recommended to use fly ash as a cement replacement.
Higher cement contents will be required to help generate the heat necessary for
concrete to cure. If the concrete temperature drops to 40°F (4.4°C), hydration
virtually stops.
3. Use warm water and heat your aggregates to get the concrete temperature as high
as you can. This will help the concrete reach initial set and expedite the finishing
process.
4. Protect the concrete from plastic shrinkage cracking with enclosures and
polypropylene fibers. If there are extremely windy conditions, protect the surface
from drying too quick and block the wind. Accelerators tend to “occupy” the
water in concrete and reduce bleed. If the bleed water does not keep up with
evaporation, tensile stresses on the surface of concrete will create plastic shrinkage
cracking. Fibers will minimize the plastic shrinkage cracking by up to 88%.
5. Discuss curing requirements with your local Euclid Chemical sales professional.
The use of heating blankets is highly recommended. Any heater burning a fossil
fuel will produce carbon dioxide. When carbon dioxide combines with calcium
hydroxide on the surface of fresh concrete, it will interfere with cement hydration
causing carbonation.
6. It is not recommended to pour concrete if temperatures drop below 20°F (-6.7°C)
for a significant period of time.
Hot Weather Concreting Tips
Extreme temperatures, whether hot or cold, can cause serious problems with the strength
development and durability of concrete. Understanding how concrete reacts to extreme
weather conditions and how to combat nature will enable concrete producers to ensure
durable, high quality product for their customers.
The Euclid Chemical Company recommends keeping concrete temperatures below 90°F
(32°C) to prevent problems associated with hot weather. Keeping your aggregate piles
and water as cool as possible is the easiest way to lower concrete temperatures. The
following suggestions will help make your hot weather concreting successful:
1. Discuss hot weather concreting procedures during the preconstruction conference.
2. Contact your local Euclid Chemical sales professional for appropriate hot weather
admixtures such as retarders, ASTM Type B & D water reducers, and
superplasticizers such as Eucon 37, Eucon SP, Eucon RD1, Eucon RD2, or Eucon
537.
3. Expedite the discharge of concrete by providing sufficient slump through the use
of admixtures. Remember, adding water will compromise the strength and
durability by lowering the hardened properties of the concrete.
4. Use polypropylene fibers to control plastic shrinkage cracking. This will prevent
surface cracking during windy, hot conditions.
5. Never use water on the surface of the concrete to aid in finishing. The Euclid
Chemical Company offers Eucobar, evaporation retardant and finishing aid. Using
water to aid in finishing will increase the water to cement ratio on the surface of
concrete, which will lower compressive strengths and could cause dusting.
6. If needed, pour concrete during cooler weather, such as nighttime.
7. Use a curing agent manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company, which meets
ASTM C-309. Discuss curing options with a Euclid sales professional.
The One Source Manufacturer for
the Concrete and Masonry Industry
For over 100 years, The Euclid Chemical Company has manufactured top quality products
formulated to meet the demands of the ever changing concrete and masonry construction
industry. Marketed under the Euco, Eucon, Dural®, Speed Crete®, Baracade®, Hey’Di, Increte, International Offices
Vandex, Aqua Dam, Sentinel, and Tamms brand names, The Euclid Chemical Company
serves the global building market as an ISO 9001:2000 supplier of specialty products and
CANADA CENTRAL AMERICA
support services.
Euclid Canada Euclid Costa Rica
Ontario, Canada San Jose, Costa Rica
The Euclid Chemical Company philosophy of “demonstratively better” is the foundation
Telephone: 416-747-7107 Telephone: 506-257-4373
upon which Euclid Chemical serves and supports its customers. Cutting edge research and
Facsimile: 416-747-9970 Facsimile: 506-257-4387
development, technical support and service, and an education-driven specification effort along www.euclidchemical.com www.toxement.com.co
with ongoing customer training provides Euclid Chemical customers with the best products and
support in the industry. Quebec, Canada MEXICO
Telephone: 450-465-2233 Euclid México
As part of our commitment to helping promote sustainable design, Euclid Chemical has Facsimile: 450-465-2140 México City, México
many products which contribute to Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED™) www.euclidchemical.com Telephone: 52-55-58649970
certification. Yet this commitment does not stop at the manufacturing level. Our employees Facsimile: 52-55-58649977
constantly strive to improve the social and environmental impact of company activities while SOUTH AMERICA www.eucomex.com.mx
achieving an economic balance. Euclid Toxement
Bogota, Colombia WEST INDIES/CARIBBEAN
Marketed through a network of over 1,200 distributors, ready-mix producers and masonry suppliers, Telephone: 57-1-368-3188 Ft. Pierce, Florida
Facsimile: 57-1-368-0887 Telephone: 305-986-2054
Euclid Chemical products are recognized as the industry standard throughout the world.
www.toxement.com.co Facsimile: 772-468-7415
For information regarding domestic and international availability, call 1-800-321-7628 or visit
Euclid CAVE
www.euclidchemical.com.
Santiago, Chile
Telephone: 56-2-270-9900
Facsimile: 56-2-270-9980
www.productoscave.com

Phone: [216] 531-9222 • Toll-free: [800] 321-7628
Fax: [216] 531-9596
The ONE SOURCE for Concrete Repair SYSTEMS
Cathodic protection systems
perfecting your concrete... Epoxy based mortars
Fast setting mortars
inside and out Horizontal, vertical & underwater products
NSF approved repair mortars
Self-leveling toppings and underlayments
Urethane crack menders
Acrylic additives
All-weather polyester adhesive
Anti-corrosion coating Dry Shake Floor Hardeners
Light reflective flooring
Dowel bar adhesives
Metallic aggregate
Injection resins
Natural aggregate
Polyvinyl acetate primers
Non-oxidizing metallic aggregate
Segmental bridge adhesives
Structural concrete epoxy binders
Styrene butadiene copolymers High Performance Coatings
Chemical resistant amine & novolac epoxies

Elastomeric coatings
Epoxy and polyurethane traffic deck systems
Brown tinted sealers for exposed aggregate
High build epoxy floor systems
Dissipating & removable curing compounds
Industrial tank liners
Exempt solvent cure and seals
Penetrating epoxy deck healers
Sealers for decorative concrete
UV resistant urethane topcoats
Solvent & water based cure and seals
Water-based acrylics

Grouting Products
Dry pack cementitious Masonry Admixtures
Cold weather accelerators
Epoxy grouts
Integral water repellents
High flow cementitious
Metallic aggregate grouts

Magnesium silicofluoride dustproofers

Migratory corrosion inhibitors
Epoxy control joint fillers
Penetrating epoxy sealers
Non-sag & self-leveling polyurethanes
Silane and siloxane water repellents
Pick-proof sealants
Silicate, sodium & lithium densifiers
Polysulfide sealants
Polyurea joint fillers and repair products

Concrete cleaners
Division 3, 7, 9, 31, & 32

Evaporation retarders
Form release agents
Rebar coatings
Waterproofing & Dampproofing The Euclid Chemical Company

Cementitious coatings
Phone: [216] 531-9222 • Toll-free: [800] 321-7628
Emulsified asphalt dampproofing
Fax: [216] 531-9596
Hydrophilic urethane grout
Hydrophobic urethane grouts
Migratory crystalline systems
NSF approved coatings
Oxidizing metallic treatments
VANDEX waterproofing systems

2011 Euclid Chemical Construction Products Catalog PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

2011 Euclid Chemical Construction Products Catalog PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

The ONE SOURCE for Concrete Repair SYSTEMS

Cathodic protection systems

2011 Construction Products

Division 3, 7, 9, 31, & 32

Waterproofing & Dampproofing The Euclid Chemical Company

19218 Redwood Rd. • Cleveland, OH 44110

Bonding Agents & Adhesives Urethane Based

Latex Based Urethane Based

Dry Shake Floor Hardeners Stain Prevention Film

Polysulfide Sealants Epoxy Mortars

Waterproofing & Dampproofing Mortar Admixtures

Urethane – Chemical Grouts

Division 03 00 00 - Concrete 03 05 00 Common Work for Concrete

07 92 16 Euco QWIKjoint 200 245

09 90 00 Painting and Coating

Epoxy Products Usage Chart

DURAL 100 VI 3 DEF

DURALCRETE MV H HV I, II, IV, V 2 BC

DURALCRETE GEL HV V I, II, IV, V 3 BC

EUCO #452 LV I, II, IV, V 1 BC

EUCO #452 MV H HV I, II, IV, V 2 BC

EUCO #452 GEL HV V I, II, IV, V 3 BC

FLEXOCRETE GEL HV V III 3 BC

Bonding Agents and Adhesives

ANCHOR BOLT GROUTING GUIDE

Step 1 Technical Information

The Euclid Chemical Company

Bonding Agents and Adhesives

Surface Port Installation

SUGGESTED PROCEDURE FOR EPOXY CRACK

INJECTION USING CARTRIDGES

The Euclid Chemical Company

Bonding Agents and Adhesives

Property Class f class e class d

Properties shown were determined at laboratory conditions.

Meets the requirements of ASTM C881-90 Type VI, Grade 3

The Euclid Chemical Company

Bonding Agents and Adhesives

Property class d class e class F

Properties shown were determined at laboratory conditions.

Meets the requirements of Florida DOT Section 453.

The Euclid Chemical Company

Bonding Agents and Adhesives

Dural Fast Set Epoxy

Reinforcing Steel Threaded Rod

2 years in original, unopened container.

The Euclid Chemical Company

Bonding Agents and Adhesives

Appearance/Color Light Gray

The Euclid Chemical Company

Directions for Use

Bonding Agents and Adhesives

Duralcrete Epoxy System

The Euclid Chemical Company

Bonding Agents and Adhesives

Properties determined at laboratory conditions.

The Euclid Chemical Company

Directions for Use

Bonding Agents and Adhesives

Euco #452 Epoxy System

Properties shown were determined at laboratory conditions.

2 years in original, unopened package.

The Euclid Chemical Company